l^ 


s^ 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2008  with  funding  from 

Microsoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/elementsoffrenchOOmoorrich 


Palais  de  Versailles  —  Vue  de  Derriere 


THE 
ELEMENTS  OF  FRENCH 


BY 

OLIN  H.  MOORE,  Ph.D. 

UNIVERSITY    OF   ILLINOIS 

AND 

JOSEPHINE  T.  ALLIN 

ENGLEWOOD    HIGH    SCHOOL,    CHICAGO 


SCOTT,  FORESMAN  AND  COMPANY 

CHICAGO  NEW  YORK 


COPYRIGHTED  1919 

BY 

SCOTT,  FORESMAN  AND  COMPANY 

«rxx>CATION  OKFT. 


PREFACE 

It  has  been  the  purpose  of  the  authors  to  provide  an  ele- 
mentary French  grammar  flexible  enough  to  meet  the  needs 
of  the  inexperienced,  as  well  as  of  the  experienced  teacher. 
For  the  benefit  of  the  experienced  teacher  who  desires  to 
conduct  classes  in  French  almost  from  the  first  day,  a  large 
amount  of  oral  work  has  been  included.  A  French  transla- 
tion is  given  for  all  grammatical  nomenclature  in  the  lessons, 
so  that  teachers  so  desiring  may  conduct  grammar  reviews 
entirely  in  French.  There  are  also  numerous  dialogues,  and 
songs,  as  well  as  oral  questions  upon  the  matter  of  the  read- 
ing lessons.  For  the  benefit  of  the  inexperienced  teacher,  on 
the  other  hand,  simple  translation  material — mostly  con- 
nected— has  been  provided  in  every  lesson.  It  is  advised 
that  all  translation  material  be  worked  over  orally  before  the 
student  is  permitted  to  write. 

To  facilitate  further  the  work  of  the  teacher,  the  book  is 
divided  into  one  hundred  twenty-six  short  lessons,  including 
twenty-two  review  lessons.  An  attempt  has  been  made  to 
give  always  precise  indications  regarding  the  manner  in 
which  each  part  of  the  lesson  is  to  be  prepared  by  the  stu- 
dent. The  lessons  are  divided  so  that  each  one  will  probably 
require  about  the  same  amount  of  preparation.  Usually  only 
one  grammatical  principle  is  treated  in  a  lesson.  Several 
lessons  are  generally  devoted  to  each  grammatical  point, 
before  a  new  one  is  taken  up.  Unessential  rules,  confusing 
to  the  beginner,  are  relegated  to  a  fairly  complete  gram- 
matical appendix.  In  this  manner,  the  volume  may  serve  at 
the  same  time  as  a  very  simple  beginner^s  book,  and  as  a 
reference  grammar  for  advanced  students.  College  classes 
will  probably  be  able  to  cover  two  lessons  per  day;  high 
school  classes  one  lesson  per  day. 

The  following  English-French  translation  exercises  may  be 
omitted  by  teachers  who  desire  to  lay  particular  stress  upon 


889469 


iv  Preface 

the  oral  side  of  the  course:  those  in  Lessons  1,  3,  5,  7,  8,  10, 
11,  14,  17,  19,  20,  22,  23,  26,  27,  28,  29,  33,  38,  39,  44,  46,  48, 
49,  52,  55,  57,  59,  61,  64,  70,  73,  75,  85,  87,  92,  95,  113,  119, 
121,  as  well  as  all  of  Lessons  125,  126.  College  teachers  who 
desire  a  short  course  in  grammar  before  beginning  to  read, 
and  secondary  school  teachers  who  must  prepare  students  for 
college  in  the  briefest  possible  space  of  time,  may  find  it 
advantageous  to  omit  the  following' lessons  entirely:  28,  31, 
33,  37,  51,  53,  55,  58,  61,  63,  65,  69,  71,  76,  79,  84,  86,  91, 
96,  114,  116,  121,  122,  123,  in  addition  to  the  review  lessons, 
but  must  be  careful  to  include  Lessons  125  and  126,  which 
contain  essential  material  on  the  subjunctive. 

A  considerable  number  of  drill  exercises  will  be  found  in 
the  lessons,  such  as  blank-filling  exercises;  transpositions  to 
question  form,  to  negative  form,  and  from  the  perfect  (past 
indefinite)  to  the  past  absolute  (past  definite);  conjugation 
of  verbs  set  in  sentences,  etc.,  in  addition  to  the  translation 
exercises. 

Believing  that  the  problem  of  teaching  French  pronuncia- 
tion is  the  most  serious  one  now  confronting  French  teachers, 
an  attempt  has  been  made  to  provide  a  phonetic  introduction 
which  will  be  thoroughly  usable,  and  will  fit  into  the  lessons. 
Rules  for  the  proper  position  of  vocal  organs  have  been 
stated  as  simply  as  seemed  consonant  with  scientific  accuracy. 
After  each  rule,  as  well  as  in  the  early  lessons,  will  be  found 
pronunciation  exercises,  and  cautions  to  beginners  against 
mispronunciations  commonly  made  by  beginning  students. 

An  important  feature  of  the  book  is  the  gradual  but  thor- 
ough introduction  of  French  sounds  into  the  lessons.  For 
instance,  the  only  vowels  in  Lessons  1  and  2  are  front  vowels; 
in  Lessons  3  and  4,  back  vowels  are  found  for  the  first  time, 
with  a  few  words  containing  front  vowels  for  review.  The 
troublesome  French  u  and  other  rounded  front  vowels  appear 
in  Lessons  7  and  8;  while  the  difficult  nasal  sounds  are 
reserved  for  Lessons  10  and  11.  The  student  is  referred  in 
each  lesson  to  sections  in  the  phonetic  introduction,  so  that 


Preface  v 

each  lesson  in  grammar  may  become  at  the  same  time  a 
lesson  in  pronunciation.  A  phonetic  transcription  of  Lessons 
1-11  will  be  found  at  the  end  of  the  introduction. 

Irregularities  in  French  pronunciation  are  noted  as  they 
occur  in  the  lessons.     See  especially  Lessons  1,  7,  11,  14,  etc. 

Teachers  who  so  desire  may  ignore  the  whole  treatment  of 
phonetics  in  this  volume. 

The  early  lessons  deal  with  objects  in  the  classroom,  parts 
of  the  body,  articles  of  clothing,  the  time  of  day,  etc.  In 
order  to  obtain  variety,  frequent  resort  has  been  made  to 
such  devices  as  simplified  selections  from  French  authors; 
descriptions  of  scenes  in  a  Paris  theater,  restaurant,  omnibus, 
or  railway  station;  a  formal  visit;  letter  forms;  French 
etiquette;  a  composition  of  a  ten-year-old  French  orphan;  a 
tennis  match;  a  lesson  on  French  weights  and  measures; 
and  lessons  on  the  geography  of  France,  as  well  as  on  the 
map  of  Paris.  The  vocabulary  is  simple,  contains  a  large 
per  cent  of  words  having  forms  similar  to  English,  and  com- 
bines the  utilitarian  with  the  literary. 

Pictures  and  maps  are  always  intended  to  illustrate  directly 
the  lesson  in  hand.  This  is  as  much  true  of  the  maps  of 
France  and  of  Paris  as  of  the  reproductions  of  photographs 
of  scenes  in  France. 

In  preparing  the  exercises,  the  necessity  of  constant  review 
of  the  vocabulary  and  of  grammatical  constructions  has  been 
kept  in  view. 

A  serious  effort  has  been  made  to  arrange  the  lessons  in 
order  according  to  the  interest  of  the  student,  rather  than  to 
follow  strictly  the  traditional  grammatical  sequence.  For 
instance,  numerals  begin  to  appear  in  Lesson  10,  while  in 
Lesson  22  there  are  exercises  in  addition  and  multiplication. 
In  Lesson  37,  the  student  is  taught  to  tell  the  time  of  day, 
while  in  Lesson  39  he  learns  some  of  the  most  important 
dates  of  French  history.  Other  features  are  the  early  intro- 
duction of  personal  pronouns,  and  the  frequent  footnotes, 
intended  to  force  the  student  to  remember  important  points. 


vi  Preface 

The  nomenclature  is  that  of  the  Joint  Committee  on 
Grammatical  Nomenclature,  but  in  cases  where  confusion 
might  arise,  the  ordinary  terms  are  put  in  parentheses. 
Thus  (Conditional)  is  given  beside  Past  Future. 

Indebtedness  to  a  large  number  of  grammars  and  manuals 
is  freely  acknowledged,  particularly  to  the  Handbook  of 
French  Phonetics  (Henry  Holt  &  Co.)  of  Nitze  and  Wilkins, 
which  was  constantly  consulted  in  the  preparation  of  the 
phonetic  introduction.  This  little  volume  is  particularly 
recommended  to  teachers  desiring  to  give  a  more  thorough 
course  in  French  pronunciation  than  is  provided  here.  In 
general,  the  Dictionnaire  General  of  Hatzfeld-Darmesteter- 
Thomas  has  been  followed  in  the  matter  of  pronunciation. 

Acknowledgement  is  made  also  to  Professor  Christian 
Gauss,  of  Princeton  University,  editor  of  the  Lake  French 
Series,  who  has  given  to  the  authors  assistance  much  exceed- 
ing that  usually  rendered  by  the  general  editor  of  a  series; 
to  Miss  Elizabeth  McPike,  of  the  University  of  Chicago, 
who  read  the  proofs  and  offered  many  valuable  suggestions;  to 
Professors  Kenneth  McKenzie,  D.  H.  Carnahan,  T.  E.  Oliver, 
and  F.  Green,  of  the  University  of  Ilhnois,  who  have  given 
the  authors  much  practical  counsel;  to  Aspirant  Rene  Guiet, 
who  revised  the  French  exercises;  to  Underwood  &  Under- 
wood, who  allowed  the  use  of  all  the  full  page  insert  pictures 
in  this  book  and  also  of  the  small  pictures  of  the  Gare  de 
TEst  and  of  the  Pantheon;  and  to  Mr.  George  H»  Roscoe,  of 
Chicago,  for  furnishing  the  copy  for  all  the  other  pictures  in 
this  volume. 


CONTENTS 

INTRODUCTION  Page 

Table  of  Symbols xiii 

Syllabication xiv 

The  Alphabet xiv 

Orthographic  Signs xiv 

Stress f XV 

Vowel  Quantity xv 

Front  Vowels xvii 

Back  Vowels xix 

Rounded  Front  Vowels xxi 

Nasal  Vowels •     xxii 

Semi-Consonants xxiv 

Consonants xxv 

Division  of  Syllables xxviii 

Liaison xxix 

Elision xxx 

Punctuation xxx 

Capitals xxxi 

Phonetic  Transcription  (Lessons  1-11) xxxi 

LESSONS 

1.  General    Rule    for    Gender:    The    Definite   Article:    Front 

Vowels 1 

2.  Gender:    The  Definite  Article  (continued) 3 

3.  Le,  la,  V:    Position  of  Pronouns:    Back  Vowels 4 

4.  Questions 6 

5.  Questions  (continued) 8 

6.  Review 10 

7.  Plurals:    Repetition  of  Article:    Rounded  Front  Vowels. ...   11 

8.  Repetition  of  Article  (continued) 13 

9.  A  Few.  Colors 14 

10.  The  Indefinite  Article:   Cardinal  Numerals,  1-4:   Nasals. ...  15 

11.  The  Indefinite  Article  (continued) 17 

12.  Colors  (continued) 18 

13.  Review 20 

14.  Present  Indicative  of  avoir:    Cardinal  Numerals,  5-10 22 

15.  The  Body 25 

16.  The  Body  (continued) 27 

vii 


viii  Contents 

LESSONS  Page 

17.  Present  Indicative  of  avoir  {continued):    Contractions  with 

de :   the  Partitive  Construction 28 

18.  Review 31 

19.  Agreement  of  Adjective ; 32 

20.  The  Plural  of  Adjectives 34 

21.  The  Partitive  Construction  (continued) 36 

22.  Present  Indicative  of  etre:    Cardinal  Numerals  (continued): 

The  French  r 38 

23.  Possessive  Adjectives 41 

24.  Possessive  Adjectives  (continued) 44 

25.  Review 46 

26.  Present  Indicative  of  etre:    Use  of  il  and  elle:    French  Con- 

sonants (Continued) 48 

27.  Possession:    Contractions  of  a  with  Article:    Demonstrative 

Adjective:    French  Consonants  (Continued) 51 

28.  Clothing 54 

29.  Present  Indicative  of  donner:   Use  of  Pronoun  en 56 

30.  Review 59 

31.  Une  Promenade 61 

32.  Second  and  Third  Conjugations 63 

33.  La  Partie  de  Tennis 66 

34.  Ce  .  .  .  -ci  and  ce  .  .  .  la 67 

35.  Review 69 

36.  Interrogative  Adjective  quel?     Time  of  Day 70 

37.  La  Montre 72 

38.  Cardinal  Numerals  (continued) :    Addition  and  Multiplication  74 

39.  Dates 76 

40.  Review 78 

41.  The  Seasons:    A  Few  Impersonal  Verbs 79 

42.  The  Future 82 

43.  Days  of  the  Week 84 

44.  Une  Visite 86 

45.  Review 89 

46.  A  Few  Orthographical  Rules 90 

47.  The  Preposition  en 93 

48.  The  General  Noim 94 

49.  The  Indefinite  on 97 

50.  Review 98 

51.  Legon  de  Geographic 99 

52.  Position  of  Adjectives 101 

53.  Avant  le  Mariage 104 

54.  The  Perfect  Tense 106 


Contents  ix 

LESSONS  Page 

55.  The  Perfect  Tense  (continued) 108 

56.  Review 109 

57.  Idiomatic  Use  of  the  Present Ill 

58.  En  Prison 113 

59.  The  Partitive  Construction:    Words  of  Quantity 115 

60.  Words  of  Quantity  (continued) 117 

61.  Idioms  with  avoir 119 

62.  Review 121 

63.  Le  Bourgmestre 122 

64.  Adverbs:    Comparison  of  Adjectives  and  Adverbs 123 

65.  Adverbs  (continued) 126 

66.  The  Past  Descriptive  or  Imperfect 128 

67.  Review 130 

68.  Past  Descriptive  of  partir  and  sortir 131 

69.  Past  Descriptive  of  partir  and  sortir  (continued) 133 

70.  Verbs  Conjugated  with  etre 134 

71.  Verbs  Conjugated  with  etre  (continued) 136 

72.  Review 137 

73.  Reflexive  Verbs 138 

74.  Reflexive  Verbs  (continued) 140 

75.  Reflexive  Verbs  (continued) 142 

76!  Reflexive  Verbs  (continued) 144 

77.  Conjunctive  Pronouns 145 

78.  Review 147 

79.  Conjunctive  Pronouns  (continued) 148 

80.  Agreement  of  Past  Participles:    Pronominal  Adverb 151 

81.  Agreement  of  Past  Participles  (continued) 153 

82.  Position  of  Conjunctive  Pronouns 155 

83.  Review 156 

84.  Position  of  Conjunctive  Pronouns  (continued) 158 

85.  Conjunctive  Pronouns,  Recapitulation 160 

86.  Conjunctive  Pronouns,  Recapitulation  (continued) 163 

87.  The  Imperative 164 

88.  Review 167 

89.  The  Imperative  (continued) 168 

90.  Personal  Pronouns  —  Disjunctive  Forms 171 

91.  Disjunctive  Pronouns  (continued) 173 

92.  Disjunctive  Pronouns  (continued) 175 

93.  Review 177 

94.  Disjunctive  Pronouns  (continued) 178 

95.  The  Past  Future,  or  Conditional 181 

96.  The  Past  Future,  or  Conditional  (continued) 183 


X  Contents 

LESSONS  Page 

97.  Possessive  Pronouns 185 

98.  Possessive  Pronouns  (continued) 187 

99.  Review 189 

100.  Negatives 191 

101.  Negatives  {continued) 193 

102.  Demonstrative  Pronouns 196 

103.  Demonstrative  Pronouns  (continued) 199 

104.  Review 201 

105.  Relative  Pronouns 202 

106.  Relative  Pronouns  (continued) 206 

107.  Relative  Pronouns  (continued) 208 

108.  Interrogative  Pronouns 210 

109.  Interrogative  Pronouns  (continued) 212 

110.  The  Subjunctive  Mood 214 

111.  The  Subjunctive  Mood  (continued) 217 

112.  Review 219 

113.  The  Infinitive 221 

114.  The  Infinitive  (continued) 225 

115.  Ordinal  Numerals 226 

116.  French  Coins  and  Measures .' 228 

117.  Apposition 229 

118.  Review ; ...  234 

119.  The  Passive 236 

120.  The  Passive  (continued) 239 

121.  Past  Absolute  or  Past  Definite 240 

122.  Past  Absolute  (continued) 243 

123.  French  Correspondence 244 

124.  Review 246 

125.  The  Past  Subjunctive 247 

126.  The  Subjunctive  (continued) 250 

GRAMMATICAL  APPENDIX 

The  Noun 255 

The  Article 259 

The  Adjective 260 

The  Adverb 262 

The  Preposition 267 

The  Conjunction 270 

The  Pronoun 271 

The  Verb 280 

INDEX  OF  IRREGULAR  VERBS 316 


Contents  xi 

Page 
SELECTIONS  FOR  READING 319 

SELECTIONS  FOR  SINGING 329 

VOCABULARIES 

French-English 335 

English-French 367 

INDEX 385 

Tolerances  in  Syntax 392 


ILLUSTRATIONS  AND  MAPS 

Page 

Palais  de  Versailles  —  Vue  de  Derriere Frontispiece 

Diagram  of  Pronunciation xvi 

Notre  Dame  de  Paris  —  la  Fagade {facing)   xvi 

Cafe  Frangais  —  Sur  la  Terrasse {facing)     33 

Paysannes  Frangaises 43 

La  Rive  Gauche  a  Vol  d'Oiseau {facing)     48 

Jeanne  d'Arc  Revetant  son  Armurc {facing)     81 

Scene  des  Pyrenees {facing)     96 

Una  Famille  Paysanne 104 

L'Empereur  Napoleon  I {facing)  113 

La  Conciergerie {facing)  128 

La  Locomotive  du  Rapide 143 

Visite  de  FAmiral  Beatty  au  Tombeau  de  Napoleon  1 {facing)  145 

Le  Chateau  d'lf .    153 

La  Gare  de  FEst 159 

La  Bourse {facing)  160 

Une  Route  Frangaise 169 

Le  Louvre  k  Vol  d'Oiseau {facing)  177 

Avenue  du  Bois  (de  Boulogne) {facing)  192 

Le  Quartier  Latin 204 

Une  Scene  des  Halles {facing)  209 

Paris  k  Vol  d'Oiseau ; {facing)  224 

L'Arc  de  Triomphe  de  I'Etoile 231 

La  Placede  I'Opera 239 

La  Colonne  Vend6me {facing)  241 

Une  Visite  du  Facteur 246 

Victor  Hugo {facing)  256 

MAPS 

"^-^^lan  de  Paris (M 

fjp.  Carte  de  la  France {facing) 


Xll 


INTRODUCTION 


FRENCH  PRONUNCIATION 

1.  Spelling.  As  French  sounds  cannot  be  correctly  repre- 
sented by  English  spelling,  the  phonetic  symbols  of  the  Asso- 
ciation Phonetique  Internationale  are  adopted  in  this  book. 
Each  of  these  symbols  represents  a  single  sound;  each  sound 
is  represented  by  a  single  symbol. 

2.  Table  of  Symbols.  (The  phonetic  transcription  is  put 
in  parentheses.  For  English  equivalents  of  symbols,  cf.  §§ 
11-46): 


I  Sign  of  length 

a  papa,  brave  (papa,  braiv) 

a  pas,  passe  (pa,  pais) 

a  temps,  tempe  (td,  taip) 

b  6as,  a66e  (ba,  abe) 

d  dos,  rideau  (do,  rido) 

e  aine  (ene) 

8  iaitj  iatte  (fe,  feit) 

8  pm,  pmce  (pe,  pexs) 

a  \e  (19) 

f  fm,  efffxcer  (fe,  efase) 

g  fifarde,  brigand  (gard,  briga) 

h  je  le  /lais  (30  la  [h]e) 

i  VZ6,  vive  (vi,  viiv) 

j  hzer,  papier  (jeir,  papje) 

k  coq,  lac  (kok,  lak) 

1  Zong,  pafe  (15,  pail) 

m  madame,  ami  (madam,  ami) 

n  nul,  annexe  (nyl,  aneks) 

ji  igfnorant,    oignon    (ijiora, 
ojio) 


o  6chOj  cote  (eko,  koit) 

0  oral,  or  (oral,  oir) 

5  long,  longue  (15,  l5ig) 

ce  peuiple,  peur  (poepl,  poeir) 

oe  un,  humble  (oe,  oeibl) 

0  Si&reuXy      aSreuse      (afr0, 

afr0iz) 

p  pain,     appartement     (pe, 

apart9md) 

r  rare,  Paris  (rair,  pari) 

s  si,  ici  (si,  isi) 

J*  c/ieval,     mac/line     (/aval, 

ma/in) 

t  ^on,  ache^e  (t5,  a/et) 

u  douXy  douze  (du,  duiz) 

y  du,  dur  (dy,  dyir) 

q  lui  (Iqi) 

V  «;in,  seryir  (ve,  serviir) 

w  oui  (wi) 

z  zoney  vase  (zoin,  vaiz) 

3  Joffre,  rouge  (3ofr,  ruis) 


xiv  The  Elements  of  French 

3.  Syllabication.     In  general,  divide  a  French  word  so  that 
each  syllable  will  end  in  a  vowel. 

a-ni-malf  0-pe-ra  (compare  with  English  an-i-mal,  Op-er-a) 

Groups  of  two  consonants,  however,  are  divided: 

par-ler;  mar-di 
For  fuller  discussion  of  Syllabication,  see  §  47.  For  French  stress,  cf .  §  6. 

4.  Alphabet.     The  following  are  the  letters  of  the  alphabet, 
with  their  French  names: 


etter 

Name 

Pronunciation 

Letter 

Name 

Pronunciation 

a 

a 

(a) 

n 

enne 

(en) 

b 

U 

(be) 

O 

0 

(o) 

C 

c6 

(se) 

P 

p6 

(pe) 

d 

d6 

(de) 

q 

ku 

(ky) 

e 

6 

(e) 

r 

erre 

(eir) 

f 

effe 

(ef) 

s 

esse 

(68) 

g 

g^ 

(36) 

t 

t^ 

(te)     ■ 

h 

ache 

(af) 

u 

u 

(y) 

1 

i 

(i) 

V 

ve 

(ve) 

i 

ji 

(3i) 

w 

double  ve 

(dubb  ve) 

k 

ka 

(ka) 

X 

iks 

(iks) 

1 

elle 

(g1) 

y 

i  grec 

(i  grek) 

m 

emme 

(em) 

z 

zede 

(zed) 

(a)  When  e  has  no  accent  mark,  it  is  often  named  by  the  sound  which 
it  has  in  de,  le,  etc.  Ex.:  frere  =  effe  —  erre  —  e  accent  grave  —  erre  — 
e(9) 

(6)  According  to  some  authorities,  the  names  of  all  the  letters  are  mascu- 
line; according  to  others,  the  names  of  the  following  letters  are  feminine: 
/,  h,  I,  m,  n,  r,  s.     Ex.:    Un  r  or  une  r 

(c)  Accents.    There  are  three  accents  in  French: 

(1)  The  acute  accent  {accent  aigu)  (aksat  egy). 

ete  (ete);  beb6  (bebe);  cafe  (kafe) 

(2)  The  grave  accent  {accent  grave)  (aksa  gra: v) .  Ex. :  1^  (la) ;  oh  (u) 

(3)  The  circumflex  accent  {accent  circonflexe)  (aksd  sirkSfleks) .  Ex.: 

age  (a:3);  fete  (feit);  depot  (depo) 

5.     Other  Orthographic  Signs. 

(a)  The  cedilla  {cedille)  (sediij)  is  placed  under  c  to  give  it  the  sound  of 
(s)  before  a,  o,  u,  Ex.:    fran^ais  (frase);   lefon  (bs5);  regxi  (rasy) 


Introduction  xv 

(6)  The  dieresis  (trema)  (trema)  usually  indicates  that  the  vowel  over 
which  it  is  placed  is  separate  in  pronunciation  from  the  preceding  vowel, 
mais  (mais);  Noel  (noel) 

Observe.  In  certain  words  ending  in  -gue  the  dieresis  is  placed  on 
the  e  to  indicate  that  the  u  is  pronounced.    Ex.:  aigue  (egjO 

(c)  The  apostrophe  (apostrof)  is  used  generally  to  show  the  omission  of 
a  vowel. 

ramie  (1  ami),  for  la-\-amie;  V enfant  (1  afd),  for  le-\-enfant; 
Vhomme  (1  om),  for  le-\-homme 

(d)  The  hyphen  {trait  d' union)  (tre  d  ynjo)  is  used  generally  as  in 
EngUsh. 

6.  Stress.  French  words  have  weaker  stress  (or  accent) 
than  English.  The  beginner  will  do  well  to  pronounce  syl- 
lables with  practically  an  even  stress,  as  if  he  were  counting 
them.  A  slightly  increased  stress,  however,  should  be  placed 
on  the  last  syllable  of  a  word  of  more  than  one  syllable. 

Before  commas,  interrogation  points,  or  slight  pauses  there  is 
usually  a  rising  stress;  at  the  ends  of  sentences,  a  falUng  stress. 

7.  Vowel  Quantity. 

(a)  French  vowels  (including  nasals)  are  usually  short.  They  are 
always  so  at  the  end  of  a  word. 

donna  (dona);  parte  (parle);  tableau  (tablo);  enfant  (afcL) 

{h)  A  stressed  vowel  is  long  if  followed  by  the  sounds  (j),  (v),  (z),  (3), 
(r)  final. 

pareil  (pareij);  brave  (braiv);  vase  (va:z);  port  (poir).  But  parte 
(port),  because  the  (r)  is  not  final.  Also  braver  (brave);  invasion 
(evQzjo),  because  the  vowel  preceding  (v)  or  (z)  is  no  longer 
stressed. 

(c)  A  stressed  nasal  not  followed  by  a  consonant  sound  is  always  short; 
one  followed  by  a  consonant  sound  is  always  long.  An  unstressed  nasal 
is  always  short. 

grande  (graid),  but  grand  (gra),  grandeur  (gradoeir);  tante  (tait), 
but  tant  (ta),  tantot  (tdto);  tongue  (l5:g),  but  long  (15),  longueur 
(logoeir) 

(d)  A  circumflexed  vowel,  followed  by  a  consonant,  is  always  long, 
when  stressed. 

bete  (beit),  but  embeter  (abete);   fete  (feit),  but /eier  (fete) 


XVI 


The  Elements  of  French 


8.    Position  of  Tongue  and  Jaws.    Rounding  of  Lips.    The 

following  diagrams  may  help  the  student  to  place  the  vowel 
sounds  (nasals  not  included  here,  because  for  them  the  tongue 
position  is  uniformly  low). 


Front 
Vowels 


Tee^ 


DIAGRAM   A 


Lips  Normal 


DIAGRAM  B 


tour 


pas 


Diagram  A  represents  three  things: 

(a)  Rounding  or  retraction  of  the  lips.  Observe  that  for  front  vowels 
the  lips  are  retracted,  i.e.,  drawn  back.  This  retraction  is  greatest  for 
(i),  where  the  lips  are  drawn  back  as  in  smiling.  It  is  less  for  (e),  less  still 
for  (e),  while  when  we  come  to  (a)  the  lips  are  practically  normal. 

For  rounded  vowels  and  for  back  vowels,  observe  that  the  lips  are 
rounded  like  a  circle.  The  rounding  is  greatest  for  (y)  and  for  (u),  where 
the  lips  have  the  position  for  whisthng.  It  is  least  for  (a),  where  the  Hps 
are  only  slightly  rounded. 

(6)  The  elevation  of  the  tongue  is  indicated  by  the  distance  of  a  symbol 
on  the  diagram  from  the  horizontal  Hne  at  the  top.  Thus  for  (i),  (y),  and 
(u)  the  tongue  is  nearest  the  roof  of  the  mouth.  For  (e),  (0),  (o),  it  is 
next  nearest,  while  for  (a)  it  is  farthest  away. 

(c)  The  angle  of  the  jaws  is  in  inverse  proportion  to  the  elevation  of 
the  tongue,  being  greatest  for  (a),  and  least  for  (i),  (y),  and  (u). 

Diagram  B  presents  words  illustrating  the  various  sounds  of  diagram  A. 


Notre  Dame  de  Paris  —  La  Facade 

{See  Lesson  119) 


Introduction  xvii 

9.  General  Distinctions.  Before  proceeding  to  the  detailed 
discussion  of  the  formation  of  French  sounds,  a  few  words  of 
caution  are  necessary.  Enghsh  speaking  students  should  pay 
especial  attention  to  the  fact  that  while  English  has  stronger 
stress  (accent)  than  French,  on  the  other  hand,  to  speak 
French,  it  is  necessary  to  work  the  lips,  tongue,  and  jaws  more 
vigorously  than  in  English,  This  principle  should  be  applied 
particularly  to  the  pronunciation  of  French  vowels.  Avoid 
carefully  the  drawling  effect  of  Enghsh  vowels,  which  are,  as' 
a  rule,  really  diphthongs.  Notice,  for  instance,  the  glide- 
sound  in  English  words  like  pane,  pour,  etc.  In  French,  vowels 
should  be  pronounced  quickly  and  vigorously,  with  no  trace  of 
a  glide  sound. 

10.  Vowels.  French  vowels  may  be  divided  into  four 
classes,  according  to  the  position  of  the  tongue  and  lips,  as 
follows: 

Front  Vowels,  Back  Vowels,  Rounded  Front  Vowels,  Nasal  Vowels. 

FRONT  VOWELS 

For  practice  words,  see  also  Lessons  1  and  2,  which  have  no  other 
vowels  than  Front  Vowels  with  the  exception  of  (u)  and  the  neutral  sound 
(a). 

11.  The  tongue  is  always  brought  forward  in  the  mouth,  in 
the  formation  of  Front  Vowels. 

12.  (^)  Like  i  in  poHce. 

Smile,  with  the  mouth  nearly  closed.  Keep  the  tip  of  the  tongue  against 
the  lower  teeth.    Make  the  sound  more  tense  than  in  English. 

Suggested  Drill.  Practice  singing  (i),  then  stopping  suddenly;  then 
sing  (li),  stopping  suddenly;  then  practice  (liivr),  avoiding  all  glide-sound 
after  the  (i). 

Caution.  This  sound  is  never  like  i  in  the  English  word  miss.  That 
is  why  a  Frenchman  is  apt  to  say  *^mees''  for  ^'miss." 

This  sound  is  represented  in  spelling  by  i,  i;  sometimes  by  y 
ici  (isi),  il  (il);    fini  (fini);    vie  (vi);   tie  (il);    y  (i) 


xviii  The  Elements  of  French 

Let  the  student  compare  the  pronunciation  of  the  following  French  and 
English  words,  always  being  careful  to  give  to  the  French  i  the  sound  of  i 
in  police,  not  that  of  i  in  it. 


Avoid  Pronunciation 

French 

of  English 

ItaHe   (itaH) 

Italy 

il  (il) 

iU 

Mississipi  (misisipi) 

Mississippi 

If  (if) 

if 

mil  (mil) 

miU 

limite  (limit) 

hmit 

s'il  (sil) 

sill 

fini  (fini) 

finish 

13.  (e)  Like  a  in  patriotic,  but  with  lips  drawn  back 
farther,  as  in  smiling.  The  smile  is  less  broad  than  for  (i), 
however.     Pronounced  tensely. 

This  is  represented  in  spelling  by  4,  and  e  or  ai  in  certain  combinations, 
et  (e);  papier  (papje);  6t6  (ete);  de  (de);  gai  (ge);  ai  (e);  sait  (se) 

Avoid  drawling  and  slurring.  Practice  singing  (e),  then  stopping  short; 
then  practice  ^pee  (epe),  in  like  manner. 

Compare  the  following  French  and  English  words,  being  careful  to 

cut  the  French  (e)  off  sharply  and  quickly: 

Avoid  Pronunciation 
French  of  English 

d4  (de)  day 

n6  (ne)  nay 

sait  (se)  say 

merite  (merit)  merit 

gai   (ge)  gay 

t^l^graphe  (telegraf)  telegraph 

peri  (peri)  perish 

14.  (g)  Like  e  in  mety  but  with  mouth  wider  open.  Lips 
drawn  back,  but  less  so  than  for  (e). 

It  is  represented  in  spelling  by  ^,  ij  and  e,  ai,  at,  ei  in  certain  combi- 
nations; occasionally  by  a  in  ay. 

m^ve  (els:v) ;  chaise  (Jeiz) ;  mais  (me) ;  plait  (pie) ;  est  (e) ;  b^te 
(belt) ;  peine  (pen) ;  effet  (ef e) 
English-speaking  students  should  be  especially    cautioned  about  the 
pronunciation  of  French  er  (when  not  final),  which  is  like  er  in  English 
perish,  rather  than  like  er  in  English  herd. 


Introduction 

Compare  the  following  words : 
French 

Avoid  Pronunciation 
of  English 

perle  (perl) 

pearl 

ferle  (ferl) 

furl 

fer   (f8ir) 

fur 

merci  (mersi) 

mercy 

Serbe  (serb) 

Serb 

verbe  (verb) 

verb 

persevere  (persevere) 

persevere 

XIX 


15.     (a)  Like  a  in  path,  rather  than  like  a  in  cat.  Mouth 
wide  open;  lips  slightly  drawn  back.    Tongue  flat  in  mouth,  but 
the  tip  against  the  lower  teeth. 
It  is  represented  in  spelling  usually  by  a. 

table  (tabl);  a  (a);  avec  (avek);  salle  (sal);  madame  (madam);  ami 
(ami);   la  (la);   moi  (mwa);   voila  (vwala);   void   (vwasi);   quoi 
(kwa) 
This    vowel   must    not    he    slurred.      Say    Paris    (pari),    not    "PWee.'^ 
In  the  following  words,  be  careful  to  give  (a)  always  the  same  value: 


Avoid  Pronunciation 

French 

of  English 

animal  (animal) 

animal 

par  (avoid  sound  of  ah) 

par 

dollar  (avoid  sound  of  ah) 

dollar 

farce  (avoid  sound  of  ah) 

farce 

valse  (avoid  sound  of  aiv) 

waltz 

vertical  (vertikal) 

vertical 

caramel  (karamel) 

caramel 

artiste  (artist) 

artist 

BACK  VOWELS  (See  also  Lesson  3) 

16.  In  the  formation  of  Back  Vowels,  the  tongue  is  always 
drawn  back  in  the  mouth. 

17.  (a)  Like  a  in  father,  but  with  a  deeper  tone.  Mouth 
wider  open  than  for  (a),  tongue  as  flat  in  the  mouth  as  possible, 
and  not  touching  the  lower  teeth.    Lips  very  slightly  rounded. 

It  is  represented  in  spelling  usually  by  a,  or  a  before  certain  consonants. 

pas    (pa);   classe   (klais);   dme   (aim) 
Note.     It  is  important  to  avoid  the  sound  of  English  aw  in  awL 


XX  The  Elements  of  French 

18.     (o)  Something  like  o  in  softly,  but  with  Hps  more  rounded. 

It  is  represented  in  spelling  usually  by  o;  by  au  before  r. 

note  (not);    porte  (port);   donnez  (done);    ecole   (ekol);   fort  (fo:r); 
aurai  (ore);   Foch  (foj) 

Compare    the    following    French    and   English   words,   being    careful 
to  round  the  lips  more  for  the  French  vowel  than  for  the  English: 


Avoid  Pronunciation 

French 

of  English 

comme  (kom) 

come 

Somme  (som) 

some 

Rome  (rom) 

rum 

note  (not) 

nut 

19.  (o)  Like  o  in  open,  but  with  lips  more  rounded,  and 
pronounced  tensely. 

It  is  represented  in  spelling  by  d,  o,  au,  eau. 

nos  (no);  vos  (vo);  tome  (to:m);  cote  (kote);  aussi    (osi);  tableau 
(tablo);  beau  (bo) 

Avoid  drawling  sound  of  o  in  English  old.  Practice  singing  (o),  then 
stopping  short. 

20.  (u)  Like  oo  in  English  boot,  but  with  lips  more  rounded, 
as  in  whisthng. 

It  is  represented  in  spelling  usually  by  ou,  oil,  oil. 

sou  (su);  sous  (su);  tour  (tu:r);  tout  (tu);  oH  (u);  gout  (gu) 

This  sound  is  very  frequently  mispronounced,  even  by  advanced  students 
in  French,  especially  when  it  comes  before  r.  Avoid  always  the  sound  of 
ou  in  EngHsh  could. 

In  practicing  the  following  words,  bear  in  mind  two  things:  (a)  Do  not 

drawl  the  French  vowel,  but  cut  it  off  sharply;  (b)  Make  the  French  (u) 

tense. 

Avoid  Pronunciation 
French  of  English 

tour   (tuir)  tour 

pour  (pu:r)  poor 

jour  (3u:r)  azure 

nous  (nu)  new 

Students  are  particularly  cautioned  not  to  insert  a  glide-sound  before 
the  French  (u).    Do  not  let  tour  rhyme  with  fewer. 


Introduction  xxi 

ROUNDED  FRONT  VOWELS  (Lips  Rounded) 
(See  also  Lessons  7,  8) 

21.  In  the  formation  of  Rounded  Front  Vowels,  the  tongue 
is  drawn  forward  in  the  mouth  as  in  the  case  of  the  Front 
Vowels  already  studied. 

22.  (a)  Like  e  in  English  ^^the  man/'  when  the  e  is  not 
emphasized;  or  like  a  in  sofa,  animal.  The  position  of  the 
tongue  and  jaws  is  as  for  (e),  but  the  lips  are  well  rounded. 
It  is  always  short,  and  never  stressed.  In  fact,  it  is  constantly 
omitted  entirely  in  French  speech,  and  the  pupil  should  prac- 
tice eliminating  it  wherever  allowable. 

It  is  represented  in  spelling  usually  by  e  without  a  written  accent. 
le  (b) ;  me  (ms) ;  de  (da) 

Students  should  avoid  giving  to  (s)  the  sound  of  e  in  ''lesson."  Practice 
leve  (love);  venir  {yquut) ;  legon  (bso),  being  careful  to  give  to  e  the  value 
of  e  in  "the  man,"  not  that  of  e  in  ''ksson." 

Note.  According  to  the  Victor  triangle,  (a)  should  follow  (0),  §  24. 
It  is  here  placed  first  because  of  its  importance. 

23.  (y)  This  sound  is  the  same  as  (i),  only  instead  of  draw- 
ing back  the  lips  to  the  position  of  a  broad  smile,  the  lips  are 
puckered  out  as  in  whistling. 

It  is  represented  in  spelling  by  Uj  U. 

du  (dy);  su  (sy);  lu  (ly);  vu  (vy);  plume  (plym);  sur  (syir) 

Suggested  Drill.  Practice  singing  (i),  then  (y),  changing  nothing  but 
the  position  of  the  lips,  which  are  retracted  for  (i),  and  ready  for  whistling 
for  (y).  Then  practice  singing  (y),  followed  by  (i),  moving  nothing  but 
the  lips.    Be  careful  to  avoid  a  sound  like  that  of  English  u  in  "pwre." 

Compare  the  following  words: 


Avoid  Pronunciation 

French 

of  English 

sire 

stire 

sure 

dit  (di) 

du 

endure 

lit  (li) 

lu 

lure 

pie 

pu 

pure 

vie 

vu 

view 

xxii  The  Elements  of  French 

24.  (0)  To  produce  this  sound,  round  the  Hps  as  for  (o), 
and  try  to  say  (e). 

It  is  represented  in  spelling  by  eu,  mu,  in  certain  positions,  usually  when 
it  is  the  final  sound  in  a  word. 

'  peu  (p0);  deux  (d0);    noeud  (n0);  monsieur   (masj0) 

Suggested  Drill.     Practice  singing  (e),  then  (0),  moving  nothing  but 
the  lips.     Then  practice  (0),  followed  by  (e). 

Caution.     Avoid   the   sound   of   er   in    English  ''her"  by  cutting  off 
the  sound  sharply. 

25.  (oe)  Round  the  lips  as  for  (o) ,  and  try  to  say  (e) . 

It  is  represented  in  spelling  by  eu,  oeu,  in  certain  positions,  usually  when 
it  is  not  the  final  sound  in  a  word. 

soeur  (soeir) ;  professeur  (prof esoeir) ;  leur  (Iceir) ;  heureux  (oer0) 

Caution.     Avoid  the  sound  of  er  in  English  ''her." 

Suggested  Drill.     Distinguish   between   peu    (p0)    and    peur    (poeir); 
feu  (f0)  and  fleur  (flceir). 


NASAL  VOWELS.     (See  Lessons  10,  11) 

26.  To  pronounce  nasal  vowels,  let  the  breath  come  through 
the  mouth  and  the  nose  at  the  same  time.  The  tongue  remains 
low  in  the  mouth. 

Nasal  vowels  have  no  resemblance  to  the  "nasal  twang"  famiUar  in 
America.  What  is  commonly  called  "talking  through  the  nose"  is  in 
reality  the  exact  opposite,  for  the  nasal  passages  are  partly  or  completely 
closed. 

Nasality  (i.e.,  allowing  the  breath  to  pass  through  the  nose  and  the 
mouth  at  the  same  time)  is  indicated  by  the  sign  (~)  over  a  symbol. 

27.  How  to  Tell  When  a  Vowel  Is  Nasal.  A  vowel  is  nasal 
when  it  is  followed  by  a  single  m  or  n  in  the  same  syllable. 
However,  if  the  m  or  n  is  doubled,  or  if  followed  by  a  vowel,  the 
nasality  usually  disappears.  Examples  will  be  given  in  con- 
nection with  the  individual  nasal  vowels. 


Introduction  xxiii 

28.  (g)  Say  (e),  partly  through  the  nose.  The  sound 
resembles  the  sound  of  an  in  sang,  but  without  the  twang. 

This  sound  is  represented  in  spelling  by  in,  im,  ain,  aim,  ein,  eim,  yn,  ym. 

In  the  following  examples  note  that  the  nasality  is  lost  when  m  or  n 
is  followed  by  a  vowel,  or  is  doubled: 

fin  (fs);  fine  (fin);  sain  (se);  saine  (sen);  vain  (ve);  vame  (ven); 
timbre  (teibr);  timide  (timid);  wn(ve);  vinaigre  (vineigr);  syn- 
taxe  (setaks);    symbole  (sebol) 

In  ien,  en  has  the  sound  (e):  bien  (bje);  vient  (vje).  For  the  pro- 
nunciation of  (j),  see  Semi-consonants,  §  32  ff. 

Suggested  Drill.    Practice  (e),  then  (e),  not  moving  the  lips. 

Caution.     The  tongite  must  not  be  raised  in  pronouncing  nazals. 

29.  (a)    Say  (a),  partly  through  the  nose. 

This  sound  is  represented  in  spelling  by  an,  am,  en,  em. 

In  the  following  examples,  note  that  the  nasality  is  lost  when  m  or  n 
is  followed  by  a  vowel,  or  doubled: 

an  (a),  but  annee  (ane),  anneau  (ano);  ample  (aipl),  but  ami 
(ami);  dans  (da),  danser  (dase),  but  Danube  (danyb);  entente 
(atait),  but  ennemi  (enmi);  tempe  (taip);  dent  (da) 

Exceptions.     A  few  words,  such  as  ennui  (anqi);  emmener  (amne). 

Caution.  Avoid  any  sound  of  n  or  m  in  pronouncing  nasal  vowels, 
by  keeping  the  tongue  low.  The  tongue  mu^t  not  be  raised  in  pronouncing 
nasals. 

Suggested  Drill.  Practice  (a),  then  (a).  Then  try  pas  (pa),  pan  (pa); 
gant  (ga);  hate  (ait);  hante  (ait);  tdche  (taij*);  tas  (ta),  temps  (ta);  tendre 
(taidr),  tante  (tait);  bas  (ba),  banc  (ba). 

For  Home  Practice.  Prolong  (a);  close  the  nasal  passages,  and  the 
sound  will  change  to  (a). 

30.  (5)  Say  (o),  partly  through  the  nose,  allowing  the 
breath  to  pass  through  the  nose  and  the  mouth  at  the  same 
time.  It  resembles  the  vowel  sound  in  song  (without  trace 
of  n  or  ^). 

This  sound  is  represented  in  spelling  by  on,  om. 


xxiv  The  Elements  of  French 

In  the  following  examples  note  that  the  nasality  is  lost  whenever  n  or  m 
is  followed  by  a  vowel,  or  is  doubled: 

hon  (bo),  but  bonne  (bon);  compris  (kopri),  but  comme  (kom);  son 
(so),  but  Sonne  (son);  ton  (to),  but  tonne  (ton);  ombre  (o:br),  but 
omelette  (omlet);   onze  (o:z);  a-t-on?  (a  t  5) 

Caution.     Avoid  any  sound  of  n  or  m  in  pronouncing   nasal  vowels. 

The  tongue  must  not  be  raised  in  pronouncing  nasals. 

Suggested  Drill.  Say  (o),  then  (5).  Practice  cote  (kot),  then  conte 
(koit);  botte  (bote),  then  bonte  (bote);  dote  (dote);  then  dompte  (dote);  donne 
(don),  then  don  (do). 

31.  (oe)  Say  (oe),  partly  through  the  nose,  allowing  the 
breath  to  pass  through  the  nose  and  the  mouth  at  the  same  time. 

This  sound  is  represented  in  spelling  by  un,  um,  eun. 

In  the  following  examples,  note  that  the  nasality  is  lost  whenever 
n  or  m  is  followed  by  a  vowel: 

un  (ce),  but  uni  (yni);  humble  (oeibl),  but  humide  (ymid); 
parfum  (parfoe),  but  parfume  (parfyme);  Verdun  (verdoe) ;  jewn 
(3oe),  but  dejeuner  (desoene) 

Caution.  Avoid  any  sound  of  n  or  m  in  pronouncing  nasal  vowels,  by 
keeping  the  tongue  low. 

Suggested  Drill.  Say  (e);  then  say  (oe),  moving  the  lips  forward,  but 
moving  nothing  else;  then  say  (oe),  dropping  the  soft  palate  to  allow  the 
breath  to  pass  through  the  nose,  but  moving  nothing  else. 

SEMI-CONSONANTS  (See  Lesson  17) 

32.  Semi-consonants  are  like  consonants,  because  the  noise 
produced  by  the  stoppage  of  the  breath  can  be  heard;  they  are 
like  vowels,  because  the  sound  of  the  voice  may  be  heard  also. 

33.  (j)  Like  y  in  EngHsh  ^es.  This  sound  may  be  produced 
by  saying  (^),  then  passing  quickly  to  the  next  vowel. 

It  is  represented  in  spelling  by  y;  sometimes  by  i,  i7,  ille. 

cahier  (kaje) ;  papier  (psip]e) ;  payer  (ipG}e);fille  {fii}) ;  famille  (famiij); 
travail  (travaij);  bataille  (bataij);  bien  (bje);  vient  (vje);  tient 
(tje);  mien  (mje);  tien  (tje);  sien  (sje);  Italien  (italje) 


Introduction  xxv 

34.  (q)   Say  (y),  passing  rapidly  to  the  next  vowel. 

This  sound  is  represented  in  spelling  by  u, 

lui  (Iqi) ;  yuis  (pqi) ;  fuis  (f qi) ;  cuisine  (kqizin) ;  conduire  (k5dqi:r) ; 
iraduire  (tradqiir);  mine  (rqine);  essuyer  (esqije) 

Caution.     Avoid  the  sound  of  w  in  the  English  word  i^ood. 

Suggested  Drill.  Say  (i),  then  (y),  moving  the  lips;  then  practice  (y), 
followed  by  (i),  again  moving  only  the  lips.  Then  practice  lu  (ly), 
followed  by  lit  (li);  du  (dy),  followed  by  dit  (di).  Then  lui  (Iqi);  conduire 
(kodqiir). 

Ui  (qi),  is  a  sound  combination  which  American  students  usually  mis- 
pronounce throughout  their  French  course.  It  is  sufficiently  difficult  to 
call  for  constant  drill. 

35.  (w)    Say  (u),  passing  rapidly  to  the  next  vowel. 

The  lips  are  rounded  more  than  for  the  sound  of  w  in  the  English  word 
wood. 

It  is  represented  in  speUing  by  ou. 

oui  (wi);  ouest  (west);  fou^t  (fwe);  louer  (Iwe);  Louis  (Iwi) 

36.  Observe  also  oz,  o^,  which  are  ordinarily  pronounced 
(wa),  but  are  pronounced  (wa)  after  an  r, 

oiseau  (wazo);  botte  (bwait);  fois  (fwa);  Antoine  (atwan);  Marie 
Antoinette  (mari  atwanet).  But  froid  (frwa);  roi  (rwa);  trois 
(trwa),  because  oi  is  preceded  by  an  r. 

37.  Observe  also  oin  (we),  which  follows  the  regular  rules 
for  nasal  vowels. 

mains  (mwe),  but  moine  (mwan);  loin  (Iwe) 

CONSONANTS 

For  examples  of  r,  the  most  difficult  French  consonant  for  EngUsh- 
speaking  students,  see  Lesson  22. 

38.  The  French  r  is  unlike  the  American  r,  which  is  really 
a  semi-vowel.  To  acquire  it,  instruction  from  a  competent 
teacher  is  absolutely  necessary,  but  the  following  directions 
may  be  of  service. 

Remember  that  a  good  French  r  will  do  more  than  perhaps 
any  other  one  thing  to  make  one's  pronunciation  acceptable 
to  a  Frenchman. 


xxvi  The  Elements  of  French 

The  French  r  may  be  formed  in  two  ways : 

(1)  The  easier  way  for  American  students  is  to  vibrate  the  tip  of  the 
tongue  against  the  upper  teeth.  There  is  excellent  authority  for  this  r 
(so-called  r  linguale,  or  tongue  r),  but  unfortunately  for  the  beginner  it 
is  rapidly  being  driven  out  by, 

(2)  the  uvular  r,  produced  by  vibrating,  the  uvula  against  the  tongue, 
which  is  drawn  back  in  the  mouth.  (The  uvula  is  the  little  flap  hanging 
down  from  the  roof  of  the  mouth,  which  one  may  see  in  a  mirror  when  the 
mouth  is  opened  wide,  and  the  back  of  the  tongue  is  kept  down.  It  is 
vibrated  in  the  act  of  gargling.) 

The  symbol  for  the  lingual  r  is  (r) ;  for  the  uvular  r  it  is  (R). 

'pere  (peir) ;  mere  (meir) ;  frere  (freir) ;  soeur  (soeir) ;   courir    (kuriir) 

Suggested  Drill.  Practice  r,  then  n,  then  n  ri  ri  in  rapid  succession; 
likewise  for  re  re  re,  ra  ra  ra,  etc. 

Then  try  the  following  words :  Rue  de  Rome  (ry  do  rom) ;  Rue  de  Rivoli 
(ry  da  rivoU);  rira  (rira);  ronron  (r5r5). 

Practice  -ir  (i:r),  -ere  (e:r),  -ure  (yir),  Henri  (ari),  etc. 

Then  try  servir  (serviir) ;  partir  (partiir) ;  courir  (kuriir) ;  m^urir  (muriir)  ; 
vinrent  (ve:r);  tinrent  (teir);  grain  grand- gronde  (gre  gra  gr5:d);  gruyere 
(gryJGir). 

39.  Consonants  Nearly  Alike  in  French  and  in  English. 

The  following  consonant  sounds  are  nearly  alike  in  French  and 
in  English: 

(b),  (f),  (g),  (k),  (m),  (n),  (p),  (s),  (v),  (z). 

40.  (d)  and  (t)  are  pronounced  in  French  very  much  as  in 
English.  Observe,  however,  that  in  French  the  tip  of  the 
tongue  is  directly  against  the  top  of  the  upper  front  teeth;  in 
English,  on  the  other  hand,  the  tip  of  the  tongue  is  somewhat 
farther  back. 

41.  (d)  is  pronounced  somewhat  Uke  (d)  in  English  drill, 
or  in  deed,  rather  than  like  d  in  dawn.  Cut  the  sound  off 
sharply,  avoiding  the  slight  aspiration  which  generally  follows 
it  in  English.  Practice  dit  (di) ;  du  (dy) ;  de  (de) ;  deux  (d0) ; 
then  drogue  (drog);  droit  (drwa).  Always  keep  the  tip  of  the 
tongue  against  the  top  of  the  upper  teeth  in  pronouncing 
the  sound  (d).    Then  try  sud  (syd);  ode  (od);  barde  (bard). 


Introduction  xxvii 

42.  (t)  is  pronounced  with  the  tongue  position  as  for  (d). 
Cut  the  sound  off  sharply  as  in  the  case  of  (d).  It  is  Uke  t  in 
Enghsh  frill  or  in  tee,  rather  than  in  iawny.  Practice  tic  (tik)  ; 
tigre  (iiigr);  the  (te);  telegraphe  (telegraf);  then  tacher  (taje); 
trois  (trwa),  always  keeping  the  tip  of  the  tongue  against  the 
top  of  the  upper  teeth  in  pronouncing  (t).  Then  try  site  (sit) ; 
vite  (vit) ;  cette  (set) ;  vetement  (vstma) ;  soit  (swat) ;  boite  (bwait) ; 
teinte  tante  tonte  (teit  tait  toit) . 

43.  (1)  is  a  sound  very  similar  to  the  English  I  at  the  begin- 
ning of  a  word,  as  in  Httle,  etc.  The  French  (1)  is  very  apt  to 
be  mispronounced  by  Enghsh-speaking  students  for  the  same 
reason  that  (d)  and  (t)  are  often  mispronounced,  namely,  that 
the  tip  of  the  tongue  must  be  kept  firmly  against  the  base  of  the 
upper  front  teeth  for  French  (1),  and  not  allowed  to  draw  back, 
as  often  happens  in  English.  Avoid  the  flabby  effect  of  the 
English  I  in  a  word  like  milk,  French  (1),  Uke  (d)  and  (t),  is 
clear  and  forcible. 

Let  the  student  practice  the  following  words,  holding  the  tip  of  the 
tongue  firmly  against  the  base  of  the  upper  teeth:  lit  (li);  lu  (ly);  les  (le); 
lieu  (lj0);  lait  (le);  leur  (loeir);  la  (la);  loi  (Iwa);  long  (15).  Then  let  him 
try  il  (il);  consul  (kosyl);  elle  (el);  veulent  (voel). 

44.  (ji)  This  sound  is  somewhat  like  that  of  ni  in  English 
omon,  but  it  is  necessary  to  observe  the  following  directions: 

(a)  Tip  of  tongue  held  firmly  against  the  lower  teeth;  (6)  middle  of 
tongue  arched  against  the  hard  palate.  In  this  way  (ji)  is  a  single  sound, 
not  two  sounds  as  in  English  ni  in  onion,  (ji)  is  represented  in  spelling 
usually  by  gn. 

montagne  (m5taji);  digne  (diji);  vigne  (viji);  signe  (siji);  cognac 
(kojiak);  ignorant  (ijiora);  magnifique  (majiifik);  baigner  (bejie); 
craignant  (krejia);  joignant  (3wajia);  peignant  (pejia);  agneau 
(ajio) 

45.  (3)  has  approximately  the  sound  of  s  in  English  measure. 
Pucker  the  lips,  however.  It  is  quite  different  from  English 
(j)  in  Journal. 

garage   (gara:3);  camouflage   (kamuflais);  mirage   (mirais) 


xxviii  The  Elements  of  French 

Let  the  student  compare  the  following  words: 

Avoid  Pronunciation 
French  of  English 

journal  (3urnal)  journal 

age  (ai3)  age 

joie  (3wa)  joy 

juste  (3yst)  just 

jus  (3y)  juice 

geai  (3e)  jay 

46.  (/)  Like  ch  in  English  macMne.  Pucker  the  lips,  how- 
ever. 

vache  (vaj);  hoche  (boj);  chien  (Jje);  chez  (Je);  chacun  (Jakoe). 

47.  Division  of  Syllables  (see  §  3). 

(a)  A  single  consonant  (other  than  x)  between  vowel-letters  always 
belongs  to  the  following  vowel : 

li-mi-te  (limit) 
(6)  X  goes  with  the  preceding  vowel-letter. 
ex-a-men  (egzame) 

(c)  Groups  such  as  cA,  p/i,  thj  gn,  representing  single  sounds,  are  treated 
like  single  consonants. 

a-che-ter  (ajte);   di-gne  (diji);   te-le-pho-ne  (telefon). 

(d)  All  groups  of  two  consonants  of  which  the  second  letter  is  Z  or  r 
(except  II,  rr,  rl,  Ir,  that  is,  I  or  f  doubled  or  in  combination  one  with  the 
other),  belong  to  the  following  syllable. 

ta-hleau  (tablo);  a-pres  (apre) 

(e)  Other  groups  of  consonants  are  divided. 

ab-be  (abe);  par-ler  (parle);  mer-cre-di  (merkradi) 

(/)  E  without  written  accent  at  the  end  of  a  syllable  (generally  silent 
in  prose)  counts  as  a  sound  after  a  consonant-letter, 

car-te  (kart);  me-ner  (mane);  re-ve-nir  (ravniir) 

{g)  On  the  other  hand,  an  unaccented  e  following  a  vowel-letter  is 
never  separated  from  that  letter,  in  writing. 

a-che-tee  (ajte);  pa-trie  (patri) 

Qi)  Although  doubled  consonants  have  regularly  only  a  single  sound, 
they  may  be  divided  in  writing. 

con-$om-me  (kosome) ;  el-le  (el) ;  en-ne-mi  (enmi) 


Introduction 

xxi: 

Let  the  student  practice 

the  following  list  of  words; 

Avoid  Pronunciation 

Avoid  Pronunciation 

French                       of  English 

French 

of  English 

A-gnes                   Ag-nes 

I-ta-lie 

It-a-ly 

a-ni-mal                an-i-mal 

te-le-gra-phe 

tel-e-graph 

ci-te                      cit-y 

ge-o-gra-phie 

ge-og-ra-phy 

ge-ne-ral               gen-er-al 

ti-mi-de 

tim-id 

0-pe-ra                 Op-er-a 

po-si-ti-ve 

pos-i-tive 

pu-nir                    pun-ish 

re-la-ti-ve 

rel-a-tive 

ce-le-bre                cel-e-brate 

a-mi-tie 

am-i-ty 

i-mi-te                   im-i-tate 

48.  Liaison  (Ijezo)  (Linking).  The  joining  in  pronunciation 
of  a  final  consonant  sound  with  a  following  word  beginning 
with  a  vowel  or  h  mute  Is  called  liaison  (linking).  It  occurs 
where  words  are  closely  connected  grammatically,  as  for  in- 
stance : 

(a)  A  noun,  with  its  modifiers  (article  or  adjective). 

les    amis    (lez  ami);    un  homme    (oen  om);    les   champs   arides 
(le  J'az  arid) 

(6)  A  participle  or  adjective,  with  its  modifying  adverb. 

hien  ennuyeux  (bjen  anqij0);  fort  aimable  (fort  emabl) 

(c)  A  preposition  followed  by  its  object. 

dans  une  maison  (daz  yn  mezo) ;  devant  unjardin  (davat  oe  3arde) 

{d)  Often  after  avoir,  etre,  and  other  auxiliary  verbs. 

il  est  entendu  (il  et  atady) ;  ils  sont  occupes  (il  sot  okype) ;  il  doit 
accepter  (il  dwat  aksepte) 

(e)  In  certain  phrases. 

petit  a  petit  (patit  a  pati) 

Observe  the  following  points: 

(1)  In  liaison,  final/  is  sounded  like  v. 

final  d  is  sounded  like  t. 
final  g  is  sounded  like  k. 
final  s  or  a;  is  sounded  Hke  z. 
neuf  heures  (noev  oeir) ;  un  grand  homme  (6e  grat  om) ;  sang  impur 
(sak  epyir);  les  enfants  (lez  afa);  dix  hommes  (diz  om). 

(2)  Nasals  ending  in  n  tend  to  lose  their  nasality  in  liaison^ 

en  Espagne  (an  or  dn  8spaji) 

(3)  Nasals  ending  in  m  do  not  permit  liaison. 

le  champ  aride  (la  J*a  arid) ;  le  camp  ennemi  (la  ka  enmi) 


XXX  The  Elements  of  French 

(4)  Liaison  is  not  permissible  before  an  aspirated  h.  (By  aspirated  h  is 
meant  an  h,  which,  though  not  pronounced,  is  nevertheless  treated  as  a 
consonant.     It  occurs  in  a  few  words,  mostly  of  Germanic  origin. 

la  hate  (la  a:t);  la  hache  (la  aj) 

(5)  There  is  no  liaison  before  huit  (qit),  onze  (5:z),  or  oui  (wi). 

(6)  The  t  of  et  is  never  sounded. 

(7)  Final  r  is  hnked  frequently  in  formal  speech;  rarely  in  familiar 
discourse. 

49.  Elision.  The  following  words  ending  in  a  or  6  drop  the 
final  letter  before  a  vowel  or  h  mute,  and  are  written  with  an 
apostrophe : 

le,  la,  je,  me,  te,  se,  de,  ne,  que,  (and  some  of  its  compounds) . 
Vami  (1  ami) ;  fai  (3  e) ;  qu^un  (k  ce) 
Observe. 

(a)  The  e  of  ce  is  eUded  before  a  verb,  but  not  before  a  noun. 

c^est  (s  e),  but  cet  homme  (set  om) 
(6)  No  elision  takes  place  when  a  monosyllable  is  connected   by  a 
hyphen  with  a  preceding  verb.     Ex.    Faites-la  entrer  (fet  la  atre) 

(c)  /  is  elided  only  in  the  case  of  the  word  si  before  His).   Ex.  sHl  (s  il) 

50.  Punctuation.  The  punctuation  marks  used  in  French 
are  about  the  same  as  in  English.      In  French  they  are  called: 

point  (pwe) 
,  virgule  (virgyl) 

:  deux  points  (d0  pwe) 

;  point  et  virgule  (pwet  e  virgyl) 

?  point  d' interrogation  (pwe  d  eterogasjS) 

!  point  d'exclamation  (pwe  d  eksklamasjo) 

trait  d' union  (tre  d  ynj5) 
—        tiret  (tire) 

points  de  suspension  (pwe  d  syspasjo) 
"  "       guillemets  (gijme) 
(  )        parenthese  (parateiz) 
[  ]        crochets  (kroje) 

>  accolade  (akolad) 

*  asterisque  (asterisk) 

t  croix  (krwa) 

Observe.     The  tiret  is  used  to  denote  a  change  of  speaker. 
Est-ce  que  vous  allez  a  Paris?  —  Non,  je  vais  a  Londres. 


Introduction  '  xxxi 

51.  Capitals.  In  French,  capitals  are  used  much  as  in 
EngUsh.  They  are  not  employed,  however,  in  the  following 
cases: 

(a)  For  proper  adjectives: 

un  livre  frangais  a  French  book 

Also:      r anglais  English  (the  language) 

But:       un  Americain  an  A mencan  (proper  name) 

Q))  For  names  of  the  months,  and  the  days  of  the  week: 

septembre  September 

dimanche  Sunday 

(c)  The  pronoun  I  is  not  capitalized: 

je  I 


PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPTION 
(Lessons  1-11) 

1.  1.  lasaL  2.  lafaneitr.  3.  lajeiz.  4.  latabl.  5.  la  tabl  e  la  f aneitr. 
6.  la  Hivr.  7.  la  kanif .  8.  1  eleiv.  9.  la  letr.  10.  u  e  la  sal?  11.  uela 
faneitr?  12.  uelajeiz?  13.  vwasi  la  Jsiz.  14.  u  e  la  tabl?  15.  vwala 
la  tabl.  16.  u  e  la  liivr?  17.  vwasi  la  liivr.  18.  u  8  la  kre?  19.  vwala 
la  kre.  20.  u  e  la  kanif?  21.  vwasi  la  kanif.  22.  u  g  1  eleiv?  23.  vwala 
1  eleiv.  24.  u  e  la  letr?  25.  vwasi  la  letr.  26.  vwala  la  grameir  e  la 
letr.  27.  vwala  la  letr  e  vwasi  la  liivr.  28.  vwasi  la  bwait  e  la  kre. 
29.  vwala  la  Jeiz  e  vwasi  la  tabl. 

3.  1.  u  e  1  ekol?  2.  uela  sal?  3.  u  e  la  port?  4.  vwasi  la  port,  la 
vwasi.  5.  u  e  1  eleiv?  6.  la  vwala.  7.  u  e  la  liivr?  8.  la  vwasi.  9.  u  e 
latabl?  10.  la  vwasi,  osi.  11.  u  e  la  /eiz?  12.  la  vwala.  13.  vuz  ave 
la  kre.  14.  la  vwasi.  15.  vuz  ave  la  grameir.  16.  la  vwala.  17.  vuz 
ave  la  surnal.  18.  la  vwasi.  19.  vuz  ave  la  grameir  e  la  3urnal.  20. 
vwala  la  grameir  e  la  3urnal. 

4.  1.  vuz  ave  la  3urnal.  2.  vuz  ave  la  grameir  e  la  3urnal.  3.  vwala 
la  grameir  e  la  3urnal.  4.  done  mwa  la  grameir,  s  il  vu  pie.  5.  done 
mwa  osi  la  3urnal,  s  il  vu  pie.  6.  la  vwasi,  madamwazel.  7.  vwala  la  regl 
e  la  kre.  8.  done  mwa  la  regl,  s  il  vu  pie.  9.  done  mwa  osi  la  kre. 
10.  mersi.     11.  u  e  la  Jeiz,  s  il  vu  pie?     12.  vwala  la  Jeiz. 


xxxii  The  Elements  of  French 

7.  1.  done  mwa  la  bwait,  s  il  vu  pie.  2.  la  bwait  s  syir  la  tabl.  3. 
u  e  la  plym?  4.  la  plym  e  sy;r  la  tabl,  e  la  bwait  e  syir  la  tabl,  osi. 
5.  le  vwasi.  6.  mete  b  port  plym  sy:r  la  tabl.  7.  39  lo  me  sy:r  la  tabl. 
8.  k  8  s  ka  s  e?  9.  s  e  b  3urnal.  10.  lo  surnal  e  syir  la  tabl.  11.  e  s  ko 
vuz  ave  le  kanif ?  12.  30  lez  e.  le  vwasi.  13.  rogarde  vu  le  foneitr?  14.  50 
le  rogard.  15.  e  s  ko  vuz  uvre  le  faneitr?  16.  30  lez  u:vr.  17.  es  ko  vu 
ferme  la  foneitr?    18.  30  le  ferm. 

9.  {Conversation).  Za  mzitr  —  lave  vu  .  .  .  prane  la  plym.  I  eleiv. 
wi  masj0.  M. —  mete  la  plym  syir  la  tabl.  E. —  3a  la  me  syir  la  tabl. 
M. —  u  la  mete  vu?  E. —  3a  la  me  isi.  M. —  ragarde  la  Jeiz.  E. —  3a  la 
ragard.  M. —  u  e  la  Jeiz?  E. —  la  vwasi.  M. —  ferme  la  port  .  .  . 
ka  fet  vu?    E. —  3a  ferm  la  port.    M. —  mersi.  aseje  vu. 

11.  1.  bo3Uir,  masj0.  komat  ale  vu?  2.  3a  ve  bje,  mersi,  e  v\^?  3.  3a 
ve  bjen  osi.  4.  e  s  ka  vuz  etydje  la  laso?  5.  wi,  masj0,  3a  1  etydi.  6.  e  s 
ka  vu  koprane  bje  la  laso?  7.  wi,  masj0,  3a  la  kopra  bje  metna.  mersi. 
8.  vuz  avez  yn  Jeiz.  el  e  30111.  la  vwasi.  9.  la  tabl  e  30111  osi.  10. 
vwala  trwQ  liivr  syir  la  tabl.  le  vwala.  11.  vwala  oe  liivra  rui3.  vwala 
ce  liivra  bl0.  vwala  6e  liivra  30111  osi.  12.  vwala  6e  3urnal  syir  la  tabl.  13. 
vwasi  trwQ  krejo  e  d0  plym  syir  la  tabl.  14.  le  krejo  so  30111.  15.  la  port 
plym  e  rui3.  16.  e  s  ka  vu  truve  le  plym  e  le  krejo?  17.  wi,  masj0,  3a  le 
truiv. 

a  Javal 

a  pari,  a  pari, 

syir  ce  pati  Javal  gri. 

a  rwa,  a  rwa, 

syir  oe  pati  Javal  bla. 

a  kabre,  a  kabre, 
syir  oe  pati  Javal  be. 

a  verdoe,  a  verdoe, 
syir  oe  patit  Javal  broe. 

o  pa!  o  pa!  o  tro!  o  tro! 
o  galo!  o  galo! 


LESSON   1    (PREMlfiRE  LSgt)N)    ' 

FRONT  VOWELS*:  GENERAL  RULE  FOR  GEIJD^:  s  r^'  • 
THE   DEFINITE   ARTICLE 

Study  the  Introduction,  §§  10,  11,  12,  13,  14,  15,  20,  22. 
Read  over  §  8. 

VOCABULARY   (VOCABULAIRE) 

la  boite  (la  bwait),  the  box  la  grammaire  (la  grameir),  the  gram- 
le  canif  (la  kanif),  the  pen-kjiifet  mar  (book)  ;grrammar  (as  a  subject) 

la  chaise  (la  Jeiz),  the  chair  la  lettre  (la  letr),  the  letter 

la  craie  (la  krs),  the  chalk  le  livre  (la  liivr),  the  book 

Televe  (1  eleiv),  m.,  f.,  the  pupil  oti  (u),  where 

est  (e),  ist  la  salle  (la  sal),  the  room,  large  room 

et  (e),  and^  la  table  (la  tabl),  the  table 
la  fenetre  (la  faneitr),  the  window 

void  (vwasi),  here  is,  here  are . 

voil^  (vwala),  there  is,  there  are . 

1.  Void  le  livre,     Here  is  the  book, 

2.  Voici  la  table,    Here  is  the  table, 

3.  Voila  la  chaise  et  la  table.     There  are  the  chair  and  (the)  table, 

52.  General  Rule  for  Gender  (Regie  Generate  des  Genres). 
Nouns  in  French  are  either  masculine  or  feminine. 

53.  The  Definite  Article  "the"  (V  Article  Defini)  is  translated 
into  French  by 

le  —  before  a  masculine  noun  beginning  with  a  consonant. 
la  —  before  a  feminine  noun  beginning  with  a  consonant. 

*  The  French  words  in  Lessons  1  and  2  contain  no  other  vowels  than  Front 
Vowels,  (a)  and  (u)  excepted.  The  words  in  Lessons  3  and  4  will  illustrate 
Back  Vowels,  with  a  few  Front  Vowels  for  review.  In  the  early  lessons  the 
vocabularies  are  thus  chosen  with  a  view  to  presenting  pronunciation  and 
vocabulary  together. 

t  Note  that  final  consonants  in  French  are  silent  except  c,  r,  /,  I,  the  four 
consonants  in  the  English  word  careful. 

1 


2  The  Elements  of  French 

1'  ,:7—  bef6ri5  fa  masculine  or  a  feminine  noun  beginning 
with  ^  vowel  or  h  mute.. 

'"'*"**''  1.'  le'livre  (b  liivr),  ifw  hook 

2.  la  table  (la  tabl),  th£  table 

3.  Peldve  (1  eleiv),  m.,  f.,  the_  p^ipil 

4.  Phabit  (1  abi),  m.,  the  (dress)  coat 

I.  Pronounce  (Prononcez).  lei  (here)/i\  {he),  fini  {finished), 
lie  {island),  s'il  {if  he),  Italie  {Italy),  ete  {summer),  ai  {have), 
sait  {knows),  telegraphe  {telegraph),  fer  {iron),  perle  {pearl), 
verbe  {verb),  chaise  {chair),  eleve  {pupil),  est  (?'6"),  plait  {pleases), 
mais  (6t^/),  a  (a/),  madame  {madam),  ami  {friend),  animal  (am- 
maZ),  dollar  {dollar),  farce  {farce),  caramel  {caramel),  artiste 
(artist),  persevere  {persevered),  merite  {merit),  sou  {cent), 
sous  {under),  tout  (aZZ),  go  tit  {taste)  leve  {raised),  venir 
(to  come), 

II.  Drill  {Questionnaire).  1.  Define  a  Front  Vowel.  2. 
Give  the  sounds  of  the  Front  Vowels.  3.  For  which  Front 
Vowel  is  the  tongue  pressed  against  the  lower  teeth?  4.  For 
which  Front  Vowel  is  the  tongue  nearest  the  upper  teeth? 
5.  Is  the  mouth  wider  open  for  (e)  than  for  (e)? 

III.  *Read  the  French  {Lisez  le  frangais) .  1.  La  salle.  2. 
La  fenetre.  3.  La  chaise.  4.  La  table.  5.  La  table  et  la 
fenetre.  6.  Le  livre.  7.  Le  canif.  8.  L^eleve.  9.  La  lettre. 
10.  Od  est  la  salle?  11.  Ou  est  la  fenetre?  12.  0^  est  la. 
chaise?  13.  Voici  la  chaise.  14.  Oh  est  la  table?  15.  Voila 
la  table.  16.  Oil  est  le  livre?  17.  Voici  le  livre.  18.  Ou  est 
la  craie?  19.  Voil^  la  craie.  20.  Ou  est  le  canif?  21.  Voici  le 
canif.  22.  Ou  est  Televe?  23.  Voila  Televe.  24.  Od  est  la 
lettre?  25.  Voici  la  lettre.  26.  Voila  la  grammaire  et  la 
lettre.  27.  Voila  la  lettre  et  voici  le  livre.  28.  Voici  la  boite 
et  la  craie.     29.  Voila  la  chaise  et  voici  la  table. 

*  In  many  classes  it  will  be  found  advantageous  to  use  the  Reading  Exer- 
cises for  chorus  work  in  pronunciation  on  the  first  day,  the  reading  matter  to 
be  then  assigned  for  home  study. 


Lesson  2  3 

IV.  Translate  (Traduisez),  1.  The  window.  2.  The  table. 
3.  The  box.  4.  The  chalk.  5.  The  grammar.  6.  The  book. 
7.  The  pupil  •  and  the  book.  8.  The  chair  and  the  table. 
9.  The  chalk  and  the  box.  10.  Where  is  the  room?  11. 
Where  is  the  pupil?  12.  Where  is  the  pen-knife?  13. 
Where  is  the  letter? 


LESSON   2   (DEUXifiME  LEgON) 

GENERAL   RULE   FOR   GENDER:    THE   DEFINITE   ARTICLE  — 

Continued 

VOCABULARY  (VOCABULAIRE) 
c'est  (s  g),  it  is  la  regie  (la  regl),  the  ruler 

est-ce?  (e  s),  is  it?  le  tableau  (la  tablo),  the  picture 

le  maitre  (la  meitr),  the  teacher  le  tableau  noir  (la  tablo  nwair)  the 

ne    .  .  pas  (na  .  ,  .  pa),  not  blackboard 

ce  n*est  pas  (sa  n  e  pa),  ii  is  not 

Ce  n*est  pas  le  maitre,  It  is  not  the  teacher. 

I.  Reading  Exercise  (Exercice  de  Lecture).  Read  again  Sec- 
tion III  of  the  preceding  lesson. 

II.  Oral  Exercise  {Exercice  Oral).  Let  the  student  point  to 
the  objects  named,  using  Voici  for  the  objects  nearer,  and 
Voila  for  the  objects  farther  from  him:  1.  L'eleve.  2.  L'habit. 
3.  La  chaise.  4.  La  table.  5.  Le  livre.  6.  La  fenetre.  7: 
L'^leve  et  le  livre.  8.  Le  livre  et  le  canif.  9.  La  regie  et  la 
botte.  10.  La  chaise  et  la  table.  11.  Le  livre  et  la  lettre.  12. 
L^^leve  et  le  canif.  13.  La  craie  et  la  boite.  14.  La  gram- 
maire  et  la  lettre.  15.  Le  tableau  noir  et  le  tableau.  16.  Le 
maitre  et  la  regie. 

Let  the  student  answer  the  following  questions,  using  C'est, 
or  Ce  n*est  pas :  1.  Est-ce  la  craie?  2.  Est-ce  la  botte?  3.  Est- 
ce  la  regie?  4.  Est-ce  la  table?  5.  Est-ce  le  livre?  6.  Est-ce  la 
grammaire?  7.  Est-ce  Televe?  8.  Est-ce  le  maitre?  9.  Est-ce 
la  chaise?  10.  Est-ce  la  fenetre?  11.  Est-ce  le  tableau?  12. 
Est-ce  le  tableau  noir?  13.  Est-ce  la  salle?  14.  Est-ce  le  canif? 


4  The  Elements  of  French 

III.  Translate  (Traduisez),  1.  Here  is  the  room.  2.  Here 
is  the  chair.  3.  There  is  the  table.  4.  Here  is  the  book.  5. 
There  are  the  pupil  and  the  book.  6.  There  is  the  window. 
7.  There  are  the  window  and  the  table.  8.  Here  are  the  chair 
and  the  table.  9.  There  are  the  book  and  the  table.  10.  Here 
are  the  box  and  the  chalk.  11.  There  are  the  ruler  and  the 
pen-knife. 


LESSON   3    (TROISlfiME  LEgON) 
THE   PRONOUNS   LE,   LA,   V:  POSITION   OF   PRONOUNS 

Study  the  Introduction,  §§  16,  17,  18,  19. 

VOCABULARY  (VOCABULAIRE) 

aussi  (osi),  also  ouvrez  (uvre),  open 

vous  avez  (vuz  ave),  you  have  j*ouvre  (3  u:vr),  /  open 

donnez-moi  (done  mwa),  give  me  la  porte  (la  port),  the  door 

Pecole  (1  ekol),  f.,  the  school  regardez  (rogarde),  look  (at) 

fermez  (ferme),  close  je  regarde  (30  rogard),  /  look  (at) 

je  fenne  (30  ferm),  /  close  sous  (su),  under 
le  journal  (lo  3urnal),  the  newspaper 

The  words  in  Lessons  3  and   4  illustrate  Back  Vowels,  with  a  few 
Front  Vowels  for  review. 

54.  A  Few  Pronouns  (Quelques  Pronoms).    When  used  as  a 
pronoun 

le  (lo)  means  hirriy  it 
la  (la)  means  Tier,  it 
V  (1)       means  him,  her,  it  (before  a  vowel  or  h  mute) 

55.  Position  of  Pronouns  {Position  des  Pronoms),   A  pronoun, 
when  used  as  the  object  of  a  verb,  regularly  precedes  it. 

1.  Regardez  le  tableau,  Look  at  the  picture, 

2.  Je  le  regarde,  /  look  at  iL 

Je  ne  le  regarde  pas,  /  do  not  look  at  it. 

3.  Fermez  la  porte,  Close  the  door. 


Lesson  3  5 

4.  Je  la  f erme,  /  close  U. 

Je  ne  la  f  erme  pas,  /  do  not  close  iL 

5.  Ouvrez  la  porte,  Open  the  door. 

6.  Je  Pouvre,  /  open  iL 

Je  ne  Pouvre  pas,  /  do  not  open  iL 

7.  Avez-vous  le  journal?     Have  you  the  newspaper? 

8.  Vous  Pavez,   You  have  iL 

Vous  ne  Pavez  pas,  You  do  not  have  iL 

Note.    Voici  =  vols,  see  +  ici,  here 
Voila  =  vols,  see  +  \k^  there 
Le,  la,  P  will  therefore  precede  voici  and  voil^,  which  are  con- 
sidered declarative  verbs. 

1.  Oft  est  le  livre?     Where  is  the  hook? 

Le  voici.  Here  U  is  (literally,  See  it  here). 

2.  Oft  est  la  chaise?     Where  is  the  chair? 

La  voil^.  There  it^is  (literally,  See  it  there). 

I.  Read  the  French  (Lisez  le  frangais).  1.  OH  est  Tecole? 
2.  Ou  est  la  salle?  3.  Oijl  est  la  porte?  4.  Voici  la  porte.  La 
voici.  5.  OH  est  Televe?  6.  Le  voila.  7.  Oil  est  le  livre? 
8.  Le  voici.  9.  Oil  est  la  table?  10.  La  voici,  aussi.  IL  OH 
est  la  chaise?  12.  La  voila.  13.  Vous  avez  la  craie.  14.  La 
voici.  15.  Vous  avez  la  grammaire.  16.  La  voil^.  17.  Vous 
avez  le  journal.  18.  Le  voici.  19.  Vous  avez  la  grammaire 
et  le  journal.    20.  Voil^  la  grammaire  et  le  journal. 

II.  Pronounce  (Prononcez).  Pas  (step),  classe  (class),  roi 
(king),  comme  (as),  donnez  (give),  ^cole  (school),  porte  (door), 
aussi  (also),  tableau  (picture),  beau  (beautiful),  nos  (our),  sous 
(under),  tout  (all),  oH  (where),  tour  (turn),  nous  (we),  pour 
(for),  est  (is),  plait  (pleases),  fer  (iron),  ai  (have),  s41  (if  he), 
mais  (but),  artiste  (artist),  animal  (animal),  ici  (here). 

III.  Drill  (Questionnaire).  1.  Define  a  Back  Vowel.  2. 
How  does  a  Back  Vowel  differ  from  a  Front  Vowel?  3,  Give 
the  sounds  of  the  Back  Vowels.  4.  For  which  Back  Vowel  is 
the  mouth  widest  open?  5.  How  does  (o)  differ  from  o  in 
softly?  6.  How  does  (u)  differ  from  oo  in  boot?  7.  Is  the 
mouth  wider  open  for  (u)  or  for  (y)? 


6 


The  Elements  of  French 


IV.  Translate  (Traduisez).  1.  Is  it  the  teacher?  2.  It  is 
not  the  teacher.  3.  It  is  the  pupil.  4.  Close  the  door.  5.  I 
close  it.  6.  Open  the  window.  7.  I  open  it.  8.  Open  the 
book.  9.  I  open  it.  10.  Look  at  the  book.  11.  I  look  at  it. 
12.  Is  it  the  grammar?  13.  It  is  the  grammar.  14.  Read 
(lisez)  the  grammar.  15.  Look  at  the  blackboard.  16.  I  look 
at  it.  17.  Here  is  the  chalk.  18.  Here  it  is.  19.  Write 
{ecrivez). 


LESSON  4   (QUATRIEME  LE^ON) 

QUESTIONS 

VOCABULAIRE 
madame     (madam),     f.,     madam;.      qu*est-ce  que  c'est?   (kr.  skase), 

(abbreviation  Mme)  what  is  it? 

mademoiselle  (madamwazel),  miss;      s*il  vous  plait  (s  il  vu  pie),  (if  you) 

(abbreviation  Mile)  please 

merci  (msrsi),  thank  you  Donnez-moi  le  canif,  s*il  vous  plait, 

que?  (ka),  what?  Give  me   the   'pen-knife^  (if   you) 

please. 

56.  Questions  (Questions).  One  of  the  ways  to  ask  a  ques- 
tion in  French  is  to  invert  the  order  of  the  subject  pronoun 
and  the  verb: 

1.  Vous  avez  le  livre.  You  have  the  hook. 

2.  Avez-vous  le  livre?   Have  you  the  hook? 


Questions 

1.  Regardez-vous  le  journal? 

Do  you  look  at  the  newspaper? 
or,  Are  you  looking  at  the 
newspaper? 

2.  Ouvrez-vous  le  livre? 

Do  you  open  {are  you  opening) 
'   the  hook? 

3.  Fermez-vous  le  livre?     Do  you 

close    {are   you    closing)    the 
book? 


Reponses 

1.  Je  le  regarde,     /  look  at   {am 

looking  at)  it.     Or 
Je  ne  le  regarde  pas,     /  do  not 
look  at  {am  not  looking  at)  it. 

2.  Je  I'ouvre,     /  open  {am  opening) 

it.     Or 
Je  ne  Pouvre  pas,     /  do  not  open 
{am  not  opening)  it. 

3.  Je  le  f  erme,     /  close  {am  closing) 

it.     Or 
Je  ne  le  ferme  pas,     /  do  not 
close  {am  not  closing)  it. 


Lesson  4  7 

Another  way  of  asking  questions  in  French  is  to  use  Est-ce 
que  (e  s  ka),  literally,  Is  it  that?.  After  Est-ce  que  the  order 
of  the  subject  and  the  verb  is  not  inverted. 

1.  Le  maitre  a  une  chaise,  The  teacher  has  a  chair. 

2.  Est-ce  que  le  maitre  a  une  chaise?     Has  the  teacher  a  chair? 

3.  Vous  avez  le  livre,   You  have  the  book. 

4.  Est-ce  que  vous  avez  le  livre?     Have  you  the  book? 

Questions  Reponses 

1.  Est-ce    que    vous    regardez    la      1.  Je  la  regarde,     /  look  at   (am 

porte?     Do  you   look  at    (are  looking  at)  it. 

you  looking  at)  the  door? 

2.  Est-ce  que  vous  f ermez  la  porte?      2.  Je  la  ferme,  or  Je  ne  la  ferme 

pas. 

3.  Est-ce  que  vous  ouvrez  la  porte?      3.  Je  Touvre,  or  Je  ne  I'ouvre  pas. 

4.  Est-ce     que     vous     ouvrez     la      4.  Je  Pouvre,  or  Je  ne  Pouvre  pas. 

fenetre? 

5.  Est-ce     que     vous     fermez     la      5*  Je  la  ferme,  or  Je  ne  la  ferme 

fenetre?  pas. 

6.  Est-ce    que    vous    regardez    le      6.  Je  le  regarde,  or  Je  ne  le  re- 

tableau?  garde  pas. 

7.  Est-ce    que    vous    regardez    le      7.  Je  le  regarde,  or  Je  ne  le  re- 

journal?  garde  pas. 

Note  the  following  expression: 

Qu'est-ce  que  c'est?  (k  e  s  ka  s  e)  What  is  it? 

,  1.  Qu'est-ce  que  c'est?     What  is  it? 
2.  Cest  la  plume,  It  is  the  pen. 

Questions 
Le  premier  eleve  demande :    Qu'est-ce  que  c*est?     (The  first  pupil  asks ^ 
^'^What  is  it?'')    et  il  montre  les  differents  objets  (and  he  points  to  the 
different  objects) :   la  fenetre,  la  porte,  la  salle,  etc. 

Reponses 
Le  deuxieme  61^ve  repond:    (The  second  pupil  answers) : 

1.  C*est  Tecole.  5.  C*est  la  chaise.  9.  C*est  le  canif. 

2.  C'est  la  porte.  6.  C'est  la  table.  10.  C'est  la  regie. 

3.  C'est  la  salle.  7.  C'est  la  boite.  11.  C'est  le  tableau. 

4.  C*est  la  fenetre.  S.  C'est  la  craie.  12.  C*est  le  tableau  noir. 


8  The  Elements  of  French 

I.  Reading  Exercise  (Exercice  de  Lecture).  1.  Vous  avez  le 
journal.  2.  Vous  avez  la  grammaire  et  le  journal.  3.  Voil^  la 
grammaire  et  le  journal.  4.  Donnez-moi  la  grammaire,  s41 
vous  plait.     5.  Donnez-moi  aussi  le  journal,  s^il  vous  plait. 

6.  Le  voici,  mademoiselle.  7.  Voil^  la  regie  et  la  craie.  8.  Don- 
nez-moi la  regie,  s41  vous  plait.  9.  Donnez-moi  aussi  la  craie. 
10.  Merci.  11.  Oil  est  la  chaise,  s'il  vous  plait?  12.  Yoilk 
la  chaise. 

II.  Translate  (Traduisez),  1.  What  is  it?  It  is  the  news- 
paper. 2.  Are  you  looking  at  the  newspaper?  3.  I  am 
looking  at  it.  4.  Is  John  looking  at  the  newspaper,  also?  5. 
He  is  looking  at  it,  also.     6.  Give  me  the  newspaper,  please. 

7.  Where  is  the  pen-knife,  please?  8.  Are  you  opening  the 
pen-knife?  9.  Yes,  I  am  opening  it.  10.  Give  me  the  pen- 
knife, please.     11.  There  it  is. 


LESSON   5   (CINQUlfiME  LEQON) 
QUESTIONS  —  Continued 

I.  Oral  Exercise  (Exercice  Oral).  Let  the  student  reply  to 
the  following,  using  le  or  la  voici:  1.  Oil  est  la  grammaire?  2. 
0^  est  le  livre?  3.  Oijl  est  le  journal?  4.  OH  est  Thieve  (m.)? 
5.  Oil  est  Televe  (f.)?  6.  Od  est  le  mattre?  7.  OH  est  la  table? 
8.  Oil  est  la  craie?  9.  OH  est  le  canif?  10.  Ou  est  la  porte? 
11.  Ou  est  le  tableau?  12.  Ou  est  Tecole?  13.  Donnez-moi  le 
journal,  s^il  vous  plait.  14.  Donnez-moi  le  livre,  s'il  vous  plait. 
15.  Ou  est  la  chaise,  s^il  vous  plait?  16.  Donnez-moi  la 
lettre,  s'il  vous  plait.    17.  Donnez-moi  la  boite,  s'il  vous  plait. 

Let  the  student  reply  Je  le  (la)  regarde,  or  Je  ne  le  (la) 
regarde  pas,  in  answer  to  the  following  questions: 

1.  Est-ce  que  vous  regardez  la  porte?  2.  Est-ce  que  vous 
regardez  la  salle?  3.  Est-ce  que  vous  regardez  la  fenetre?  4. 
Est-ce  que  vous  regardez  la  chaise?  5.  Est-ce  que  vous  re- 
gardez la  table?   6.  Est-ce  que  vous  regardez  le  livre?   7.  Est-ce 


Lesson  5  9 

que  vous  regardez  la  grammaire?  8.  Est-ce  que  vous  regardez 
le  canif?  9.  Est-ce  que  vous  regardez  la  craie?  10.  Est-ce 
que  vous  regardez  la  boite?  11.  Regardez-vous  le  journal? 
12.  Regardez-vous  Televe?  13.  Regardez-vous  le  maitre? 
14.  Regardez-vous  la  porte?  15.  Regardez-vous  le  tableau? 
16.  Regardez-vous  le  tableau  noir?  17.  Regardez-vous  la 
regie? 

Use  the  following  verb  forms  in  similar  sentences:  donnez, 
fermez,  ouvrez. 

In  answer  to  the  question  Que  f ermez-vous?  let  the  student 
reply,  Je  ferme  le  livre,  la  porte,  la  fenetre. 

In  answer  to  the  question  Que  regardez-vous?  let  the  student 
reply,  Je  regarde  la  porte,  la  salle,  la  table,  le  tableau,  le 
journal,  le  livre,  etc. 

II.  Translate  (Traduisez),  1.  Have  you  the  book  and  the 
newspaper?  (Two  ways).  2.  Give  me  also  the  pen-knife,  if 
you  please.  3.  Where  is  the  ruler?  Here  it  is.  4.  Where 
is  the  chalk?  5.  There  it  is,  Miss  B.,  and  there  is  the  box, 
also.  6.  Where  is  the  chair,  if  you  please?  7.  Here  it  is, 
and  there  is  the  table,  also.  8.  What  is  it?  9.  It  is  the 
window.  10.  Are  you  looking  at  it?  11.  I  am  looking  at  it. 
12.  Are  you  opening  it?  13.  I  am  closing  it.  Miss  B.  14. 
Close  the  door,  also,  if  you  please.     15.  Thank  you. 

Suggestion.  Teachers  desiring  more  material  than  is  provided  in  the 
early  lessons  may  find  the  following  scheme  helpful: 

Est-ce  que  vous  regardez  .  .  .  ?  Regardez-vous  la  porte? 

Regardez-vous  .  .  .  ?  La  regardez-vous? 

Que  regardez-vous  .  .  .  ?  Qui  regarde  la  porte? 

Que  fermez-vous?  Est-ce  que  Jean  regarde  la  porte? 

Qu*est-ce  que  vous  regardez?  Et  Marie?     Et  Philippe?     Est-ce 

Qu'est-ce  que  vous  fermez?  qu'il  regarde  la  porte? 

Regardez  la  porte.  Est-ce  qu'elle  regarde  la  porte?  etc. 

1.  Use  these  questions  with  all  nouns  in  preceding  lessons. 

2.  Substitute  pronoun  objects  as  often  as  a  noun  is  used. 

3.  Use  negative  as  well  as  affirmative. 

4.  Use  in  similar  questions  every  verb  found  in  the  preceding  lessons, 
with  as  many  nouns  as  it  can  apply  to. 


10  The  Elements  of  French 

LESSON   6   (SIXIEME  LEgON) 

REVIEW  (REVISION)     JT^  l/ £<--£.     . 

I.  Pronounce  (Prononcez).  He  (island) y  Italie  (Italy) ^  ete 
(summer)  y  perle  (pearl)  ^  dollar  (dollar)  y  artiste  (artist)  y  comme 
(as)y  porte  (door)y  tout  (all)y  eleve  (pupil)  y  mais  (6u0,  salt 
(knows) y  ai  (have),  chaise  (chair),  ami  (friend),  plait  (pleases), 
ecole  (school),  pas  (step),  roi  (king),  sous  (under),  tour  (turn), 
est  (zs),  tableau  (picture), 

II.  Supply  the  proper  forms  of  the  definite  article  (Varticle 

defini)  with  the  following  words:     table;  tableau; 

journal; maitre; porte; chaise; canif ; 

lettre; livre; boite; salle. 

III.  Oral  Exercise  (Exercice  Oral), 

(a)  In  reply  to  the  question  Qu'est-ce  que  c'est?  let  the 
student  reply  C'est  la  table,  la  salle,  la  porte,  la  fenetre,  la 
chaise,  le  journal,  le  livre,  la  grammaire,  Pecole,  la  lettre,  le 
tableau,  etc. 

(6)  In  reply  to  the  question  Que  regardez-vous?  let  the 
student  reply  Je  regarde  la  table,  la  salle,  la  porte,  la  fenetre, 
etc.,  as  in  (a). 

(c)  Let  the  student  reply  Le  (la)  void,  in  reply  to  the  ques- 
tions Ou  est  la  table?    Ou  est  la  salle?     Ofi  est  la  porte?   etc. 

(d)  Let  him  reply  Le  (la)  voila,  in  reply  to  the  same 
questions. 

(e)  1.  Est-ce  que  vous  fermez  la  porte?  2.  Est-ce  que  vous 
ouvrez  la  porte?  3.  Est-ce  que  vous  ouvrez  la  fenetre?  4.  Est- 
ce  que  vous  fermez  la  fenetre?  5.  Que  fermez-vous?  6.  Est-ce 
que  vous  regardez  le  tableau? 

IV.  Translate  (Traduisez).  1.  Here  are  the  pen-knife  and 
the  grammar,  also.  2.  Give  me  the  box,  if  you  please.  Thank 
you.  3.  Where  is  the  pupil?  Here  she  is.  4.  Have  you  the 
letter?  (Two  ways).  There  it  is.  5.  Give  me  the  book  and 
the  chalk,  also,  if  you  please.    6.  What  is  it?    It  is  the  table. 


Lesson  7  11 

7.  What  are  you  looking  at?  I  am  looking  at  the  picture.  8. 
What  are  you  closing?  I  am  closing  the  door.  9.  Are  you 
opening  the  window?  I  am  not  opening  it.  10.  Are  you 
looking  at  the  newspaper?  (Two  ways).  11.  Are  you  looking 
at  the  door?    I  am  not  looking  at  it. 


LESSON  7   (SEPTlfiME  LEgON) 
THE  PLURAL:  REPETITION  OF  THE  ARTICLE 
Study  the  Introduction,  §§  21,  22,  23. 

VOCABULAIRE 
j*ai  (3  e),  /  have  la  plvime  (la  plym),  the  pen 

ici  (isi),  here  le  porte-plume  (la  port  plym),  the 

mettez  (mete),  put  pen-holder 

je  mets  (3a  me),  /  put  sur  (syir),  on^  upon 

57.  The  Plural  (le  Pluriel). 

(a)  Nouns  regularly  form  their  plurals  by  adding  s  to  the 
singular. 

(6)    The  plural  of  the  definite  article  is  les  (le)  or  (le). 

(c)  The  plural  of  the  pronoun  forms  le,  la,  V  is  likewise  les 
(le)  or  (le). 

Singular  (Singulier)  Plural  (Pluriel) 

le  livre  (la  11: vr),  the  book  les  livres*  (le  liivr),  the  hooks 

la  plume  (la  plym),  the  pen  les  plumes*  (le  plym),  the  pens 

Velewe  (1  elezv),  m.,  or  f.,  the  pupil  les  eleves*  (lez  elsiv),  the  pupils 

Exercise   (Exercice),    Supply  articles,  singular  and  plural, 

for  the  following  nouns: maitre; porte; ^cole; 

lettre; fenetre; chaise; canif ; botte; 

eleve. 

Let  the  student  point  to  the  objects  in  the  room,  using 
Le  (la)  voici,  or  voila,  and  Les  void,  or  voila. 

*  Usually  the  plural  of  a  noun  is  pronounced  like  the  singular.  The  plural 
of  the  article,  however,  is  not  pronounced  like  the  singular. 


12  The  Elements  of  French 

58.  Repetition  of  the  Article  {Repetition  de  V Article), 
The  article  is  regularly  repeated  before  each  noun  in  French. 

1.  Le  livre  et  la  plume,  The  hook  and  (the)  pen, 

2.  Les  chaises  et  les  tables,  The  chairs  and  (the)  tables. 

Exercise  (Exercice),     Supply  proper  forms  of  the  article  with 

the  following  words:  eleves  et  — — -  plumes; tableau 

et fenetres; chaise  et  ■ ^  table; eleve  et 

livre;  — —  grammaire  et  journal;  plume  et  

porte-plume. 

I.  Read  the  French  {Lisez  le  frangais),  1.  Donnez-moi  la 
boite,  s'il  vous  plait.  2.  La  boite  est  sur  la  table.  3.  Ou  est 
la  plume?  4.  La  plume  est  sur  la  table,  et  la  boite  est  sur  la 
table,  aussi.  5.  Les  voici.  6.  Mettez  le  porte-plume  sur  la 
table.  7.  Je  le  mets  sur  la  table.  8.  Qu^est-ce  que  c'est? 
9.  C^est  le  journal.  10.  Le  journal  est  sur  la  table.  11.  Est-ce 
que  vous  avez  les  canifs?  12.  Je  les  ai.  Les  voici.  13.  Re- 
gardez-vous  les  fenetres?  14.  Je  les  regarde.  15.  Est-ce  que 
vous  ouvrez  les  fenetres?  16.  Je  les  ouvre.  17.  Est-ce  que 
vous  fermez  les  fenetres?     18.  Je  les  ferme. 

II.  Pronounce  (Prononcez),  I  (^),  u  (u)y  si  (^/),  su  (known), 
sire  (sire),  stir  {sure)j  dit  (says),  du  (o/  the)j  dire  (say),  dur 
(hard) J  pire  (worse),  pur  (pure),  vous  (you),  vu  (seen),  tout 
(all),  tM  (you),  sous  (under),  sur  (on),  classe  (class),  roi 
(king),  pour  (for),  comme  (as),  perle  (pearl),  ai  (have),  il  (he), 
mais  (hut), 

III.  Drill  (Questionnaire),  1.  Define  a  Rounded  Front 
Vowel,  and  explain  how  it  differs  from  other  Front  Vowels. 
2.  How  is  (y)  produced?  3.  Is  the  tongue  more  raised  for  (y) 
than  for  (i)?    4.  Is  the  mouth  wider  open  for  (y)  than  for  (i)? 

IV.  Traduisez.  1.  The  doors  and  windows.  2.  The  table 
and  chair.  3.  The  pupils  and  teachers.  4.  The  pen-holder 
and  pen.  5.  Put  the  boxes  on  the  table,  if  you  please.  6. 
I  put  them  on  the  table.     7.  Put  the  ruler  on  the  table. 


Lesson  8  13 

8.  I  put  it,  also,  on  the  table.  9.  Have  you  the  pens? 
10.  I  have  them;  and  here  is  the  pen-holder,  also.  11.  Are 
you  looking  at  the  window?     12.  I  am  not  looking  at  it. 


LESSON  8   (HUITlfiME  LEgON) 
REPETITION   OF  THE  ARTICLE  —  Continued 

Study  the  Introduction,  §§  24,  25. 

VOCABULAIRE 

monsieur  (m8sj0),  m.,*  ikfts^er,  sir t  professeur    (profesoeir),    m.,    pro' 

oui  (wi),  yes  fessor,  teacher 

papier  (papje),  m.,  paper  il  est  (il  e),  he  (it)  is 

Philippe  (filip),  Philip  elle  est  (el  e),  she  {it)  is 

I.  Reading  Exercise  {Exercice  de  Lecture).  Read  again 
Section  I  of  the  preceding  lesson. 

II.  Let  the  student  reply  to  th^  following  questions,  using 
Oui,  monsieur  (madame),  je  Pai  .  .  .  ,  or  Oui,  monsieur 
(madame),  je  les  ai  .  .  .  : 

1.  Avez-vous  la  boite?  2.  Est-ce  que  vous  avez  les  livres? 
3.  Est-ce  que  vous  avez  les  canifs?  4.  Est-ce  que  vous  avez 
les  plumes?  5.  Est-ce  que  vous  avez  la  lettre?  6.  Est-ce  que 
vous  avez  la  grammaire?  7.  Avez-vous  la  table  et  la  chaise? 
8.  Est-ce  que  vous  avez  le  journal  et  le  livre?  9.  Avez-vous 
la  boite  et  la  craie? 

Let  the  student  reply  to  the  following:  1.  Ou  est  Philippe? 
2.  Ou  est  le  professeur?  3.  OH  est  le  journal?  4.  Ou  est  le 
tableau? 

III.  In  reply  to  the  question  Qu'est-ce  que  c'est?  (k  e  s 
ka  s  e),  let  the  student  answer  1.  C'est  la  plume;  2.  c'est 
la  table;  3.  c'est  le  canif;  4.  c'est  la  chaise;  5.  c'est  la 
fenetre;  6.  c'est  le  papier;  7.  c'est  le  tableau;  8.  c'est  la 
lettre;  9.  c'est  la  boite ;  10.  c'est  la  porte ;  11.  c'est  I'ecole ; 
12.  c'est  la  salle,  etc. 

*The  abbreviation  m.  =  masculine;  f.  =  feminine. 

t  Practice  Ouirn*  sieu*  (wim  sj0),  then  Oui,  monsieur  (wi,  m8SJ0). 


14  The  Elements  of  French 

IV.  Pronounce  (Prononcez)^  De  (thimhle),  deux  itwo)^  sais 
{know) J  ceux  (those) j  pe  (p),  peut  (can),  monsieur  (sir),  soeur 
(sister),  leur  (their),  heureux  (happy),  vie  (^i/e),  ici  (here),  fini 
(finished),  livre  (hook),  papier  (paper),  6te  (been),  bete  (beast), 
plait  (pleases),  mais  (bt^O>  ^leve  (pupil),  quoi  (what),  moi  (me), 
valse  (waltz),  note  (note),  Foch  (Foch),  porte  (door),  tout  (aW), 
tu  (you),  ou  (where),  u  (t*),  si  (2/),  su  (known). 

V.  Traduisez.  1.  Have  you  the  paper?  (Two  ways).  2. 
Have  you  the  pen?  (Two  ways).  3.  Here  they  are.  4. 
Have  you  the  books?  (Two  ways).  5.  Yes,  sir,  I  have  them. 
6.  What  is  it?  It  is  the  ruler,  sir.  7.  What  is  it?  It  is  the 
picture,  sir.  8.  Have  you  the  chairs  and  tables,  madam? 
(Two  ways).  9.  Have  you  the  paper  and  pen,  Miss  Martin? 
(Two  ways).     10.  Have  you  the  newspaper,  sir?  (Two  ways). 


LESSON  9   (NEUVIEME  LEgON) 

A  FEW  COLORS 

VOCABULAIRE 

asseyez-vous  (assje  vu),  he  seated  que  faites-vous?  (ka  fet  vu),  what 

bleu  (bl0),  blue  are  you  doing  {do  you  do)? 

couleur  (kuloeir),  f.,  color  levez-vous  (love  vu),  rise 

gris  (gri),  gray  prenez  (prane),  take 

jaune  (30:11),  yellow  de    quelle    couleur    est?     (da    kel 

rouge  (ru:3),  red  kuloeir  e),  {of  what  color  is)  what 

is  the  color  of? 

I.    Oral  Exercise  (Exercice  Oral),    Practice  the  following : 

1.  De  quelle  couleur  est  le  porte-plume?    II  est  rouge. 

2.  De  quelle  couleur  est  le  papier?  II  est  gris. 

3.  De  quelle  couleur  est  le  journal?    II  est  gris,  aussi. 

4.  De  quelle  couleur  est  la  grammaire?    EUe  est  rouge. 

5.  De  quelle  couleur  est  le  livre?    II  est  bleu. 

6.  De  quelle  couleur  est  la  table?    EUe  est  jaune. 

7.  De  quelle  couleur  est  le  canif?     II  est  gris. 

8.  De  quelle  couleur  est  la  chaise?     EUe  est  jaune. 


Lesson  10         '  15 

II.  Conversation  (Conversation) . 

Le  Maitre*. — Levez-vous  .  .  .  Prenez  la  plume. 

L'fileve. —  Oui,  monsieur. 

M. — ^Mettez  la  plume  sur  la  table. 

E. —  Je  la  mets  sur  la  table. 

M. —  Oil  la  mettez-vous? 

E. —  Je  la  mets  ici. 

M. — Regardez  la  chaise. 

E. —  Je  la  regarde. 

M. —  O^  est  la  chaise? 

E. — La  voici. 

M. — Fermez  la  porte  .  .  .  Que  faites-vous? 

E. —  Je  f erme  la  porte. 

M. —  Merci.     Asseyez-vous. 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  Have  you  the  pen?  2.  Yes,  sir,  I  have 
it.  3.  Here  it  is,  sir.  4.  What  is  the  color  of  the  pen-holder? 
5.  It  is  yellow.  6.  Give  me  the  pen,  if  you  please.  7.  There 
it  is,  sir,  and  there  is  the  book,  also.  8.  What  is  the  color 
of  the  book?  9.  It  is  blue.  10.  Have  you  the  chalk?  Yes, 
sir,  I  have  it.  11.  Give  me  the  chalk  and  the  box,  please. 
12.  Where  is  the  chair,  please?  13.  There  it  is,  sir.  14.  Are 
you  looking  at  the  books  and  the  newspaper?  15.  I  am 
looking  at  them. 


LESSON   10   (DIXifiME  LEgON) 

THE  INDEFINITE  ARTICLE:     A  FEW  CARDINAL  NUMERALS: 

NASALS 

Study  the  Introduction,  §§  24,  25,  26,  27.  28,  29,  30,  31. 

59.   The  Indefinite  Article  (V Article  Indefini),  "a,"  "an,''  is 
translated  into  French  by 

iin  (oe)  before  a  masculine  noun 
une  t  (yn)  before  a  feminine  noun 

*  Dashes  (— )  are  used  to  denote  change  of  speaker. 

t  Observe  that  the  nasal  sound  is  regularly  lost  when  a  vowel  follows  n 
or  m. 


16  TKe  Elements  of  French 

1.  un  crayon  (6e  krejo),  a  'pencil 

2,  une  plume  (yn  plym),  a^'pen 

Exercise  (Exercice).    Let  the  student  put  the  proper  forms  of 
the  definite  and  of  the  indefinite  article  before  the  following 

words:     1.  crayon;     2.  ecole;     3. papier;    4. 

journal;    5.  plume;    6.  porte;  7.  tableau; 

8.  table;     9.  monsieur;      10.  professeur;     11. 

maitre;     12.  eleve  (m);     13.  ^leve  (f.). 


Let  the  student  use  the  following  nouns  in  the  plural,  plac- 
ing a  plural  adjective  of  color  after  each  noun,  viz:  crayons 
bleu5,  tables  jaunes,  etc.;  chaise;  boite;  plume;  canif. 

Let  the  student  put  the  proper  form  of  the  indefinite  article 
before  the  first  eight  nouns  in  the  above  list,  and  an  appro- 
priate adjective  of  color  after  the  nouns,  viz:  un  crayon  bleu, 
etc. 

60.  A  Few  Cardinal  Numerals  {Quelques  Nombres  Cardi- 
naux) . 

un  (oe),  une  (yn)  one  trois  (trwa),  three 

deux  (d0),  two  quatre  (katr) /oi/r 

I.  Pronoimce  (Prononcez).  Mais  (but),  main  (hand),  c^est 
(it  is),  sain  (clean),  fait  (does),  fin  (end),  fini  (finished),  bien 
(well),  vient  (comes),  ah  (ah),  an  (year),  ann^e  (year),  pas 
(step),  pan  (flap),  dans  (in),  entente  (agreement),  ample 
(ample),  ami  (friend),  bon  (good),  bonne  (good),  bont6  (good- 
ness), don  (gift),  donne  (gives),  onze  (eleven),  est  (is),  un 
(one),  uni  (united),  humble  (humble),  heureux  (happy),  soeur 
(sister),  ceux  (those),  dit  (says),  du  (of  the),  de  (thimble),  deux 
(two),  si  (if),  su  (known),  pe  (p),  pent  (can),  roi  (king), 
donnez  (give),  ecole  (school). 

II.  Drill  (Questionnaire),  1.  What  is  a  Nasal  Vowel,  and 
how  does  it  differ  from  other  vowels?  2.  What  is  the  position 
of  the  tongue  for  Nasal  Vowels?  3.  Nasalize  (e),  (a),  (o),  (ce). 
4.  What  consonant  letters  usually  indicate  that  a  vowel  is 
nasalized?  5.  What  happens  if  these  consonant  letters  are 
followed  by  a  vowel? 


Lesson  11  17 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  A  chair  and  (a)  table.  2.  A  pencil 
and  (a)  pen.  3.  A  teacher  and  (a)  pupil.  4.  A  door  and 
four  windows.  5.  A  blackboard  and  a  picture.  6.  Give  me 
a  red  pencil,  please.  7.  Give  me  a  yellow  pen-holder,  please. 
8.  There  is  a  gray  book.     9.  Here  is  a  blue  book. 


LESSON   11    (ONZlfiME  LEgON) 

THE  INDEFINITE  ARTICLE  —  Continued 
VOCABULAIRE 

allez-vous?   (ale    vu),   do  you    go?  je  comprends  (39  kopra),  /  under- 

{are  you  going?)  stand 

bien  (bje),  well  etudiez  (etydje),  study 

bonjour    (bSsuir),    good    morning,  j*etudie  (3etydi), /siwdi/ 

good  day  la  lecon  (la  las5),  the  lesson 

comment  (koma),  how  maintenant  (metna),  now 

comment    allez-vous?    (komat  ale  non  (no),  no 

vu),  how  do  you  do?  sont  (so),  are 

vous  comprenez  (vu  koprone),  you  vous  trouvez  (vu  truve),  you  find 

understand;  comprehend  je  trouve  (3a  truiv),  I  find 

comprenez-vous?  (koprone  vu),  do  je  vais  (38ve), /gfo;/am  (of  health) 

you  understand? 

I.  "Resid  the  French  {Lisezlefrangais),  1.  Bonjour,  monsieur. 
Comment  allez-vous?  2.  Je  vais  bien,  merci;  et  vous?  3.  Je 
vais  bien,  aussi.  4.  Est-ce  que  vous  etudiez  la  legon?  5.  Oui, 
monsieur,  je  Fetudie.  6.  Est-ce  que  vous  comprenez  bien  la 
legon?  7.  Oui,  monsieur,  je  la  comprends  bien  maintenant. 
Merci.  8.  Vous  avez  une  chaise.  Elle  est  jaune.  La  voici. 
9.  La  table  est  jaune,  aussi.  10.  Voila  trois  livres  sur  la  table. 
Les  voila.  11.  Voila  un  livre  rouge.  Voila  un  livre  bleu. 
Voila  un  livre  jaune,  aussi.  12.  Voila  un  journal  sur  la 
table.  13.  Voici  trois  crayons  et  deux  plumes  sur  la  table. 
14.  Les  crayons  sont  jaunes.*  15.  Le  porte-plume  est  rouge. 
16.  Est-ce  que  vous  trouvez  les  plumes  et  les  crayons?  17. 
Oui,  monsieur,  je  les  trouve. 

♦Observe  that  when  the  noun  is  plural,  the  adjective  is  plural  also. 


18  The  Elements  of  French 

II.  Traduisez.  1.  Good  morning,  madam.  Are  you  {allcz- 
vous)  well?  2.  Thank  you,  I  am  well,  sir;  and  how  are  you? 
3.  I  am  well,  also,  madam.  4.  What  are  you  doing,  madam? 
5.  I  am  looking  at  a  picture.  6.  And  what  are  you  doing, 
sir?  7.  I  am  writing  (fecris)  a  letter.  8.  Have  you  a  pen? 
9.  No,  madam,  I  find  a  pencil,  but  I  do  not  find  the  pens. 

III.  Prontmciation  Exercise  (to  be  memorized  by  the  stu- 
dent). 

A  CHEVAL 
A  Paris,  k  Paris, 
Sur  un  petit  cheval  gris. 

A  Rouen,  k  Rouen, 

Sur  un  petit  cheval  blanc* 

A  Cambrai,  k  Cambrai, 
Sur  un  petit  cheval  bai. 

A  Verdun,  k  Verdun, 
Sur  un  petit  cheval  brun. 

Au  pas!  Au  pas!  Au  trot!  Au  trot!  f 
Au  galop!  Au  galop! 


LESSON   12   (DOUZlfiME  LEgON) 

COLORS  —  Continued 
VOCABULAIRE 
blanc  (bla),  white  noir  (nwair),  black 

comptez  (kSte),  count  nommez  (nome),  name 

je  compte  (3a  koit),  /  count  objet  (obse),  m.,  object 

montrez-moi  (motre  mwa),  show  me      veston  (vesto),  m.,  coat;  sack  coat 
je  montre  (39  moitr),  /  show 

I.  Reading  Exercise  {Exercice  de  Lecture).  Read  again 
the  French  paragraph  of  the  preceding  lesson. 

*  c  is  regularly  silent  after  n.  Therefore  blan(c)  (bid)  rhymes  with 
Rouen  (rwa). 

t  Final  consonants  being  regularly  silent,  tro(t)  rhymes  with  galo(p). 

Note.  An  unaccented  o  before  a  silent  consonant  is  sounded  (o) .  Example : 
trop  (tro). 


Lesson  12 


19 


IL    Apprenez  {Learn): 

Questions 

1.  De  quelle  couleur  est  le  livre? 

2.  De  quelle  couleur  est  le  crayon? 

3.  De  quelle  couleur  est  la  gram- 

maire? 

4.  De  quelle  couleur  est  Pecole? 

5.  De  quelle  couleur  est  la  table? 

6.  De  quelle  couleur  est  le  papier? 

7.  De  quelle  couleur  est  le  canif? 

8.  De  quelle  couleur  est  le  veston? 

9.  De  quelle  couleur  est  la  boite? 


Reponses 

1.  C'est  un  livre  blanc,  or 

II  est  blanc. 

2.  C*est  un  crayon  noir,  or 

U  est  noir. 

3.  C*est  une  grammaire  rouge,  or 

Elle  est  rouge. 

4.  C*est  une  ecole  rouge,  or 

Elle  est  rouge. 

5.  C*est  une  table  jaune,  or 

Elle  est  jaune. 

6.  C'est  un  papier  gris,  or 

II  est  gris. 

7.  C*est  un  canif  blanc,  or 

II  est  blanc. 

8.  C*est  un  veston  bleu,  or 

II  est  bleu. 

9.  C'est  une  boite  jaune,  or 


Elle  est  jaune. 

10.  De  quelle  couleur  est  la  chaise?      10.  C*est  une  chaise  jaune,  or 

Elle  est  jaune. 

11.  De  quelle  couleur  est  le  port e-      11.  C*est  un  porte-plume  noir,  or 

plume?  II  est  noir. 

III.  Let  the  student  reply  to  the  following  questions  in 
French : 

1.  Bonjour.  AUez-vous  bien  maintenant?  2*  Etudiez-vous 
la  legon?  3.  Est-ce  que  vous  comprenez  bien  la  legon?  4. 
Est-ce  que  vous  avez  une  chaise?  5.  De  quelle  couleur  est  la 
chaise?  6.  Oil  est  la  chaise?  7.  De  quelle  couleur  est  la  table? 
8.  Comptez  les  livres  sur  la  table.  9.  De  quelles  couleurs  sont 
les  livres?  10.  Ou  est  le  journal?  11.  Comptez  les  plumes  et 
les  crayons.  12.  Trouvez-vous  les  plumes  et  les  crayons?  13. 
De  quelles  couleurs  sont  les  plumes?  14.  De  quelles  couleurs 
sont  les  crayons? 


20  The  Elements  of  French 

IV.  Conversation. 

Le  Maitre  —  Levez-vous.* 

L'Eleve  —  Bien,  monsieur. 

M. —  Montrez-moi  une  porte. 

E. —  Voila  une  porte,  monsieur. 

M. —  Que  faites-vous? 

E. —  Je  montre  une  porte. 

M. —  Fermez  la  porte,  s41  vous  plait. 

E. —  Je  la  ferme. 

M. —  Maintenant,  ouvrez  la  porte. 

E. —  Je  Pouvre. 

M. —  Nommez  les  objets  sur  la  table. 

E. —  Les  objets  sur  la  table  sont , 

M. —  Comptez  les  objets. 

E. —  Je  les  compte :  un,  deux,  trois,  quatre. 

M. —  Asseyez-vous,  s'il  vous  plait. 

E. —  Bien,  monsieur,  je  le  fais  (/  do  so). 

V.  Traduisez.  1.  You  have  one  table  and  two  chairs. 
2.  The  table  is  yellow.  3.  The  chairs  are  yellow  (jaunes), 
also.  4.  Count  the  books  on  the  table.  5.  You  have  two 
books  on  the  table.  6.  Three  books  are  blue  (bleus),  7. 
One  book  is  red.     8.  You  have   a  newspaper  on  the  chair. 

9.  Give  me  the  books,   and  give  me  the   newspaper,   also. 

10.  Count  the  yellowt  (jaunes)  pens,  if  you  please.  11.  I 
have  three  yellow  pens.  12.  I  have  four  black  (noirs)  pen- 
cils, also.  13.  Give  me  three  pens  and  two  pencils,  if  you 
please. 

LESSON   13   (TREIZlfiME  LEgON) 

REVISION 

I.  Prononcez.     Si  (if),  su  (known) j  dit  (says),  du  (of  the), 
soeur  (sister),  leur  (their),  heureux  (happy),  fin  (end),  bon  (good), 
bonne  (good),  an  (year),  annee  (year),  vient  (comes),  bien  (well), . 
fait    (does),    main    (hand),    entente    (agreement),    deux    (two), 
pent  (can). 

*  Dashes  are  used  here  to  denote  change  of  speaker. 
t  The  adjective  of  color  follows  the  noun. 


Lesson  IS  21 

II.  Supply  the  proper  forms  of  the  indefinite  article  with 

the  following  words: monsieur; plume; papier; 

crayon; legon;  habit;  boite;  gram- 

maire;  livre;  ^porte;  porte-plume;  veston; 

chaise. 

III.  Let  the  student  reply  to  the  following  questions:    1.  De 

quelle  couleur  est  la  grammaire?     2.  le  papier?     3.  

le    crayon?    4. Thabit?      5.  la    boite?      6.  — —la 

grammaire?     7.  le  livre?     8.  la  porte?     9.  le  porte- 
plume? 

IV.  1.  Comptez  les  portes.  2.  Comptez  les  fenetres.  3. 
Comptez  les  crayons  bleus.  4.  Comptez  les  canifs  blancs. 
5.  Comptez  les  plumes  jaunes. 

V.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Avez-vous  la  boite?  2.  Ou  est-elle? 
3.  Est-elle  sous  la  table?  4.  Est-elle  sur  la  chaise?  5.  La 
trouvez-vous  maintenant?  6.  Avez-vous  trois  livres?  7.  Avez- 
vous  deux  livres?  8.  De  quelle  couleur  est  le  livre?  9.  Trouvez- 
vous  une  plume?  10.  Ou  la  trouvez-vous?  11.  De  quelle 
couleur  est-elle?  12.  Trouvez-vous  une  lettre?  13.  Regardez- 
vous  la  lettre?  14.  Ouvrez-vous  la  lettre?  15.  Donnez-moi  le 
journal,  s^il  vous  plait.  16.  Donnez-moi  le  livre,  s'il  vous 
plait.  17.  Oil  sont  le  journal  et  le  livre?  18.  Les  trouvez- 
vous  maintenant? 

VI.  Traduisez.  1.  Give  me  the  books,  if  you  please. 
There  they  are.  Thank  you.  2.  Where  is  the  pupil?  Here 
she  is.  3.  You  have  a  picture.  Here  it  is.  4.  What  is  the  color 
of  the  pen-holder?  It  is  yellow.  5.  Show  me  a  pen,  if  you 
please.  6.  There  it  is,  sir,  and  there  is  a  pencil,  also.  7.  Do 
you  find  the  tables  and  (the)  chairs?  8.  Yes,  sir,  I  find  them. 
9.  There  they  are  in  the  room.  10.  Here  is  a  black  pen- 
holder. 11.  There  is  a  red  pen-holder,  also.  12.  Are  you 
looking  at  the  doors  and  (the)  windows.  13.  Yes,  sir,  I  am 
looking  at  them.    14.  There  are  two  doors  and  three  windows. 


22  The  Elements  of  French 

LESSON   14   (QUATORZlfiME  LECON) 
PRESENT  INDICATIVE  OF  AVOIR,  TO  HAVE 
Review  the  Introduction,  §§  24,  25,  26,  27,  28,  29,  30,  31. 

VOCABULAIRE 

enfant  (afa),  m.,  f.,  child  Marie  (mari),  f.,  Mary 

homme  (om),  m.,  man  nez  (ne),  m.,  nose 

Jacques  (3a:k),  m.,  James  oeil  (oe:j),  m.,  eye 

Jean  (3a),  m.,  John  les  yeux  (lez  j0),  the  eyes 

Jeanne*  (sam),  f.,  Jane,  Joan  oreille  (oreij),  f.,  ear 

61.  Present  Indicative  of  avoir  (le  Present  de  VIndicatiJ 
du  Verbe  avoir). 

Affirmative  (Affirmatif) 
j*ai  (3  e),  /  have  nous  avons  (nuz  avo),  we  have 

tu  as  (ty  a),  you  havef  vous  avez  (vuz  ave),  you  havel^ 

il  a  (11  a),  he  {it)- has  ils  ont  (ilz  5),  they  (m.)  have 

elle  a  (el  a),  she  (it)  Aos  elles  ont  (kIz  5),  they  (f.)  have 

Negative   (NSgatif) 
je  n*ai  pas  (39  n  e  pa),  /  have  not  nous  n'avons  pas  (nu  n  av5  pa),  we 

tu  n*as  pas  (ty  n  a  pa),  you  have  have  not 

no^t  vous  n'avez  pas  (vu  n  ave  pa) ^  you 

il  n'a  pas  (il  n  a  pa),  he  (it)  has  not  have  not^ 

elle  n*a  pas  (el  n  a  pa),  she  (it)  has      ils  n'ont  pas  (il  n  5  pa),  they  (m.) 
not  have  not 

elles  n'ont  pas  (el  n5  pa),  they  (f.) 
have  not 

Observe.  In  the  exercises  the  student  should  use  vous,  unless  tu  is 
clearly  called  for. 

1.  Vous  avez  le  journal,  n*est-ce  pas,  M.  Lemaitre?  You  have  the 
newspaper,  have  you  not,  Mr,  Lemaitre? 

2.  Jean,  tu  fermes  la  porte,  n*est-ce  pas?  John,  you  are  closing  the 
door,  are  you  not? 

*  Note  that  a  nasal  sound  is  regularly  lost,  when  n  or  m  is  doubled,  or  is 
followed  by  a  vowel. 

t  Vous,  meaning  "you,"  is  used  in  polite  address  in  French,  and  as  the  plural 
of  tu.  The  use  of  tu  corresponds  to  calling  a  person  by  his  first  name  in  English. 
Tu  is  especially  employed  among  relatives,  and  among  students  and  soldiers. 
It  expresses  either  familiarity  or  contempt. 


Lesson  I4  ^  23 

Questions.  (Answers  in  French  to  be  prepared  by  the 
student) . 

1.  M.  le  professeur,  avez-foi/s  le        6.  Jeanne,  est-ce  que  tu  regardes 

livre?  la  lettre? 

2.  Madame,trouvez-i;oi/s  les  cray-        7.  Mme  Leblanc,  est-ce  que  vous 

ons?  comptez  les  chaises? 

3.  M.  Mercier,  est-ce   que   vous        8.  Qu*est-ce  que  vous  faites  1^,M. 

regardez  la  lettre?  Mercier? 

4.  Marie,  as- ^u  le  livre?  9.  Jacques,comptes-/i/ les  chaises? 

5.  Philippe,  trouves-fu  les  cray-      10.  Qu* est-ce     que     tu     fais     li, 

ons?  Jacques? 

62.  Apprenez. 

cinq  (seik),  five  huit  (qit),  eight 

six  (sis),  six  neuf  (noef),  nine 

sept  (set),  seven  dix  (dis),  ten 

63.  The  final  consonants  of  all  these  numerals  are  silent 
before  a  noun  not  beginning  with  a  vowel  or  h  mute. 

1.  cinq  livres  (se  liivr),  five  hooks 

2.  cinq  enfsLnts  (sGik  aia),  five  children 

3.  cinq  hommes  (se:k  om),  five  men 

I.  Conjugate  (Conjuguez).  1.  J'ai  les  yeux  gris,  tu  as  les 
yeux  gris,  etc.;  2.  j'ai  la  lettre,  tu  as  la  lettre,  etc.;  3.  j'ai  un 
canif  blanc,  tu  as  un  canif  blanc,  etc.;  4.  j^ai  deux  oreilles, 
tu  as  deux  oreilles,  etc.;  5.  je  n'ai  pas  le  journal,  tu  n'as 
pas  le  journal,  etc.;  6.  je  n^ai  pas  le  crayon,  tu  n^as  pas 
le  crayon,  etc. 

II.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Est-ce  que  j^ai  un  crayon?  2.  Est- 
ce  que  vous  avez  un  crayon?  3.  Est-ce  que  nous  avons  deux 
crayons?  4.  Est-ce  que  Jean  a  une  grammaire?  5.  Est-ce 
que  Philippe  a  une  grammaire?  6.  Est-ce  que  Jean  et  Phil- 
ippe ont  deux  grammaires? 

III.  Questionnaire.  1.  Give  the  usual  spelUngs  of  (g); 
2.  of  (a);  3.  of  (5);  4.  of  (de).  5.  What  happens  if  the 
m  orn  is  doubled? 

IV.  Traduisez.  1.  M.  and  Mme.  Lemattre  have  two 
children.    2.  Mary  is  a  child,  and  James  is  a  child.     3.  Does 


24  The  Elements  of  French 

Mary  have  (the)  blue  eyes  or  {ou)  (the)  black  eyes?  4.  She 
has  (the)  gray  eyes.  5.  Has  John  (the)  gray  eyes,  also? 
6.  No,  sir,  John  has  (the)  black  eyes.  7.  Count  the  pencils, 
if  you  please.  8.  We  have  six  pencils.  9.  Now,  put  the 
pencils  on  the  table.  10.  What  are  you  doing,  James?  11. 
Are  you  putting  them  on  the  table? 

V.  Pronimciation  Exercise   (to  be  memorized  by  the  stu- 
dent). 

LA  BERGERE 

II  6tait  une  bergere, 

Et  ron,  ron,  ron,  petit  patapon; 

II  etait  une  bergere. 

Qui  gardait  ses  moutons,  ron,  ron, 

Qui  gardait  ses  moutons. 

Elle  fit  un  fromage, 

Et  ron,  ron,  ron,  petit  patapon; 

Elle  fit  un  fromage, 

Du  lait  de  ses  moutons,  ron,  ron, 

Du  lait  de  ses  moutons. 

Le  chat  qui  la  regarde, 

Et  ron,  ron,  ron,  petit  patapon; 

Le  chat  qui  la  regarde, 

D'un  petit  air  fripon,  ron,  ron, 

D'un  petit  air  fripon. 

"Si  tu  y  mets  la  patte, 

Et  ron,  ron,  ron,  petit  patapon; 

Si  tu  y  mets  la  patte, 

Tu  auras  du  baton,  ron,  ron, 

Tu  auras  du  baton." 


Lesson  15 
LESSON   15   (QUINZlfiME  LEgON) 


25 


THE   BODY 


VOCABULAIRE 


autre  (oitr),  other 

avec  (avsk),  with 

bouche  (buj),  f.,  mouth 

brun  (broe),  brown 

Charles  (J"arl),  Charles 

combien  de  (kobjs  da),  how  much? 
how  many? 

doigt  (dwa),  m.,  finger 

droit  (drwa),  adj.,  right 

vous  entendez    (vuz    atade),  you 
hear 

j'entends  (3  Qta),  /  hear 

gauche  (go:/),  adj.,  left  (as  distin- 
guished from  right) 

il  y  a  (il  j  a),  there  is,  there  are* 

y  a-t-il?  (i  a  t  il),  is  there?  are  there? 


main  (me),  f.,  hand 

vous  parlez  (vu  parle),  you  speak 

je  parle  (39  pari),  /  speak 

vous  pensez  (vu  pase),  you  think 

je  pense  (3s  pais),  /  think 

petit  (pati),  small 

vous    respirez    (vu    respire),    you 

breathe 
je  respire  (3a  respiir),  /  breathe 
rond  (r5),  fem.,  ronde  (r5:d),  round 
tete  (teit),  f.,  head 
tres  (trs),  very 

vous  voyez  (vu  vwaje),  you  see 
je  vols  (3a  vwa),  /  see 
de  quelle  forme?    (da   kel  form), 

{of)  what  shape? 


n*est-ce  pas?  (n  e  s  pa),  is  it  not  so?  don't  you?  isnH  he?  etc. 
Vous  avez  les  yeux  gris,  n*est-ce  pas?      You  have  gray  eyes,  have  you 
not? 

I.  Reading  Exercise  (Exercice  de  Lecture).  1.  Bon  jour, 
Charles.  2.  —  Bonjour,  monsieur.  3.  — Comment  allez- 
vous?  4.  —  Je  vais  bien,  merci ;  et  vous?  5.  —  Merci,  je  vais 
tres  bien,  aussi.  ...  6.  Voici  la  tete.  7.  La  tete  est  ronde. 
8.  Vous  pensez  avec  la  tete.  9.  Voici  un  ceil.  10.  C^est 
Toeil  gauche.  11.  Voici  un  autre  ceil.  12.  C'est  Toeil  droit, 
n^est-ce  pas?  13.  Vous  avez  deux  yeux.  14.  Vous  avez  les 
yeux  gris.  15.  Marie  a  les  yeux  bruns.  16.  Charles  a  les 
yeux  noirs.      17.  Vous  voyez  avec  les  yeux,  n^est-ce  pas?     18. 

*  Distinction  between  il  y  a  and  voili : 

II  y  a  makes  a  simple  statement  of  fact.     VoilH  points  out  something. 

1.  II  y  a  cinq  livres  sur  la  table,  There  are  five  books  on  the  table.  (State- 
ment of  fact. 

2.  Les  voilil     There  they  are!  (pointing  them  out). 


26  The  Elements  of  French 

Void  une  oreille.  19.  Elle  est  ronde,*  et  petite,*  aussi.  20. 
C^est  Toreille  gauche,  n'est-ce  pas?    21.  Voila  une  autre  oreille. 

22.  C'est  Toreille  droite.  23.  Vous  entendez  avec  les  oreilles. 
24.  Voici  le  nez.  25.  Sous  le  nez  il  y  a  la  bouche.  26.  Elle 
est  petite.  27.  Vous  parlez  avec  la  bouche.  28.  Ou  sont  les 
mains?  29.  Voici  la  main  gauche.  30.  Voila  la  main  droite. 
31.  Comptez  les  doigts  a  {on)  la  main  droite:  un,  deux,  trois, 
quatre,  cinq.  32.  Comptez  les  doigts  k  la  main  gauche,  aussi. 
33.  Cinq  et  cinq  font  {are — literally  make)  dix.  34.  Vous 
avez  dix  doigts. 

II.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Ou  est  la  tete?  2.  De  quelle  forme 
est  la  tete?  3.  Que  faites-vous  avec  la  tete?  4.  Ou  est 
Toeil  gauche?  5.  Ou  est  Toeil  droit?  6.  Combien  d^yeux 
avez-vous?  7.  De  quelle  couleur  sont  les  yeux?  8.  Est- 
ce    que   Philippe  a  les    yeux   gris    ou    {or)    les   yeux    bleus? 

9.  Est-ce  que  Charles  a  les  yeux  bruns  ou  les  yeux  noirs? 

10.  Que  faites-vous  avec  les  yeux?  11.  Ou  sont  les  oreilles? 
12.  Ou  est  Toreille  droite?  13.  Ou  est  Toreille  gauche?  14. 
Que  faites-vous  avec  les  oreilles?  15.  Oil  est  le  nez?  16.  Que 
faites-vous  avec  le  nez?  17.  Oil  est  la  bouche?  18.  Respirez- 
vous  avec  la  bouche?  19.  Entendez-vous  avec  les  oreilles?  20. 
Oii  est  la  main  gauche?  21.  Oil  est  la  main  droite?  22.  Comp- 
tez les  doigts  k  {on)  la  main  droite.     (Answer:  II  y  a .) 

23.  Combien  de  doigts  avez-vous? 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  Rise.  Breathe.  2.  You  are  not 
breathing  with  your  (the)  nose.  3.  You  are  breathing  with 
your  (the)  mouth.  4.  Close  your  mouth,  if  you  please. 
5.  Now,  be  seated,  please.  6.  Count  the  blue  pencils.  7. 
Now,  count  the  red  pencils,  if  you  please.  8.  There  are  five 
blue  pencils  and  five  red  pencils,  are  there  not?  9.  Five 
and  five  are  {font)  ten,  are  they  not?  10.  Take  the  pen 
with  your  hand.  Write  {ecrivez),  11.  You  are  writing  an 
exercise  {exercice,  m.),  are  you  not? 

*  Observe  that  an  adjective  in  the  feminine  adds  e,  as  rond,  m.;  ronde,  f.: 
petit,  m.;  petite,  f.  However,  adjectives  ending  in  unaccented  e  add  no  e  for 
the  feminine,  as:   jaune,  m.;  jaune,  f. 


f 

ill  in  the  blanks: 

6. 
7. 
8. 
9. 

J avec  la  main . 

Je avec  le  nez. 

J avec  les  oreilles. 

J'ai doigts  k  la  main. 

Lesson  16  27 

LESSON   16    (SEIZIEME   LEgON) 

THE  BODY— Continued 

VOCABULAIRE 

k  (a),  tOf  atf  on  j'ecris  (3  ekri),  /  write 

baissez  (bese),  lower  encre  (a:kr),  f.,  ink 

je  baisse  (3a  bes),  /  lower  levez  (bve),  raise 

bras  (bra),  m.,  arm  je  leve  (39  leiv),  /  raise 

cheveux  (J'8v0),  m.,  plur.,  hair  vos  (vo),  plur.,  your 

devant  (dava),  prep.,  before  (of  po-  mais  (ms),  but 

sition);  in  front  of  nom  (no),  m.,  name 

ecrivez  (ekrive),  write  ou  (u),  or 

I.  Exercice.    Let  the  student 

1.  La  tete  est . 

2.  La  bouche  est . 

3.  Le  nez  est . 

4.  J*ai  les  yeux . 

5.  Marie  a  les  yeux . 

II.  Conversation. 

Maitre.  —  Regardez  les  objets  qui  {which)  sont  devant  vous.  De 
quelle  couleur  est  P encre? 

Eleve.  —  L'encre  est  bleue. 

M. —  De  quelle  couleur  est  la  plume? 

E. —  La  plume  est  noire. 

M. —  Comment  voyez-vous  P encre  et  la  plume? 

E. —  Je  les  vols  avec  les  yeux. 

M. —  Maintenant  levez  le  bras. 

E. —  Je  leve  le  bras. 

M. —  Est-ce  le  bras  gauche  ou  le  bras  droit? 

E. —  C'est  le  bras  droit. 

M. —  Baissez  le  bras  droit.     Levez  le  bras  gauche. 

E. —  Je  baisse  le  bras  droit.     Je  leve  le  bras  gauche. 

M. —  Asseyez-vous. 

M. —  (A  un  autre  eleve)  Levez-vous.  .  .  .  De  quelle  couleur  sont 
vos  yeux? 

E. —  J*ai  les  yeux  gris,  n*est-ce  pas? 

M. —  De  quelle  couleur  sont  vos  cheveux? 

E. —  J*ai  les  cheveux  bruns,  monsieur. 

M. —  Avez-vous  les  cheveux  bruns  aussi,  M.  Charles? 

E. —  Non,  monsieur  le  professeur,  j*ai  les  cheveux  noirs. 


28  The  Elements  of  French 

M. —  AUez  au  {to  the)  tableau  noir.    Ecrivez  vos  noms.    .    .    .   Avec 
quelle  main  ecrivez- vous,  mademoiselle? 
E. —  J*ecris  avec  la  main  droite. 
M. —  Avec  quelle  main  ecrivez-vous,  M.  Charles? 
E. —  J^ecris  avec  la  main  gauche. 
M. —  Asseyez-vous. 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  What  is  the  color  of  your  eyes?  2. 
They  are  blue.  3.  John  has  gray  eyes,  has  he  not?  4.  No 
sir,  John  has  brown  eyes.  5.  Give  me  the  names  of  the 
objects  which  are  in  front  of  you.  6.  How  do  you  breathe, 
with  the  nose  or  with  the  mouth?  7.  What  is  the  color  of  your 
hair?  8.  With  which  (quelle)  hand  are  you  writing,  with  the 
left  hand  or  with  the  right  hand?  9.  Write  your  names  on 
the  blackboard.  10.  Write  with  the  right  hand.  11.  Now, 
write  with  the  left  hand.  12.  Do  you  write  with  two  fingers 
or  with  three  fingers?  13.  How  many  fingers  are  there  on 
(d)  the  right  hand?  14.  There  are  five  fingers  on  (d)  the  right 
hand,  and  there  are  five  fingers  on  the  left  hand,  also. 


LESSON   17   (DIX-SEPTI£ME  LEgON) 

PRESENT   INDICATIVE   OF   AVOIR 

CONTRACTIONS  OF  DE  +  L'ARTICLE  DEFINI:  THE  PARTITIVE 
CONSTRUCTION 

Study  the  Introduction,  §§  30,  31,  32,  33,  34. 

VOCABULAIRE 

cafe  (kafe),  m.,  coffee  prenez-vous?  (prane  vu),    will  you 

dessert  (dessir),  m.,  dessert  have  (take)? 

eau  (o),  f.,  water  je  prends  (39  pra),  Fll  have  (take) 

legume  (legym),  m.,  vegetable  viande  (vjaid),  f.,  meat 

pain  (pe),  m.,  bread 

64.  Present    Indicative    of    avohy    to  have    (le    Present  de 
rindicatif  du  Verbe  avoir). 


Lesson  17  29 

Interrogative  {Interrogatif) 
*est-ce  que  j'ai?  (s  s  ka  3  e),  have  I?      avons-nous?  (avo  nu),  have  we? 
as-tu?  (a  ty),  have  you?  avez-vous?  (ave  vu),  have  you? 

a-t-il?  (a  t  il),  has  he  (it)?  ont-ils?  (3t  il),  have  they  (m.)? 

a-t-elle?  (a  t  el),  has  she  (it)?  ont-elles?  (5t  el),  have  they  (f.)? 

Negative-Interrogative  {Negatif -Interrogatif) 

fest-ce  que  je  n'ai  pas,  (e  s  ka  3a  n'avons-nous  pas?  (n  avo  nu  pa), 

n  e  pa),  have  I  not?                     J  have  we  not? 

n'as-tu  pas?  (n  a  ty  pa),  have  you  n'avez-vous  pas?   (n  ave  vu  pa), 

not?  have  you  not? 

n'a-t-il  pas  (n  a  t  il  pa),  has  he  {it)  n'ont-ils  pas?  (n  5t  il  pa),  have  they 

not?  (m.)  not? 

n'a-t-elle  pas?   (n  a  t  el  pa),  ho^  n*ont-elles  pas?  (n  ot  el  pa),  have 

she  {it)  not?  they  (f.)  not? 

65.  Some  Contractions  of  the  Article  and  de  {Quelques 
Contractions  de  V Article  et  de  de). 

de  +  le  =  du  (dy),  of  the,  from  the. 

de  +  la .     No  change. 

de  +  1'  — — .     No  change. 

de  +  les  =  des  (de)'or  (de),  of  the,  from  the. 

1.  Le  livre  du  professeur,t  The  teacher^ s  hook.  (Literally  the  hook  of 
the  teacher.) 

2.  Les  livres  des  professeurs,  The  teachers^  hooks.  (Literally  the 
hooks  of  the  teacher s.)X 

3.  Les  doigts  de  la  main  droite,  The  fingers  of  the  right  hand. 

4.  Les  doigts  des  mains,  The  fingers  of  the  hands. 

5.  L'encre  de  Peleve,  The  pupiVs  ink.    (Literally  the  ink  of  the  pupil.) 

6.  L*encre  des  eleves,  ThepupiWink.     (Literally  the  ink  of  the  pupils.) 

7.  La  couleur  de  Pceil,  The  color  of  the  eye. 

8.  La  couleur  des  yeux.  The  color  of  the  eyes. 

66.  The  Partitive  Construction  (le  Partitif).  Whenever  the 
words  *'some^^  or  '^any''  are  used  before  a  noun  in  English, 
or  whenever  these  words  may  be  supplied  without  changing 
the  meaning  of  the  sentence,  the  ^French  regularly  uses  de  +  the 
definite  article. 

*  Used  oftener  than  ai-je?  (e  3). 

t  Used  oftener  than  n*  ai-je  pas?  (n  e  3  pa). 

i  Observe  that  French  has  no  possessive  case. 


30 


The  Elements  of  French 


1.  J*ai  du  pain,  /  have   (some)   bread.     (Literally  of  the  bread.) 

2.  A-t-il  de  Pencre?   Has  he  (any)  ink?     (Literally  of  the  ink?) 

3.  II  a  des  crayons,  He  has  (some)  pencils.     (Literally  of  the  pencils.) 

Apprenez. 

Questions 

1 .  Prenez-vous  du  pain? 

2.  Prenez-vous  du  cafe? 

3.  Prenez-vous  du  dessert? 

4.  Prenez-vous  de  la  viande? 

5.  Prenez-vous  de  Peau? 

6.  Prenez-vous  des  legumes? 


7.  Avez-vous  des  yeux? 

8.  Avez-vous  des  oreilles? 

9.  Avez-vous  des  bras? 
10.  Avez-vous  des  mains? 
IL  Avez-vous  des  doigts? 


Reponses 
Oui,  monsieur,  je  prends  du  pain. 
Oui,  monsieur,  je  prends  du  cafe. 
Oui,  monsieur,  je  prends  du  dessert. 
Oui,  monsieur,  je  prends  de  la  viande. 
Oui,  monsieur,  je  prends  de  Peau. 
Oui,   monsieur,   je   prends   des   le- 
gtunes. 

7.  Oui,  monsieur,  j*ai  des  yeux. 

8.  Oui,  monsieur,  j*ai  des  oreilles. 

9.  Oui,  monsieur,  j'ai  des  bras. 

10.  Oui,  monsieur,  j'ai  des  mains. 

11.  Oui,  monsieur,  j*ai  des  doigts. 


1. 
2. 
3. 
4. 
5. 
6. 


I.  Questionnaire.  1.  What  is  a  semi-consonant?  2.  How 
is  it  like  a  consonant?  3.  Name  the  semi-consonants  with 
which  you  are  familiar.  4.  How  is  a  semi-consonant  like  a 
vowel?  5.  Name  the  vowels.  6.  What  is  the  difference  in 
the  pronunciation  of  (y)  and  of  (i)? 

II.  Use  the  proper  form  of  de  with  the  following: 

pain; le  cafe; le  legume; les  legumes; 

viande; la  craie; Thabit; les  habits; 


les  Aleves;  - 
les  crayons;  • 


Tecole;  — 
-  la  lettre ; 


les  ecoles;  - 
—  les  lettres. 


le 

la 

Feleve; 

le  crayon; 


III.  Prononcez.  Papier  (paper) y  fille  (daughter) y  famille 
(family) J  travail  (work),  bien  (well),  mien  (mine),  Italien 
(Italian),  cuisine  (kitchen),  lui  (to  him),  puis  (then),  conduire 
(conduct),  oui  (yes),  ouest  (west),  Louis  (Louis),  pain  (bread), 
omelette  (omelet),  main  (hand),  peut  (can),  pire  (worse),  pure 
(pure),  si  (if),  su  (known),  perle  (pearl),  aussi  (also),  plait 
(pleases),  beaucoup  (much). 

IV.  Traduisez.  1.  The  rooms  •  of  the  school.  2.  The 
doors  and  windows  of  the  school.     3.  The  tables  and  chairs 


Lesson  18  31 

of  the  room.  4.  The  teacher's  ruler.  5.  The  pupil's  pen  and 
ink.  6.  Have  you  (some)  paper,  Charles?  7.  Yes,  sir, 
thank  you,  I  have  (some)  paper.  8.  Have  you  (some)  ink, 
also,  Charles?  9.  Thank  you,  sir,  here  is  some  ink.  10. 
What  are  you  doing,  Charles?  11.  I  am  writing  some  let- 
ters. 12.  You  write  a  great  many  (beaucoup  de)  letters  at 
school  (d  Vecole)j  Charles.  13.  There  is  some  chalk.  14. 
Write  some  exercises  on  the  blackboard  now. 


LESSON   18   (DIX-HUITIEME  LEgON) 
REVISION 

I.  Prononcez.  Fin  (fine)^  fine  (fine),  pain  (bread) ^  entente 
(agreement) J  ennemi  (enemy),  dent  (tooth) y  enfant  (child),  tas 
(heap),  tendre  (tender),  ombre  (shade),  homme  (man),  Verdun 
(Verdun),  papier  (paper),  fille  (daughter),  cuit  (cooked),  puis 
(then),  conduire  (conduct), 

II.  Supply  the  proper  forms  of  de+the  definite  article  with 

the  following  words:  legumes;  pain;  viande; 

cafe; dessert; ecole; salle; craie; 

eleve; habit; canifs. 

III.  Conjuguez.  1.  Est-ce  que  j'ai  les  yeux  bleus?  as-tu 
les  yeux  bleus?  etc.  2.  J'ai  la  tete  ronde,  n'est-ce  pas?  tu 
as  la  tete  ronde,  n'est-ce  pas?  etc.  3.  Je  n'ai  pas  deux 
crayons,  tu  n'as  pas  deux  crayons,  etc.  4.  Est-ce  que  je  n'ai 
pas  la  lettre?    n'as-tu  pas  la  lettre?  etc. 

IV.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Levez  la  tete.  2.  Baissez  la  tete. 
3.  De  quelle  forme  est  la  tete?  4.  De  quelle  couleur  sont  vos 
cheveux?  5.  Oil  est  Toeil  droit?  6.  Od  est  Toeil  gauche?  7. 
Que  faites-vous  avec  les  yeux?  8.  Oil  est  Toreille  gauche?  9. 
Combien  d'oreilles  avez-vous?  10.  Ou  est  le  nez?  11.  Ou  est 
la  bouche?  12.  Baissez  le  bras  droit.  13.  Levez  la  main 
gauche.  14.  Ou  est  la  main  droite?  15.  Combien  de  doigts 
avez-vous?    16.  Que  faites-vous  avec  les  doigts? 


32  The  Elements  of  French 

V.  Traduisez.  1.  Charles  has  black  eyes,  but  Phihp  has 
gray  eyes.  2.  Marie  has  brown  hair,  has  she  not?  3.  What  do 
you  see  with  your  eyes?  4.  You  see  the  bhickboard,  do  you 
not?  5.  Write  your  names  on  the  blackboard.  6.  You  write 
with  the  left  hand,  but  I  write  with  the  right  hand.  7.  What 
objects  do  you  see  in  front  of  the  blackboard?  8.  You  hear 
the  teacher,  do  you  not?  9.  You  have  some  ink  and  some 
pens,  have  you  not?  10.  Marie  has  some  bread  and  vegetables, 
has  she  not? 


LESSON    19    (DIX-NEUVlfiME  LEgON) 

AGREEMENT   OF   ADJECTIVES 

VOCABULAIRE 

bon  (b5),  good  fruit  (frqi),  m.,  fruit 

Feminine,  bonne  (bon)  lait  (le),  m.,  milk 

couteau  (kuto),  m.,  knije  omelette  (omlet),  f.,  omelet 

cult  (kqi),  p.  part.,  cooked  robe  (rob),  f.,  dress 
fourchette  (fur/et),  f .,  fork 

67.  Agreement  of  Adjectives  {Accord  des  Adjectifs).  Ad- 
jectives agree  with  the  nouns  which  they  modify  in  gender  and 
number. 

(a)  The  feminine  of  adjectives  is  regularly  formed  by  adding 
e  to  the  masculine. 

1.  Le  petit  journal,  The  small  newspaper, 

2.  La  petite  salle,  The  small  room. 

3.  Le  crayon  est  noir,  The  pencil  is  block, 

4.  La  plume  est  noire,  The  pen  is  black, 

5.  Le  doigt  est  petit.  The  finger  is  small. 

6.  La  main  est  petite.  The  hand  is  small. 

7.  C*est  un  grand  couteau,  It  is  a  large  knife. 

8.  C'est  une  grande  fourchette.  It  is  a  large  fork. 

Note.     Participles  used  as  adjectives  follow  the  same  rule  as  adjectives. 
Une  omelette  bien  cuite,  A  well  cooked  omelet. 


Lesson  19  33 

(6)  Of  course,  when  the  masculine  ends  in  an  unaccented  e, 
the  feminine  is  unchanged. 

Masculine  (Mascidin)  Feminine  (Feminin) 

rouge  rouge 

jauhe  jaune,  etc. 

(c)  Adjectives  frequently  follow  the  noun.  A  few  very 
common  adjectives  precede,  such  as 

bon,  good,  mauvais,  had,  grand,  large,  tall,  petit,  small,  jeune,  young, 
and  a  few  others.* 

68.   The  following  adjectives  are  irregular  in  the  feminine: 
Masculine  Feminine 

bon  (bo),  good  bonne  (bon),  good 

1.  Charles  est  bon,  Charles  is  good.      1.  Marie  est  bonne,  Mary  is  good. 

2.  C*est  un  bon  eleve.  He  is  a  good      2.  C'est  une  bonne  eleve.  She  is  a 

pupil.  good  pupil. 

3.  Le  cafe  est  bon.  The  coffee  is  good.      3.  L'eau  est  bonne.  The  water  is  good. 

4.  C'est  un  bon  fruit,  It  is  a  good      4.  C'est  une  bonne  omelette.  It  is 

fruit.  a  good  omelet. 

blanc  (bla),  white  blanche  (blaif),  white 

1.  Le  pain  est  blanc.  The  bread  is      1.  La  craie  est  blanche.  The  chalk 

white.  is  white. 

2.  Le  lait  est  blanc.   The  milk  is      2.  La  robe  est  blanche.  The  dress  is 

white.  white. 


I.  Apprenez. 


UNE  POULE 

Une  poule  sur  un  mur, 
Qui  picotait  du  pain  dur, 

Picoti,  picota, 
Lev'  la  queue  et  puis  s'en  va. 

Un  petit  coq  sur  un  mur, 
Qui  picotait  du  pain  dur, 

Picoti,  picota. 
Lev'  la  patte  et  saute  en  has. 


*  The  position  of  adjectives  must  be  learned  by  observation,  but  the  rule 
as  stated  will  be  found  sufficient  for  the  present.  Note,  however,  that  adjectives 
of  color  usually  follow  the  noun. 

Un  crayon  blanc:  la  maison  blanche,  etc.  (cf.  §  59). 


34  The  Elements  of  French 

II.  Traduisez.  1.  What  will  you  have,  sir?  2.  I'll  have 
some  bread,  meat,  and  vegetables.  3.  Will  you  have  some 
black  coffee,  also?  4.  Thank  you,  I'll  take  some  water,  if 
you  please.  5.  Or,  if  (si)  the  milk  is  good,  I'll  take  some 
milk.  6.  The  omelet  is  good,  also.  7.  Give  me  an  omelet, 
and  some  dessert.  8.  Will  you  have  some  fruit,  sir?  9.  Yes, 
if  the  fruit  is  well  cooked. 


LESSON   20   (VINGTifiME  LEQON) 

THE  PLURAL   OF   ADJECTIVES 
VOCABULAIRE 
aujourd*hui  (osurdqi),*  today  pour  (puir),  for,  in  order  to 

bouillon  (bujo),  m.,  broth  puis  (pqi),  then 

comme  (kom),  as;  for  j*ai  faim  (3  e  fe),  /  am  hungry 

dejeuner   (de3oene),   m.,   lunch,   or      j'ai  soif  (3  e  swaf),  /  am  thirsty 

breakfast^  j'ai  faim,  n*est-ce  pas?    /  am  hun- 

gargon  (garso),  m.,  boy,  waiter  gry,  am  I  not  (literally  is  it  not?) 

69.  The  plural  of  adjectives  is  regularly  formed  by  adding 
s  to  the  singular. 

1.  Le  petit  gargon,  The  small  boy 

2.  Les  petits  garjons,  The  small  boys 

3.  La  petite  fiUe,  The  small  girl 

4.  Les  petites  fiUes,  The  small  girls 

Questions  Reponses 

1.  Est-ce    que     les     canifs     sont      1.  Oui,  monsieur,  les    canifs   sont 

blancs?  blancs. 

2.  Est-ce    que    les    robes    sont      2.  Oui,   monsieur,   les  robes   sont 

blanches?  blanches,    mais    il    y    a    des 

robes  bleues  aussi. 

*  Or,  03urdqi. 

t  There  are  two  kinds  of  dejeuners  served  in  France. 

(a)  Le  petit  dejeuner  (la  pati  de3oene),  or  le  premier  dejeuner  (b 
pramje  de3oene),  meaning  the  regular  Continental  breakfast  of  coffee,  or 
chocolate,  and  rolls.     It  is  frequently  served  in  one's  room. 

(b)  Le  dejeuner  k  la  fourchette  (la  de3oene  a  la  furfet),  literally  "break- 
fast with  the  fork,"  meaning  a  more  substantial  meal,  which  is  usually  served 
about  twelve  or  one  o'clock. 


Lesson  20  35 

Note.  Adjectives  and  nouns  ending  in  s  or  a;  remain  unchanged  in 
the  plural. 

Le  bras,  les  bras,  arm,  arms;  bas,  bas,  low 
Nouns  ending  in  z  are  invariable. 

Le  nez,"  les  nez,  nose,  noses 

I.  Conjuguez.  1.  Je  n'ai  pas  le  journal,  tu  n'as  pas  le 
journal,  etc.  2.  J^ai  les  yeux  gris,  tu  as  les  yeux  gris,  etc. 
3.  Est-ce  que  je  n^ai  pas  les  crayons  jaunes?  n^as-tu  pas  les 
crayons  jaunes?  etc.  4.  Est-ce  que  j^ai  la  lettre?  as-tu  la 
lettre?  etc.  5.  Est-ce  j'ai  les  canifs  blancs?  as-tu  les  canifs 
blancs?    etc. 

II.  Read  the  French  (Lisez  le  frangais). 

Au  Restaurant  (At  the  Restaurant)* 

Bonjour,  monsieur. 

Bonjour,  gargon. 

Est-ce  que  vous  allez  bien  aujourd'hui? 

Oui,  mais  j*ai  faim  et  j'ai  soif.     Est-ce  que  vous  avez  un  bon 

dejeuner? 

Oui,  monsieur,  nous  avons  de  la  viande  et  des   legumes.     Le 

bouillon  est  tres  bon. 
;   Tres  bien,  je  prends  le  bouillon. 

Un  bouillon  pour  un.    Boum!  t  •  •  •  L'omelette  est  bonne,  aussi, 

monsieur. 

Bien,  je  prends  Pomelette. 

Une  omelette  pour  un,  boum! 

Bien  cuitel     Je  prends  aussi  des  legumes,  du  pain,  et  du  cafe 

noir. 

Bien,  monsieur.     Trois  de  cafe!  J    Boum! ...  Prenez- vous    du 

lait,  monsieur? 

Merci.** 

Voil^  de  I'eau,  monsieur.    Voili  un  couteau  et  une  fourchette. 

Et  comme  dessert,  monsieur? 

Comme  dessert,  je  prends  des  fruits. 

*  Suggested  by  a  scene  in  A.  Daudet's  Trente  Ans  de  Paris. 
t  Boum  (bocS),  bang!  is  an  exclamation  used  by  Parisian  waiters, 
t  Trois  de  caf6  is  waiter's  dialect  for  "three  cents'  worth  of  coffee." 
**  Observe  the  use  of  Merci.     Before  accepting,  Merci  means  "No,  thank 
you."     After  accepting,  Merci  means  "Thank  you." 


36  The  Elements  of  French 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  Good  morning,  sir.  What  will  you 
have  today?  2.  1^11  have  a  good  lunch,  if  you  please.  3. 
Monsieur  is  hungry,  is  he  not?  4.  Yes,  and  I  am  thirsty, 
too.  5.  Will  you  have  (some)  broth,  sir?  6.  If  you  please. 
7.  There  it  is,  sir,  and  here  is  some  water.  8.  Are  the  vege- 
tables good  today?  9.  Yes,  sir.  10.  Give  me  some  vege- 
tables, and  some  meat  —  well  cooked.  11.  Very  well,  sfr. 
Here  are  the  knife  and  fork. 


LESSON  21    (VINGT  ET  UNlfiME   LEgON) 

THE  PARTITIVE   CONSTRUCTION  —  Continued 
VOCABULAIRE 
chez  (fe)  at  the  house  of  je  mange  (39  ma:3),  /  eat  {am  eat- 

chez  elle  (fez  el),  at  her  house  ing) 

classe  (klais),  f.,  class^  classroom  pauvre  (poivr),  poor 

dans  (da),  prep.,  in  qui?  (ki),  who? 

derriere  (derjeir),  behind  riche  (rif),  rich 

mademoiselle    (Mile*)    (madmwa-      tenez-vous?     (tane   vu),    do    you 

zel).  Miss  hold? 

mangez-vous?   (mase  vu),  do  you      je  tiens  (39  tje),  /  hold 

eat?    are  you  eating? 

70.  In  the  partitive  construction,  the  article  is  usually 
omitted  after  a  negative  verb. 

1.  II  a  de  la  craie,  He  has  (some)      1.  II  n'a  pas  de  craie,  He  has  no 

chalk.  chalk, 

2.  Elle  a  du  pain,  She  has  (some)      2.  Elle  n*a  pas  de  pain,  She  has  no 

bread.  bread. 

Fill  in  the  blanks  (Remplacez  les  tirets). 

1.  Charles  a fruits.  7.  Jean  n*a  pas fruits. 

2.  Charles  a legumes.  8.  Jean  n*a  pas legumes. 

3.  Charles  a viande.  9.  Jean  n'a  pas viande. 

4.  Charles  a omelettes.  10.  Jean  n'a  pas omelettes. 

5.  Charles  a dessert.  11.  Jean  n'a  pas dessert. 

6.  Charles  a cafe.  12.  Jean  n*a  pas cafe. 

*  Observe  that  the  abbreviations  Mile  and  Mme,  in  which  e,  the  last  letter 
of  the  word,  appears,  have  no  period,  while  the  abbreviation  M.,  in  which  r, 
the  last  letter  of  the  word,  does  not  appear,  has  a  period. 


Lesson  21  37 

I.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Allez-vousbien  aujourd'hui?  2.  Avez- 
vous  faim?  3.  Avez-vous  soif?  4.  Est-ce  que  vous  avez  un 
bon  dejeuner?  5.  Est-ce  que  vous  prenez  de  la  viande?  6. 
Est-ce  que  vous  prenez  des  legumes?  7.  Est-ce  que  le  bouil- 
lon est  bon?  8.  Est-ce  que  la  viande  est  bonne?  9.  Est-ce 
que  Tomelette  est  bonne?  10.  Est-ce  que  les  legumes  sont 
bons?  11.  Prenez-vous  du  pain?  12.  Comment  mangez- 
vous  le  pain?  13.  Le  mangez-vous  avec  une  fourchette? 
14.  Comment  mangez-vous  Tomelette?  15.  Tenez-vous  la 
fourchette  a  (m)  la  main  droite?  16.  Tenez-vous  le  couteau 
k  la  main  gauche?  17.  Prenez-vous  du  lait?  18.  Prenez- 
vous  des  fruits?  19.  Mangez-vous  les  fruits  avec  une  fourr 
chette?     20.  Comment  les  mangez-vous? 

II.  Conversation. 

Maitre. Qui  est-ce? 

Eleve. — —  C'est  M.  Jacques. 

M.  (^  un  autre  eleve) : Qui  est-ce? 

E. C*est  Mile  Jeannette. 

M. 0&  est  Mme  Lemaitre? 

E. EUe  est  chez  elle. 

M. Levez-vous. 

E. Je  me  leve. 

M.^ —  Que  voyez-vous  devant  vous? 

E. Je  vols  une  table  devant  moi. 

M. Que  voyez-vous  derriere  vous? 

E. Je  vols  un  tableau  noir  derriere  moi. 

M. — —  Asseyez-vous. 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  I'll  eat  (the)  lunch  now.  2.  1^1  take 
(the)  broth  today.  3.  Then  I'll  take  (some)  vegetables.  4. 
No,  I  won't  take  any  meat  today.  5.  Will  you  have  milk 
with  the  dessert?  6.  No,  I  won't  take  any  milk.  7.  No,  I 
won't  take  any  coffee  with  (the)  lunch.  8.  You'll  have  some 
fruit  today,  won't  you?  9.  No,  thanks,  I'll  not  take  any 
fruit  today.  10.  I  shall  not  take  any  meat,  and  I  shall  not 
take  any  milk.  11.  Yes,  give  me  some  coffee,  if  you  please. 
12.  You  are  holding  the  fork  with  the  left  hand,  and  the 
knife  with  the  right  hand. 


38 


The  Elements  of  French 


IV.  Apprenez. 


AU  CLAIR  DE  LA  LUNE 

Au  clair  de  la  lune, 
Mon  ami  Pierrot, 
Prete-moi  ta  plume, 
Pour  ecrire  un  mot. 
Ma  chandelle  est  morte, 
Je  n'ai  plus  de  feu, 
Ouvre-moi  ta  porte. 
Pour  Tamour  de  Dieu. 

Au  clair  de  la  lune, 
Pierrot  repondit; 
Je  n'ai  pas  de  plume, 
Je  suis  dans  mon  lit. 
Va  chez  la  voisine, 
Je  crois  qu'elle  y  est. 
Car,  dans  sa  cuisine, 
On  bat  le  briquet. 


LESSON  22   (VINGT-DEUXifiME  LEQON) 

PRESENT   INDICATIVE   OF   ETRE,    TO   BE: 
CARDINAL   NUMERALS  11-50 

Study  the  Introduction,   §  38. 


71.  Present  Indicative  of  etre,  to  he  {le  Present  de  VIndicatif 
du  Verhe  Hre). 


Aflfirmative  {Affirmatif) 


je  suis  (38  sqi),  /  am 
tu  es  (ty  g),  you  are 
11  est  (il  e),  he  (it)  is 
elle  est  (el  e),  she  (it)  is 


nous  sommes  (nu  som),  we  are 
vous  etes  (vuz  et),  you  are 
lis  sont  (il  s5),  they  (m.)  are 
elles  sont  (el  so),  they  (f.)  are 


Note.     Distinguish   between   lis    sont    (il  so),   they   are,   and  lis  ont 
(ilz  5),  they  have. 


Lesson  22  39 

Negative  {Negalif) 
je  ne  siiis  pas  (39  na  sqi  pa),  /  am      nous ne  sommes  pas  (nu  no  som  pa), 

not  we  are  not 

tu  n'es  pas  (ty  n  8  pa),  you  are  not      vous  n*§tes  pas  (vu  n  et  pa),  you 

are  not 
il  n'est  pas  (il  n  e  pa),  he  {it)  is  not       ils  ne  sont  pas  (il  na  so  pa),  they 

(m.)  are  not 
elle  n'est  pas  (el  n  e  pa),  she  {it)      elles  ne  sont  pas  (el  na  s5  pa),  they 
is  not  (f.)  are  not 

Gonjuguez.  1.  Je  suis  a  Tecole,  tu  es  a  Tecole,  etc.  2.  Je 
suis  devant  la  fenetre,  tu  es  devant  la  fenetre,  etc.  3.  Je  ne 
suis  pas  dans  la  classe  aujourd'hui,  tu  n'es  pas  dans  la  classe 
aujourd'hui,  etc.  4.  Je  ne  suis  pas  derriere  la  table,  tu  n^es 
pas  derriere  la  table,  etc. 

72.   Apprenez. 

onze  (5:z),  eleven  vingt-trois  (vet  trwa),  twenty-three 

douze  (du:z),  twelve  vingt-quatre  (vet  katr),  twenty-four 

treize  (treiz),  thirteen  vingt-cinq  (vet  seik),  twenty-five 

quatorze  {ksitorz) ,  fourteen  vingt-six  (vet  sis),  twenty-six 

quinze  {keiz) ,  fifteen  vingt-sept  (vet  set),  twenty-seven 

seize  (seiz),  sixteen  vingt-huit  (vet  qit),  twenty-eight 

dix-sept  (dis  set),  seventeen  vingt-neuf  (vet  noef),  twenty-nine 

dix-huit  (diz  qit),  eighteen  trente  (trait),  thirty 

dix-neuf  (diz  noef),  nineteen  trente  et  un*  (trait  e  oe),  thirty-one 

vingt  (ve),  twenty  trente-deux  (trait  d0),  thirty-two 

vingt  et  un*  (vet  e  oe),  twenty-one  quarante*  {kar a:t) ,  forty 

vingt-deux  (vet  d0),  twenty-two  cinquante*  {sekait) ,  fifty 

I.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Ouetes-vous?  2.  fites-vous  aTecole? 
3.  Est-ce  que  je  suis  a  Tecole,  aussi?  4.  Ou  sommes-nous? 
5.  £ltes-vous  dans  une  classe?  6.  Est-ce  que  je  suis  dans  une 
classe?  7.  Est-ce  que  nous  sommes  dans  une  classe?  8.  Ou 
est  Jean?  9.  Ou  est  Charles?  10.  Ou  sont  Jean  et  Charles? 
11.  Oil  est  Marie?  12.  Est-ce  que  Marie  est  avec  Jeannette? 
13.  Ou  sont  Marie  et  Jeannette?  14.  Est-ce  que  Jacques  est 
derriere  la  table?  15.  Est-ce  que  le  livre  est  sur  la  table  ou 
sous  la  table?  16.  Est-ce  que  la  plume  est  sur  la  table  ou 
sous  la  table?     17.  Ou  sont  Jacques  et  Philippe? 

*21,31,41,51,61,  and  usually  71  have  et:   Trente  et  un,  quarante  et  un,  etc. 


40 


The  Elements  of  French 


II.  Apprenez. 

Addition  (Addition) 
un  et  un  font  (fo)  deux,   one  and 

one  are  two 
un  et  deux  font  trois 
un  et  trois  font  quatre 
un  et  quatre  font  cinq 
un  et  cinq  font  six 
un  et  six  font  sept 
un  et  sept  font  huit 
un  et  huit  font  neuf 
un  et  neuf  font  dix 
un  et  dix  font  onze 

III.  Apprenez. 


Multiplication  {Multiplication) 
trois  f ois  (fwa)  un  font  trois,  three 

times  one  are  three 
trois  fois  deux  font  six 
trois  fois  trois  font  neuf 
trois  fois  quatre  font  douze 
trois  fois  cinq  font  quinze 
trois  fois  six  font  dix-huit 
trois  fois  sept  font  vingt  et  un 
trois  fois  huit  font  vingt-quatre 
trois  fois  neuf  font  vingt-sept 
trois  fois  dix  font  trente 


AU  BOIS 

Un,  deux,  trois, 
J'irai  dans  le  bois. 

Quatre,  cinq,  six, 
Cueillir  des  cerises. 

Sept,  huit,  neuf, 
Dans  mon  panier  neuf. 

Dix,  onze,  douze, 

Elles  sent  toutes  rouges. 

IV.  Prononcez.  Ri,  ri,  ri,  re,  re,  re,  rue  de  Rome  {Street 
of  Rome)y  rue  de  Rivoli  {Street  of  Rivoli),  rira  {will  laugh), 
ronron  {purr),  servir  {serve),  partir  {depart),  courir  {run), 
mourir  {die),  vinrent  {came),  tinrent  {held),  peut  {can),  lui 
{to  him),  aujourd'hui  {today),  cuisine  {kitchen),  Louis  {Louis), 
pain  {bread),  comme  {as),  comprendre  {comprehend),  heureux 
{happy),  sur  {on), 

V.  Questionnaire.  1.  What  is  a  lingual  rf  2.  Pronounce 
it.  3.  What  is  the  position  of  the  tongue  for  it?  4.  What 
is  a  uvular  r?  5.  Pronounce  it.  6.  What  is  the  position 
of  the  back  of  the  tongue  for  it?  7.  Is  the  mouth  wide  open 
or  nearly  closed  for  it? 


Lesson  23 


41 


VI.  Traduisez.  1.  I  am  a  pupil.  2.  John  is  a  pupil,  also. 
3.  We  are  pupils.  4.  John  and  James  are  tall.  5.  I  am  very 
small.  6.  We  are  in  school  today.  7.  The  teacher  is  at  the 
table.  8.  We  are  in  front  of  the  table.  9.  The  teacher  says 
{dit)y  'Where  are  the  books?"  10.  Open  the  books,  and 
read  (lisez). 


LESSON   23    (VINGT-TROISlfiME   LEQON) 

POSSESSIVE   ADJECTIVES 

VOCABULAIllE 


ami  (ami),  m.^  friend 

amie  (ami),  i.,  friend 

s'appelle  (s  apel),  is  called]  is  named 

cache  (kaj),  hides 

choisit  (J*wazi),  chooses 

cousin  (kuze),  m.,  cousin 

cousine  (kuzin),  f.,  cousin 

dites  (dit),  tell;  say  (from  dire) 

embrasse  (abras),  kisses  (verb) 

enfant  (afa),  m.  or  f.,  child 

famille  (famiij),  i.,  family 

femme  (fam),  f.,  woman;  wife 

feve  (feiv),  f.,  bean 

fille  (fiij),  f.,  daughter;  girl 

fils  (fis),  m.,  son 

frere  (freir),  m.,  brother 

gateau  (gato),  m.,  cake 

joli  (3oli),  pretty 


joue  (3u),  f.,  cheek 

mange  (ma:3),  eats 

mere  (meir),  £.,  mother 

oncle  (oikl),  m.,  uncle 

pere  (peir),  m.^  father 

reine  (rem),  i.,  queen 

roi  (rwa),  m.,  king 

si  (si),  if 

soeur  (soeir),  £.,  sister 

tante  (tait),  f.,  aunt 

trouve  (truiv),  finds 

en  famille  (a  famiij),  at  home 

chez  nous,  at  our  hou^e 

chez  vous,  at  your  house 

se  met  (sa  me),  (places  himself)  sits 

down 
gateau  des  Rois,  cake  for  Epiphany 

(twelve  days  after  Christmas) 


73.   Possessive  Adjectives  (Adjectifs  Possessifs), 


SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

English 

Masculine  and 

Translation 

Masculine 

Feminine 

Feminine 

mon  (m5) 

ma  (ma) 

mes  (me) 

'(me) 

my 

ton  (to) 

ta  (ta) 

tes  (te)       ■  or  ■ 

(te) 

your 

son  (s5) 

sa  (sa) 

ses  (se)     . 

Use) 

hiSj  her,  its 

notre  (notr) 

notre  (notr) 

nos  (no) 

our 

votre  (votr) 

votre  (votr) 

vos  (vo) 

your 

leur  (loeir) 

leur  (loeir) 

leurs  (loeir) 

their 

42  The  Elements  of  French 

Exercice. 

Questions  Reponses 

1.  Est-ce  que  j*ai  mon  crayon?  1.  Oui,  monsieur,  vous  avez  votre 

crayon. 

2.  Est-ce  que  j*ai  ma  plume?  2.  Oui,  monsieur,  vous  avez  votre 

plume. 

3.  Est-ce  que  j*ai  mes  crayons?  3.  Oui,  monsieur,   vous   avez   vos 

crayons. 

4.  Est-ce  que  j*ai  mes  plumes?  4.  Oui,   monsieur,   vous   avez  vos 

plumes. 

5.  Avez-vous  vos  livres?  5.  Oui,  monsieur,  j*ai  mes  livres. 

6.  Est-ce  que  Jean  a  son  canif?  6.  Oui,  monsieur,  il  a  son  canif. 

7.  Est-ce  que  Jacques  a  ses  deux      7.  Oui,   monsieur,   il   a   ses   d3ux 

canifs?  canifs. 

8.  Est-ce  que  Jean  et  Jacques  ont      8.  Oui,    monsieur,    ils    ont    leurs 

leurs  canifs?  canifs.     lis   ont   trois   canifs. 

Make  the  answers  negative. 

(a)  Son,  sa,  and  the  other  possessive  adjectives  agree  in 
gender  with  the  nouns  which  they  modify,  not  with  the  pos- 
sessor as  in  EngUsh. 

1.  son  livre,  Jns_or  her  book 

2.  S£  plume,  his_  or  her  pen 

Questions  Reponses 

1.  Est-ce     que     Philippe     a     son       1.  Oui,  monsieur,   Philippe   a   son 

couteau?  couteau. 

2.  Est-ce    que    Jeannette    a    son      2.  Oui,  monsieur,  elle  a  son  cou- 

couteau?  teau,  aussi. 

3.  Est-ce  que  Philippe  a  sa  four-      3.  Oui,    monsieur,    il    a    sa    four- 

chette?  chette. 

4.  Est-ce  que  Jeannette  a  sa  four-      4.  Oui,  monsieur,  elle   a  sa  four- 

chette?  chette. 

5.  Est-ce  que  Jacques  mange  son      5.  Oui,    monsieur,    il  mange   son 

dejeuner?  dejeuner. 

6.  Est-ce    que    Marie  mange  son      6.  Oui,  monsieur,   elle  mange  son 

dejeuner?  dejeuner. 

Make  the  answers  negative. 

Conjuguez.     J'ai  ma  lettre,  tu  as  ta  lettre,  il  a  sa  lettre,  etc. 


Lesson  23 


43 


(6)   Possessive  adjectives,  like  the  article,  must  be  repeated 
before  each  noun  that  they  modify. 

1.  Ma  mere  et  ma  tante,  Mji  mother  and  (my)  aunt. 
Observe  that  nouns  in  modern  French  have  no  possessive  case. 

2.  Le  livre  de  Jean,  John's  hook  (literally  the  hook  ^  John.) 
Observe  that  French  nouns  are  not  declined. 


Paysannes  Frangaises 


I.  EN  FAMILLE* 

Read  the  French  (Lisez  le  frangais).  Nous  sommes  en 
famille.  Voici  mon  pere,  ma  mere,  mon  oncle,  et  ma  tante. 
Mes  deux  freres  et  mes  quatre  cousines  sont  aussi  chez  nous. 
La  famille  est  a  table.  Mon  pere  embrasse  notre  ami  Gaston 
sur  les  deux  joues.     Puis  il  se  met  a  table. 

La  famille  mange  le  gateau  des  Rois.  Ma  mere  cache  une 
f^ve  dans  le  gateau.  Si  un  homme  trouve  la  feve,  il  est  roi, 
et  choisit  une  reine.  Si  une  femme  la  trouve,  elle  est  reine, 
et  choisit  un  roi. 

Mon  pere  s'appelle  Baptiste  Chantal.  Mon  oncle  s^appelle 
Frangois    Chantal.     II    est    tres    grand.     Un    de    mes    freres 

*  Adapted  from  Mile  Perle,  by  Guy  de  Maupassant. 


44  The  Elements  of  French 

s^appelle  Jacques.     L'autre  frere  s'appelle  Paul.     Les  cousines 
sont  tres  jolies.     EUes  ont  les  yeux  bruns  et  les  cheveux  noirs. 

II.  Traduisez.  1.  My  father  and  (my)  mother.  2.  Your 
uncle  and  (your)  aunt.  3.  Their  brothers  and  (their)  sisters. 
4.  Our  cousins  (m.)  and  (our)  cousins  (f.).  5.  Your  friend  is 
named  Gaston.  6.  My  friend  (f.)  is  named  Jeanne.  7.  Our 
friends  are  at  our  house.  8.  They  are  at  (the)  table.  9. 
John  is  not  at  home  today.  10.  He  is  eating  his  lunch  at 
your  house. 

III.  Apprenez. 

FAIS  DODO 

*Fais  dodo,  Colas,  mon  petit  frere, 
Fais  dodo,  t'auras  du  gateau. 
Papa  en  aura, 
Maman  en  aura, 
Et  moi  3 'en  aurai, 
Tout  un  plein  panier. 


LESSON  24   (VINGT-QUATRlfiME  LEgON) 
POSSESSIVE  ADJECTIVES  —  Continued 

74.  Ma,  ta,  sa  change  to  mon,  ton,  son,  respectively,  before 
a  vowel  or  h  mute. 

1.  ma  plume,  my  pen,  but  mon  amie  (f.),  my  friend. 

2.  taf  chaise,  your  chair,  but  ton  ecole  (f .),  your  school. 

3.  sa  soeur,  his  (her)  sister,  but  son  enfant  (f.),  his  (her)  child. 

Exercice.    Supply  the  proper  forms  of  mon,  ton,  and  son  with : 

gateau;  omelette;  chaise;  amie;  

enfant;  encre;  ecole;  famille. 

I.   Reading   Exercise    (Exercice   de    Lecture).     Read   again 
Section  I  of  the  preceding  lesson. 

*  Fais  dodo,  go  to  sleep. 

t  The  possessives  like  ton,  ta,  etc.,  are  used  to  mean  your  only  in  familiar 
address.    In  polite  address  use  votre. 


Lesson  24  45 

IL   Questionnaire.     Use  the  proper  forms  of  men,  ton,  son, 

notre,  votre,  letir,  with  the  following  words:    fenetre; 

tantes; pere; famille; fille; fils  (sing. 

and  plur.); oncle; enfant  (masc.  and  fern.). 

III.  Conjuguez.  1.  Je  suis  sur  ma  chaise,  tu  es  sur  ta 
chaise,  etc.  2.  Est-ce  que  j^ai  mon  journal?  as-tu  ton 
journal?   etc. 

IV.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Comment  vous  appelez-vous? 
(Answer:  Je  m'appelle  .  .  .).  2.  Combien  de  freres  avez- 
vous?  3.  Combien  de  soeurs  avez-vous?  4.  Est-ce  que  vous 
avez  un  pere?  5.  Dites  son  nom,  s^il  vous  plait.  6.  Avez- 
vous  une  mere?  7.  Dites  aussi  son  nom,  s'il  vous  plait.  8. 
Combien  d'oncles  avez-vous?  9.  Dites  les  noms  de  vos 
oncles.  10.  Combien  de  tantes  avez-vous?  11.  Dites  leurs 
noms.  12.  Avez-vous  des  cousins?  13.  Avez-vous  des  cou- 
sines?     14.  fites-vous  en  famille  maintenant? 

V.  Traduisez.  1.  I  have  two  brothers  and  three  sisters. 
2.  There  are  six  children  in  our  family.  3.  There  are  my 
father  and  (my)  mother,  also.  4.  My  father  and  (my)  mother 
have  three  sons  and  three  daughters.  5.  They  (Us)  have  six 
children.  6.  My  father  has  two  sisters.  7.  They  are  our 
aunts.  8.  My  mother  has  four  brothers.  9.  They  are  our 
uncles.     10.  How  many   sisters   have   you   in   your   family? 

11.  How  many  uncles  and  aunts  are  there  in  your  family? 

12.  Are  there  any  brothers,  and  where  are  they  now?     13. 
You  have  many  friends  at  school,  have  you  not? 

VI.  Apprenez. 

SAVEZ-VOUS  PLANTER  DES   CHOUX? 

Savez-vous  planter  des  choux, 
A  la  mode,  a  la  mode? 
Savez-vous  planter  des  choux, 
A  la  mode  de  chez  nous? 


46  The  Elements  of  French 

On  les  plante  avec  le  pied, 
A  la  mode,  a  la  mode; 
On  les  plante  avec  le  pied, 
A  la  mode  de  chez  nous. 

Savez-vous  planter  des  choux,  etc. 

On  les  plante  avec  la  main, 
A  la  mode,  a  la  mode; 
On  les  plante  avec  la  main, 
A  la  mode  de  chez  nous. 

Savez-vous  planter  des  choux,  etc. 

On  les  plante  avec  le  doigt, 
A  la  mode,  a  la  mode; 
On  les  plante  avec  le  doigt, 
A  la  mode  de  chez  nous. 


LESSON   25   (VINGT-CINQUlfiME  LEgON) 
REVISION 

I.  Prononcez.  pe  (p),  peut  {can)^  des  {of  the),  deux  {two); 
si  {if),  su  {known),  vit  {saw),  vu  {seen),  mode  {style),  monde 
{world),  met  {puts),  main  {hand),  ah  {ah),  an  {year),  ri,  ri,  ri, 
re,  re  Te,  servir  {serve),  aujourd'hui  {today),  comprendre 
{understand),  sur  {on),  mourir  {die),  courir  {run),  partir  {start). 

II.  Use  the  proper  forms  of  blanc  and  noir  with  the  fol- 
lowing nouns:    crayon  ;  plume  ;  livre  ;  habit. 

;  couteau  ;  fourchette  ;  robe  . 

Use  proper  forms  of  bon  with  each  of  the  nouns  in  the  list 
above. 

III.  Supply  proper  forms  of  de  +  the  definite  article  in 

the    following    sentences:     1.  J^ai pain.     2.  • tu    as 

viande.     3.  II     a bouillon.     4.  EUe     a fruits. 

5.  Nous     avons legumes.     6.  Vous     avez cafe.     7. 

lis  ont dessert.     8.  Elles  ont lait. 

Make  the  sentences  negative. 


Lesson  25  47 

IV.  Conjuguez.  1.  Deux  fois  un  font  deux,  deux  fois  deux 
font  quatre,  etc.  2.  Cinq  fois  un  font  cinq,  cinq  fois  deux 
font  dix,  etc.  3.  Sept  fois  un  font  sept,  sept  fois  deux  font 
quatorze.     4.  Un  et  dix  font  onze,  un  et  onze  font  douze,  etc. 

V.  1.  Touchez  {touch)  trois  fois  la  chaise.  2.  Fermez  deux 
fois  la  main  gauche.  3.  Ouvrez  trois  fois  la  main  droite. 
4.  Touchez  Toreille  gauche  avec  la  main  droite.  5.  Levez  et 
baissez  quatre  fois  la  main  gauche.  6.  Levez  et  baissez  cinq 
fois  le  bras  droit. 

VI.  Conjuguez.  1.  J^ai  mon  livre,  tu  as  ton  livre,  etc. 
2.  Est-ce  que  je  suis  chez  mon  ami?   es-tu  chez  ton  ami?  etc. 

VII.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Est-ce  que  le  lait  est  noir?  2. 
Est-ce  que  la  plume  est  blanche?  3.  Est-ce  que  la  fen^tre 
est  petite?  4.  Avez-vous  de  petites  mains?  5.  Oii  mangez- 
vous  aujourd'hui?  6.  Mangez-vous  chez  vous?  7.  Prenez- 
vous  des  repas  (meals)  a  Fecole?  8.  Prenez-vous  maintenant 
votre  petit  dejeuner?  9.  Est-ce  votre  dejeuner?  10.  Que 
mangez-vous  avec  la  fourchette?  11.  Que  mangez-vous  avec 
votre  couteau?  12.  Comment  tenez-vous  votre  fourchette? 
13.  Comment  tenez-vous  votre  couteau?  14.  Ou  est  Jacques? 
15.  Ou  est  Philippe?     16.  Ou  sont  Jacques  et  Philippe? 

VIII.  Traduisez.  1.  We  are  at  home,  and  my  father  sits 
down  to  (the)  table.  2.  He  kisses  my  mother  on  the  two 
cheeks,  and  (he)  kisses  his  children  also.  3.  There  is  a 
bean  in  the  cake.  4.  My  mother  hides  it,  and  my  sister  finds 
it.  5.  She  is  queen;  but  if  a  boy  finds  the  bean,  he  is  king. 
6.  My  father's  name  is  Jacques  Lebrun,  and  my  mother  is 
Mme.  Lebrun.  7.  Our  cousins  are  also  at  our  house.  8. 
I'll  take  the  broth,  but  Fll  not  take  (any)  vegetables.  9. 
ril  take  (some)  meat,  but  Fll  not  take  (any)  dessert.  10. 
There  is  your  coffee;  you'll  take  some  fruit  also,  won't  you? 
11.  John  has  his  fork,  and  Mary  has  her  knife. 


48  The  Elements  of  French 

LESSON   26   (VINGT-SIXifiME  LEgON) 

PRESENT  INDICATIVE   OF  £>/?£  — Continued  : 
USE  OF  IL  AND  ELLE: 

QUESTIONS:    CARDINAL  NUMBERS  51-100 

Study  the  Introduction,   §§  39,  40,  41,  42,  43. 

75.  Present  Indicative  of  etrey  to  he  (le  Present  de  VIndicatif 
du  Verbe  etre). 

Interrogative  {Interrogatif) 

est-ce  que  je  suis?*  (e  s  ka  39  sqi),  sommes-nous?  (som  nu),  are  we? 

am  I?  etes-vous?  (et  vu),  are  you? 

es-tu?  (e  ty),  are  you?  sont-ils?  (sot  il),  are  they  (m.)? 

est-il?  (et  il),  is  he  (it)?  sont-elles?  (sot  el),  are  they  (f.)? 
est-elle?  (et  el),  is  she  {it)? 

Negative-Interrogative  {Negatif -Interrogatif) 

est-ce  que  je  ne  suis  pas?t  (e  s  ko  ne  sommes-nous  pas?  (no  som  nu 

30  no  sqi  pa),  am  I  not?  pa),  are  we  not? 

n*es-tu  pas?   (n  e  ty  pa),   are   you  n'etes-vous  pas?  (n  et  vu  pa),  are 

not?  you  not? 

n'est-il  pas?  (n  et  il  pa),  is  he  (it)  ne  sont-ils  pas?  (no  sot  il  pa),  are 

not?  they  (m.)  not? 

n*est-elle  pas?  (n  et  el  pa),  is  she  ne  sont-elles  pas?  (no  sot  el  pa),  are 

{it)  not?  they  (f.)  not? 

Conjuguez.  1.  Est-ce  que  je  suis  chez  mon  frere?  es-tu 
chez  ton  frere?  etc.  2.  Est-ce  que  je  ne  suis  pas  en  famille? 
n^es-tu  pas  en  famille?   etc. 

76.  Use  of  il  and  elle  {Emploi  d'il  et  d'elle). 

II,  ils,  may  refer  to  any  masculine  noun  of  the  third  person. 

Elle,  elle,  may  refer  to  any  feminine  noun  of  the  third 
person. 

*  More  usual  than  suis-je?     t  More  usual  than  ne  suis-je  pas? 


La  Rive  Gauche  h  Vol  D'Oiseau 
(Vue  d'une  tour  de  Notre  Dame) 


Lesson  26  49 

1.  J*ai  des  frdres,  /  have  (some)  brother 8. 

2.  Sont-ils  ici?  Are  they  here? 

3.  Pai  des  livr^s,  /  have  (some)  hookn. 

4.  Sont-ils  ici?  Are  they  here? 

5.  J*ai  des  soeurs,  /  have  (some)  sisters. 

6.  Od  sont-elles?  Where  are  they? 

7.  J*ai  des  plumes,  /  have  (some)  pens. 

8.  Oh  sont-elles?  Where  are  they? 

77.  Questions.  It  has  been  explained  that  Est-ce  que?  may 
be  used  to  ask  questions,  whether  the  subject  of  the  verb  is  a 
noun  or  a  pronoun.  When  Est-ce  que?  is  used,  the  order  of 
words  is  the  same  as  in  a  declarative  sentence  (cf.  §  56.) 
Another  way  of  asking  a  question,  when  the  subject  is  a  noun, 
is  to  use  a  pronoun  subject  after  the  verb,  as  well  as  a  noun 
subject  before  the  verb. 

1.  Mon  frere  est  chez  nous,  My  brother  is  at  our  house. 

2.  Mon  frere  est-il  chez  nous?  Is  my  brother  at  our  house?  (Literally 
My  brother  is  he  at  our  house?),  or,  Est-ce  que  mon  frere  est  chez  nous? 

3.  Votre  soeur  regarde  le  journal,  Your  sister  is  looking  at  the  newspaper. 
'  4.  Votre  soeur  regarde-t-elle  le  journal?  Is  your  sister  looking  at  the 
newspaper?  (Literally  Your  sister  is  she  looking  at  the  newspaper?)  or, 
Est-ce  que  votre  soeur  regarde  le  journal? 

Exercice  Oral.  1.  Votre  pere  est-il  chez  vous?  or^  Est-ce 
que  votre  pere  est  chez  vous?  2.  Votre  mere  est-elle  chez 
elle?  oVy  Est-ce  que  votre  mere  est  chez  elle?  3.  Votre  pere 
embrasse-t-il  votre  mere  sur  les  deux  joues?  or,  Est-ce  que 
votre  pere  embrasse  votre  mere  sur  les  deux  joues?  4.  Votre 
pere  se  met-il  a  table?  or,  Est-ce  que  votre  pere  se  met  a 
table?  5.  Votre  oncle  et  votre  tante  sont-ils  a  table?  or, 
Est-ce  que  votre  oncle  et  votre  tante  sont  k  table?  6.  Vos 
deux  f reres  et  vos  quatre  cousines  sont-ils  chez  vous?  or,  Est-ce 
que  vous  deux  freres  et  vos  quatre  cousines  sont  chez  vous? 

78.  Cardinal  Numerals  51-100  (les  Nombres  Cardinaux 
51-100). 

cinquante  etun  (sekait  e  oe),  51  quatre-vingts  (katr  ve),  80 

soixante  (swasait),  60  quatre-vingt-un  (katr  vs  6&),  81 

soixante-dix  (swasait  dis),  70  quatre-vingt-dix  (katr  ve  dis),  90 

soixante  et  onze  (swasait  e  5iz),  71  cent  (sa),  100 


50  The  Elements  of  French 

Multiplication  {Multiplication) 

six  fois  un  font  six  neuf  fois  un  font  neuf 

six  fois  deux  font  douze,  neuf  fois  deux  font  dix-huit, 

etc.  etc. 

I.  Exercice.  Make  questions,  in  two  ways,  of  the  follow- 
ing sentences: 

LA  CLASSE 

1.  La  salle  est  grande.  9.  L^encre  est  bleue. 

2.  Charles  ouvre  la  porte.  10.  Les  plumes  sont  noires. 

3.  Jacques  ferme  la  porte.  11.  La  craie  est  blanche. 

4.  Marie  se  met  sur  sa  chaise.  12.  La  craie  est  dans  la  boite. 

5.  La  chaise  est  ici.  13.  Le  papier  est  blanc. 

6.  La  chaise  est  devant  la  table.  14.  Les  fenetres  sont  grandes. 

7.  La  table  est  grande.  15.  Le  tableau  est  petit. 

8.  L*encre  est  sur  la  table. 

EN  FAMILLE 

1.  La  famille  est  a  table.  9.  Les  chaises  sont  petites. 

2.  Mon  pere  est  chez  nous.  10.  Le  pain  est  blanc. 

3.  Ma  mere  est  aussi  chez  nous.  11.  L'eau  est  bonne. 

4.  Les  fils  sont  a  table.  12.  Les  legumes  sont  bons. 

5.  Les  fiUes  sont  aussi  a  table.  13.  Le  lait  est  blanc. 

6.  Mes  cousins  sont  chez  vous.  14.  La  viande  est  rouge. 

7.  La  salle  est  petite.  15.  Le  cafe  est  noir. 

8.  La  table  est  ronde. 

II.  Prononcez.  Dit  (says),  du  (of  the),  de  (thimble),  deux 
(two),  droit  (right),  sud  (south),  midi  (south),  tigre  (tiger), 
t^legraphe  (telegraph),  trois  (three),  vite  (quickly),  vetement 
(garment),  boite  (box),  tante  (aunt),  lait  (milk),  leur  (their), 
lu  (read),  lit  (bed),  veulent  (wish),  consul  (consul),  gargon 
(boy),  conte  (tale),  vaine  (vain),  plait  (pleases),  lui  (to  him), 
famille  (family),  roi  (king). 

III.  Questionnaire.  1.  Is  there  any  difference  in  the  posi- 
tion of  the  tongue  for  (d)  and  for  (t)?  2.  Is  French  (d)  more 
forcible  or  less  forcible  than  English  (d)?  3.  Where  is  the 
tongue  held  to  pronounce  (1)?  4.  How  does  (1)  differ  from 
English  (1)?  5.  Is  there  any  difference  in  the  position  of  the 
tongue  for  (d),  (t),  and  (1)? 


Lesson  27  51 

IV.  Traduisez.  1.  What  is  your  father^s  name?  2.  Is 
your  father  named  Baptiste?  (Two  ways).  3.  What  is  your 
mother^s  name?  4.  Is  your  uncle  named  Frangois?  (Two 
ways).  5.  How  many  brothers  have  you?  6.  Is  one  of  your 
brothers  named  James?  (Two  ways).  7.  Is  another  of  your 
brothers  named  Paul?  (Two  ways).  8.  Have  you  any 
cousins  (f.)?  9.  Are  your  cousins  pretty?  (Two  ways).  10. 
Does  the  family  sit  down  to  (the)  table?  (Two  ways).  11. 
Does  the  family  eat  the  cake?  (Two  ways).  12.  Does  your 
mother  hide  a  bean  in  the  cake?  (Two  ways).  13.  If  a  man 
finds  it,  is  he  king?     14.  If  a  woman  finds  it,  is  she  queen? 


LESSON  27    (VINGT-SEPTIEME   LEgON) 

POSSESSION:  SOME  CONTRACTIONS  OF  A  WITH  THE  DEFINITE 
ARTICLE:   THE   DEMONSTRATIVE   ADJECTIVE 

Study  the  Introduction,   §§  44,  45,  46. 

VOCABULAIRE 

chapeau  (fapo),  m.,  hat  maison  (mezo),  or  (mGz5),  f.,  house 

Plural,  chapeaux  (fapo)  qui?  (ki),  who? 

79.  Possession  (Possession).     Possession  may  be  expressed 
in  French  by  etre  a. 

1.  _A  qui  est  le  livre?  To^  whom  does  the  hook  belong? 

2.  II  est  k  Jean,  It  belongs  to  John, 

80.  Some   Contractions    (Quelques  Contractions). 

k  -\-\e au  (o),  at  the^  to  the 

a  +  la .     No  change 

k  -^V .     No  change 

k  +  les aux  (o) 

Note.     Neither  a  nor  de  contracts  with  pronoun  forms. 
Je  commence  a  le  croire,  /  begin  to  believe  it. 
Nous  essayons  de  les  voir,  We  are  trying  to  see  them. 


52 


The  Elements  of  French 


Questions 

1.  A  qui  est  le  livre  rouge? 

2.  A  qui  est  la  plume  jaune? 

3.  A  qui  est  le  crayon  bleu? 

4.  A  qui  est  le  journal? 

5.  A  qui  est  le  canif? 

6.  A  qui  est  la  lettre? 

7.  A  qui  est  le  veston  gris? 


Reponses 

1.  II  est  au  professeur. 

2.  Elle  est  a  la  jeune  fiUe. 

3.  II  est  au  gargon. 

4.  II  est  au  pere. 

5.  II  est  au  fils. 

6.  Elle  est  a  la  mere. 

7.  n  est  ^  Poncle. 


Exercice.     Give  the  proper  forms  of,  first  de,  then  a,  + 


the  definite  article,   with  the  following  words:    main; 

mains;  oreille;  oreilles;  nez;  ceil; 

yeux ; f  enetre ; f  enetres ; eleves ; bouche ; 


bouches; 


couteau ; 


fruit; 


cafe; 


bouillon; 


pam; 


viande ; 


fourchette;  — 
-  legumes. 


81.   Demonstrative  Adjective  thiSy    that  {VAdjectif  Demon- 
stratif) . 

Plural 
ces  (se),  or  (ss) 
ces  (se),  or  (se) 

ces  (se),  or  (se) 


Masculine  Singular 

Before  a  consonant:  ce  (sa) 

Before  a  vowel  or  h  mute:  cet  (set) 

Feminine 

Before  vowels  or  consonants:  cette  (set) 


1.  ce  pere  (sa  pe:r),  this  (or  that)  father 

2.  ces  peres  (se  peir),  these  (or  those)  fathers 

3.  cet  ami  (set  ami),  this  (or  that)  friend 

4.  ces  amis  (sez  ami),  these  (or  those)  friends 

5.  cette  mere  (set  me:r),  this  (or  that)  mother 

6.  ces  meres  (se  me:r),  these  (or  those)  mothers 


Apprenez. 

Questions 

1.  A  qui  est  ce  chapeau  gris? 

2.  A  qui  est  ce  chapeau  brun? 

3.  A  qui  sont  ces  deux  chapeaux? 

4.  A  qui  est  cette  robe  jaune? 


Reponses 

1.  Ce  chapeau  gris  est  au  profes- 

seur. 

2.  Ce  chapeau  brun  est  aussi  au 

professeur. 

3.  Ces  deux  chapeaux  sont  au  pro- 

fesseur. 

4.  Cette  robe  jaune  est  a  Marie. 


Lesson  27 


53 


5.  A  qui  est  cette  robe  rouge? 

6.  A  qui  sont  ces  deux  robes? 

7.  Qui  est  cet  enfant? 

8.  Qui  est  cette  enfant? 

9.  Quels   sont   les   noms    de 

enfants? 


ces 


5.  Cette  robe   rouge   est   aussi   a 

Marie. 

6.  Ces  deux  robes  soilt  ^  Marie. 

7.  Cet  enfant  s'appelle  Jean. 

8.  Cette  enfant  s*appelle   Jeanette. 

9.  Les  noms  de  ces  enfants  sont 

Jean  et  Jeanette. 


I.   Use  the  proper  form  of  ce  with  the  following  words: 

enfant; ecole; ami; amis; oncle; 

oncles;  fenetre;  salle;  salles;  chapeau; 


chapeaux; 


bolte; 


boites; 


chaise; 


chaises; 


frere; 


mere; 


cousin ; 


cafe; 


famille;  - 
legume;  — 
-  lait; 


-  families;  - 
legumes;  — 

—  dejeuner; 


-  couteau; 
viande;  — 

—  pain;  — 


—  cousme; 
fourchette; 


omelette; 
•  maison. 


II.  Apprenez. 

JEAN  QUI  PLEURE 
ET  JEAN  QUI  RIT 

Jean  qui  pleure  et  Jean  qui  rit, 
C'est  le  soleil  et  la  pluie, 
Toujours  gai,  Tun  rejouit, 
Toujours  plaintif,  Tautre  ennuie. 

Ha!  ha!  hi!  hi! 
Jean  qui  rit  a  ri; 

Hu!  hu!  heu!  heu! 
Voila  Jean  qui  pleure. 

III.  Prononcez.  Montague  {mountain) ,  digne  (worthy) y  ig- 
norant (ignorant),  magnifique  (magnificent),  baigner  (bathe), 
craignons  (we  fear),  peignant  (combing),  agent  (agent),  general 
(general),  camouflage  (camouflage),  garage  (garage),  machine 
(engine) ,  vs(.che  (cow),  chien  (dog),  chez  (at  the  house  of),  cheval 
(horse),  juin  (June),  huit  (eight),  perdre  (lose),  veau  (calf), 
ceux  (those),  nul  (no),  soeur  (sister),  pain  (bread). 

IV.  Questionnaire.  1.  What  English  sounds  does  (ji)  re- 
semble, and  how  does  it  differ  from  the  English?  2.  Where  is 
the  tip  of  the  tongue  held  for  (J)?     3.  What  English  sound 


54  The  Elements  of  French 

does  (J)  resemble?  4.  What  is  the  position  of  the  lips  for  (3)? 
5.  What  Enghsh  sound  does  (3)  resemble?  6.  What  is  the 
position  of  the  tongue  for  (3)? 

V.  Traduisez.  1.  To  whom  does  this  red  house  belong? 
2.  It  belongs  to  his  father.  3.  To  whom  does  that  little 
table  belong?  4.  It  belongs  to  your  uncle.  5.  To  whom  does 
this  large  picture  belong?  6.  It  belongs  to  your  young  sister. 
7.  To  whom  do  those  brown  hats  belong?  8.  They  belong  to 
my  friend  (f.).  9.  To  whom  does  this  red  dress  belong? 
10.  It  belongs  to  your  aunt's  friend  (f.). 


LESSON   28   (VINGT-HUITlfiME  LEgON) 

LES  VETEMENTS   (CLOTHES) 

VOCABULAIRE 

corps  (ko:r),  m.,  body  portez-vous?    (porte    vu),    do   you 

dos  (dos),  m.,  hack  wear?    are  you  wearing? 

gilet  (sile),  m.,  vest  je  porte  (39  port),  /  wear  {am  wear- 

jambe  (3a:b),  f.,  leg  ing) 

montrez-moi  (motre  mwa),  show  me  qu'est-ce  que?  (k  e  s  ka),  what?  (as 

pantalon  (pdtalo),  m.,  trousers  object  of  verb) 

par-dessus  (pardsy),  prep.,  over  Soulier  (sulje),  m.,  shoe 

pardessus  (pardsy),  m.,  overcoat  vetements  (vGtma),m.,plur.,cZo//ies, 

pied  (pje),  m..,foot  clothing 
poitrine  (pwatrin),  f.,  chest 

I.  Exercice  de  Lecture.  Voici  des  vetements.  Sur  la  tete 
je  porte  un  chapeau  noir.  Voila  le  petit  chapeau  de  Charles; 
il  est  gris.  Ce  chapeau  brun  est  a  Philippe.  Sur  le  dos  j^ai 
un  veston  bleu.  Le  veston  brun  est  a  Charles.  Voila  aussi 
un  veston  gris;  il  est  a  Jacques.  Sous  le  veston  il  y  a  un  gilet 
bleu.  Je  porte  aussi  un  pardessus  noir.  Le  pardessus  de 
Jean  est  gris.  Ce  grand  pardessus  brun  est  a  Philippe.  Sur 
les  jambes  je  porte  un  pantalon  bleu.  Voila  un  pantalon 
gris;  il  est  a  Jacques.  Charles  a  un  pantalon  brun.  Que 
portez-vous  sur  les  pieds?  Jacques  porte  des  souliers  jaunes; 
mes  souliers  sont  noirs. 


Lesson  28  55 

II.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Montrez-moi  des  vetements.  2.  Que 
portez-vous  sur  la  tete?  3.  Est-ce  que  vous  portez  un  chapeau 
noir?  4.  Qu^est-ce  que  vous  portez  sur  le  dos?  5.  De  quelle 
couleur  est  ce  veston?  6.  A  qui  est  ce  veston  brun?  7.  A 
qui  est  ce  veston  gris?  8.  Qu^est-ce  que  vous  portez  par- 
dessus  le  veston?  9.  Votre  pardessus  est-il  grand  ou  petit? 
10.  De  quelle  couleur  est  le  pardessus  de  Charles?  11.  A  qui 
est  ce  pardessus  gris?  12.  Montrez-moi  un  pardessus  noir, 
s41  vous  plait.  13.  Comment  portez-vous  votre  gilet?  14. 
Le  portez-vous  sur  le  dos?  15.  De  quelle  couleur  est  votre 
gilet?  16.  De  quelle  couleur  est  votre  robe,  mademoiselle? 
17.  Qu^est-ce  que  vous  portez  sur  les  pieds?  18.  De  quelle 
couleur  sont  vos  souliers?  19.  Est-ce  que  vos  souliers  sont 
grands  ou  petits?  20.  Combien  de  souliers  avez-vous?  21. 
Combien  de  vestons  avez-vous,  monsieur?  22.  Combien  de 
robes  avez-vous,  mademoiselle? 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  These  clothes  belong  to  my  uncle,  do 
they  not?  2.  Here  is  his  gray  hat;  he  has  no  black  hat. 
3.  That  black  hat  belongs  to  your  cousin,  does  it  not?  4. 
Here  is  a  brown  hat  on  the  chair;  it  belongs  to  Philip.  5. 
Do  you  wear  these  gray  trousers,  or  is  it  your  brother  who 
{qui)  wears  them?  6.  Here  are  some  black  shoes;  you  have 
no  black  shoes,  have  you?  7.  Give  me  that  little  gray  hat, 
if  you  please.  8.  Does  this  clothing  belong  to  you?  9.  Here 
is  your  hat,  but  those  shoes  belong  to  your  cousin.  10.  What 
is  the  color  of  your  coat,  black  or  blue?  11.  Today  you  are 
wearing  a  black  coat  and  vest,  with  gray  trousers,  are  you  not? 

IV.  Apprenez. 

FRERE  JACQUES 

Fr^re  Jacques,  frere  Jacques, 
Dormez-vous,  dormez-vous? 
Sonnez  les  matines,  sonnez  les  matines, 
Din,  din,  don, 
Din,  din,  don. 


56  The  Elements  of  French 

LESSON   29   (VINGT-NEUVlfiME  LEgON) 
PRESENT  INDICATIVE  OF  DONNER:     USE  OF  THE  PRONOUN  EN 

Study  the  Introduction,  §  45,  especially  section  h;  also  §  46. 

VOCABULAIRE 
admirer  (admire),  to  admire  entrer  (dans)  (atre  da),  to  enter 

boutique  (butik),  f.,  shop  feuille  (foeij),  f.,  leaf 

commander  (komade),  to  order  morceau  (morso),  m.,  piece;  morsel 

complet  (kopls),  m.,  suit  {of  clothes)  Plural,  morceaux  (morso) 

deja  (de3a),  already 

82.  The  Three  Conjugations  {les  Trots  Conjugaisons). 
There  are  three  regular  conjugations  in  French,  distinguished 

by  the  endings  of  the  infinitives.     These  endings  are: 
-er   (First  Conjugation) 
-ir    (Second  Conjugation) 
-re   (Third  Conjugation) 

1.  donner  (done),  (to)  give  First  Conjugation 

2.  finir  (finiir),  (to)  finish  Second  Conjugation 

3.  perdre  (perdr),  (to)  lose  Third  Conjugation 

83.  Present  Indicative  of  donner  {le  Present  de  VIndicatif 

du  Verhe  donner). 

Affirmative  (Affirmatif) 
je  donne  (3^  don),  /  give^  am  giving. 
tu  donnes  (ty  don),  you  give,  are  giving. 
il  donne  (il  don),  he  gives,  is  giving. 
nous  donnons  (nu  dono),  we  give,  are  giving. 
vous  donnez  (vu  done),  you  give,  are  giving. 
lis*  donnent  (il  don),  they  give,  are  giving. 

Interrogative  (Interrogatif) 
est-ce  que  je  donne ?t  (e  s  ko  30  don),  do  I  give?  am  I  giving? 
donnes- tu?  (don  ty),  do  you  give?  are  you  giving? 
donne-t-il?  (don  t  il),  does  he  give?  is  he  giving? 
donnons-nous?  (dono  nu),  do  we  give?  are  we  giving? 
donnez-vous?  (done  vu),  do  you  give?  are  you  giving? 
donnent-ils?  (dont  il),  do  they  give?  are  they  giving? 

*  Observe  that  -ent  is  silent  in  the  third  person  plural  of  verbs.  It  is 
sounded  in  other  words,  as  comment  (koma). 

t  More  common  than  donne-je?  (done  3),  which  is  rarely  used. 

(Note  that  e  is  pronounced  (e)  when  there  is  a  mute  e  (o)  in  the  following 
syllable.) 


Lesson  29  57 

Negative  (Negatif) 

je  ne  donnje  pas  (3a  na  don  pa),  /  do  not  give,  am  not  giving. 
tu  ne  donnes  pas  (ty  na  don  pa),  you  do  not  givCy  are  not  giving, 
il  ne  donn^  pas  (il  na  don  pa),  he  does  not  givey  is  not  giving. 
nous  ne  donnons  pas  (nu  na  don5  pa),  we  do  not  give^  are  not  giving. 
vous  ne  donnez  pas  (vu  na  done  pa),  you  do  not  give^  are  not  giving. 
ils  ne  donnent  pas  (il  na  don  pa),  they  do  not  give^  are  not  giving. 

Negative-Interrogative  {Negatif -1  nterrogatif) 

*  est-ce  que  je  ne  donne  pas?  (s  s  ka  3a  na  don  pa),  do  I  not  give?  an 
I  not  giving? 

ne  donnes-tu  pas?  (na  don  ty  pa),  do  you  not  give?  are  you  not  giving? 
ne  donne-t-il-pas?  (na  don  t  il  pa),  does  he  not  give?  is  he  not  giving? 
ne  donnons-nous  pas?  (na  dono  nu  pa),  do  we  not  give?  are  we  not  giving? 
ne  donnez-vous  pas?  (na  done  vu  pa),  do  you  not  give?  are  you  not  giving? 
ne  donnent-ils  pas?  (na  dont  il  pa),  do  they  not  give?  are  they  not  giving? 

Conjuguez.  1.  Je  donne  du  pain  au  gargon,  tu  donnes  du 
pain  au  gargon,  etc.  2.  Je  trouve  mes  souliers,  tu  trouves 
tes  souliers,  etc.  3.  Je  ne  porte  pas  de  pardessus,  tu  ne 
portes  pas  de  pardessus,  etc.  4.  Est-ce  que  je  touche  la 
table?   touches-tu  la  table?   etc* 

CONVERSATION 

— Je  donne^  un  crayon  a  Marie. 

Qui  donn£le  crayon? 
— ^Vous  donnez  le  crayon. 
— Donnez-vous  aussi  un  crayon  a  Marie? 
— Oui,  monsieur,  je  le  donne^a  Marie.    Nous  donnons  des  crayons. 

Jacques  donnje^  une  f euille  de  papier  k  Charles. 

Jean  donnje  une  f euille  de  papier  a  Charles. 

Jacques  et  Jean  donnent  du  papier  k  Charles. 

84.  The  Pronoun  en  (le  Pronom  en).  En  (a)  =  de  +  a 
pronoun  of  the  third  person.  Translate  en  by  of  it,  of  therriy 
from  ity  from  them,  by  some  or  any  when  there  is  no  noun. 

*  Instead  of  ne  dpnne-je  pas?  (na  done  5  pa),  which  is  rarely  usedt 


58  The  Elements  of  French 

Position.     En  immediately  precedes  the  verb. 

1 .  Prenez-vous  du  pain? — Oui,  monsieur,  j'en  prends,  s*il  vous  plait. 

2.  Prenez-vous  des  legumes? — Merci,  je  n^en  prends  pas.  En  prenez- 
vous? 

3.  Prenez-vous  du  cafe? — Merci,  monsieur,  j*en  aide  ji.  En  avez-vous? 

4.  Prenez-vous  de  la  viande? — Merci,  monsieur,  je  n'en^  prends  pas 
maintenant.    En  prenez-vous? 

5.  Mangez-vous  des  fruits? — Oui,  monsieur,  j'en  mange. 

6.  Portez-vous  des  souliers? — J'en  porte. 

7.  Portez-vous  des  chapeaux? — J'en  porte  un. 

I.  Conjuguez.  1.  J^en  donne  a  mes  cousins,  tu  en  donnes 
a  tes  cousins,  etc.  2.  Je  n'en  trouve  pas  chez  nous,  tu 
n^en  trouves  pas  chez  nous,  etc.  3.  J^entre  dans  cette  bouti- 
que, tu  entres  dans  cette  boutique,  etc.  4.  Est-ce  que  je 
commande  un  bon  complet?  commandes-tu  un  bon  com- 
plet?  etc.  5.  Est-ce  que  je  n^en  trouve  pas?  n'en  trouves- 
tu  pas?  etc. 

II.  In  the  following  sentences,  substitute  en  for  the  words 
in  italics,  placing  en  immediately  before  the  verb: 

1.  Est-ce  que  j'ai  des  crayons?  2.  N^avez-vous  pas  de 
plumes?  3.  Trouvez-vous  de  la  craie?  4.  Y  a-t-il  des  fene- 
tres?  5.  Combien  de  plumes  trouvez-vous?  6.  Combien  de 
portes  y  a-t-il?  7.  Combien  de  tables  y  a-t-il?  8.  Vous  n^avez 
pas  de  papier,     9.  Est-ce  que  vous  n^avez  pas   de  journal? 

10.  Yoilk  du  lait,     11.  Yoici  du  dessert,     12.  Yoici  de  la  viande. 

Let  the  student  answer  the  questions  in  the  above  exercise, 
using  en.     Also,  let  him  conjugate  each  verb,  using  en. 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  We  order  some.  2.  You  do  not  order 
any.  3.  Do  they  order  any?  4.  I  do  not  find  any.  5.  Do 
they  find  any?  6.  We  find  some,  do  we  not?  7.  Will  you 
have  some  broth?  8.  I  have  some  already,  thank  you.  9. 
Will  you  have  some  milk?    10.  1^11  not  have  any,  thank  you. 

11.  What   will   you   have   for   dessert?      12.  I'll   have   some 
fruit,  if  you  please.     13.  Here  is  some. 


Lesson  30  59 

IV.  Apprenez. 

LA  BONNE  AVENTURE 

Je  suis  un  petit  gargon, 

De  belle  figure, 
Qui  aime  bien  les  bonbons, 

Et  les  confitures. 
Si  vous  voulez  bien  m'en  donner, 
Je  saurai  bien  les  manger. 
La  bonne  aventure! 

Oh!  gai! 
La  bonne  aventure! 

Lorsque  les  petits  gargons, 
oi         Sont  gentils  et  sages, 

On  leur  donne  des  bonbons,  ,  . 

De  jolies  images. 
Mais  quand  ils  se  font  gronder, 
C*est  le  fouet  qu*il  faut  donner! 
La  triste  aventure! 

Oh!  gai! 
La  triste  aventure! 


LESSON  30   (TRENTlfiME  LEgON) 
REVISION 

I.  Conjuguez.  1.  Est-ce  que  je  suis  dans  ma  maison? 
es-tu  dans  ta  maison?  etc.  2.  Est-ce  que  je  ne  suis  pas 
chez  elle?  n'es-tu  pas  chez  elle?  etc.  3.  Est-ce  que  je  le 
donne?  le  donnes-tu?  etc.  4.  Est-ce  que  je  ne  les  trouve 
pas?  ne  les  trouves-tu  pas?  etc.  5.  J^en  trouve,  tu  en 
trouves,  etc.  6.  Je  n'ai  pas  de  cafe,  tu  n'as  pas  de  cafe, 
etc. 

II.  Use  the  proper  form  of  ce,  son,  and  bon  with  the  follow- 
ing words:    chapeaux;  ecole;  chaise;  

chaises;  granomaire;  fenetre;  fenetres;  

viande;  amie; ami;  oncle;  oncles; 


enfant  (m.  and  f.); enfants  (m.  and  f.); morceau; 

feuille. 


60  The  Elements  of  French 

III.   Supply  words  for  the  blanks:     1.  Void legumes. 

prenez-vous?     2.  Donnez-moi    viande,    s'il    vous 


plait.     3.  Merci,   je  prends  pas.    4.  Donnez-moi 

fruits,  s^il  vous  plait.     5. voil^,  monsieur.     6.  Je  prends 

aussi   lait   et  eau.     7.  Prenez-vous  dessert? 

8.  Merci,  j  ai  deja. 

IV.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Qu'est-ce  que  vous  portez  sur  la 
tete?  2.  De  quelle  couleur  est-il?  3.  Qu'est-ce  que  vous 
portez  sur  le  corps?  4.  De  quelle  couleur  est-il?  5.  Montrez- 
moi  des  pardessus,  s^il  vous  plait.  6.  A  qui  est  ce  pardessus 
brun?  7.  Que  portez-vous  sur  les  pieds?  8.  De  quelle  cou- 
leur est  votre  robe,  mademoiselle?  9.  Combien  de  robes  avez- 
vous,  mademoiselle?  10.  Combien  de  gilets  avez-vous,  mon- 
sieur? 

V.  Traduisez.  1.  Is  this  room  large  or  small?  2.  Is  that 
table  round?  3.  Is  there  any  broth  today?  4.  Are  there  any 
vegetables  on  the  table?  5.  Give  some  water  to  this  child,  if 
you  please.  6.  Is  the  meat  good  today?  7.  Will  you  have 
some?  Here  is  some,  sir.  8.  Thank  you,  I'll  not  take  any, 
but  there  is  some  for  your  son.  9.  Does  that  black  hat  belong 
to  your  son?  10.  Does  that  white  dress  belong  to  Mary  or  to 
your  daughter?  11.  Here  is  your  overcoat,  but  this  sack  coat 
belongs  to  your  cousin.  12.  Give  me  that  brown  vest,  if  you 
please. 

VI.  Supplementary  Exercise  {Exercice  Supplementaire) .  1. 
Are  your  father  and  (your)  mother  at  home  today?  (Two 
ways).  2.  Whose  is  this  red  pen-holder?  3.  Does  not  this 
pen-holder  belong  to  the  pupil?  4.  Whose  are  these  white 
dresses?  5.  Do  not  these  white  dresses  belong  to  Mary's 
friend?  6.  Do  not  these  clothes  belong  to  your  uncle?  7. 
You'll  have  lunch  now,  will  you  not?  8.  I'll  not  have  any 
meat,  but  I'll  have  vegetables,  if  you  please.  9.  Won't  you 
have  some  cake  for  dessert?  10.  There  is  some.  11.  Will 
you  have  some?     Thank  you,  I'll  not  have  any  today. 


Lesson  31  61 

LESSON  31    (TRENTE  ET  UNlfiME  LEgON) 

UNE  PROMENADE 

VOCABULAIRE 

americain  (amerike),  adj.,  American  mesure  (mazyir),  f.,  measure 

beaucoup  (de)  (boku),  much;  a  great  paire  (pe:r),  f.,  pair 

deal;  a  great  many  on  peut  (5  p0),  one  {we,  they)  can 

coupe  (kup),  f.,  cut  (of  clothes)  promenade  (promnad),  f.,  walk 

diner  (dine),  m.,  dinner  poche  (poj*),  f.,  pocket 

dit  (di),  says;  said  prix  (pri),  m.,  price 

elegant  (elega),  adj.,  elegant;  stylish  pourquoi  (purkwa),  why 

enfin  (afe),  adv. j  finally;  at  last  quel  (kel),  m.,  adj.,  what,  what  a 
fort  (foir),  adv.,  very  Fern.,  quelle  (kel) 

froid    (frwa),    m.,    (noun    and  ad-  je  reponds  (3a  repo),  /  reply 

jective),  cold  revolver  (revolveir),  m.,  revolver 

franc  (fra),  m.,  franc  (French  coin  rue  (ry),  f.,  street 

worth  about  20  cents)  tailleur  (tajoeir),  m.,  tailor 

garantir  (garatiir),  to  protect;  guar-  theatre  (teaitr),  m.,  theater 

antee  y  (i),  there;  at  it;  to  it;  at  thern;  to 
s'habiller   (s  abije),   to  dress  one's  them.     (Precedes  verb;  less  em- 

self  phatic  than  la,  there) 

me    (ma),   me   (used   as   object   of  giletdefantaisie  (siledafdtezi),  m., 

verb)  fancy  vest 

I.  UNE  PROMENADE 

Me  voila  dans  la  rue  Auber,  a  Paris.  J^  admire  beaucoup 
les  boutiques  des  tailleurs.  On  peut  s^  habiller  des  pieds  a 
la  tete.  J^entre  dans  une  de  ces  boutiques.  Je  commande 
un  veston  noir,  un  pantalon  gris,  et  un  gilet  de  fantaisie.  Le 
prix  en  est  de  deux  cents  (200)  francs.  C'est  un  complet 
fort  elegant. 

Un  des  tailleurs  prend  (takes)  ma  mesure  pour  le  veston. 

Quelle  coupe?  dit-il. 

La  coupe  americaine. 

Combieu  de  poches? 

Beaucoup,  s'il  vous  plait. 

Et  combien  de  poches  revolver*  au  pantalon? 

Deux  poches  revolver. 

*  Usually  a  common  noun  used  as  an  adjective  is  invariable. 


62  The  Elements  of  French 

' Deux  poches  revolver!     Quel  Americain!  dit  le  tailleur. 


Je  commande  aussi  un  pardessus,  pour  me  garantir  du  froid. 
Puis,   je   trouve  une  paire  de  souliers  fort  Elegants  et  k 
(fitting)  mon  pied. 
Enfin,  je  dine,  et  je  vais  au  theatre. 

II.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Dans  quelle  rue  etes-vous?  2.  Ou 
se  trouve  (is)  la  rue  Auber?  3.  Est-ce  qu'il  y  a  des  boutiques 
dans  cette  rue?  4.  A  qui  sont  les  boutiques?  5.  Que  faites- 
vous  dans  les  boutiques?  6.  Est-ce  que  vous  entrez  dans  une 
boutique?  7.  Qu^est-ce  que  vous  commandez?  8.  Est-ce  que 
vous  commandez  un  veston?  9.  De  quelle  couleur  est  ce 
veston?  10.  De  quelle  coupe  est  ce  veston?  11.  Est-ce 
que  c'est  un  grand  veston?  12.  Est-ce  que  vous  commandez 
un  pantalon?  13.  De  quelle  couleur  est  ce  pantalon?  14. 
Portez-vous  aussi  un  gilet?  15.  Est-ce  un  gilet  de  fantaisie? 
16.  Qui  prend  votre  mesure?  17.  Pourquoi  prend-il  votre 
mesure?  18.  Quelle  coupe  commandez-vous?  19.  Combien 
de  poches  avez-vous?  20.  Qu'est-ce  que  vous  portez  dans  les 
poches?  21.  Portez-vous  des  revolvers?  22.  Montrez-moi 
une  poche  revolver.  23.  Pourquoi  portez-vous  un  pardessus? 
24.  Commandez-vous  une  paire  de  souliers?  25.  Ces  souliers 
sont-ils  elegants?     26.  Ces  souliers  sont-ils  a  votre  pied? 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  The  Rue  Auber  is  a  large  street  in  (of) 
Paris.  2.  There  are  many  shops  in  this  street.  3.  We  admire 
them  a  great  deal.  4.  We  enter  (in)  one  of  these  shops  to 
order  some  clothes.  5.  In  this  shop  there  are  some  gray 
sack  coats,  and  some  fancy  vests.  6.  Thank  you,  I'll  not 
order  any  today.  7.  Here  is  a  very  elegant  suit,  but  the 
price  (of  it)  is  (of)  200  francs.  8.  I'll  take  this  suit,  if  you 
please.  9.  There  are  many  cuts,  but  I'll  take  the  American 
cut.  10.  Give  me  some  hip  pockets,  if  you  please,  and  three 
or  four  other  pockets.  11.  I  always  have  (J'ai  toujours)  b. 
great  many  pockets.  12.  I  carry  penknives,  pencils,  pens, 
and  francs  in  my  pockets.     13.  I'll  take  another  pair  of  shoes 


Lesson  32  63 

now,  if  you  please.  14.  These  shoes  are  not  stylish,  and  do 
not  fit  my  feet.  15.  Then  Fll  take  some  dinner;  I  am  hungry 
already.     16.  Are  you  going  to  the  theater  this  evening? 

IV.  SUPPLEMENTARY    EXERCISE     (EXERCICE 

SUPPLEMENTAIRE) 
Conversation. 

1 .  Montrez-moi  un  chapeau. 

2.  Touchez  le  chapeau  avec  la  main  gauche. 

3.  Levez  le  chapeau. 

4.  Mettez  le  chapeau  sur  une  chaise. 

5.  Montrez-moi  votre  veston,  monsieur. 

6.  Montrez-moi  votre  robe,  mademoiselle. 

7.  Touchez  votre  veston  avec  la  main  droite. 

8.  Combien  de  poches  avez-vous? 

9.  Mettez  la  main  gauche  dans  une  poche. 

10.  Mettez  la  main  droite  dans  une  poche  revolver. 

11.  Comptez  vos.  poches. 


LESSON  32   (TRENTE-DEUXifiME  LEQON) 

SECOND  AND  THIRD  CONJUGATIONS 

VOCABULAIRE 
balle  (bal),  f.,  hall;  bullet  coup  (ku),  m.,  stroke 

choisir  (Jwaziir),  to  choose  entendre  (ataidr),  to  hear 

85. 

First  Conjugation  Second  Conjugation  Third  Conjugation 

(Premiere  Conjugaison)    (Deuxieme  Conjugaison)    (Troisieme  Conjiigaisori) 

Infinitive  (Infinitif) 
donner  (done),  to  give     finir  (finiir),  to  finish  perdre  (psrdr),'^<o  Zose 

Present  Participle  (Participe  PrSsent) 
donnant*  (dona) , giving  finissant *  (finisa) , finishing  perdant*  (psrda),  losing 

Past  Participle  {Participe  PassS) 
donn6  (done),  given         fini  (fini),  finished  perdu  (psrdy),  lost 

*  Note  that  the  present  participle  always  ends  in  -ant,  but  in  the  second  con- 
jugation it  ends  in  -issant. 


64  The  Elements  of  French 

86.  The  Present  Indicative  stem  of  regular  verbs  may  always 
be  obtained  in  the  following  manner: 

For  the  singular^  drop  the  ending  of  the  infinitive. 
For  the  plural^  drop  the  -ant  of  the  present  participle. 

The  stems  of  the  model  verbs  donner,  finfr,  perdre,  will 
thus  be: 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

donn-  donn- 

fin-  finiss-  *^ 

perd-  perd- 

The  following  personal  endings  are  added  to  the  stem : 

SINGULAR  PLURAL 

First  Conj.        Second  Conj.  Third  Conj.  All  Conj. 

1.  -e  -is  -s  -ons 

2.  -es  -is  -s  -ez 

3.  -e  -it  -t  -ent 

87.  The  Present  Indicative  of  donner^  finhy  perdre  {le 
Present  de  VIndicatif  de  donner,  ftnir,  perdre). 

'8  Qj  (donne  (don)  '§  <u  Cfinjs  (fini)  'S  o  (perds  (peir) 

g  -3  K  donnes  (don)  §  ^  i  ^}1  (^^^)  §  ^  i  P®*"^^  (P^ir) 

o  <  I  donne  (don)  ©  ^  ( finit  (fini)  ^  ^  ( perd*  (peir) 

donnons  (dono)  finissons  (finiso)  perdons  (psrdo) 

donnez  (done)  finissez  (finise)  perdez  (perde) 

donnent  (don)t  finissent  (finis)t  perdent  (pGrd)t 

Conjuguez.  1.  Je  finis  ce  coup,  tu  finis  ce  coup,  etc.  2.  Je 
perds  la  balle,  tu  perds  la  balle,  etc.  3.  Est-ce  que  je  Ten- 
tends?  Tentends-tu?  etc.  4.  Est-ce  que  je  choisis  ce  complet? 
choisis-tu  ce  complet?  etc. 

*  Perd  is  an  irregular  form.  Like  other  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation, 
whose  stems  end  in  d  or  t,  perdre  adds  no  t  in  the  third  singular  of  the  present 
indicative.  Compare  the  regular  verb  rompre,  to  break,  the  third  singular  of 
which  is  rompt. 

t  Observe  that  -ent,  as  the  third  person  plural  ending  of  a  verb,  is  silent. 


Lesson  32 


G5 


Questions 

1.  Voici  des  crayons,  Est-ce  que 

je  choisis  un  crayon  bleu? 

2.  Quel  crayon  choisissez-vous? 

3.  Quels    crayons    choisissons- 

nous? 

4.  Quel  crayon  choisit  Charles? 

5.  Quel  crayon  choish  Jean? 

6.  Quels  crayons  Charles  et  Jean 

choisissent-ils? 

7.  Perdez-vous  votre  plume? 

8.  Est-ce  que  je  perds  aussi  ma 

plume? 

9.  Est-ce  que  nous  perdqns  nos 

plumes? 

10.  Est-ce   que   Jacques    perd    sa 

plume? 

11.  Est-ce  que  Philippe  perd  aussi 

sa  plume? 

12.  Est-ce  que  Jacques  et  Philippe 

per  dent  leurs  plumes? 


Reponses 

1.  Vous  le  choisissez. 

2.  Je  choisis  aussi  un  crayon  bleu. 

3.  Nous  choisissons  des  crayons 

bleus. 

4.  n  choisjt  xm  crayon  rouge. 

5.  n  choisjt  aussi  un  crayon  rouge. 

6.  Us  choisissent    des    crayons 

rouges. 

7.  Je  la  perds. 

8.  Vous  la  perdcz,  aussi. 

9.  Nous  les  perdons. 

10.  II  la  perd. 

11.  n  la  perd,  aussi. 

12.  lis  les  perdent. 


I.  Questionnaire.  1.  Give  the  interrogative,  negative,  and 
negative-interrogative  of  finir,  perdre,  choisir,  entendre,  and 
garantir. 

II.  Conjuguez.  1.  J'entends  ma  mere,  tu  entends  ta  mere, 
etc.  2.  Je  finis  mon  diner,  tu  finis  ton  diner,  etc.  3.  Est-ce 
que  je  perds  mon  pardessus?  perds-tu  ton  pardessus?  etc. 
3.  Est-ce  que  je  choisis  un  complet  gris?  choisis-tu  un  com- 
plet  gris?  etc.  4.  Je  ne  finis  pas  ma  legon,  tu  ne  finis  pas  ta 
legon,  etc. 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  I  am  losing.  2.  Are  you  losing?  3. 
Do  they  lose?  4.  We  are  finishing.  5.  Does  he  choose? 
6.  Do  I  finish?  7.  Does  the  teacher  hear?  8.  Do  the  pupils 
hear?  9.  Do  they  (f.)  not  choose?  10.  This  tailor  guaran- 
tees this  overcoat,  does  he  not? 


66  The  Elements  of  French 

LESSON  33   (TRENTE-TROISlfiME   LEgON) 

LA  PARTIE  DE  TENNIS 

VOCABULAIRE 

attendre  (ataidr),  to  wait^  wait  for  inattention  (inatasjo),  f.,  inattention 

Annette  (anet),  f.,  Annette  jeu  (30),  m.,  game 
avantage  (avatars),  m.,  advantage  Plural  jeux  (30) f 

chercher  (J'srje),  to  look  for  jouer  (3we),  to  play 

chien  (Jje),  m.,  dog  maman  (mama),  f.,  mamma 

centre  (koitr),  against  mettre  (metr),  irreg.,  to  put;  put  on 

crier  (krie),  to  cry  passer  (pase),  to  pass 

a  deux  (a  d0),  deu^e  point  (pwe),  m.,  point;  (plural)  score 

delicatesse  (delikates),  f.,  delicacy  profiter  (profile),  to  profit 

distraction  (distraksjo),  f.,  distrac-  queue  (k0),  f.,  tail 

Hon  rapporter  (raporte),  to  bring  back 

en*  (a),  prep.,  in,  into  (less  restric-  remuer  (ramqe),  to  stir,  wag 

live  than  dans)  saisir  (seziir),  to  seize 

encore  (akoir),  yet,  still,  again  tennis  (tenis),  m.,  tennis 

gagner  (gajie),  to  win,  gain  terre  (teir),  f.,  earth,  ground 

gueule  (goel),  f.,jaws  (of  an  animal)  toujours  (tusuir),  always 

va  chercher,  goes  for.  II  va  chercher  le  journal,  He  goes  after  {goes  to 
get)  the  newspaper. 

passer  contre  nous,  to  strike  (pass)  against  us 
en  remnant  {while)  moving,  wagging 

I.  LA  PARTIE  DE  TENNISJ 

Annette  joue  au  tennis  avec  M.  Bertin.  Sa  mere  les  entend 
crier  les  points:  quinze,  trente,  quarante,  a  deux,  avantage, 
jeu. 

Sa  mere  va  chercher  Annette  .  .  .  Annette  dit: 

Bonjour,  maman,  attends  .  .  .  Nous  n'avons  pas  encore 

fini  ce  coup. 

Cette  distraction  perd  la  jeune  fille.  La  balle  passe  contre 
elle,  et  touche  terre. 

M.  Bertin  crie  ''Gagne.'' 

*  As  a  rule,  the  preposition  en  is  not  used  before  an  article, 
t  Note  that  nouns  ending  in  -au,  -eu,  add  -x  in  the  plural. 
X  From  a  scene  in  Fort  comme  la  mort,  by  Guy  d"e  Maupassant. 


Lesson  34  67 

La  jeune  fiUe  crie:  '^Vous  avez  profite  de  mon  inattention/' 
Julio,  le  chien,  cherche  la  balle.     II  la  saisit  dans  la  gueule 
avec  delicatesse,  et  la  rapporte,  en  remnant  la  queue. 

II.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Qui  joue  au  tennis?  2.  Combien  de 
points  y  a-t-il?  3.  Comptez  les  points,  s^il  vous  plait.  4.  Qui 
va  chercher  Annette?  5.  Que  dit  Annette?  6.  Est-ce  que 
la  jeune  fille  perd  le  point?  7.  Ou  passe  la  balle?  8.  Que 
touche  la  balle?  9.  Qu'est-ce  que  M.  Bertin  crie?  10.  Quelle 
est  la  reponse  de  la  jeune  fille?  11.  Comment  s'appelle  le 
chien?  12.  Ou  va  le  chien?  13.  Comment  saisit-il  la  balle? 
14.  Est-ce  qu^il  la  rapporte?     15.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  remue? 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  John  and  James  are  playing  (at  the) 
tennis.  2.  There  are  sixty  points  in  (d)  that  game.  3. 
The  following  are  (here  are)  the  points:  fifteen,  thirty, 
forty,  game.  4.  John  has  the  advantage  by  (de)  ten  points. 
5.  He  has  forty  points  against  thirty.  6.  Then  (puis) 
James  wins  ten  points.  7.  The  score  is  now  deuce  (they  arc 
now  at  deuce).  8.  John  wins  the  advantage,  then  the  game. 
9.  He  cries,  "IVe  won  for  the  first  (premiere)  timeT' 

IV.  Apprenez. 

LE  CHIEN 

II  y  a  un  petit  chien  chez  nous, 

Qui  remue  les  pattes, 

Qui  remue  les  pattes, 
II  y  a  un  petit  chien  chez  nous, 

Qui  remue  les  patt',  tout  comme  vous. 


LESSON   34   (TRENTE-QUATRlfiME  LEgON) 

CE  .  .  .  'CI  and  CE  .  .  .  -LA 

88.    Ce  .  .  .  -ci    and    ce  .  .  .  -la.     To    distinguish    between 
this  and  that,  -ci  and  -la  may  be  attached  to  the  noun. 

1.  ce  livre,  this  or  that  hook, 

2.  ce  livre-ci,  this  book. 

3.  ce  livre-li,  that  book. 
Observe.     Ce  means  this  or  that. 


68  The  Elements  of  French 

Questions 

1.  Comment  s'appelle  cet  enfant-        7.  Combien  de  poches  a  ce  veston 

ci?  la?    Answer:  II  en  a  .  .  • 

2.  Comment  s*appelle  cet  eleve-la? 

3.  Est-ce  que  ces  vetements-ci  sont        8.  De  quelle   couleur   sont   ces 

bons?  crayons-ci? 

4.  Est-ce  que  ce  veston-1^  est  bleu? 

_  "~  ,~       .  9-  Ouvrez    cette    fenetre-la,    s*il 

5.  Est-ce  que  ces  Soulier s-ci  sont  ^^^^  Dlait~~ 

jaunes? 

6.  Est-ce  que  ce  pantalon-1^ a  des       10.  Fermez   cette    fenetre-d,  s*il 

poches?  vous  plait. 

I.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Jouez-vous  aujourd'hui  au  tennis? 
2.  Jouez-vous  contre  votre  frere?  3.  Est-ce  que  vous  jouez 
contre  votre  oncle?  4.  Jouez-vous  contre  cet  eleve-ci?  5.  Est-ce 
que  vous  gagnez  toujours?  6.  Jouez-vous  avec  la  main  gauche 
ou  avec  la  main  droite?  7.  Combien  de  points  y  a-t-il  dans 
un  jeu?  8.  Perdez-vous  des  balles?  9.  Cherchez-vous  les 
balles?  10.  Ce  chien-ci  rapporte-t-il  les  balles?  11.  Ou  les 
saisit-il?  12.  Est-ce  que  vous  avez  une  gueule?  13.  Com- 
ment saisissez-vous  une  balle?  14.  Portez-vous  un  chapeau 
quand  vous  jouez  au  tennis?  15.  Est-ce  que  vous  mettez 
des  souliers?  16.  Ou  sont  vos  souliers?  17.  De  quelle  couleur 
sont-ils? 

II.  Traduisez.  1.  We  are  playing  (at)  tennis  this  morning 
with  some  boys.  2.  John  always  wins  at  that  game.  3.  He 
is  always  losing  (il  perd  toujours)  the  balls.  4.  Our  dog  Julio 
goes  after  them.  5.  He  seizes  them  in  his  jaws  and  brings 
them  back.  6.  He  hears  us  call  out  the  score  (points)  and 
wags  his  tail.  7.  My  sister  Annette  plays  (at)  tennis  a  great 
deal,  also.  8.  My  mother  hears  her  call  out  the  score:  deuce, 
advantage,  game.  9.  My  mother  goes  after  her,  and  dis- 
turbs (perd)  the  (young)  girl.  10.  Annette  loses,  and  I  cry 
'^Won.^'  11.  I  profit  by  the  inattention  of  the  girl.  12.  This 
morning  I  am  losing  a  great  many  balls.  13.  I  am  going 
to  look  for  them  today.  14.  I  play  with  my  (the)  right  hand; 
John  plays  with  his  left  hand. 


Lesson  35  69 

LESSON  35   (TRENTE-CINQUlfiME  LEgON) 
RfiVISION 

I.  Conjuguez.  1.  J^entre  dans  cette  maison-1^,  tu  entres 
dans  cette  maison-1^,  etc.  2,  Je  saisis  cette  balle-ci,  tu  saisis 
cette  balle-ci,  etc.  3.  Est-ce  que  je  perds  mon  chapeau? 
perds-tu  ton  chapeau?  etc.  4.  Est-ce  que  je  ne  Tentends  pas? 
ne  Tentends-tu  pas?  etc. 

II.  Use  the  proper  forms  of  ce  .  .  .  -ci  and  ce  .  .  .  Ak  with 

the  following  nouns: coupe;  coup; prix;  

promenade;  revolver;  tailleur;  theatre;  

franc; paire; mesure; diner; rue; balle; 

chien; gueule;  — = —  tennis; terre; queue; 

jeu;   avantage;    inattention;   distrac- 
tion;   feuille. 

III.  Fill  in  the  blanks  (Remplacez  les  tirets),     1.  Est-ce  que 

j'admir boutique-ci?     2.  Est-ce  que    j^entr-    dans    c^ 

boutique-la?     3.  Command vous  un  veston  gris?     4.  Com- 
mand  ils gilets  de  fantaisie?     5.  Command vous 

pantalon  noir?     6.  Est-ce  que  je  prend-  votre  mesure? 

7.  Est-ce    que pardessus    vous    garant du    froid?     8. 

Pren vous  votre   chapeau?     9.  Chois nous   un  bon 

dtner?     10.  Mang vous  beaucoup  de  fruits?     11.  Est-ce 

que  je  v au  theatre? 

Let  the  student  prepare  answers  in  French  to  these  questions. 

IV.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Dans  quelle  rue  etes-vous?  2.  Est-ce 
que  vous  trouvez  des  boutiques  dans  cette  rue?  3.  Entrez- 
vous  dans  une  boutique?  4.  Commandez-vous  un  complet? 
5.  Ce  complet  est-il  bon  ou  mauvais?  6.  De  quelle  couleur 
est-il?  7.  Combien  de  poches  commandez-vous?  8.  Oiiportez- 
vous  votre  revolver?  9.  Jouez-vous  au  tennis  aujourd^hui? 
10.  Perdez-vous  ou  gagnez-vous?  11.  Qui  rapporte  vos  balles? 
12.  Contre  qui  jouez-vous?    13.  Qu' est-ce  que  vous  portez? 


70  The  Elements  of  French 

V.  Traduisez.  1.  There  are  many  shops  in  this  street, 
but  there  are  not  many  (of  them)  in  that  street.  2.  In  this 
shop  there  are  some  white  hats,  and  white  trousers.  3.  We 
wear  some  while  {en)  playing  (at  the)  tennis.  4.  Here 
are  some  elegant  white  trousers,  but  the  price  (of  them)  is 
50  francs.  5.  These  white  shoes  are  very  styhsh,  but  they  do 
not  fit  my  feet.  6.  We  can  play  tennis  today;  there  are  some 
balls.  7.  Our  uncle  Charles  hears  me  call  out  the  score 
(points),  8.  He  goes  after  the  balls;  we  lose  many  (of  them). 
9.  We  wear  white  trousers  and  white  shoes,  but  we  wear  no 
hats,  and  we  wear  no  coats.  10.  My  uncle  wears  an  overcoat, 
to  protect  himself  {se  garantir)  from  the  cold. 


LESSON  36   (TRENTE-SIXlfiME  LEQON) 
THE   INTERROGATIVE   ADJECTIVE    QUEL?     TIME   OF   DAY 

89.  The  Interrogative  Adjective  quel?  (VAdjectif  Inter- 
rogatif  quel?).  The  adjectives  which?  what?  what  a!  are  trans- 
lated into  French  by 

Singulier  Pluriel 

Masculin     quel  (kcl)  quels  (kel) 

Feminin      quelle  (kel)  quelles  (kel) 

1.  Quel  est  le  livre  que  vous  avez  achete?    What  is  the  book  that  you 

have  bought? 

2.  Quelle  est  la  route  de  Paris?    What  is  the  road  to  Paris? 

3.  Quel  Americain!     What  an  American! 

4.  Quelle  jeune  fiUe!     What  a  girl! 

5.  Quels  bons  gar^ons!     What  good  boys! 

6.  Quelles  petites  maisons!     What  little  houses! 

Exercice.     Put  the  proper  form  of  quel  before  the  following 

nouns:  main;  chapeau;  poche;   •  canif; 

theatre; diner;  — souliers; chaises; balle; 

avantage; terres; jeux; chiens; enfant ; 

enfants;  promenades;  hommes;  couleur. 


Lesson  36  71 

90.  Time  of  Day  {V  Heure),  To  express  the  time  of  day, 
use  il  to  mean  it. 

1.  II  est  deux  heures,  U  is  two  o'clock. 

2.  II  est  une  heure,  It  is  one  o'clock. 

3.  II  est  midi,  U  is  noon. 

4.  II  est  minuit  (minqi),  l£is  midnight. 

5.  n  est  une  heure  et  demie,*  It^is  half  past  one. 

6.  n  est  quatre  heures  et  demie,*  It  is  half  past  four. 

7.  n  est  six  heures  (et)  un  quart,  It^is  a  quarter  after  six. 

8.  n  est  sept  heures  moins  un  quart,  It^is  a  quarter  of  seven. 

9.  II  est  midi  et  demi,  Uis  half  past  twelve  {P.M.). 

10.  n  est  minuit  (et)  un  quart,  his  a  quarter  past  twelve  {A.M.) 

11.  n  est  neuf  heures  moins  cinq  (minutes),  his  five  minutes  of  nine. 

12.  n  est  dix  heures  dix  (minutes),  It^is  ten  minutes  after  ten. 

13.  II  est  onze  heures  vingt-cinq,  l£is  eleven  twenty-five. 

Read  in  French  {.Lisez  en  francais).  1.  9:15.  2.  10:30. 
3.  6:00.  4.  6:15.  5.  6:45.  6.  4.20.  7.  8:55.  8.  9:10. 
9.  3:15.  10.  6:30.  11.  11:30.  12.  4:05.  13.  4:55.  14. 
5:45.     15.  1:30.     16.  1:15.     17.  1:00. 

91.  The  following  words  have  two  forms,  with  different 
meanings : 

matin  (mate),  m.,  morning  (time  of  day) 

matinee  (matine),  f.,  morning  (with  its  happenings) 

soir  (swair),  m.,  evening  (time  of  day) 

soiree  (sware),  f.,  evening  (with  its  happenings) 

an  (a)  m.,  year  (as  a  date) 

annee  (ane),  f.,  year  (with  its  happenings) 

jour  (3u:r),  m.,  day  (as  a  date) 

journee  (surne),  f.,  day  (with  its  happenings) 

Note  also:  midi  (midi),  m.,  noon 
apres-midi  (apre  midi),  m.,  f.,  afternoon 

*  Une  heure  et  demie  means  half  past  one,  or,  one  and  a  half  hours. 

Cinq  heures  et  demie  means  half  past  five,  or,  five  and  a  half  hours. 

Huit  heures  et  demie  means  half  past  eight,  or,  eight  and  a  half  hours. 

But     Une  demi-heure  means  a  half  hour. 

Demi  preceding  the  noun  is  joined  to  it  by  a  hyphen,  and  does  not  agree. 
It  is  thus  treated  as  part  of  the  noun.  Demi(e)  following  the  noun  agrees  like 
an  adjective. 


72  The  Elements  of  French 

1.  II  est  onze  heures  du  matin,  It  is  eleven  o^ clock  A.M.  (=  in  the 
morning) .  * 

2.  Nous  passons  une  bonne  matinee,  We  spend  a  good  morning. 

3.  II  est  neuf  heures  du  soir,  It  is  nine  o'clock  P.M.{  =  in  the  evening;).* 

4.  II  passe  ses  soirees  au  theatre,  He  spends  his  evenings  at  the  theater. 

I.  Exercise  Oral  ou  Ecrit.  Let  the  teacher  ask  Quelle 
hetire  est-il?  and  let  the  student  reply  in  French:  1.  12:15 
A.M.  2.  12:15  P.M.  3.  1:30  A.M.  4.  2:45  P.M.  5.  6:10 
A.M.  6.  7:25  P.M.  7.  8:05  A.M.  8.  12:30  P.M.  9.  12:30 
A.M.  10.  12:45  A.M.  11.  12:45  P.M.  12.  7:55  A.M. 
13.  8:45  P.M. 

(a)   Observe  the  following  expressions: 

ce  matin  (sa  mate),  this  morning 

ce  soir  (sa  swair),  this  evening 

lundi  dernier  (loedi  dernje),  last  Monday 

hier  soir  (jeir  swair),  yesterday  evening 

demain  matin  (dame  mate),  tomorrow  morning 


LESSON  37   (TRENTE-SEPTlfiME  LEQON) 

LA  MONTRE 
VOCABULAIRE 

aiguille  (egqi:j)  f.,  needle;  hand  (of      marquer  (marke),  to  mark;  score 

a  watch)  minute  (minyt),  f.,  minute 

avancer    (avase),    to    advance;  he      montre  (moitr),  f.,  watch 

fast  remonter    (ramote),    to    wind    (of 

arriver  (arive),  to  arrive  watches) 

exact  (egzakt),  exact;  right  .  retarder  (ratarde),  to  be  slow 

il  faut  (11  fo),  it  is  necessary  seconde  (sag3:d)t,  f.,  second 

heure  (oeir),  f.,  hour;  time  soixante  (swasait),  sixty 

indiquer  (edike),  to  indicate  k  votre  montre,  by  your  watch 

*  Frenchmen  count  time  more  and  more  from  1  to  24  hours:  e.g.,  neuf  heures 
du  soir  =vingt  et  une  heures.  This  is  always  the  case  in  time  tables  and  not 
infrequently  elsewhere. 

t  Note  that  the  c  of  the  noun  seconde,  as  well  as  of  the  ordinal  numeral 
second(e),  is  pronounced  (9). 


Lesson  87  73 

1.  LA  MONTRE 

Voici  une  montre.  Cette  montre  a  deux  aiguilles.  La 
petite  aiguille  indique  les  heures.  La  grande  aiguille  indique  les 
minutes.  La  petite  aiguille  est  k  neuf,  mais  la  grande  est  k 
douze.  II  est  neuf  heures  du  matin.  Est-ce  que  ma  montre 
est  exacte?  Non,  monsieur,  elle  retarde  d^une  heure  et  demie. 
II  faut  la  remonter.  Quelle  heure  est-il  h  votre  montre?  A*  ma 
montre  il  est  dix  heures  et  demie.  Quelle  heure  est-il  a  la 
montre  de  Jean?  Sa  montre  marque  onze  heures  moins  vingt- 
cinq  minutes.    Elle  avance  de  cinq  minutes. 

IL  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Quelle  heure  est-il  a  votre  montre? 
2.  Votre  montre  est-elle  bonne?  3.  Est-ce  qu'elle  retarde? 
4.  Est-ce  qu'elle  avance?  5.  Est-ce  qu'il  faut  la  remonter? 
6.  Ou  est  la  petite  aiguille?  7.  Ou  est  la  grande  aiguille?  8. 
Quelle  aiguille  indique  les  heures?  9.  Quelle  aiguille  indique 
les  minutes?  10.  Qu' est-ce  que  la  montre  de  Charles  marque? 
IL  A  quelle  heure  entrez-vous  dans  la  classe?  12.  Arrivez- 
vous  k  rheure  {on  time)!  13.  A  quelle  heure  prenez-vous  votre 
petit  dejeuner?  14.  A  quelle  heure  prenez-vous  votre  dejeuner? 
15.  A  quelle  heure  finissez-vous  votre  dejeuner?  16.  A  quelle 
heure  jouez^vous  au  tennis?  17.  A  quelle  heure  allez-vous  au 
theatre?  18.  Combien  de  minutes  y  a-t-il  dans  une  heure? 
19.  Combien  de  secondes  y  a-t-il  dans  une  minute? 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  This  watch  belongs  to  John;  that 
watch  belongs  to  Philip.  2.  Look  at  the  large  hand:  itf 
marks  twelve.  3.  Now  look  at  the  small  hand:  itf  marks 
ten.  4.  It  is  ten  o'clock  in  the  morning.  5.  Philip's  watch  is 
half  an  hour  ahead  of  time.  6.  John's  watch  is  two  hours  and 
a  half  behind  time.  7.  Is  your  watch  right  this  morning? 
8.  Yes,  sir,  but  it  is  necessary  to  wind  it  now.  9.  At  what 
time  do  we  finish  the  lesson  today?  10.  We  finish  it  at  10 :45^ 
do  we  not?     11.  At  noon  you  take  lunch  at   (the)   school. 

*  The  accents  are  usually  omitted  from  capital  letters,  except  E. 
t  Elle.     It  is  regularly  translated  into  French  by  il  or  elle,  according  to 
whether  the  noun  referred  to  is  masculine  or  feminine. 


74 


The  Elements  of  French 


12.  I  take  lunch  at  home,  where  the  family  is  waiting  for  me. 

13.  At  what  time  do  you  take  your  dinner,  at  6:15  or  at 
6:30?  14.  Our  family  always  takes  (takes  always)  (the) 
dinner  at  a  quarter  to  seven,  or  at  seven.* 


LESSON  38   (TRENTE-HUITlfiME  LE^ON) 

CARDINAL  NUMERALS  51-1,000,000,000:  ADDITION  AND 
MULTIPLICATION 

VOCABULAIRE 


commencer  (kamase),  to  begin 

dent  (da),  f.,  tooth 

on  (5),  one,  wCy  they 

par  (pair),  by 

poser  (poze),  to  place;  write  down 

92.     Cardinal   Numerals     51 

Cardinaux  51-lflOOflOOfiOO). 

cinquante  et  un  (sekait  e  oe),  Slf 
cinquante-deux  (sekait  d0),  52 
soixante  (swasait),  60 
soixante  et  un  (swasdit  e  6e),  61  f 
soixante-deux  (swasait  d0),  62 
soixante-dix  (swasait  dis),  70 
soixante (et)onze  (swasait  e  5iz),71t 
soixante-douze  (swasait  duiz),  72 
soixante-treize  (swasait  treiz),  73 
soixante-quatorze  (swasait  katorz), 

74 
soixante-quinze  (swasait  keiz),  75 
soixante-seize  (swasait  seiz),  76 
soixante-dix-sept  (swasait  dis  set), 

77 
soixante-dix-huit  (swasait  diz  qit), 

78 


je  retiens  (3a  ratje),  /  carry 

resultat  (rezylta),  m.,  result 

un   de   retenu    (oe   d&   ratny),    one 

to  carry 
unite  (ynite),  f.,  unit;  unity 

-1,000,000,000     {les     N  ombres 

soixante-dix-neuf  (swasait  diz  ncef), 

79 
quatre-vingts  (katra  ve),  80  J 
quatre-vingt-un  (katra  ve  oe),  81  ** 
quatre-vingt-dix  (katra  vs  dis),  90 
cent  (sa),  100 
centun  (sa  oe),  101  ** 
deux  cents  (d0  sa),  200  % 
deux  cent  un  (d0  sa  ce),  201  ** 
mille  (mil),  1000 
mille  un  (mil  oe),  1001 
deux  mille  (d0  mil),  2000 
un  million  (oe  miljo),  1,000,000 
un  milliard  (oe  miljair), 

1,000,000,000 


•    *  Seven  to  seven-thirty  are  usual  dinner  hours  in  France. 

t  Et  is  used  for  the  following  numerals:  vingt  et  un,  trente  et  un,  quarante 
et  un,  cinquante  et  un,  soixante  et  un,  and  often  soixante  et  onze. 

X  Quatre-vingts,  deux  cents,  etc.,  lose  the  final  s  before  another  numeral. 
Thus,  quatre-vingt-deux,  etc. ;  deux  cent  deux,  etc. 

**  No  liaison  (linking). 


Lesson  38  75 

I.  Exercice.  1.  Neuf  fois  un  font  neuf,  neuf  fois  deux 
font  dix-huit,  etc.  2.  Dix  fois  un  font  dix,  etc.  3.  Count 
by  threes  from  60  to  102.  4.  Count  by  tens  from  0  to  100. 
5.  Count  from  78  to  100.     6.  Add  aloud  in  French,  1,  3,  5, 

9.  7.  Add  aloud  in  French,  5,  8,  2,  10.  8.  Add  aloud  in 
French,  2,  3,  4,  9,  5.  9.  Subtract  from  10,  successively,  2, 
3,  4.     (Example.     Dix  moins  deux  font  huit,  etc.). 

II.  Read  in  French  (Lisez  en  frangais).  1.  201.  2.  301. 
3.  110.     4.  235.     5.  475.     6.  598.     7.  666.     8.  876.     9.  859. 

10.  999.     11.  2893.     12.  4777.     13.  1,888,999. 

III.  Addition. 

245  On  commence  a  droite,  par  les  unites.  Cinq  et  six  font 
486  onze.  Je  pose  un  et  je  retiens  un.  Huit  et  quatre  font 
731  douze.  Douze  et  un  de  retenu  font  treize.  Je  pose  trois 
et  je  retiens  un.  Quatre  et  deux  et  un  de  retenu  font 
sept.     Resultat,  731. 

Exercice.    Add  (addiiionnez)  428  and  295. 

IV.  Multiplication. 

358    Une  fois  trois  cent  cinquante-huit  fait  {is)  trois  cent 

41     cinquante-huit.    Quatre  fois  huit  font  trente-deux.    Je 

358     P^s^  deux  et  je  retiens  trois.     Quatre  fois  cinq  font 

1432       vingt.     Vingt  et  trois  font  vingt-trois.     Je  pose  trois 

j^gyg     et  je  retiens  deux.    Quatre  fois  trois  font  douze.  Douze 

et  deux  font  quatorze.     Resultat,  quatorze  mille  six 

cent  dix-huit. 

Exercice.     Multiply  (muUipliez)  245  by  7. 

V.  Exercice  Oral.  Answer  the  questions,  using  J'en 
compte  deux,  J*en  compte  six,  etc.;  J'en  ai,  etc.  1.  Comp- 
tez  les  chaises.  2.  Comptez  les  salles  de  Tecole.  3.  Comp- 
tez  les  eleves.  4.  Combien  de  doigts  avez-vous?  5.  Com- 
bien  de  dents  avez-vous? 

VI.  Write  in  French.  1.  79.  2.  97.  3.  81.  4.  51.  5. 
101.     6.  333.     7.  1246.     8.  10,876.     9.  33,793.     10.  521,678. 


76  The  Elements  of  French 

LESSON  39   (TRENTE-NEUVlfiME  LEgON) 

DATES 

VOCABULAIRE 

base  (ba:z),  f.,  base;  basis  premier  (pramje),  adj.,  first 

date  (dat),  f.,  date  avant  (ava),  prep.,  before  (of  time, 

ete  (ete),  been  or  order) 

fete  {iGit)f  i.,  holiday;  feast;  festivity  devant     (dava),    prep.,    before    (of 

guerre  (geir),  f.,  war  place) 

mois  (mwa),*  m.,  month 

1.  II  est  devant  la  table,      He  is  before  ( =  in  front  of)  the  table. 

2.  II  arrive  avant  vous,     He  arrives  before  you. 

93.   The  Months  {les  Mois).\ 

Janvier  (3avje),  m.,  January  juillet  (sqije),  m.,  July 

fevrier  (fevrie),  m.,  February  aofit  (u),  m.,  August 

mars  (mars),  m.,  March  septembre  (septaibr),  m.,  September 

avril  (avril),  m.,  April  octobre  (oktobr),  m.,  October 

mai  (me),  m..  May  novembre  (novaibr),  m.,  November 

juin  (sqs),  m.,  June  decembre  (desaibr),  m.,  December 

I.  Apprenez. 

Trente  jours  ont  septembre, 
Avril,  juin,  et  novembre; 
Trente  et  un  ont  mars  et  mai, 
Aoilt,  octobre,  puis  juillet; 
Et  decembre  et  Janvier; 
De  vingt-huit  est  fevrier. 

II.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Combien  de  mois  a  Tannee?  2. 
Combien  de  jours  a  ce  mois-ci?  3.  Combien  de  mois  ont 
trente  jours?  4.  Dites  les  noms  de  ces  mois,  s'il  vous  plait. 
5.  Combien  de  mois  ont  trente  et  un  jours?  6.  Dites  les 
homs  de  ces  mois,  s'il  vous  plait. 

*  Distinguish  between  the  pronunciation  of  mois  (mwa) ,  month,  and  of  moi 
(mwa),  me,  etc. 

t  Note  that  the  names  of  the  months  are  all  masculine,  and  are  written 
with  small  letters. 


Lesson  39  77 

94.  A  Few  Idioms  (Quelques  Idiotismes). 

1.  Quel  jour  du  mois  sommes-nous  aujourd'hui?  What  day  of  the  month 
is  it? 

2.  Quelle  date  sommes-nous?  What  day  of  the  month  is  it? 

3.  Nous  sommes  le  premier  mars,  Today  is  the  first  of  March* 

4.  Nous  sommes  le  deux  mars,  Today  is  the  second  of  March* 

5.  C*est  aujourd*hui  le  quinze  avril,  Today  is  the  fifteenth  of  April. 

III.  Exercice  de  Lecture. 

A  FEW  DATES  (QUELQUES  DATES) 

1.  19  juin,  1215:    Promulgation  de  la  Grande  Charte  (/art) 
{Magna  Charta),  base  des  liberies  de  FAngleterre. 

2.  30  mai,  1431:    Mort  de  Jeanne  d^Arc,  liberatrice  de  la 
France. 

3.  4  juillet,  1776:  La  declaration  de  I'independance  des 
fitats-Unis. 

4.  14  juillet,  1789:  La  prise  de  la  Bastille,  ancienne  prison 
d^fitat. 

L'anniversaire  de  cette  date  est  la  fete  nationale  de  la 
France. 

5.  19  octobre,  1781:  La  bataille  de  Yorktown.  George 
Washington  victorieux,  avec  Taide  des  Frangais. 

6.  18  juin,  1815:   La^  bataille  de  Waterloo. 

7.  1815:  Le  Retour  des  Bourbons,  Rois  de  France. 

8.  1830:  La  Revolution  de  Juillet.  La  Monarchie  selon 
la  Charte. 

9.  1848:   Deuxieme  Repubhque. 

♦Observe  that  premier,  first  is  used;  for  the  other  days  of  the  month  use 
deux,  two,  trois,  three,  quatre,  four,  etc.,  instead  of  second,  third,  fourth,  etc.,  as 
in  English.  Also,  in  giving  titles  of  rulers,  use  Henri  I  (Henri  Premier), 
Henri  II  (Henri  Deux),  Henri  III  (Henri  Trois),  etc. 

Note.  For  dates  between  1001  and  1999,  A.D.,  mil  is  used  instead  of 
mille  to  mean   1000. 

Tan  dix-neuf  cent  dix-neuf,  the  year  1919,  or  Tan  mil  neuf  cent  dix- 
neuf,  but 

Pan  mille,  the  year  1000;  Tan  deux  mille,  the  year  2000. 


78  The  Elements  of  French 

10.  10  mai,  1871:  Le  traite  de  Francfort;  la  France  perd 
deux  de  8es  provinces,  T Alsace  et  la  Lorraine. 

11.  1871:  Troisieme  Republique. 

12.  5  septembre,  1914:  Commencement  de  la  Bataille  de 
la  Marne. 

13.  6  avril,  1917:  Les  fitats-Unis  declarent  la  guerre  contre 
TAllemagne. 

14.  11  novembre,  1918:   La  signature  de  Tarmistice.* 

IV.  Traduisez.  1.  What  day  of  the  month  is  it?  (Two 
ways).  2.  It  is  the  first  of  November,  today.  (Two  ways). 
3.  How  many  days  are  there  in  this  month?  4.  In  this 
month  there  are  thirty  days.  5.  December  has  thirty-one 
days,  and  also  January,  March,  May,  July,  and  October. 
6.  The  other  months  have  thirty  days,  except  (excepte) 
February.  7.  February  22,  1732,  is  the  birthday  (anniver- 
sary) of  George  Washington.  8.  July  4,  1776,  is  the  date  of 
the  Declaration  of  Independence.  9.  The  anniversary  of 
this  date  is  the  national  holiday  of  the  United  States.  10. 
July  14,  1789,  is  the  date  of  the  storming  of  the  Bastille. 


LESSON  40   (QUARANTlfiME  LEgON) 
REVISION     * 

I.   Place  the  proper  form  of  quel  before  the  following  nouns: 

—  matinee;  annees;  an;  soirs; soiree; 

—  heures;  apres-midi; montre;  minutes; 

seconde;  aiguilles;  resultat;  mois;  


fete; dates. 

II.  Read  in  French  (Lisez  en  frangais):  1.  5:15.  2.  7:45. 
3.  9:05.  4.  3:30  A.M.  5.  12:30  P.M.  6.  12:15  A.M.  7.  4:25 
P.M.    8.  10:55  A.M. 

*  Words  not  in  the  special  vocabulary  at  the  beginning  of  the  lesson  will  be 
found  in  the  general  vocabulary  at  the  end  of  the  book. 


Lesson  4I  79 

III.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Quelle  heure  est-il  k  votre  montre? 
2.  Est-elle  exacte?  3.  Qu^est-ce  que  votre  montre  marque? 
4.  Est-ce  que  cette  montre-ci  avance?  5.  Est-ce  que  cette 
montre-la  retarde?  6.  Montrez-moi  la  petite  aiguilte.  7.  Mon- 
trez-moi  la  grande  aiguille.  8.  Qu'est-ce  qu^elle  indique?  9. 
Faut-il  remonter  votre  montre?  10.  Quelle  date  sommes- 
nous  aujourd'hui?  11.  Quel  jour  du  mois  sommes-nous  au- 
jourd'hui?  12.  Combien  de  jours  y  a-t-il  dans  ce  mois?  13.  En 
avril?    14.  En  septembre?    15.  En  fevrier? 

IV.  Read  the  following  dates  {Lisez  les  dates  suivantes):  1. 
30mai,  1431.  2.  4  juillet,  1776.  3.  14  juillet,  1789.  4.  2aoat, 
1914.  5.  5  septembre,  1914.  6.  7  mai,  1915.  7.  3  avril,  1917. 
8.  11  novembre,  1919. 

V.  Traduisez.  1.  We  arrive  at  nine  o^clock  in  the  morn- 
ing. 2.  We  arrive  at  (the)  school  on  time  (d  V heure),  3. 
My  watch  is  fast,  but  your  watch  is  slow.  4.  It  is  necessary 
to  wind  it  today.  5.  The  little  hand  is  at  four;  the  large  hand 
is  at  twelve.  6.  It  is  now  four  o^clock  in  the  afternoon.  7.  At 
7:15  A.M.,  you  take  your  coffee,  or  milk,  with  (some)  bread. 
8.  At  12:30  P.M.,  you  take  your  lunch.  9.  We  have  (the)  din- 
ner at  a  quarter  after  six,  or  at  half  past  six.  10.  What  day  of 
the  month  is  it  today?    11.  Today  is  the  first  of  November. 


LESSON  41    (QUARANTE  ET  UNlfiME  LEgON) 

THE    SEASONS:   A  FEW   IMPERSONAL  VERBS 

VOCABULAIRE 

bois  (bwa),  m.,  wood  parce  que  (pars  ka),  because 

champ  (Ja),  m.,  field  patiner  (patine),  to  skate 

chaque  (J*ak),  adj.,  each  quand  (ka),  when 

glace  (glas),  f.,  ice  souvent  (suva),  adv.,  often 

nager  (nase),  to  swim  surtout  (syrtu),  adv.,  especially 
neige  (neis),  f.,  snow 


80  The  Elements  of  French 

95.  The  Seasons  {les  Saisons). 

printemps  (preta),  m,  spring  au  printemps  (o  preta),  in  spring 

ete  (ete),  m.,  summer  en  ete  (an  ete),  in  summer 

automne  (otoi>),  m.,  autumn  en  automne  (an  oton),  in  autumn 

hiver  (iveir),  m.,  winter  en  hiver  (an  iveir),  in  winter 

Note.  Observe  that  the  names  of  the  seasons,  as  well  as  the  names  of 
the  months,  are  all  masculine.  The  names  of  the  months  are  not  spelled 
with  capitals,  as  they  are  in  English. 

Questions 

1.  Allez-vous    a    Pecole    au    prin-      3.  Que  faites-vous  en  automne? 

temps?  4.  Jouez-vous  au  tennis  en  hiver? 

2.  Portez-vous    un    pardessus    en 

ete? 

96.  A  Few  Impersonal  Verbs  (Quelques  Verbes  Impersonnels). 

1.  II  fait  beau  (temps)  (il  fe  bo  ta),        7.  II  fait  du  vent  (il  fs  dy  va),  It 

It  is  fine  weather.  is  windy. 

2.  II  fait  mauvais   (temps)    (il  fs        8.  Quel  temps  fait-il?  What  kind 

move  ta),  It  is  bad  weather.  of  weather  is  it? 

3.  II  fait  doux  (il  fs  du),  It  is  mild        9.  II  pleut  (il  pl0).   It  rains   (is 

weather.  raining) . 

4.  II  fait  noir  (il  fs  nwair),  It  is      10.  II  neige  (il  nsis).  It  snows  (is 

dark.  snowing). 

5.  II  fait  froid   (il  fs  frwa),  It  is      11.  II  gele   (il  gsl),   It  freezes   (is 

cold.  freezing) . 

6.  II  fait  chaud  (il  fs  J*o),  It  is  hot.        12.  II  tonne  (11  ton).  It  thunders. 

97.  Present  Indicative  of  aller,  to  go  (le  Present  de  Vln- 
dicatif  du  Verhe  aller), 

vais  (vs)  allons  (alo) 

vas  (va)  allez  (ale) 

va  (va)  vont  (v5) 

I.  LES  SAISONS 

Exercice  de  Lecture.  L'annee  a  quatre  saisons,  le  prin- 
temps, Tete,  Tautomne,  et  Thiver.  Chaque  saison  a  trois 
mois. 

Le  printemps:  mars,  avril,  mai. 

L'ete:  juin,  juillet,  aotit. 


Jeanne  D'Arc  Revetant  Son  Armure 


Lesson  4i  81 

L'automne :  septembre,  octobre,  novembre. 
L'hiver:  d^cembre,  Janvier,  fevrier. 

II  pleut  beaucoup  au  printemps,  surtout  au  mois  de  mars.* 
II  fait  chaud  en  ete.    Souvent  il  tonne  beaucoup. 
En  automne,  il  fait  souvent  tres  doux. 
II  neige  beaucoup  en  hiver. 
Au  mois  de  mars,  il  fait  du  vent. 
S^il  gelef  en  hiver,  nous  allons  patiner. 
Quand  il  fait  beau  au  printemps,  nous  allons  au  bois  et  aux 
champs. 

Quand  il  fait  chaud  en  6t6y  nous  allons  nager. 
En  automne,  nous  jouons  au  football.  { 

II.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Dites  les  noms  des  saisons.  2.  Dites 
les  noms  des  mois  de  Thiver.  3.  Du  printemps.  4.  De  Fete. 
5.  De  Tautomne.  6.  En  quelle  saison  sommes-vous?  7. 
Quel  mois  sommes-nous?  8.  Quel  jour  du  mois  sommes- 
nous?  9.  Fait-il  beau  temps  ou  mauvais  temps?  10.  Pleut-il? 
11.  Est-ce  qu'il  tonne  beaucoup  en  hiver?  12.  Est-ce  qu^il 
neige  beaucoup  en  hiver?  13.  En  quelle  saison  fait-il  du  vent? 
14.  En  quelle  saison  allons-nous  nager?  15.  En  quelle  saison 
jouons-nous  au  football?  16.  En  quelle  saison  allons-nous 
patiner?    17.  Ou  allons-nous  patiner? 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  The  four  seasons  of  the  year  are: 
spring,  summer,  autumn,  and  winter.  2.  In  winter  it  is 
cold,  and  often  it  snows.  3.  My  young  brothers  often  go 
skating  in  the  months  of  January  and  February.  4.  Then  they 
go  home,  and  play  in  the  snow.     5.   In  the  spring  we  often 

*  In  France,  it  is  March  that  is  considered  the  rainy  month.  Frenchmen 
speak  of  giboulees  de  mars,  March  showers. 

t  When  a  sjdlable  ending  in  unaccented  e  is  followed  by  another  syllable, 
ending  also  in  unaccented  e,  the  first  e  becomes  (e),  (usually  written  e),  (cf, 
pere,  mere,  frere,  etc.). 

t  English  words  are  regularly  used  for  the  games  of  sports,  as  tennis,  boze, 
and  even  sport. 


82  The  Elements  of  French 

go  (go  often)  to  the  woods,  when  the  weather  is  mild.  6,  Tn 
the  summer,  we  often  go  swimming.  7.  In  the  autumn, 
we  play  (at  the)  football  against  the  other  schools.  8.  We 
very  often  win  (win  very  often) ;  this  year,  we  have  always 
won  (avons  gagne  toujours),  9.  What  kind  of  weather  is  it 
now?  10.  It  is  raining  now,  is  it  not?  11.  If  it  does  not 
rain  this  afternoon,  we  are  going  to  play  (at  the)  tennis. 


LESSON  42   (QUARANTE-DEUXifiME  LEQON) 

THE  FUTURE  (LE  FUTUR) 
VOCABULAIRE 

attraper  (atrape),  to  catch  lui  (Iqi),  pron.,  to  him,  to  her 

demain  (dame),  tomorrow  plaisir  (pleziir),  m.,  pleasure 

demain  matin  (dame  mate),  tomor^ 
row  morning 

98.  The  Future  (le  Futur), 

The  infinitive  is  used  as  the  stem  of  regular  verbs  in  the  future 
tense. 

Observe  that  a  final  e  is  dropped. 

donner-,  finir-,  perdr-. 

Donner  Finir  Perdre 

donner  ai  (donre)  finir  ai  (finire)  perdr  ai  (perdre) 

donner  as  (donra)  finir  as  (finira)  perdr  as  (perdra) 

donner  a  (donra)  finir  a  (finira)  perdr  a  (perdra) 

donner  ons  (donrS)  finir  ons  (finiro)  perdr  ons  (perdro) 

donner  ez  (donre)  finir  ez  (finire)  perdr  ez  (perdre) 

donner  ont  (donrS)  finir  ont  (finiro)  perdr  ont  (perdro) 

(a)  Avoir,  etre,  and  aller  have  regular  endings  in  the  future, 
but  irregular  stems. 

Note.  Although  the  stem  of  irregular  verbs  in  the  future  may  be  irregular, 
the  endings  are  always  the  same  as  for  regular  verbs.  Historically  the  French 
future  is  a  combination  of  the  infinitive  with  the  present  tense  of  avoir,  the 
av  being  lost  in  the  first  and  second  persons  pluraU — ai,  — as,  — a;  (av)ons, 
(av)ez,  -ont. 


Lesson  42  83 

Avoir  Etre  AUer 

aur  ai  (ore)  ser  ai  (sare)  ir  ai  (ire) 

aur  as  (ora)  ser  as  (sara)  ir  as  (ira) 

aur  a  (ora)  ser  a  (sara)  ir  a  (ira) 

aur  ons  (oro)  ser  ons  (soro) .  ir  ons  (iro) 

aur  ez  (ore)  ser  ez  (sore)  ir  ez  (ire) 

aur  ont  (oro)  ser  ont  (sorS)  ir  ont  (iro) 

(6)   Note  also  the  conjugation  of  faire  (feir),  to  makey  to  do. 

Present  (Present)  Future  (Futur) 
fais  (fe)  fer  ai  (fore) 

fais  (f s)  fer  as  (fora) 

fait  (fe)  fer  a  (fora) 

faisons  (fozS),  or  (fezo)  fer  ons  (forS) 

faites  (fst)  fer  ez  (fore) 

font*  (fo)  fer  ont  (foro) 

I.  Questions.  1.  Arriverez-vous  a  I'ecole  demain  matin? 
2.  A  quelle  heure  arriverez-vous?  3.  A  quelle  heure  Jean 
arrivera-t-il?  4.  A  quelle  heure  Marie  arrivera-t-elle?  5. 
A  quelle  heure  Jean  et  Marie  arriveront-ils?  6.  Est-ce  que 
nous  finirons  notre  legon  cet  apres-midi?  7.  A  quelle  heure 
la  finirons-nous?  8.  Ou  irez-vous  apres?  9.  Ou  ira  Charles? 
10.  Ou  ira  Jacques?     11.  Ou  iront-ils? 

II.  Conjuguez.  1.  Je  lui  donnerai  ce  chapeau-ci,  tu  lui 
donneras  ce  chapeau-ci,  etc.  2.  J^attraperai  la  balle,  tu 
attraperas  la  balle,  etc.  3.  Je  ne  perdrai  pas  ma  montre,  tu 
ne  perdras  pas  ta  montre,  etc.  4.  Est-ce  que  j^aurai  ce 
plaisir?  auras-tu  ce  plaisir?  etc.  5.  Est-ce  que  je  serai 
demain  chez  elle?  seras-tu  demain  chez  elle?  etc.  6.  Ou 
est-ce  que  j'irai?  ou  iras-tu?  etc. 

III.  Exercice.     Fill    out    the    blanks,    using    the    future 

tense  of  the  verb:     1.  En  automne,  il souvent  doux.     2. 

II beaucoup  en  hiver.     3.  Au  mois  de  mars,  il du 

vent.    4.  En  hiver,  nous patiner.    5.  Quand  il beau 

♦Font  (faire),  vont  (aller),  sont  (etre),  and  ont  (avoir),  are  the  only  third 
persons  plural  which  end  in  -ont,  except  in  the  future  tense,  where  the  ending 
is  regularly  -ont. 


84  The  Elements  of  French 

au  printemps,  vous au  bois  et  aux  champs.    6.  Quand  il 

chaud  en  ete,  ils  nager.     7.  En  automne,  ils  

au  football. 

IV.  Traduisez.  1.  Will  you  find  the  hat?  2.  They  (m.) 
will  finish.  3.  Shall  we  play?  4.  Will  he  give  it  (m.)?  5. 
Will  she  not  lose  it  (/.)?  6.  What  date  will  it  be  tomorrow? 
7.  How  many  days  will  there  be  in  this  month?  8.  Will  your 
watch  be  right?  10.  Will  your  watch  be  fast?  11.  Will  it 
be  slow?  12.  I  shall  wind  the  watch  now.  13.  Will  you 
arrive  at  school  on  time?  14.  We  shall  be  waiting  for  (shall 
wait  for)  you.  15.  In  (dans)  four  minutes  it  will  be  seven 
o^clock.  16.  At  seven  o'clock,  we  shall  dine  (diner).  17. 
At  half  past  seven  in  the  evening  we  shall  go  to  the  theater, 
if  the  weather  is  fine. 

LESSON  43   (QUARANTE-TROISlfiME  LEgON) 

THE  DAYS  OF  THE  WEEK 

VOCABULAIRE 

dernier  (dernje),  adj.,  last  premier  (pramje),  adj.,  first 

Fern.,  demiere  (dernjeir)  Fern.,  premiere  (pramjeir) 

diner  (dine),  to  dine  semaine  (samen),  f.,  week 

eglise  (egliiz),  f.,  church  travailler  (travaje),  to  work 

en  France  (a  frais),  in  France  vient  (vje),  comes 

99.   The  Days  of  the  Week  (les  Jours  de  la  Semaine). 

dimanche  (dimaif),  m.,  Sunday  jeudi  (30di),  m.,  Thursday 

lundi  (loedi),  m.,  Monday  vendredi  (vadradi),  m.,  Friday 

mardi  (mardi),  m.,  Tuesday  samedi  (samdi),  m.,  Saturday 

merer edi  (merkradi),  m.,  Wednes- 
day 

Observe  that  the  names  of  the  days  of  the  week  are  written  with  small 
letters,  and  are  all  masculine. 

I.  Traduisez.  1.  Friday,  December  18.  2.  Saturday, 
November  1.  3.  Wednesday,  March  5.  4.  Sunday,  Jan- 
uary 12,  1919.  5.  Thursday,  February  21,  1918.  6.  Mon- 
day, October  20,  1919.    7.  Saturday,  November  29,  1919. 


Lesson  43  85 

100.  The  Article  Used  Distributively  (Emploi  Distributif  de 
V Article  Defini),  In  French,  the  definite  article  is  used  dis- 
tributively with  the  names  of  the  days. 

H  va  ^  Peglise  le  dimanche  (or,  les  dimanches),  He  goes  to  church  (on) 
Sundays. 

Observe  also  —  Je  travaille  le  matin,  /  work  mornings. 

Caution.    In  such  constructions  as  these,  never  use  the  preposition  sur. 

Apprenez. 

La  semaine  au  lundi  commence, 

Et  mardi  Fouvrage  avance, 

Ensuite  vient  le  mercredi, 

Le  jeudi,  puis  le  vendredi, 

Le  samedi  comble  nos  voeux, 

Et  le  dimanche  nous  prions  Dieu. 

II.  Questions.  1.  Travaillez-vous  le  matin?  2.  Mangez- 
vous  le  matin?  3.  Prenez-vous  votre  petit  dejeuner  le  soir? 
4.  Dtnez-vous  le  matin?  5.  Allez-vous  a  Feglise  le  dimanche? 
6.  fitudiez-vous  le  samedi?     7.  Jouez-vous  au  football  le  soir? 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  He  comes  on  Wednesdays.  2.  We 
skate  on  Tuesdays.  3.  They  work  on  Mondays.  4.  We  go 
to  the  woods  on  Saturdays. 

101.  Idioms  (Idiotismes), 

1.  Quel  jour  de  la  semaine  sommes-nous  aujourd*hui?  (kel  3u:r  da  la 
samen  som  nu  03urdqi),  What  day  of  the  week  is  today? 

2.  Quel  jour  est-ce  aujourd^hui?  (kel  3u:r  e  s  03urdqi),  What  day  {of 
the  week)  is  today? 

3.  Nous  sommes  aujourd^hui  lundi  (nu  somz  03urdqi  loedi),  Today  is 
Monday. 

4.  C*est  aujourd*hui  lundi  (s  et  03urdiii  loedi),  Today  is  Monday. 

5.  (D*)aujourd*hui  en  huit  (jours),  A  week  from  today. 

6.  {D^)aLniourd*hm  en  qainze  {jo\XTs)f  Two  weeks  from  today. 

IV.  Questions.  1.  Quel  jour  sommes-nous  aujourd^hui? 
2.  Quel  jour  serons-nous  d^aujourd'hui  en  huit?  3.  Quel  jour 
serons-nous  d'aujourd'hui  en  quinze?  4.  Quel  jour  serons- 
nous  demain?  5.  Apres-demain?  6.  Quel  jour  allez-vous  a 
Teglise?    7.  Quels  jours  allez-vous  a  Tecole?    8.  Quels  jours 


86  The  Elements  of  French 

avez-vous  des  legons  de  frangais?  9.  Quel  est  le  premier  jour 
de  la  semaine?  10.  Quel  est  le  dernier  jour  de  la  semaine? 
11.  Combien  de  semaines  y  a-t-il  dans  Tannee?  12.  Combien 
de  lundis  y  a-t-il  dans  ce  mois? 

V.  Traduisez.  1.  What  do  you  do  in  the  morning?  2. 
Do  you  eat  a  good  breakfast?  3.  At  what  time  do  you 
arrive  at  (the)  school?  4.  What  do  you  do  in  the  after- 
noon? 5.  Do  you  play  in  the  afternoon?  6.  (At)  what 
games  do  you  play,  if  you  please?  7.  What  do  you  do  in 
the  evening?  8.  Do  you  always  study  (study  always)  in 
the  evening?  9.  Do  you  go  to  school  Saturdays?  10.  In 
France  they  {on)  do  not  go  to  school  Thursdays.  11.  What 
day  of  the  week  is  it?  (Two  ways).  12.  Today  is  Tuesday, 
the  third  of  November. 


LESSON  44   (QUARANTE-QUATRlfiME  LEgON) 

UNE  VISITE 

VOCABULAIRE 

affaire    (afeir),   f.,   affair]   affaires,  chez  lui  (Je  Iqi),  at  his  house 

business  mot  (mo),  m.,  word  (as  a  mere  sign) 

carte  (kart),  f .,  card  ne  .  .  .  que  (n9  .  .  .  ka),  only 

comiaissance     (kanesais),     f.,     ac-  ouvrir  (uvriir),  to  open* 

quaintance  parler  (parle),  to  speak 

demander  (damade),  to  ask,  ask  for  parole  (parol),  f.,  word  (spoken) 

(not  demand)  remercier  (ramersje),  to  thank 

domestique  (domestik),  m.,  servant  vons  recevez  {v\i  rQsve) ,  you  receive 

j*espere    (3  espsir),    /  hope  (from  somier  (sone),  to  ring  (the  bell) 

esperer)  tout  (tu),  ally  every 

excuse  (ekskyiz),  f.,  excuse  vieux  (vj0),  old 

fauteuil  (fotoeij),  m.,  arm  chair  visite  (vizit),  f.,  visit 

*  Present  Indicative,  j'ouvre,  tu  ouvres,  etc.,  not  j*ouvris,  etc. 


Lesson  44  87 

de  la  part  de,  on  the  part  of;  from 
en  prenant  la  parole,  beginning  to  speak 
au  revoir  (o  rvwair),  good-bye 
du  tout,  pas  du  tout,  not  at  all 
encore  une  fois,  once  more 

il  n'y  a  pas  de  quoi  (il  n  j  a  pa  da  kwa),  donH  mention  it;  you 
are  welcome  {to  it) 

102.   Partir  (partiir),  to  starts  depart. 

pars  (pair)  partons  (parts) 

pars  (pair)  partez  (parte) 

part  (pair)  partent  (part) 

Conjuguez.     Je  pars  demain  a  huit  heures,  tu  pars  demain 

a  huit  heures,  etc. 

Questions 

1.  Partez-vous  aujourd^hui?  2.  Partez-vous  pour  New- York? 
3.  Partez-vous  pour  la  France?  4.  Est-ce  que  Jean  part  aussi? 
5.  Ou  va-t-il?  6.  Est-ce  que  Jeannette  part,  aussi?  7.  OCi  vont- 
ils?    8.  A  quelle  heure  partent-ils? 

I.  UNE  VISITE 

Lundi,  nous  faisons  visite  au  commandant  Dupuis.  Nous 
sonnons.     Un  domestique  ouvre. 

Nous  demandons  M.  le  commandant    Dupuis   est-il 

chez  lui? 

Le  domestique  nous  fait  entrer.  Nous  lui  donnons  nos 
cartes.  Sur  les  cartes  nous  avons  ecrit,  ''De  la  part  de  M. 
Sohier,  de  Bordeaux.^' 

Nous  nous  asseyons  {we  sit  down)  dans  des  fauteuils.  Au 
bout  de  quelques  minutes  le  commandant  entre,  nos  cartes 
a  la  main. 

C'est  bien  a  Messieurs*  Browning  et  Bryant  que  j'ai 

rhonneur  de  parler?    dit-il.    II  prononce  Brovnin  et  Briand. 

Oui,  monsieur,  dis-je,  en  prenant  la  parole.    Je  vous 

fais  mes  excuses  de  vous  deranger  le  lundi.    On  nous  a  averti 

*  Messieurs  (mesj0)  (abbreviation  MM.)  is  the  plural  of  Monsieur  (m8si0), 
(abbreviation  M.),  Mister,  sir. 


88  The  Elements  of  French 

que  vous  ne  recevez  que  le  jeudi.  Mais  nous  partons  mardi  ou 
mercredi  pour  Lyon. 

Du  tout,  messieurs.    Au  contraire,  je  suis  enchante  de 

faire  votre  connaissance.  *Tout  ami  de  M.  Sohier  sera  tou jours 
le  bienvenu. 

Nous  parlous  affaires.* 

Je  vous  ecrirai  un  mot  vendredi,  dit  le  commandant. 

Samedi  nous  nous  retrouverons  a  Paris. 

C'est  impossible,  dis-je. 

-- —  Sinon  samedi,  dimanche,  dit  le  commandant. 

Bien,  monsieur,  je  vous  remercie  de  votre  accueil  si 

cordial,  dis-je. 

II  n'y  a  pas  de  quoi,  dit  le  commandant.  Je  suis  en- 
chante de  faire  la  connaissance  des  amis  de  M.  Sohier,  et  je 
suis  entierement  a  votre  disposition. 

Vous  etes   bien   aimable.   Monsieur   le   commandant. 

Merci  encore  une  fois,  et  au  revoir. 

A  samedi,  messieurs.    J'espere  que  j^aurai  le  plaisir  de 

vous  revoir. 

II.  Traduisez.  1.  At  ten  o'clock  in  the  morning  we  start 
out  to  visit  (the)  young  M.  Lemaitre.  2.  We  arrive  at  his 
house  at  eleven.  3.  We  ring.  The  servant  does  not  hear  us, 
but  M.  Lemaitre  opens  the  door.  4.  He  looks  at  our  cards 
and  reads  {lit)  the  name  of  M.  Lebrun,  a  friend  of  his  (one 
of  his  friends).  5.  He  says,  '^I  am  always  delighted  to  make 
the  acquaintance  of  every  friend  of  M.  Lebrun.  6.  You  will 
always  be  welcome  in  my  house.  7.  I  have  not  (the)  time 
to  talk  business  now,  but  tomorrow  I  shall  be  free  (libre). 
8.  We  shall  meet  each  other  (find  each  other)  again  tomor- 
row." 9.  I  reply,  *We  shall  be  in  Paris  only  a  few  hours.' 
10.  I  shall  not  have  the  pleasure  of  seeing  you  again.  11. 
But  I  thank  you  for  your  cordial  welcome. '^ 

*  Parler  affaires,  talk  business. 


Lesson  45  89 

LESSON  45   (QUARANTE-CINQUlfiME  LEgON) 
REVISION 

I.  Continue  the  following  in  the  present  and  in  the  future: 
1.  Je  lui  donne  cette  carte  de  visite,  tu  lui  donnes  cette  carte 
de  visite,  etc.  2.  Je  vais  a  Paris,  tu  vas  k  Paris,  etc.  3.  Je 
le  fais  entrer,  tu  le  fais  entrer,  etc.  4.  Je  ne  suis  pas  chez  lui,  tu 
n'es  pas  chez  lui,  etc.  5.  Est-ce  que  j^ai  de  la  viande?  as-tu  de 
la  viande?  etc.    6.  J'en  ai,  tu  en  as,  etc. 

II.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  En  quelle  saison  patinez-vous?  2. 
En  quelle  saison  nagez-vous?  3.  En  quelle  saison  pleut-il  beau- 
coup?  4.  En  quel  mois  fait-il  du  vent?  5.  En  quels  mois  fait-il 
beau?  6.  En  quels  mois  neige-t-il?  7.  En  quels  mois  pleut-il 
souvent?  8.  Irez-vous  k  Teglise  le  lundi?  9.  Irez-vous  a 
Tecole  le  samedi?  10.  Quels  jours  irez-vous  a  Fecole?  11. 
Quel  jour  de  la  semaine  sommes-nous  aujourd'hui?  12.  Quel 
jour  du  mois  sommes-nous  aujourd^hui?  13.  Quel  jour  serons- 
nous  demain?  14.  Jouerez-vous  au  football  lundi?  15.  Serez- 
vous  demain  chez  vous?  16.  Ou  est  Jean  maintenant? 
17.  Oil  sera-t-il  a  six  heures  du  soir?  18.  Ou  serons-nous  k 
minuit?  19.  Dinez-vous  le  matin  ou  le  soir?  20.  Quand 
prenez-vous  votre  dejeuner?  21.  Quand  partez-vous?  22. 
Partez-vous  pour  Boston?  23.  Est-ce  que  votre  ami  part 
aussi?     24.  Comment  s^appelle-t-il? 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  In  spring.  2.  In  summer,  3.  In 
autumn.  4.  In  winter.  5.  Thursday,  August  16.  6.  Tues- 
day, March  15.  7.  Monday,  July  4.  8.  Sunday,  April  1. 
9.  Wednesday,  June  14.  10.  What  time  is  it  now  by  your 
watch?  11.  Is  your  watch  always  right,  or  isn't  it  often  fast? 
12.  What  day  is  it  today,  if  you  please?  13.  How  many  days 
will  there  be  in  this  year?  14.  Tomorrow  we  shall  play  (at  the) 
football  against  your  school.  15.  Today  we  shall  go  to  the 
woods,  if  the  weather  is  not  bad.  16.  What  will  you  do  this 
afternoon,  if  it  rains?  17.  What  day  of  the  month  will  to- 
morrow be?     18.  What  will  you  do  evenings,  if  the  weather 


90 


The  Elements  of  French 


is  fine?  19.  They  start  for  Paris  a  week  from  today.  20. 
Today  is  Friday,  May  30,  1919  {write  date  in  full),  21.  To- 
morrow will  be  Saturday,  May  31,  the  last  day  of  (the)  spring. 
22.  If  the  weather  is  fine,  we  shall  go  to  your  house.  23.  Sun- 
days we  shall  have  the  pleasure  of  going  {dialler)  to  (the) 
church. 


LESSON  46    (QUARANTE-SIXifiME   LEgON) 


A  FEW  ORTHOGRAPHICAL  RULES 


VOCABULAIRE 


argent  (ar3a),  m.,  silver^  money 

ce  que  (sa  ka),  pron.,  what  (used  as 

object  of  verb) 
client  (klia),  m.,  customer,  {doctor^ s) 

patient 
demeurer  (dgmoere),  to  live,  dwell 
desir  (deziir),  m.,  desire 
desirer  (dezire),  to  desire 
done  (doik)  or  (do),  conj.,  then,  so 
eh  bien!  (e  bjs),  excL,  well! 
emmener  (amne),  to  take  away,  lead 

away 
il  y  a  de  quoi  (il  j  a  da  kwa),  there 

is  enough  to  (for) 
s'informer  (s  eforme),  to  inquire 
tu  t'informeras,  you  will  inquire 


larme  (larm),  f.,  tear 

moi  (mwa),  pron.,  me,  I  (used  em- 
phatically) 

ordre  (ordr),  m.,  order 

oublier  (ublie),  to  forget 

Pierre  (pjeir),  m.,  Peter 

Pierrot  (pjero),  m.,  little  Peter 

quelque  (kelk),  adj.,  some,  some  few 

secher  (seje),  to  dry 

tout  ce  que  (tu  s  ka),  all  that  (used 
as  object  of  verb) 

viens  (vje),  come  (imperative) 

voudrai  (vudre),  shall  wish  (future 
of  vouloir,  to  wish) 

voyage  (vwajais),  m.,  trip,  voyage 


103.   Ages  {les  Ages), 


Quel  ige  avez-vous?  How  old  are  you? 
J'ai  seize  ans,  /  am  sixteen  years  old. 


Questions.  1.  Quel  age  a  Jean?  2.  Est-ce  que  Jean  a 
quinze  ans?  3.  Quel  age  a  Charles?  4.  Est-ce  que  Charles 
a  aussi  quinze  ans?     5.  Est-ce  quails  ont  quinze  ans? 


Lesson  ^6  91 

104.  A  Few  Orthographical  Rules  (Quelques  Regies  d'Ortho- 
graphe) . 

(a)  Verbs  in  -oyer  and  -uyer  must  change  y  to  i  before 
mute  e  (9). 

emplofe,  emplo/es,  emploze;  employons,  employ ez,  emploient.  Also 
emploierai,  etc.  (from  employer,  to  use). 

(b)  Verbs  in  -ayer  nmy  change  y  to  i  before  mute  e  (a). 

Essaie  (-aye),  essafes  (-ayes),  essaze  (-aye);  essayons,  essay  ez, 
essafent  (-ayent).  Also  essazerai  (or  essay erai),  etc.  (from 
essayer,  to  try), 

(c)  Verbs  in  -ler  and  -ter  generally  double  the  1  or  t  before 

a  mute  e  (a). 

1.  AppeZ/e,  appeWes,  appeWe;  appelons,  appelez,  appeWent.  Also, 
appeZ/erai,  etc.,  (from  appeler,  io  caW) .  2.  Jef^e,  jeffes,  je^^e; 
jetons,  jetez,  je^^ent.  Also,  je^^erai,  etc.  (from  jeter,  to  throw). 

(d)  Many  verbs,  however,  to  avoid  having  mute  e's  in  suc- 
cessive syllables,  change  the  first  e  to  e,  instead  of  doubling 
the  consonant. 

Observe  —  acheter  (ajte),  to  huy,  and  lever  (lave),  to  raise. 

Present  Indicative  Future 

(le  Present  de  VlndicatiJ)  {le  Futur) 

achete  (ajet)  *  acheterai  (ajetare)  * 

achetes  (a/et)*  acheteras  (afetara)* 

achate  (ajet)  *  achetera  (ajetara)  * 

achetons  (ajto)  acheterons  (ajetaro)* 

achetez  (aJte)  acheterez  (a/etare)  * 

achetent  (ajet)*  acheteront  (ajetaro)* 

leve  (leiv)  *  leverai  (levare)  * 

leves  (leiv)  *  leveras  (levara)  * 

leva  (leiv)  *  levera  (Isvora)  * 

levons  (lavS)  leverons  (levar5)* 

levez  (lave)  leverez  (lev are)  * 

levent  (leiv)*  leveront  (levarS)* 

Conjuguez.     J  ^achete  ce  chapeau-ci,  tu  achetes,  etc. 

*  Compare  il  gele. 


92  The  Elements  of  French 

Questions.  1.  Quand  achetez-vous  des  vetements?  2. 
Achetez-vous  des  souliers?  3.  Acheterez-vous  un  pardessus? 
4.  Qu^est-ce  que  vous  achetez  a  I'ecole?  5.  Est-ce  que  vous 
achetez  votre  dejeuner?  6.  Est-ce  que  Charles  achete  des 
balles?     7.  Est-ce   qu' Annette   achete   des   cartes   de   visite? 

I.  VOYAGE  A  PARIS* 

(Pierre,  whose  scapegrace  father  died  four  years  ago,  has 
just  lost  his  mother.  The  family  physician  tells  Pierre  that 
it  was  the  dying  wish  of  his  mother  that  he  go  to  find  his 
uncle,  who  lives  in  Paris.  Pierre,  who  is  only  ten  years  of 
age,  hesitates,  and  the  doctor  continues:) 

Tu  feras  ce  que  tu  voudras.     C'etait  le  desir  de  ta 

mere,  mais  ce  n^etait  pas  un  ordre. 

Je  ferai  tout  ce  qu'elle  desirait,  dit  Pierre,  en  sechant 

ses  larmes. 

Tres    bien,    Pierrot.     Je    t^emmene    avec    moi.     J^ai 

parle  de  toi  a  quelques  clients,  et  on  m'a  donne  Targent  de 
ton  voyage.  II  y  a  de  quoi  arriver  a  Paris.  La,  tu  t'in- 
formeras  ou  demeure  maitre  Pierre  Delsart;  il  s'appelle 
comme  toi,  done  tu  n'oublieras  pas  son  nom.     As-tu  compris? 

Oui,  monsieur. 

Eh  bien,  viens. 

II.  Traduisez.  1.  How  old  are  you,  Charles?  2.  I  am 
fifteen  years  of  age  now.  3.  In  the  month  of  February  I 
shall  be  sixteen  years  of  age.  4.  My  birthday  (anniversary) 
will  be  the  seventeenth  of  that  month.  5.  How  old  is  your 
brother?  6.  He  will  be  twelve  years  old  in  the  month  of 
August.  7.  What  is  your  brother's  name,  please?  8.  He  is 
named  James.     9.  My  sister  is  named  Marguerite. 

III.  Tradtiisez.  1.  I  enter  (in)  a  shop  and  look  at  some 
clothes.  2.  'Will  (does)  Monsieur  buy  something  today?'' 
asks  the  tailor.     3.  ^'I  shall  buy  a  coat,  if  you  have  one  (of 

*  Adapted  from  Mairet's  la  Tdche  du  Petit  Pierre. 


Lesson  1^7  93 

them)  which  {qui)  will  fit  me."  4.  "When  will  you  try 
it  (on),  sir?"  5.  "I  shall  try  it  on  Tuesday*  or  Wednesday.*" 
6.  'We  shall  be  entirely  at  your  service,  sir,"  says  the 
tailor.  7.  'Thank  you  (very)  much,  sir."  8.  I  reply, 
"Don^t  mention  it." 


LESSON  47    (QUARANTE-SEPTlfiME  LECON) 

THE  PREPOSITION  EN 
VOCABULAIRE 
se  trouve  (sa  truiv),  is  found;  is  ville  (vil),  f.,  city  (not  village) 

105.  The  Preposition  en  {la  Preposition  en).  Before  femi- 
nine names  of  countries,  en  is  used  to  mean  in. 

Madrid  se  trouve  en  Espagne,  Madrid  is  in  Spain. 

(a)  Before  mascuhne  names  of  countries,  a  +  the  definite 
article  is  used  to  mean  in. 

Aux  Etats-Unis,  In  the  United  States 

Au  Canada,  In  Canada 
Note.   In  general,  names  of  countries  in  Europe  are  feminine. 

(6)  Before  names  of  cities,  also,  a  is  regularly  used  to 
mean  in. 

A  Paris,  In  Paris 

A  Londres,  In  London 

Questions  Reponses 

1.  O^  se  trouve  Bordeaux?  (m.)  1.  II  se  trouve  en  France. 

2.  Oft  se  trouve  Lille?t  (f .)  2.  EUe  se  trouve  aussi  en  France. 

3.  Oft  se  trouve  Londres?  (m.)  3.  II  se  trouve  en  Angleterre. 

4.  Ot  se  trouve  Dublin?  (m.)  4.  II  se  trouve  en  Irlande. 

5.  0&  se  trouve  Rome?  (f.)  5.  EUe  se  trouve  en  Italie. 

I.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Ou  se  trouve  Paris?  2.  Est-ce  que 
c'est  une  grande  ou  une  petite  ville?  3.  Combien  d'habitants 
y  a-t-il  a  Paris?    4.  Ou  ira  Pierre?     5.  Qui  lui  dit  dialler  a 

*In  fixing  a  date,  the  article  is  usually  omitted  with  names  of  days  of  the 
week,  when  the  meaning  is  not  distributive.     Do  not  translate  "on." 

t  Names  of  cities  ending  in  e  and  es  are  usually  feminine,  others  are  most 
often  so  though  there  are  many  exceptions  like  the  above.  In  case  of  doubt 
it  is  always  possible  to  say  la  ville  de,  etc. 


94 


The  Elements  of  French 


Paris?  6.  Fera-t-il  le  desir  de  sa  mere?  7.  Fera-t-il  tout  ce 
qu'elle  desire?  8.  Qui  lui  donnera  Targent  de  son  voyage? 
9.  Est-ce  que  le  docteur  est  bon  ou  mauvais?  10.  Est-ce  que 
le  pere  de  cet  enfant  est  mort?  11.  Ou  son  pere  etait-il  alle? 
12.  Comment  s'appelle  son  oncle?  13.  Ou  demeure-t-il?  14. 
Quel  age  a  Pierre?     15.  Quel  age  avez-vous? 

II.  Traduisez.  1.  Pierre  has  lost  his  father  and  (his) 
mother.  2.  He  is  only  ten  years  of  age.  3.  He  has  only  one 
friend,  the  doctor.  4.  His  mother  has  told  (to)  the  doctor 
everything  that  she  wished  for  her  son.  5.  Pierre  will  do  all 
that  his  mother  wished.  6.  He  will  go  to  Paris  (to)  see  his 
uncle.  7.  The  doctor  will  take  him  with  him  (lui),  8.  The 
doctor  will  speak  to  his  patients  tomorrow.  9.  They  will  give 
(to)  Pierre  the  money  for  (de)  his  trip.  10.  There  will  be 
enough  to  (enable  Pierre  to)  arrive  in  Paris.  11.  In  Paris  he 
will  find  his  uncle,  Pierre  Delsart.  12.  He  will  not  forget 
that  name,  because  his  uncle  is  also  called  Pierre.  13.  His 
uncle  will  be  delighted  to  make  his  acquaintance.  14.  His 
nephew  Pierre  will  always  be  welcome  at  his  home. 


LESSON  48   (QUARANTE-HUITIEME  LEgON) 


THE  GENERAL  NOUN 


VOCABULAIRE 


animal  (animal),  m.,  animal 
Plural,  animaux*  (animo) 

boeuf  (boef),  m.j  ox;  heef 
Plural,  boeufs  (b0) 

cheval  (Javal),  m.,  horse 
Plural,  chevaux*  (Javo)  • 

fer  (feir),  m.,  iron 

fleuve  (floeiv),  m.,  river 

guerre  (geir),  f.,  war 

*hautt  (o),  adj.,  high 

*houille  t  (uij),  f.,  coal 


montagne  (motaji),  f.,  mountain 
ocean  (osea),  m.,  ocean 
peche  (peij*),  f.,  peach 
poire  (pwair),  f.,  pear 
pois  (pwa),  m.,  pea 
pomme  (pom),  f.,  apple 
pomme  de  terre  (teir),  f.,  potato 
poulet  (pule),  m.,  chicken 
utile  (ytil),  adj.,  useful 
vache  (vaj).  f.,  cow 


*  Nouns  and  adjectives  in  -al  form  their  plurals  in  -aux  (cf.  journal,  plural, 
journaux). 

t  The  rough  breathing  (*)  is  placed  before  h  in  the  vocabularies  to  indicate 
that  there  is  no  preceding  linking  (liaison)  or  elision.     (See  §  48,  4.) 


Lesson  4^  95 

Compare:  boeuf  (boef),  plural  boeufs  (b0),  ore, 
with   oeuf    (oef),     plural  oeufs     (0),    egg, 

106.  The  General  Noun  {le  Suhstaniif  Pris  dans  un  Sens 
General),  Nouns  used  in  a  general  sense  usually  take  the 
article  in  French. 

Les  pommes  sont  rondes,  Apples  are  round. 
Questions 

1.  Est-ce  que  les  boeufs  sont  grands?      6.  Est-ce  les  oeufs  sont  ronds? 

2.  Est-ce  que  J[es  vaches  donnent      7.  Est-ce    que    les^    fieuves    sont 

du  lait?  utiles? 

3.  Est-ce  que  les  chevaux  ont  deux      8.  Est-ce  que  les  montagnes  sont 

pieds?  hautes? 

4.  Combien     de     pieds     ont  J^      9.  Est-ce  que  les  oceans  sont  pro- 

chevaux?  fonds? 

5.  Est-ce     que    les    poulets    sont 

petits? 

(a)  Nouns  used  in  an  abstract  sense  also  take  the  article  in 
French. 

I/unite  fait  la  force,  In  union  there  is  strength,  (literally,  Unity  makes 
strength). 

Questions 

1.  Est-ce  que  le  fer  est  utile?  5.  Est-ce  quela_viande  est  bonne 

2.  De  quelle  couleur  est  la  houille?  a  manger? 

3.  De  quelle  couleur  est  une  carte      6.  Est-ce  que  le   pain   est   bon   a 

de  visite?  manger? 

4.  De  quelle  couleur  est^or?  7.  Est-ce  que  le  lait  est  blanc? 

(6)  Names  of  countries  take  the  article. 

La  France,*  France,  jyEspagne  (f.),  Spain.  Aux  Etats-Unis,  In  the 
United  States.  JL'Angleterre  (f.),  England.  JL'Italie  (f.),  Italy. 

Caution.  After  the  preposition  en,  the  article  is  regularly  omitted. 
Cf.  §  105. 

I.   Fill  in  the  blanks  (Remplacez  les  tirets),     1.  La  capitale 

de  est  Londres.     2.  Paris  est  la  capitale  de . 

3.  Madrid  se  trouve  en  .     5.  Marseilles  est  une  ville  de 

—  .     5.  Rome  se  trouve  —  .     6.  Washington 

se  trouve . 


*  Names  of  countries  ending  in  e  are  usually  feminine. 


96 


The  Elements  of  French 


107.   Note  the  distinction  between  the  general  noun  and  the 
partitive  noun. 


General  {General) 

1 .  Les  pommes  sont 

2.  Les  vaches  sont 


Partitive  {Partitif) 
des  fruits,  {All)  apples  are  {some)  fruits. 
des  animaux,  {All)  cows  are  {some)  animals. 


Questions 


1.  Est-ce  que  les  chevaux  sont  des      6. 

animaux? 

2.  Est-ce  que  les  boeufs   sont   des      7. 

animaux? 

3.  Est-ce  que  les  vaches  sont  aussi      8. 

des  animaux? 

4.  Est-ce  que  J^  poulets  sont  des      9. 

animaux? 

5.  Est-ce  que  les^  pommes  sont  des 

legumes? 

II.   Exercice.     Supply  the  proper  forms  of  men,  ton,  son, 
votre,   leur,   ce  .  .  .  -ci,   and   ce  .  .  .  -la,   with   the   following 

words:    vache;  poulets;  poires;  pomme 

de  terre; peche; chevaux; bceuf; argent; 


Est-ce  que  J^  pommes  de  terre 
sont  des  fruits? 

Est-ce  que  les  poires  sont  des 
legumes? 

Est-ce  que  les^  peches  sont  des 
fruits? 

Est-ce  que  les^  pois  sont  des  le- 
gumes? 


oeufs. 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  Coal  is  found  in  the  United  States 
and  in  England.  2.  Iron  is  found  in  Germany.  3.  Moun- 
tains are  found  in  Switzerland.  4.  In  France  there  are  (a 
great)  many  horses.  5.  In  Normandy  (Normandie)  there 
are  a  great  many  cows,  oxen,  and  chickens.  6.  Gold  is 
found  in  America.  7.  Silver  is  found  there  also.  8. 
Gentlemen  will  enter  by  this  door.  9.  Ladies  will  enter  by 
that  door.  10.  Servants  will  show  us  in  (make  us  enter). 
11.  We  shall  give  them  (leur)  cards.  12.  Mr.  Sohier^s  friends 
will  always  be  welcome. 


Scene  des  Pyrenees 


Lesson  49  97 

LESSON  49   (QUARANTE-NEUVlfiME  LEgON) 
THE  INDEFINITE  ON 
VOCABULAIRE 
borner  (borne),  to  hound  nord  (noir),  m.,  noi^th 

entre  (ditr),  prep.,  between;  among       ouest  (west),  m.,  west 
est  (est),  m.,  east  principal  (presipal),  adj.,  principal 

Jeter*  (sate),  to  throw  (away);  cast  Plural,  principauxf  (presipo) 

se  Jeter,  to  empty  (of  rivers)  plus  (ply),  adv.,  more 

limitrophe  (limitrof),  adj.,  neighbor^      pres  de  (pre  da),  prep.,  near 

ing,  bordering  sud  (syd),  m.,  south 

mont  (mo),  m.,  mount;  mountain 

108.  The  Indefinite  on  {le  Pronom  Indefini  on).  In  French 
the  passive  voice  is  used  much  less  than  in  English.  One  of  the 
most  important  substitutes  is  the  use  of  the  indefinite  pro- 
noun on  (5),  mesLuingwe,  you,  they,  somebody,  with  the  active 
voice. 

1.  On  finit  la  robe,  The  dress  is  being  finished  (literally.  One  is  fin- 
ishing the  dress). 

2.  On  le  dit.  So  it  is  said  (literally.  One  says  it). 

Questions 

1.  Est-ce  que  Ton  travaille  ce  matin?  2.  Ou  travaille-t-on?  J 
3.  Qu^est-ce  qu^on  fait  le  dimanche?  4.  Ou  va-t-on  le 
dimanche?  5.  Qu^est-ce  que  Ton**  mange  aujourd'hui?  7.  A 
quelle  heure  prenez-vous  vos  repas?  8.  Ou  prenez-vous  vos 
repas?  9.  Qu'est-ce  que  Ton  fait  aujourd^hui?  10.  Est-ce 
que  Ton  joue  au  football?  11.  Est-ce  que  Ton  patine?  12. 
Va-t-on  au  bois? 

I.   Exercice.    Translate,  using  on: 

Model:  Lessons  will  begin  tomorrow,  On  commencera  demain 
les  legons. 

*  For  conjugation  of  jeter,  see  §  104,  c,  1. 

t  Observe  that  adjectives  and  nouns  in  -al  regularly  form  their  plurals  in 
-aux. 

t  The  consonant  -t-  is  inserted  before  on,  after  a  verb  ending  in  a  vowel. 

Mange-t-on  ici?     Do  they  eat  here?     (Compare  a-t-on?  with  a-t-il?) 

**  After  que,  and  a  few  other  words,  V  is  often  inserted  before  on  for  the 
sake  of  euphony. 


S8  The  Elements  of  French 

I.  The  bell  will  be  rung  at  six  forty-five  this  evening.  2. 
Our  excuses  will  be  made  tomorrow.  3.  Our  visiting  cards  will 
be  asked  for.  4.  A  few  words  will  be  spoken.  5.  They  will  be 
thanked.  6.  The  coal  will  be  bought  in  November.  7.  The 
clothes  are  being  bought  this  morning.  8.  The  children  will 
be  punished.    9.  Iron  is  found  in  Lorraine. 

II.  LEgON  DE   GEOGRAPHIE 

1.  La  France  est  bornee  au  nord  par  la  Manche,  et  par 
la  Mer  du  Nord;  au  sud,  par  la  Mediterranee  et  TEspagne; 
au  Nord-Est,  par  la  Belgique  et  FAllemagne;  h  Test  par 
FAllemagne,  la  Suisse,  et  ITtalie;  h  Touest  par  Tocean 
Atlantique.  * 

Fleuves.     Les  principaux  fleuves  de  la  France  sent: 

le  Rhone,  qui  se  jette  dans  la  Mediterranee; 

la  Seine,  qui  se  jette  dans  la  Manche; 

la  Loire,  et  la  Garonne,  qui  se  jettent  dans  Toc^an  Atlantique. 

Montagnes.  Les  montagnes  limitrophes  de  la  France  sont 
les  Pyrenees,  entre  la  France  et  TEspagne;  et  les  Alpes,  entre 
la  France  et  la  Suisse. 

Au  centre  de  la  France  se  trouvent  les  Cevennes  et  les  monts 
d^Auvergne.     A  TEst  de  la  France  se  trouvent  les  Vosges. 

{A  suivre) 


LESSON  50   (CINQUANTlfiME  LEQON) 
REVISION 

I.  Conjugate  acheter,  negatively,  present  and  future. 
Conjugate  jeter,  interrogatively,  present  and  future. 

II.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Quel  age  avez-vous?  2.  Quel  kge  a 
Jacques?  3.  Achetez-vous  aujourd'hui  un  journal?  4.  Est-ce 
que  vous  achetez  une  pomme?  5.  Est-ce  que  vous  achetez 
une  poire?    6.  Qu'est-ce  que  vous  achetez?     7.  Qu'est-ce  que 


Lesson  50  99 

Charles  achete?  8.  Od  se  trouve  Lille?  9.  Ou  se  trouve 
Londres?  10.  Ou  se  trouve  Washington?  11.  Dans  quel  pays 
se  trouve  Naples? 

III.  Fill  in  the  blanks  (Remplacez  les  tirets),     1.  fer 

est  utile.     2.  fait  des  montres  avec  de  or.     3.  Ici 

achete  pain.    4.  La  trouve  legumes. 

5.  fruits  sont  bons  a .     6.  chevaux  ont  quatre 

pieds.     7.  CBufs  sont  bons  a  .     8.  jette  

mauvaises   ponimes.     9.  n'achete   pas   mauvaises 

poires. 

IV.  Traduisez.  1.  Marseilles  is  a  large  city  of  France. 
2.  Horses  and  cows  are  raised  in  Normandy.  ^  3.  Sheep  and 
chickens  are  also  raised  (are  raised  also)  in  that  country.  4. 
Watches  have  two  hands.     5.  Big  hands  indicate  minutes. 

6.  Little  hands  indicate  hours.  7.  Trains  (trains)  depart  at 
every  hour  of  the  day.  8.  Trips  will  be  made  to  Paris, 
London,  and  Rome.  9.  Money  for  the  trips  will  be  given  by 
friends  of  the  doctor.  10.  The  lessons  will  not  be  finished 
before  four  o'clock  in  the  afternoon.  11.  Your  shoes  will  be 
bought  tomorrow.  12.  The  visiting  cards  are  being  bought 
now.     13.  Will  you  try  (on)  this  hat,  or  that  hat? 


LESSON  51    (CINQUANTE  ET  UNlfiME  LEgON) 
LEgON  DE  GEOGRAPHIE  (SUITE) 
VOCABULAIRE 
celebre  (selsbr),  celebrated  pays  (pei),  m.,  country  (=  political 

cultiver  (kyltive),  to  cultivate;  grow  division,  as  United  States,  France, 

charbon  (J'arbo),  m.,  coal  etc.) 

mine  (min),  f.,  mine  vallee  (vale),  f.,  valley 

mouton  (muto),  m.,  sheep  vigne  (viji),  f.,  vine;  vineyard 

I.  Geographie  Economique.  En  Normandie,  pays*  qui  se 
trouve  pres  de  la  Manche,  on  eleve  des  chevaux,  des  vaches, 
des  boeufs,  des  moutons,  et  des  poulets. 

*  A  noun  in  apposition  with  another  noun,  and  not  restrictive  in  meaning 
(i.e.,  expressing  merely  an  additional  fact),  takes  no  article. 


100  The  Elements  of  French 

En  Touraine,  et  dans  les  vallees  du  Rhone  et  de  la  Garonne, 
on  cultive  beaucoup  de  vignes.  En  Champagne  il  y  en  a 
aussi  qui  sont  celebres. 

En  Flandre  et  en  Bourgogne  on  trouve  de  la  houille. 

En  Lorraine  se  trouvent  beaucoup  de  mines  de  fer. 
Villes  Principales. 

Paris,  capitale*  de  la  France,  situe  sur  la  Seine; 

Marseille,  ville*  sur  la  Mediterranee ; 

Lyon,  ville*  qui  se  trouve  entre  Paris  et  Marseille; 

Bordeaux,    ville*    sur    la    Garonne,     pres    du     Golfe     de 
Gascogne ; 

Reims,  ville*  qui  se  trouve  au  nord-est  de  Paris. 

IL  Exercice  OraL  1.  Quelle  mer  se  trouve  au  nord  de  la 
France?  2.  Quelle  mer  se  trouve  au  sud  de  la  France?  3. 
Quel  pays  se  trouve  au  sud  de  la  France?  4.  Dites  les  noms 
des  pays  qui  se  trouvent  au  nord-est  de  la  France.  5.  Com- 
ment la  France  est-elle  bornee  k  Test?  6.  Comment  la  France 
est-elle  bornee  a  Fouest?  7.  Quels  sont  les  principaux  fleuves 
du  pays?  8.  Ou  se  jette  le  Rhone?  9.  Ou  se  jette  la  Seine? 
10.  Ou  se  jettent  la  Loire  et  la  Garonne?  11.  Quelles  mon- 
tagnes  se  trouvent  au  sud  de  la  France?  12.  Entre  quels 
pays  se  trouvent  ces  montagnes-la?  13.  Ou  se  trouvent  les 
Alpes?  14.  Est-ce  que  les  Alpes  sont  hautes?  15.  Est-ce 
que  les  Pyrenees  sont  plus  ou  moins  hautes  que  les  Alpes? 

16.  Quelles  montagnes  se  trouvent  au  centre  de  la  France? 

17.  Ou  se  trouvent  les  Vosges?  18.  Quels  animaux  eleve-t-on 
en  France?  19.  Est-ce  qu^on  y  eleve  beaucoup  de  chevaux? 
20.  Est-ce  que  Ton  y  eleve  beaucoup  de  moutons?  21.  Ou 
eleve-t-on  des  poulets?  22.  Ou  eleve-t-on  des  vaches?  23. 
Dites  les  noms  de  quelques  villes  importantes  de  la  France. 
24.  Ou  se  trouve  Lille?  15.  Ou  se  trouve  Reims?  26.  Ou 
se  trouve  Lyon?  27.  Ou  y  a-t-il  de  la  houille?  28.  Ou  y 
a-t-il  des  mines  de  fer? 

*  A  noun  in  opposition  with  another  noun,  and  not  restrictive  in  meaning 
(i.e.,  expressing  merely  an  additional  fact),  takes  no  article. 


Lesson  52  101 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  The  Alps  (/O  iaijer'^fy,  iiigh.  '^S.:  these 
mountains  are  east  of  France,  bGt\Yeen  ,that,  qountry  and 
Switzerland.  3.  On  the  Alps  theve  \i'p.iw%T^  ^nbW,  *'^iid  Ifc  is 
always  very  cold.  4.  Many  Americans  spend  (passer)  the 
summer  near  the  Alps.  5.  The  Pyrenees  (/.)  are  mountains 
(which  are)  between  France  and  Spain.  6.  They  are  very 
high,  but  the  Alps  are  higher.  7.  In  the  center  of  France 
are  the  Cevennes;  in  the  East  are  the  Vosges.  8.  France  has 
also  important  rivers.  9.  The  Garonne  empties  into  the 
Atlantic  Ocean,  but  the  Rhone  empties  into  the  Mediterranean. 


LESSON  52   (CINQUANTE-DEUXIEME  LECON) 

POSITION  OF  ADJECTIVES 

VOCABULAIRE 

arbre  (arbr),  m.,  tree  dire  (diir),  to  say;  tell 

la  meme  (meim)  chose,  the  same  thing 

la  chose  meme,  the  thing  itself,  the  very  thing 

109.  Position  of  Adjectives  (Position  des  Adjectifs).  Adjec- 
tives which  denote  distinctive  characteristics,  such  as  color  or 
shape,  usually  follow  the  noun. 

la  robe  rouge;  la  table  ronde. 

The  following  very  common  adjectives  regularly  precede 
the  noun: 

bon  (bo),  good  grand  (gra),  large;  tall 

mauvais  (move),  bad  gros  (gro),  big 

joli  (3oli),  pretty  petit  (pati),  small 

beau  (bo),  beautiful,  fine  jeune  (3oen),  young 

vilain  (vile),  ugly  vieux  (vj0),  old 

Un  bon  garfon;  un  mauvais  eleve;  une  jolie  maison;  un  beau  livre; 
un  vilain  chapeau;  un  grand  fleuve;  un  gros  arbre;  une  petite  ville; 
un  jeune  ami;  un  vieux  maitre. 

Questions.  1.  Avez-vous  un  bon  crayon?  2.  Avez-vous 
une  mauvaise  plume?     3.   Est-ce  que  vous  avez  un  joli  cha- 


102 


The  Elements  of  French 


peau?  '  4.  *Est-de'  (|i|0*'voils  avez  un  beau  tableau?  5.  Est-ce 
qu^i]  f^st  d^ine  yilaine  couleur?  6.  Montrez-moi  une  grande 
fen^tre, -^s'il  VouS*  platt.  7.  Montrez-moi  une  petite  chaise, 
s'il  vous  plait.  8.  Est-ce  que  vous  avez  un  jeune  frere?  9. 
Avez-vous  un  vieux  professeur? 

110.  The  following  adjectives  have  two  forms  in  the  mas- 
culine singular.  (Note  that  the  feminine  forms  come  from 
the  masculine  forms  ending  in  -I). 


Singulier 


Masculin  beau  (bo) 

bel  (bel) 
Feminin    belle  (bel) 

Masculin  vieux  (vj0) 
vieil  (vjeij) 
Feminin    vieille  (vjeij) 


Traduction 

(Translation) 

beautiful 


old 


Pluriel 
beaux  (bo) 

belles  (bel) 
vieux  (vi0) 

vieilles  (vjeij) 

(a)  Observe  that  the  masculine  forms  have  no  I  in  the  plural : 
bel,  plural  beaux;  vieil,  plural  vieux. 

Use  (Emploi),  The  masculine  singular  forms  in  4  are  used 
only  before  a  vowel  or  h  mute. 

1 .  Le  vieil  ami,  The  old  friend. 

2.  Le  vieil  habit,  The  old  coat. 

But    3.  L*habit  est  vieux;  le  vieux  livre;  les  vieux  amis. 

Questions.  1.  Voyez-vous  un  beau  cheval?  2.  Le  cheval 
est-il  un  bel  animal?  3.  Combien  de  beaux  livres  voyez- 
vous?  4.  Voyez-vous  une  belle  maison?  5.  Combien  de 
belles  couleurs  voyez-vous?  6.  Avez-vous  un  vieil  oncle? 
7.  Vos  oncles  sont-ils  vieux?  8.  Avez-vous  une  vieille  tante? 
9.  Vos  tantes  sont-elles  vieilles? 

Exercice.  Supply  the  proper  form  of  vieux  and  of  beau 
before  each  of  these  nouns,  singular  and  plural.  Do  it  in 
writing,  and  orally:  Cheval,  fleuve,  chapeau,  boeuf,  fruit, 
repas,    diner,    poulet,    pois,   gilet,   pantalon,   gargon,    maitre, 


Lesson  52  103 

Soulier,  veston,  animal,  arbre,  ami,  oncle,  Americain,  ^leve, 
habit,  argent,  ceuf.  Anglais,  avis,  objet,  enfant,  Allemand, 
ceil,  tante,  omelette,  robe,  excuse,  plume,  affaire,  chose,  plume, 
guerre,  6cole,  peche,  etude,  vache,  maison,  ville. 

111.  Present  Indicative  of  dire  (le  Present  de  VIndicatif  du 
Verhe  dire). 


dis  (di) 

disons  (diz5) 

dis  (di) 

dites  (dit)* 

dit  (di) 

disent  (diiz) 

I.  Conjuguez.  1.  Je  dis  la  meme  chose,  tu  dis  la  meme 
chose,  etc.  2.  Je  ne  le  dis  pas,  tu  ne  le  dis  pas,  etc.  3. 
Qu^est-ce  que  je  dis?  qu^est-ce  que  tu  dis?  etc.  4.  J^oublie 
ce  que  je  dis,  tu  oublies  ce  que  tu  dis,  etc. 

II.  Exercice  Supplementaire.  Use  the  following  adjectives 
with  the  following  nouns:  bon,  rouge,  grand,  blanc,  joli,  jaune, 

vieux,  beau,    chapeau;    chapeaux;   souUer; 

robe;  veston; vetements; complet;  

gilets;  pantalon;  porte-plume. 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  The  Seine  is  the  principal  river  in  the 
(of  the)  north  of  France.  2.  Paris,  the  beautiful  capital  of 
France,  is  situated  on  that  river.  3.  Bordeaux,  (a)  large 
city  in  the  (of  the)  south  (midi)  of  France,  is  situated  on 
the  Garonne.  4.  It  is  situated  near  the  Atlantic  Ocean.  5. 
Lyons  is  one  of  the  principal  cities  of  the  north  of  France. 
6,  Near  Lille  a  great  deal  of  coal  is  found.  7.  Large  iron 
mines  are  found  in  Lorraine.  8.  Fine  horses,  cows,  and 
sheep  are  raised  in  Normandy.  9.  Good  apples,  peaches, 
and  pears  are  cultivated  also  in  Normandy.  10.  Pretty 
vineyards  are  cultivated  in  Burgundy  and  in  Champagne. 
11.  There  are  a  great  many  (of  them)  also  in  Touraine,  and 
in  the  valleys  of  the  Rhone  and  of  the  Garonne. 

*  Dites,  etes,  and  faites  end  in  -es.  All  other  verbs  have  -ez  in  the  second 
plural,  in  every  tense  (except  the  past  absolute,  or  preterite). 


104 


The  Elements  of  French 


LESSON   53    (CINQUANTE-TROISlfiME   LEgON) 

AVANT  LE  MARIAGE  (BEFORE  MARRIAGE) 

VOCABULAIRE 


agrement     (agrema),     m.,    delight, 

gratification 
ce  que  (so  ka),  (relative),  what 

(used  as  object  of  verb) 
depuis  que  (dapqi  ka),  conj.,  since 
fait  (fe),  made,  done  (p.  participle  of 

faire) 
gentiment  (satima),  nicely 
marchand  de  chaussures  (mar  J  a  da 

Josyir),  m.,  shoe  dealer 
mis  (mi),  dressed,   (p.  participle  of 

mettre) 


moi  (mwa),  pron.,  me  (used  as  ob- 
ject of  preposition) 

penser  (pase),  to  think 

rire  (riir),  to  laugh 

vous  savez  (vu  save),  you  know 

je  sais  (3a  se),  /  know 

tout  a  Pheure  (tut  a  1  ce:r),  present- 
ly; just  now 

vous  voulez  (vu  vule),  you  wish 

vous  voulez  rire,  you  are  joking 
(literally,  ^'you  wish  to  laugh' ^) 


I. 


Famille  de  Paysans 
AVANT  LE  MARIAGE* 


Annette. —  Bonsoir,  monsieur  Henri. 

Henri. —  He!     C'est  vous,  mademoiselle  Annette;  bonsoir, 
.  .  bonsoir!  .  .  .  Nous  avons  parle  tout  a  Theure  de  vous. 


*  Adapted  from  Erckmann-Chatrian's  le  Juif  Polonais, 


Lesson  53  105 

Annette. —  De  moi? 

Henri. — ^Mais  oui,  mais  oui  .  .  .Oh!  oh!  comme  vous  voila 
riante  et  gentiment  habillee  .  .  . 

Annette. —  Vous  voulez  rire,  monsieur  Henri? 

Henri. —  Non,  non,  je  ne  ris  pas;  je  dis  ce  que  je  pense,  vous 
le  savez  bien.  Ces  bonnes  joues  rouges,  ce  joli  bonnet,  et 
cette  petite  robe  bien  faite,  avec  ces  petits  souliers,  ne  sont 
pas  pour  Tagrement  des  yeux  du*  vieil  Henri.  C^est  pour 
un  autre  {il  cligne  de  Vceil),  c'est  pour  un  autre,  he!  he! 

II.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Quelle  heure  est-il?  2.  Est-ce  le 
matin  ou  I'apres-midi?  3.  Est-ce  que  Ton  dit  maintenant 
bonjour  ou  bonsoir?  4.  Dites:  Bonjour  (bonsoir),  M.  le  pro- 
fesseur.  5.  Dites-moi  votre  nom,  s'il  vous  plait.  6.  Dites- 
moi  le  nom  de  Tami  de  mademoiselle  Annette.  7.  De  qui 
a-t-on  parle?  8.  Quand  a-t-on  parle  d'elle?  9.  Est-ce 
qu'elle  rit  beaucoup?  10.  Est-ce  qu^elle  est  bien  mise?  11. 
Qu'est-ce  qu'elle  porte  sur  la  tete?  12.  Est-ce  qu'elle  porte 
un  chapeau?  13.  Qu'est-ce  qu'elle  porte  sur  le  dos?  14. 
Comment  est  sa  robe?  15.  Ses  souliers  sont-ils  grands  ou 
petits?  16.  De  quelle  couleur  sont  ses  joues?  17.  Combien 
de  chapeaux  avez-vous?  Reponse:  J^en  ai  .  .  .  18.  De  quelle 
couleur  est  votre  robe,  mademoiselle?  19.  Portez-vous  des 
souliers,  monsieur?  20.  Ou  achetez-vous  des  soyliers?  21. 
Les  achetez-vous  chez  le  marchand  de  chaussures?  22.  Vos 
souliers  sont-ils  grands  ou  petits? 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  Annette  is  wearing  today  a  very  pretty 
bonnet.  2.  She  is  wearing  also  a  beautifully  made  dress, 
which  (que)  she  will  wear  this  evening  at  (the)  dinner.  3. 
Look  at  those  small  shoes,  which  are  not  for  the  delight  of 
old*  Henry.  4.  They  are  for  the  gratification  of  young f 
John.  5.  Oldf  Henry's  hat  is  very  large  and  old.  6.  His 
shoes  are  ugly,  and  do  not  fit  his  feet.     7.  His  coat  is  not 

♦The  article  is  regularly  used  in  French  before  a  noun  preceded  by  an 
adjective  or  title. 

t  Use  the  definite  article  before  the  adjective. 


106  The  Elements  of  French 

well  made,  and  he  wears  an  old  suit.  8.  But  young*  John 
is  nicely  dressed.  9.  He  wears  a  well  made  sack  coat  and  a 
fancy  vest.  10.  He  is  a  tall  young  man,  who  plays  tennis  a 
great  deal.  11.  He  has  brown  hair,  blue  eyes,  and  red 
cheeks.  12.  There  he  is  now,  and  there  is  Miss  Annette,  his 
laughing  friend.  13.  Henry  looks  at  them,  and  laughs  also. 
14.  Annette  says  to  Henry,  ^^You  are  joking,  sir.^' 


LESSON   54   (CINQUANTE-QUATRlfiME  LEgON) 

THE  PERFECT  TENSE 
VOCABULAIRE 

decider  (de)  (deside),  to  decide  porte-monnaie     (port    mone),    m., 

dii  (dy),  p.  part.,  owed;  ought  (from  'purse 

devoir).     Feminine,  due  (dy)  preter  (prete),  io  Z6n(i 

ensemble  (asaibl),  adv.,  together  pris    (pri),    p.    part.,    taken    (from 

faire  (son,  notre,  etc).,  second  de-  prendre) 

jeuner  (fs:r  s3  S9g5  desoene),  to  regu  (rasy),  p.  part.,  received  (from 

lunch  recevoir) 

heureusement  (oer0zma),  adv., /or-  rencontrer  (rakotre),  to  meet 

tunately  tramway  (tramwe),  m.,  street-car 

hier  (jeir),  adv.,  yesterday  vu  (vy),  p.  part.,  seen  (from  voir) 
ouvert    (uveir),   p.     part.,     opened 

(from  ouvrir) 

112.  Past  Participles  (Participes  Passes). 

Regular  Conjugations  {Conjugaisons  Regulieres) 
donne  (done)  given  fini  (fini),  finished  perdu  (perdy),  lost 

Irregular  Verbs  {Verhes  Irreguliers) 
ete  (ete)  been  dit  (di),  said 

eu  (y),  had  ecrit  (ekri),  written 

fait  (fe),  done,  made 

113.  The  Perfect  Tense  {le  Passe  Indefini),  The  perfect 
tense  for  all  transitive  verbs  (and  for  most  intransitive  verbs) 
is  formed  from  the  auxiliary  avoir,  to  have,  +  the  past 
participle. 

*  Use  the  definite  article  before  the  adjective. 


Lesson  54 


107 


I  have  finished,  or  ^I 

finished 
j*ai  fini  (fini) 
tu  as  fini  (fini) 
il  a  fini  (fini),  etc. 

/  have  had,  or  /  had 
j'ai  eu  (y) 
tu  as  eu  (y) 
il  a  eu  (y),  etc. 


/  have  lost,  or  /  lost 

j'ai  perdu  (perdy) 
tu  as  perdu  (perdy) 
il  a  perdu  (psrdy),  etc. 

/  have  done,  or  /  did 
yai  fait  (fe) 
tu  as  fait  (f e) 
11  a  fait  (fe),  etc. 


/  have  given,  or  I  gave 

j*ai  donne  (done) 
tu  as  donne  (done) 
il  a  donne  (done),  etc. 

/  have  heen,  or  /  was 
y&i  ete  (ete) 
tu  as  ete  (ete) 
il  a  ete  (ete),  etc. 

I.  Exercice.  1.  Conjugate  the  above  verbs  negatively  in 
the  perfect  tense:  Je  n^ai  pas  donne,  tu  n^as  pas  donne,  etc.* 
2.  Conjugate  in  the  perfect  tense,  affirmatively  and  nega- 
tively: (a)  lire  (p.  part,  ri);  (6)  attraper;  (c)  montrer;  (d) 
diner;  (e)  travailler;  (/)  ouvrir;  (g)  punir. 

114.  Uses  of  the  Perfect  Tense  (Emploi  du  Passe  Indefini). 
The  perfect  tense  has  in  French  two  uses: 

(1)  It  corresponds  to  the  English  perfect  tense  (denotes 
what  has  happened). 

1.  J^ai  vendu  ma  maison,  /  have  sold  my  house. 

2.  II  a  parle  a  mon  cousin,  He  has  spoken  to  my  cousin. 

(2)  In  conversation  and  in  familiar  style  it  corresponds  to 
the  English  past  tense  (denotes  what  happened). 

1.  J^ai  travaille  ce  matin,  /  worked  this  morning. 

2.  Nous  avons  trouve  les  joumaux,  We  found  the  newspapers. 

II.  Exercice.  Translate  into  French,  using  the  perfect 
tense:  1.  Yesterday  I  decided  to  buy  a  coat  and  hat.  2. 
Then  I  lost  my  purse.  3.  Fortunately  I  saw  my  father.  4. 
He  lent  me  some  money.  5.  Then  I  saw  Charles  and  John. 
6.  We  took  lunch  together.  7.  Then  we  took  the  street-car. 
8.  We  met  some  friends.  9.  We  decided  to  play  (at  the) 
tennis.  10.  We  played  tennis  at  John's  house.  11.  We 
were  there  this  morning  also. 


*  Note  that  the  negative  ne  .  .  .  pas  surrounds  the  auxiliary  in  compound 
tenses:     Je  n]  ai  pas  fini,  je  n?  ai  pas  perdu,  etc. 


108  The  Elements  of  French 

LESSON  55   (CINQUANTE-CINQUlfiME  LEgON) 
THE  PERFECT  TENSE  —  Continued 

I.  Conjuguez.  1.  J^ai  regarde  ce  vieil  arbre,  tu  as  regarde 
ce  vieil  arbre,  etc.  2.  Je  n'ai  pas  fini  eette  legon,  tu  n'as  pas 
fini  cette  legon,  etc.  3.  Mon  chien  a  perdu  cette  balle,  ton 
chien  a  perdu  cette  balle,  etc.  4.  Est-ce  que  j'ai  ete  en 
Lorraine?  as-tu  ete  en  Lorraine?  etc.  5.  J^ai  eu  un  beau 
chapeau,  tu  as  eu  un  beau  chapeau,  etc. 

Do  the  same  exercise,  negatively. 

II.  Exercice.  In  the  following  sentences,  change  the  verbs 
in  italics  to  the  perfect  tense:  1.  Je  ferai  tout  ce  qu^elle 
desirait.  2.  Je  secherai  mes  larmes.  3.  Vous  m! emmenerez 
avec  vous.  4.  Vous  parlerez  de  moi  a  vos  clients.  5.  lis  me 
donneront  T argent  de  mon  voyage.  6.  II  y  aura  de  quoi 
arriver  a  Paris.  7.  La,  on  me  dira  ou  demeure  maitre 
Pierre  Delsart.  8.  II  s'appelle  comme  moi,  done  je  n^oublierai 
pas  son  nom.     9.  Je  comprendrai  (p.  part,  compris),  monsieur. 

III.  Questions.  1.  Ou  avez-vous  ete  ce  matin?  2.  Avez- 
vous  ete  chez  vous?  3.  A  quelle  heure  avez-vous  fait  votre 
petit  dejeuner?  4.  A  ,  quelle  heure  avez-vous  quitte  votre 
maison?  5.  A  quelle  heure  avez-vous  fait  votre  second  de- 
jeuner? 6.  Avez-vous  etudie  ce  matin?  7.  Quelles  legons? 
8.  Combien  en  avez-vous  etudie?  9.  Est-ce  que  vous  avez 
prepare  des  exercices?  10.  Ou  avez-vous  ecrit  vos  exercices? 
11.  Qu^est-ce  que  vous  avez  fait  hier?  12.  Avez-vous  perdu 
quelque  chose  hier?  13.  L'avez-vous  trouve?  14.  Avez-vous 
patine  hier?     15.  Avez-vous  joue  hier  au  football? 

IV.  Translate,  using  the  perfect  tense:  1.  Monday  we 
visited  (the)  *Professor  Leblanc.  2.  We  found  him  at  his 
house,  near  (the)  *Ilue  Bonaparte.  3.  A  servant  showed  us 
in  (made  us  enter).  4.  We  wrote  on  our  cards,  'Trom  M. 
Meunier,  of  St.-Cloud.'^     5.  We  made  our  excuses  for  having 

*  Do  not  capitalize. 


Lesson  56  109 

disturbed  M.  Leblanc  in  the  morning.  6.  We  warned  him 
that  we  intended  to  (compter)  start  for  Marseilles  in  (dans) 
a  few  hours.  7.  He  replied,  '^I  am  always  delighted  to  see 
friends  of  my  friends.^'  8.  For  (pendant)  half  an  hour,  we 
talked  business.  9.  Then  (puis)  I  thanked  him  for  his 
cordial  welcome.  10.  He  replied,  '^Don^t  mention  it.  I 
shall  have  the  pleasure  of  seeing  you  again,  shall  I  not?^^ 
11.  Saturday  we  wrote  (to)  him  a  line  (mot),  but  we  have 
not  seen  him  again  (revu). 

115.  II  y  a  (il  j  a)  is  used  idiomatically  to  mean  ago. 
Example.  II  a  trouve  ce  chapeau  il  y  a  une  demi-heure.  He 
found  that  hat  half  an  hour  ago, 

V.   Fill  in  the   blanks    (Remplacez  les  tirets),     1.  J'ai  ete 

chez  moi  il  y  a .     2.  J^ai  fait  mon  petit  dejeuner  il  y  a 

.     3.  J'ai  quitte  la  maison  il  y  a .     4.  J^ai  fait  mon 

second   dejeuner  il  y  a  .     5.  J^ai  etudie  ma  legon   de 

frangais  il  y  a .     6.  J'ai  joue  au  tennis  il  y  a . 


LESSON  56   (CINQUANTE-SIXifiME  LEgON) 
REVISION 

I.  Give  a  list  of  the  common  adjectives  that  regularly  pre- 
cede the  noun. 

II.  Give  all  the  forms  of  bon,  beau,  vieux,  blanc.    Use 

these    adjectives   with    the   following   nouns:    maison; 

chapeaux;   fauteuil;   montres;  boeufs; 

— —  chevaux;  vache;  poulet;  pommes  de 

terre. 

III.  Conjugate  in  the  present  indicative,   interrogatively: 
dire,  faire,  etre,  aller. 

Conjugate  in  the  perfect  tense,  negatively:  avoir,  perdre, 
faire,  ecrire. 


110  The  Elements  of  French 

IV.  Conjuguez.  1.  J'ai  choisi  la  reine,  tu  as  choisi  la 
reine,  etc.     2.  J^ai  vendu  ma  maison,  tu  as  vendu  ta  maison,  etc. 

V.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Ou  cultive-t-on  les  vignes?  2.  Ou 
trouve-t-on  des  mines  de  fer?  3.  Ou  trouve-t-on  de  la  houille? 
4.  Oii  est  situee  la  capitale  de  la  France?  5.  Dites  le  nom  d^une 
ville  situee  sur  la  Mediterranee.  6.  Dites  le  nom  d'une  ville 
situee  sur  le  Rhone.  7.  Ou  se  trouve  Reims?  8.  Montrez-moi 
une  belle  rue,  s^il  vous  plait.  9.  Montrez-moi  un  joli  fleuve, 
s^il  vous  plait.  10.  Montrez-moi  une  petite  porte,  s'il  vous 
plait.  11.  Oii  se  trouve  une  grande  fenetre?  12.  Voyez-vous 
un  bel  arbre?  13.  Combien  de  beaux  arbres  voyez-vous? 
14.  Est-ce  que  vous  avez  une  jeune  cousine?  15.  Avez- 
vous  un  vieil  oncle?  16.  Qu'est-ce  qu' Annette  porte  sur 
la  tete?  17.  Qu^est-ce  qu^elle  porte  sur  les  pieds?  18.  De 
quelle  couleur  est  sa  robe?  19.  Avez-vous  perdu  quelque 
chose  ce  matin?  20.  Quand  Tavez-vous  perdu?  21.  L^avez- 
vous  trouv6  maintenant? 

VI.  Traduisez.  1.  The  Alps  are  situated  between  France 
and  Switzerland,  but  the  Pyrenees  are  situated  between 
France  and  Spain.  2.  The  Seine  empties  into  the  English 
Channel,  but  the  Rhone  empties  into  the  Mediterranean. 
3.  It  rains  a  great  deal  in  Brittany  {Bretagne),  and  it  snows 
a  great  deal  in  the  Vosges.  4.  In  the  South  of  France,  the 
weather  is  very  mild  in  winter  and  in  spring.  5.  Near  Lille, 
one  of  the  principal  cities  of  the  North  of  France,  coal  is 
found.  6.  Lyons,  the  principal  city  situated  on  the  Rhone,  is 
in  the  South  of  France.  7.  Many  vineyards  are  cultivated  in 
Touraine  and  in  Champagne.  8.  They  spoke  a  while  ago  about 
Annette.  9.  Annette's  dress  is  beautifully  made.  10.  She  will 
wear  it  this  evening  at  dinner.  11.  Look  at  that  pretty  bon- 
net, and  those  small  shoes,  which  she  is  wearing  today.  12. 
Old  Henry's  clothes  are  very  ugly,  and  do  not  fit  his  body. 
13.  He  bought  those  trousers  and  that  overcoat  three  years 
ago.  14.  The  doctor's  patients  gave  (to)  Peter  the  money 
for  his  trip  several  days  ago. 


Lesson  67  111 

LESSON   57   (CINQUANTE-SEPTlfiME  LECON) 

IDIOMATIC  USE  OF  THE  PRESENT 

VOCABULAIRE 

accuser  (akyze),  to  accuse  longtemps  (lota),  adv.,  a  long  time 

chambre  (Jaibr),  f.,  room;  bedroom  lui  (Iqi),  he,  him,  to  him,  to  her 

corridor  (koridoir),  m.,  corridor  malheureux    (maloer0),    adj.,    un- 
donner  sur  (done  syir),  to  open  on  happy 

empereur  (aproeir),  m.,  emperor  Fern.,  malheureuse  (maloer0:z) 

ne  .  .  .  que  (na  ko),  only  ne  .  .  .  plus  (no  ply),  no  longer 

heureux  (oer0),  adj.,  happy  prison  (prizo),  f.,  prison 

Fern.,  heureuse  (oer0iz)  profession  (profesjo),  f.,  -profession 

lie  (11),  f.,  island  quoi?  (kwa),  What?  (used  as  object 
ne  .  .  .  jamais  (no  3ame),  never*  of  preposition.) 

I.  Conjuguez.  1.  Je  n'en  ai  que  deux,  tu  n'en  as  que 
deux,  etc.  2.  Je  n'ai  jamais  trouve,  tu  n^as  jamais  trouve, 
etc. 

116.  Idiomatic  Use  of  the  Present  (Emploi  Idiomatique  du 
Present),  With  depuis  (dapqi),  since ^  and  a  few  other  words, 
the  present  tense  is  used  instead  of  the  perfect  to  denote 
action  beginning  in  the  past  and  continuing  into  the  present. 

Je  suis  ici  depuis  ce  matin,  /  have  been  here  since  this  morning  (implying 
and  continue  to  be  here).  But,  J'ai  ete  la  une  heure,  /  was  there  an  hour 
(implying  and  now  am  somewhere  else). 

Depuis  quand  etes-vous  chez  vous?  How  long  have  you  been  at 
home?  (implying  and  continue  to  be  there). 

II.  Conjuguez.  1.  Je  suis  a  Tecole  depuis  neuf  heures,  tu 
es  a  Tecole  depuis  neuf  heures,  etc.  2.  Je  n^ai  ce  journal  que 
depuis  ce  matin,  tu  n^as  ce  journal  que  depuis  ce  matin,  etc. 
3.  Je  gagne  beaucoup  d^argent  depuis  quelques  semaines,  tu 
gagnes  beaucoup  d^argent  depuis  quelques  semaines,  etc.  4. 
J^essaie  depuis  hier  de  partir,  tu  essaies  depuis  hier  de  partir, 
etc.     5.  Je  Tai  fait  il  y  a  longtemps,  tu  Fas  fait,  etc. 

*  When  the  verb  is  omitted,  the  ne  of  a  negative  is  omitted  also. 

N*etes-vous  jamais  chez  vous? Jamais,  Are  you  never  at  home? 

Never. 


112  The  Elements  of  French 

III.  Questions.  1.  Depuis  quand  etes-vous  a  Fecole?  2. 
Depuis  combien  d'heures?  3.  Depuis  quand  etes-vous  dans 
cette  classe?  4.  Depuis  combien  de  minutes?  5.  Etudiez- 
vous  le  frangais  depuis  longtemps?  6.  Depuis  combien  de 
mois?  7.  Montrez-moi  votre  porte-plume.  8.  Est-ce  que 
vous  Tavez  depuis  longtemps?  9.  Depuis  quand  Tavez-vous? 
10.  Montrez-moi  votre  montre,  s'il  vous  plait.  11.  Depuis 
quand  Tavez-vous? 

IV.  EN  PRISON* 

Qui  etes-vous? 

Un  malheureux  prisonnier. 

De  quel  pays? 

Frangais. 

Votre  nom? 

Edmond  Dantes. 

Votre  profession? 

Marin. 

Depuis  combien  de  temps  etes-vous  ici? 

Depuis  le  28  f^vrier,  1815. 

Votre  crime? 

Je  suis  innocent. 

Mais  de  quoi  vous  accuse-t-on? 

D'avoir  conspire  pour  le  retour  de  Tempereur. 

Comment!  pour  le  retour   de  Tempereur!   Tempereur 

n^est  done  plus  sur  le  trone? 

II  a  abdique  a  Fontainebleau  en  1814  et  a  ete  relegue  a 

rile  d^Elbe.  Mais  vous-meme  depuis  quel  temps  etes-vous 
done  ici? 

— — Depuis  1811. 

Dantes  frissonna;  cet  homme  avait  (had)  quatre  ans  de 
prison  de  plus  que  lui. 

C'est  bien.     Ne  creusez  plus.     A-t-on  derange  votre  lit 

depuis  que  vous  etes  en  prison? 

Jamais. 

*  Adapted  from  Dumas'  le  Comte  de  Monte  Cristo. 


L'Empereur  Napoleon  I 


Lesson  58  113 

Sur  quoi  donne  votre  chambre? 

Sur  un  corridor. 

Et  le  corridor? 

Aboutit  a  la  cour. 

Helas!     Le  defaut  d'un  compas  m*a  perdu. 

V.  Traduisez.  (Write  dates  in  full.)  1.  How  long  has 
this  innocent  sailor  been  in  prison?  2.  He  has  been  there 
since  the  28th  of  February,  1815.  3.  The  other  prisoner, 
who  is  also  innocent,  has  been  in  the  Chateau  d^If  since 
1811.  4.  They  accused  Dantes  of  having  conspired  for  the 
return  of  Napoleon  I.  5.  Napoleon  abdicated  twice  (two 
times),  in  1814  and  in  1815.  6.  The  first  time  he  was 
exiled  to  the  island  of  Elba,  near  Italy.  7.  The  last  time 
England  exiled  him  to  the  island  of  St.  Helena  (Sainte- 
Helene),  8.  All  protests  on  the  part  of  the  emperor  were 
useless.  9.  He  died  (est  mort),  (a)  prisoner  of  war,  in  1821. 
10.  Dumas  relates  (raconte)  the  story  of  Dantes  and  his 
friend  in  *le  Comte  de  Monte  Cristo.^' 


LESSON  58   (CINQUANTE-HUITlfiME  LECON) 

EN  PRISON  (SUITE) 
VOCABULAIRE 

assez  (de)  (ase),  enough;  plenty  Plural,  travaux*  (travo) 

ne  . . .  rien  (na  rje),  nothing  vivre  (viivr),  irreg.,  to  live 

travail  (travaij),  m.,  work  Pres.  part.,  vivant  (viva) 

I.  Conjuguez.  1.  Je  suis  en  prison  depuis  quatre  mois,  tu 
es  en  prison  depuis  quatre  mois,  etc.  2.  J'ai  conspire  il  y  a 
trois  ans,  tu  as  conspire  il  y  a  trois  ans,  etc. 

IL  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Comment  s'appelle  le  prisonnier?  2. 
De  quel  pays  est-il?    3.  Quelle  est  sa  profession?     Reponse:  II 

*  Nouns  in  -ail  form  the  plural  in  "EUZ,  like  those  in  -al. 


114  The  Elements  of  French 

est  marin.*  4.  Quel  est  son  crime?  5.  Est-il  innocent?  6.  De 
quoi  Ta-t-on  accuse?  7.  Comment  s^appelle  Tempereur? 
Reponse:  II  s'appelle  Napoleon  I®^  (Premier),  8.  En  quelle 
annee  Fempereur  a-t-il  abdique?  9.  Ou  a-t-il  abdique?  10. 
Oil  se  trouve  Fontainebleau?  Reponse:  Fontainebleau  se 
trouve  au  sud  de  Paris.  11.  Ou  a-t-on  relegue  Fempereur? 
12.  Ou  se  trouve  File  d^Elbe?  Reponse:  Elle  se  trouve  dans 
la  M^diterranee.  13.  Depuis  quand  Fautre  homme  est-il 
en  prison?  14.  Est-ce  que  Fon  a  derange  le  lit  de  Dantes? 
15.  Sur  quoi  donne  sa  chambre?  16.  Sa  porte  est-elle  ouverte 
ou  fermee?  17.  Ou  aboutit  le  corridor?  18.  Est-ce  que  Fami 
de  Dantes  a  eu  un  compas?  19.  Qu^est-ce  qui  Fa  perdu?  20. 
Dites  votre  nom.  21.  Votre  profession.  22.  Depuis  com- 
bien  de  temps  etes-vous  ici?  23.  Depuis  quelle  annee?  24. 
Quelle  ville  habitez-vous?  25.  Dans  quel  etat  demeurez- 
vous?  26.  Depuis  quand  demeurez-vous  dans  cet  etat?  27. 
Fait-il  beau  aujourd'hui?  28.  Depuis  quand  fait-il  beau? 
29.  Quel  temps  a-t-il  fait  hier?  30.  Quel  temps  a-t-il  fait  il 
y  a  un  mois? 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  I  have  been  a  prisoner  of  war  for  sev- 
eral years.  2.  They  have  been  giving  me  plenty  of  bread 
and  water,  but  not  (pas)  enough  meat  and  vegetables.  3. 
For  a  long  time  I  have  had  at  lunch  only  soup,  bread,  a 
vegetable  and  some  coffee  which  is  very  bad.  4.  Then  they 
accused  me  of  having  conspired  for  the  death  of  the  emperor. 
5.  I  am  innocent  of  this  crime.  6.  For  a  long  time  I  have 
been  trying  another  thing  which  is  surer  (more  sure).  7. 
But  they  put  me  in  a  dark  little  room.  8.  This  room  opens 
on  an  ugly,  dark  corridor.     9.  This  corridor  has  been  closed 

*  Nouns  are  usually  accompanied  by  the  article.  Note,  however,  the  fol- 
lowing important  exceptions : 

1.  Names  of  cities,  usually.     (See  §105.) 

2.  After  the  preposition  en.     (See  §106,  b.) 

3.  Nouns  in  apposition,  not  used  in  a  restrictive  sense.  (See  Lesson  51, 
note  on  page  99.) 

4.  Unmodified  nouns,  in  the  predicate,  denoting  occupation  or  rank. 


Lesson  59  115 

for  several  years.  10.  In  this  prison  I  found  a  friend  who 
has  been  (a)  prisoner  much  longer  than  I  {moi),  11.  He  has 
been  trying  for  several  years  to  dig  into  that  little  dark  cor- 
ridor. 12.  Then  he  found  that  the  corridor  leads  to  nothing, 
and  is  very  unhappy  (for  it=en).  13.  Alas!  all  the  work 
which  he  has  been  doing  is  lost. 


LESSON  59   (CINQUANTE-NEUVlfiME  LEgON) 

THE  PARTITIVE  CONSTRUCTION:  WORDS  OF  QUANTITY 

VOCABULAIRE 
aimer  (eme),  to  love;  like  frais  (fre),  adj.,  fresh,  cool 

buvez-vous    (byve    vu),    Do    you         Feminine,  fraiche  (freij*) 

drink?  interessant  (eteresa),  adj.,  interest- 

je  bois  (bwa),  /  drink  ing 

chemin  (fame),  m.,  road  paille  (paij),  f.,  straw 

chemin  de  fer  (Jame  da  fe:r)  railroad     payer  (peje),  to  pay,  pay  for 
plusieurs  (plyzjoeir),  adj.,  pron.,  several 

117.  The  Partitive  Construction  (le  Partitif),  We  have 
seen  that  in  the  partitive  construction,  de+the  definite 
article  is  used>  du  lait,  de  la  viande,  de  Teau,  des  livres, 
des  hommes,  etc.,  wherever  the  words  some  or  any  are 
expressed  or  implied  before  the  noun. 

De  alone  is  used  (a),  after  a  negative  verb:  Je  n^ai  pas  de 
viande;  tu  n^as  pas  d'eau;  il  n^a  pas  de  lait,  etc.;  (6),  before 
an  adjective,     (See  Appendix.) 

EUe  fait  du  pain  blanc,  She  makes  {some)  white  bread. 
EUe  fait  de  bons  pains,  She  makes  (some)  good  loaves,* 
II  achete  de  la  viande  fraiche,  He  buys  (some)  fresh  meat, 
II  achete  de  bonnes  viandes.  He  buys  (some)  good  meats. 
Ma  soeur  a  des  roses  rouges.  My  sister  has  (some)  red  roses. 
Ma  soeur  a  de  jolies  roses.  My  sister  has  {some)  pretty  roses. 
Observe  also,  De  grands  canifs  et  de^  petits,  Large  knives  and  small 

{knives,  understood). 

1- 

*  Pains  (plural)  usually  means  loaves  of  bread. 


116  The  Elements  of  French 

I.  Questions.  1.  Voyez-vous  des  arbres?  2.  Voyez-vous 
de  beaux  arbres?  3.  Montrez-moi  des  chapeaux.  4.  Mon- 
trez-moi  de  jolis  chapeaux.  5.  Voyez-vous  des  choses  interes- 
santes?  6.  En  voyez-vous  d'autres?  7.  N^avez-vous  pas 
d^oeufs?  8.  Avez-vous  de  bons  oeufs?  9.  Prenez-vous  des 
oeufs  bien  cuits?  10.  Ne  buvez-vous  pas  d'eau?  11.  Buvez- 
vous  de  Teau  bien  fraiche?  12.  Prenez-vous  du  cafe?  13. 
Prenez-vous  de  ce  cafe? 

118.  De  is  used  after  words  of  quantity,  as  follows: 

assez  de  lait,  enough  milk  tant  de  choses,  so  many  things 

beaucoup  de  fruits,  much  fruit  un   kilo    de   sucre,   a   kilogram   of 

combien     de     livres?     how    many  sugar  {=  about  2^  lbs.) 

books?  une  livre*  de  pommes,  a  pound  of 

peu  de  pain,  little  bread  apples 

trop  de  cafe,  too  much  coffee  un  verre  d^eau,  a  glass  of  water 

(a)  Observe,  however,  that  bien  and  la  plupart  are  followed  by  de  + 
the  definite  article. 

1.  Bien  des  hommes.  Many  men 

2.  La  plupart  des  femmes.  Most  women 

Note.    La  plupart,  though  singular  in  form,  takes  a  plural  verb. 

La  plupart  des  eleves  travaillent  bien,  Most  of  the  pupils  work  well. 

(b)  Observe  that  de  never  follows  the  adjective  plusieurs,  several. 

Plusieurs  livres.  Several  books 

(c)  Note  also  that  de  is  used  only  before  nouhs,  not  before  verbs, 
adverbs,  etc. 

II.  Questions.  1.  Avez-vous  assez  de  pain?  2.  Avez- 
vous  assez  mange?  3.  Aimez-vous  beaucoup  de  fruits?  Les 
aimez-vous  beaucoup?  5.  Avez-vous  beaucoup  de  livres?  6. 
Avez-vous  plusieurs  livres?  7.  Jean  a-t-il  beaucoup  de  cray- 
ons?   8.  Est-ce  qu'il  a  plusieurs  crayons? 

119.  Note  the  use  of  de  +  a  noun  with  the  force  of  an 
adjective: 

Une  montre  d^or,  A  gold  watch 

*Un  livre  =  a  book. 

Une  livre  =*a  pound  (i.  e.,  half  a  kilogram). 


Lesson  60  117 

III.  Questions.  1.  Avez-vous  une  montre  d'or?  2.  Mon- 
trez-moi  une  montre  d^argent.  3.  Montrez-moi  une  chaise 
de  bois,  s'il  vous  plait.  4.  Montrez-moi  un  chapeau  de  paille, 
s'il  vous  plait.     5.  Oii  se  trouve  le  chemin  de  fer? 

120.   A  Few  Idioms  {Quelques  Idioiismes). 

avoir  besoin  (de)  (bazwe),  to  he  in     avoir  raison  (rezo),  to  he  right 

need  of,  to  need  avoir  faim  (fe),  to  he  hungry 

avoir  chaud  (Jo),  to  he  warm*  avoir  soif  (swaf),  to  he  thirsty 

avoir  froid  (frwa),  to  he  cold\  avoir  sommeil  (someij),  to  he  sleepy 

avoir  peur  (poeir),  to  he  afraid  avoir  tort  (toir),  to  be  wrong 

IV.  Questions.  1.  Avez-vous  besoin  de  quelque  chose? 
2.  De  quoi  avez-vous  besoin?  3.  Avez-vous  chaud?  4.  Fait- 
il  chaud  ici?  5.  Avez-vous  sommeil  quand  il  fait  chaud? 
6.  Quel  autre  eleve  a  aussi  chaud?  7.  En  quelle  saison  avez- 
vous  froid?  8.  En  quelle  saison  fait-il  froid?  9.  En  quels 
mois?  10.  Avez-vous  peur?  11.  De  quoi  avez-vous  peur? 
12.  Avez-vous  peur  des  chiens,  monsieur?  13.  Avez-vous  peur 
des  vaches,  mademoiselle?  14.  Est-ce  que  Charles  a  peur? 
15.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  dit?  16.  A-t-il  tort?  17.  A-t-il  raison? 
18.  A  quelle  heure  avez-vous  faim?  19.  A  quelle  heure  avez- 
vous  soif? 


LESSON   60   (SOIXANTlfiME  LECON) 

WORDS  OF  QUANTITY  —  Continued 
VOCABULAIRE 

acier  (asje),  m.,  steel  fleur  (floeir),  f.,  flower 

agneau  (ajio),  m.,  lamh  fromage  (fromais),  m.,  cheese 

Plural,  agneaux  (apo)  laine  (len),  f.,  wool 

cerise  (sariiz),  f.,  cherry  laitue  (lety),  f.,  lettuce 

cidre  (sidr),  m.,  cider  longtemps  (lota),  adv.,  a  long  time 
excellent  (sksela),  adj.,  excellent  (Note.     Not  un  longtemps) 

*  Compare  —  II  fait  chaud,  It  is  warm. 
t  Compare  —  II  fait  froid,  It  is  cold. 

(Faire  is  used  in  this  sense  of  weather  and  temperature  only.) 


118  The  Elements  of  French 

I.  Traduisez.  1.  Here  are  (some)  good  children.  2.  Here 
are  (some)  excellent  children.  3.  We  buy  (some)  pretty 
flowers.  4.  We  buy  (some)  white  flowers.  5.  There  are 
(some)  old  horses.  6.  There  are  (some)  black  horses.  7.  They 
look  at  some  of  these  colors.  8.  They  are  looking  at  some 
beautiful  colors.  9.  My  brother  has  (some)  large  cherries. 
10.  My  brother  has  (some)  red  cherries. 

II.  Traduisez.  1.  Do  you  see  any  stores?  Do  you  see  any 
small  stores?  3.  Give  me  some  cheese.  4.  Give  me  some  fresh 
cheese.  5.  Do  you  see  any  interesting  faces?  6.  Have  you 
any  coal?  7.  Have  you  received  any  letters?  8.  Do  you  have 
any  pears?    9.  Do  they  have  any  peaches? 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  Enough  lessons.  2.  Too  many  apples. 
3.  Many  windows  (Two  ways).  4.  So  many  pictures.  5.  How 
many  rivers?  6.  Little  money.  7.  A  little  money.  8.  A  kilo- 
gram of  fruit  (Use  plural).  9.  A  pound  of  paper.  10.  A  glass 
of  cider.    11.  Several  evenings.    12.  Most  waiters. 

IV.  Traduisez.  1.  Have  you  enough  red  ink?  2.  Have  you 
written  long  enough?  3.  Will  you  have  some  lettuce?  4.  Have 
you  many  aunts?  5.  Have  you  several  uncles?  6.  Has  Charles 
many  pen-holders?  7.  Has  he  several  pens?  8.  Have  you  a 
silver  knife?  9.  Show  me  a  steel  knife.  10.  Show  me  an  iron 
box,  if  you  please.  11.  Show  me  a  woolen  suit,  if  you  please. 
12.  Do  you  need  your  overcoat?  13.  Do  you  need  this  sack 
suit?  14.  What  do  you  need  now?  15.  Was  it  cold  here  yes- 
terday? 16.  Are  you  warm  enough  now?  17.  Is  your  neighbor 
warm  enough,  also? 

V.  Fill  in  the  blanks  {Remplacez  les  tirets).     1.  Nous 

chaud  aujourd^hui.     2.  Vous  n' pas  faim  ce  matin.     3. 

vous  besoin  de  ce  livre?    4.  lis  ont  assez pain. 

VI.  Use  beaucoup,  bien,  la  plupart,   and  trop  with  the 

following  words:  amis;  couleurs;  cartes;  

peches; domestiques; excuses; fauteuils. 


Lesson  61  119 

LESSON  61   (SOIXANTE  ET  UNlfiME  LEQCN) 

IDIOMS  WITH  AVOIR 

VOCABULAIRE 

accident  (aksida),  m.,  accident  doute  (dut),  m.,  doubt 

boire  (bwair),  irreg.,  to  drink  il  faut  (il  fo),  it  is  necessary 

Pres.  part,  buvant  (byvci).  loin  (Iwe),  adv.,  far 

Past  part,  bu  (by).  monde  (moid),  m.,  world 
bourgmestre  (burgmestr),  m.,  bur-     reve  (reiv),  m.,  dream 

gomaster  sans  (sa),  prep.,  without 

cause  (koiz),  f.,  cau^e  sentir  (sathr),  to  feel 
docteur  (doktoe:r),  m.,  doctor  (Conjugated  like  partir) 

dormir  (dormiir),  to  sleep  verre  (veir),  m.,  glass 

(Conjugated  like  partir)  vin  (ve),  m.,  wine 

aller  chercher,  to  go  for;  go  to  look  for 
tout  le  monde  (tu  1  m5:d),  everybody 

Present  Indicative  {le  Present  de  V  Indicatif)  of  venir,  \o 
come, 

viens  (vje)  venons  (vano) 

viens  (vje)  venez  (vane) 

vient  (vje)  viennent  (vjen) 

I.  Conjuguez.  1.  Je  viens  de  Paris,  tu  viens  de  Paris,  etc. 
2.  Je  viens  a  huit  heures  et  demi,  tu  viens,  etc. 

II.  LE  BOURGMESTRE* 

Le  Docteur. —  Vous  allez  mieux,  monsieur  le  bourgmestre? 

Mathis. —  Je  vais  mieux. 

Le  Docteur. —  Vous  ne  sentez  plus  vos  maux  de  tete? 

Mathis. —  Non. 

Le  Docteur. —  Ni  vos  bourdonnements  d^oreilles? 

Mathis. —  Quand  je  vous  dis  que  tout  va  bien  .  .  .  que  je 
suis  comme  tons  les  jours  .  .  .  c'est  assez  clair,  je  pense! 

Catherine. — .  .  .  Depuis  longtemps  il  a  de  mauvais  reves 
.  .  .  il  parle  .  .  .  il  se  leve  pour  boire  de  Teau  fraiche. 

Mathis. —  Tout  le  monde  pent  avoir  soif  la  nuit. 

*Adapted  from  Erckmann-Chatrian's  le  Juif  polonais. 


120  The  Elements  of  French 

Le  Docteur. —  Sans  doute  .  .  .  mais  il  faut  vous  menager. 
Vous  buvez  trop  de  vin  blanc,  monsieur  le  bourgmestre  .  .  . 
Votre  accident  d'avant-hier  soir  vient  de  la  .  .  .  Vous  avez 
trop  bu  de  vin  chez  votre  cousin  .  .  .  et  puis  le  grand  froid  vous 
a  saisi,  parce  que  tout  le  sang  a  ete  a  la  tete. 

Mathis. —  J'ai  eu  froid  aux  pieds,  c'est  vrai;  mais  il  ne 
faut  pas  aller  chercher  si  loin;  le  juif  polonais  est  cause  de 
tout. 

III.  Continue  the  following,  present  and  future  tenses:  1. 
J'ai  raison,  tu  as  raison,  etc.  2.  Je  n'ai  pas  froid,  tu  n'as  pas 
froid,  etc.    3.  Je  n^en  ai  pas  besoin,  tu  n'en  as  pas  besoin,  etc. 

4.  J'achete  de  bonne  viande,  tu  achetes  de  bonne  viande,  etc. 

5.  Je  vais  vendre  de  jolies  roses,  tu  vas  vendre  de  jolies  roses, 
itc.  6.  Depuis  quelque  temps,  je  ne  dors  plus  bien,  depuis 
quelque  temps,  tu  ne  dors  plus  bien,  etc.  7.  Je  n'ai  pas  de 
maux  de  tete,  tu  n'as  pas  de  maux  de  tete.  8.  J'ai  soif  la  nuit, 
tu  as  soif  la  nuit,  etc. 

IV.  Make  short  sentences  containing  the  following  words: 
besoin;  assez;  un  kilo;  beaucoup;  bien  des;  combien;  tant; 
plusieurs;  un  verre;  chaud;  froid;  faim;  soif;  raison;  tort;  som- 
meil;  trop. 

V.  Traduisez.  1.  For  a  long  time  M.  Mathis  has  not  slept 
well  at  night.  2.  He  is  sleepy  in  the  day,  but  at  night  he.  cannot 
{ne  pent  pas)  sleep.  3.  For  a  long  time  he  has  had  (felt)  a 
buzzing  in  the  ears.  4.  Every  day  he  has  headaches.  5.  The 
doctor  says  that  everything  comes  from  the  white  wine  which 
he  drinks  (boit).  6.  M.  Mathis  says  that  he  will  be  well  in 
(dans)  a  few  days.  7.  But  at  night  he  is  always  thirsty.  8.  The 
doctor  says  that  he  must  (it  is  necessary  to)  drink  a  great 
deal  of  fresh  water.  9.  He  must  not  drink  so  much  white 
wine. 

VI.  Exercice  Supplementaire.  1.  You  have  eaten  too 
much.  2.  You  have  eaten  too  much  meat.  3.  He  is  study- 
ing too  long.     4.  He  is  studying  too  many  things. 


Lesson  62  121 

LESSON  62   (SOIXANTE-PEUXIEME  LEgON) 
REVISION 

I.  Conjuguez.  1.  Je  viens  a  cinq  heures  du  matin,  tu 
viens  a  cinq  heures  du  matin,  etc.  2.  Je  Tai  fait  il  y  a 
longtemps,  tu  Tas  fait  il  y  a  longtemps,  etc.  3.  Je  suis  ici 
depuis  hier,  tu  es  ici  depuis  hier,  etc.  4.  J'irai  chez  lui  tout 
a  rheure,  tu  iras  chez  lui  tout  a  Theure,  etc. 

II.  Use  beaucoup,  tant,  plusieurs,  assez,  trop,  combien,  with 

the  following  words:    chemin  de  fer;  paille;  

prison; docteur; reve; verre; doute; 

accident; vin; travaux; travail; empereur; 

chambre; ile; profession. 

Use  the  plural  form  of  the  noun  when  the  singular  is 
inappropriate. 

III.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Qui  est  Edmond  Dantes?  2.  Com- 
ment s^appelle  Tempereur?  3.  Depuis  quand  Dantes  est-il  en 
prison?  4.  Depuis  quand  son  ami  est-il  en  prison?  5.  Quel 
crime  Dantes  a-t-il  commis  {committed)'^  6.  Quelle  est  sa  pro- 
fession? 7.  Sur  quoi  donne  sa  chambre?  8.  En  prison  a-t-on 
de  grandes  ou  de  petites  chambres?  9.  A-t-on  de  jolies  ou  de 
vilaines  chambres?  10.  Y  a-t-il  beaucoup  de  prisonniers  dans 
votreville?  11.  Est-ce  qu^il  fait  chaud?  12.  Fait-il  froid?  13. 
Avez-vous  froid?  14.  Avez-vous  assez  dormi?  15.  Avez-vous 
sommeil?  16.  Vous  avez  faim,  n^est-ce  pas?  17.  Est-ce  que 
j^ai  raison?    18.  Est-ce  que  j'ai  tort? 

IV.  Traduisez.  1.  We  have  been  here  for  two  hours  and 
a  half.  2.  They  put  me  in  a  dark  little  room  several  months 
ago.  3.  For  a  long  time  they  have  not  been  giving  me 
enough  meat  and  vegetables.  4.  For  several  weeks  I  have 
been  eating  some  of  these  old  vegetables,  and  some  of  that 
poor  (mauvais)  coffee.  5.  I  have  a  good  many  friends  here 
who  have  been  prisoners  much  longer  than  I.  6.  My  room 
and  my  friends'  rooms  open  on  long,  ugly  corridors.     7.  They 


122  The  Elements  of  French 

have  been  hungry  for  a  long  time  and  they  have  no  bread. 

8.  The  shoe   dealer  has  been  selling  some  beautiful   shoes. 

9.  Do  you  do  a  great  deal  of  work?  10.  I  do  enough  (of  it). 
11.  You  have  (some)  young  cousins,  have  you  not?  12.  There 
are  too  many  small  children  in  this  room.  13.  How  many 
families  are  there  in  that  house?  14.  He  has  not  so  many 
brothers  as  (of)  sisters.  15.  That  cake  was  eaten  several  hours 
ago.  16.  John  is  afraid  of  it,  is  he  not?  17.  Is  not  Charles 
hungry  and  thirsty  this  morning?  18.  Is  Mary  right,  or  is  she 
wrong?  19.  Has  it  been  cold  since  yesterday?  20.  Are  you 
warm  enough  now?  21.  My  friend,  you  need  sleep.  22.  You 
have  played  enough;  have  you  enough  time  now  to  (pour) 
work? 

LESSON  63    (SOIXANTE-TROISlfiME  LEgON) 

LE  BOURGMESTRE  —  Suite 

VOCABULAIRE 

mal  k  la  tete  (mal  a  la  te:t),  m.,  raconter  (rakote),  to  narrate 

headache  siir  (syir),  adj.,  sure 

mal  ^  la  gorge  (mal  a  la  gors),  m.,  bien  s^r,  surely 

sore  throat  surtout  (syrtu),  adv.,  especially 

mal  aux  dents  (mal  o  da),  m.,  tooth-  tout  de  suite  (tu  t  sqit),  immedi- 
ache  ately 

peut-etre  (poet  e:tr),  perhaps 

I.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Allez-vousbienaujourd'hui?  2.  AUez- 
vous  mieux  qu'hier?  3.  Avez-vous  mal  a  la  tete?  4.  Avez- 
vous  mal  a  la  gorge?  5.  Avez-vous  mal  aux  dents?  6.  Est-ce 
que  Philippe  a  mal  aux  oreilles?  7.  Dormez-vous  bien  la  nuit? 
8.  Faites-vous  de  bons  reves  ou  de  mauvais  reves?  9.  Racon- 
tez-moi  un  de  vos  reves,  s'il  vous  plait.  10.  Buvez-vous  du 
vin?  11.  Le  vin  monte-t-il  a  la  tete?  12.  Que  buvez-vous? 
13.  En  hiver  avez-vous  froid?  14.  Avez-vous  froid  aux 
pieds  en  hiver?  15.  Avez-vous  chaud  maintenant?  16.  En 
quelle  saison  avez-vous  chaud?  17.  Dans  quels  mois  avez- 
vous  froid? 


Lesson  64  123 

II.  Traduisez.  1.  Are  you  too  cold  this  morning,  sir? 
2.  There  is  your  overcoat,  I  think.  3.  Thank  you,  sir, 
I  need  it,  surely.  4.  I  am  never  warm  enough.  5.  I  am 
always  too  cold.  6.  Do  you  sleep  well  nights,  now?  7. 
Yes,  I  sleep  well  at  night,  but  (I)*  have  bad  dreams.  8.  I 
have  headaches  also  in  the  morning,  especially  when  I  try  to 
work.  9.  Do  you  talk  when  you  are  sleeping?  10.  It  is  true, 
I  often  talk  (talk  often)  when  I  am  sleeping.  11.  There  is 
some  good  fresh  water.    12.  Take  several  glasses  (of  it),  if  you 

wish  (it). 

'    CONVERSATION 
Maitre. —  Levez-vous. 
Eleve. —  Je  me  leve. 
M. —  Venez  ici. 
E. —  Je  viens  tout  de  suite. 
M. —  Que  faites-vous  avant  de  venir? 
E. —  Je  me  leve  avant  de  venir. 
M. —  Que  faites-vous  apres? 
E. —  Je  viens,  n*est-ce  pas? 
M. —  Est-ce  que  Jacques  vient  aussi? 
E. —  Non,  monsieur,  Jacques  ne  vient  pas. 
M. —  Est-ce  que  Marguerite  vient  aussi? 
E. —  Non,  monsieur,  Marguerite  ne  vient  pas. 
M. — •  Est-ce  que  Jacques  et  Marguerite  viennent? 
E. —  Non,  monsieur,  ils  ne  viennent  pas,  ils  restent. 


LESSON   64   (SOIXANTE-QUATRlfiME  LEgON) 

FORMATION    OF    ADVERBS':      COMPARISON    OF    ADJECTIVES 
AND  ADVERBS 
VOCABULAIRE 
bas  (ba),  adj.,  low  facile  (fasil),  adj.,  easy 

Feminine,  basse  (ba:s)  facilement  (fasilmcL),  adv.,  easily 

carre  (kare),  adj.,  square  long  (15),  adj.,  long 

complet  (kople),  adj.,  complete  Feminine,  longue  (15: g) 

Feminine,  complete  peu  (p0),  adv.,  little 

cruel  (kryel),  adj.,  cruel  repas  (rapa),  m.,  meal 

Feininine,  cruelle  (kryel)  vite  (vit),  adv.,  quickly,  rapidly 

difficile  (difisil),  adj.,  difficult 

*  Subject  pronouns  in  French  are  usually  repeated,  especially  pronouns  of 
the  first  person. 


124 


The  Elements  of  French 


121.  Formation  of  Adverbs  {Formation  des  Adverbes).  Ad- 
verbs are  regularly  formed  by  adding  -ment  to  the  feminine  of 
the  corresponding  adjective. 


Adjective  (Adjectif) 

Adverb  (Adverhe) 

principal 

principalement 

premier 

premierement 

dernier 

dernierement 

haut 

hautement 

actif 

activement 

ancien 

anciennement 

complet 

completement 

ouvert 

ouvertement 

122.  If  the  masculine  of  the  adjective  ends  in  a  vowel  other 
than  -e,  the  e  of  the  feminine  is  dropped  before  -ment. 

Adjective  Adverb 

joli(e)  joliment 

carre(e)  carrement 

Note.     A  few  adverbs  have  fixed  forms,  like  tres,  mal,  bien,  etc. 

123.  Comparison  of  Adjectives  and  Adverbs  (Comparaison 
des  Adjectif s  et  des  Adverbes).  Adjectives  and  adverbs  are  regu- 
larly compared  by  using  plus  (ply),  morCy  or  moins  (mwe), 
lesSj  with  the  positive.  To  form  the  superlative,  prefix  the 
article  to  the  comparative. 

Positive  Comparative  Superlative 

(Positif)  {Comparatif)  {Superlatif) 


Masc.  actif 
Fem,    active 
activement 


plus  actif 
moins  actif 

plus  active 
moins  active 

plus  activement 
moins  activement 


le  plus  actif 
le  moins  actif 

la  plus  active 
la  moins  active 

le*  plus  activement 
le*  moins  activement 


(a)   Observe  also  aussi  .  .  .  que,  as  .  .  ,  aSy  used  for  equal- 
ity before  each  adjective,  or  adverb,  compared. 

II  est  aussi  capable  que  Jean,  He  is  as  capable  as  John. 


"  The  definite  article  is  invariable  in  the  adverb. 


Lesson  64  125 

(6)   After  a  negative,  aussi  is  often  replaced  by  si. 
Vous  ii*etes  pas  si  grand  que  moi,  You  are  not  as^  tall  as  I, 

Exercice.     Compare  vieuXy  ancien,  joliy  heau,  noivy  blanc,  vert, 
grand,  long,  bas. 

Form,  and  compare,  adverbs  from  the  following  adjectives: 
blanc,  joli,  chaud,  ancien,  heureux,  malheureux,  bas,  gros,  cruel, 

124.  The  article  is  repeated  when  the  superlative  follows 
the  noun: 

1.  Le  livre  le  plus  interessant,  The  most  interesting  hook. 

2.  Le  jour  le  plus  malheureux,  The  most  unhappy  day, 

3.  La  jeune  fille  la  plus  active,  The  most  active  girl. 

4.  La  maison  la  plus  ancienne,  The  most  ancient  house. 

125.  A  Few  Irregular  Comparisons  {Quelques  Comparaisons 
Irregulieres) . 


Adj. 

bon  (bo) 

meilleur  (mejceir) 

le  meilleur 

Adv. 

bien  (bje) 

mieux  (mj0) 

le  mieux 

peu  (p0) 

moins  (mwe) 

le  moins 

beaucoup  (boku) 

plus  (ply) 

le  plus 

I.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Avez-vous  bien  prepare  la  legon  d'au- 
jourd'hui?  2.  Est-ce  que  votre  legon  d'hier  a  ^te  meilleure? 
3.  Quelle  legon  a  ete  la  meilleure?  4.  AUez-vous  bien  aujour- 
d'hui?  5.  Allez-vous  mieux  qu'hier?  6.  En  quelle  saison  allez- 
vous  le  mieux?  7.  Mangez-vous  beaucoup?  8.  Mangez-vous 
peu?  9.  Mangez-vous  plus  au  dejeuner  qu'au  diner?  10. 
Mangez-vous  moins?  11.  A  quel  repas  mangez-vous  le  plus? 
12.  A  quel  repas  mangez-vous  le  moins?  13.  Parlez-vous 
frangais?  14.  Le  parlez-vous  bien?  15.  Parlez-vous  mieux  le 
frangais  que  Tanglais?  16.  Quelle  langue  parlez-vous  le  mieux? 
17.  Parlez-vous  facilement?    18.  Travaillez-vous  activement? 

II.  Traduisez.  1.  We  prepared  the  lesson  for  (of)  today 
very  easily.  2.  We  studied  adverbs  principally.  3.  We  learned 
{avons  appris)  the  adverbs  for  prettily  and  for  squarely,  4.  The 
most  difficult  adverb  was  cruelly,     5.  The  most  interesting 


126  The  Elements  of  French 

adverb  was  lastly,  6.  It  was  (c^etait)  our  best  lesson.  7. 
Today  I  am  feeling  much  better  than  a  short  time  ago.  8.  I 
am  eating  more  and  sleeping  better.  9.  I  am  also  studying  a 
great  deal  better.  10.  I  speak  French  now  as  well  as  (aussi 
hien  que)  English.  11.  But  I  do  not  speak  it  so  (I  speak  it  less) 
rapidly. 


LESSON   65   (SOIXANTE-CINQUlfiME  LEgON) 

LES  ADVERBES 

VOCABULAIRE 
adverbe  (adverb),  m.,  adverb  immediatement  (imedjatma),  adv., 

avant-demier    (ava    dernje),    adj.,  immediately 

next  to  last  justement  (systma),  adv.,  just;  pre- 

condition (kodisjo),  f.,  condition  cisely 

echapper  (ejape),  to  escape  gener  (sene),  to  bother;  hinder 

epouser  (epuze),  to  marry  noter  (note),  to  note,  observe 

etranger  (etrase),  m.,  stranger;  for-      pardon  (pardo),  m.,  pardon;  I  beg 

eigner  pardon 

facile  (fasil),  adj.,  easy  plutot  (plyto),  adv.,  rather;  sooner 

fou  (fu),  m.,  madman  reposer  (rapoze),  to  rest 

fort  (foir),  adj.,  strong;  clever 

aimer  mieux,  to  prefer 

J^aime  mieux  les  roses  que  les  tulipes,  /  prefer  roses  to  tulips  (liter- 
ally, /  like  better  the  roses  than  the  tulips), 

126.    Voir  (vwa:r),  to  see, 

vols  (vwa)  voyons  (vwajo)* 

vols  (vwa)  voyez  (vwaje)* 

volt  (vwa)  voient  (vwa) 

I.  LES  ADVERBES  t 

Hector. —  C^est  un  fou  .  .  .  surement  .  .  .  indubitablement. 

Hortense. —  Crr! 

Hector. —  Quoi? 

Hortense. —  Indubitablement,     Toujours  des  adverbes. 

*  Observe  that  the  i  of  the  stem  changes  to  y  before  an  accented  syllable, 
t  Adapted  from  la  Lettre  chargee,  by  Labiche. 


Lesson  65  127 

Hector. —  Oh!  pardon!  il  m'a  echapp^  .  .  .  Donnez-moi  cette 
lettre,  j^ai  justment  un  ami  a  la  prefecture  de  police  qui  est 
precisement  au  bureau  des  etrangers,  et  il  va  nous  renseigner 
sur  abondamment . 

Hortense. —  La  —  reposez-vous  .  .  .  Vous  en  avez  mis  trois 
sur  la  table! 

Hector. —  Quoi! 

Hortense. —  Justement .  .  .  precisement .  .  .  surabondamment 
.  .  .  Ecoutez,  cousin,  c'est  plus  fort  que  moi  .  .  .  jamais  je  ne 
vous  epouserai  dans  ces  conditions-la. 

Hector. —  Voyons,  calmez-vous  .  .  .  c'est  le  dernier  ou  plutot 
Tavant-dernier. 

Hortense. —  Vous  en  avez  encore  un  qui  vous  gene? 

Hector. —  Oui  .  .  .  eternellement. 

Hortense. —  Oh!  j^aime  mieux  cet  adverbe-1^. 

II.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Notez-vous  des  adverbes?  2.  Les 
notez-vous  precisement?  3.  Quels  adverbes  notez-vous? 
4.  Hector  emploie-t-il  beaucoup  d' adverbes?  5.  Est-ce  que  ses 
adverbes  sont  longs?  6.  Sont-ils  difficiles  ou  faciles  a  prononcer? 
7.  Quels  sont  les  adverbes  qu'il  emploie?  8.  Quel  adverbe  est- 
ce  qu^Hortense  aime  le  mieux? 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  Hector  is  speaking  of  a  man  who  {qui) 
is  surely  a  madman.  2.  That  man  has  left  a  letter  at  the 
house.  3.  Undoubtedly  Hortense  does  not  understand  the 
letter.  4.  Fortunately  her  friend  Hector  will  go  to  the 
bureau  des  etrangers.  5.  Hector  has  at  this  office  a  friend 
who  will  perhaps  give  them  precise  information  (will  inform 
them  precisely).  6.  Hector ^s  adverbs  bother  Hortense  more 
than  the  stranger^s  letter.  7.  Hector  pronounces  three  (of 
them)  which  are  very  long  and  very  difficult.  8.  Hortense  tells 
(d)  Hector:  ^^Rest  yourself.  9.  There  are  already  enough 
adverbs.  10.  I  will  never  marry  a  man  who  uses  too  many 
(of  them).''  11.  Hector  answers,  ''Here  is  the  last  (one),  or 
rather,  next  to  the  last  (one).    12.  That  adverb  is  eternally J^ 


128 


The  Elements  of  French 


LESSON   66    (SOIXANTE-SIXIEME   LEgo:N) 

THE  PAST  DESCRIPTIVE 

127,   The  Past  Descriptive  (or  Imperfect)  {V Imparfait) , 

The  stem  of  the  past  descriptive  tense  of  regular  verbs  is 
formed  by  dropping  the  ending  -ant  of  the  present  participle. 

Participles  (Participes) 
donn  -ant  finiss  -ant  perd  -ant 

Past  Descriptive  {VImparfait) 

I  gave,  was  giving,  used      I  finished,  was  finish^      I  lost,  was  losing,  used 
to  give,  etc. 


donn  ais  (done)  * 
donn  ais  (done)  * 
donn  ait  (done)  * 
donn  ions  (donj5) 
donn  iez  (donje) 
donn  aient  (done)  * 


ing,   used   to  finish, 
etc. 

finiss  ais  (finise)t 
finiss  ais  (finise)t 
finiss  ait  (finise)t 
finiss  ions  (finisjS) 
finiss  iez  (finis je) 
finiss  aient  (finise)t 


to  lose,  etc. 

perd  ais  (perde)t 
perd  ais  (perde)t 
perd  ait  (perde)t 
perd  ions  (perd jo) 
perd  iez  (perdje) 
perd  aient  (perde)t 


128.   The  past  descriptive  of  the  irregular  verbs  avoir,  etre, 
and  f aire  is : 

faire 


av  ais  (ave) 
av  ais  (ave) 
av  ait  (ave) 
av  ions  (avjo) 
av  iez  (avje) 
av  aient  (ave) 


etre 

et  ais  (ete) 
et  ais  (ete) 
et  ait  (ete) 
et  ions  (etjo) 
et  iez  (etje) 
et  aient  (ete) 


fais  ais  (foze) 
fais  ais  (faze) 
fais  ait  (faze) 
fais  ions  (fozjo) 
fais  iez  (fozje) 
fais  aient  (faze) 


129.   Use  of  the  Past  Descriptive  (Emploi  de  V Imparfait) , 
1.   The  Past  Descriptive  is  often  used  in  descriptions.     It 

then  corresponds  to  the  English  was  giving,  was  finishing,  was 

losing,  etc. 

La  maison  se  trouvait  au  coin,  The  house  stood  (found  itself)  on  the  corner. 
Je  finissais  la  le^on  quand  il  a  parle,  /  was  finishing  the  lesson  when  he 
spoke. 


*  Pronounced  alike. 


t  Pronounced  alike;         J  Pronounced  alike. 


La  Conciergerie 
{En  face,  la  prefecture  de  police) 


Lesson  66  129 

2.  The  past  descriptive  often  denotes  what  used  to  happen  or 
continued  to  happen. 

Je  perdais  toujours  les  balles,  I  always  used  to  lose  the  halls. 

3.  Distinction  between  the  Past  Descriptive  and  the  Per- 
fect. 

The  Perfect  frequently  denotes  a  single  act  in  past  time. 

The  Past  Descriptive  denotes  a  repeated  or  continued  action 
or  state  in  past  time. 

1.  Que  faisiez-vous  ce  matin?  What  were  you  doing  this  morning? 

2.  Qu'avez-vous  fait  ce  matin?  What  did  you  do  {once  only)  this 
morning? 

3.  Mangiez-vous  votre  petit  dejeuner?  Were  you  eating  your  breakfast? 
(Continued  action.) 

4.  Avez-vous  mange  votre  petit  dejeuner?  Did  you  eat  your  breakfast? 
(Regarded  as  a  single  act.) 

5.  Ecriviez-vous  une  lettre  apres?    Were  you  writing  a  letter  afterwards? 

6.  Avez-vous  ecrit  une  lettre  apres?    Did  you  write  a  letter  afterwards? 

7.  Etudiiez-vous  la  lepon?  Were  you  studying  (or  did  you  keep  study- 
ing)  the  lesson? 

8.  Avez-vous  etudie  la  lejon?    Did  you  study  the  lesson? 

Questions.  1.  Que  faisiez-vous  cet  ete?  2.  Nagiez-vous 
souvent?  3.  AUiez-vous  aux  bois?  4.  Trouviez-vous  des 
fleurs?    5.  Les  fleurs  ^taient-elles  jolies? 

I.  Conjuguez.  1.  Je  gagnais  souvent,  tu  gagnais  souvent, 
etc.  2.  Je  n'avais  pas  d'argent,  tu  n'avais  pas  d^argent, 
etc.  3.  J^avais  faim,  tu  avais  faim,  etc.  4.  J^achetais  de  beaux 
chapeaux,  tu  achetais  de  beaux  chapeaux,  etc.  5.  Je  finissais 
mon  travail,  tu  finissais  ton  travail,  etc. 

II.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  ficriviez-vous  ce  matin?  2.  Avec 
quoi  Ecriviez-vous?  3.  fieri viez-vous  sur  ce  papier-la?  4. 
Ecriviez-vous  au  tableau  noir?  5.  Que  faisiez-vous  k  dix 
heures?  6.  Travailliez-vous?  7.  fitudiiez-vous?  8.  Nagiez- 
vous? 


130  The  Elements  of  French 

III.  Exercice  Oral  ou  Ecrit.  1.  You  were  eating  your  din- 
ner when  I  entered.  2.  At  what  time  were  you  at  his 
house?  3.  I  was  there  at  a  quarter  after  three.  4.  We 
used  to  try  to  play  (at  the)  football.  5.  More  often,  we 
watched  the  others.  6.  The  others  played,  or  rather  worked, 
but  we  kept  (counted)  the  score.  7.  With  whom  {qui)  was 
Charles  playing?  8.  When  I  saw  him,  he  was  going  home  with 
a  stranger.  9.  Were  they  waiting  for  him  at  home?  10.  He 
was  always  arriving  too  late  {tard) ,  you  know. 


LESSON  67   (SOIXANTE-SEPTlfiME  LEQON) 
REVISION 

I.  Form  adverbs  from  the  adjectives  meaning  active^  com- 
pletCj  pretty y  principal,  fortunate^  unfortunate,  cruel,  warm,  cold, 

II.  Compare  these  adverbs  by  using  plus  and  moins. 

III.  Compare  by  using  plus  and  moins,  the  adjectives  mean- 
ing: white,  low,  high,  big,  large,  good,  long,  red,  black,  old,  young, 
ancient. 

Compare  the  adverbs  meaning:  quickly,  well,  little,  much, 

IV.  Conjuguez.  1.  Je  choisissais  ce  complet-la,  tu  choisis- 
sais  ce  complet-la,  etc.  2.  Je  ne  Tentendais  pas,  tu  ne  Fentend- 
ais  pas,  etc.  3.  Je  comptais  mon  argent,  tu  comptais  ton 
argent,  etc.    4.  J'avais  seize  ans,  tu  avals  seize  ans,  etc. 

V.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Est-ce  que  vous  allez  bien  ce  matin? 
2.  Allez-vous  mieux  qu^l  y  a  trois  jours?  3.  Depuis  quand 
allez-vous  mieux?  4.  Aviez-vous  mal  a  la  tete?  5.  Aviez- 
vous  mal  a  la  gorge?  6.  Ou  etiez-vous  il  y  a  trois  mois?  7. 
Qu'est-ce  que  vous  faisiez?  8.  Est-ce  que  vous  dormiez  bien? 
9.  Faisiez-vous  de  bons  ou  de  mauvais  reves?  10.  Travailliez- 
vous   activement?      11.  Comprenez-vous   les   adverbes?      12. 


Lesson  68  131 

Quels  adverbes  comprenez-vous?     13.  Ces  adverbes-la  sont-ils 
faciles  ou  difficiles?     14.  Quels  adverbes  aimez-vous  le  mieux? 

VI.  Traduisez.  1.  Philip  had  sore  throat  often  when  he 
was  a  small  child.  2.  Mary  and  Annette  used  to  have 
headaches,  didn't  they?  3.  Were  you  studying  at  five  o'clock 
this  morning?  4.  You  used  to  feel  the  cold  a  great  deal.  5. 
They  always  felt  warm  enough.  6.  These  boys  used  to  work  a 
great  deal  at  night.  7.  There  was  plenty  of  chalk  in  the 
box.  8.  We  shall  have  (some),  if  there  is  (any).  9.  At 
that  office  they  will  easily  understand  it.  10.  Hector  was 
eternally  talking  of  that  man.  11.  They  always  wore  (wore 
always)  the  same  hats  and  coats. 

VII.  Exercice  Oral  ou  Ecrit.  1.  Marie  and  Annette  were 
counting,  were  they  not?  2.  We  were  buying  some.  3.  You 
were  not  selling  any.     4.  I  was  seizing  them. 


LESSON  68    (SOIXANTE-HUITlfiME  LEgON) 

PAST  DESCRIPTIVE  OF  PARTIR  AND  SORTIR 

VOCABULAIRE 

aeroplane  (aeroplan),  m.,  airplane  ni  .  .  .  ni,  neither  .  .  .  nor 

Ai  or  Ay  (ai),  town  near  Rheims  partit  (parti),  started  (from  partir) 

allmner  (alyme),  to  light  personne*  (person),  pron.,  nobody 

bombe  ((b5:b),  f.,  bomb  place  (plas),  f.,  place;  square 

canon  (kan5),  m.,  cannon  plein  (pie),  Sid'].,full 

concert  (koseir),  m.,  concert  revenir  (ravniir),  to  come  back 

deg^t  (dega),  m.,  damage  soldat  (solda),  m.,  soldier 

eclater  (eklate),  to  burst  traverser  (traverse),  to  cross 

ni  (ni),  conj.,  neither  hdtel  de  ville  (otsl  da  vil),  m.,  town 

hall 


*  When  personne  is  used  in  a  sentence,  ne  precedes  the  verb, 
II  n'y  a  personne,  There  is  nobody. 


132  The  Elements  of  French 

130.  Past  Descriptive  of  partir  and  sortir  (V  Imparfait  de 
partir  et  de  sortir). 

partir  (partiir),  to  start  sortir  (sartiir),  to  go  out 

partant  (parta),  pres.  part.  sortant  (sorta),  pres.  part. 

part  ais  (parts)  sort  ais  (sorts) 

part  ais  (parte)  sort  ais  (sorts) 

part  ait  (parts)  sort  ait  (sorts) 

part  ions  (part jo)  sort  ions  (sort jo) 

part  iez  (partje)  sort  iez  (sortje) 

part  aient  (parts)  sort  aient  (sorts) 

I.  Conjuguez.  1.  Je  partais  pour  Paris,  tu  partais  pour 
Paris,  etc.  2.  Je  partais  il  y  a  cinq  jours,  tu  partais  il  y 
a  cinq  jours,  etc.  3.  Je  sors  maintenant  de  la  maison,  tu  sors 
maintenant  de  la  maison,  etc.  4.  Je  sortais  de  la,  tu  sortais 
de  la,  etc.     5.  Quel  age  avais-je?  quel  age  avais-tu?  etc. 

II.  From  the  Composition  of  a  Ten- Year-Old  French 
Orphan.*  Quand  papa  partit  a  la  guerre,  les  trains  etaient 
pleins,  tons  les  hommes  etaient  partis.  Nous  ne  voyions  plus  les 
hommes  travailler,  revenir  des  vignes,  ni  le  tramway  arriver 
sur  la  place  de  Thotel  de  ville.  Quand  nous  sortions  nous  ne 
voyions  plus  les  reverberes  allumes.  Nous  n'allions  plus  au 
concert;  nous  etions  tristes.  Nous  attendions  tou jours  des 
nouvelles,  nous  ecrivions  a  papa,  a  tons  nos  parents.  Je  ne 
voyais  plus  papa,  ni  mon  oncle,  ni  mes  cousins,  enfin  plus 
personne.  Nous  ne  j onions  plus.  Maintenant  des  regiments 
passent,  les  automobiles  traversent  Ay,  nous  entendons  le 
canon,  les  aeroplanes  des  AUemands  jettent  des  bombes,  mais 
ne  font  pas  de  grands  degats. 

III.  Exercice  Oral  ou  Ecrit.  1.  Was  his  father  starting? 
2.  Were  there  any  trains?  3.  The  men  did  not  work.  4.  The 
street  car  no  longer  arrived.  5.  This  boy  used  to  go.  6.  We 
used  to  go  out.  7.  Did  he  write?  8.  Did  you  hear?  9.  Did 
they    go    out?     10.  We    were  starting  several  hours  ago. 

*  Adapted,  with  slight  changes,  from  le  Mercure  de  France,  CXXVII, 
No.  477,  p.  69. 


Lesson  69  133 

LESSON  69   (SOIXANTE-NEUVlfiME  LEgON) 

PAST  DESCRIPTIVE  OF  PARTIR  AND  SORTIR— 
Continued 

I.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Ot  habitait  ce  petit  gargon?  2.  Quel 
&ge  avait-il?  3.  Oil  etait  son  pere?  4.  Comment  ^taient  les 
trains?  5.  Oil  etaient  les  autres  hommes?  6.  Qui  faisait  alors 
(then)  le  travail?  7.  Oii  travaillait-on?  8.  Ou  attendait-on 
le  tramway?  9.  Est-ce  que  le  tramway  arrivait  toujours? 
10.  Voyait-il  son  oncle?  11.  Voyait-il  ses  cousins?  12.  A  qui 
ecrivait-il?  13.  Recevait-il  toujours  des  nouvelles?  14.  Etait- 
il  heureux?  15.  £tait-il  triste?  16.  Allait-il  au  concert? 
17.  Qu^est-ce  qu'il  entendait?  18.  Entendait-il  des  bombes 
^clater?  19.  Voyait-il  des  aeroplanes?  20.  Qu ^est-ce  que  les 
Allemands  j  etaient  des  aeroplanes?  21.  Ou  jetaient-ils  des 
bombes?  22.  Ont-ils  cause  (caused)  beaucoup  de  degats  aux 
maisons?  23.  Y  avait-il  des  regiments  a  Ay?  24.  Les 
regiments  arrivaient-ils  en  automobiles? 

II.  Tradtiisez.  1.  Our  little  friend  was  ten  years  old. 
2.  He  lived  in  the  small  city  of  Ay,  near  Rheims.  3.  His 
father  worked  in  the  vineyards;  his  mother  worked  at  home. 
4.  The  child  went  to  school.  5.  Then  his  father  departed 
for  war.  6.  The  boy  was  eight  years  old  when  his  father 
left  the  house.  7.  He  wrote  to  his  father,  and  to  all  his 
relatives,  but  did  not  receive  any  news.  8.  He  was  sad;  the 
whole  city  was  unhappy.  9.  The  street  lights  were  no  longer 
lighted.  10.  The  families  no  longer  went  (n^allaient  plus)  to 
the  concert.  11.  The  women  worked  in  the  vineyards,  because 
there  were  no  longer  any  men.  12.  The  Germans  traversed  the 
city  in  automobiles.  13.  They  threw  bombs  from  the  air- 
planes on  the  houses.  14.  Fortunately,  they  did  not  do  great 
damage.  15.  The  trains  kept  arriving,  but  (they)  were  always 
full  of  soldiers.  16.  The  boys  and  (the)  girls  no  longer  played 
in  the  streets.  17.  They  no  longer  went  to  school.  18.  Regi- 
ments were  always  crossing  the  city.     19.  There  were  auto- 


134 


The  Elements  of  French 


mobiles  for  the  soldiers,  but  there  were  no  street  cars  for 
women  and  children.  20.  The  town  hall  square  (square  of 
the  town  hall)  was  very  dismal. 


LESSON  70   (SOIXANTE-DIXifiME  LEgON) 


VERBS  CONJUGATED  WITH  ETRE 
VOCABULAIRE 


au-dessus  (de)  (o  dsy),  prep.,  above; 

over 
cave  (kaiv),  f.,  cellar 
emigre  (emigre),  m.,  refugee 
falloir  (falwair),  irreg.,  to  he  necessary 

Past  part.,  fallu  (faly) 
loger  (lose),  to  lodge;  billet 
mari  (mari),  m.,  husband 
obus  (oby),  m.,  shell 
pendant  (pada),  prep.,  during 
pont  (p5),  m.,  bridge 
presque  (preska),  adv.,  almost 


raccommoder  (rakomode),  to  repair 
quartier  (kartje),  m.,  quarter;  ward 
sauter  (sote),  to  jump 
siffler  (sifle),  to  whistle 
tablier  (tablie),  m:,  apron 
toit  (twa),  m.,  roof 
trou  (tru),  m.,  hole 
vie  (vi),  f.,  life 
voisin  (vwaze),  m.,  neighbor 
voisine  (vwazin),  f.,  neighbor 
faire  sauter,  to  blow  up 
huit  jours,  usually  a  week,  not  eight 
days 


131.  Verbs  Conjugated  with  etre  (Verhes  Conjugues  avec 
etre).  A  few  intransitive  verbs,  mostly  denoting  motion,  use 
etre  instead  of  avoir  as  the  auxiliary : 


Infinitive            Past  Participle 

Infinitive 

Past  Participle 

aller,  to  go 

alle 

partir,  to  start,  set  out 

parti 

arriver,  to  arrive 

arrive 

rester,  to  remain 

reste 

descendre,  to  go  down 

descendu 

sortir,  to  go  out 

sorti 

entrer,  to  enter 

entre 

tomber,  to  fall 

tombe 

monter,  to  go  up 

monte 

venir,  to  come 

venu 

mourir,  to  die 

mort 

(Also  compounds 

of 

venir) 

Note.  Beginners  may  learn  the  rule  thus :  The  French  verbs  for  come, 
go;  go  up,  go  down;  go  in,  go  out;  be  born,  die;  go  away,  arrive;  fall,  remain; 
and  a  few  others,  are  conjugated  with  etre. 


Lesson  70  135 

(a)    The  past  participles  of  such  verbs  agree  Uke  adjectives 
with  the  subject  of  the  sentence. 
Thus:      je  suis  venu(e)  nous  sommes  venu(e)s 

tu  es  venu(e)  vous  etes  venu(e)(s)* 

il  est  venu  ils  sont  venus 

elle  est  venue  elles  sont  venues 

I.  Questions.  1.  A  quelle  heure  etes-vous  arrive  ce  matin? 
2.  A  quelle  heure  est-ce  que  je  suis  arrive?  3.  Quand  sommes- 
nous  arrives?  4.  Est-ce  que  Charles  et  Jacques  sont  arrives 
a  la  meme  heure?  5.  0\1  etes-vous  alle  hier?  6.  Qui  est  alle 
avec  vous?  7.  A  quelle  heure  etes-vous  sorti  de  la  maison? 
8.  fites-vous  entre  dans  une  boutique?  9.  Quand  etes-vous 
revenu? 

IL  From  the  Composition  of  a  Ten- Year-Old  French 
Orphan  —  Continued.!  La  vie  n^est  plus  la  meme.  Elle 
est  chere,  le  pain  est  gris,  mais  enfin  il  est  meilleur  que  le 
pain  allemand.  Les  emigres  viennent  maintenant  dans 
notre  pays.  Des  soldats  remplacent  nos  peres  et  nos  freres. 
Quand  les  Allemands  sont  arrives,  il  a  fallu  nous  cacher  dans 
les  caves.  Les  obus  sifflaient  au-dessus  d^Ay.  Nous  avions 
peur.  II  a  fallu  les  loger  pendant  huit  jours.  lis  ont  fait 
sauter  les  ponts.  Un  eclat  a  perce  le  toit  de  notre  grenier 
et  a  rebondi  presque  sur  la  tete  de  notre  voisine.  Ma 
soeur  est  accourue,  puis  a  ramasse  Teclat  dans  son  tablier. 
II  lui  a  fait  un  trou,  car  il  etait  rouge.  Quand  papa  est 
revenu  on  lui  a  dit  de  raccommoder  le  toit.  Nous  lui  avons 
raconte  tout  ce  que  les  Allemands  avaient  fait  chez  nous. 
Tout  est  change;  la  vie  n^est  plus  la  meme. 

III.  Conjuguez.  L  Je  suis  parti  il  y  a  neuf  jours,  tu  es 
parti  il*y  a  neuf  jours,  etc.  2.  Je  suis  arrive  k  Thotel  de 
ville,  tu  es  arrive  a  Fhotel  de  ville,  etc.  3.  Je  suis  revenu 
dans  ce  pays,  tu  es  revenu  dans  ce  pays,  etc. 

*  The  participle  takes  the  plural  form  when  vous  refers  to  more  than  one 
person;  otherwise  it  takes  the  singular  form. 

1.  Vous  etes  arrive(e)s.  You  {more  than  one)  have  arrived, 

2.  Vous  etes  venu(e),  You  (one  person)  have  come, 
t  Mercure  de  France. 


136  The  Elements  of  French 

LESSON   71    (SOIXANTE  ET  ONZlfiME  LEgON) 
VERBS  CONJUGATED  WITH  ETRE  —  Continued 

I.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Est-ce  que  la  vie  etait  chere  a  Ay?  2. 
De  quelle  couleur  etait  le  pain?  3.  Est-ce  que  les  Allemands 
mangeaient*  de  meilleur  pain?  4.  Est-ce  que  leur  pain  etait 
mauvais?  5.  Ou  les  Emigres  sont-ils  alles?  6.  0\i  les  peres 
et  les  freres  etaient-ils  alles?  7.  Qui  les  remplagaient?  f  8. 
Est-ce  que  les  Allemands  sont  arrives?  9.  Est-ce  que  Ton  avait 
peur  des  Allemands?  10.  Avait-on  raison?  11.  Avait-on  tort? 
12.  Oil  les  habitants  d^Ay  se  cachaient-ils?  13.  Combien  de 
temps  a-t-il  fallu  loger  les  Allemands?  14.  £tait-on  heureux  ou 
malheureux?  15.  Qu^est-ce  qui  a  perce  le  toit  de  la  maison? 
16.  Qui  a  ramasse  Teclat  d'obus?  17.  De  quelle  couleur  etait 
I'eclat?  18.  Qu'est-ce  que  Teclat  a  fait?  19.  Est-ce  que  le 
pere  de  famille  est  revenu?  20.  Qu'est-ce  qu'on  lui  a  dit?  21. 
Qu'est-ce  qu^on  lui  a  raconte? 

II.  Traduisez.  1.  This  little  boy  was  eight  years  old 
when  his  father  went  to  (the)  war.  2.  There  were  no  longer 
any  men  who  worked  in  the  vineyards,  or  in  the  city.  3. 
The  women  worked  when  the  men  departed.  4.  There  were 
many  others  in  France  who  were  very  sad.  5.  For  example,{ 
there  were  many  refugees  in  France,  who  were  afraid  of 
the  Germans.  6.  The  Germans  used  to  traverse  Ay  in  automo- 
biles. 7.  They  did  not  do  very  great  damage  to  the  houses. 
8.  When  the  Germans  arrived,  it  was  necessary  to  hide 
in  the  cellars.  9.  The  shells  pierced  the  roofs  of  the  houses. 
10.  Everybody  heard  the  cannon  at  night.  11.  Shells  were 
whistling  over  the  city,  and  the  children  were  afraid.  12. 
It  was  necessary  to  billet  the  Germans  for  a  week.  13. 
Everybody  was  very  happy  when  the  French  regiments  arrived 
in  automobiles.  14.  The  soldiers  were  all  going  (going  all) 
against  the  Germans. 

*  Verbs  in  -ger  change  g  to  ge  before  a  or  o,  to  keep  the  soft  sound  of  g. 
t  Verbs  in  -cer  change  c  to  5  before  a  or  o,  to  keep  the  soft  sound  of  c. 
(For  model  verbs,  see  Appendix.) 
f  Par  example. 


Lesson  72  137 

LESSON  72   (SOIXANTE-DOUZlfiME  LEgON) 
REVISION 

I.  Present,   past   descriptive,   and   future  of  partir,  sortir. 

II.  Perfect  of  venir,  entrer,  sortir,  aller. 

III.  Present  and  past  descriptive  of  manger,  changer 
(change  g  to  ge  before  a  or  o). 

IV.  Present  and  past  descriptive  of  commencer  (change  c 
to  5  before  a  or  o). 

V.  Conjuguez.  1.  Je  suis  arrive  a  quatre  heures,  tu  es 
arrive  h  quatre  heures,  etc.  2.  Je  partais  souvent,  tu  partais 
souvent,  etc.  3.  Je  sortais  la  nuit,  tu  sortais  la  nuit,  etc. 
4.  Je  suis  entre  dans  la  maison,  tu  es  entre  dans  la  maison,  etc. 

VI.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  A  quelle  heure  etes-vous  sorti  ce 
matin?  2.  A  quelle  heure  avez-vous  pris  le  tramway?  3. 
Oil  avez-vous  pris  le  tramway?  4.  Dans  quelle  place?*  5.  A 
quelle  heure  etes-vous  arrive  a  Fecole?  6.  fibes-vous  entre 
tout  de  suite  dans  Fecole?  7.  Par  quelle  porte  etes-vous  entre? 
8.  fibes-vous  entre  par  la  porte  de  devant?  9.  fites-vous 
entre  par  la  porte  de  derriere? 

10.  Ou  se  trouve  Ay?  11.  Pres  de  quelle  ville?  12.  Quel 
age  avait  le  petit  gargon  qui  y  habit  ait?  13.  Est-ce  que  les 
hommes  etaient  partis?  14.  Est-ce  que  Ton  avait  peur  des 
Allemands?  15.  Ou  se  cachait-on?  16.  Qu^est-ce  que  les  Alle- 
mands  jetaient  des  aeroplanes?  17.  Qui  a  ramasse  un  eclat 
d'obus?  18.  De  quelle  couleur  etait  cet  eclat?  19.  Est-ce  que 
Ton  voyait  des  soldats  frangais?  20.  Est-ce  que  ces  soldats 
travaillaient?     21.  Comment  ces  soldats  arrivaient-ils? 

VII.  Traduisez.  1.  Living  was  very  expensive  at  Ay.  2. 
The  gray  bread  of  the  inhabitants  was  better  than  the 
German  bread.  3.  The  refugees  {emigres)  have  come;  there 
are  a  great  many  of  them.     4.  Everybody  was  afraid  of  the 

*  SqiLare. 


138  The  Elements  of  French 

bombs  which  the  Germans  threw  upon  the  houses.  5.  Every- 
body heard  the  shells  which  whistled  at  night.  6.  The  Ger- 
mans were  very  fond  of  (hked  very  much)  French  bread. 
7.  They  stayed  for  a  week,  and  everybody  was  very  happy 
when  they  departed.  8.  The  French  soldiers  arrived  in  auto- 
mobiles and  in  trains.  9.  There  were  many  (of  them)  who 
were  going  against  the  Germans.  10.  Fortunately  the  child's 
father  returned,  and  they  told  him  everything. 


LESSON   73    (SOIXANTE-TREIZlfiME  LEQON) 
REFLEXIVE  VERBS 
VOCABULAIRE 
brosser  (brose),  to  brush  se  lever  (sa  lave),  to  get  up 

barbe  (barb),  f.,  heard  peigner  (pejie),  to  comb 

se  coucher  (sa  kuje),  to  go  to  bed  savon  (sav5),  m.,  soap 

figure  (figyir),  f., /ace  servir   (serviir),    to    serve    (conju- 

laver  (lave),  to  wash  gated  like  partir) 

lever  {hve),  to  raise  se  servir  (de),  to  make  use  of;  help 

one's  self 

132.  Reflexive  Verbs  {Verbes  Reflechis).  A  reflexive  verb 
is  one  having  a  pronoun  object  referring  to  the  same  person 
as  the  subject. 

He  (subject)  washes  himself  (object), 

133.  In  French,   most  transitive  verbs  may  be   reflexive. 

1.  Je  coupe  (3a  kup),  le  pain,  /  cut  (not  reflexive)  the  bread. 

2.  Je  me  coupe  (3a  ma  kup),  /  cut  myself  (reflexive). 

(a)  The  reflexive  forms  may  have  also  a  reciprocal  mean- 
ing. Example:  Nous  nous  flattens  means  either  We  flatter 
ourselves  (reflexive),  or  We  flatter  each  other  (reciprocal). 

134.  Agreement  (Accord).  In  compound  tenses  of  reflexive 
verbs,  the  past  participle  agrees  with  the  reflexive  object, 
provided  it  is  the  direct  object. 

1.  EUe  s'est  coupee,  She  has  cut  herself  (se  is  the  direct  object). 

2.  EUe  s'est  coupe  la  main,  She  has  cut  her  hand  (literally:  She  has  cut 
to  herself  the  hand;  se  is  the  indirect  object). 


Lesson  73 


139 


135.   Conjugation  of  se  couper,  to  cut  one^s  self.     {Conjugal- 
son  de  se  couper). 

(Observe  that  all  reflexive  verbs  are  conjugated  with  the  auxiliary  etre, 
but  the  past  participles  agree  with  the  preceding  direct  object.) 


Present  {Present) 

je  me  coupe  (39  ma  kup) 

tu  te  coupes  (ty  tQ  kup) 

11  se  coupe  (il  sa  kup) 

elle  se  coupe  (el  sa  kup) 

nous  nous  coupons  (nu  nu  kup5) 

vous  vous  coupez  (vu  vu  kupe) 

lis  se  coupent  (il  sa  kup) 
elles  se  coupent  (el  S9  kup) 


Perfect  {PassS  Indefini) 

je  me  suis  coupe  (39  ma  sqi  kupe) 
tu  Ves  coupe  (ty  t  e  kupe) 
il  s*est  coupe  (il  s  e  kupe) 
elle  s*est  coupee  (el  s  e  kupe) 
nous  nous  sonmies  coupe  (e)s  (nu  nu 

som  kupe) 
vous  vous  etes  coupe  (e)(s)  (vu  vuz 

et  kupe) 
ils  se  sont  coupes  (il  sa  so  kupe) 
elles  se  sont  coupees  (el  sa  so  kupe) 


I.  Conjuguez.  1.  Je  me  cache,  tu  te  caches,  etc.  2.  Je 
me  trouve  a  Paris,  tu  te  trouves  a  Paris,  etc.  3.  Je  me 
lege  chez  lui,  tu  te  leges  chez  lui,  etc.  {Plural,  nous  nous 
logeons,  etc.)  4.  Je  me  leve  a  sept  heures,  tu  te  leves  a 
sept  heures,  etc. 

II.  Questions.  1.  A  quelle  heure  vous  couchez-vous?  2. 
Oii  vous  couchez-vous?  3.  Est-ce  que  vous  vous  couchez 
dans  un  lit?  4.  A  quelle  heure  vous  levez-vous?  5.  A  quelle 
heure  votre  voisin  se  leve-t-il?  6.  Est-ce  que  vous  vous 
lavez  a  Teau  froide?  7.  Vous  lavez-vous  a  Feau  chaude? 
8.  Est-ce  que  vous  vous  servez  de  savon?*  9.  Est-ce  que 
Charles  se  sert  du  tramway  pour  arriver  a  Tecole?  10.  Est- 
ce  que  vous  vous  servez  a  table?  11.  Servez-vous  de  la*  viande, 
s^il  vous  plait.     12.  Servez-vous  du  poulet,  s^il  vous  plait. 


*  Observe  that  after  idioms  ending  in  de,  such  as  avoir  besoin  de,  remplir 
de,  se  servir  de,  etc.,  the  article  is  omitted,  when  the  words  some  or  any  are 
expressed  or  understood  with  the  noun. 

Examples:  J'ai  besoin  d*argent,  I  need  (some)  money.  Nous  nous  servons 
des  livres  de  notre  ami.  We  use  our  friend's  books. 

Compare  assez  de,  trop  de,  etc. 


140  The  Elements  of  French 

III.  Remplacez  les  Tirets.  1.  lis  se  sont  serv — .  2.  lis 
se  sont  serv —  du  lait.  3.  Nous  nous  sommes  lav — .  4. 
Nous  nous  sommes  lav —  les  mains.  5.  Elle  s^est  peign — . 
6.  Elle  s'est  peign — •  les  cheveux.  7.  Nous  nous  sommes 
coup — .     8.  Nous  nous   sommes   coup —  les  doigts. 

IV.  Traduisez.  1.  I  went  to  bed  at  a  quarter  of  eleven. 
2.  Then  I  got  up  at  half  past  seven  this  morning.  3.  I  washed 
with  (d)  cold  water,  because  there  was  no  warm  water.  4.  I 
used  this  white  soap.  5.  You  used  that  brown  soap,  did  you 
not?  6.  I  brushed  my  (the)  hair  with  that  brush.  7.  Then  I 
tried  to  cut  my  (the)  beard  with  your  razor  (rasoiVj  m.).  8.  I 
cut  myself,  but  I  did  not  cut  my  beard  very  well.  9.  Why  did 
you  use  this  razor?    10.  Why  didn't  you  use  that  razor? 


LESSON    74    (SOIXANTE-QUATORZIEME    LE^ON) 

REFLEXIVE  VERBS— Continued 

136.  Instead  of  the  possessive  adjectives  men,  ton,  son, 
the  definite  article  is  regularly  used  in  speaking  of  parts  of 
the  body,  and  often  of  articles  of  clothing.  Thus,  the  French 
use  les  yexix,  le  nez,  etc.,  instead  of  mes  yeux,  men  nez,  etc. 

1.  Je  ferme  les  yeux,  /  close  my  eyes.     (Not  Je  ferme  mes  yeux, 

because  whose  eyes  but  mine  should  I  be  closing?) 

2.  pouvre  la  bouche,  /  open  my  mouth.    (Not  Pouvre  mabouche.) 

3.  Je  leve^a  main,  /  raise  my  hand.    (Not  Je  leve  ma  main.) 

4.  II  baisse  le  bras  gauche,  He  lowers  his  left  arm.     (Not  II  baisse 

son  bras  gauche.) 

Questions.  1.  Est-ce  que  vous  ouvrez  les  yeux?  2.  Est-ce 
que  vous  fermez  la  bouche?  3.  Est-ce  que  vous  serrez  les 
dents?  4.  Touchez-vous  quelque  chose  avec  la  main?  5. 
Marchez-vous  avec  les  pieds?     6.  Parlez-vous  avec  la  langue? 


Lesson  74  141 

137.  Where  there  is  possible  ambiguity  as  to  the  possessor, 
an  indirect  object  pronoun  is  used  also. 

1.  Je  vous  serre  la  main,  /  shake  your  hand  (literally,  /  shake  to 

you  the  hand). 

2.  Vous  m'avez  sauve  la  vie,    You  have  saved  my  life  (literally, 

You  have  saved  to  me  the  life). 

3.  II  s'est  coupe  la  figure.  He  has  cut  Ms  face  (literally.   He  has 

cut  to  himself  the  face). 

Observe  also:  II  a  les  cheveux  gris.  He  has  gray  hair, 
EUe  a  les  yeux  bleus,  She  has  blue  eyes, 

I.  Questions.  1.  Est-ce  que  vous  vous  brossez  les  dents? 
2.  Est-ce  que  vous  vous  peignez  les  cheveux?  3.  Est-ce  que 
vous  vous  peignez  la  barbe?  4.  Qui  est-ce  qui  vous  coupe 
les  cheveux?     5.  Qui  est-ce  qui  vous  lave  la  figure? 

II.  Conjuguez.  1.  Je  me  suis  lave  a  Teau  froide,  tu  t^es 
lave  a  Teau  froide,  etc.  2.  Je  me  suis  leve  a  sept  heures,  tu 
t'es  leve  a  sept  heures,  etc.  3.  Je  me  suis  couche  a  neuf 
heures  et  demie,  tu  t^es  couche  a  neuf  heures  et  demie,  etc. 
4.  Je  me  suis  coupe  la  main,  tu  t^es  coupe  la  main,  etc. 

Conjugate  the  same  sentences  negatively:  Je  ne  me  suis 
pas  lave,  etc. 

III.  Exercice  Oral  ou  Ecrit.  1.  You  go  to  bed.  2.  You 
have  gone  to  bed.  3.  We  have  got  up.  4.  He  gets  up.  5. 
You  have  washed  yourself.  6.  She  has  washed  her  face.  7. 
You  have  washed  your  face.  8.  He  has  brushed  his  (the) 
clothes.  9.  They  have  brushed  their  teeth.  10.  We  are 
using  this  soap.  11.  Help  yourself  to  some  potatoes.  12. 
They  have  helped  themselves  to  some  dessert.  13.  I  helped 
myself  to  some  chicken.  14.  She  helped  herself  to  some 
beef  and  vegetables. 


142  The  Elements  of  French 

LESSON  75   (SOIXANTE-QUINZlfiME  LEgON) 

REFLEXIVE   VERBS— Continued 

VOCABULAIRE 

k  temps  (  a  ta),  on  time  se  depecher  (s8  depeje),  to  hurry; 
brosse  (bros) ,  f . ,  brush;  brosse  a  che-  depechez-vous,  hurry 

veux,  hair  brush;  brosse  a  dents,  peigne  (peji),  m.,  comb 

tooth  brush  pourboire  (purbwair),  m.,  tip 

QSL  (sa),  (for  cela),  pron.,  that  (in-  precis  (presi),  adj.,  precise 

definite)  prier  (prie),  to  pray;  beg 

coiffer  (kwafe),  to  dress  the  hair  raser  (raze),  to  shave 

coiffeur  (kwafoeir),  m.,  hair  dresser;  rasoir  (razwair),  m.,  razor 

barber  retard  (rotair),  m.,  delay 

coup  de  peigne,  m.,  combing  serviette  (servjet),  f.,  napkin;  towel 

coup  de  brosse,  m.,  brushing  serrer  (sere),  to  press;  squeeze 

court  (kuir),  adj.,  short  siirete  (syrte),  f.,  safety 
dame  (dam)  f.,  lady 

voila  votre  affaire,  that  is  just  what  you  are  looking  for  (literally, 

there  is  your  affair). 
etre  en  retard,  to  be  late 
je  vous  en  prie,  /  beg  you 
rasoir  de  siirete,  safety  razor 
ga,  y  est  (sa  j  e),  all  right! 

I.  Conjuguez.  1.  Je  m'en  sers,  tu  t^en  sers,  etc.  2.  Je 
m'en  servirai,  tu  t'en  serviras,  etc.  3.  Je  m'en  suis  servi,  tu 
t^en  es  servi,  etc.  4.  Je  me  fais  couper  les  cheveux,  tu  te  fais 
couper  les  cheveux,  etc.  5.  Je  me  peigne,  tu  te  peignes, 
etc.  6.  Je  me  suis  peign6  ce  matin,  tu  t'es  peigne  ce  matin, 
etc.  7.  Je  lui  serre  la  main,  tu  lui  serres  la  main,  etc.  8.  Je 
me  rase  la  barbe,  tu  te  rases  la  barbe,  etc.  9.  Je  me  brosse 
les  dents,  tu  te  brosses  les  dents,  etc. 

II.  LE   DEPART  DE  M.   DUPONT 

M.   Dupont,   levez-vous!     II  est  deja  huit  heures   et 

demie.     Le  train  part  a  dix  heures  tres  precises. 

II  sera  en  retard,  n^est-ce  pas? 

Non,  monsieur,  il  n^est  pas  en  retard  ce  matin.     Mal- 

heureusement  il  est  a  Theure.  Voici  du  savon;  voila  des 
rasoirs.     Aimez-vous  mieux  un  rasoir  de  surete? 


Lesson  75 


143 


Non,  monsieur,  je  ne  m'en  suis  jamais  servi.     Je  n^aime 

pas  me  raser.     Est-ce  qu'il  y  a  un  coiffeur  pres  d'ici? 

II  y  a  la-bas  un  coiffeur  pour  hommes  et  un  coiffeur 

pour  dames,  mais  c^est  la  meme  maison.  Depechez-vous  done; 
il  ne  vous  reste  que  quelques  minutes. 

Ajpres  quelque  temps, 

Aurai-je  aussi  le  temps  de  me  faire  couper  les  che- 

veux?    Un  peu  court  par  derriere,  et  un  peu  long  sur  le  devant? 


Locomotive  du  Rapide  (Chemin  de  Fer  d' Orleans) 


Jamais  de  la  vie.     II  faut  se  depecher,  monsieur.     Voila 

un  peigne;  voila  une  brosse  a  cheveux.  Qsl  y  est!  Avec  un 
coup  de  peigne  et  un  coup  de  brosse,  vous  etes  bien — comme  9a. 

Combien  f aut-il  payer  le  coiffeur? 

Qrdinairement  la  barbe  c'est  quatre  sous.     II  y  a  tou- 

jours  deux  sous  de  pourboire.  Depechez-vous,  monsieur,  je 
vous  en  prie. 

Au  revoir!    Je  vous  serre  la  main. 

III.   Traduisez.     1.  We  went  to  bed  at  half  past  eleven.    2. 
We  got  up  at  a  quarter  past  six.     3.  I  used  this  brush.    4.  You 


144  The  Elements  of  French 

'  used  that  brush.  5.  Have  you  combed  your  hair?  6.  Have 
you  brushed  your  teeth?  7.  I  shaved  with  this  safety  razor. 
8.  Then  M.  Dupont  shook  hands  with  us.  9.  We  hurried  to 
catch  (prendre)  the  train.  10.  What  must  one  pay  for  the 
tickets  (billets)? 

LESSON  76   (SOIXANTE-SEIZlfiME  LEgON) 
REFLEXIVE  VERBS— Continued 

I.  Conjuguez.     1.  Je  me  suis  depeche,  tu  t'es  depeche,  etc. 

2.  Je  me  suis  leve  a  sept  heures,  tu  t'es  leve  a  sept  heures,  etc. 

3.  Est-ce  que  je  me  lave?  te  laves-tu?  etc.  4.  Je  ne  me  suis 
pas  bien  porte,  tu  ne  t^es  pas  bien  porte,  etc.  5.  Je  me  sens 
mieux,  tu  te  sens  mieux,  etc. 

II.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Est-ce  que  M.  Dupont  se  leve?  2. 
A  quelle  heure  se  leve-t-il?    3.  A  quelle  heure  part  le  train? 

4.  Est-ce  que  le  train  est  exact?  5.  Est-ce  que  M.  Dupont  est 
exact?  6.  Est-il  en  retard?  7.  Avec  quoi  M.  Dupont  se  lave- 
t-il?  8.  Est-ce  qu'il  se  sert  de  Feau?  9.  Est-ce  qu^il  se  sert  du 
savon?  10.  Avec  quoi  se  rase-t-il?  11.  Est-ce  qu'il  aime 
mieux  un  rasoir  de  surete?  12.  Est-ce  qu'il  se  sert  souvent  de 
ces  rasoirs-la?  13.  Ou  se  trouve  un  coiffeur?  14.  Est-ce 
qu^il  faut  se  depecher?  15.  Combien  de  minutes  restent  encore? 
16.  Aura-t-il  le  temps  de  se  faire  couper  les  cheveux?  17.  Com- 
ment les  fait-il  couper?  18.  Avec  quoi  se  peigne-t-il?  19. 
Avec  quoi  se  brosse-t-il  les  cheveux?  20.  Combien  de  sous  faut-il 
donner  au  coiffeur?  21.  Est-ce  qu'il  y  a  un  pourboire  a  donner? 
22.  Combien  faut-il  donner?  23.  Qu'est-ce  que  M.  Dupont 
dit  quand  il  part?     24.  Est-ce  qu^il  serre  la  main  de  son  ami? 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  This  morning  the  train  will  surely 
leave  at  nine  o'clock  sharp.  2.  It  is  often  late,  but  this 
morning  it  is  on  time.  3.  We  get  up  at  half  past  six,  in 
order  to  (pour)  have  plenty  of  time.  4.  Unfortunately  we  went 
to  bed  at  half  past  one  in  the  morning.  5.  We  do  not  like  (to) 
rise.     6.  Our  cousin  gives  us  a  towel,  some  soap,  and  some  hot 


Visite  de  L'Amiral  Beatty  au  Tombeau  de  Napoleon 


Lesson  77  145 

water.  7.  He  says:  ''Hurry  up.  You  will  have  only  (the) 
time  to  catch  (prendre)  the  train.  8.  Here  is  your  overcoat. 
9.  You  will  not  have  enough  time  to  go  to  the  tailor's.  10.  He 
is  (d)  seven  blocks  (rues)  from  here.  11.  Perhaps  you  will 
have  time  to  go  to  the  barber's.  12.  Perhaps  he  will  have  time 
enough  to  cut  your  hair.  Only  give  a  tip  of  two  cents.''  13. 
We  shake  hands  with  each  other.  14.  We  say  good-bye  to 
each  other.  15.  ''Write  to  me  often  this  spring/'  says  my 
cousin.  16.  "I  still  have  (have  still)  the  letters  which  you  used 
to  write  me  last  winter." 


LESSON   77   (SOIXANTE-DIX-SEPTlfiME  LEgON)      , 

CONJUNCTIVE   PRONOUNS 

VOCABULAIRE 

CToire  {krw air),  to  think;  believe  jardin  (sarde),  m.,  garden 

ecouter  (ekute),  to  listen  (to)  rendre  (ra:dr),  to  give  back;  return 

138.  Conjimctive  Pronouns  (Formes  Atones),  Conjunc- 
tive personal  pronouns  are  used  either  as  the  subject  or  as 
the  object  (direct  or  indirect)  of  a  verb,  and  immediately  in 
connection  with  it.     (Hence  the  name  conjunctive.) 

The  conjunctive  pronoun  objects  of  the  third  person  are: 

Direct  Object  {Regime  Direct)  Indirect  Object  {Regime  Indirect) 

le  (la),  him  J  it  lui  (Iqi),   (to)   himy   (to)   Aer, 

la  (la),  her  J  it  (to)  it 

les  (le)  or  (le),  them  leur  (loeir),  (to)  them 

139.  Position  of  Pronouns  (Position  des  Pronoms).  All 
object  pronouns  precede  the  verb,  except  in  the  affirmative 
imperative. 

1.  Oft  est  le  savon?  Where  is  the  soap? 

Je  le  trouve,  /  find  it. 

2.  O^  est  la  serviette?  Where  is  the  towel? 

Je  la  vois,  /  see  it. 


146  The  Elements  of  French 

3.  on  sont  les  peignes?  Where  are  the  combs? 

4.  Je  les  cherche,  /  am  looking  for  them. 

5.  Ot  sont  les  brosses?  Where  are  the  brushes? 

6.  Je  les  cherche,  aussi,  /  am  looking  for  them,  also. 

7.  O^  est  Marie?  Where  is  Mary? 

8.  Je  Im  montre  le  jardm,  /  am  showing  her  (to  her)  the  garden. 

9.  Ot  est  Jean?  Where  is  John? 

10.  Je  lui  montre  aussi  le  jardin,  /  am  also  showing  him  (to  him)  the 

garden. 

11.  O^  sont  Marie  et  Jean?  Where  are  Mary  and  John? 

12.  Je  leur  montre  le  jardin,  I  am  showing  them  (to  them)  the  garden. 

I.  Questions.  1.  Est-ce  que  vous  me  donnez  un  crayon? 
2.  A  qui  donnez-vous  un  crayon?  {Answer:  Je  vous  donne 
.  .  .)  3.  Est-ce  que  je  donne  un  journal  a  Jean?  {Answer: 
Vous  lui  donnez  .  .  .)  4.  Lui  donnez-vous  quelque  chose? 
5.  Lui  donnez-vous  son  chapeau?  6.  Donnez-vous  aussi 
quelque  chose  k  Marie?  7.  Qu^est-ce  que  vous  lui  donnez? 
8.  Donnez-vous  quelque  chose  a  Marie  et  a  Jacques?  9. 
Qu'est-ce  que  vous  leur  donnez? 

IL  Conjuguez.  1.  Je  lui  montre  la  cave,  tu  lui  montres 
la  cave,  etc.  2.  Je  leur  ai  montre  le  toit,  tu  leur  as  montre 
le  toit,  etc.  3.  Est-ce  que  je  lui  donne  un  automobile?  lui 
donnes-tu  un  automobile?  etc.  4.  Qu^est-ce  que  je  leur  dis? 
qu'est-ce  que  tu  leur  dis?  etc.  5.  Je  lui  raconte  ma  vie,  tu 
lui  racontes  ta  vie,  etc.  6.  Je  leur  parlais,  tu  leur  parlais, 
etc.     7.  Je  ne  leur  ai  pas  parle,  tu  ne  leur  as  pas  parle,  etc. 

140.   Croire,  to  think,  to  believe. 

Present  (Present) 
crois  (krwa)  croyons  (krwajo)* 

crois  (krwa)  croyez  (krwaje)* 

croit  (krwa)  *         croient  (krwa) 

III.  Conjuguez.  L  Je  le  crois,  tu  le  crois,  etc.  2.  Est-ce 
que  je  la*  crois?  la  crois-tu?  etc.  3.  Je  ne  les  crois  pas,  tu 
ne  les  crois  pas,  etc. 

*  Observe  that  i  changes  to  y  before  an  accented  syllable,  as  in  the  case  of 
voir,  to  see. 


Lesson  78  147 

IV.  Questions.  1.  Est-ce  que  Jacques  parle?  2.  Qu^est-ce 
qu^il  dit?  3.  Le  croyez-vous?  4.  Est-ce  que  vous  ne  le 
croyez  pas?  5.  Est-ce  que  je  dis  quelque  chose?  6.  Est-ce 
que  vous  me  croyez?  7.  Qu'est-ce  que  vous  croyez?  8. 
Qu'est-ce  que  vous  ne  croyez  pas?  9.  Montrez-moi  Charles, 
s'il  vous  plait.  10.  Est-ce  que  vous  lui  dites  quelque  chose? 
11.  Est-ce  qu^il  vous  croit?  12.  Voyez-vous  Marie  et  An- 
nette? 13.  Leur  dites-vous  quelque  chose?  14.  Est-ce  qu^el- 
les  vous  croient?  15.  Je  crois  qu'il  fait  beau.  Le  croyez- 
vous?  16.  Je  crois  qu^il  neige.  Le  croyez-vous?  17.  Je 
crois  qu^il  fait  froid.  Le  croyez-vous?  18.  Je  crois  que 
vous  avez  raison.     Le  croyez-vous? 

V.  Exercise  Oral  ou  Ecrit.  1.  I  give  him  (to  him) 
something.  2.  You  show  her  (to  her)  the  garden.  3.  We 
wait  for  him.  4.  You  listen  to  them.  5.  They  (/.)  speak  to 
them.  6.  Does  he  speak  to  her?  7.  Does  Charles  tell  him? 
8.  We  return  it  to  Mary.  9.  She  does  not  return  it  to  John. 
10.  Does  Philip  return  it  to  his  mother? 


LESSON  78   (SOIXANTE-DIX-HUITlfiME  LEgON) 
REVISION 

I.  Conjugate  in  the  present,  past  descriptive,  future,  and 
perfect:  1.  Je  me  flatte,  tu  te  flattes,  etc.  2.  Je  me  leve,  tu 
te  leves,  etc.  (plur.  nous  nous  levons,  etc.)  3.  Je  m^en  sers, 
tu  t^en  sers,  etc.  4.  Je  me  lave  la  figure,  tu  te  laves  la  figure, 
etc. 

II.  Conjuguez.  1.  Je  me  suis  peigne  les  cheveux,  tu  t'es 
peigne  les  cheveux,  etc.  2.  Je  lui  montre  ce  jardin,  tu  lui  mon- 
tres  ce  jardin,  etc.  3.  Je  ne  lui  dis  pas,  tu  ne  lui  dis  pas,  etc. 
4.  Est-ce  que  je  leur  parlais,  leur  parlais-tu?  etc. 

III.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  A  quelle  heure  est-ce  que  vous  vous 
couchez?  2.  A  quelle  heure  fermez-vous  les  yeux?  3.  Dormez- 
vous  bien?    4.  A  quelle  heure  votre  voisin  se  leve-t-il?     5. 


148  The  Elements  of  French 

Comment  s^appelle-t-il?  6.  A  quelle  heure  vous  lavez-vous 
la  figure?  7.  Vous  servez-vous  d^une  serviette?  8.  Partez- 
vous?  9.  A  quelle  heure  partez-vous?  10.  Faut-il  se  de- 
pecher?  11.  Aurez-vous  le  temps  de  vous  faire  couper  les 
cheveux?  12.  Combien  de  pourboire  faut-il  donner?  13.  A 
qui  faut-il  donner  ce  pourboire?  14.  Qu'est-ce  que  vous  dites 
quand  vous  partez?  15.  Voyez-vous  un  ami?  16.  Lui 
serrez-vous  la  main? 

IV.  Traduisez.  1.  Unfortunately  we  did  not  sleep  enough 
last  night  (cette  nuit).  2.  We  went  to  bed  at  half  past  two 
in  the  morning.  3.  I  did  not  close  my  eyes  all  night  (of  the 
night).  4.  John  also  did  not  rest  well,  because  he  lay  in  a 
poor  (bad)  bed.  5.  But  we  got  up  at  the  same  time.  6. 
We  dressed  ourselves  at  once,  and  ate  very  early.  7.  We 
hurried  in  order  to  (pour)  catch  the  train.  8.  We  did  not  go  out 
of  the  house  until  (ne  ,  ,  ,  que)  eight  o'clock.  9.  Fortunately, 
the  train  was  late;  it  never  is  on  time.  10.  Several  friends 
came  to  say  good-bye  to  us.  11.  We  shook  hands  with  each 
other,  and  then  the  train  started.  12.  I  think  (that)*  we 
shall  often  write  to  one  another,  if  we  have  time  enough. 


LESSON   79   (S0IXANTE-DIX-NEUVI£ME  LEgON) 

CONJUNCTIVE   PRONOUNS— Continued 
VOCABULAIRE 

alors  (aloir),  adv.,  then  reussir  (reysiir),  to  succeed 

demande  (damaid),  f.,  request  Pun  .  .  .  Pautre  (1  oe  .  .  1  o:tr),  each 

droit  (drwa),  m.,  right;  privilege  other 

lutte  (lyt),  f.,  struggle  a  la  bonne  heure  (a  la  bon  oe:r),  all 

motif  (motif),  m.,  motive  right 
promettre     (prometr),    to    promise 
(irreg.).   P.  part.,  promis  (promi) 

*  Que,  meaning  that,  is  never  omitted  in  French. 


Lesson  79  149 

141.   Pouvoir  (puvwair),  to  be  able,  can. 

Present  (Present) 

puis  (pqi),  or,  peux  (p0)         pouvons  (puv5) 
peux  (p0)  pouvez  (puve) 

peut  (p0)  peuvent  (poexv) 

I.  Questions.  1.  Pouvez-vous  toucher  la  chaise?  2. 
Pouvez-vous  toucher  cette  fenetre-la?  3.  Est-ce  que  Marie 
peut  vous  entendre?  4.  Est-ce  que  Charles  et  Jacques  peu- 
vent s^entendre?  5.  Qu'est  que  vous  pouvez  faire  avec  les 
mains?  6.  Qu^est-ce  que  vous  pouvez  faire  avec  les  pieds? 
7.  Qu'est-ce  que  vous  pouvez  faire  avec  la  langue? 

DANIEL  ET   ARMAND* 

II.  (Daniel  has  promised  to  ask  M.  Perrichon  for  his  con- 
sent to  take  Armand  as  a  son-in-law.) 

Armand  (d  part). Eh  bien? 

Daniel. Pauvre  gargon ! 

Armand. L^avez-vous  vu? 

Daniel  —  Oui. 

Armand. Lui  avez-vous  parle? 

Daniel. Je  lui  ai  parle. 

Armand. •  Alors  vous  avez  fait  ma  demande?  .  .  . 

Daniel. Non. 

Armand. ^Tiens!     Pourquoi? 

Daniel. Nous  nous  sommes  promis  d'etre  francs  vis-a- 
vis Tun  de  Tautre  .  .  .Eh  bien!  mon  cher  Armand,  je  ne  pars 
plus,  je  continue  la  lutte. 

Armand    (etonne). Ah.     c'est    different!  .  .  .  et    peut-on 

vous  demander  les  motifs  qui  ont  change  votre  determination? 

Daniel. Les  motifs  .  .  .  j'en  ai  un  puissant  .  .  .  je  crois 

r^ussir. 

Armand. Vous? 

*  Adapted  from  le  Voyage  de  M.  Perrichon  by  Labiche  et  Martin. 


150  The  Elements  of  French 

Daniel. Je  compte  prendre  un  autre  chemin  et  arriver 

plus  vite. 

Armand. C'est    tres    bien  .  .  .  vous    etes    dans    votre 

droit  .  .  . 

Daniel. Mais  la  lutte  n'en  continuera  pas  moins  loyale 

et  amicale? 

Armand. Oui. 

Daniel. Voila  un  oui  un  peu  sec. 

Armand. Pardon  .  .  .  {Lui  tendant  la  main.)     Daniel,  je 

vous  le  promets  .  .  . 

Daniel. A  la  bonne  heure. 

III.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Comment  s^appellent  les  deux  amis? 
2.  Qui  est-ce  que  Daniel  a  vu?  *  3.  Lui  a-t-il  parle?  4.  Est-ce 
qu'il  lui  a  fait  une  demande?  5.  Est-ce  qu'il  avait  promis  de 
faire  une  demande?  6.  Pourquoi  n^a-t-il  pas  fait  cette  de- 
mande? 7.  Est-ce  qu'Armand  lui  demande  son  motif?  8. 
Qu'est-ce  que  Daniel  croit  faire?  9.  Comment  croit-il  reussir? 
10.  Croit-il  arriver  plus  vite  ou  moins  vite  que  son  ami?  11. 
Est-ce  que  Daniel  et  Armand  sont  toujours  de  bons  amis? 

IV.  Traduisez.  1.  Daniel  and  Armand  are  in  love  with 
(love)  the  same  (young)  girl.  2.  Armand  talks  to  Daniel, 
and  tells  him  to  (de)  speak  to  the  (young)  girFs  father.  3. 
Daniel  says  that  he  will  do  so  (it).  4.  He  will  tell  him  that 
Armand  loves  his  daughter.  5.  Daniel  and  Armand  have 
promised  each  other  to  be  good  friends.  6.  They  will  conceal 
nothing  from  each  other.  7.  They  will  tell  each  other  every- 
thing that  (tout  ce  qui)  happens  (arriver).  8.  Armand  expects 
to  succeed,  but  Daniel  tells  him  that  the  struggle  is  not  yet 
finished. 

V.  Exercice    Oral   ou   Ecrit.     1.  Can   she   do   it?    2.  She 

can  not  say.     3.  Can  you  not  think?    4.  Can  Charles  come? 
5.  Can  Philip  and  John  hear?     6.  How  can  they  succeed? 


Lesson  80  151 

LESSON  80   (QUATRE-VINGTifiME  LEgON) 

AGREEMENT  OF  PAST  PARTICIPLES: 
THE  PRONOMINAL  ADVERB 

VOCABULAIRE 

apporter  (aporte),  to  bring  lu  (ly),  p.  part.,  read  (from  lire) 

enveloppe  (dvlop),  f.,  envelope  payer  (peje),  to  pay;  pay  for 

142.  Agreement  of  Past  Participles  (Accord  des  Participes 
Passes),  When  the  verb  is  compounded  with  avoir,  the  past 
participle  agrees  with  the  preceding  direct  object.  If  the  object 
follows  the  verb,  the  past  participle  does  not  agree. 

1.  J*ai  trouve  les  joumaux,  I  (have)  found  the  newspapers.    (Object 

follows  the  verb.)     But 
Je  les  ai  trouve s,  /  (have)  found  them.     (Object  precedes  the 
verb.) 

2.  Les  joumaux  que  j*ai  trouves.  The  newspapers  which  I  (have) 

found.     (Object  precedes  the  verb.) 

3.  Quels  joumaux  avez-vous  trouves?  What  newspapers  did  you 

find?     (Object  precedes  the  verb.) 

Note  that  the  participle  does  not  agree  with  a  preceding  en. 

1.  Combien  de  lettres  avez-vous  ecrites?  How  many  letters  did  you 

write? 

2.  J^eii  ai  ecrit  deux,  /  wrote  two  (of  them). 

Questions.  1.  Quels  journaux  avez-vous  achetes  ce  matin? 
2.  Combien  les  avez-vous  payes?  3.  Combien  de  journaux 
avez-vous  lus?  4.  Quelles  autres  choses  avez-vous  achetees 
ce  matin?  Quelles  personnes  avez-vous  vues?  6.  Avez-vous 
vu  des  amis?     7.  Quels  amis  avez-vous  vus? 

143.  Tenir  (taniir)  to  hold^  to  keep  (conjugated  like  venir). 

tiens  (tje)  tenons  (tano) 

tiens  (tje)  tenez  (tane) 

tient  (tje)  tiennent  (tjen) 

144.  The  Pronominal  Adverb  y  {le  Pronom  y).  The  pro- 
nominal adverb  y  (i)  means  therej  to  (at)  itj  to  (at)  them.  It 
stands  for  a  (sur,  dans,  etc.)  +  a  pronoun  of  the  third  person. 


152  The  Elements  of  French 

145.  Y  regularly  precedes  the  verb  and  can  only  be  sep- 
arated from  it  by  en. 

1.  Allez-vous  a  Bordeaux?  Are  you  going  to  Bordeaux? 

2.  J'y  vais,  /  am  going  there. 

3.  Etes-vous  a  Paris?  Are  you  in  Paris? 

4.  J]y  suis,  I  am  there. 

5.  Pensez-vous  k  cette  lefon?  Are  you  thinking  of  this  lesson? 

6.  J*^  pense,  /  am  thinking  of  it. 

7.  II  n*y_en  a  pas,  There  is  not  any, 

I.  Questions.  1.  Tenez-vous  quelque  chose  a  la  main? 
2.  Qu'est-ce  que  vous  y  tenez?  3.  Y  tenez-vous  un  crayon? 
4.  Y  tenez-vous  un  porte-plume?  5.  Est-ce  que  vous  y 
tenez  un  journal?  6.  Qu^est-ce  que  je  tiens  a  la  main?  7. 
Est-ce  que  j'y  tiens  un  livre?  8.  Est-ce  que  'fy  tiens  une 
balle?  9.  Levez  la  main  droite.  10.  Y  tenez-vous  la  gram- 
maire?  11.  Y  tenez-vous  un  canif?  12.  Levez  la  main 
gauche.  13.  Y  tenez-vous  le  porte-plume?  14.  Qu'est-ce  que 
Marie  et  Annette  ont  dans  les  mains? 

II.  Conjuguez.  1.  Je  Tai  ecrite,  tu  Tas  ecrite,  etc.  2.  Je 
les  ai  ecrites,  tu  les  as  ecrites,  etc.  3.  Je  les  ai  trouvees,  tu 
les  as  trouvees,  etc.  4.  Quelles  tables  est-ce  que  j^ai  ache- 
tees?  quelles  tables  as-tu  achetees?  etc.  5.  Je  ne  les  ai  pas 
apportes,  tu  ne  les  as  pas  apportes,  etc. 

III.  Exercice  Oral  ou  Ecrit.  1.  We  have  seen  them  (/.). 
2.  You  have  seen  them  (m.).  3.  She  has  listened  (to)  her. 
4.  We  have  found  them  (m.).  5.  You  have  found  her.  6. 
Here  are  some  envelopes  which  she  has  paid  for.  7.  There 
are  some  letters  which  he  has  written.  8.  Here  are  some 
apples;  I  (have)  bought  them.  9.  There  are  some  pears; 
they  (have)  sold  them.  10.  You  bought  some  meat,  but  did 
you  pay  for  it?  11.  Are  you  thinking  of  it?  12.  She  sees  a 
picture  there. 


Lesson  81  153 

LESSON  81    (QUATRE-VINGT-UNlfiME  LEgON) 

AGREEMENT   OF  PAST  PARTICIPLES— Continued 

VOCABULAIRE 

officiel   (ofisjel),  adj.,  official  portefeuille  (par tfoeij),m., pocfce/booA; 

Feminine,  officielle  (ofisjel)  remis    (rami),  handed  {given)  hack 

ordinairement    (ordinerma),  adv.,          (from  remettre) 

usually  souvenir  (suvniir),  m.,  recollection; 

oublier  (ublie),  to  forget  souvenir 


Le  Chateau  dlf 

UNE   LETTRE* 

I.  [Abbe  Faria  (farja)  is  questioning  Edmond  Dantes 
(dateis)  regarding  a  mysterious  letter  which  was  in  the  lat- 
ter^s  possession  before  his  arrest  and  imprisonment  in  a 
dungeon  of  the  Chateau  dlf  (Jato  d  if).] 

On  vous  a  remis  une  lettre? 

Oui,  le  grand  marechal. 

Cette  lettre,  qu'en  avez-vous  fait? 

Je  Tai  mise  dans  mon  portefeuille. 


*  Adapted  from  le  Comte  de  Monte  Crista,  by  Dumas. 


154  The  Elements  of  French 
Vous  aviez  done  votre  portefeuille  sur  vous?     Comment 


ce  portefeuille  poiivait-il  tenir  dans  la  poche  d^un  marin? 

Vous  avez  raison,  mon  portefeuille  etait  a  bord. 

Ce  n'est  done  qu'a  bord  que  vous  avez  enferme  la  lettre 

dans  le  portefeuille? 

Oui. 

De  Porto-Ferrajo  a  bord  qu'avez-vous  fait  de  cette 

lettre? 

Je  Tai  tenue  a  la  main. 

Maintenant,  eeoutez  bien ;  reunissez  tous  vos  souvenirs : 

vous  rappelez-vous  dans  quels  termes  etait  redigee  la  denon- 
eiation? 

Oh!  oui;  je  Tai  relue  trois  fois,  et  ehaque  parole  en  est 

restee  dans  ma  memoire. 

II.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  A  qui  a-t-onremisune  lettre?  2.  Qui 
Fa  fait?  3.  Ou  Dantes  Ta-t-il  mise?  4.  Ses  poches  etaient- 
elles  plus  grandes  ou  moins  grandes  que  le  portefeuille?  5.  Ou 
avait-il  laisse  son  portefeuille?  6.  Ou  a-t-il  tenu  la  lettre? 
7-  Est-ce  que  Dantes  avait  lu  la  lettre? 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  It  is  already  twenty  minutes  past  nine 
o'cloek.  2.  We  have  only  (the)  time  to  {de)  write  a  few 
letters.  3.  My  cousin  and  I  {moi)  are  talking  to  each  other. 
4.  '^Here  is  some  black  ink,  if  you  need  any.  5.  Probably 
you  do  not  need  any  red  ink,  do  you?'^  6.  ''No,  thank  you. 
7.  I  prefer  this  pen-holder;  I'll  take  that  large  pen,  also, 
please.^'  8.  ''Here  are  some  blue  envelopes.  9.  If  you  look 
in  the  box,  you  will  find  there  some  yellow  envelopes  also.'' 
10.  'Thank  you  (very)  much.  This  table  is  too  small,  I 
think.  11.  One  cannot  write  on  it."  12.  "You  will  find  a 
better  table  in  that  room,  I  think.  13.  Usually  I  put  some 
blue  paper  and  some  blue  envelopes  there,  also."  14.  We  are 
going  to  write  to  some  friends  who  have  been  in  France  for 
three  weeks.  15.  They  have  written  us  several  letters.  16. 
Here  are  some  letters  which  they  have  written  us.  17.  We 
received  them  this  morning;   they  are  very  interesting. 


Lesson  82  155 

LESSON  82   (QUATRE-VINGT-DEUXIEME   LEgON) 

POSITION   OF   CONJUNCTIVE   PRONOUNS 

VOCABULAIRE 

billet  (bije),  m.,  ticket  valable  (valabl),  adj.,  valid 

delivrer  (delivre),  to  deliver  voyage  (vwajais),  m.,  trij)  (by  land 
escorte  (eskort),  f.,  escort  or  by  sea) 

gare  (gair),  f.,  railroad  station  chef  de  gare  (/ef  da  ga:r),  m.,  sta- 
guichet  (gije),  m.,  ticket  window  tion-master 

146.  Position  of  Conjunctive  Pronouns  {Position  des  Formes 
Atones),  In  the  third  person  the  direct  object  pronouns  le, 
la,  les  precede  the  indirect  object  pronouns  lui  and  leur.  In 
other  words,  these  pronoun  forms  of  the  third  person  are 
arranged  in  alphabetical  order,  le,  la,  and  les  preceding  lui 
and  leur.     (See  table  in  Lesson  85.) 

The  reflexive  se  always  precedes  other  object  pronouns. 

1.  II  sie  le  dit,  He  says  it  to  himself. 

2.  Je  donne  le  billet  k  Charles,  /  give  the  ticket  to  Charles. 

3.  Je  le  donne  a  Charles,  /  give  it  to  Charles. 

4.  Je  le  lui  donne,  /  give  it  to  him. 

5.  Nous  montrons  la  gare  a  ma  cousine.  We  show  my  cousin  the 

station. 

6.  Nous  la  montrons  a  ma  cousine,  We  show  it  to  my  cousin. 

7.  Nous  la  ^  montrons,  We  show  it  to  her. 

8.  Hs  donnent  les  crayons  aux  eleves.   They  give  the  pupils   the 

pencils. 

9.  ns  les  donnent  aux  eleves,  They  give  them  to  the  pupils. 
10.  lis  les  leur  donnent,  They  give  them  to  them. 

I.  Questions.  1.  Voici  une  enveloppe.  2.  Est-ce  que  je 
vous  la  montre?  3.  Est-ce  que  je  la  montre  a  votre  voisine? 
4.  La  lui  montrez-vous?  5.  Voila  un  portefeuille.  6.  Est-ce 
que  je  le  donne  a  Jacques?  7.  Est-ce  que  je  le  lui  donne? 
8.  Rendez-vous  leurs  plumes  a  Charles  et  a  PhiHppe?  9. 
Les  leur  rendez-vous? 

II.  Conjuguez.  1.  Je  puis  la  lui  rendre,  tu  peux  la  lui 
rendre,  etc.  2.  Est-ce  que  je  leur  en  donnais?  leur  en 
donnais-tu?  etc.     3.  Je  vais  le  leur  rendre,  tu  vas  le  leur  rendre, 


156  The  Elements  of  French 

etc.  4.  Je  ne  la  lui  ai  pas  rendue,  tu  ne  la  lui  as  pas  rendue, 
etc.  5.  Je  les  leur  ai  rendues,  tu  les  leur  as  rendues,  etc. 
6.  Je  ne  la  leur  montre  pas,  tu  ne  la  leur  montres  pas,  etc. 

AU  GUICHET 

III.  Je  desire  faire  un  petit  voyage.  Comme  je  ne  suis  en 
France  que  depuis  quelques  semaines,  un  ami  qui  parle  fran- 
gais  me  sert  d'escorte. 

Ce  monsieur  desire  un  billet  circulaire  pour  visiter  la 

Touraine,  dit  mon  ami. 

On  le  lui  delivrera  dans  trois  jours,  repond  le  chef  de 

gare. 

Quel  en  est  le  prix? 

II  y  a  un  premier  billet,  valable  pendant  trente  jours. 

On  le  lui  vendra  pour  86  francs. 

En  deuxieme  classe?  demande  mon  ami. 

Non,  monsieur,  en  premiere,  repond  le  chef  de  gare. 

{A  suivre.) 

IV.  Exercice  Oral  ou  Ecrit.  1.  I  give  it  (m.)  to  them. 
2.  You  return  them  to  her.  3.  We  show  it  (/.)  to  her.  4. 
He  delivers  them  to  him.  5.  She  does  not  tell  it  to  her. 
6.  They  (/.)  do  not  give  them  to  them. 


LESSON  83   (QUATRE-VINGT-TROISlfiME  LEgON) 

REVISION 

I.  Conjuguez.  1.  Je  ne  peux  pas  le  faire,  tu  ne  peux  pas 
le  faire,  etc.  2.  Est-ce  que  je  peux  vous  la  donner?  peux-tu 
la  lui  donner?  etc.  3.  Est-ce  que  je  ne  peux  pas  la  leur  mon- 
trer?  ne  peux-tu  pas  la  leur  montrer?  etc.  4.  Voila  les 
choses  que  j'ai  trouvees,  les  choses  que  tu  as  trouvees,  etc. 
5.  Je  le  lui  apporte,  tu  le  lui  apportes,  etc. 

II.  Remplacez  les  Tirets.  1.  Combien  de  pommes  avez- 
vous  achet hier?    2.  Voila  les  enveloppes  que  j^ai  pay . 


Lesson  83  157 

3.  Voici  les    journaux    que    vous    avez    regu  —  aujourd^hui. 

4.  Est-ce  que  Jacques  va  a  Paris?     II va  demain.     5. 

fites-vous  a  Fecole?    J serai  dans  une  heure. 

III.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Montrez-moi  vos  enveloppes.  Com- 
bien  les  avez-vous  payees?  2.  Ou  les  avez-vous  achetees? 
3.  Dans  quelle  boutique?  4.  Y  allez-vous  souvent?  5.  Est-ce 
que  vous  y  avez  achete  aussi  un  portefeuille?  6.  Combien  de 
portefeuilles  avez-vous  achetes?  7.  Combien  les  avez-vous 
payes?  8.  Quelles  autres  choses  avez-vous  achetees?  9. 
Avez-vous  regu  des  lettres  ce  matin?  10.  Qui  les  a  ecrites? 
11.  De  quelle  couleur  etaient  les  enveloppes?  12.  Est-ce 
que  votre  voisin  a  regu  des  lettres  aussi?  13.  Les  lui  avez- 
vous  apportees?  14.  Vous  avez  la  de  Fencre  bleue.  Est-ce 
que  vous  m'en  donnez?  15.  Voici  une  belle  plume.  La 
donnez-vous  a  votre  voisin? 

IV.  Traduisez.  1.  Here  are  some  envelopes;  we  have 
paid  for  them.  2.  There  are  some  potatoes;  they  have  not 
eaten  them.  3.  You  bought  some  knives  and  forks;  did  you 
pay  for  them?  4.  I  give  this  article  to  him;  I  do  not  return 
it  to  them.  5.  These  tickets  belong  to  John;  we  are  going 
to  send  them  to  him  tomorrow.  6.  Look  at  his  right  hand; 
what  does  he  hold  in  it?  7.  If  you  are  going  to  school,  I 
am  going  there  also.  8.  I  prefer  this  red  pen-holder  to  that 
black  pen-holder.  9.  I  shall  give  it  to  you  now,  if  you  desire 
it.  10.  This  bed  is  too  small;  one  cannot  lie  down  in  it.  11. 
That  room  is  too  cold;  one  cannot  remain  in  it.  12.  Probably 
you  will  find  the  red  ink  there.  13.  If  you  find  it,  you  will 
give  it  to  her,  if  you  please.  14.  They  have  been  talking  to 
each  other  for  a  long  time.  15.  Here  are  some  interesting 
letters  which  the  sailors  wrote  them  a  week  ago.  16.  My 
brother  Charles  also  received  some  good  letters  from  the  same 
young  men.  17.  This  paper  is  too  large;  it  does  not  fit  {tenir) 
there. 


158  The  Elements  of  French 

LESSON  84   (QUATRE-VINGT-QUATRlfiME  LEgON) 

POSITION   OF   CONJUNCTIVE  PRONOUNS— Continued 

VOCABULAIRE 

attacher  (ataje),  to  attach  wagon-lit  (vag5  11),  m.,  sleeping  car 

couchette  (kujet),  f.,  couch  Plur.,  wagons-lits 

facteur  (faktceir),  m.,  postman  wagon-restaurant    (vago    restora), 

prochain  (pro/e),  adj.,  next  m.,  dining  car 

rapide  (rapid),  m.,  express  .         Plur.,  wagons  -  restaurants 

retour  (ratuir),  m.,  return 

AU   GUICHET— Suite 

I.  II  y  a  aussi  un  deuxieme  billet,  continue  le  chef  de 

gare.     Ce  billet  est  valable  pendant  quinze  jours.     On  le  lui 
vendra  pour  54  francs. 

Y  a-t-il  des  billets  dialler  et  retour? 

Oui,  monsieur,  il  y  en  a,  avec  vingt-cinq  pour  cent  de 

reduction.     On  pent  les  lui  donner  vendredi  prochain. 

Est-ce  qu'il  y  a  un  wagon-restaurant  attache  au  rapide 

de  dix  heures? 

Oui,  monsieur,  il  y  a  un  wagon-restaurant  et  des  wagons- 
lits,  aussi. 

Monsieur  desire  deux  couchettes  au  wagon-lit.     Voulez- 

vous  les  lui  donner,  s'il  vous  plait? 

Oui,  monsieur. 

II.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Desirez-vous  faire  un  voyage?  2. 
Dans  quel  pays  voulez-vous  voyager?  3.  Est-ce  que  vous 
etes  en  France  depuis  longtemps?  4.  Qui  est-ce  qui  vous 
accompagne  a  la  gare?  5.  Qui  est-ce  qui  vous  vend  les  billets? 
6.  Dans  combien  de  jours  les  donnera-t-on?  7.  Quel  en  est 
le  prix?  8.  Pendant  combien  de  jours  le  premier  billet  est-il 
valable?  9.  Est-ce  un  billet  de  premiere  ou  de  deuxieme  classe? 
10.  Est-ce  qu^il  y  a  aussi  un  deuxieme  billet?  11.  Pendant 
combien  de  jours  est-il  valable?  12.  Quel  en  est  le  prix?  13. 
Quel  pour  cent  de  reduction  y  a-t-il  sur  les  billets  dialler  et 
retour?     14.  Qu^est-ce  que  Ton  fait  dans  les  wagons-restau- 


Lesson  84 


159 


rants?  15.  Qu'est-ce  que  Ton  fait  dans  les  wagons-lits?  16. 
Prenez-vous  des  couchettes  dans  le  wagon-lit?  17.  Prenez- 
vous  un  lit? 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  One  of  my  friends  wishes  to  make  a 
little  trip  in  Burgundy.  2.  He  asks  (a)  the  station-master 
the  price  of  tickets.  3.  There  is  a  first  class  ticket,  which  is 
good  for  fifteen  days;  it  will  be  delivered  to  him  in  a  week. 
4.  They  will  sell  it  to  him  for  seventy-nine  francs.     5.  If  he 


>^ 

^^■^^^^^^^H^^^^^^^H^t^^^/'J 

■frfl 

Pf 

»%f 

T1--I— .• 

La  Gare  de  I'Est 


desires  a  second  class  ticket  (a  ticket  of  second  class), 
they  will  sell  it  to  him  for  fifty-two  francs.  6.  Ordinarily 
there  are  round  trip  tickets  also,  but  they  will  not  sell  them  to 
him  now.  7.  If  he  buys  a  round  trip  ticket,  he  will  have  (the) 
right  to  a  reduction  of  twenty-five  per  cent.  8.  My  friend 
takes  two  first  class  tickets;  they  will  deliver  them  to  him  next 
Saturday.  9.  The  station-master  wishes  to  sell  (to)  my  friend 
a  couch  in  the  sleeping  car.  10.  My  friend  prefers  a  bed  to  a 
couch.  11.  The  price  of  the  bed  is  (of)  thirty-six  francs;  the 
price  of  the  couch  is  eighteen  francs.     12.  The  station-master 


160  The  Elements  of  French 

will  have  the  tickets  in  a  few  days.  13.  Then  he  will  deliver 
them  to  my  friend.  14.  ^^Hurry  up,  my  friend/^  I  say.  'We 
are  waiting  (for)  you.'^  15.  '^What  tickets  have  you  bought 
and  what  have  you  paid  (for)  them?''  16.  He  shows  them; 
then  we  continue  our  way  (chemin). 


LESSON  85   (QUATRE-VINGT-CINQUlfiME  LEgON) 
CONJUNCTIVE  PRONOUNS,  RECAPITULATION 

147.  Object  Forms  of  Conjtmctive  Pronoims. 

DIRECT   OBJECT  {REGIME  DIRECT) 

Singulier  Pluriel 

me*  (ma),  me  nous*  (nu),  us 

te*  (ta),  you  vous*  (vu),  you 

le  (Id),  him,  it  les  (le)  or  (le),  them 
la  (la),  her,  it 

se*  (sa),  himself;  herself,  itself  se*  (so),  themselves 

INDIRECT   OBJECT   (REGIME  INDIRECT) 

me*  (ma),  to  (for)  me  nous*  (nu),  to  (for)  us 

te*  (ta),  to  (for)  you  vous*  (vu),  to  (for)  you 

lui  (Iqi),  to  (for)  him,  her  leur  (loeir),  to  (for)  them 

se*  (sa),  to  (for)  himself,  herself,  se*  (sa),  to  (for)  themselves 
itself 

148.  Position    of    Conjunctive    Pronouns,    Recapitulation 

{Position  des  Formes  Atones,  Resume).  Pronoun  objects  regu- 
larly precede  the  verb,  and  can  be  separated  from  it  only  by 
the  pronominal  forms  y  and  en. 

The   indirect   object   pronoun,   except   when    it    is   of  the 
third  person,  regularly  precedes  the  direct  object  pronoun. 

*  The  starred  forms  are  the  same  for  the  direct  and  for  the  indirect  objects. 


i^^lfe. 


La  Bourse 


Lesson  85  161 

Exception.     For  position  of  se,  see  §  146. 

1.  II  ni£  donne  le  canif,  He  gives  nw  the  penknife. 

2.  II  me  le  donne,  He  gives  it  to  me. 

3.  II  vous  donne  les  cartes  t)ostales,  He  gives  you  the  postal  cards. 

4.  II  vous  les  donne,  He  gives  them  to  you. 

5.  II  te  rend  la  serviette,  He  returns  the  towel  to  you. 

6.  II  te  la  rend.  He  returns  it  to  you. 

I.  Conjuguez.  1.  II  me  la  montre,  il  te  la  montre,  etc.  2. 
Elle  ne  me  le  rend  pas,  elle  ne  te  le  rend  pas,  etc.  3.  II  me 
Ta  dit,  il  te  Fa  dit,  etc.  4.  II  me  les  a  envoyees,  il  te  les  a 
envoyees,  etc. 

II.  Questions.  1.  Avez-vous  des  cartes  postales?  2.  Est-ce 
que  le  facteur  vous  les  a  apportees?  3.  Quand  vous  les  a-t-il 
apportees?  4.  Voyez-vous  ces  cartes  postales-ci?  5.  Qui  est- 
ce  qui  me  les  a  apportees?  6.  Est-ce  vous?  7.  Voyez-vous 
ces  choses-ci?  8.  Qui  est-ce  qui  les  apporte  a  Jean?  9. 
Voyez-vous  ces  livres?     10.  Qui  est-ce  qui  nous  les  achete? 

149.  Observe  that  y  and  en  follow  all  other  pronouns,  in 
the  order  named.  They  will  thus  regularly  come  inmiediately 
before  the  verb. 

1.  Vous  envoie-t-il  k  Paris?  Does  he  send  you  to  Paris? 

2.  II  m'3r_  envoie  maintenant.  He  is  sending  me  there  now. 

3.  II  a  achete  des  timbres  et  il  vous  en  donnera.  He  has  bought  some 

stamps  and  will  give  you  some. 

4.  Voil^  des  pommes!  II  y  en  a  beaucoup  cette  annee.  There  are 

some  apples;  there  are  many  (of  them)  this  year. 

III.  Conjuguez.  1.  Je  leur  en  apportais,  tu  leur  en 
apportais,  etc.  2.  Je  m^  reposerai,  tu  t'y  reposeras,  etc.  3. 
Je  ne  lui  en  parlerai  pas,  tu  ne  lui  en  parleras  pas,  etc. 

IV.  Questions.  1.  Avez-vous  de  Tencre?  2.  M'en  donnez- 
vous?  3.  Est-ce  que  Charles  vous  en  donne?  4.  Est-ce  que 
Marguerite  vous  en  donne  aussi?  5.  Est-ce  qu'ils  vous  en 
donnent?  6.  Apportez-moi  de  la  craie.  7.  A  qui  en  apportez- 
vous?     8.  Est-ce  qu'il  y  en  a  beaucoup? 


162 


The  Elements  of  French 


150.  Table  Showing  Order  of  Pronoun  Objects.  Personal 
pronoun  objects  and  pronominal  adverbs,  when  preceding  the 
verb,  are  arranged  in  the  following  order: 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

me 

le 

lui 

te 

la 

leur 

y 

en 

verb 

(pas), 

past 

(ne) 

se 
nous 
vous 

se 

les 

auxiliary 

(jamais), 
etc. 

parti- 
ciple 

Observe.     2  before  3  before  4  before  y  before  en. 

V.  Conjuguez.  1.  II  me  le  donnera,  il  te  le  donnera,  etc. 
2.  Elles  ne  me  les  ont  jamais  payes,  elles  ne  te  les  ont 
jamais  payes,  etc.  3.  II  ne  me  la  rendait  pas,  il  ne  te  la 
rendait  pas,  etc.  4.  Est-ce  qu^il  me  Pa  racont^?  te  Ta-t-il 
raconte?  etc.     5.  Je  le  lui  montrerai,  tu  le  lui  montreras,  etc. 

VI.  Exercice  Oral  ou  Ecrit.  1.  He  brings  them  to  me.  2. 
You  bring  them  to  him.  3.  They  do  not  deliver  it  to  us. 
4.  We  have  given  them  (/.)  to  them.  5.  Who  has  given 
them  (m.)  to  us?  6.  They  have  not  returned  it  to  her.  7. 
Who  has  returned  them  to  you?  8.  How  many  (of  them) 
have  you  given  them?  9.  You  have  not  given  them  many 
(of  them).  10.  How  many  (of  them)  will  there  be?  11. 
There  will  not  be  many  (of  them).  12.  I  have  put  (mis)  them 
(/.)  there.  13.  You  have  put  them  (m.)  there.  14.  She  has  not 
put  it  (/.)  there,  I  think. 


Lesson  86  163 

LESSON  86    (QUATRE-VINGT-SIXifiME   LEgON) 

POSITION    OF    CONJUNCTIVE    PRONOUNS,     RECAPITULATION 

— Continued 

VOCABULAIRE 

bureau  de  tabac  (byro  da  taba),  m.,  mis  (mi),  p.  part.,  put  (from  mettre) 

tobacco  shop  (where  stamps,  etc.,  preter  (prete),  to  lend 

are  on  sale)  rapporter  (raporte),  to  bring  back 

loin  (Iwe),  far;  distant  volontiers  (volotje),  adv.,  willingly 

Combien  y  a-t-il?  (kobje  j  a  t  11),  How  far  is  it? 

Combien  y  a-t-il  de  Paris  k  Fontainebleau?  How  far  is  it  from  Paris 

to  Fontainebleau? 
Combien  de  livres  y  a-t-il?  How  many  books  are  there? 

151.   Vouloir   (vulwair),   to  wish, 

veux  (v0)  voulons  (vulo) 

veux  (v0)  voulez  (vule) 

veut  (v0)  veulent  (voel) 

I.  Questions.  1.  Que  voulez-vous  faire?  2.  Qu^est-ce 
que  votre  voisin  veut  faire?  3.  Qu^est-ce  que  vos  amis 
veulent  faire?  4.  Voulons-nous  ecrire?  5.  Voulons-nous  par- 
tir?  6.  Pouvez-vous  etudier?  7.  Voulez-vous  etudier?  8. 
Pouvez-vous  vous  couper  la  main?  9.  Voulez-vous  vous 
couper  la  main? 

II.  Conversation. 

Monsieur  desire? 

Est-ce  qu^il  y  a  des  lettres  pour  moi? 

Non,  monsieur,  il  n^  en  a  pas.     Le  facteur  n'est  pas 

encore  venu.     Hier  il  y  en  avait,  mais  on  vous  les  a  donnees. 

Voila  des  cartes  postales.     Desirez-vous  m^en  donner? 

Volontiers.     Et  les  timbres  pour  ma  femme  —  est-ce 

que  le  gargon  les  lui  a  donnes? 

Oui,  monsieur. 

Combien  y  a-t-il  d'ici  au  bureau  de  poste? 

C^est  assez  loin,  mais  il  y  a  un  bureau  de  poste  k  cent 

metres  d'ici. 


164  The  Elements  of  French 

III.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Le  facteur  est-il  arrive  ce  matin? 
2.  A  quelle  heure  est-il  arrive?  3.  Est-ce  qu^il  vous  a  apporte 
des   lettres?    4.  Combien    de    lettres   vous   a-t-il    apportees? 

5.  Est-ce  qu^il  vous  a  apporte  des  cartes  postales?  6.  Combien 
de  cartes  postales  vous  a-t-il  apportees?  7.  En  avez-vous 
regu  des  soldats?  8.  En  avez-vous  regu  des  marins?  9.  Com- 
bien y  a-t-il  d'ici  au  bureau  de  poste?  10.  Qu'est-ce  que  Ton 
peut  acheter  au  bureau  de  poste?  11.  Combien  y  a-t-il  d'ici 
k  votre  maison?  12.  Voila  des  enveloppes.  Voulez-vous 
me  les  donner?  13.  Voici  des  timbres.  Ou  les  avez-vous 
achetes?  14.  Jean  cherche  du  papier.  Voulez-vous  lui  en 
preter?  15.  Annette  n'a  pas  de  timbres.  Voulez-vous  aller 
lui  en  chercher? 

IV.  Traduisez.  1.  Here  are  some  books;  I  give  them  to 
him;  I  do  not  give  them  to  you.  2.  Here  are  some  stamps; 
I  shall  return  them  to  you  immediately.  3.  Here  are  some 
apples;  will  you  give  some  to  her?  4.  Will  you  have  ink 
enough   (enough  ink)?     5.   I    lent   some   to   you   yesterday. 

6.  The  postman  comes  every  morning  {tous  les  matins)  at  half 
past  eight.  7.  He  always  brings  letters  to  the  others,  but  he 
never  brings  me  anything  but  (ne  .  .  .  que)  post  cards.  8. 
Everybody  has  forgotten  me;  that  is  (voild)  why  letters  never 
come  for  me.  9.  I  write  often  to  my  friends,  but  put  the 
letters  in  my  pockets,  and  forget  them.  10.  Fortunately  it 
is  not  far  to  the  tobacco  shop.  11.  I  shall  take  (carry)  this 
letter  there  before  forgetting  it  (avant  de  Vouhlier), 


LESSON  87   (QUATRE-VINGT-SEPTlfiME   LEgON) 

THE   IMPERATIVE 

VOCABULAIRE 

s'en  aller  (s  an  ale),  to  go  away  papier  5.  lettre  (papje  a  letr),  m., 

chocolat  (.fokola),  m.,  chocolate  letter  "payer 

frais  (fre),  fresh  salle  h.  manger   (sal  a  ma3e),  f., 

Fem.,  fraiche  (fre: J)  dining  room 


Lesson  87 

165 

152. 

The  Imperative 

{V  Imperatif) , 

donner  (done) 

finir  (fini:r) 

perdre  (perdr) 

2d  sing. 

donne  (don)* 

finis  (fini) 

perds  (peir) 

1st  plur. 

donnons  (don5) 

finissons  (finiso) 

perdons  (perdo) 

2d  plur. 

donnez  (done) 

finissez  (finise) 

perdez  (perde) 

avoir 

etre 

aller 

2d  sing. 

aie  (e) 

sois  (swa) 

va  (va) 

1st  plur. 

ayons  (ejo) 

soyons  (swajo) 

allons  (alo) 

2d  plur. 

ayez  (eje) 

soyez  (swaje) 

allez  (ale) 

153.  Position  of  Pronoun  Objects.  Pronoun  objects  follow 
the  affirmative  imperative,  the  direct  object  being  nearest  the 
verb,  the  indirect  object  being  next  nearest,  and  y  and  en 
last.  Pronoun  objects  are  connected  by  hyphens  to  the 
verbs  which  they  follow,  and  to  each  other. 

1.  Montrez-moi  la  carte,  Show  me  the  card, 

2.  Montrez-la-moi,  Show  it  to  me. 

3.  Montrez-moi  le  bureau  de  poste,  Show  ine_the  post  office. 

4.  Montrez-le-moi,  Show  it  to  me. 

5.  Montrez-nous  le  facteur,  Show  us  the  postman. 

6.  Montrez-le-nous,  Show  him  to  ms. 

7.  Montrez-leur  les  soldats,  Show  them  the  soldiers. 

8.  Montrez-les-leur,  Show  them  to  them. 

9.  Donnez-lui  de  la  viande,  Give  him  (or  her)  some  meat. 

10.  Donnez-lui-en,  Give  him  (or  her)  some. 

11.  Rendez-vous-y,  Go  there  (betake  yourseK  there). 

154.  The  regular  rule  that  pronoun  objects  precede  the 
verb  applies  to  the  negative  imperative. 

1.  Ne  me  la  racontez  pas,  Do  not  narrate  it  to  me. 

2.  Ne  le  lui  dites  pas,  Do  not  tell  it  to  him  (or  to  her). 

3.  Ne  le  leur  envoyez  pas,  Do  not  send  it  to  them. 

4.  Ne  nous  les  rendez  pas.  Do  not  return  them  to  us. 

5.  Ne  le  leur  rapportez  pas.  Do  not  bring  U  back  to  them. 

155.  Me  and  te  change  to  moi  and  toi  respectively  when 
in  a  stressed  position,  as  after  the  imperative. 

*  The  forms  of  the  imperative  of  regular  verbs,  as  well  as  of  most  irregular 
verbs,  are  the  same  as  those  of  the  present  indicative.  In  the  first  conjuga- 
tion, however,  the  ending  s  of  the  second  person  singular  is  dropped. 


166  The  Elements  of  French 

(When  preceding  the  verb,  an  object  pronoun  is  unstressed. 
When  following  the  verb,  it  is  stressed.) 

1.  Montrez-moi  la  salle  a  manger,  Show  rne^  the  dining-room. 

2.  Sers-toi_de  ce  porte-plume,  Use  this  pen-holder. 

However,  me  and  le,  even  following  an  imperative,  change 
to  m'  and  t'  before  y  and  en. 

1.  Donnez-moi  du  lait,  Give  m£  (some)  milk. 

2.  Donnez-m^en,  Give  me  some. 

Observe  the  conjugation  of  the  reflexive  verb  s'en  aller 
(s  an  ale),  to  go  away:  va-t-en  (va  t  a);  allons-nous-en 
(al5  nuz  a);  allez-vous-en  (ale  vuz  a). 

I.  Exercice.  Substitute  pronouns  for  the  words  in  italics. 
For  instance,  instead  of  ^^ Donnez-moi  du  papier,^ ^  write  '^Don- 
nez-m'en.^'  1.  T>onnez-moi  dit  lait,  2.  Donnez-lui  c/e  Z'eat^. 
3.  Rendez-nous  le  portefeuille.  4.  Apportez-lui  V argent,  5. 
Vendez-moi  les  chevaux.  6.  Servez-vous  de  la  viande.  7. 
Envoyez-moi  les  journaux.  8.  Rapportez-leur  les  timbres. 
9.  Vendez-lui   les  cartes  postales. 

Make  the  sentences,  as  changed,  negative. 

II.  UNE   PROMENADE 

Bon  jour,  monsieur,  avez-vous  bien  dormi? 

Tres  bien,  monsieur,  et  vous  aussi,  j^espere.* 

• Comme  9a. 

II   est   deja  huit   heures   un   quart.     Descendons  a  la 

salle  a  manger. 

Gargon,  apportez-nous  de  Feau  fraiche,  s^il  vous  plait. 

(Le  gargon)  —  Voila,  monsieur. 

Avez-vous  aussi  du  lait  frais?     Apportez-nous-en,  s^il 

vous  plait.  Voila  du  cafe.  Donnez-m^en,  s'il  vous  plait. 
Merci. 

(Le  gargon)  —  II  n^  a  pas  de  quoi,  monsieur. 

*  e,  like  mute  e  (o),  regularly  changes  to  e  (8),  when  the  next  syllable  has  a 
mute  e  (a).     Hence  esperer  is  conjugated  j*espere,  etc. 


Lesson  88  167 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  Let  us  go  down  there.  2.  Do  not  go 
down  there,  please.  3.  Bring  them  some  fresh  water.  4. 
Bring  them  some,  at  once.  5.  Give  them  some  coffee,  but  do 
not  give  me  any.  6.  Will  you  have  some  tea?  7.  Give  me 
some,  if  you  please.    8.  Do  not  give  her  any. 


LESSON  88   (QUATRE-VINGT-HUITIEME  LEgON) 
REVISION 

L  Conjuguez.  I.  Je  le  veux,  tu  le  veux,  etc.  2.  Je  vais 
lui  ecrire,  tu  vas  lui  ecrire,  etc. 

II.  Give  table  showing  order  of  personal  pronoun  objects. 

III.  Traduisez.  L  Return  it  (m.)  to  me.  2.  Show  it  to 
them.  3.  Bring  it  to  us.  4.  Give  me  some.  5.  Give  them 
some.     6.  Deliver  it  (/.)  to  her. 

Make  the  sentences  negative. 

IV.  Conjuguez.     1.  II  me  le  donne,  il  te  le  donne,  etc. 

2.  Elle  ne  me  la  donne  pas,  elle  ne  te  la  donne  pas,  etc.  3.  II 
me  Ta  dit,  il  te  Ta  dit,  etc.  4.  lis  ne  me  Font  pas  raconte,  ils  ne 
te  Font  pas  raconte,  etc.  5.  Je  le  lui  ai  rendu,  tu  le  lui  as  rendu, 
etc.  6.  Je  ne  les  leur  ai  pas  apportes,  tu  ne  les  leur  as  pas 
apportes,  etc. 

V.  Exercice  Oral.     1.  Voyagez-vous?     2.  Ou  voyagez-vous? 

3.  Oil  achetez-vous  les  billets?  4.  Qui  vend  les  billets?  5.  De 
quelle  classe  sont  les  billets?  6.  Prenez-vous  des  billets  d'aller 
et  retour?  7.  Quelle  reduction  y  a-t-il?  8.  Prenez-vous  une 
couchette  dans  le  wagon-lit?  9.  Prenez-vous  un  lit?  10. 
Combien  vous  faut-il  payer  ce  lit?  IL  Oil  prenez-vous  vos 
repas  quand  vous  voyagez?  12.  Qui  est-ce  qui  vous  apporte 
les  lettres?  13.  A  quelle  heure  arrive-t-il  le  matin?  14.  A 
quelle  heure  arrive-t-il  le  soir?  15.  Recevez-vous  beaucoup  de 
lettres?  16.  En  recevez-vous  des  soldats?  17.  En  recevez- 
vous  des  marins?     18.  Oil  portez-vous  les  lettres?     19.  Quel 


168  The  Elements  of  French 

timbre  faut-il  mettre  sur  une  lettre — pour  la  France?  20.  Pour 
les  fitats-Unis?  21.  Pour  TAngleterre?  22.  Pour  Tltalie? 
{Response:  II  faut  mettre  un  timbre  de  cinq  sous  [cents],  etc.) 
VI.  Traduisez.  1.  One  of  my  friends  asks  (d)  the  station- 
master  (for)  a  ticket  (which  is)  vaHd  for  fifteen  days.  2.  The 
station-master  delivers  it  to  him  in  a  week.  3.  He  sells  it  to 
him  for  eighty-eight  francs.  4.  My  friend  also  reserves  some 
couches  in  the  sleeping  car.  5.  He  pays  thirty-five  francs  (for) 
them.  6.  I  ask  him  (  =  to  him)  what  tickets  he  has  bought. 
7.  He  shows  them  to  me,  and  we  continue  (on)  our  way.  8. 
They  have  some  round  trip  tickets;  I  brought  some  to  them 
yesterday.  9.  Here  are  some  envelopes;  will  you  return  them 
to  us  presently?  10.  There  are  the  letters  which  I  wrote  to  my 
friends,  and  forgot.  11.  Take  these  letters  there  immediately; 
do  not  forget  them.  12.  You  have  not  lent  them  many  of 
them.  13.  Give  him  some;  do  not  give  them  any.  14.  Will 
there  be  enough  (of  them)?  15.  There  will  not  be  too  many  (of 
them).    16.  Give  them  to  me.     17.  Do  not  give  them  to  her. 


LESSON  89   (QUATRE-VINGT-NEUVlfiME  LE^ON) 

THE   IMPERATIVE  —  Continued 

VOCABULAIRE 

aussitot   (osito),   adv.,   immediately     se  promener  (sa  promne),  to  take  a 
bicyclette  (bisiklet),  f.,  bicycle  walk,  outing;  se  promener  en  au- 

parc  (park),  m.,  park  tomobile,  to  take  an  automobile 

ride;  se  promener  a  bicyclette,  to 
take  a  bicycle  ride;  se  promener  a 
cheval,  to  go  horseback  riding- 
a  la  campagne,  in  the  country 

156.   Lire  (Hir),  to  read;  past  participle  (participe  passe)  lu 

(ly). 

Present  Indicative  {le  Present  de  VIndicatif) 

lis  (H)  lisons  (Uz5) 

lis  (U)  lisez  (lize) 

lit  (li)  lisent  (U:z) 


Lesson  89  169 

I.  Conjuguez.  1.  Je  lis  la  lettre,  tu  lis  la  lettre,  etc.  2. 
Je  ne  lis  pas  les  journaux,  tu  ne  lis  pas  les  journaux,  etc. 
3.  Je  vais  me  promener  a  cheval,  tu  vas  te  promener  a 
cheval,  etc.  4.  J'allais  me  promener  en  automobile,  tu  allais 
te  promener  en  automobile,  etc.  5.  J'irai  me  promener  a 
bicyclette,  tu  iras  te  promener  a  bicyclette,  etc.  6.  Je  vais 
me  coucher  h  dix  heures,  tu  vas  te  coucher  k  dix  heures,  etc. 


Une  route  frangaise 

UNE  PROMENADE  —  Suite 

II.   Voici  du  the.     Donnez-lui-en,  mais  ne  m^en  don- 

nez  pas.     Ou  sont  nos  cartes  postales? 

Le  gar^on Les  voici.     Le  facteur  les  a  apportees  ce 

matin. 

Donnez-les-nous,  s^il  vous  plait.  A-t-on  regu  des  jour- 
naux aujourd^hui? 

Oui,  monsieur. 

■ Apportez-en  k  ce  monsieur;  apportez-m^en  aussi,  s^il 

vous  plait.  Maintenant,  monsieur,  allons  nous  promener  a 
la  campagne.  On  peut  se  promener  a  cheval  ou  en  auto- 
mobile. 


170  The  Elements  of  French 

III.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  A  quelle  heure  vous  levez-vous? 
2.  A  quelle  heure  descendez-vous  a  la  salle  a  manger?  3.  Quel 
est  votre  premier  repas?  4.  Qu'est-ce  que  vous  buvez?  5. 
Qui  est-ce  qui  vous  Tapporte?    6.  Buvez-vous  du  cafe  le  matin? 

7.  Buvez-vous  du  the  le  matin?  8.  A  quel  repas  ne  buvez- 
vous  pas  de  cafe?  9.  Aimez-vous  le  lait?  10.  Lisez-vous  au 
premier  dejeuner?  11.  Qu'est-ce  que  vous  lisez?  12.  Est-ce 
que  vous  lisez  tou jours  a  votre  petit  dejeuner?  13.  Allez-vous 
vous  promener?  14.  Ou  allez-vous  vous  promener?  15.  Com- 
ment vous  promenez-vous?  16.  Aimez-vous  mieux  vous  prom- 
ener a  cheval  ou  a  bicyclette?  17.  Y  a-t-il  de  beaux  pares 
chez  vous?     18.  Est-ce  que  vous  vous  y  promenez  souvent? 

IV.  Traduisez.  J.  I  got  up  this  morning  at  half  past 
seven  o'clock.  2.  The  waiter  told  me  they*  were  waiting  for 
me  at  breakfast.  3.  I  dressed  at  once,  and  went  down  stairs 
into  the  dining-room.  4.  The  waiter  brought  me  some  coffee, 
eggs,  fruit,  and  bread.  5.  Then  a  woman  entered  the  hotel  to 
sell  newspapers.  6.  ''Give  some  (of  them)  to  me,''  I  said  to 
her.  7.  ''Give  one  of  them  to  my  friend,  also."  8.  A  few 
minutes  afterwards  the  postman  arrived.  9.  He  brought  me 
several  letters  and  postcards.  10.  I  read  them  and  then  put 
them  in  my  portfolio. 

V.  Exercice  Oral  ou  Ecrit.  1.  There  are  the  stamps. 
Give  them  to  her;  do  not  give  them  to  us.  2.  Here  are  the 
newspapers.  Sell  some  to  me;  do  not  sell  any  to  him.  3. 
There  are  the  balls.  Return  them  to  them;  do  not  return 
them  to  me.  4.  Go  automobile  riding.  5.  Do  not  go 
bicycle  riding.  6.  Where  are  the  letters  which  you  brought 
to  me?     7.  Return  them  to  me;   do  not  return  them  to  him. 

8.  Where  are  the  newspapers  you*  read?  9.  Bring  them  to 
him;   do  not  bring  them  to  us. 


*  Que  and  qui  can  never  be  omitted  in  French. 


Lesson  90  171 


LESSON  90   (QUATRE-VINGT-DIXifiME  LEgON) 
PERSONAL  PRONOUNS  —  DISJUNCTIVE  FORMS 

VOCABULAIRE 

abandonner  (abadone),  to  abandon  laisser  (lese),  to  leave;  let 

alors  (aloir),  adv.,  then  permettre  (permetr),  irreg.,  io  permz7 

cMteau  (Jato),  m.,  castle  quelqu*un  (kelkoe),  pron.,  some  one^ 

ensemble    (asaibl),    adv.,    together  somebody 

fuir  (iqiir),  irreg.,  to  flee  viendrai  (vjedre)  (future  of  venir), 

gens  (3a),  m.,  f.,  pL,  people;  persons  to  come 

See  Appendix,  §  230,  h. 

157.  Disjunctive  Forms  {Formes  Toniques).  In  general,  a 
disjunctive  personal  pronoun  is  used  when  the  verb  is  not 
expressed,  or  when  the  pronoun  is  separated  from  the  verb. 

Observe.  Conjunctive  personal  pronouns  are  used  as  the  subject,  or  as 
the  object  (direct  or  indirect)  of  a  verb.  They  are  connected  directly  with 
the  verb,  and  hence  are  called  conjunctive.  Disjunctive  personal  pronouns 
are  used  in  all  other  cases  where  a  personal  pronoun  is  called  for.  They 
are  not  connected  directly  with  a  verb,  and  hence  are  called  disjunctive. 

158.  The  following  are  the  forms  of  the  disjunctive  pro- 
nouns : 

moi  (mwa),  me  *nous  (nu),  us 

toi  (twa),  you  *vous  (vu),  you 
lui  (Iqi),  him  eiix  (0),  them  (m.) 

elle  (el),  her  elles  (el),  them  (f.) 

159.  Principal  Uses,     (a)  As  object  of  a  preposition: 

1.  Sans  moi,  Without  me^ 

2.  Avec  lui.  With  him. 

3.  Centre  eux,  Against  them. 

Exercice.  Use  in  sentences  the  following  prepositions  with 
the  disjunctive  pronouns:  avec,  pour,  sans,  a,  centre,  apres, 
avant,  devant,  derriere. 


*  Forms  that  are  the  same  as  the  corresponding  conjunctive  forms  are 
starred. 


172  The  Elements  of  French 

(b)  Absolutely,  when  a  verb  is  understood,  but  not  expressed: 

1.  Qui  a  fait  cela?  Who  did  that? 

2.  Moi,  /. 

3.  II  est  plus  grand  que  moi,   He  is  taller  than  L 

Conjuguez.  1.  Elle  est  plus  jeune  que  moi,  elle  est  plus 
jeune  que  toi,  etc.  2.  II  le  fait  mieux  que  moi,  il  le  fait 
mieux  que  toi,  etc. 

(c)  In  general,  for  emphasis. 
1.  Moi,  je  le  dis,_/^  say  so. 

Conjuguez.  1.  Je  le  fais,  moi,  tu  le  fais,  toi,  etc.  2.  Je 
Tai  ecrit,  moi,  tu  Pas  ecrit,  toi,  etc. 

160.   The  preposition  a  is  used  to  denote  limit  of  motion. 

1.  II  me  donnera  ces  lettres,  He  will  give  these  letters  to  me  (indirect 

object). 

2.  II  vient  k  moi,  He  comes  to  me  (limit  of  motion). 

Exercice.  Practice  the  following:  1.  Venez  k  moi,  venez 
a  lui,  etc.  (omitting  toi  and  vous).  2.  II  va  k  toi,  il  va  a  lui 
(omitting  moi  and  nous).  3.  lis  courent  a  moi,  ils  courent 
a  toi,  etc. 

AU  CHATEAU  D'lF 

(Edmond  Dantes  begs  Abbe  Faria,  in  the  next  cell,  not  to 
abandon  him.) 

I.  Mais  vous  ne  m'abandonnerez  pas,  vous  ne  me  laisserez 
pas  seul,  vous  viendrez  a  moi,  ou  vous  me  permettrez  dialler  a 
vous?  Nous  fuirons  ensemble,  et,  si  nous  ne  pouvons*  fuir, 
nous  parlerons,  vous  des  gens  que  vous  aimez,  moi  des  gens 
que  j^aime.     (A  suivre.) 

II.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Qui  est-ce  qui  parle?  2.  Comment 
s'appelle  Tabbe  a  qui  il  parle?  3.  A  qui  veut  aller  Edmond? 
4.  Comment  veut-il  fuir?  5.  De  qui  parlera  Tabbe?  6.  De 
qui  parlera  Edmond? 

*Pas  is  often  omitted  after  pouvoir,  to  he  able. 


Lesson  91  173 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  /  shall  not  abandon  you.  2.  If  you  come 
to  me  we  shall  flee  together.  3.  I  shall  talk  of  my  friends,  and 
you  will  talk  of  your  father  and  (your)  mother.  4.  We  shall 
always  be  good  friends,  you  and  I. 


LESSON  91    (QUATRE-VINGT-ONZlfiME  LEgON) 

DISJUNCTIVE  PRONOUNS  —  Continued 

VOCABULAIRE 

camarade   (kamarad),  m.,  comrade  sait  (se)*,  knows  (from  savoir) 

Dieu  (dj0),  God  seul  (soel),  adj.,  only,  alone 

Mercedes    (mersedeis),    f.,   proper  vivre  (vi:vr),  irreg.,  to  live 
name,  Mercedes 

penser  a  (pase  a),  to  think  of,  to  remember,  bear  in  mind 

Pensez  a^moi,  Think  of  me. 
penser  de,  to  have  an  opinion  about 

Que  pensez-vous  de  lui?  What  do  you  think  of  him? 

Conjuguez.  1.  II  pense  a  moi,  il  pense  a  toi,  etc.  2.  Que 
pense-t-il  de  moi?   que  pense-t-il  de  toi?  etc. 

161.   Devoir  (davwair),  to  owe,  ought,  must.    Devant  (dava), 

pres.  part. 

Present  Indicative  {le  Present  de  V  Indicatif) 

dois  (dwa)  devons  (dovo) 

dois  (dwa)  devez  (dave) 

doit  (dwa)  doivent  (dwaiv) 

Conjuguez.  1.  Je  le  dois,  tu  le  dois,  etc.  2.  Je  dois  lui 
parler,  tu  dois  lui  parler,  etc.  3.  Je  dois  partir  demain,  tu 
dois  partir  demain,  etc. 

I.  AU  CHATEAU  D'lF— Suite 

Vous  devez  aimer  quelqu^un? 

Je  suis  seul  au  monde. 


"  There  is  also  authority  for  (ss). 


174  The  Elements  of  French 

Alors  vous  m'aimerez,   moi:    si   vous  etes  jeune,   je 


serai  votre  camarade;  si  vous  etes  vieux,  je  serai  votre  fils. 
J^ai  un  pere  qui  doit  avoir  soixante-dix  ans,  s'il  vit  encore; 
je  n'aimais  que  lui  et  une  jeune  fille  qu'on  appelait  Mercedes. 
Mon  pere  ne  m^a  pas  oublie,  j'en  suis  sur;  mais  elle,  Dieu  sait 
si  elle  pense  encore  a  moi.  Je  vous  aimer ai  comme  j^aimais 
mon  pere. 

II.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Qui  est-ce  qui  doit  aimer  quelqu^un? 
2.  Qui  est-ce  qu'il  aime?  3.  Est-ce  qu'il  a  des  amis?  4.  Est- 
ce  qu'il  est  seul  au  monde?  5.  Dantes  est-il  seul  au  monde? 
6.  Quel  age  a  son  pere?  7.  Son  pere  vit-il  encore?  8.  Est- 
ce  que  Diantes  Taimait?  9.  Quelle  jeune  fille  aimait-il? 
10.  Est-ce  que  son  pere  Ta  oublie?  11.  En  est-il  siir?  12. 
Est-ce  que  Mercedes  pense  encore  a  lui?  13.  Le  sait-il?  14. 
Est-ce  que  Dantes  aimera  bien  Tabbe? 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  Edmond's  father  must  be  76  years  old 
now.  2.  He  and  a  girl  named  Mercedes  were  Edmond^s  only 
friends  in  the  world.  3.  Edmond  loves  them  very  much. 
4.  His  father  is  still  thinking  of  him,  surely.  5.  Perhaps 
Mercedes  no  longer  thinks  of  him,  but  he  still  thinks  of  her. 

6.  Edmond  is  very  happy  to  find  a  comrade  in  the  prison. 

7.  He  says,  "You  will  be  a  father  to  {pour)  me,  and  I  shall 
be  a  son  to  you."  8.  He  does  not  know  how  old  the  abbe  is, 
but  is  sure*  he  will  love  him. 

IV.  Exercice  Oral  ou  Ecrit.  1.  Here  is  a  letter  the  post- 
man brought  me.  2.  Who  wrote  it,  he  or  she?  3.  It  is  pre- 
cisely like  two  other  letters  I  received  three  days  ago.  4. 
Probably  they  (m.)  wrote  them;  they  (/.)  are  not  at  home 
now.  5.  These  letters  are  for  your  mother;  give  them  to 
her  at  once.  6.  Those  letters  are  for  your  father;  do  not 
give  them  to  him  now.  7.  Will  you  come  with  him  or  with 
me?     8.  Will  you  come  with  them  (jri.)  or  with  them  (/.)? 

*Do  not  omit  que. 


Lesson  92  175 

LESSON  92   (QUATRE-VINGT-DOUZIEME  LEgON) 

DISJUNCTIVE  PRONOUNS  —  Continued 

VOCABULAIRE 

attention  (atasjo),  f.,  attention  .  route  (rut),  f.,  road;  route 

charmant  (Jarma),  adj.,  c/iarmmgr  faites  attention!  (fet  atasjo),  look 
cigare  (sigair),  m.,  cigar  out! 

garde  (gard),  f.,  guard;  watch  k  Pinstant  (a  1  esta),  at  once 

162.  We  have  seen  that  conjunctive  pronouns  are  used  as 
the  simple  subject  or  object  of  a  verb.  Disjunctive  pro- 
nouns are  used  as  the  composite  subject  or  object  of  a  verb. 

1.  n^est  venu,  He_  has  come. 
EUe  est  venue,  She  has  come. 

2.  Lui  et  elle  (ils)  sont  venus,  He  and  she  have  come. 

The  real  subject  is  ils;  therefore  lui  and  elle, being  separate  in  construc- 
tion from  the  verb,  are  disjunctive. 

3.  Je  Pai  vu,  /  have  seen  him. 
Je  Pai  vue,  /  have  seen  her. 

4.  Je  les  ai  vus,  ltd  et  elle,  /  have  seen  him  and  her. 

The  real  object  is  les;  therefore,  lui  and  elle,  being  separate  in  construc- 
tion from  the  verb,  are  disjunctive. 

5.  Vous  et  moi  (nous)  sonunes  arrives.   You  and_I_  have  arrived. 
The  real  subject  is  nous;  therefore,  vous  and  moi,  being  separate  in  con- 
struction from  the  verb,  are  disjunctive. 

Traduisez.  1.  You  and  he  have  gone.  2.  She  and  they 
have  arrived.  3.  My  mother  and  I  are  coming.  4.  Your 
father  and  he  are  going.  5.  You  and  I  say.  6.  She  and  I 
ought.     7.  He  and  I  take.     8.  You  and  they  (/.)  take. 

163.  Intensive  Pronouns  (Formes  Composees)  may  be  formed 
by  adding  meme  (meim)  to  the  disjunctive  personal  pronoun: 

moi-meme,  myself  nous-memes,  ourselves 

toi^meme,  yourself  vous-meme,  yourself 

lui-meme,  himself  vous-memes,  yourselves 

elle-meme,  herself  eux-memes,  themselves  (m.) 

elles  memes,  themselves  (f.) 
Note.     These  forms  are  disjunctive  because  separate  in  construction 
from  the  verb.     For  instance,  moi-m^me  is  in  apposition  with  je,  under- 
stood, or  expressed. 


176  The  Elements  of  French 

DISTINCTION    BETWEEN   INTENSIVE   AND   REFLEXIVE 
PRONOUNS 

164.  Intensive  pronouns  are  used  for  emphasis.  They  are 
in  apposition  with  the  subject  or  the  object  of  the  verb. 

Reflexive  "pronouns  are  used  as  the' object  of  the  verb. 

1.  II  se  rase,  He  shaves  himself  (reflexive). 

2.  II  le  fait  lui-meme,  He  does  it  himself  (intensive). 

Conjuguez.  1.  Je  le  fais  moi-meme,  tu  le  fais  toi-meme, 
etc.  2.  Je  ne  Tai  pas  dit  moi-meme,  tu  ne  Fas  pas  dit  toi- 
meme,  etc.  3.  Je  Fai  ^crit  moi-meme,  tu  Fas  ecrit  toi-meme, 
etc.     4.  Moi,  je  vais  le  chercher,  toi,  tu  vas  le  chercher,  etc. 

165.  Disjunctive  pronouns  are  used  as  the  logical  subject 
after  ce+etre. 

1.  C*est  moi,  It  is  I. 

2.  C*est  toi.  It  is  you. 

(In  the  above  examples,  ce,  it,  is  the  grammatical  subject.  Moi  and  toi 
are  the  logical  subjects,  i.  e.,  the  predicate  nominative  construction  in 
English.) 

166.  Prendre  (praidr),  to  take ; 'prensint  (prana),  pres.  part.; 
pris  (pri),  p.  part. 

prends  (prci)  prenons  (prano) 

prends  (pra)  prenez  (prane) 

prend  (pra)  preiment  (pren) 

Conjuguez.  1.  Je  prends  mon  billet,  tu  prends  ton  billet, 
etc.     2.  Je  ne  prends  pas  garde,  tu  ne  prends  pas  garde,  etc. 

1.  EN   VOYAGE 

(Armand  et  Daniel  se  rencontrent.) 

Prenez  done  garde ! 

Faites  attention  vous-meme ! 

Tiens!     Cesttoi! 

Qui,  c'est  moi! 

Tu  pars,  toi  ? 


Le  Louvre  a  Vol  D'Oiseau 
(Vu  d'un  aeroplane) 


Lesson  93  177 

A  rinstant,  et  toi? 

— — Moi  aussi! 

C^est  charmant!  nous  ferons  route  ensemble!    j'ai  des 

cigares  de  premiere  classe  .  .  .  et  ou  vas-tu?*     {A  suivre.) 

II.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Est-ee  que  Ton  doit  prendre  garde? 
2.  Est-ce  que  Ton  doit  faire  attention?  3.  Quels  amis  se  ren- 
contrent?  4.  Ou  vont-ils?  5.  Partent-ils  tout  de  suite? 
6.  Vont-ils  ensemble?  7.  Ont-ils  des  cigares?  8.  Ces  cigares 
sont-ils  bons  ou  mauvais? 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  His  name  is  Edmond  Dantes.  2.  Her 
name  is  Mercedes.  3.  He  and  she  are  going  to  be  married  {se 
marier),  4.  They  have  arranged  their  marriage  {manage)  for 
tomorrow.  5.  Unfortunately,  he  will  not  be  there.  6.  She 
will  be  there,  and  her  parents  will  be  there,  also.  7.  But  he 
will  be  in  prison. 

LESSON  93    (QUATRE-VINGT-TREIZlfiME  LEgON) 

REVISION 

I.  Use  pour,  avee,  chez,  sans,  with  the  disjunctive  personal 
pronouns. 

II.  Give  the  intensive  personal  pronouns. 

III.  Conjuguez.  1.  Je  ne  le  lis  pas,  moi,  tu  ne  le  lis  pas, 
toi,  etc.  2.  J'en  prends  moi-meme,  tu  en  prends  toi-meme, 
etc.  3.  Est-ce  que  je  vais  me  promener  au  pare?  vas-tu  te 
promener  au  pare?  etc.  4.  Je  dois  leur  parler  a  lui  et  a  elle, 
tu  dois  leur  parler  h  lui  et  a  elle,  etc. 

IV.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Allez-vous  vous  promener  le  matin? 
2.  Ou  vous  promenez-vous?  3.  Comment  vous  promenez- 
vous?  4.  Comment  s'appelle  Tami  d' Edmond  Dantes?  5.  De 
quel  chateau  veulent-ils  fuir?  6.  Est-ce  que  les  deux  amis 
vont  fuir  ensemble?  7.  Est-ce  que  Dantes  sait  si  son  pere  vit 
encore?    8.  Quel  age  a  son  pere?     9.  Est-ce  qu'Edmond  aime 

*  From  le  Voyage  de  M.  Perrichon,  by  Labiche  and  Martin. 


178  The  Elements  of  French 

une  jeune  fille?  10.  Comment  s'appelle-t-elle?  11.  A  qui 
est-ce  qu'Edmond  pense  le  plus  souvent?  12.  Qui  est-ce  qui 
pense  encore  a  lui? 

V.  Traduisez.  1.  Here  are  some  postcards.  Give  me 
some,  but  do  not  give  any  to  him  or  her.  2.  The  postman 
brought  them  to  us  yesterday.  3.  Return  them  to  him;  but 
do  not  return  them  to  her  or  to  her  brother.  4.  There  are 
some  newspapers;  sell  me  two  (of  them) ;  sell  him  one  (of  them), 
please.  5.  Let  us  go  automobile  riding  in  the  park.  6.  I  have 
several  letters  and  postcards  which  the  postman  brought  me. 
7.  I  shall  do  it  myself,  if  you  do  not  wish  to  do  it.  8.  You  and 
he.  are  old  friends.  9.  I  shall  think  of  him,  and  you  will  think 
of  them  (m.).  10.  They  will  always  be  good  friends,  he  and 
John's  cousin.  11.  If  Mercedes  no  longer  thinks  of  him,  he 
still  thinks  of  her.  12.  He  and  the  abbe  are  already  good 
friends.  13.  Edmond  is  always  thinking  of  his  father,  who 
must  be  seventy-six  years  old  now.  14.  What  do  you  think  of 
Edmond?    15.  You  are  leaving,  but  I  remain. 


LESSON  94  (QUATRE-VINGT-QUAT0RZI£ME  LEgON? 

DISJUNCTIVE   PRONOUNS  —  Continued 

VOCABULAIRE 

bizarre    (bizair),   adj.,   strange;   hi-  mariage  (marjais),  m.,  marriage 

zarre  monter  (a)  (mote),  to  mount;  ride 

ce  qui  (sa  ki),  what  (relative);  that  nonplus  (no ply),  neither]  either 

which  a  peu  pres  (a  p0  pre),  nearly,  almost 

cofiter  (kute),  to  cost  rarement  (rarma),  adv.,  rarely 

demoiselle    (damwazel),    f.,    young  riche  (ri J),  adj.,  nc/i 

lady  ne  .  .  .  rien  (na  rje),  pron.,  nothing 

disposer   (dispoze),   to  dispose;  ar-  plus  tard  (ply  tair),  adv.,  later 

range  suivre  (sqiivr),  irreg.,  to  follow 

encore  (akoir),  still;  yet;  again  vraiment  (vrema),  adv.,  truly 
fumer  (fyme),  to  smoke 

se  disposer  a,  to  prepare  (to),  to  get  ready  (to) 
ma  foi!  (ma  fwa).  Upon  my  word!     Faith! 
demander  en  mariage,  to  ask  in  marriage 


Lesson  94  179 

167.  Observe  the  following  forms: 

C'est  moi,  It  is  I  C'est  nous,  It  is  we 

C'est  toi,  It  is  you  C'est  vous,  It  is  you 

C'est  lui,  It  is  he  .      *Ce  sont  eux,  It  is  they  (m.) 
C'est  elle,  It  is  she  *Ce  sont  elles,  It  is  they  (f.) 

Use  ce  sont  before  nouns  or  pronouns  in  the  third  person 
plural. 

1.  Ce  sont  eux,  It  is  they  (m.). 

2.  Ce  sont  elles,  It  is  they  (f.). 

3.  Ce  sont  mes  freres,  It  is  (or,  they  are)  my  brothers. 

In  all  other  cases  use  c'est. 

1.  C*est  moi,  It  is  I. 

2.  C*est  mon  oncle,  It  is  my  uncle. 

Conjuguez.  1.  C'est  ma  soeur,  c^est  ta  soeur,  etc.  2.  Ce 
n'est  pas  mon  pere,  ce  n^est  pas  ton  pere,  etc.  3.  Est-ce 
que  c^est  moi?  est-ce  que  c'est  toi?  etc.  4.  Ce  n'est  pas 
moi,  ce  n'est  pas  toi,  etc.  5.  Ce  sont  mes  freres,  ce  sont  tes 
freres,  etc. 

168.  If  c'est  or  ce  sont  is  used,  the  noun  in  the  predicate 
always  has  an  article. 

1.  C*est  un  professeur,  Heis  ajeacher. 

2.  C'est  unmarchand,  Heis  a^mer  chant. 

3.  C*est  une  Italienne,  She  is  an  Italian  (woman). 

4.  Ce  sont  desf  Anglais,  They  are  (some)  Englishmen. 

If  11  est,  elle  est,  etc.,  are  used,  the  noun  in  the  predicate  takes 
an  adjective  form,  i.e.y  by  dropping  the  article.  In  this  con- 
struction the  article  is  omitted  especially  when  the  noun  in  the 
predicate  denotes  profession  or  nationality. 

1.  II  est  professeur.  He  is  a  teacher. 

2.  II  est  marchand.  He  is  a  merchant. 

*  C*est  is  tolerated,  however,  instead  of  ce  sent. 

t  Note  that  des  is  the  plural  of  the  indefinite  article  un  (e). 


180  The  Elements  of  French 

Conjuguez.  1.  Moi,  je  suis  soldat,  toi,  tu  es  soldat,  etc. 
2.  Je  suis  Americain,  tu  es  Americain,  etc. 

Note.  Observe  that  when  the  predicate  noun  is  modified,  the  article 
may  be  used. 

1.  Son  frere  est  un  bon  soldat,  His  brother  is  a  good  soldier. 

2.  Sa  soeur  est  une  artiste  americaine,  His  sister  is  an  American 

artist, 

169.     Savoir  (savwair),  to  know. 

Present  Indicative  {le  Present  de  V  Indicalif) 

sais  (se)  savons  (savo) 

sais  (se)  savez  (save) 

salt  (se)  or  (se)  savent  (sa:v) 

Conjuguez.  1.  Je  le  sais,  tu  le  sais,  etc.  2.  Je  n'en  sais 
rien,  tu  n'en  sais  rien,  etc. 

I.  EN  VOYAGE  — Suite* 

Ma  foi,  mon  cher  ami,  je  n'en  sais  rien  encore. 

Tiens!  c'est   bizarre!  ni  moi  non  plus!     J'ai  pris   un 

billet  jusqu'a  Lyon. 

' Vraiment?  moi  aussi!  je  me  dispose  a  suivre  une  de- 
moiselle charmante. 

Tiens!  moi  aussi. 

Mais  je  veux  Tepouser! 

Moi,  je  veux  la  demander  en  mariage  .  .  .  ce  qui  est  a 

peu  pres  la  meme  chose. 

II.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Voyagez-vous?  2.  Voyagez-vous  sou- 
vent  ou  rarement?  3.  Ou  allez-vous  quand  vous  voyagez? 
4.  Voyagez-vous  en  train  ou  en  automobile?  5.  Prenez-vous 
des  billets  de  premiere  ou  de  deuxieme  classe?  6.  Jusqu'a 
quelle  ville  prenez-vous  des  billets?  7.  Quel  est  le  prix  du 
billet  jusqu'a  Chicago?  8.  Fumez-vous  quand  vous  voyagez? 
Fumez-vous  des  cigares?  10.  Comment  arrivez-vous  a  Tecole 
le    matin?     11.  Allez-vous    en    tramway?     12.  Allez-vous    a 

*From  le  Voyage  de  M.  Perrichon. 


Lesson  95 


181 


pied?  13.  AUez-vous  en  automobile?  14.  Combien  de  mi- 
nutes faut-il  pour  arriver  en  tramway?     15.  En  automobile? 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  Yesterday  morning  he  and  I  went  to 
Lyons.  2.  It  is  a  city  of  680,000  inhabitants.  3.  We  took 
the  first  train,  which  leaves  at  9:17  in  the   (di^)   morning. 

4.  Then   he   and  she  arrived   two   and   a  half  hours  later. 

5.  We  took  second  class  tickets,  which  cost  15  francs.  6. 
They  took  first  class  tickets,  which  cost  21  francs.  7.  We 
arrived  at  Lyons  yesterday  evening.  8.  This  afternoon  you 
and  I  will  go  horseback  riding  for  two  or  three  hours.  9. 
He  and  she  will  go  automobile  riding  in  the  park.  10.  He 
will  probably  ask  to  marry  her.  11.  She  is  much  more 
charming  than  he.     12.  He  is  much  richer  than  she. 

IV.  Exercice  Oral  ou  Ecrit.  1.  It  was  not  they  (/.).  2. 
It  was  we.  3.  It  was  not  he.  4.  It  was  she.  5.  It  was  not 
I.     6.  It  was  they  (m.). 


LESSON  95   (QUATRE-VINGT-QUINZlfiME  LEgON) 

THE   PAST   FUTURE,    OR   CONDITIONAL 
170.   Past  future  of  donner,  finir,  perdre,  etre,  avoir,  faire. 


donner 
donner  ais  (donre) 
donner  ais  (donre) 
donner  ait  (donre) 
donner  ions  (donor j  5) 
donner  iez  (donorje) 
donner  aient  (donre) 

etre 
ser  ais  (sre) 
ser  ais  (sre) 
ser  ait  (sre) 
ser  ions  (sorjo) 
ser  iez  (sorje) 
ser  aient  (sre) 


finir 
finir  ais  (finire) 
finir  ais  (finire) 
finir  ait  (finire) 
finir  ions  (finir j  5) 
finir  iez  (finir je) 
finir  aient  (finire) 


avoir 

aur  ais  (ore) 

aur  ais  (ore) 

aur  ait  (ore) 

aur  ions  (or jo) 

aur  iez  (orje) 

aur  aient  (ore) 

Observe  that  the  stem  of  the  past  future  is  always  the  same  as  that  of 
the  future.  The  endings  of  the  past  future  are  always  the  same  as  those 
of  the  past  descriptive,  or  imperfect. 


perdre 
perdr  ais  (perdre) 
perdr  ais  (perdre) 
perdr  ait  (perdre) 
perdr  ions  (perdrio) 
perdr  iez  (perdrie) 
perdr  aient  (perdre) 

faire 
fer  ais  (fore) 
f er  ais  (fore) 
fer  ait  (fore) 
fer  ions  (forj5) 
fer  iez  (forje) 
fer  aient  (fore) 


182  The  Elements  of  French 

171.  Use  {Emploi).  The  past  future,  or  conditional,  is  gen- 
erally used  in  French  as  in  English.  It  is  translated  into 
English  by  should  (in  the  first  person)  and  by  would  in  the 
other  persons. 

1.  Cela  me  ferait  beaucoup  de  plaisir,  That  would  give  me  (literally 

would  do  me)  very  great  pleasure. 

2.  Je  serais  tres  heureux  de  le  revoir,  /  should  he  very  happy  to  see 

him  again. 

Exercice.  In  the  following  passage,  change  the  verbs  in  the 
future  to  the  conditional:  Mais  vous  ne  m^abandonnerez 
pas,  vous  ne  me  laisserez  pas  seul,  vous  viendrez  a  moi,  ou 
vous  me  permettrez  dialler  a  vous?  Nous  fuirons  ensemble, 
nous  parlerons,  vous  des  gens  que  vous  aimez,  moi,  des  gens 
que  j^aime. 

172.  Si,  meaning  z/,  is  never  used  in  French  with  the  future 
or  the  past  future. 

Instead  of  the  future,  with  si,  ifj  use  the  present. 
Instead  of  the  past  future,  with  si,  if,  use  the  past  descrip- 
tive. 

1.  Si  vous  m'accompagnez,  je  serai  content,  If  you  accompany  me, 

/  shall  he  glad. 

2.  Si  Teclairage  et  le  chauflfage  etaient  compris,  nous  serions  con- 

tents, //  the  lighting  and  the  heaiing  were  included,  we  should 
he  glad, 

I.  Exercice.  Substitute  the  past  future  for  the  future  in 
the  following  sentences,  and  then  make  the  proper  change  in 
the  si  clause.  1.  Si  vous  etes  jeune,  je  serai  votre  comarade. 
2.  Si  vous  etes  vieux,  je  serai  votre  fils.  3.  Mon  pere  aura 
70  ans,  s'il  n'est  pas  mort. 

II.  Conjuguez.  1.  Je  le  ferais,  si  j^avais  le  temps,  tu  le 
ferais,  si  tu  avais  le  temps,  etc.  2.  J'ecrirais  mes  lettres,  si 
je  trouvais  de  Tencre,  tu  ecrirais  tes  lettres,  si  tu  trouvais  de 
Tencre,  etc.  3.  Je  porterais  mon  pardessus,  s'il  faisait  froid, 
tu  porterais  ton  pardessus,  s^l  faisait  froid,  etc. 


Lesson  96  183 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  If  I  had  it,  I  should  give  it  to  him.  2. 
If  you  bought  some,  would  you  bring  me  some?  3.  If  I  had 
some  paper,  I  should  write  him  some  letters.  4.  If  he  wrote 
to  me  oftener,  I  should  be  very  happy.  5.  If  we  had  enough 
money,  we  should  give  him  a  larger  tip.  6.  If  the  barber 
were  near  here,  we  should  have  (the)  time  to  go  there.  7.  If 
we  hurried,  we  could  (pourrions)  catch  the  train. 


LESSON  96   (QUATRE-VINGT-SEIZlfiME  LEgON) 

THE  PAST  FUTURE,   OR    CONDITIONAL  —  Continued 

VOCABULAIRE 

bagage*  (baga:3),  m.,  baggage  numero  (nymero),  m.,  number 

difficile  (difisil),  adj.,  difficult  parfaitement  (parfetma),  perfectly 

disponible  (disponibl),  available  proprietaire  (proprieteir),  m.,  pro- 
doux  (du),  adj.,  sweet;  gentle  prietor 

Fern.,  douce  (dus)  repondre  (rep5:dr),  to  reply 

etage  (etais),  m.,  story  (of  a  house)  rez-de-chaussee  (re  da  Jose),  m., 
fortement  (fortma),  adv.,  vigorously;         first  floor 

hard  voudrai  (vudre),  future  of  vouloir, 
meubler  (moeble),  to  furnish  to  wish,  or  will. 

premier  etagef  (pramjer  eta:3),  second  floor 

dans  les  prix  doux  (da  le  pri  du),  at  a  moderate  price 

I.  A    L'HOTEL 

Je  voudrais  parler  au  proprietaire. 

C^est  moi,  monsieur.     Qu^  a-t-il  pour   votre  service? 

Je  desirerais  une  chambre  meublee.     Est-ce  qu'il  y  en 

a  de**  disponibles?  Quelque  chose  dans  les  prix  doux,  s41 
vous  plait. 

Parfaitement,    monsieur.     Nous  en  avons  a  85  francs 

par  mois,  tout  compris. 

*  Usually  used  in  the  plural.     **  Do  not  translate. 

t  The  first  floor  is  the  rez-de-chaussee  (re  da  J*ose).  The  third  floor  is  the 
deuxieme  etage,  etc.  Premier  etage  may  in  some  instances  even  be  translated 
third  floor,  since  some  houses  have  what  is  called  an  entresol,  or  intermediate 
floor  between  the  ground  floor  and  premier  etage. 


184  The  Elements  of  French 

L^eclairage  et  le  chauffage  y  compris,  aussi? 

Naturellement.       Quel  etage  preferez-vous?       Aimez- 


vous  le  rez-de-chaussee? 

Non,   monsieur.     Est-ce   qu'il  y  a  quelque   chose  au 

premier  etage  ou  au  deuxieme? 

(Le  proprietaire,  appelant) Jean. 

{Jean  arrive.) 

Montrez  a  Monsieur  tout  de  suite  les  numeros  25  et  35. 

Nous  prenons  I'ascenseur,  et  je  choisis  le  numero  35.  Jean 
regoit  un  pourboire  de  cinq  sous,  en*  disant,  '^Merci  bien,  mon- 
sieur." 

Puis  il  descend  pour  monter  mes  bagages. 

II.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  A  qui  est-ce  que  je  voudrais  parler? 
2.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  repond?  3.  Est-ce  que  je  desirerais  une 
chambre  meublee?  4.  A  quel  etage?  5.  Qu^est-ce  qu41  faut  la 
payer?  6.  Est-ce  que  tout  est  compris?  7.  Comment  s'ap- 
pelle  le  gargon?  8.  Quel  numero  est-ce  que  je  choisis?  9. 
Combien  de  pourboire  est-ce  que  je  donne  au  gargon?  10.  En 
est-il  content?     11.  Qui  est-ce  qui  monte  mes  bagages? 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  I  ask  the  {au)  proprietor  (for)  a 
furnished  room.  2.  If  (the)  number  46  were  on  the  third 
floor,  I  should  prefer  it.  3.  If  the  ground  floor  were  not  near 
the  street,  I  should  like  it.  4.  I  choose  (the)  number  25,  on 
the  second  floor.  5.  The  waiter  shows  me  the  elevator,  and  I 
give  him  a  tip  of  ten  cents.  6.  He  says,  *Thank  (you)  a  thou- 
sand times,  sir.  You  are  too  good.^^  7.  I  know  it  now;  we 
(other)  Americans  always. give  too  much  of  (a)  tip  when  we  are 
in  France.  8.  John  goes  down  at  once  to  bring  up  my  baggage, 
and  breathes  hard  to  show  me  how  difficult  it  is  (how  much  it 
is  difficult)  to  bring  up  baggage.  9.  He  is  very  warm,  and  I 
say  to  him,  '^Rest  yourself.^'  10.  I  give  him  a  tip  of  fifty  sous, 
and  he  does  not  understand  me. 


*  Do  not  translate. 


Lesson  97 


185 


LESSON  97,  (QUATRE-VINGT-DIX-SEPTlfiME  LEgON) 


POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS 
VOCABULAIRE 


cravate  (kravat),  f.,  necktie 
lac  (lak),  m.,  lake 


tranquille  (trakil),  adj.,  quiet 
vestibule   (vestibyl),   m.,   vestibule, 
hall 


POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS  (PRONOMS  POSSESSIFS) 


173. 

Masculin 
le  mien  (mje) 
le  tien  (tje) 
le  sien  (sje) 
le  notre  (noitr) 
le  votre  (voitr) 
le  leur  (loeir) 


les  miens  (mjs) 
les  tiens  (tjg) 
les  siens  (sje) 
les  notres  (noitr) 
les  v6tres  (voitr) 
les  leurs  (loeir) 


SINGULIER 

FSminin 
la  mienne  (mjen) 
le  tienne  (tjen) 
la  sienne  (sjen) 
la  notre  (noitr) 
la  v6tre  (voitr) 
la  leur  (loeir) 

PLURIEL 
les  miennes  (mjsn) 
les  tiennes  (tjen) 
les  siennes  (sjen) 
les  ndtres  (noitr) 
les  v6tres  (voitr) 
les  leurs  (loeir) 


Traduction 

mine 

yours 

hiSj  hers,  its 

ours 

yours 

theirs 


mine 

yours 

his,  hers,  its 

ours 

yours 

theirs 


Note.    Le  mien,  les  ndtres,  etc.,  contract  with  de  and  k  according  to 

the  regular  rule. 

1.  II  pensait  a  son  travail  et  au  notre,  He  was  thinking  of  his  work 

and  of  ours. 

2.  II  avait  son  argent  et  du  mien,  He  had  his  (own)  money  and  some 

of  mine. 


174.  Agreement  (Accord).  Possessive  pronouns  agree  with 
the  object  possessed  in  gender  and  number,  not  with  the 
possessor. 

Void  des  cravates.  Les  miennes  sont  sur  la  table;  les  vdtres 
sont  la-bas.  Here  are  some  neckties.  Mine  are  on  the  table: 
yours  are  down  there. 


186  The,  Elements  of  French 

Exercice.     Fill  out  the  blanks  with  proper  forms  of  possessive 

pronouns:     1.  Ce  n'est  pas  votre  grammaire.     C^est  la  m . 

2.  C'est  mon  argent;  ce  n'est  pas  le  v .     3.  Vous  avez  les 

yeux    bleus;    les sont    noirs.     4.  Voici    deux    journaux: 

Jean  a  le  s et  Marie  a  le  s ,  aussi.     5.  Voila  deux 

montres:     Charles  a  la  s et  Marguerite  a  la  s ,  aussi. 

6.  J^ai  apporte  mes  bagages;  Jacques  a  apporte  les  s , 

mais  oil  sont  les  v ? 

Traduisez.  His  mother,  her  father,  his  sister,  her  brother, 
his  pen,  her  pencil,  his  box,  her  paper,  his  pen-holder,  her 
letter.  Then  substitute  pronouns  for  the  possessive  adjective 
and  noun,  thus:   Sa  mere  =  la  sienne;  son  pere  =  le  sien,  etc. 

175.  Distinction  Between  Possessive  Adjectives  and  Pos- 
sessive Pronouns.  The  possessive  adjectives  mon,  ton,  son, 
notre,  votre,  leur,  are  used  to  modify  nouns. 

The  possessive  pronouns  le  mien,  le  tien,  etc.,  are  used 
instead  of  nouns,  never  to  modify  nouns. 

1.  Voici  mon  pardessus  et  le  sien,  Here  is  my  overcoat  and  his  (or 

hers) . 

2.  Voila  votre  chapeau  et  le  mien,  There  is  your  hat  and  mine. 

Caution.  Le  sien  may  mean  his,  hers,  its,  one's.  La  sienne  likewise 
may  mean  his,  hers,  its,  one's. 

1.  II  a  apporte  ma  serviette  et  la  sienne,  He  has  brought  my  towel 

and  his. 

2.  EUe  a  trouve  ses  plmnes;  il  a  trouve  les  siennes,  She  has  found 

her  pens;  he  has  found  his. 

I.  Exercice.  For  the  forms  in  italics  substitute  possessive 
pronouns,  thus:  Change,  Vous  avez  mon  porteplume  to  Vous 
avez  le  mien;  EUe  a  son  billet  to  EUe  a  le  sien,  etc. 

1.  Nous  avons  pris  la  serviette,  2.  Avez- vous  le  livref  3. 
Voulez-vous  votre  journal  maintenant?  4.  J'ai  ferme  la  porte, 
5.  EUe  a  ouvert  la  fenetre.  6.  Ce  chapeau  est  d  nous.  7. 
Ce  pantalon  gris  est  a  lui.    8.  Ces  souliers  jaunes  sont  d  toi. 


Lesson  98  187 

II.  Conversation. 

Bonjour,  Charles!    Bonjour,  monsieur.    As- 

tu  bien  dormi,  Charles?    Oui,  monsieur,  et  vous,  aussi? 

— —  Tres  bien,  merci.     Ma  chambre  donne  sur  le  lac.     Ou 

donne  la  tienne?    La  mienne  donne  sur  la  rue,  mais  elle 

est  tres  tranquille.     Ferme  ta   porte.     La   mienne   est 

aussi  ouverte  ...  A  quelle  heure  sert-on  le  petit  dejeuner? 

A  huit  heures  tres  precises,  monsieur.     II  faut  se  depecher. 

(A  suivre.) 

III.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Cette  chaise-la  est-elle  la  votre  ou 
la  mienne?  2.  Ou  est  la  mienne?  3.  Votre  voisin(e)  a  aussi 
une  chaise.  Montrez-moi  la  sienne.  4.  Dej:"riere  vous  il  y  a 
des  gens  qui  ont  aussi  des  chaises.  Montrez-moi  les  leurs. 
5.  De  quelle  couleur  est  votre  livre?  6.  De  quelle  couleur  est 
le  mien?  7.  (Pointing  to  John)  De  quelle  couleur  est  le  sien? 
8.  (Pointing  to  Mary)  De  quelle  couleur  est  le  sien? 

IV.  Traduisez.  1.  Is  your  room  on  the  left?  Mine  is  on 
the  right.  2.  Does  your  room  open  on  the  street?  3.  Mine 
looks  out  upon  the  lake.  4.  Hers  looks  out  upon  the  hall. 
5.  Mine  opens  on  it,  also.  6.  Here  is  your  room;  there  is 
his;  yonder  is  hers.     7.  Where  is  theirs?     There  it  is,  sir. 


LESSON  98  (QUATRE-VINGT-DIX-HUITI£ME  LEgON) 

POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS  —  Continued 

VOCABULAIRE 

accepter  (aksepte),  to  accept  savon  (savo),  soap 

beurre  (boeir),  m.,  butter  unique     (ynik),    adj.,    only;    sole; 

long  (15),  adj.,  long  unique 

Fem.,  longue*  (l5:g)  c'est  dommage!  (s  e  domaii^),it  is 
parapluie  (paraplqi),  m.,  umbrella  a  pity! 

♦Observe  that  g  changes  to  gu  in  the  feminine  to  keep  the  hard  sound 
of  g  (g)  before  e.  r        • 


188  The  Elements  of  French 

176.  Distinction  between  Use  of  Possessive  Pronoun  and 
of  etre  +  a  Disjunctive  Personal  Pronoun. 

Etre  +  a  disjunctive  personal  pronoun  is  used  simply  to 
assert  ownership  of  an  object. 

The  possessive  pronouns  are  used  to  distino;uish  objects 
according  to  their  owners. 

1.  Ce  complet  est  a  moi,  This  suit  is  mine  (belongs  to  me). 

2.  Ce  complet-ci  est  le  mien;  ce  complet-la  est  le  votre,  This  suit 

is  (the  one  that  is)  mine;  thai  suit  is  (the  one  that  is)  yours. 

Exercice.  In  the  following  sentences,  use  the  possessive 
adjective  instead  of  a  moi,  a  toi,  etc.,  and  explain  how  this 
change  affects  the  meaning  in  each  case:  1.  Ce  billet  est 
a  vous.  2.  Ces  enveloppes  sont  a  elle.  3.  Ce  parapluie  est 
a  lui.  4.  Cette  pomme  est  a  moi.  5.  Cet  habit  est  a  toi. 
6.  Cette  plume  est  a  eux. 

I.  Conversation.     Veux-tu  te  servir  de  ce  savon? 

Non  merci,  j^ai  le  mien  dans  cette  boite-ci.    Cette  brosse 

a  dents  est  la  mienne.    As-tu  toujours  la  tienne?    Par- 

faitement,  monsieur,  mais  Jean  n^a  plus  la  sienne.  II  Ta  per- 
due il  y  a  quelques  heures.  C^est  dommage !  Et  main- 
tenant  voici  Tunique  serviette.  Cen^est  ni  la  mienne  ni  la 
tienne.     C^est  la  notre. 

II.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  De  quelle  couleur  sont  vos  yeux? 
2.  Votre  voisin  a-t-il  les  yeux  noirs?  3.  A-t-il  les  yeux  gris? 
4.  Les  siens  sont-ils  bleus?  5.  Votre  complet  est-il  noir? 
6.  {Pointing  to  John):  De  quelle  couleur  est  le  sien?  7.  Est- 
ce  que  son  veston  est  long?  8.  Le  votre  est-il  court?  9.  Est- 
ce  que  la  robe  de  cette  demoiselle  est  rouge?  10.  De  quelle 
couleur  est  la  votre,  mademoiselle?  IL  Vos  Soulier s  sont-ils 
noirs?  12.  De  quelle  couleur  sont  les  miens?  13.  Voici  mon 
journal.  OiJi  est  le  votre?  14.  Montrez-moi  le  leur,  s^il  vous 
plait.  15.  Voil^  mon  crayon.  Ou  est  le  votre?  16.  Le  votre 
est-il  rouge  ou  noir?     17.  De  quelle  couleur  est  le  mien?     18. 


Lesson  99  189 

De   quelle  couleur   est  le  leur?     19.  Le  mien   est-il  long  ou 
court?     20.  Est-ce  que  le  mien  est  rond? 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  Go  (and)  close  your  door.  2.  Mine  is 
open,  also.  3.  1^11  take  breakfast  at  8:25  this  morning. 
You  will  take  yours  at  the  same  hour.  4.  Is  mine  ready 
now?  5.  You  will  take  yours  at  once,  won^t  you?  6.  Hurry; 
the  train  leaves  at  9:28.  7.  Here  is  my  hat;  there  is  yours; 
here  is  his.  8.  Is  this  coat  mine?  That  gray  vest  is  surely  his. 
9.  Is  this  white  soap  mine?  That  dark  soap  is  his,  if  he  wishes 
any.  10.  There  is  only  one  towel;  it  is  ours.  11.  Your  hat 
is  brown,  I  think;  his  is  gray;  mine  is  black.  12.  Will  you  wear 
your  black  shoes  this  morning?  13.  Where  are  John's  hat,  coat, 
and  shoes?  14.  Is  that  long  coat  his?  That  short  coat  is 
yours,  I  am  sure  (of  it).  15.  Now  let  us  go  down  to  the  dining- 
room.  16.  Waiter,  bring  us  some  coffee  with  {au)  milk  imme- 
diately. 17.  How  many  eggs  will  you  take?  18.  I'll  take 
two  (of  them),  please;  won't  you  have  some  also,  my  friend? 

19.  Here  is  some  bread,  but  it  is  dry.     Is  yours  dry,  also? 

20.  Here  is  some  fresh  water.     Is  theirs  fresh,  also? 


LESSON  99  (QUATRE-VINGT-DIX-NEUVlfiME  LEgON) 

REVISION 

I.  Conjuguez.     1.  Ce  sont  mes  amis,  ce  sont  tes  amis,  etc. 

2.  Est-ce  moi?  est-ce  toi?  etc.  3.  Je  suis  marchand,  tu  es 
marchand,  etc.  4.  Est-ce  que  je  le  sais?  le  sais-tu,  etc. 
5.  Je  viendrais,  si  j'avais  le  temps;  tu  viendrais,  si  tu  avais 
le  temps,  etc.  6.  Si  j'avais  de  I'argent,  je  lui  en  donnerais;  si 
tu  avais  de  I'argent,  tu  lui  en  donnerais,  etc. 

II.  Substitute    pronoun    forms    for   the    words    in   italics: 
1.  Ce  parapluie  est  a  Jean.     2.  Ces  cigares  sont  d  Robert. 

3.  Voici  voire  automobile.  4.  Voila  leurs  chevaux.  5.  Nous 
avons  achete  nos  billets.  6.  lis  ont  vendu  leur  maison,  7. 
Montez   ses  bagageSy   s'il   vous   plait.     8.  Voici   ma  chambre. 


190  The  Elements  of  French 

9.  II  a  perdu  son  numero,  10.  Acceptez  ce  pourhoire,  11. 
Passez-moi  le  heurre,  s'il  vous  plait. 

III.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Aimez-vous  a  voyager?  2.  Vous 
promenez-vous  souvent  en  automobile?  3.  Montez-vous  sou- 
vent  a  cheval?  4.  Allez-vous  souvent  a  pied?  5.  Comment 
arrivez-vous  a  Tecole  —  en  tramway?  6.  Aimeriez-vous  mieux 
le  rez-de-chaussee  ou  le  premier  etage?  7.  Voudriez-vous 
prendre  Tascenseur?  8.  Combien  de  pourboire  donnerez- 
vous   au  gargon?     9.  Qui  est-ce   qui   montera  vos  bagages? 

10.  Si  vous  etiez  a  Paris,  a  quelle  heure  iriez-vous  vous  coucher? 

11.  A  quelle  heure  vous  leveriez-vous?  12.  Voici  mon  crayon. 
Ou  est  le  votre?  13.  Est-ce  que  Jean  a  le  sien?  14.  Est-ce 
que  Marie  a  aussi  le  sien?  15.  Voici  ma  grammaire.  Mon- 
trez-moi  la  votre.  16.  Est-ce  que  votre  voisin  a  la  sienne? 
17.  Est-ce  que  Charles  a  aussi  la  sienne?  18.  Est-ce  que 
Robert  et  Jacques  ont  aussi  les  leurs? 

Let  the  teacher  ask  Qui  est-ce?  and  let  the  student  reply, 
C'est  moi,  c'est  toi,  etc. 

IV.  Traduisez.  1.  Yesterday  morning  he  and  they  went  to 
Lyons,  (a)  city  of  680,000  inhabitants.  2.  Then  she*  and  I 
arrived  several  hours  later,  by  (par)  the  9:17  train  (the  train 
of  9:17).  3.  He  and  she  will  go  horseback  riding  this  after- 
noon, if  the  weather  is  fine.  4.  You  and  I  will  probably 
remain  at  home,  if  the  weather  is  bad.  5.  If  I  were  in  (d)  your 
place,  I  should  accept  it.  6.  If  you  were  in  my  place,  you 
would  surely  prefer  it.  7.  You  have  taken  up  my  baggage; 
will  you  kindly  (bien)  take  up  his  and  theirs,  also?  8.  Is  this 
(Est-ce)  your  room  or  mine?  9.  Mine  opens  on  the  street; 
theirs  is  on  the  left;  here  is  yours.  10.  Give  me  some  fresh 
water,  if  you  please.  11.  This  butter  is  theirs;  that  butter  is 
ours.     12.  Is  that  your  train?    Here  is  hers,  now. 


Lesson  100  191 

LESSON   100   (CENTlfiME  LEgON) 

NEGATIVES 

VOCABULAIRE 

amusant  (amyza),  adj.,  amusing  tarif  (tarif),  m.,  scale  (of  prices) 

auteur  (otoeir),  m.,  author  abonmarche  (a  bo  marj*e),  c/ieap 

colonne  (kolon),  f.,  column  en  location,  reserved 

en  face  de  (a  fas  da),  opposite  faire  la  queue  (feir  la  k0),  to  stand 
location  (lokasjo),  f.,  reservation  (of         in  line 

tickets)  colonnes  d*affichage  (kolon 
parterre  (parteir),  m.,  pit  d  afi^sn'^) ,  columns  on  which  theat- 

pauvre  (poivr),  adj.,  poor  rical  announcements  are  posted 

piece  (pjes),  f.,  piece;  play;  room  fauteuil   d'orchestre    (fotoeij   d  or- 
supplement  (syplema),  m.,  supple-         kestr),  orchestra  seat 

ment  en  outre  (an  utr),  moreover 

111.  To  make  a  verb  negative,  place  ne  before  it,  and  pas, 
jamais,  rien,  etc.,  after  it.  In  a  compound  tense,  the  auxiliary 
counts  as  the  verb.  Therefore,  to  make  the  verb  negative,  put 
ne  before,  and  pas,  jamais^  rien,  etc.,  after  the  auxiUary. 

1.  Je  ne  parle  pas,  /  do  not  speak.     (Simple  tense.) 

2.  Je  n_*ai  pas  parle,  I  have  not  spoken.     (Compound  tense.) 

3.  II  ne  dit  jamais.  He  never  says,     (Simple  tense.) 

4.  II  n_'a  jamais  dit,  He  (has)  never  said.     (Compound  tense.) 

5.  Us  ne  font  rien,  They  do  nothing.     (Simple  tense.) 

6.  lis  n^ont  rien  fait.  They  have  done  nothing.     (Compound  tense.) 

Exercice.  Change  the  following  simple  tenses  to  compound 
tenses:  1.  Elle  ne  cherche  rien.  2.  lis  ne  passent  pas.  3. 
Nous  n^arrivons  jamais.  4.  Vous  ne  sortez  pas.  5.  Lui 
et  elle  ne  racontent  rien.  6.  Nous  ne  sommes  jamais  {ete 
p.  part.). 


178.   Some  of  the  commoner  negatives  are 

ne  .  .  .  pas,  not 

ne  .  .  .  que,  only 

ne  .  .  .  point,  not  (at  all) 

ne  .  .  .  personne,  nobody 

ne  .  .  .  guere,  hardly 

ne  .  .  .  rien,  nothing 

ne  .  .  .  jamais,  never 

ne  .  .  .  ni  (. . .  ni),  neither 

ne  .  .  .  plus,  no  longer 

nor 


192  The  Elements  of  French 

Exercice.  1.  Conjugate  the  present  tenses  of  vouloir,  pou- 
voir,  and  faire  with  point,  guere,  jamais,  plus,  and  rien.     2. 

Conjugate  the  perfect  tense  of  dire  (p.  part,  dit)  with  the  same 
negatives. 

(a)  Que  used  with  a  negative  sense  always  precedes  the 
word  which  it  modifies. 

1.  Nous  n*en  avons  trouve  que  dix,  We  have  found  only  ten  (of  them). 

2.  II  n'est  heureux  que  quand  11  parle,  He  is  happy  only  when  he  is 

talking. 

Conjuguez.  1.  Je  ne  viendrais  que  plus  tard,  tu  ne 
viendrais  que  plus  tard,  etc.  2.  Je  ne  suis  ici  que  depuis 
dix  heures,  tu  n^es  ici  que  depuis  dix  heures,  etc.  3.  Je  n'ai 
mange  que  tres  peu,  tu  n^as  mange  que  tres  peu,  etc. 

I.  AU  THEATRE 

Quelle  piece  est-ce  que  Ton  joue  ce  soir? 

Regardons  la-bas  les  colonnes  d'affichage.     II  y  a  fc 

Voyage  de  M,  Perrichon,  que  Ton  joue  au  Theatre  Frangais. 

C^est  une  piece  tres  amusante.     Allons  voir  s^il  y  a  des 

places. 

Nous  regardons  le  tarif  des  billets,  qui  se  trouve  devant 
le  theatre.  Les  fauteuils  d'orchestre  sont  a  10  francs,  ou  a  12 
francs  en  location.  En  outre,  il  y  a  un  supplement  de  10  pour 
cent  pour  le  droit  des  pauvres.* 

Voyons  s^il  y  a  des  places  de  parterre. 

Pour  les  avoir,  il  faut  faire  la  queue.     Le  guichet  ne 

s^ouvre  qu^a  sept  heures  et  demie. 

Eh  bien,  mais  regardons  en  face  de  nous  ce  bureau  de 

location  pour  tons  les  theatres.  C'est  1^  que  Ton  pent  avoir 
des  billets,  en  location. 

Nous  y  entrons,  et  nous  achetons  des  billets  de  par- 
terre, k  trois  francs  cinquante.  Cela  coiite  un  franc  de  plus 
que  les  prix  ordinaires,  mais  nous  avons  Tavantage  de  la  location. 

*  Le  droit  des  pauvres  is  a  tax  upon  theater  tickets  for  the  benefit  of  the 
French  poor. 


Avenue  du  Bois  (de  Boulogne) 


Lesson  101  193 

II.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Quelle  pi^ce  est-ce  que  Ton  joue? 
2.  La  piece  est-elle  bonne  ou  mauvaise?  3.  A  quel  th^&tre 
est-ce  qu'on  la  joue?  4.  Combien  faut-il  payer  les  fauteuils 
d^orchestre?  5.  Combien  de  droit  des  pauvres  y  a-t-il?  6. 
Qu^est-ce  qu41  faut  faire  pour  avoir  les  billets  a  bon  marche? 
7.  Qu'est-ce  que  Ton  vend  au  bureau  de  location?  8.  A  quel 
prix  est-ce  que  Ton  y  vend  des  billets  de  parterre?  9.  Combien 
de  supplement  faut-il  payer?  10.  Est-ce  qu^il  faut  faire  la 
queue?     11.  A  quelle  heure  s'ouvre  le  guichet? 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  This  evening  they  will  only  play  le 
Voyage  de  M.  Perrichon,  2.  It  is  a  play  which  I  have 
never  seen,  but  I  know  that  Armand  and  Daniel  are  very 
amusing.  3.  There  is  nothing  which  I  should  rather  see  than 
that  play.  4.  Unfortunately  the  ticket  window  never  opens 
before  a  quarter  of  eight.  5.  We  can  have  pit  tickets  only  by 
(en)  standing  in  line.  6.  I  should  scarcely  like  (to)  wait  half 
an  hour  or  perhaps  an  hour.  7.  The  supplement  for  reserva- 
tion of  tickets  is  only  (of)  one  franc.  8.  Let  us  pay  it,  in 
order  to  have  plenty  of  time. 


LESSON   101    (CENT  UNI^ME  LEQON) 

NEGATIVES  —  Continued 

VOGABULAIRE 

ajuster  (asyste),  to  adjust  loge  (lo:3),  f.,  box  (at  theater) 

etonner  (etone),  to  astonish  lorgnette  (brnet),  f.,  opera-glass 

se  charger  (de)  (sa  farse  da),  to  take      moyennant  (mwajena),  by  means  of, 

charge  of  thanks  to 

commencement    (komasma),  m.,      representation     (raprezatasjo),     f., 

beginning  performance 

controler  (kotrole),  to  inspect  rideau  (rido),  m.,  curtain 

fixer  (fikse),  to  fix,  look  steadily  on       chapeau  haut  de  forme,  high  hat 

179.  Position  of  personne  and  rien.  When  used  as  the 
subject  of  the  sentence,  personne  and  rien  regularly  precede 
the  verb. 


194  The  Elements  of  French 

1.  Personne  n*est  venu,*  Nobody  has  come. 

2.  Rien_n_*estt  arrive,  Nothing  has  happened  (literally  arrived), 

Conjuguez.  1.  Personne  ne  m^a  parle,  personne  ne  t^a 
parle,  etc.     2.  Rien  ne  m^etonne,  rien  ne  t'^tonne,  etc. 

When  used  in  the  predicate,  personne  comes  where  it  would 
in  English. 

1.  Nous  n^avons  ecrit  a  personne,  We  have  written  to  nobody. 

2.  II  n?a  trouve  personne.  He  (has)  found  nobody. 

(a)  Omission  of  ne.  Ne  is  always  used  before  the  nega- 
tive verb.     When  the  verb  is  omitted,  ne  is  also  omitted. 

1.  N'a-t-il  rien  vu?  Did  he  see  nothing? 

2.  Rien,  Nothing. 

3.  Ne  vient-elle  jamais?  Does  she  never  come? 

4.  Jamais,  Never. 

180.  Observe  the  pronominal  forms: 

Sing,   quelqu'un  (kelk  oe),  m.,  quelqu*une  (kelk  yn),  f.,  somebody,  some  one. 
Plur.  quelques  uns  (kelkaz  6e),  quelques  unes  (kelkoz  yn),  a  few,  some. 

chacun  (/akoe),  m.,  chacune  (Jakyn),  f.,  each  one, 

181.  Translate  the  idiomatic  expression  a  friend  of  mine 
by  xrn  de  mes  amis,  and  a  French  friend  of  mine  by  un 
Frangais  de  mes  amis. 

Traduisez.  1.  A  friend  (m.)  of  yours.  2.  A  friend  (/.) 
of  ours.     3.  A  cousin  of  his.     4.  Two  friends  of  theirs. 

182.  Conduire  (kodqiir),  to  conduct;  lead,  drive, 

Le  Present  de  Plndicatif 

conduis  (kodqi)  conduisons  (kodqizS) 

conduis  (kodqi)  conduisez  (kodqize) 

conduit  (kodqi)  conduisent  (kodqiiz) 

♦Personne  is  masculine  when  used  as  a  pronoun;  otherwise  it  is  feminine, 
t  Observe  that  ne  must  be  used  with  the  verb. 


Lesson  101  195 

I.  AU   THEATRE 

Le  soir,  a  huit  heures  un  quart,  nous  entrons  dans  le 
theatre.  Un  monsieur  en  uniforme  controle  nos  billets,  et  dit: 
'Tout  droit,  et  puis  tout  de  suite  k  gauche/' 

A  la  porte,  il  y  a  un  homme  en  habit.  II  nous  vend  des 
programmes  et  nous  conduit  a  nos  places.  Nous  lui  donnons 
un  pourboire  de  dix  sous. 

Un  de  nos  amis  a  pris  une  loge.  Une  ouvreuse  lui  a  montr6 
sa  place,  et  s^est  chargee  de  son  parapluie,  de  son  pardessus  et 
de  son  chapeau  haut  de  forme,  moyennant  un  pourboire  — 
naturellement. 

En  avant,  il  y  a  des  messieurs  aux  fauteuils  d^orchestre. 
lis  se  levent,  ajustent  leurs  lorgnettes  et  fixent  le  monde. 
Personne  ne  s^en  etonne. 

Tout  a  Fheure,  on  frappe  trois  fois,  et  le  rideau  se  leve. 
C'est  le  commencement  de  la  representation. 

II.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  A  quelle  heure  est-ce  que  nous 
entrons  dans  le  theatre?  2.  Qui  est-ce  qui  controle  nos  billets? 
3.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  nous  dit?  4.  Qui  nous  attend  a  la  porte? 
5.  Comment  est-il  habille?  6.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  nous  vend? 
7.  A  quel  prix  les  vend-il?  8.  Quel  pourboire  lui  donnons- 
nous?  9.  Quelle  place  prend  un  de  nos  amis?  10.  Qui  lui 
montre  sa  loge?  11.  De  quels  vetements  se  charge-t-elle? 
12.  Que  font  les  messieurs  aux  fauteuils  d^orchestre?  13. 
Est-ce  que  tout  le  monde  s^en  etonne?  14.  Comment  annonce- 
t-on  le  commencement  de  la  representation? 

III.  Traduisez.     1.  Come,  my  friend,  we  shall  never 

arrive  at  the  theater  on  time.     2.  Is  the  performance 

never  late?  Never.  3.  Really,  I  have  eaten  noth- 
ing.   4.  I  should  like  to  remain  a  few  minutes  longer  {de  plus) 

in  the   dining-room.     5.  We  hardly  have  time  enough 

to  catch  the  next  street  car.  ...  6.  When  we  arrive  at 
the  theater,  it  is  only  a  quarter  of  eight.  7.  I  never  like 
to  (d)  hurry  so  much.     8.  There  are  many  people  who  are 


196  The  Elements  of  French 

standing  in  line  near  the  ticket  window.  9.  A  poorly  dressed 
man  says  to  us,  ^If  you  desire  (it),  I  will  stand  in  line  for  you, 
in  consideration  of  (moyennant)  a  tip/'  10.  We  reply  to  him, 
^'We  need  nobody,  thank  you.''  11.  Then  a  friend  of  his,  also 
poorly  dressed,  asks  him  (lui),  '^How  much  have  you  earned 
this  evening?"  12.  He  rephes,  ^'Little  or  nothing."  13.  We 
enter  the  theater,  and  take  our  orchestra  seats.  14.  Near  us 
are  some  gentlemen  who  stare  at  us  with  their  opera  glasses. 
15.  Nobody  has  ever  looked  at  us  (from)  so  near. 


LESSON   102   (CENT   DEUXifiME  LEgON) 

DEMONSTRATIVE   PRONOUNS 

VOCABULAIRE 

d'abord  (d  aboir),  adv.,  in  the  first     Metro (politain)   (metro),   (metropo- 

place  lits),  m.,  Metropolitain,  subway 

s'arreter  (s  arete),  to  stop  and  elevated  line 

bout  (bu),  m.,  end  recommander    (rakomade),   to   rec- 

ensuite  (asqit),  adv.,  then  ommend 

fleur  (floeir),  f.,  flower  station  (stasjo),  f.,  station 

fiacre  (fjakr),  m.,  cab  suivant    (sqiva),    adj.,    participle, 

gant  (ga),  m.,  glove  following 

imperiale  (eperjal),  f.,  top  of  a  bus     voiture   (vwatyir),  f.,  carriage 

or  coach  voyageur  (vwaja3oe:r),  m.,  traveler 

183.  Demonstrative   Pronouns    (Pronoms    Demonstratifs) 

Singulier  VARIABLE  pj^^j^j 

Masc.  celui  (salqi),  that  (one),  the  (one)      ceux  (s0),  those  (ones),  the  (ones) 
Fern,    celle  (sel),  that  (one),  the  (one)         celles  (sel),  those  (ones),  the  (ones) 

It  will  be  recalled  that  -ci  and  -la  may  be  used  with  ce  to  mean  this  and 
that.     Similarly  -ci  and  -la  may  be  added  to  celui,  celle,  ceux,  and  celles. 

1.  celui-ci,  (m.),  this  one 

2.  celles-la,  (f.),  those 

INVARIABLE     See  §  187. 

1.  ce  (sa),  this,  that,  he,  she,  it,  they 

2.  ceci  (sasi),  this 

3.  cela  (sala),  that 


Lesson  102  197 

184.  Celui,  celle,  etc.,  are  used 

(a)  As  the  antecedent  of  que,  or  qui: 

1.  Voici  un  autre  officier;  c'est  celui  que  vous  avez  connu,  This 

is  another  officer;  it  is  the  one  that  you  knew. 

2.  J^aime  mieux  ces  roses-ci  que  celles  que  nous  avons  trouvees, 

/  prefer  these  roses  to  those  that  we  found. 

(h)  Before  de : 

1.  Voila  mes  chevaux  et  ceux  de  Robert,  There  are  my  horses  and 

Robertas. 

2.  Nous  allons  chercher  votre  chapeau  et  celui  de  votre  ami,  We 

are  going  to  look  for  your  hat  and  your  friend's  (literally  the  one 
of  your  friend) . 

Questions.  1.  De  quelle  couleur  est  votre  veston,  monsieur? 
2.  Est-ce  celui  que^ous  avez  achete  a  Paris?  3.  Et  votre 
robe,  mademoiselle,  ou  Favez-vous  achetee?  4.  Est-elle  de 
la  meme  couleur  que  celle  de  votre  voisine?  5.  Pouvez-vous 
porter  ces  gants-ci,  monsieur?  6.  De  quelle  couleur  sont  ceux 
de  Jacques?  7.  De  quelle  couleur  sont  vos  fleurs,  mademoi- 
selle? 8.  Sont-elles  plus  jolies  que  celles  de  Marie?  9.  Voila 
deux  plumes  seulement:     Ou  sont  celles  que  je  vous  ai  donnees? 

185.  Celui-ci,  celle-ci,  etc.,  mean  this  (one),  etc.  Celui-la, 
celle-la,  etc.,  mean  that  (one),  etc. 

Vous  trouverez  la  des  souliers:  mettez  ceux-ci,  ne  mettez  pas 
ceux-la,  You  will  find  there  some  shoes;  put  these  on,  do  not 
put  those  on. 

Note.  Celui-ci,  celle-ci,  etc.,  are  used  also  to  mean  the  latter  {i.e.,  that 
which  is  near  at  hand).  Celui-la,  celle-la,  etc.,  are  used  to  mean  the 
former  (i.e.,  that  which  is  further  away). 

Marie  et  Annette  sont  venues :  celle-ci  portait  une  nouvelle  robe 
blanche;  celle-la  portait  une  vieille  robe  verte,  Marie  and  Annette 
have  come;  the  latter  wore  a  new  white  dress,  the  former  wore  an  old 
green  dress. 

Questions.  1.  Voici  deux  crayons:  Aimez-vous  mieux  celui- 
ci  ou  celui-la?  2.  Voila  deux  plumes.  Aimez-vous  mieux 
celle-ci  ou  celle-la? 


198  The  Elements  of  French 

186.   Connaitre*  (koneitr),  to  know,  he  acquainted  with, 

connais  (kone)  coimaissons  (koneso) 

connais  (kone)  connaissez  (konese) 

connait  (kone)  connaissent  (kones) 

Connaitre  =  know,  in  the  sense  of  he  acquainted  with, 
Savoir  = /cnoT/;,  as  a  fact. 

Je  connais  Charles,  I  know  Charles, 

Je  sais  son  nom,  /  know  his  name. 

Je  sais  o^  il  demeure,  /  know  where  he  lives. 

Conjuguez.  1.  Je  connais  celui-la,  tu  connais  celui-la,  etc. 
2.  Je  ne  le  connais  pas,  tu  ne  le  connais  pas,  etc. 

I.  EN   OMNIBUS 

Pour  bien  connaitre  Paris,  il  est  recommande  aux  voya- 
geurs  de  monter  en  fiacre,  ou  a  Timperiale  d'un  omnibus. 
Ceux  qui  prennent  le  Metro  ont  Tavantage  d'arriver  un  peu 
plus  vite,  mais  ils  n^ont  pas  celui  de  bien  voir.  Enf  attendant 
notre  omnibus,  nous  prenons  des  numeros  a  la  station.  Au 
bout  de  quelques  minutes,  un  omnibus  s'arrete  devant  nous. 
Le  conducteur  crie:  ^'Deux  places  a  Timperiale,  une  place  a 
rinterieur,  et  une  place  de  plate-forme.^'  Comme  nous  sommes 
ceux  qui  avons  les  premiers  numeros,  nous  entrons  dans  la 
voiture.  Ceux  qui  ont  des  numeros  au-dessus  des  notres 
attendent  Tomnibus  suivant.     {A  suivre.) 

II.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Connaissez-vous  Paris?  2.  Com- 
ment peut-on  bien  voir  Paris?  3.  Est-ce  que  Ton  voit  bien  a 
rimperiale  d'un  omnibus?  4.  Comment  est-ce  que  Ton  pent 
arriver  plus  vite?  5.  Ou  prend-on  les  numeros?  6.  Combien 
de  temps  faut-il  attendre  Fomnibus?  7.  Qu^est-ce  que  le  con- 
ducteur crie?  8.  Aimez-vous  les  places  a  Tinterieur  ou  a  Tim- 
periale?     9.  Que  font  ceux  qui  ont  les  premiers  numeros? 

*  Observe  that  this  verb,  as  well  as  naitre,  paraitre,  and  a  few  others,  has  a 
circumflex  over  the  i  whenever  the  i  precedes  a  t. 
t  Do  not  translate,  or  use  while. 


Lesson  103  199 

III.  Tradviisez.  1.  Those  who  take  the  Metro  do  not 
always  arrive  first.  2.  In  the  first  place,  the  Metro  is  often 
pretty  far  away  (ecarte).  3.  Then,  it  does  not  always  go  per- 
fectly straight  (tout  droit).  4.  In  short,  we  prefer  the  advan- 
tages of  the  omnibus  to  those  of  the  Metro.  5.  Here  we 
are  at  the  station;  let  us  not  forget  our  numbers.  6.  '^I'U 
take  this  one,''  says  Charles.  7.  *^I'll  take  that  one,''  says 
PhiHp.  8.  The  former  is  (the)  number  89.  9.  The  latter  is 
(the)  number  90.  10.  When  the  omnibus  stops  before  us,  the 
conductor  cries,  '^Those  who  have  numbers  below  93  may 
(can)  enter.     Those  who  have  numbers  above  93  will  wait." 


LESSON   103    (CENT  TROISlfiME   LEgON) 

DEMONSTRATIVE   PRONOUNS  —  Continued 

VOCABULAIRE 

alors  (aloir),  adv.,  then  echange  (e/ais),  m.,  exchange 

coin  (kwe),  m.,  corner  jusqu^a  (3ysk  a),  up  to;  until 

controle  (kotroil),  m.,  examination  ordre  (ordr),  m.,  order 

(or  taking)  of  tickets  quant  a  (kat  a),  as  for 

contrdleur  (kotroloeir),  m.,  ticket  ex~  section  (seksjS),  f.,  section;  zone 

aminer;  inspector  se  fait  (sa  fe),  is  made 
dechirer  (dejire),  to  tear 

187.   Ceci  and  cela  (familiarly  contracted  into  ga)  are  used 
in  a  general  sense,  and  not  to  refer  to  a  definite  object. 

1.  J*aime  mieux  ceci  que  cela,  /  prefer  this  to  that. 

2.  Faut-il  faire  comme  ceci  ou  comme  cela?  Must  one  do  tins  way 

or  that  way? 

I.   Fill  in  the  blanks  with  ceci  or  cela:     1.  Qui  vous  a 

raconte ?     2.  n'est    pas    vrai.     3.  Quant    a je 

n'en  sais  rien.     4.  se  fait  sur  Tordre  de  leurs  officiers. 

5.  Qu'est-ce    que    vous    dites    a ?     6.  ficoutez ,    s'il 

vous    plait.     7.  va    sans    dire.     8.  Je    sais .     9.  On 

pent  6tre  sur  de . 

Note.     Ceci  and  cela  are  never  used  as  adjectives.     Instead  use  ce  .  .  . 
-ci  and  ce  .  .  .  -li.    Ex.    Ce  livre-ci,  This  hook. 


200  The  Elements  of  French 

II.  Exercice.  Fill  in  the  blanks  with  demonstrative  pro- 
nouns.    1.  Voici    nos    journaux    et que    vous    avez    lus. 

2.  Voila  vos  lettres  et qu'il  a  ecrites.     3.  J'aime  mieux 

cette  robe  que de  Marie.     4.  Ce  complet  est-il  le  votre  ou 

de  Philippe?   5.  Ces  vetements  sont-ils  les  miens  ou 

de  notre  ami?     6.   Ces  robes  sont-elles  les  miennes  ou 

qu'Annette  a  portees?     7.  Ce  pardessus  est-il  le  sien  ou 

de  Jean?     8.  Voici  deux  jeunes  filles:  s'appelle  Marie, 

mais  s'appelle   Annette.      9.   Voila    deux    gargons: • 

s'appelle  Jean,  s'appelle  Charles. 

III.  EN   OMNIBUS  —  Suite 

Tout  a  rheure  le  conducteur  nous  demande: 

Ou  allez-vous,  messieurs? 

A  St.  Germain  des  Pres,  probablement.  ^ 

Deux  sections,*  cela  fait  trois  sous.     Une  section  ne 

serait  que  deux  sous. 

Nous  le  payons.     lis  nous  donne  en  echange  un  petit  billet. 

Dans  quelques  minutes,  un  controleur  monte,  regarde  bien 
nos  billets,  et  en  dechire  un  coin  pour  montrer  qu'il  les  a  con- 
troles.     C'est  comme  cela  que  se  fait  le  controle. 

IV.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Qu'est-ce  que  le  conducteur  nous 
demande?  2.  Quand  nous  le  demande-t-il ?  3.  Ou  allons- 
nous?  4.  Combien  faut-il  payer  une  section?  5.  Combien 
faut-il  payer  deux  sections?  6.  Qu^est-ce  qu'il  nous  donne  en 
echange?  7.  Qui  est-ce  qui  monte  dans  notre  voiture?  8. 
Est-ce  qu'il  regarde  nos  billets?  9.  Qu 'est-ce  qu'il  en  fait? 
10.  Pourquoi  le  fait-il?     11.  Qui  fait  le  controle  des  billets? 

V.  Traduisez.  1.  We  ask  (d)  the  conductor,  ''Does  this 
street  car  go  to  St.  Germain  des  Pres,  or  does  that  one  go 
there?'^  2.  He  answers  (to)  us,  ''Take  this  one;  do  not  take 
that  one.  3.  That  one  is  going  to  the  Gare  d'Orleans.^' 
4.  We  take  our  places  on  top  of  the  tramway.     5.  Then  the 

*  The  zone  system  is  used  for  Paris  tramway  and  bus  fares. 


Lesson  10  4.  201 

conductor  comes  (to)  sell  us  our  tickets.  6.  ^What  is  the 
price  (of  them)?'^  we  ask  him  (lui).  7.  ^^That  depends/^  he 
replies  (replies  he).  8.  ^^If  you  were  going  to  St.  Germain  des 
Pres,  that  would  be  two  sections,  or  three  sous.^'  9.  *'But  we 
are  only  going  as  far  as  the  Opera.'^  10.  ^That  would  be  only 
one  section,  gentlemen,  or  two  sous.  11.  Here  are  your  tickets. 
It  is  necessary  to  keep  them  for  the  inspector.^'  12.  '^Is  that 
man  the  inspector?'^  13.  ^'No,  that  one  is  not  the  inspector; 
it  is  this  one.     14.  He  will  look  at  your  tickets,  presently.'^ 

VI.  Exercice  Oral  ou  Ecrit.  1.  Look  at  this  one  (m.).  2. 
Do  not  look  at  that  one  (/.).  3.  This  one  (/.)  is  prettier  than 
that  one  (/.).  4.  These  (m.)  are  larger  than  those  (m.).  5. 
Tell  me  that,  please.  6.  I  prefer  this  to  that.  7.  Here  is  my 
umbrella;  where  is  Mary's?  8.  My  hat  is  smaller  than  John's. 
9.  This  coat  is  larger  than  the  one  which  you  have. 


LESSON   104   (CENT   QUATRIEME  LEgON) 
REVISION 

I.  Conjugate,  perfect  tense:  1.  Je  ne  parle  guere.  2.  Est- 
ce  que  je  ne  trouve  rien?     3.  Je  n^ai  plus  rien  a  dire. 

II.  Conjuguez.  1.  Je  n'ai  qu'a  passer  a  gauche,  tu  n^as 
qu'a  passer  a  gauche,  etc.  2.  Je  ne  connais  personne,  tu  ne 
connais  personne,  etc.  3.  Je  ne  conduis  jamais,  tu  ne  conduis 
jamais,  etc.  4.  Je  connais  mieux  celui-ci  que  celui-la,  tu  con- 
nais mieux  celui-ci  que  celui-la,  etc. 

III.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Allez-vous  sou  vent  au  theatre? 
2.  Quelles  places  prenez-vous?  3.  Quel  est  le  prix  des  fauteuils 
d'orchestre?  4.  Ou  est-ce  que  Ton  vend  a  bon  marche  les 
billets  d'auteur?  5.  Combien  de  supplement  faut-il  payer? 
6.  Qui  est-ce  qui  nous  montre  les  loges?  7.  Est-ce  un  homme 
ou  une  femme?  8.  Est-ce  qu'il  faut  lui  donner  un  pourboire? 
9.  Combien  de  fois  est-ce  que  Ton  frappe  pour  annoncer  le 


202  The  Elements  of  French 

commencement  de  la  representation?  10.  Ou  prenons-nous 
des  numeros?  11.'  Qui  controle  les  numeros?  12.  Oil  mon- 
tons-nous?  13.  Qu'est-ce  que  le  conducteur  nous  donne? 
14.  Qui  est-ce  qui  controle  les  billets?     15.  Qu^en  fait-il? 

IV.  Traduisez.  1.  We  have  never  seen  any  more  amus- 
ing play  than  le  Voyage  de  M.  Perrichon.  2.  Unfortunately, 
everybody  goes  (to)  see  it,  and  the  ticket  window  does 
not  open  until  (only  opens  at)  8:10.  3.  Therefore  {par 
consequent),  it  is  necessary  to  stand  in  line  for  a  full  (good) 
half  hour.  4.  A  cousin  of  mine  will  wait  with  me,  but  we 
have  scarcely  enough  time.  5.  Yesterday  evening  we  ate 
nothing.  6.  Then  we  went  to  their  house,  and  nobody  was 
there.  7.  I  never  like  to  (a)  hurry  too  much.  8.  Nobody 
ever  looked  at  us  as  much  as  those  gentlemen  who  were  seated 
(assis)  in  front.  9.  Those  who  take  the  Metro  will  pay  five 
cents  (for)  their  first  class  tickets  {billets  de  premiere).  10.  I 
like  these  horses  better  than  Philip's.  11.  Do  you  prefer 
these  flowers,  or  those?  12.  This  one  (m.)  is  mine,  but  that 
one  (m.)  is  yours.  13.  This  one  (/.)  is  hers,  but  those  (/.)  are 
theirs.  14.  I  know  that,  but  I  had  never  heard  this.  15.  Tell 
me  that,  if  you  please. 


LESSON   105   (CENT  CINQUIEME  LEgON) 

RELATIVE   PRONOUNS 

VOCABULAIRE 

aqueduc  (akodyk),  m.,  aqueduct  etablissement   (etablisma),   m.,  es- 

avocat  (avoka),  m.,  lawyer  tablishment,  institution 

canal    (kanal),    m.,    canal  etudiant  (etydja),  m.,  student 

Plur.,  canaux  (kano)  futur  (fytyir),  ad].,  future 

celebre  (selsbr),  adj.,  celebrated  illustre  (ilystr),  adj.,  illustrious 
cependant  (sapddd),  conj.,  however     ingenieur  (esenjoeir),   m.,  engineer 

composer  (kopose),  to  compose  instruire  (estrqiir),  to  instruct  (like 

droit  (drw a),  m.,  law;  right  conduire);   s'instruire,   to  he  in- 

enseigner  (dsejie),  to  teach  strucied 


Lesson  105  203 

institut  (estity),  m.,  institute  poly  technique     (politeknik),    poly^ 

lycee  (Use),  m.,  high  school  technical 

machine  a  vapeur  (majin  a  vapoeir),  port  (poir),  m.,  port;  harbor 

f .,  steam  engine  j:endez-vous  (rade  vu),  m.,  meeting; 

medecin  (metss),  m.,  doctor  appointment 

medecine  (metsin),  f.,  medicine  reunir  (reyniir),  to  unite;  se  reunir, 

membre  (maibr),  m.,  member  to  be  gathered 

mentionner  (masjone),  to  mention  savant  (sava),  adj.,  learned 

nombre  (noibr),  m.,  number  scientifique  (sjatifik),  scientific 

188.  Ou  (u)  means  where^  in  which,  at  which. 

La  boite  o^  il  a  mis  le  papier  a  lettre,  The  box  in  which  he  put  the 
writing  paper. 

Note  also  d'ou,  meaning  from  which,  etc. 

189.  Dont  (d5)  means  of  which,  of  whom,  whose, 

1.  Le  journal  dont  je  vous  ai  parle,  The  newspaper  of  which  I  spoke 

to  you. 

2.  Les  dames  dont  nous  avons  visite  la  maison,  The  ladies  whose 

house  we  (have)  visited. 

3.  Voila  quelque  chose  dont  nous  avons  besoin,  That  is  something 

which  we  need  (literally  of  which  we  have  need) .  • 

Exercice.     Remplacez  les  tirets  par   (d)'ou  ou  dont:      1. 

C^est  quelque   chose j^ai   peur.     2.  L'ecole   nous 

etudions.     3.  Ce  gargon vous  etes  Fami.    4.  Le  lac 

nous  trouvons  des  poissons.     5    La  ville vous  demeurez. 

6.  II  m^a  donne  ce j 'avals  besoin.     7.  II  nous  a  envoye 

des   fleurs, il    en    avait   trop.     8.  La    boutique vous 

venez. 

190.  Recapitulation.  Qui  (ki)  as  relative,  ivho,  which,  that, 
is  used  as  the  subject  of  a  verb,  and,  if  referring  to  persons, 
as  the  object  of  a  preposition. 

Que  (ko),  whom,  which,  that,  is  used  as  the  object  of  a  verb. 

1.  C*est  Pargent  qui  manque,  It  is  m/)ney  which  is  loA^king. 

2.  Voici  les  soldats  qui  sont  arrives,  Here  are  the  soldiers  who  have 

arrived. 

3.  Voici  Phomme  a  qui  j^ai  donne  mon  billet.  Here  is  the  man  to 

whom  I  have  given  my  ticket. 


204  The  Elements  of  French 

4.  Ce  sont  des  camarades  que  nous  avons  rencontres,   They  are 

(some)  comrades  whom  we  (have)  met. 

5.  Voila  les  choses  que  votre  ami  a  oubliees,  Those  are  the  things 

which  your  friend  {hsis)  forgot. 

I.     AU    QUARTIER  LATIN* 

Andre  et  Julien  se  donnent  rendez-vous  au  quartier  savant 
de  Paris,  dont  ils  admirent  les  etablissements  scientifiques. 
On  y  trouve  FInstitut  de  France,  ou  se  reunissent  les  cinq 


Le  Quartier  Latin  —  Le  Pantheon,  Vu  du  Boulevard  St.  Michel 

Academies  composees  des  hommes  les  plus  illustres;  aussi  les 
ecoles  de  premier  ordre  que  la  France  ouvre  a  ses  enfants; 
rficole  normale  superieure,  d'ou  sortent  les  professeurs  qui 
enseigneront  dans  les  lycees;  Tficole  polytechnique,  oil  s'in- 
struisent  les  officiers  qui  commanderont  les  regiments  fran- 
cais  et  les  futurs  ingenieursf  qui  feront  pour  la  France  des 

*  Adapted  from  Bruno's  le  Tour  de  la  France  par  deux  enfants. 

t  Adjectives  denoting  distinctive  qualities  regularly  follow  the  noun. 
Adjectives  denoting  essential  qualities,  or  forming  one  idea  with  the  noiin, 
regularly  precede  the  noun.     See  Appendix,  §§  247,  249. 


Lesson  105  205 

travaux  difficiles,  ponts,  aqueducs,  canaux,  ports,  machines  a 
vapeur.  C'est  encore  dans  ce  quartier  que  se  trouve  Tficole 
de  medecine  ou  se  preparent  un  grand  nombre  des  medecins 
frangais,  et  Tficole  de  droit,  d'ou  sortent  beaucoup  d^avocats. 

II.  Exercice   Oral.     1.  Dites  les  noms  des  deux  enfants. 

2.  Ou  est-ce  qu'ils  se  donnent  rendez-vous?  3.  Quels  ^tab- 
lissements  y  admirent-ils?  4.  Donnez  les  noms  de  qilelques 
etablissements  scientifiques  qui  se  trouvent  a  Paris.  5.  Com- 
bien  d^ Academies  y  a-t-il  a  FInstitut  de  France?  6.  Qui  sont 
les  membres  de  ces  Academies?  7.  Donnez  les  noms  de  quel- 
ques  ecoles  superieures  qui  se  trouvent  au  quartier  savant. 
8.  De  quelle  ecole  sortent  beaucoup  de  professeurs?  9.  Ou 
les  professeurs  enseigneront-ils?  10.  Dans  quelle  ecole  s'in- 
struisent  les  officiers  frangais?  11.  Ou  s'instruisent  les  futurs 
ingenieurs  de  la  France?  12.  Quels  travaux  difficiles  feront 
ces  ingenieurs?  13.  Ou  s'instruisent  les  medecins  de  la  France? 
14.  D'ou  sortent  les  avocats  frangais? 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  There  are  two  brothers  whose  names 
are  Andre  and  Julian.  2.  They  arrive  in  the  learned  quar- 
ter  of   Paris,   where   there   are   many  scientific   institutions. 

3.  For  {par)  example,  there  is  the  Institute  of  France,  whose 
five  Academies  are  very  celebrated.  4.  Most  of  the  illus- 
trious men  in  {de)  France  are  members  of  this  Institute.  5. 
However,  there  have  been  a  few  illustrious  Frenchmen,  like 
the  great  Moliere,  who  have  never  been  received  {regu)  into  it. 
6.  France  opens  to  its  children  many  first  class  schools,  of 
which  we  shall  mention  only  two  or  three.  7.  First,  there  is 
the  Superior  Normal  School,  the  students  of  which  will  be  the 
teachers  in  the  (of  the)  French  high  schools.  8.  Then  there  is 
the  Polytechnic  School,  from  which  come  the  great  French 
engineers.  9.  It  is  these  engineers  whose  bridges,  aqueducts, 
and  canals  are  so  celebrated.  10.  It  is  also  {encore)  the  learned 
quarter  where  the  future  doctors  of  France  are  instructed. 
11.  The  School  of  Law  has  many  students,  because  in  France 
there  are  many  lawyers. 


206  The  EleJiients  of  French 

LESSON   106    (CENT  SIXifiME  LEgON) 
RELATIVE  PRONOUNS  —  Continued 

191.  The  Relative  Pronoun  lequeL 
Singulier  Pluriel 

Masc.    lequel  (lakel)  lesquels  (lekel) 

Fern,      laquelle  (lakel)  lesquelles  (lekel),  which  (sometimes  wj/io,  that) 

Lequel,  laquelle,  etc.,  are  used  as  the  object  of  a  preposition,  to  refer 
to  things  or  animals,  generally,  not  to  persons,     (See,  however,  §192.) 

1.  Void  les  fourchettes  avec  lesquelles  nous  avons  mange,   Here 

are  the  forks  with  which  we  have  eaten. 

2.  on  est  la  table  sur  laquelle  j^ai  mis  la  regie?  Where  is  the  table 

on  which  I  put  the  ruler? 

3.  La  prison  dans  laquelle  (or  ot)  il  etait.  The  prison  in  which  he 

was. 

(a)  Observe  that  de  and  a  contract  regularly  with  lequel: 

de  +  lequel  =  duquel  de  +  lesquels  =  desquels 

de  +  lesquelles  =  desquelles 

a  +  lequel  =  auquel  a  +  lesquels  =  auxquels 

a  +  lesquelles  =  auxquelles 

1.  Voila  le  tableau  auquel  je  pensais.  There  is  the  picture  of  which 

I  was  thinking. 

2.  n  a  ecrit  beaucoup  de  livres,  au  nombre  desquels  se  range 

celui-ci,  He  has  written  many  hooks,  among  which  (in  the  num- 
ber of  which)  this  is  one  (is  ranked) . 

192.  Lequel,  laquelle,  etc.,  are  sometimes  used  instead  of 
qui  or  que,  to  avoid  ambiguity.  • 

1.  Le  fils  de  la  dame,  laquelle  est  en  bas,  The  son  of  the  lady  who 

{i.e.,  the  lady)  is  .down  stairs. 

2.  Le  fils  de  la  dame,  lequel  est  en  bas.  The  lady's  son  who  {i.e., 

the  son)  is  down  stairs. 

193.  Qui  (ki)  is  used  as  the  object  of  a  preposition  to  denote 
persons. 

1.  Comment  s'appelle  Phomme  a   qui  vous  parlez?  What  is  the 

name  of  the  man  to  whom  you  are  speaking? 

2.  C*e«t  le  pere  de  qui  (or  dont)  il  est  le  fils,  It  is  the  father  of  whom 

he  is  the  son  (or,  whose  son  he  is).     (See  §  190.) 


Lesson  106  207 

194.  Dont  can  never  be  used  to  refer  to  a  noun  governed  by 
a  preposition. 

La  femme  au  neveu  de  qui  (or  de  laquelle)  vous  avez  envoye  ce 
cadeau,  The  lady  to  whose  nephew  you  have  sent  this  present. 

Exercice.     Remplacez  les  tirets  par  lequel  ou  qui:     1.  Le 

lac  pres il  habite.     2.  Le  quartier  de elle  est  venue. 

3.  L'argent  de  Mme  Dupont est  en  bas.     4.  M.  Lemaitre 

avec vous  etes  arrive.     5.  Mme  Robert  est  la  femme  de 

vous  parliez  tout  a  Theure.     6.  Les  couteaux nous 

avons  besoin. 

195.  The  relative  pronoun  what  when  used  after  a  preposition 
is  regularly  translated  by  quoi. 

1.  Voil^  a  quoi  je  pensais,  That  is  what  I  was  thinking  of. 

2.  Voici  de  quoi  j*ai  peur,  Here  is  what  I  am  afraid  of^ 

196.  The  relative  pronoun  what  when  used  with  a  verb  (as 
subject  or  object)  is  translated  into  French  by  ce  +  a  relative. 

1.  Je  regrette  infiniment  ce  qui  est  arrive,  /  regret  infinitely  what 

has  happened. 

2.  H  va  regarder  ce  que  vous  lui  avez  montre,  He  is  going  to  look 

at  what  you  have  shown  him. 

3.  Ce  dont  nous  avions  besoin,  What  we  needed  (literally  that  of 

which) . 

Note.     All  that  is  translated  by  tout  ce  qui,  tout  ce  que,  etc. 

Tout  ce  que  vous  m^avez  dit  est  tres   interessant.  All  that  you 
(have)  told  me  is  very  interesting. 

I.  Exercice.     Remplacez  les  tirets  par  ce  qui,  ce  que,  etc. 

1.  Racontez-moi   il   a   fait.     2.  Expliquez-lui   est 

arrive.     3.  Tout  je  vois  d'ici  m^etonne.     4.  J^aime  tout 

m' amuse. 

II.  Exercice  Oral  ou  Ecrit.     L  The  yellow  pen  with  which 
you  wrote.     2.  The  house  in  which  you  live   (Two  ways). 

3.  The   (young)   girl  to  whose  brother  you  were  speaking. 

4.  Mr.  Lebrun's  daughter  who  is  waiting  for  them.    5.  Here  is 


208  The  Elements  of  French 

the  omnibus  which  we  are  going  to  take.  6.  The  chair  on  which 
he  put  his  hat.  7.  Tell  me  what  he  says  about  it,  please. 
8.  Do  you  know  what  has  happened?  9.  This  is  all  that  there 
is.     10.  That  is  all  that  there  will  be. 


LESSON   107   (CENT  SEPTIEME  LEgON) 

RELATIVE   PRONOUNS  —  Continued 

VOCABULAIRE 

aboutir    (a)    (abutiir),    to   come   to;      point  (pwe),  m.,  point 

meet  pore  (poir),  m.,  hog 

centaine  (saten),  f.,  (about)  100  reseau  (rezo),  m.,  system;  network 

chou  (Ju),  m.,  cabbage  se  rappeler  (sa  raple),  to  remember 

Plur.,  choux  (J*u)  salade  (salad),  f.,  salad 

cote  (kote),  m.,  side;  direction  troupeau  (trupo),  m.,  herd 

empiler  (apile),  to  pile  up  veau  (vo),  m.,  calf 
gibier  (sibje),  m.,  game  Plur.,  veaux  (vo) 

'halle  (al),  f.,  market-place  voie  (vwa),  f.,  way 

la-bas  (la  ba),  adv.,  down  there  volaille  (volaij),  f.,  fowl;  poultry 

motte  (mot),  f.,  lump  a  cote  de,  beside 

nourrir  (niiriir),  to  feed  se  rendre  a,  to  betake  one^s  self  (  or 
foire  (fwair),  f.,  fair  go)  to 

millier  (milje),  m.,  thousand  servir  a,  to  be  good  for,  be  of  use  for 

I.  CONVERSATION   D»ANDRE   ET   DE    JULIEN* 

Quelle  est  cette  foire  que  nous  voyons  la-bas? 

C'est  ce  qu'on  appelle  les  Halles. 

Ce  qui  m'etonne,  c'est  de  voir  tant  de  monde. 

C'est  que  (because)  tout  le  monde  s'y  rend  pour  acheter 

des  provisions.  Regardez  ces  montagnes  de  choux  et  de  sa- 
lades,  a  cote  desquelles  se  trouvent  des  mottes  de  beurre  em- 
pilees  par  centaines  et  par  milUers!  .  .  .  Pour  nourrir  Paris 
pendant  un  an,  il  faut  deux  cent  mille  boeufs  ou  vaches,  cent 
mille  veaux,  un  million  de  moutons  et  cent  mille  pores,  sans 
compter  la  volaille,  le  poisson  et  le  gibier. 

Mais  ou  trouve-t-on  tons  ces  troupeaux? 

*  Suggested  by  Bruno's  le  Tour  de  la  France  par  deux  enfants. 


Une  Scene  des  Halles 


Lesson  107  209 

Ces  troupeaux  arrivent  a  Paris  de  tous  les  points  de  la 

France.  Voici  a  quoi  servent  les  sept  chemins  de  fer  dont 
"Paris  est  le  point  terminus.  II  y  a  aussi  la  navigation  de  la 
Seine  a  laquelle  aboutissent  les  reseaux  des  canaux  frangais. 
Ce  sont  les  deux  principales  voies  par  lesquelles  les  provisions 
lui  arrivent. 

II.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Qu'est-ce  que  c'est?  2.  Est-ce  bien 
une  foire  que  Ton  voit  la-bas?  3.  Est-ce  qu'il  y  a  beaucoup 
de  monde  qui  va  aux  Halles?  4.  Qu^est-ce  que  Ton  y  achete? 
5.  Quels  legumes  y  vend-on*?  6.  Quelles  especes  de  viande 
y  vend-on?  7.  D^ou  viennent  les  boeufs  et  les  moutons? 
8.  De  quelles  parties  de  la  France?  9.  Combien  de  beurre  y 
a-t-il  aux  Halles?  10.  Combien  de  veaux  faut-il  pour  nourrir 
Paris  pendant  un  an?  11.  Combien  de  pores?  12.  Combien 
de  chemins  de  fer  y  a-t-il  a  Paris? 

III.  Traduisez.     1.  Tell  me  what  they  call  that  fair, 

if  you  please.     2.  What  you  see  down  there  is  called 

les  Halles.  3.  What  astonishes  me  is  that  there  are  not 
more  people  there  at  this  hour.  4.  Ordinarily,  at  six  o'clock 
in  the  morning  one  can  count  by  thousands  the  people  who 
go  there  to  buy  provisions  of  all  sorts.  5.  Look  at  the 
mountains  of  butter,  cabbage,  and  salads,  which  are  under  a 
single  roof.     6.  There  are  also  great  provisions  of  beef  and  pork, 

without  counting  poultry  and  fish.     7.  But  how  can  these 

provisions  be  transported  to  Paris?     8.  It  is  necessary 

to  remember  (know)  that  Paris  is  the  terminal  point  of  seven 
systems  of  railroads,  of  which  the  Orleans,  for  example,  is  one 
of  the  most  important.  9.  The  Seine,  on  which  Paris  is  sit- 
uated, is  the  river  into  which  run  (aboutissent)  many  of  the 
French  canals.  10.  It  is  these  two  systems  —  the  railroads 
and  the  canals  —  by  which  200,000  oxen  and  cows,  not  to 
mention  (without  counting)  1,000,000  sheep,  are  transported 
to  the  capital  every  year  (tous  les  ans), 

♦Pronounced  (vat  5). 


210  The  Elements  of  French 

LESSON   108   (CENT  HUITIEME  LEgON) 
INTERROGATIVE   PRONOUNS 

197.  Invariable.  Variable. 

qiii?  (ki),  who?    whom?  lequel  (bkel) 

que?  (ka),  what?  laquelle  (lake!) 

quoi?  (kwa),  what?  lesquels   (lekel),  which? 

which  one{s)f     what  one{s)f 
lesquelles  (lekel) 
Note.     Observe  also  the  forms  compounded  with  est-ce : 

qu*est-ce  que?  (k  e  s  ka),  what? 
qui  est-ce  qui?  (ki  e  s  ki),  who? 
qui  est-ce  que?  (ki  e  s  ka),  whom? 

198.  Use  of  Interrogative  Pronouns  (Emploi  des  Pronoms 
Interrogatifs) . 

(a)  Who?  =  qui  (est-ce  qui)? 

1.  Qui  est  ce  monsieur?  Who  is  this  gentleman? 

2.  Qui  est-ce  qui  t*a  envoye  a  cette  heure?  Who  (has)  sent  you  at 

this  hour? 

Note.     Quel  (kel)  is  often  used  with  etre  to  mean  Who? 
Quel  (or  qui)  est  ce  monsieur?  Who  is  this  gentleman? 

(b)  Whom?  =  qui?  or  qui  est-ce  que? 

1.  Qui  demandez-vous?  Whom  are  you 

asking  for?  ^  Object  of  verb. 

2.  Qui  est-ce  que  vous  demandez?  Whom 

are  you  asking  for? 

3.  Chez  qui  peut-on  avoir  des  cravates? 

At  whose  store  can  one  get  cravats? 

4.  Chez  qui  est-ce  que  Pon  pent  avoir  des 

cravates?  At  whose  store  can  we  get 
cravats? 


>  Object  of  preposition. 


(c)  What?  =  qu'est-ce  qui?  (subject  of  verb);  que?  or 
qu'est-ce  que?  (object  of  verb);  quoi?  (object  of  preposition, 
or  separate  from  verb). 


Lesson  108  211 

1.  Qu*est-ce  qui  vous  interesse?  What  interests  you? 

2.  Je  sais  ce  qui  vous  interesse,  /  know  what  interests  you. 

3.  Qu^est-ce  que  vous  dites  la?  What  are  you  saying  there? 

4.  Je  sais  ce  que  vous  dites  la,  /  know  what  you  are  saying  there. 

5.  Qu*est-ce  qu^un  avion?  What  is  an  airplane? 

6.  Je  sais  ce  que  c^est  qu*un  avion,  /  know  what  an  airplane  is. 

7.  Que  dira-t-on?  What  will  people  say? 

8.  Je  sais  ce_qu*on  dira,  /  know  what  people  will  say. 

Note.     Observe  also  the  phrase  Qu'est-ce  que  c*est  que?  What  is? 

Qu*est-ce  que  c'est  que  ce  journal?     What  is  this  newspaper? 

9.  A  quoi  pensez-vous?  What  are  you  thinking  qf? 

10.  Quoit    Vous  arrivez  deja!  What!  You  arrive  already! 

(d)  The  pronoun  lequel?  laquelle?  etc.  is  translated  which? 
(in  all  constructions). 

1.  Lequel  de  ces  messieurs  avez-vous  salue?  Which  one  of  these 

gentlemen  did  you  how  to? 

2.  Duquel  de  ces  eleves  parlez-vous?  Of  which  one  of  these  pupils 

do  you  speak? 
Note.     When  which  is  an  adjective,  translate  by  quel. 

Quel  billet  avez-vous  achete?  Which  ticket  did  you  buy? 

199.   Whose  is  translated  by 

(a)  a  qui?  to  denote  possession. 

A  qui  est  ce  chien?  Whose  dog  is  this? 

(b)  de  qui?  to  denote  relationship. 

De  qui  est-elle  la  femme?  Whose  wife  is  she? 

Exercice.  Write  sentences  using  the  following  words  and  ex- 
pressions: 1.  Qui?  2.  Qui  est-ce  qui?  3.  Quel?  =  Who?  4. 
Quel?  =  Which?  5.  Quel  ?=  What?  6.  Qui  est-ce  que?  (Ob- 
ject of  verb).  7.  Qui  est-ce  que?  (Object  of  preposition). 
8.  Qu^est-ce  qui?  9.  Que?  10.  Qu'est-ce  que?  11.  Quoi? 
12.  Ce  que.  13.  Ce  qui.  14.  Qu'est-ce  que  c'est  que?  15. 
Avec  qui?  16.  Avec  quoi?  17.  Laquelle?  18.  Lesquels?  19. 
Lesquelles?      20.  Quelle? 


212  The  Elements  of  French 

I.  Traduisez.  1.  I  know  what  you  are  looking  at.  2. 
What  you  are  looking  at  (it)  is  the  market-place  down  there. 
3.  What!  It  is  the  first  time  that  you  have  seen  it?  4.  What 
astonishes  you  so  much?  5.  Is  it  the  people  who  interest  you? 
6.  Yes,  but  that  is  not  all.  7.  Who  is  going  to  eat  all  those 
mountains  of  cabbage  and  salad?  8.  To  whom  does  all  this 
butter  belong?  9.  Look!  What  is  that?  10.  There  are  some 
sheep  that  have  just  arrived  {viennent  d'arriver)  by  railway. 
11.  Which  one?     The  Ouest-fitat  or  the  Nord? 


LESSON   109   (CENT  NEUVIEME  LEgON) 

INTERROGATIVE   PRONOUNS  —  Continued 

VOCABULAIRE 

ajouter  (asute),  to  add  lourd  (luir),  adj.,  heavy 

auberge  (obers),  f.,  inn  poupee  (pupe),  f.,  doll 

envoyer  (avwaje),  irreg.,  to  send         envoyer  chercher,  to  send  for 

I  COSETTE  * 

Mon  enfant,  c'est  bien  lourd  pour  vous,  ce  que  vous 

avez  la. 

Oui,  monsieur. 

Petite,  quel  age  as-tu? 

Huit  ans,  monsieur. 

Comment  t^appelles-tu? 

Cosette. 

Qui  est-ce  qui  t'a  envoyee  a  cette  heure  chercher  de 

Teau  dans  le  bois? 

C^est  madame  Thenardier. 

Qu'est-ce  qu^elle  fait,  ta  madame  Thenardier? 

Elle  tient  T auberge. 

Est-ce  que  tu  es  seule? 

Oui,  monsieur  .  .  .C'est  a  dire,  il  y  a  deux  petites  filles. 

— — Quelles  petites  filles? 

♦Adapted  from  Victor  Hugo's  les  Miserables. 


Lesson  109  213 

Ponine  et  Zelma. 

Qu'est-ce  que  c^est  que  Ponine  et  Zelma? 

Ce  sont  les  demoiselles  de  madame  Thenardier. 

Et  que  font-elles,  celles-la? 

Oh!  elles  ont  de  belles  poupees.     Elles  jouent,   elles 

s^amusent. 

Et  toi? 

Moi,  je  travaille. 

II.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Comment  s'appelait  la  petite  fille? 
2.  Quel  age  avait-elle?  3.  Est-ce  que  c^etait  lourd  ce  qu'elle 
portait?  4.  Qui  Taidait  a  le  porter?  5.  Qui  est-ce  qui  Tavait 
envoyee  chercher  de  Teau?  6.  Ou  etait-elle  allee  chercher  de 
Teau?  7.  Qu^est-ce  que  madame  Thenardier  faisait?  8.  Est- 
ce  qu'elle  avait  des  enfants?  9.  Combien  d'enfants  avait-elle? 
10.  Est-ce  que  c'etaient  des  fils  ou  des  fiUes?  11.  Comment 
s'appelaient-elles?  12.  Avec  quoi  jouaient-elles?  13.  Laquelle 
des  trois  petites  filles  s'amusait  le  moins?  14.  Laquelle  des 
trois  petites  filles  travaillait  le  plus?  15.  Lesquelles  des  petites 
filles  avaient  des  poupees? 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  What  was  the  name  of  the  little  girl 
whom  Jean  Valjean  met  in  the  woods?  2.  How  old  was 
she,  and  how  old  was  Jean  Valjean?  3.  Who  had  sent  her 
into  the  woods  after  water?  4.  At  what  time  of  the  night  had 
Madame  Thenardier  sent  her  after  water?  5.  Who  carried 
the  water  for  her,  and  did  he  find  it  heavy?  6.  Where  (jusqu^ 
ou)  did  he  carry  it?  7.  To  whom  did  the  inn  belong?  8. 
Whose  daughters  were  Ponine  and  Zelma?  9.  Were  the 
daughters  ugly  or  pretty?  10.  What  amused  them  when  they 
were  at  home?  11.  What  amused  Cosette  when  she  was  work- 
ing? 12.  Which  worked  more  (of)  Zelma  and  Ponine,  or  (of) 
Cosette?  13.  Which  of  the  three  little  girls  amused  herself 
the  least? 


214 


The  Elements  of  French 


LESSON   110    (CENT  DIXifiME  LEgON) 

THE   SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD 

VOCABULAIRE 


chasser  (Jase),  to  drive  out;  hunt 
craindre  (kreidr),  irreg.,  to  fear 
Dauphin  (dofe)  m.,    heir  apparent 
to  French  throne 


devenir  (davniir),  to  become 

(like  venir) 
filer  (file),  to  spin 
insist er  (esiste),  to  insist 
regretter  (ragrete),  to  regret 


200.  Present  Subjunctive  (le  Present  du  Suhjonctif)  of  don- 


ner,  finir,  perdre. 

donn  e  (don) 
donn  es  (don) 
donn  e  (don) 
donn  ions  (donj5) 
donn  iez  (donje) 
donn  ent  (don) 


finiss  e  (finis) 
finiss  es  (finis) 
finiss  e  (finis) 
finiss  ions  (finisjo) 
finiss  iez  (finis je) 
finiss  ent  (finis) 


perd  e  (psrd) 
perd  es  (perd) 
perd  e  (perd) 
perd  ions  (perd jo) 
perd  iez  (perdje) 
perd  ent  (perd) 


The  stem  of  the  present  subjunctive  of  a  regular  verb  is 
obtained  by  dropping  the  ending  -ant  of  the  present  participle : 
donn  ant,  finiss  ant,  perd  ant,  etc. 

201.  Present  Subjunctive  (le  Present  du  Suhjonctif)  of  avoir 
(pres.  part,  ayant),  etre  (pres.  part,  etant),  faire  (pres.  part, 
faisant),  aller  (pres.  part,  allant),  venir  (pres.  part,  venant)  and 
its  compounds. 


aie  (e) 

sois  (swa) 

fasse  (fas) 

aille  (a:j) 

aies  (e) 

sois  (swa) 

fasses  (fas) 

ailles  (a:j) 

ait  (e) 

soit  (swa) 

fasse  (fas) 

aille  (a:j) 

ayons  (ejo) 

'             soyons  (swa jo) 

fassions  (fasjo) 

alliens  (aljo) 

ayez  (eje) 

soyez  (swaje) 

fassiez  (fasje) 

alliez  (alje) 

aient  (e) 

soient  (swa) 

fassent  (fas) 

aillent  (a:j) 

vienne  (vjen) 

venions  (von jo] 

1 

viennes  (vjen) 

veniez  (vonje) 

vienne  (vjen) 

viennent  (vjen] 

) 

Note.  The  present  subjunctive  of  irregular  verbs  is  troublesome,  and 
should  be  learned  as  one  of  the  principal  parts.  Devoir,  aller,  venir, 
among  others  are  regular  in  the  first  and  second  plural. 


Lesson  110  215 

202.  Emploi.  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  many  clauses 
introduced  by  que:  (a)  After  expressions  of  commanding ^ 
wishing,  desiring,  and  approving: 

1.  Je  desire  que  vous  me  disiez  cela,  I  desire  that  you  tell  me  that. 

2.  pinsiste  que  vous  ouvriez  la  porte,  /  insist  that  you  open  the  door. 

(b)  After  expressions  of  emotion,  such  as  joy,  sorrow,  anger, 
or  shame: 

1.  Je  suis  heureux  que  vous  restiez  ici,  /  am  happy  that  you  are 

staying  here. 

2.  Je  regrette  que  vous  n'ayez  pas  regu  ma  lettre,  /  regret  that  you 

did  not  receive  my  letter. 

(c)  After  expressions  of  fearing,  doubting,  or  denying.  In 
such   cases  pleonastic  ne   is  used. 

Note.     The  omission  of  pleonastic  ne  is  tolerated. 

1.  Je  crains  qu41s  ne  soient  arrives,  I  fear  that  they  have  arrived. 

2.  Je  crains  qu*il  ne  soit  pas  arrive,  /  fear  that  he  has  not  arrived. 

(d)  After  expressions  of  necessity: 

II  faut  que  je  fasse  ce  qui  m'est  commande,  /  must  do  (it  is  neces- 
sary that  I  do)  what  is  commanded  me. 

(e)  After  expressions  of  uncertainty: 

II  est  possible  qu'il  vienne.  It  is  possible  that  he  is  coming. 

(/)  In  clauses  introduced  by  certain  conjunctions,  such  as 
bien  que,  although,  quoique,  although,  afin  que,  in  order  that, 
pour  que,  in  order  that,  de  peur  que,  for  fear  that,  and  several 
others. 

Quoique  j^aime  mieux  tester  a  filer  pres  de  ma  pauvre  mere. 

Although  I  prefer  to  stay  and  spin  beside  my  poor  mother. 

Conjuguez.  1.  II  faudra  que  je  de  vienne  Anglais,  il  faudra 
que  tu  deviennes  Anglais,  etc.  2.  II  faut  que  je  sois  chasse, 
il  faut  que  tu  sois  chasse,  etc.  3.  Bien  que  j'aille,  bien  que 
tu  allies,  etc.  4.  Quoique  j^aime  mieux  rester,  quoique  tu 
aimes  mieux  rester,  etc.     5.  11  veut  que  je  le  fasse,  il  veut 


216  The  Elements  of  French 

que  tu  le  fasses,  etc.     6.  Elle  est  contente  que  je  sois  arrive, 
elle  est  contente  que  tu  sois  arriv^,  etc. 

203.  In  general:  The  subjunctive  is  employed  after  expres- 
sions of  doubt  or  of  emotion.  For  this  reason,  the  subjunc- 
tive is  used  after  croire  and  penser  used  in  the  interrogative, 
or  in  the  negative,  since  there  is  doubt.     Thus: 

1.  Je  crois  qu'il  est  ici,  I  think  that  he  is  here.     (The  indicative 

form  est  is  used,  because  no  doubt  is  expressed.) 

2.  Croyez-vous  qu'il  soit  ici?  Do  you  think  that  he  is  here?     (The 

subjunctive  form  soit  is  used,  because  croyez-vous?  is  inter- 
rogative, and  therefore  expresses  doubt.) 

3.  Je  ne  crois  pas  qu'il  soit  ici,  /  do  not  believe  that  he  is  here.     (The 

subjunctive  form  soit  is  used,  because  je  ne  crois  pas,  being 
negative,  expresses  doubt,  or  uncertainty.) 

4.  J'espere  qu'il  viendra,  /  hope  that  he  will  come. 

5.  Esperez-vous  qu'il  vienne?  Do  you  hope  that  he  will  come? 

Note.  The  conjunction  que,  that,  like  the  relatives  qui  and  que,  is 
never  omitted  in  French. 

For  sequence  of  tenses,  cf.  §  223.* 

I.  Conjuguez.  1.  Croit-il  que  je  vienne?  croit-il  que  tu 
viennes?  etc.  2.  Elle  ne  pense  pas  que  je  fasse  cela,  elle  ne 
pense  pas  que  tu  fasses  cela,  etc.  3.  II  ne  croit  pas  que 
j'aie  fini,  il  ne  croit  pas  que  tu  aies  fini,  etc. 

II.  Exercice  Oral  ou  Ecrit.  ,1.  We  certainly  do  not 
think  that  they  are  here.  2.  Do  they  believe  that  we  will  do 
that?  3.  You  must  go  there,  if  they  go  there.  4.  Their 
friends  must  come  at  once.  5.  We  are  afraid  that  they  have 
not  received  (regu)  our  letters.  6.  I  wish  to  do  what  is  nec- 
essary. 7.  I  tell  you  this  in  order  that  you  may  lose  no 
time.  8.  Although  you  drive  well,  you  do  not  drive  well 
enough.  9.  Although  you  did  not  give  a  tip,  the  attendant 
(ouvreuse)  has  taken  charge  of  your  hat.  10.  I  doubt  whether 
you  are  going  to  be  happy  there. 

*For  further  uses  of  the  subjunctive,  see  Lessons  125  and  126. 


Lesson  111  217 

LESSON   111    (CENT  ONZlI^ME  LEgON) 

THE  SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD  —  Continued 

VOCABULAIRE 

ajouta  (a3uta),  added  (from  ajouter)  negliger  (negli3e),  to  neglect 

careme  (kareim),  m.,  Lent  ouvrage  (uvrais),  m.,  work 

content  (kota),  glad;  contented  secours  (sakuir),  m.,  help 

del  (sjsl),  m.,  Heaven;  sky  seigneur  (sejioeir),  m.,  lord;  master 

Plural,  cieux  (sj0)  tel  {tel),  such  (follows  article),  untel 
demanda    (damada),    asked    (from         homme,  such  a  man 

demander)  Feminine,    telle    (tel). 

devint    (dave),    became    (from    de-  user  (yze),  to  wear,  wear  away 

venir)  user  de,  to  use 

entretien  (atratje),  m.,  talk;  conver-  tons  (les)  deux  (tu  [le]  d0),  both 

sation  mi-car eme  (mi  kareim),  f .,  mid-Lent 

il  faudra  (il  fodra),  it  will  be  nee-  dusse-je  (dyse  :5)j  if  I  should  (from 

essary  (from  falloir)  devoir) 

genou  (3anu),  m.,  knee 

Plural,  genoux  (sanu) 

I.  JEANNE  D»ARC* 

La  mission  de  Jeanne  devint  la  foi  de  quelques-uns  et  I'en- 
tretien  de  tons  (tus). 

^ ^Negliger  un  tel  secours  du  ciel,  n^etait-ce  pas  trahir  le  Dau- 
phin et  la  France?'^ 

Un  gentilhomme  des  environs,  etant  venu  voir  Jeanne  comme 
les  autres,  lui  dit: 

*^Eh  bien,  ma  mie,  il  faudra  done  que  le  roi  soit  chass6  et  que 
nous  devenions  Anglais?^' 

"Cependant/'  dit-elle,  '4l  faudra  bien  qu'avant  la  mi-careme 
on  me  conduise  au  Dauphin,  dusse-je,  pour  y  aller,  user  mes 
jambes  jusqu^aux  genoux,  car  personne  au  monde,  ni  rois, 
ni  dues,  ni  fille  du  roi  d^ficosse,  ne  peuvent  reprendre  le  roy- 
aume  de  France;  et  il  n'y  a  pour  lui  d^autre  secours  que  moi- 
meme,    quoique   j^aime   mieux,^^  ajouta-t-elle     avec   tristesse, 

♦Adapted  from  Lamartine's  Jeanne  d'Arc, 


218  The  Elements  of  French 

"rester  a  filer  prfes  de  ma  pauvre  mere!  .  .  .  Car  je  sais  bien  que 
batailler  n'est  pas  mon  ouvrage;  mais  il  faut  que  j^aille  et  que 
je  fasse  ce  qui  m^est  commande,  car  mon  Seigneur  le  veut  .  .  /' 

On  lui  demanda: 

''Et  qui  est  votre  Seigneur?'' 

Elle  repondit: 

''C'estDieu!'' 

II.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Quelle  est  la  mission  de  Jeanne 
d'Arc?  2.  Est-ce  qu'on  parle  de  sa  mission?  3.  Quels  sont 
les  ennemis  de  la  France?  4.  Faut-il  {is  it  necessary)  que  le 
roi  soit  chasse  par  ses  ennemis?  5.  Faut-il  que  les  Frangais 
deviennent  Anglais?  6.  Qui  est-ce  qui  a  chasse  les  Anglais  de 
la  France?  7.  De  qui  le  Dauphin  est-il  le  fils?  8.  Est-ce  qu'il 
bataille  bien?  9.  Quel  est  le  seul  secours  pour  le  Dauphin? 
10.  Lequel  aime-t-elle  mieux  faire,  de  batailler  ou  de  Tester 
chez  sa  mere?  11.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  faut  qu'elle  fasse?  12.  Qui 
est-ce  qui  lui  a  commande  de  batailler?  13.  Quel  est  son 
Seigneur?  14.  Est-ce  qu'elle  va  au  Dauphin?  15.  Combien 
de  temps  y  a-t-il  que  Jeanne  d'Arc  est  morte? 

III.  Tradixisez.  1.  Everybody  is  talking  about  the  mis- 
sion of  Joan  of  Arc.  2.  There  are  many  who  do  not  believe 
that  she  is  sent  by  Heaven.  3.  There  are  many  others  who 
do  beUeve  it.  4.  They  beUeve  that  the  French  must  not 
neglect  such  help  from  Heaven.  5.  They  believe  that  they 
must  not  betray  the  Dauphin  and  France.  6.  Though  they 
prefer  to  remain  at  home,  they  must  fight  for  their  country. 
7.  God  commands  Joan  of  Arc  to  go  (that  Joan  of  Arc  go)  to 
the  Dauphin.  8.  He  wishes  her  to  go  there,  even  if  it  is  nec- 
essary for  her  to  wear  away  (that  she  wear  away)  her  legs  to  the 
knees.  9.  She  does  not  believe  that  the  King  of  England  is 
going  to  win  (take)  back  the  kingdom  of  France.  10.  But  she 
does  not  believe  that  there  is  any  other  help  for  the  Dauphin 
than  herself.  11.  Though  fighting  (to  fight)  is  not  her  work, 
she  desires  to  be  led  to  the  Dauphin.  12.  She  prefers  to  remain 
at  her  mother's  house.     13.  Yet  she  must  do  what  her  Master 


Lesson  112  219 

wishes  her  to  do.     14.  They  ask  her  {lui)  who  her  Master  is. 
15.  Immediately  she  repHes  that  he  is  God. 

IV.  Exercice  Oral  ou  Ecrit.  1.  1  fear  that  we  shall  not 
arrive  at  the  theater  until  a  quarter  of  nine.  2.  I  want  you 
to  show  me  the  gentleman  in  uniform  who  inspects  our 
tickets.  3.  He  accompanies  us,  as  we  enter  (in)  the  theater, 
in  order  that  he  may  sell  us  programs.  4.  I  doubt  whether 
(that)  we  shall  give  him  a  tip,  although  our  friend  Albert 
always  gives  a  ten  cent  tip.  5.  One  of  our  friends  must  have 
taken  a  loge,  for  there  he  is,  accompanied  by  {de)  an  ouv- 
reuse.  6.  Some  gentlemen  in  the  orchestra  seats  rise,  in 
order  that  they  may  look  at  everybody.  7.  Though  they 
have  knocked  three  times,  the  curtain  has  not  yet  risen. 


LESSON   112   (CENT  DOUZlfiME  LEgON) 
REVISION 

I.  Write  French  sentences  containing  the  following  words: 
1.  Lequel.  2.  Qui?  3.  Ce  qui.  4.  Ce  que.  5.  Ce  dont. 
6.  Qu'est-ce  qui?     7.  Qu'est-ce  que?    8.  Quoi? 

II.  Remplacez  les  tirets  par  des  pronoms  relatifs  ou  inter- 

rogatifs:     1.  C^est  M.   Albert  est  venu   ce  matin.     2. 

Voila  les  livres nous  avons  besoin.     3.  Quelque  chose  est 

arrive j^ avals  tou jours  peur.    4.  Dites  moi vous  avez 

fait  hier.     5.  II  nous  a  rendu il  nous  fallait.    6.  est 

arrive?    7.  demeure  dans  cette  maison?    8.  La  rue 

nous  nous  donnons  rendez-vous.     9.  L^universit^ sortent 

les  professeurs.     10.  Le  train  par il  arrive  toujours.     11. 

Le  fils  de  Mme  Mercier demande  k  nous  parler. 

III.  Exercice  Oral  ou  Ecrit.  1.  Do  you  think  that  there  is 
enough  (of  it)?  2.  I  do  not  believe  that  there  will  be  too 
much  (of  it).  3.  Although  they  never  do  anything  they  are 
always  talking.     4.  They  must  give  him  back  what  he  has 


220  The  Elements  of  French 

lost.  5.  You  must  come.  6.  We  regret  that  they  do  not 
come.     7.  We  are  glad  that  you  are  staying. 

IV.  Present  Subjimctive  (le  Present  du  Subjonctif)  of  1. 
etre;  2.  avoir;  3.  faire;  4.  venir;  5.  choisir;  6.  vendre. 

V.  Exercice  Oral.     1.  Qu'est-ce  que  Tlnstitut  de  France? 

2.  Quelles  ecoles  superieures  se  trouvent  au  quartier  savant? 

3.  O^  s'instruisent  les  medecins  frangais?  4.  Y  a-t-il  beau- 
coup  d'avocats  en  France?  5.  Ou  s'instruisent-ils?  6.  Ou 
peut-on  acheter  des  provisions  a  Paris?  7.  Est-ce  que  beau- 
coup  de  monde  y  va?  8.  Par  quelles  voies  est-ce  que  les  pro- 
visions arrivent  a  Paris?  9.  Combien  de  boeufs  faut-il  pour 
nourrir  Paris  pendant  un  an?  10.  Combien  de  moutons?  11. 
Combien  de  pores?  12.  Comment  s'appelait  la  petite  fille  qui 
cherchait  de  Teau?  13.  Qui  a-t-elle  rencontre?  14.  Ou  tra- 
vaillait-elle?  15.  Combien  d^enfants  avait  Mme  Thenardier? 
16.  Est-ce  que  Cosette  ^tait  heureuse  ou  malheureuse?  17. 
Avait-elle  des  poupees?  18.  Quel  etait  le  seigneur  de  Jeanne 
d'Arc?  19.  Est-ce  qu^elle  avait  une  niission?  20.  Qu'est-ce 
qu'il  faut  qu^elle  fasse? 

VI.  Traduisez.  1.  This  is  the  learned  quarter  of  Paris, 
of  which  I  was  speaking  to  you  today.  2.  There  is  the 
Institute  of  France,  whose  members  are  very  illustrious  men. 
3.  Everything  which  we  see  at  the  Halles  is  very  inter- 
esting. 4.  There  are  several  ways  by  which  provisions  can  be 
transported  to  Paris.  5.  The  seven  railroads,  of  which  Paris 
is  the  terminal  point,  transport  many  provisions.  6.  Then 
there  is  the  system  of  canals,  for  which  France  is  celebrated. 
7.  Which  was  older  (plus  dgee),  Cosette  or  Mme  Thenardier^s 
daughters?  8.  Which  one  did  Mme  Thenardier  send  to  get 
water  at  night?  9.  Joan  of  Arc  must  do  all  that  God  com- 
mands. 10.  Her  parents  do  not  wish  her  to  fight,  but  she 
must  go  to  the  Dauphin. 

VII.  Exercice  Oral  ou  ficrit.  1.  We  must  go  to  see  what 
they  are  playing  this  evening.     2.  I  want  you  to  look  at  the 


Lesson  113  221 

columns  for  theatrical  announcements.  3.  Probably  we  shall 
go  to  see  ^'le  Voyage  de  M.  Perrichon/'  for  fear  they  will 
not  play  it  again,  although  two  friends  of  ours  have  seen  it 
already.  4.  I  doubt  whether  there  are  any  pit  seats.  5. 
We  are  going  to  pay  a  supplement  of  two  francs,  in  order 
that  we  may  have  seats  reserved.  6.  I  am  glad  you  are 
coming,  and  hope  that  your  brother  will  come,  also. 
7.  Do  you  think  he  has  enough  time?  8.  I  fear  that 
he  is  too   busy  (occupe). 


LESSON   113   (CENT  TREIZlfiME  LEgON) 

THE   INFINITIVE 

VOCABULAIRE 

hlesser  (hlese) ,  to  wound  paraitre    (pareitr),  irreg.,    to  seem, 

devoir  (davwair),  m.,  duty;  school  appear. 

composition  retranchement  (ratra/ma),  m.,  re- 

dur  (dyir),  adj.,  hard  trenchment;  separation 

douceur  (dusoeir),  f.,  comfort  tache  (taij),  f.,  task 

marraine    (maren),    f.,    godmother  a  meme  de,  able  to 

s*occuper  de    (s  okype  da),  to   he  de  cette  fagon,  in  this  manner 

busy  with  de  temps  en  temps,  from  time  to 

rentrer  (ratre),  to  enter  again  time 

Learn  the  present  subjunctive  of  prendre.    (See  Appendix.) 

204.  The  infinitive  is  used  without  a  preposition  after  the 
following  verbs,  among  many  others:  aller,  to  go;  venir,  to 
come;  desirer,  to  desire;  devoir,  to  owe,  ought;  falloir,  to  be  nec- 
essary; pouvoir,  to  be  able,  can;  savoir,  to  know  (how) ;  vouloir, 
to  will,  wish  to;  entendre,  to  hear;  voir,  to  see;  faire,  to  make, 
cause;  laisser,  to  let,  to  leave, 

1.  Je  vais  chercher  du  pain,  /  am  going  after  some  bread. 

2.  Desirez-vous  m*accompagner?  Do  you  desire  to  accompany  me? 

3.  Vous  devez  leur  repondre,    You  ought  to  reply  to  them. 

4.  II  leur  faut  apprendre  le  fran^ais,  They  must  learn  French  (or, 

II  faut  quails  apprennent  le   franfais). 

5.  II  ne  veut  rien  entendre.  He  will  listen  to  nothing. 

6.  J*entends  les  boutiques  s*ouvrir,  /  hear  the  shops  opening. 


222  The  Elements  of  French 

7.  II  fait  venir  ses  amis,  He  sends  for  his  friends  (makes  his  friends 

come). 

Note.     When  the  infinitive  has  a  direct  object,  faire  requires 
an  indirect  personal  object: 

8.  II  fait  acheter  ce  livre  k  son  ami,  He  makes  his  friand  buy  that 

hook. 

9.  II  lui  fait  acheter  ce  livre,  He  makes  him  buy  that  book. 

Note  1.  Laisser  often  has  the  same  construction.  Laissez-la  (-lui) 
trouver  Pargent,  Let  her  find  the  money. 

Note  2.  Observe  the  passive  force  of  a  dependent  infinitive  after 
faire.     II  fait  faire  ses  habits.  He  has  his  clothes  made. 

Conjuguez.  1.  II  faut  m^y  resigner,  il  faut  t'y  resigner, 
etc.  2.  J^entends  marcher  les  soldats,  tu  entends  marcher 
les  soldats,  etc.  3.  Je  fais  voir  la  maison  a  mon  ami,  tu 
fais  voir  la  maison  a  ton  ami,  etc.  4.  Je  veux  Taider,  tu 
veux  Taider,  etc. 

205.  The  following  are  a  few  of  the  verbs  which  take  de 
before  a  dependent  infinitive: 

cesser,  to  cease;  demander,  to  ask;  dire,  to  say^  tell;  essayer, 
to  try;  oublier,  to  forget;  prier,  to  pray^  beg;  regretter,  to  regret. 

1.  Nous  essayerons  de  ne  pas  le  croire,  We  shall  try  not  to  believe  it. 

2.  II  a  oublie  de  nous  ecrire.  He  has  forgotten  to  write  to  us. 

(a)  Observe  also  venir  de,  to  have  just. 

1.  Je  viens  d*arriver,  /  have  just  arrived. 

2.  Je  venais  de  le  faire,  I  had  just  done  it. 

Note  that  only  the  present  and  past  descriptive  tenses  of  venir  are 
used  in  this  sense. 

(6)  De  is  also  used  after  etre  used  impersonally  +  an  adjec- 
tive. 

1.  n  est  difficile  de  le  croire,  It  is  difficult  to  believe  it.* 

*  In  certain  expressions  after  adjectives  de  or  a  must  be  used  according  to 
Ihe  construction.     When  the  infinitive  is  the  logical  subject,  de  is  used. 

II  est  difficile  de  faire  cela,  To  do  this  is  difficult. 

When  the  infinitive  depends  upon  the  adjective,  a  is  used,  as:  Cela  est 
difficile  i  faire,  That  is  difficult  to  do. 


Lesson  113  223 

2.  II  essayait  de  le  faire,  He  was  trying  to  do  it, 

3.  Nous  regrettons  de  vous  dire,  We  regret  to  tell  you, 

4.  Je  vous  prie  de  m*excuser,  /  heg  you  to  excuse  me, 

Conjuguez.  1.  J'essayerai  de  lui  ^crire,  tu  essayeras  de 
lui  ecrire,  etc.  2.  Je  lui  dis  de  revenir,  tu  lui  dis  de  revenir, 
etc.  3.  J'ai  oublie  de  leur  repondre,  tu  as  oublie  de  leur 
repondre,  etc. 

Note.     Finir  par  with  a  dependent  infinitive  means  finally,  at  last. 
On  finira  par  vous  croire,  People  will  finally  believe  you. 

206.  The  following  are  a  few  of  the  verbs  which  take  a 
before  a  dependent  infinitive: 

aimer*,  to  love,  like;  apprendre,  to  learn;  enseigner,  to  teach; 
inviter,  to  invite;  reussir,  to  succeed, 

1.  Nous  aimons  a  nous  promener  en  automobile,    We  like  to  go 

automobile  riding. 

2.  lis  apprennent  a  parler  frangais,  They  learn  to  speak  French. 

3.  Elle  reussit  a  le  faire,  She  succeeds  in  doing  it. 

Conjuguez.  1.  Je  Tinvite  a  venir,  tu  Tinvites  a  venir,  etc. 
2.  J^aime  a  patiner,  tu  aimes  a  patiner,  etc.  3.  J^apprends 
a  prononcer   le  frangais,   tu  apprends,  etc. 

207.  The  infinitive  is  used  after  all  prepositions  except  en. 

1.  Entrez  sans  frapp er,  Enter  without  knocking. 

2.  Je  vous  serais  tres  reconnaissant  de  me  donner  son  adresse, 

/  should  be  very  grateful  to  you  for  giving  me  his  address. 

(a)  Observe  that  apres  is  followed  by  the  perfect  infinitive. 

1.  Apres  avoir  fini  ce  travail,  after  finishing  this  work. 

2.  Apres  etre  alle  la-bas,  after  going  down  there. 

3.  Apres  avoir  appris  cela,  after  learning  that. 

(6)  En  is  followed  by  the  gerund,  not  by  the  infinitive, 
and  is  often  not  to  be  translated. 

1.  II  travaille  en  chantant.  He  works  (while)  singing. 

2.  On  apprend  le  frangais  en  le  parlant.  We  learn  French  (by)  speak- 

ing  it. 

*  Aimer  is  often  used  without  a  preposition. 


224  The  Elements  of  French 

208.  The  infinitive  is  really  a  verbal  noun,  and  may  often 
be  used  as  the  subject,  etc.,  of  a  verb. 

Te  quitter  c^est  mourir,  To  leave  thee  His  to  die. 

(a)  The  infinitive  preceded  by  de  is  sometimes  used  for 
the  past  absolute  (historical  infinitive). 

Et  le  citadin  de  dire,  And  the  citizen  said. 

(b)  The  infinitive  may  also  be  used  with  imperative  force, 
11  faut,  or  some  similar  expression,  being  understood. 

(II  faut)  toumer  a  gauche,  Turn  to  the  left. 

I.  LETTRE  D'UN  SOLDAT  BLESSE* 

Rentre  en  France,  le  4  mars,  par  un  train  de  grands  blesses 
echanges  (ampute  du  bras  gauche),  je  me  vols  plonge  dans 
rinaction.  C^est  pourquoi  je  vous  ecris  pour  vous  demander 
de  m^envoyer  deux  noms  de  soldats  sans  famille.  Je  tacherai 
de  leur  envoyer  quelques  douceurs  de  temps  en  temps  et 
de  les  aider  de  cette  fagon  dans  la  tache  glorieuse  qu'ils 
accomplissent.  Mes  parents  s'occupent  de  mes  deux  autres 
freres,  je  suis  a  meme  d' aider  d' autres  freres  de  Tarmee,  et  je 
vous  prie  de  me  donner  cette  compensation,  qui  me  fera 
paraitre  moins  dur  mon  retranchement  force  de  la  vie  militaire. 

II.  Traduisez.  1.  We  desire  to  return  to  France.  2.  We 
do  not  wish  to  do  nothing.  3.  I  pray  you  to  send  us  the  names 
of  several  wounded  soldiers.  4.  We  desire  especially  to  write 
to  soldiers  who  have  undergone  an  amputation  (been  ampu- 
tated). 5.  We  shall  not  forget  to  send  them  some  things  from 
time  to  time.  6.  Perhaps  in  this  way  it  will  not  be  difficult 
to  help  them  a  little.  7.  (By)  busying  ourselves  with  the  mis- 
fortunes (malheurs)  of  (the)  others,  we  shall  finally  forget  our 
own  difficulties.  ,  *• 

*  From  Henriette  de  Vismes:  Histoire  des  Marraines  et  des  Filleuls  de 
la  Guerre. 


^ 

p 


U 

d 


Lesson  II4  225 

LESSON   114   (CENT  QUATORZlfiME  LEgON) 
THE   INFINITIVE  —  Continued 

I.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Quel  jour  est-ce  que  ce  soldat  est 
rentr^  en  France?  2.  Par  quel  train  est-il  rentre?  3.  En 
quel  pays  a-t-il  ete  prisonnier?  4.  Pourquoi  Ta-t-on  ^change? 
5.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  pent  faire  maintenant?  6.  Que  veut-il 
faire?  7.  Pourquoi  ecrit-il  une  lettre?  8.  Qu^est-ce  qu^il  veut 
faire  pour  les  soldats  frangais?  9.  De  qui  est-ce  que  ses  par- 
ents s'occupent?  10.  Quelle  compensation  demande-t-il  ?  11. 
Qu^est-ce  qu'il  voudrait  faire  paraitre  moins  dur? 

II.  Traduisez.  1.  We  must  take  this  train  (Two  ways). 
2.  It  is  the  train  for  those  who  wish  to  return  imme- 
diately to  France.  3.  Several  comrades  are  taking  it,  be- 
cause they  have  been  exchanged  recently.  4.  I  must  take 
it  (Two  ways),  because  I  must  return  at  once.  5.  We 
are  very  glad  we  are  going  back  to  France.  6.  We  are 
very  glad  to  go  back.  7.  All  those  who  have  been  brave 
are  to  (devoir)  receive  the  war  cross  (croix  de  guerre), 
8.  We  must  all  do  our  duty.  9.  We  shall  all  try  to  send  to 
the  wounded  soldiers  as  many  comforts  as  possible.  10.  Al- 
though we  are  wounded  ourselves,  we  are  able  to  help  many 
comrades  who  are  less  fortunate  than  we.  11.  That  is  why 
we  ask  you  to  send  several  names  of  French  soldiers  without 
(a)  family.  12.  To  occupy  themselves  with  (de)  my  three 
brothers  is  all  that  my  parents  can  do.  13.  Still,  I  should 
not  wish  to  see  myself  plunged  into  inaction.  14.  To  write 
a  few  letters  to  wounded  soldiers  would  make  a  life  of  inac- 
tion seem  less  hard.  15.  That  is  why  I  should  be  happy  to 
receive  the  addresses  of  French  soldiers  who  have  neither 
family  nor  friends. 


226  The  Elements  of  French 

LESSON   115   (CENT  QUINZIEME  LEgON) 
ORDINAL   NUMERALS 

209.  1,  2,  3,  4,  etc.,  are  called  cardinal  numerals.  First, 
second,  third,  fourth,  etc.,  are  called  ordinal  numerals. 

Ordinal  numerals  in  French  are  formed  by  adding  -ieme  to 
the  corresponding  cardinal  numeral. 

Exceptions.  Cinq  adds  -uieme  to  prevent  q  from  coming 
directly  before  i  in  the  same  word. 

la  cinquieme  fois,  the  fifth  time 

Neuf  changes  f  to  v,  according  to  the  regular  rules  for  liaison 
(linking),     (Compare  li/e,  litres;  lea/,  leaz;es,  in  English.) 

le  neuvieme  regiment,  the  ninth  regiment 
First  is  translated  premier  (feminine  premiere). 

1st    premier  (pramje)  11th  onzieme  (5zjem) 

premiere  (pramjeir)  12th  douzieme  (duzjem) 

2nd  second  (sago)  13th  treizieme  (trezjem) 

also,  14th  quatorzieme  (katorzjem) 

deuxieme  (d0zJGm)  15th  quinzieme  (kezjsm) 

3d     troisieme  (trwazjem)  16th  seizieme  (sezjem) 

4th  quatrieme  (katriem)  17th  dix-septieme  (dis  set j  em) 

5th  cinquieme  (sekjem)  18th  dix-huitieme  (diz  qitjem) 

6th  sixieme  (sizjem)  19th  dix-neuvieme  (diz  noevjem) 

7th  septieme  (set  j  em)  20th  vingtieme  (vet  j  em) 

8th  huitieme  (qitjem)  21st   vingt  et  unieme  (vet  e  ynjem) 

9th  neuvieme  (noevjem)  22nd  vingt-deuxieme  (vet  d0zjem) 
10th  dixieme  (diz  j  em) 

210.  Fractions  (Fractions).  For  the  numerators  of  fractions, 
use  cardinal  numerals ;  for  the  denominators,  use  ordinal  numer- 
als, as  in  English. 

1.  f    =  cinq    {cardinal)   huitiemes   (ordinal). 

2.  ^^0  =  neuf   (cardinal)   dixiemes   (ordinal). 
Exceptions.     J  =Un  quart  (6e  ka:r)  (Cf.  English  quart), 

J  =Un  tiers  (6e  tjeir). 


Lesson  115  227 

5  =Un  demi  (dami),  when  halj  is  used  as  an  adjective. 
i  =La  moitie  (mwatje),  when  half  is  used  as  a  noun. 

Una  heure  et  demie,  An  hour  and  a  half. 
La  moitie  du  mois,  Half  (of  the)  month, 

Exercice.  1.  Give  the  ordinal  numerals  from  first  to  tenth. 
2.  From  11th  to  20th.  3.  From  21st  to  30th.  4.  From  31st 
to  40th.  5.  Say  in  French  |;  f ;  f.  6.  Say  in  French  f ;  ^. 
7.  Read  the  following  numerals:  228.6;  3458.67.  8.  442.498; 
25.002. 

211.  How  to  Change  French  Systems  of  Coinage,  Weights, 
and  Measures  to  American. 

The  following  tables  may  be  found  useful: 

Un  franc  (fra)  =20  sous  (American  cents),  or  100  centimes. 

Cinq  francs  =  one  dollar  (approximately) . 

Un  kilogramme  {or  kilo)  =  2^  pounds  (nearly  exact) . 

Une  livre  =liV  pounds  (nearly  exact). 

Un  litre  (litr)  =  About  one  liquid  quart. 

Un  metre  (mstr)  =3i  feet  (39.37  inches)  (11  metres  =  12  yards). 

Un  centimetre  (satimetr)  =0.4  inches  (nearly  exact). 

Un  kilometre  (kibmstr)  =  1000  meters,  or  f  miles  (approximately) . 

To  change  from  the  Centigrade  to  the  Fahrenheit  ther- 
mometer:    Multiply  by  |^,  and  add  32. 

To  change  from  the  Fahrenheit  to  the  Centigrade  ther- 
mometer:    Subtract  32,  then  multiply  by  ^. 

Exercice.  Give  in  French  (francs  and  centimes)  the  equiv- 
alents of:  (1)  5  cts.;  10  cts.;  15  cts.  (2)  25  cts.;  35  cts. 
(3)  50  cts.;  75  cts.;  $1.00.  (Express  in  francs,  and  also  in 
sous.)  (4)  $1.75;  $2.25.  (5)  $5.00;  $10.00.  (6)  $20.00.  (7) 
$50.00;  $75.00.     (8)  $100.      (9)   $265.00. 

Change  the  following  from  Centigrade  to  Fahrenheit:  (1) 
20°.     (2)  30°.     (3)  50°.     (4)  22°.     (5)  33°.     (6)  41°. 

Give  in  centimeters  the  equivalent  of:  (1)  5  inches.  (2) 
11  inches.     (3)  16  inches. 


228  The  Elements  of  French 

LESSON   116   (CENT  SEIZlfiME  LEgON) 

FRENCH   COINS  AND   MEASURES  —  Continued 

VOCABULAIRE 

banque  (ba:k),  f.,  hank  pouce  (pus),  m.,  inch;  thumb 

citoyen  (sitwaje),  m.,  citizen  unite  (ynite),  f.,  unit;  unity 

emettre,  to  issue  (like  mettre)  valeur  (valoeir),  f.,  value 

en  (a),  prep.,  of;  made  of;  also  in     avoir  cours  (kuir),  to  he  current 

frapper  (frape),  to  strike;  coin  mille  anglais  (mil  agle),  m.,  Eng- 

imp6t  (epo),  m.,  tax;  impost  lish  mile 

paix  (ps),  f.,  peace 

I.  LES  MONNAIES  FRANQAISES 

Le  franc  est  Tunit^  monetaire  de  la  France.  La  centieme 
partie  d^un  franc  est  un  centime.  Le  centime  est  en  bronze, 
et  on  ne  Temploie  que  pour  payer  les  impots,  et  csetera.  II  y 
a  aussi  des  pieces  de  deux  centimes,  qui  sont  aussi  en  bronze, 
et  qui  n'ont  pas  cours.  On  frappe  beau  coup  plus  de  pieces  de 
cinq  centimes  et  de  dix  centimes.  On  donne  souvent  aux 
pieces  de  cinq  centimes  le  nom  de  sous  ou  de  petits  sous.  Les 
pieces  de  dix  centimes  s'appellent  vulgairement  gros  sous.  Le 
sou  est  la  vingtieme  partie  d'un  franc.  C'est  Tequivalent  du 
"cent^^  americain. 

Le  petit  sou  est  d^un  diametre  de  .025  metres.  Le  gros  sou 
est  d^un  diametre  de  .030  metres. 

II  y  a  aussi  une  piece  de  vingt-cinq  centimes,  qui  est  en 
nickel.  Cette  piece  est  Tequivalent  de  notre  ^^nickel.^'  La 
piece  de  cinquante  centimes  (dix  sous)  est  en  argent.  C'est 
Tequivalent  monetaire  de  la  "dime''  americaine,  qui  est  aussi 
en  argent.  Le  franc  a  une  valeur  de  vingt  sous.  II  y  a  aussi 
la  piece  de  deux  francs,  qui  a  une  valeur  de  quarante  sous,  ou 
de  deux  cents  centimes,  et  la  piece  de  cinq  francs  (ou  de  cent 
sous)  qui  est  T^quivalent  du  ''dollar''  americain.  En  temps 
de  paix,  la  piece  de  cinq  francs  est  en  argent.  Mais  pendant 
la  guerre,  on  a  emis  des  billets  de  cinq  francs. 

II.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Quelle  est  I'unite  monetaire  de  la 
France?     2.  Quelle  partie  d'un  franc  est  un  centime?     3.  En 


Lesson  117  229 

quoi  sont  les  centimes?  4.  Les  emploie-t-on  souvent?  5. 
Comment  les  emploie-t-on?  6.  Donnez  les  noms  de  quelques 
monnaies  frangaises  qui  sont  assez  rares?*  7.  Quelles  monnaies 
emploie-t-on  le  plus  souvent?  8.  Quel  est  Tequivalent  ameri- 
cain  d^une  piece  de  vingt-cinq  centimes?  9.  D^une  piece  de 
cinquante  centimes?  10.  D'un  franc?  11.  Comment  appelle- 
t-on  les  pieces  de  cinq  centimes?  12.  Comment  appelle-t-on 
les  pieces  de  dix  centimes?  13.  En  quoi  sont  les  pieces  de 
cinq  francs? 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  Five  francs  are  the  equivalent  of  a 
United  States  dollar  (dollar  of  the  United  States).  2.  A 
franc  has  100  centimes,  or  20  sous.  3.  How  many  sous  are 
there  in  (has)  a  five  franc  piece?    4.  There  are  100  (of  them). 

5.  The  one  and  two  centime  pieces  are  rather  rare  in  France. 

6.  However,  the  five  centime  pieces  are  not  at  all  rare.  7. 
In  war  time,  they  used  to  have  a  great  deal  of  paper  money. 
8.  In  peace  time,  they  coin  five  franc  pieces  of  silver.  9. 
The  centimeter  is  the  hundredth  part  of  a  meter.  10.  There 
are  39.37  inches  in  a  meter.  11.  There  are  1000  meters  or 
|-  miles  in  a  kilometer.  12.  2.5  centimeters  are  the  equiva- 
lent of  the  English  inch. 


LESSON   117   (CENT  DIX-SEPTlfiME  LEgON) 

APPOSITION 

VOCABULAIRE 

entier  (atje),  adj.,  entire  Fem.,  moyenne    (mwajen) 

environ    (avir5),    adv.,    about;   ap-  musee  (myze),  m.,  museum 

proximately  palais  (pale),  m.,  palace 

s'etendre  (s  etaidr),  to  extend  relief  (ralje),  to  unite;  bind 

eventail  (evataij),  m.,  fan  rive  (ri:v),  f.,  bank 

large   (lar3),  adj.,  wide  (not  large)  vers  (veir),  prep.,  toward 

moyen  (mwaje),  adj.,  medium;  av-  en  eventail,  fan-shaped 

erage.  avoir  lieu  (avwair  lj0),  to  take  place 

*  Bronze  sous  almost  disappeared  during  the  war.  In  place  of  them,  nickel 
5,  10,  and  25  centime  pieces,  with  a  hole  in  the  middle,  were  issued  in  many 
places. 


230  The  Elements  of  French 

212.  Nouns  in  apposition  may  be  divided  into  two  classes: 
(a)  Restrictive^  or  those  which  define,  distinguish,  or  compare. 

(6)  Non-restrictive,  or  those  which  merely  add  an  incidental 
fact. 

Appositive  nouns  which  are  restrictive  take  the  article  in 
French  as  in  English. 

1.  Louis  2©  Bien-Aime,  et  non  pas  Louis  le  Grand,  Louis  the  Well- 

beloved  and  not  Louis  the_  Great  (distinguishes  the  two  Louis) . 

2.  New- York,  Ja  plus  grande  ville   des*   Etats-Unis,   New    York, 

the  largest  city  in*  the    United  States    (compares   New  York 
with  other  cities). 

Appositive  nouns  which  are  non-restrictive  have  no  article 
in  French: 

Paris,  capitale  de  la  France,  Paris,  capital  of  France.     (No  com- 
parison with  other  cities.) 

Conjuguez.  1.  Je  connais  bien  Paris,  la  Ville-Lumiere,  tu 
connais  bien  Paris,  la  Ville-Lumiere,  etc.  2.  Je  ne  connais 
pas  M.  Legrand,  auteur  de  ce  livre,  tu  ne  connais  pas  M.  Le- 
grand,  auteur  de  ce  livre,  etc. 

213.  Ordinarily  than  is  translated  by  que. 
II  est  plus  grand  que  moi.  He  is  taller  than  L 

Before  numerals  than  is  translated  by  de. 

Plus  de  trente  ponts  relient  la  rive  gauche  a  la  rive  droite,  More 

than  thirty  bridges  join  the  left  bank  to  the  right  bank. 

Note.     If  a  verb  is  understood,  use  que  before  numerals. 

II  fait  plus  de  travail  que  deux  hommes.  He  does  more  work  than 
two  men. 

Traduisez.  1.  More  than  76.  2.  Less  than  99.  3.  More 
than  three  and  a  quarter  hours.  4.  Less  than  seven  and  a 
half  hours.  5.  You  study  more  than  I.  6.  You  earn  (gain) 
less  than  some  of  your  friends. 

*  Note  that  in  is  translated  by  de  after  a  superlative. 


Lesson  117 


231 


214.  Dimensions  {Dimensions).  Observe  the  following  ex- 
pressions : 

De  quelle  longueur  est  cette  table?  How  long  is  this  table? 

Cette  table  a  trois  metres  de  long(ueur),   This  table  is  three  meters  long. 

Cette  table  est  longue  de  trois  metres,  This  table  is  three  meters  long. 

(a)  By,  meaning  relative  dimensions,  is  translated  by  sur. 

Cette  place  a  200  metres  de  long(ueur)  st^  150  metres  de  large (ur), 
This  square  is  200  meters  long  by_  150  meters  wide, 

Traduisez.  1.  It  is  three  centimeters  wide.  2.  It  is  five 
meters  long.  3.  This  box  is  two  meters  long  by  one  and  a 
half  meters  wide. 

PARIS 

I.  Description  Generale.  Paris,  capitale  de  la  France,  et  la 
plus  belle  ville  du  monde  entier,  a  environ  2,700,000  d'habitants. 
La  Seine,  qui  le  traverse,  a  une  largeur  moyenne  d'environ  150 
metres.     Plus  de  30  ponts  relient  la  rive  gauche  a  la  rive  droite. 


L'Arc  de  Triomphe  de  rEtoile 


232 


Elements  of  French 


Lesson  117  233 

Sur  la  rive  droite  de  la  Seine  est  situ6  le  centre  du  commerce 
et  de  rindustrie  de  la  capitale.  Sur  la  rive  gauche  s^etendent 
les  ^tablissements  scientifiques  et  les  hotels  de  la  vieille  aristo- 
cratie. 

La  Rive  Droite.  C'est  a  Touest  de  la  place  de  la  Concorde, 
et  surtout  vers  la  place  de  FEtoile,  qu'habite  la  population 
riche  et  oisive  de  Paris.  De  la  place  de  Tfitoile  rayonnent  en 
eventail  beaucoup  de  larges  avenues.  Notons  d'abord  Tavenue 
du  bois  de  Boulogne,  qui  a  125  metres  de  large  sur  1300  metres 
de  long;  et  puis  Tavenue  des  Champs-filysees,  qui  a  environ 
1900  metres  de  long.  De  PArc  de  Triomphe  on  a  une  perspec- 
tive magnifique  de  jardins  et  de  pares,  le  bois  de  Boulogne  a 
I'ouest,  les  Champs-filysees  et  le  jardin  des  Tuileries  a  Test. 
Au-dela  du  jardin  des  Tuileries  se  trouve  le  musee  du  Louvre. 

II.  Exercice  OraL  1.  De  quelle  largeur  est  la  Seine?  2.  De 
quelle  largueur  est  T avenue  du  bois  de  Boulogne?  3.  De  quelle 
longueur  est-elle?  4.  Quelle  perspective  a-t-on  de  TArc  de 
Triomphe?  5.  Ou  se  trouve  le  Louvre?  6.  Ou  se  trouve  le 
jardin  des  Tuileries?  7.  Ou  se  trouve  le  bois  de  Boulogne? 
8.  Ou  se  trouvent  la  plupart  des  etablissements  scientifiques 
de  Paris?     9.  Ou  se  trouve  le  quartier  de  la  population  riche? 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  Paris,  the  capital  of  France,  is  its  {en  est) 
center  of  commerce  and  industry.  2.  It  has  a  population  of 
more  than  2,700,000  inhabitants,  of  whom  there  are  always 
many  foreigners  —  especially  Americans.  3.  It  is  situated 
on  the  Seine,  a  river  which  traverses  it  from  east  to  west. 
4.  The  Seine  is  a  rather  deep  river  which  empties  into  the 
English  Channel.  5.  There  are  more  than  30  bridges  which 
cross  it.  6.  On  the  right  bank  are  situated  most  of  the 
establishments  of  commerce  and  industry.  7.  On  the  left 
bank  are  found  the  centers  of  the  old  aristocracy,  and  of  the 
scientific  life  of  the  capital.  8.  One  of  the  most  celebrated 
promenades  in  \de)  Paris  is  the  Avenue  du  Bois  de  Boulogne, 
which  extends  from  the  Arch  of  Triumph  to  the  Bois  de  Bou- 
logne.    9.  It  is  125  meters  wide  by  more  than  a  kilometer 


234  The  Elements  of  French 

long.  10.  It  is  one  of  the  streets  which  radiate  like  a  fan  from 
the  Place  de  I'fitoile.  11.  Another  of  the  principal  promenades 
in  Paris  is  the  Avenue  des  Champs-Elysees,  which  extends 
from  the  Arch  of  Triumph  through  the  gardens  of  the  Champs- 
filysees.  12.  It  is  a  very  wide  avenue,  also,  which  is  nearly 
two  kilometers  long.  13.  After  the  gardens  of  the  Champs- 
Elysees  comes  the  famous  Place  de  la  Concorde,  beyond  which 
is  found  the  garden  of  the  Tuileries. 


LESSON   118   (CENT  DIX-HUITI£ME  LEgON) 

REVISION 

I.  1.  Name  five  verbs  which  may  be  followed  by  the  infini- 
tive without  a  preposition.  2.  Name  five  verbs  which  may  be 
followed  by  de  before  a  dependent  infinitive.  3.  Name  four 
verbs  which  may  be  followed  by  a  before  a  dependent  infinitive. 

II.  What  form  of  the  verb  is  used  after  apres?     2.  After  en? 

III.  Give  the  ordinal  numerals:  (1)  from  first  to  15th; 
(2)  from  16th  to  30th;  (3)  from  60th  to  80th. 

IV.  Traduisez.     (1)  f ;  (2)  f;  (3)  §;  (4)  f ;  (5)  .07;  (6)  2.107. 

V.  Give  in  inches  the  equivalents  of  (1)  3|^  centimeters; 
(2)  5  centimeters.  Give  in  miles  the  equivalents  of  (1)  79  kilo- 
meters; (2)  98  kilometers.  Give  in  pounds  the  equivalents  of 
(4)  85  kilos;  (2)  98  kilos.  Give  in  dollars  and  cents  the  equiv- 
alents of  (1)  12  fr.  50;  (2)  75  francs. 

VI.  How  is  than  translated  (a)  ordinarily?  (6)  before 
numerals,  when  a  verb  is  not  understood? 

VII.  Traduisez.  1.  New  York,  the  largest  city  in  {de) 
the  United  States.  2.  Marseilles,  a  city  on  the  Mediter- 
ranean. 3.  Rome,  the  capital  of  Italy.  4.  This  box  is  five 
centimeters  long  by  three  centimeters  wide.  5.  That  bed 
is  three  meters  long  by  two  meters  wide.  6.  How  deep  is  the 
Seine? 


Lesson  118  235 

VIII.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Quels  soldats  ^change-t-on?  2. 
Quelle  compensation  peut-on  donner  aux  soldats  blesses? 
3.  Quelle  eroix  leur  donne-t-on?  4.  Quel  est  Fequivalent  d'un 
mille  anglais?  5.  Quel  est  Fequivalent  d'une  livre?  6.  De 
quelle  valeur  sont  les  gros  sous?  7.  De  quelle  valeur  sont  les 
pieces  de  cinquante  centimes?  8.  Les  pieces  de  cinq  francs?  9. 
En  quoi  sont  les  pieces  de  vingt-cinq  centimes?  10.  Emploie- 
t-on  beaucoup  d^or  en  France?  11.  Oii  se  trouve  le  centre  du 
commerce  de  Paris?  12.  Ou  habite  la  population  riche? 
13.  Ou  se  trouvent  les  etablissements  scientifiques?  14.  Ou 
se  trouve  Tavenue  du  Bois  de  Boulogne?  15.  Ou  se  trouve 
Favenue  des  Champs-filysees? 

IX.  Traduisez.  1.  They  must  start  at  once  (Two  ways). 
2.  You  must  go  to  Bordeaux  (Two  ways).  3.  Henry  must 
stay  at  home,  and  I  must  take  this  train.  4.  His  left  arm 
has  been  amputated.  5.  We  shall  be  very  glad  to  be  at 
home.  6.  We  shall  try  to  help  our  wounded  comrades  as 
much  as  possible.  7.  We  are  beginning  (commengons)  to  send 
them  letters  and  money.  8.  Paris,  the  capital  of  France,  has 
a  very  large  population.  9.  The  Seine,  a  deep  river,  traverses 
it  from  east  to  west.  10.  There  are  more  than  30  bridges 
in  Paris.  11.  The  Avenue  du  Bois  de  Boulogne,  a  celebrated 
promenade,  is  125  meters  wide  by  more  than  a  kilometer  long. 
12.  The  Champs-Elysees,  a  very  wide  avenue,  is  more  than  a 
mile  long. 


236 


The  Elements  of  French 


LESSON   119   (CENT  DIX-NEUVI£ME  LEgON) 

THE   PASSIVE 
VOCABULAIRE 


bibliotheque   (bibliotek),  f.,  library 

cite  (site),  f.,  city;  town* 

college  (kole:3),  m.,  college;  grmn- 

mar  school 
aigu  (egy),  acute 
artere  (arteir),  f.,  artery 
Hotel-Dieu  (otel  dj0),  m.,  principal 

hospital  of  a  town 


jusqu'^  (sysk  a),  up  to;  until 
ligne  (liji),  f-,  line 
mode  (mod),  f.,  style 
succeder  (a)  (syksede),  to  follow 
suite   (sqit),  f.,  continuation 
tombeau  (tobo),  m.,  tomb 
tour  (tuir),  f.,  tower 


215.  The  Passive  Voice  (le  Passif)  in  French  is  formed  as 
in  EngUsh,  i.e.,  by  using  the  auxihary  etre  +  the  past  par- 
ticiple, the  participle  agreeing  with  the  subject  like  a  predi- 
cate adjective. 

The  Present  and  Perfect  of  etre  aime,  to  he  loved. 

Present  (Present)  Perfect  (Passe  Indefini) 
je  suis  aime(e)  (erne)  j*ai  ete  aime(e) 

tu  es  aime(e)  tu  as  ete  aime(e) 

il  est  aime  il  a  ete  aime 

elle  est  aimee  elle  a  ete  aimee 


nous  sommes  aime(e)s 
vous  etes  aime(e)(s) 
ils  sont  aimes 
elles  sont  aimees 


nous  avons  ete  aime(e)s 
vous  avez  ete  aime(e)(s) 
ils  ont  ete  aimes 
elles  ont  ete  aimees 


216.  Emploi.  The  passive  voice  is  used  less  frequently  than 
in  English.  It  is  often  used,  however,  where  the  agent  is 
expressed. 

(a)  When  the  passive  verb  expresses  a  specific  action,  use 
par  to  translate  by. 

Cet  edifice  fut  construit  gar  Le  N6tre,  That  building  was  constructed 
by  Le  Notre. 


*  La  Cite,  in  London  and  in  Paris,  refers  to  the  most  ancient  part  of  the  ville. 


Lesson  119  237 

(h)  If  the  passive  verb  expresses  habitual  action,  use  de  to 
translate  hy, 

II  est  admire  de  tout  le  monde,  He  is  admired  bg  everybody. 

Exercice.     Remplacez  les  tirets  par  de  ou  par:    1.  Elle  a 

^te    envoyee    Madame    Thenardier.     2.  Ce    mot    etait 

ajoute le  professeur.     3.  Elle  etait  aimee ses  nom- 

breux  amis.     4.  Ce  pauvre  gargon  etait  neglige tout  le 

monde.     5.  Le  soldat  a  ete  blesse un  eclat  d^obus. 

217.   Two  important  substitutes  for  the  passive  are: 

(1)  On  +  a  transitive  verb: 

Ici  on  parle  franpais,  French  is  spoken  here  (literally,  One  speaks 
French  here). 
Note.     The  verb  used  with  on  is  always  third  person  singular,  even 
though  on  may  be  translated  by  we,  they,  people,  etc. 

1.  On  le  dit.  People  say  so. 

2.  Par  o^  commence- t-on?  Where  do  we  begin? 

3.  On  raconte  des  histoires,  They  are  telling  stories. 

(2)  A  reflexive  verb : 

Cela  se  fait  mais  ne  se  dit  pas,  That  is  done  but  is  not  talked  about. 

I.  PARIS  — Suite 

Prenons  njiaintenant  conime  point  de  depart  la  ligne  des 
grands  boulevards.  Cette  grande  artere  conduit  de  la  Made- 
leine a  la  place  de  la  Bastille.  Cependant  le  nom  '^Grands 
Boulevards''  s'emploie  particulierement  pour  designer  la  partie 
comprise  entre  la  Madeleine  et  la  rue  de  Richelieu.  Le  boule- 
vard de  la  Madeleine  a  220  metres  de  long  sur  30  metres  de 
large.  Le  boulevard  des  Capucines,  qui  traverse  la  place  de 
rOp6ra,  succede  au  boulevard  de  la  Madeleine. 

De  la  rayonnent  cinq  larges  avenues,  dont  nous  ne  mention- 
nons  que  deux: 

(1)  L'avenue  de  POpera,  qui,  faisant  un  angle  aigu  avec 
les  grands  boulevards,  aboutit  a  la  place  du  Theatre  Frangais; 

(2)  La  rue  de  la  Paix,  qui  aboutit  a  la  place  Vendome. 


238  The  Elements  of  French 

C'est  dans  ce  quartier  que  se  font  les  modes  et  les  creations 
parisiennes. 

Le  boulevard  des  Italiens,  qui  fait  suite  au  boulevard  des 
Capucines,  s^etend  jusqu'^  la  rue  de  Richelieu.  C'est  la  rue 
de  Richelieu  qui  passe  devant  la  celebre  Bibhotheque  Nationale. 

Dans  rile  de  la  Cite  se  trouvent  Teglise  metropolitaine  de 
Notre  Dame,  THotel  de  Ville,  la  prefecture  de  pohce,  I'Hotel- 
Dieu,  et  le  Palais  de  Justice,  a  cote  duquel  se  trouve  la  Sainte- 
Chapelle. 

Sur  la  rive  gauche  sont  situes  deux  boulevards  importants: 

(1)  Le  boulevard  St.  Germain,  qui  s'etend  du  pont  de  Sully 
au  pont  de  la  Concorde,  passant  devant  la  Chambre  des  De- 
putes; 

(2)  Le  boulevard  St.  Michel,  qui  traverse  le  Quartier  Latin. 
Dans  ce  quartier  se  trouvent  la  Sorbonne,  Tficole  de  Mede- 
cine,  le  College  de  France,  la  Bibhotheque  Sainte-Genevieve 
(sGit  39nvJGiv)  et  le  Musee  de  Cluny. 

Deux  monuments  tres  celebres  sont  situes  sur  la  rive  gauche : 

(1)  Le  tombeau  de  Napoleon  I^"",  qui  se  trouve  aux  Invalides. 
II  a  ete  construit  de  1843  a  1853  par  Visconti.  Ce  monument 
est  admire  de  tout  le  monde. 

(2)  La  tour  Eiffel,  qui  se  trouve  pres  de  I'ficole  Mihtaire. 
Elle  a  ete  construite  par  Tingenieur  Eiffel. 

11.  Traduisez.  1.  Here  are  a  few  (quelques-uns)  of  the 
important  monuments  situated  on  the  right  bank.  2.  Let  us 
mention  first  the  Arch  of  Triumph,  which  was  constructed  by 
Napoleon  I  in  1806.  3.  The  Church  of  the  Madeleine  was 
begun  in  1806,  also  by  Napoleon  I.  4.  Let  us  not  forget  the 
Opera  House,  which  is  the  largest  theater  in  (of)  the  entire 
world,  and  was  planned  (dessiner)  by  Charles  Gamier.  5. 
The  celebrated  Theatre  Frangais  is  the  former  theater  of  Mo- 
liere,  the  author  of  Tartufe  and  of  many  other  interesting 
plays.  6.  On  the  lie  de  la  Cite  is  found  the  metropolitan 
church  of  Notre  Dame,  the  fagade  of  which  is  admired  by 
everybody.     7.  Paris  is  a  very  difficult  city  to  comprehend. 


Lesson  120 


239 


8.  At  the  Place  de  la  Concorde  many  innocent  men  were  killed. 

9.  At  the  Jardin  des  Plantes  there  are  many  animals.  10. 
At  the  Comedie  Frangaise  they  play  many  tragedies.  11. 
The  Pont-Neuf  is  the  oldest  bridge  in  {de)  Paris. 


La  Place  de  TOpera 


LESSON   120   (CENT  VINGTifiME  LEgON) 
LE   PASSIF  — Suite 

I.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Ou  commence  la  ligne  des  grands 
boulevards?  2.  Ou  aboutit-elle?  3.  De  quelle  longueur  est 
le  boulevard  de  la  Madeleine?     4.  De  quelle  largeur  est-il? 

5.  Quel  boulevard  fait  suite  au  boulevard  de  la  Madeleine? 

6.  Quelle    place    le    boulevard    des    Capucines    traverse-t-il? 

7.  Donnez  les  noms  de  deux  rues  qui  commencent  a  la 
Place  de  TOpera.  8.  Ou  aboutit  Tavenue  de  TOpera?  9.  Ou 
aboutit  la  rue  de  la  Paix?  10.  Quel  boulevard  succede  au 
boulevard  des  Capucines?     11.  Jusqu'ou  s^etend  ce  boulevard? 


240  The  Elements  of  French 

12.  Quelle  bibliotheque  est  situee  dans  la  rue  de  Richelieu? 

13.  Quels  monuments  se  trouvent  dans  Tile  de  la  Cite?  14. 
Donnez  les  noms  de  deux  boulevards  qui  sont  situes  sur  la  rive 
gauche.  15.  Pres  de  quelle  ecole  se  trouve  la  tour  Eiffel? 
16.  Quel  boulevard  passe  devant  la  Chambre  des  Deputes? 

II.  Traduisez.  1.  The  Boulevard  St.  Germain,  which  be- 
gins at  the  Pont  de  Sully,  crosses  the  Seine  near  the  lie  de 
la  Cite.  2.  It  extends  to  the  Pont  de  la  Concorde,  which 
is  in  front  of  the  Chamber  of  Deputies.  3.  Beyond  this 
bridge  is  situated  the  Place  de  la  Concorde,  where  many 
celebrated  men  were  killed  during  the  French  Revolution. 
4.  The  Boulevard  St.  Germain  goes  (passe)  from  east  to  west, 
while  {tandis  que)  the  Boulevard  St.  Michel  goes  from  north 
to  south.     5.  It  is  the  latter  which  crosses  the  Latin  Quarter. 

6.  The  Sorbonne  is  one  block  (d  la  premiere  rue)  from  there. 

7.  These  two  boulevards  are  the  principal  (ones)  situated  on 
the  left  bank.  8.  The  highest  monument  situated  on  the  left 
bank  is  the  Eiffel  Tower,  which  was  constructed  thirty  years 
ago.  9.  It  is  a  magnificent  tower  (which  is)  300  meters  high. 
10.  Another  very  interesting  monument,  situated  on  the  left 
bank,  is  the  Invalides.  11.  Napoleon  I,  whose  tomb  we  see 
at  the  Invalides,  died  {est  mort)  in  1821,  on  the  island  of  St. 
Helena  (Sainte-Helene). 


LESSON    121    (CENT    VINGT    ET    UNlfiME    LEgON) 

THE  PAST  ABSOLUTE   OR  PAST  DEFINITE   (PRETERITE) 

218.  Past  Absolute,  or  Definite  (le  Passe  Defini). 
donner  finir  perdre 

donnai  (done)  finis  (fini)*  perdis  (perdi)* 

donnas  (dona)  finis  (fini)  perdis  (perdi) 

donna  (dona)  finit  (fini)  perdit  (perdi) 

donnames  (donam)  finimes  (finim)  perdimes  (perdim) 

donnates  (donat)  finites  (finit)  perdites  (perdit) 

donnerent  (doneir)  finirent  (finiir)  perdirent  (perdiir) 

*  Observe  that  the  endings  of  the  past  absolute  are  the  same  for  the  second 
and  for  the  third   conjugations. 


La  Colonne  Vendome,  Place  Vendome 


Lesson  121 

avoir 

etre 

venir 

faire 

eus  (y)* 

fus  (fy) 

vins  (ve) 

fis  (fi) 

eus  (y) 

fus  (fy) 

vins  (ve) 

fis  (fi) 

eut  (y) 

fut  (fy) 

vint  (vg) 

fit(fi) 

eftmes  (ym) 

fumes  (fym) 

vinmes  (veim) 

fimes  (fim) 

eutes  (yt) 

futes  (fyt) 

vintes  (veit) 

fites  (fit) 

eurent  (yir) 

furent  (fyir) 

vinrent  (veir) 

firent  (fi:r) 

241 


219.  Emploi.  The  past  absolute  is  used  to  denote  a  single 
act  in  past  time.  For  this  reason  it  is  frequently  called  the 
'^narrative  past'^  tense. 

1.  II  entra  dans  la  chambre,  He  entered  the  room, 

2.  II  partit  pour  Paris,  He  started  for  Paris. 

Note.  The  past  absolute  is  used  only  in  literary  style.  In  conver- 
sational style  never  use  the  past  absolute,  but  use  the  perfect  instead. 
Thus,  in  speaking,  one  would  say  11  est  entre,  for  11  entra;  11  est  parti  for 
11  partit. 

(a)  Distinction  between  the  Past  Absolute  and  the  Past 
Descriptive. 

The  past  absolute  narrates  a  single  act  in  past  time. 

The  past  descriptive  (imperfect)  describes  what  has  happened 
in  the  past,  or  denotes  what  was  happening,  or  happened 
recently. 


A  ce  moment  les  Anglais  etaient 
encore  devant  Orleans,  et  toute  la 
France  avalt  les  yeux  fixes  sur  la 
malheureuse  ville,  qui  resistait  avec 
courage,  mais  qui  allait  bientot 
manquer  de  vivres.  Jeanne,  a  la 
tete  de  sa  petite  armee,  penetra 
dans  Orleans  malgre  les  Anglais  . . . 

Les  courages  se  ranimerent. 
Alors  Jeanne  sortit  de  la  ville  pour 
attaquer  les  Anglais,  f 


At  that  moment  the  English  were 
still  before  Orleans^  and  all  France 
had  its  eyes  fixed  on  the  unfortunate 
city,  which  kept  resisting  courageous" 
ly,  hut  was  soon  going  to  lack  pro^ 
visions.  Joan,  at  the  head  of  her 
little  army,  penetrated  into  (or,  en- 
tered into)  Orleans  despite  the  Eng- 
lish. The  courage  (of  the  people) 
was  aroused.  Then  Joan  went  forth 
from  the  city  to  attack  the  English. 

I.   Conjuguez.     1.  Je  partis  il  y  a  neuf  jours,   tu  partis 
il  y  a  neuf  jours,  etc.     2.  Je  lui  dis  la  meme  chose,  tu  lui 

*  In  the  verb  avoir,  eu  is  pronounced  (y). 

t  From  Bruno's  le  Tour  de  la  France  par  deux  enfants. 


242  The  Elements  of  French 

dis  la  meme  chose,  etc.  3.  Je  lui  racontai  tout  ce  quails 
avaient  fait,  tu  lui  racontas  tout  ce  quails  avaient  fait,  etc.  4. 
J^arrivai  a  la  place  de  I'hotel  de  ville,  tu  arrivas  a  la  place  de 
rhotel  de  ville,  etc. 

II.  Exercice.  Change  the  verbs  in  the  perfect  in  the  follow- 
ing exercise  to  the  past  absolute: 

1.  Quand  les  Allemands  sont  arrives,  nous  nous  sommes  caches 
dans  les  caves.  2.  II  a  fallu  les  loger  pendant  huit  jours.  3.  lis 
ont  fait  s^uter  les  ponts.  4.  Un  eclat  a  perce  le  toit  de  notre 
grenier  et  a  rebondi  presque  sur  la  tete  de  notre  voisine.  5. 
Ma  soeur  est  accourue,  puis  a  ramasse  Feclat  dans  son  tablier. 
6.  II  lui  a  fait  un  trou,  car  il  etait  rouge.  7.  Quand  papa  est 
revenu,  on  lui  a  dit  de  racommoder  le  toit.  8.  Nous  lui  avons 
raconte  tout  ce  que  les  Allemands  avaient  fait  chez  nous. 

220.   The  principal  parts  of  a  verb  are  (1)  the  infinitive; 

(2)  the  present  participle;  (3)  the  past  participle;  (4)  the  present 
.indicative  (first  person  singular);  (5)  the  past  absolute  (first 

singular). 

1.  donner,  donnant,  donne,  je  donne,  je  donnai. 

2.  finir,  finissant,  fini,  je  finis,  je  finis. 

3.  perdre,  perdant,  perdu,  je  perds,  je  perdis. 

4.  avoir,  ayant,  eu  (y),  j'ai,  j*eus  (y). 

5.  etre,  etant,  ete,  je  suis,  je  fus. 

6.  venir,  venant,  venu,  je  viens,  je  vins. 

7.  faire,  faisant  (foza),  fait,  je  fais,  je  fis. 

Exercice.     Give  principal  parts  of:     (1)  racoAter;  (2)  vendre; 

(3)  choisir;  (4)  saisir;  (5)  descendre;  (6)  aimer. 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  Joan  of  Arc  marched  to  Orleans.  2. 
Behind  her  was  a  very  small  French  army.  3.  The  English 
attacked  her,  but  she  succeeded  in  penetrating  (in)  the  city. 
4.  Thus  she  saved  the  inhabitants,  who  were  going  to  lack 
provisions.  5.  When  she  entered  the  city,  courage  {courages) 
was  revived.  6.  All  France  fixed  its  eyes  upon  this  young 
girl.  7.  She  now  went  forth  from  the  city  to  attack  her  ene- 
mies.    8.  They  left  Orleans,  and  she  went  to  Rheims  {Reims). 


Lesson  122  243 

LESSON   122   (CENT  VINGT-DEUXifiME  LEgON) 

THE  PAST  ABSOLUTE  —  Continued 

VOCABULAIRE 

arracher  (ara/e),  to  tear  rencontre  (rakoitr),  f.,  meeting 

battre  (batr),  irreg.,  to  heat  sacrer  (sakre),  to  crown 

convert     (kuveir),     covered  (from      siege  (sje:3),  m.,  siege,  seat 

couvrir)  courir,  courant,  couru,  je  cours,  je 

des  (de),  from;  as  early  as  courus,  to  run 
Se  diriger  (s8diri3e),  to  direct  one's      croire,   croyant,   cms,   je   crois,   je 

self  cms,  to  believe 

ennemi  (enmi),  m.,  enemy  prendre,  prenant,  pris,  je    prends, 

fleche  (flej),  f.,  arrow  je  pris,  to  take 

fuite  (fqit),  f.,  flight  suivre,  suivant,  suivi,   je   suis,   je 

plaie  (pie),  f.,  sore;  wound  suivis,  to  follow 
rang  (ra),  m.,  rank;  line 

I.  JEANNE  D»ARC  A  REIMS* 

Des  la  premiere  rencontre,  elle  fut  blessee  et  tomba  de 
cheval.  Deja  le  peuple,  la  croyant  morte,  prenait  la  fuite; 
mais  elle,  arrachant  courageusement  la  fleche  restee  dans  la 
plaie  et  remontant  a  cheval,  courut  vers  les  retranchements 
des  Anglais.  Elle  marchait  au  premier  rang  et  enflammait 
ses  soldats  par  son  intrepidite;  toute  Tarmee  la  suivit,  et  les 
Ajiglais  furent  chasses.  Peu  de  jours  apres,  ils  etaient  forces 
de  lever  le  siege. 

Apres  Orleans,  Jeanne  se  dirigea  vers  Reims,  ou  elle  vou- 
lait  faire  sacrer  le  roi.  D'Orleans  a  Reims  la  route  etait  longue, 
couverte  d^ennemis.  Jeanne  les  battit  a  chaque  rencontre,  et 
son  armee  entra  victorieuse  a  Reims,  ou  le  roi  fut  sacre  dans 
la  grande  cathedrale. 

II.  Narrate  this  episode  in  French,  using  the  perfect  instead 
of  the  past  absolute. 

III.  Traduisez.  1.  The  English  used  to  be  enemies  of 
the  French.  2.  In  the  (au)  fifteenth  century  (siecle)^  the 
English  held  a  great  part  of  France.     3.  They  were  before 

*  From  Bruno's  le  Tour  de  la  France  par  deux  enfants. 


244  The  Elements  of  French 

the  important  city  of  Orleans.  4.  It  was  Joan  of  Arc  who 
saved  Orleans  from  the  English.  5.  She  entered  the  city 
on  horseback,  at  the  head  of  a  small  army.  6.  All  the 
French  began  to  struggle  now  against  their  enemies.  7. 
Unfortunately,  when  Joan  of  Arc  went  forth  from  the  city 
to  meet  the  English,  she  fell  from  her  horse.  8.  The  French 
were  afraid,  end  left  her,  believing  her  dead.  9.  When  they 
found  that  Joan  was  not  dead,  but  that  she  remounted  her 
horse,  they  followed  her  courageously.  10.  With  the  aid  of 
Joan  of  Arc,  the  French  forced  the  English  to  raise  the  siege  of 
Orleans.  11.  Then  Joan  of  Arc  entered  Rheims,  after  beating 
her  enemies  at  every  encounter.  12.  It  was  there  that  (the) 
king  Charles  VII  {sejpt)  was  crowned. 


LESSON   123   (CENT  VINGT-TROISlfiME  LEgON) 
FRENCH   CORRESPONDENCE 

VOCABULAIRE 

adresser  (adrese),  to  address  sentiment  (satimd),  m.,  sentiment 

coUegue  (koleg),  m.,  colleague  transmettre     (trasmetr),   to   trans- 

demarche  (demarj),  f.,  step  mil  (like  mettre) 
editeur  (editceir),  m.,  publisher 

221.  (a)  The  Envelope  (V Enveloppe) .  Observe  the  following 
style  of  address: 

Messieurs  Laplace,  Sanchez  et  C^^,* 
fiditeurs, 

3,  Rue  Seguier, 

Paris,  VI^t  France. 

Monsieur  le  Professeur  Jules  Lecomte, 
31,  Rue  Joubert, 

Villeneuve-sur-Yonne, 
(Yonne)J 
France. 

*  Abbreviation  for  Compagnie. 

t  The  number  of  the  arrondissement  (ward)  is  often  added. 

i  Name  of  the  department. 


Lesson  123  245 

Observe  the  following  directions  which  are  often  used  on 
envelopes : 

Aux  (bons)  soins  de  .  .  .  ,  care  of. 
(Priere  de)  faire  suivre,  .  .  .  ^  please  forward, 
E.  v.,  (  =En  Ville),   .  .  .  ,  city, 
Poste  restante,  .  .  .  ,  general  delivery. 
Urgent  (or  Presse),  .  .  .  urgent. 
Personnel,  .  .  .  ,  private. 

(h)   Date. 

Toulouse,  (le  or  ce)  T^  octobre,  1919. 

Paris,  (le  or  ce)  3  mars,  1916. 

(c)  Formal  Salutation  (Formules  Officielles).  Monsieur, 
Messieurs,  Madame,  Mademoiselle,  etc.,  are  regularly  used. 

Less  formal  salutations  are  Cher  Monsieur;  Mon  cher 
Monsieur;   Cher  ami,  etc. 

(For  other  forms,  see  Appendix.) 


I.  LETTRE   DE   RECOMMANDATION 

Mon  cher  collegue, 

Sur  la  demande  qui  m'a  ete  transmise  par  mon  ami,  le 
professeur  David,  je  vous  adresse  deux  cartes  pour  la  Chambre 
des  deputes.  Je  les  dois  a  mon  ami,  le  depute  Charles  Lemaitre. 
Vous  comprenez  qu'il  m'est  particulierement  agreable,  en 
ce  moment  solennel  de  Thistoire  des  democraties  (demokrasi), 
d^avoir  fait  cette  toute  petite  demarche  pour  un  Americain. 

Veuillez*  croire,  mon  cher  collegue,  k  mes  sentiments  bien 
devoues. 

Samuel  Belmont, 

Professeur  de  Droit  Constitutionnel. 

II.  Write  an  original  formal  letter  of  150  to  200  words. 

*  Veuillez,  (voeje),  as  well  as  voulez,  may  be  used  as  the  imperative,  second 
plural,  of  vouloir. 


246 


The  Elements  of  French 


Une  Visite  du  Facteur 


LESSON   124   (CENT  VINGT-QUATRlfiME  LEgON) 

REVISION 

I.  Passive  (all  tenses)  of: 

(1)  recevoir  (p.  part,  regu)] 

(2)  prendre. 

II.  Translate  in  as  many  ways  as  possible:  1.  That  is  not 
done  here.  2.  This  house  was  constructed  by  my  father. 
3.  She  never  was  understood.  4.  That  teacher  was  loved  by 
his  students.  5.  The  general  was  killed  by  a  bursting  shell. 
6.  They  were  admired  everywhere  (partout). 

III.  Principal  parts  of:  (1)  gagner;  (2)  partir;  (3)  sortir; 
(4)    suivre;    (5)    prendre;    (6)    courir. 

IV.  Conjugate,  past  absolute:  (1)  suivre;  (2)  prendre; 
(3)  courir;   (4)  venir;   (5)  faire;   (6)  etre;   (7)  avoir. 

V.  Write  an  original  letter  of  about  fifty  words. 


Lesson  125 


247 


VI.  Traduisez.  1.  That  is  a  difficult  lesson  to  understand. 
2.  The  Seine  is  crossed  by  the  Boulevard  St.  Germain.  3. 
At  the  Place  de  la  Concorde  is  a  bridge,  beyond  which  is 
situated  the  Chamber  of  Deputies.  4.  The  king  and  queen 
of  France  were  killed  during  the  French  Revolution.  5. 
Here  is  the  Latin  Quarter,  from  which  {d^ou)  the  Sorbonne 
is  one  block  (distant).  6.  The  tomb  of  Napoleon  is  one  of  the 
most  interesting  monuments  in  Paris.  7.  It  is  very  much 
admired  by  Americans.  8.  It  was  Joan  of  Arc  who  caused  {jit) 
(the)  King  Charles  VII  to  be  crowned.  9.  When  the  English 
seized  her,  the  French  were  afraid  to  help  her. 


LESSON   125   (CENT  VINGT-CINQUlfiME  LEgON) 

THE   PAST   SUBJUNCTIVE 

VOCABULAIRE 


afin  que  (afe  ka),  conj.,  in  order  that 
bruit  (brqi),  m.,  noise',  rumor 
causer  (koze),  to  cause;  talk 
creance  (kreais),  f.,  credence 
desordre  (dezordr),  m.,  disorder 
destiner  (destine),  to  destine 
Domremy  (doromi),  m.,  (village  in 
region  of  the  Vosges  Mountains) 
esprit    (espri),    m.,    spirit;    intelli- 
gence 
evaporer  (evapore),  to  evaporate 
illusion   (ilyzjS),  f.,  illusion;  vision 
imagination  (ima3inasj5),  f.,  imagi- 
nation 
incredulite    (ekredylite),    f.,    incre- 
dulity 
jeunesse  (3oen8s),  f.,  youth 
marier  (marje),  to  marry  "^ 
meler  (mele),  to  mix;  mh 


se  meler  a  (sa  mele  a),  to  meddle 
with 

melancolie  (melakoli),  f.,  melan- 
choly 

merveille  (merveij),  f.,  marvel 

noyer  (nwaje),  to  drown 

paysan  (peiza),  m.,  peasant 

pousser  (puse),  to  push;  extend 

propre  (propr),  own;  clean 

attribuer  (atribye),  to  attribute 

pretendre  (pretaidr),  to  pretend; 
claim 

rudesse  (rydes),  f.,  rudeness 

sante  (sate),  f.,  health 

tentateur  (tatatoe:r),  m.,  tempter; 
also  as  adj.,  tempting 

village  (vila:3),  m.,  village 

vision  (vizj5),  f.,  vision 

voix  (vwa),  f.,  voice 


*marier,  to  give  in  marriage,  as  Le  pere  marie  sa  fiUe,  The  father  marries 
(off)  his  daughter, 

se  marier,  to  get  married  to,  as  II  se  marie  avec  elle,  He  marries  her. 


248 


The  Elements  of  French 


222.  Past  Subjunctive  of  donner,  finir,  perdre,  avoir,  etre, 
venir,  faire. 

finir 
fini  sse  (finis) 
fini  sses  (finis) 
fini  t  (fini) 
fini  ssions  (finis j  5) 
fini  ssiez  (finis je) 
fini  ssent  (finis) 

etre 

fu  sse  (fys) 
fu  sses  (fys) 
f u  t  (fy) 
fu  ssions  (fys jo) 
fu  ssiez  (fysje) 
fu  ssent  (fys) 

faire 


donner 
donna  sse  (donas) 
donna  sses  (donas) 
donna  t  (dona) 
donna  ssions  (donas j 5) 
donna  ssiez  (donasje) 
donna  ssent  (donas) 

avoir 

eu  sse  (ys) 
eu  sses  (ys) 
eii  t  (y) 

eu  ssions  (ysjo) 
eu  ssiez  (ysje) 
eu  ssent  (ys) 


perdre 
perdi  sse  (perdis) 
perdi  sses  (psrdis) 
perdi  t  (perdi) 
perdi  ssions   (perdis jo) 
perdi  ssiez  (perdisje) 
perdi  ssent  (perdis) 

venir 
vin  sse  (veis) 
vin  sses  (ve:s) 
vin  t  (ve) 
vin  ssions  (vesjo) 
vin  ssiez  (vesje) 
vin  ssent  (vcis) 


fi  sse  (fis) 
fi  sses  (fis) 
f  i  t  (fi) 


fi  ssions  (fisjo) 
fi  ssiez  (fisje) 
fi  ssent  (fis) 


Note.  To  form  the  past  subjunctive,  take  the  second  singular  of  the 
past  absolute,  and  add  — se. 

alias  +  se  (aller);  fis  +  se  (faire);  vins  +  se  (venir). 

223.  Sequence.  The  past  subjunctive  is  almost  never  used 
in  conversation,  or  in  colloquial  style.  In  formal  literary 
style,  the  following  rules  for  sequence  apply: 

(a)  After  the  present  or  future  tenses  in  the  governing  clauses, 
use  the  present  subjunctive. 

(6)  After  other  tenses,  use  the  past  subjunctive. 

Present.  Je  desire  que  vous  me  racontiez  cela,  I  desire  that  you  tell 
me  that. 

Future.  Je  desirerai  que  vous  me  racontiez  cela,  I  shall  desire  that 
you  teU  me  that. 

Past  Descriptive.  Je  desirais  que  vous  me  racontassiez  cela,  / 
desired  that  you  should  tell  me  that. 

Past  Absolute.  Je  desirai  que  vous  me  racontassiez  cela,  /  de- 
sired that  you  should  tell  me  that. 


Lesson  125  249 

Past  Future,  or  Conditional.  Je  desirerais  que  vous  me  racontas- 
siez  cela,  /  should  desire  that  you  should  tell  me  that. 

Perfect.  J'ai  desire  que  vous  me  racontassiez*  cela,  /  desired  that 
you  should  tell  me  that. 

I.  Conjuguez.  1.  II  n'etait  pas  content  que  je  vinsse, 
.  .  .  que  tu  vinsses,  etc.  2.  Mon  oncle  voulait  que  je  sor- 
tisse  du  college,  ...  que  tu  sortisses  du  college,  etc.  3. 
Mon  pere  regretterait  que  je  me  melasse  aux  hommes  de 
guerre,  .  .  .  que  tu  te  melasses  aux  hommes  de  guerre,  etc.  4. 
II  demandait  que  je  lui  donnasse  de  F argent,  .  .  .  que  tu  lui 
donnasses  de  Targent.  5.  II  desirait  que  je  jouasse  avec  lui, 
...  que  tu  jouasses  avec  lui,  etc. 

II.  JEANNE  D'ARC   A  DOMREMYf 

Son  pere  entendit  avec  peine  ces  bruits  de  visions  et  de 
merveilles  sous  son  toit  de  paysan.  II  attribuait  ces  melan- 
colies  et  ces  illusions  de  sa  fiUe  a  des  desordres  de  sante.  II 
desirait  la  marier,  afin  que  les  distractions  de  la  mere  de  famille 
fissent  evaporer  ces  imaginations. 

II  poussa  quelquefois  Tincredulite  jusqu^a  la  rudesse.  II 
dit  a  Jeanne  que,  '^s'il  apprenait  qu'elle  donnat  creance  k  ses 
pretendus  entretiens  avec  les  esprits  tentateurs  et  qu^elle  se 
melat  aux  hommes  de  guerre,  il  la  voudrait  voir  noyee  par  ses 
freres,  ou  qu'il  la  noierait  lui-meme  de  ses  propres  mains.^' 

III.  Exercice  Oral.  1.  Qui  etait  Jeanne  d^Arc?  2.  Quel 
village  habitait-elle?  3.  Qu^est-ce  qu'elle  entendait?  4.  Avait- 
elle  des  melancolies?  5.  Est-ce  que  son  pere  entendait 
les  memes  voix  qu'elle?  6.  Est-ce  que  les  autres  paysans 
savaient  ce  qu^elle  entendait?  7.  Son  pSre  etait-il  content 
que  les  voisins  le  sussent?  8.  Voulait-il  qu^elle  parttt  a  la 
guerre?     9.  Jeanne    d^Arc    etait-elle    mariee?     10.  Son    pere 

*  When  the  auxiliary  is  in  the  present  tense,  the  verb  of  the  dependent 
clause  is  frequently  put  in  the  present  tense. 

J'ai  desire  que  vous  me  racontiez  cela,  I  {have)  desired  that  you  should  teU 
me  that. 

fFrom  Lamartine,  Jeanne  d'Arc, 


250  The  Elements  of  French 

voulait-il  qu'elle  se  mariat?  11.  Son  pere  cherchait-il  a  la 
punir?  12.  Comment  allait-il  la  punir?  13.  Croyez-vous 
qu'il  allait  la  punir  lui-meme?  14.  Aurait-il  commande  que 
ses  freres  la  noyassent?  15.  Pensait-il  que  sa  fille  se  portat 
bien? 

IV.  Traduisez.  1.  The  father  of  Joan  of  Arc  was  rather 
an  old  man.  2.  The  family  inhabited  Domremy,  a  village 
which  is  situated  in  the  east  of  France.  3.  Joan  used  to 
hear  voices  and  to  have  visions.  4.  She  was  sure  that  she 
was  destined  to  be  the  liberatress  of  France.  5.  Her  father  was 
a  man  who  had  no  visions.  6.  He  did  not  like  his  daughter  to 
hear  voices.  7.  He  was  not  pleased  that  she  should  always 
be  melancholy,  and  should  have  visions.  8.  Especially,  he 
did  not  desire  the  neighbors  to  talk  about  it.  9.  He  did  not 
think  that  his  daughter  was  feeling  well.  10.  On  the  contrary, 
he  attributed  her  visions  to  disordered  health  (disorders  of 
health) . 


LESSON   126   (CENT-VINGT-SIXifiME  LEgON) 

THE   SUBJUNCTIVE  — Continued 

Study  the  Appendix,  §§  322-326. 

VOCABULAIRE 

appartenir    (apartaniir),    irreg.,    to  repartir   (rapartiir),   irreg.,   to  start 

belong  again 

d*avance  (d  avais),  in  advance  reporter  (raporte),  to  take  back 

bah  (ba),  excl.,  pshaw!  secret  (sakre),  m.,  secret 

cardinal  (kardinal),  m.,  cardinal  sourire  (suriir),  m.,  smile 

chauffeur  (Jofoeir),  m.,  chauffeur  valoir  (valwair),  irreg.,  to  be  worth 

confier  (kofje),  to  confide;  intrust  visage  (vizais),  m..,face 

deviner  (dovine),  to  guess  vrai  (vre),  adj.,  true 

diligence  (dili3a:s),  f.,  diligence  a  Pendroit  de,  in  regard  to 

s'ecrier  (s  ekrie),  to  cry  out;  exclaim  faire  diligence,  to  make  speed 

eminence  (eminais),  f.,  eminence  qui  que  ce  soit,  anybody;  whoever 

milady  (miledi),  f.,  my  lady  soyez  tranquille,  rest  assured 

possible  (posibl),  adj.,  possible  valoir  la  peine,  to  be  worth  while 

probable  (probabl),  adj.,  probable  vouloir  dire,  to  mean 


Lesson  126  251 

224.  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  clauses  introduced  by  ex- 
pressions meaning  whoever ,  whatever ^  etc.,  used  with  conces- 
sive force.     (See  Appendix,  §312,  (6),  note.) 

1.  Je  ne  ferai  pas  cela  pour  qui  que  ce  soit,  /  shall  not  do  that 

for  anybody  -whomsoever. 

2.  Quelques  precautions  que  vous  preniez,   Whatever  precautions 

you  may  take. 

225.  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  subject  clauses  after  im- 
personal verbs  expressing  (1)  approval  or  disapproval;  (2) 
emotion;  and  (3)  doubt  or  shght  probability,  e.g.: 

(1)  il  est  bon,  it  is  good  il  est  juste,  it  is  just 

il  est  important,  it  is  important  il  est  necessaire,  it  is  necessary 

il  est  temps,  it  is  time  il  vaut  mieux,  it  is  better 

(2)  c'est  dommage,  it  is  a  pity  il  est  curieux,  it  is  strange 

(3)  il  est  impossible,  it  is  impossible  il  se  peut,  it  is  possible 
il  est  possible,  it  is  possible  il  est  rare,  it  is  rare 

(a)  After  many  important  expressions,  which  are  usually 
followed  by  the  indicative,  the  subjunctive  is  used  when  un- 
certainty is  expressed  (generally  by  a  negative  or  an  inter- 
rogative), e.g.: 

11  est  certain,  it  is  certain  il  me  semble,  it  seems  to  me 

il  est  evident,  it  is  evident  il  est  sur,  it  is  sure 

il  est  probable,  it  is  probable 

Note.     II  semble  is  regularly  followed  by  the  subjunctive. 

II  semble  qu'il  ait  peur.  It  seems  that  he  is  afraid. 

However,  when  no  doubt  is  implied,  il  semble  is  followed  by  the 
indicative. 

II  semble  que  vous  avez  raison.  It  seems  that  you  are  right.  (Cited, 
Littre). 

I.  LA  VISITE  DE  ROCHEFORT* 

(Lady  Clarick,  known  as  Milady,  an  emissary  of  Cardinal  Richelieu, 
and  the  arch-enemy  of  D'Artagnan  and  of  the  three  musketeers,  has 
taken  refuge  in  a  Carmelite  convent.  There  she  finds  Mme.  Bonacieux, 
with  whom  D'Artagnan  is  in  love.  Mme.  Bonacieux  has  indiscreetly 
revealed  to  Milady  the  fact  that  D'Artagnan  expects  shortly  to  visit  the 
convent.     A  horse's  gallop  is  heard.     Milady  is  much  relieved  to  find 

*Adapted  from  Dumas'  les  Trots  mousquetaires. 


252  The  Elements  of  French 

that  the  rider  is  not  D'Artagnan,  but  the  Comte  de  Rochefort,  another 
emissary  of  the  Cardinal.  In  a  private  conversation,  Rochefort  tells 
Milady  to  wait  at  the  convent  until  she  receives  further  orders  from  the 
Cardinal.) 

Aliens,   dit  milady,   je  dois  attendre  ici  ou  dans  les 

environs. 

Seulement,  dites-moi  d^avance  ou  vous  attendrez  des 

nouvelles  du  cardinal,  que  je  sache  toujours  ou  vous  re- 
trouver. 

ficoutez,  il  est  possible  que  je  ne  puisse  rester  ici. 

Pourquoi? 

Oubliez-vous  que  mes  ennemis  puissent  arriver  d^un 

moment  a  T autre? 

C'est  vrai;  mais  croyez-vous  que  cette  petite  femme 

aille  echapper  a  son  Eminence? 

Bah!   dit   milady   avec   un   sourire   qui   n'appartenait 

qu'a  elle,  vous  oubliez  que  la  meilleure  amie  qu^elle  ait  au 
monde  c'est  moi. 

Ah!    c^est    vrai!    je    puis    done    dire    au    cardinal,    a 

Fendroit  de  cette  femme.  .  . 

Qu'il  soit  tranquille. 

Voila  tout? 

II  saura  ce  que  cela  veut  dire. 

II  le  devinera.     Maintenant,  voyons,  que  dois-je  faire? 

Repartir    a    Finstant    meme ;    il    me    semble    que    les 

nouvelles  que  vous  reportez  valent  bien  la  peine  que  Ton 
fasse  diligence. 

A  peine  Rochefort  fut-il  sorti,  que  madame  Bonacieux 
rentra.     Elle  trouva  milady  le  visage  riant. 

Get  homme,  dit  milady  en  baissant  la  voix,  c'est  mon 

frere. 

Votre  frere!  s'ecria  madame  Bonacieux. 

Eh  bien!  il  n'y  a  que  vous  qui  sachiez  ce  secret,  mon 

enfant;  si  vous  le  confiez  a  qui  que  ce  soit  au  monde,  je 
serai  perdue,  et  vous  aussi,  peut-etre. 


Lesson  126  253 

II.  Traduisez.  1.  She  must  wait  in  this  neighborhood 
(Two  ways).  2.  It  is  necessary  for  Lady  Clarick  to  wait  for 
news  of  the  Cardinal.  3.  Let  the  Cardinal  know  at  all 
times  what  she  is  going  to  do.  4.  It  is  not  probable  that 
Milady  can  remain  a  long  time  in  the  convent.  5.  She  does 
not  forget  that  her  enemies  may  find  her  there.  6.  It  is  also 
important  that  Mme.  Bonacieux,  a  friend  of  D^Artagnan, 
should  not  escape  from  the  Cardinal.  7.  Milady  is  Madame's 
worst  enemy,  but  pretends  to  be  the  best  friend  that  she  has 
in  the  world.  8.  Let  the  Cardinal  rest  assured:  Milady  will 
not  permit  Mme.  Bonacieux  to  escape,  for  anything  whatso- 
ever. 9.  She  tells  Rochefort  to  go  at  once  to  see  the 
Cardinal,  because  it  seems  that  he  has  important  news. 

III.  Exercice  Oral  ou  Ecrit.  1.  This  is  the  first  book  that 
I  ever  read.  2.  That  is  the  only  newspaper  that  is  worth 
reading.  3.  Find  me  a  chauffeur  who  is  able  to  drive  me  to 
the  Gare  d^Orleans  in  ten  minutes.  4.  Whoever  he  may  be, 
he  is  not  our  friend.  5.  Whatever  money  he  may  have 
earned  he  has  lost.  6.  It  seems  that  it  is  raining  already. 
7.  It  is  possible  that  they  are  going  there;  it  is  better  that 
they  remain  here.  8.  Let  him  say  what  he  thinks.  9.  Let 
them  understand  what  has  been  done.  10.  Is  it  true  that 
they  have  spent  (passed)  the  summer  in  France? 


GRAMMATICAL  APPENDIX* 


THE   NOUN 

226.  The  article  should  be  learned  with  the  noun.  The  following 
rules  may  also  help  the  student  in  learning  genders  in  French. 

The  gender  of  a  French  noun  is  either  masculine  or  feminine.  Most 
nouns  denoting  males  are  masculine;  most  nouns  denoting  females  are 
feminine. 

227.  A  Few  General  Rules  for  Determining  Gender,  (a)  In  general, 
nouns  from  Latin  masculine  or  neuter  nouns  are  masculine. 

homo  (hominem)  =  homme  (m.);  ferrum  =  fer  (m.). 

Exceptions.  Numerous,  particularly  neuter  plurals  in  -a,  such  as  arma  = 
arme  (f.). 

(6)  Nouns  from  Latin  feminines  or  neuter  plurals  in  a  are  regularly 
feminine. 

manus  =  niain  (f.);  battalia  =  bataille  (f.). 

228.  Gender  Shown  by  Endings  of  Nouns,  (a)  The  following  nouns 
are  generally  masculine:  those  which  end  in 

1.  Any  vowel  sound  (except  unaccented  e),  and  except  also  ab- 

stract nouns  in  -te,  -tie) ; 

2.  Any  consonant  (except  -son,  -ion,  and  most  abstract  nouns  in 

-eur) ; 

3.  -acle,  -age,  -aire,  -a&me,  -erne,  -ice,  -ige,  -isme,  -iste,  -tere. 

Exceptions.  Helice,  screw;  milice,  militia;  image,  picture;  cage,  cage;  nage, 
swimming;  plage,  beach;  rage,  rage;  paire,  pair;  etc. 

(fi)  Feminine  endings  are: 

1.  Unaccented  e  after  a  double  consonant  or  a  vowel;  abstract 

nouns  in  -te,  -tie; 

2.  Most  nouns  in  -son,  -ion,  and  usually  abstract  nouns  in  -eur; 

3.  Most  nouns  in  -ace,  -ade;  -ale,  -ance,  -ane,  -ence;  -euse,  -iere, 

-ine,  -oire,  -ole,  -ose,  -ude,  -ule,  -ure. 

Exercise.     Apply  the  above  rules  to  the  following  list. 

*  This  appendix  aims  to  give  merely  additional  points  of  French  grammar 
which  are  important  to  beginning  students. 

255 


256 


The  Elements  of  French 


Masculine 

Feminine 

chapeau 

chap  ell  e 

duel 

pelle 

oeillet 

ceillette 

jardinier 

jardiniere 

parti 

partie 

gueux 

gueuse 

dos 

dose 

tartan 

tartane 

matins  (pi.) 

matines  (pi.) 

mot 

motte 

ton 

tonne 

lit 

marmite 

Masculine 

Feminine 

fil 

file 

alcool 

sole 

devoir 

histoire 

parleur 

parleuse 

banc 

planche 

lac 

place 

cafe 

melee 

defaut 

faute 

mal 

malle 

tas 

tasse 

gageur 

gageure 

paradis 

bise 

Note.     Nouns  which  do  not  come  under  the  rules  stated  usually  follow 
the  analogy  of  adjectives. 

229.   Nouns  Having  Two  Genders.     Observe  the  following:     (a)  A 
few  nouns  are  masculine  or  feminine  according  to  natural  gender. 
un  or  une  enfant;  un  or  une  artiste;  un  or  une  eleve. 

(6)  Certain  other  nouns  have  different  meanings,   according  to  the 
gender: 

un  poele,  a  stove,  but  une  poele,  a  frying  pan;  un  manche,  a  handle, 
but  une  manche,  a  sleeve;  un  livre,  a  book,  but  une  livre,  a 
pound;  un  page,  a  page  (young  attendant),  but  une  page,  a 
page  (of  a  book);  un  critique,  a  critic  (writer  of  criticisms),  but 
une  critique,  a  criticism. 


230.   Forming  the  Feminine  of  Nouns, 
formed  by  adding  e: 


(a)  The  feminine  is  sometimes 


Masculine 

Feminine 

ami,  friend 
parent,  relative 
president,  president 
Americain,  American 

amie 
parente 
presidente 
Americaine 

(6)  by  adding  sse  to  nouns  ending  in  e  or  e. 

Masculine 

Feminine 

abbe,  abbot 
comte,  count 
hote,  host;  guest 
maitre,  master;  teacher 
tigre,  tiger 
traitre,  Iraitor 

abbesse 

comtesse 

hotesse 

maitresse 

tigresse 

traitresse 

(c)  by  changing  en,  on,  to  enne,  onne. 

Masculine 

Feminine 

chien,  dog 
lion,  lion 

chienne 
lionne 

Victor  Hugo 


4 


Grammatical  Appendix  257 

{d)  by  changing  eur  to  euse. 

Masculine  Feminine 

flaneur,  loiterer  flaneuse 

farceur,  joker  farceuse 

glaneur,  gleaner  glaneuse 

parleur,  talker  parleuse 

(e)  Masculine  nouns  in  -teur  often  have  a  feminine  either  in  -teuse 
or  -trice. 

Masculine  Feminine 

acheteur,  purchaser  acheteuse 

porteur,  hearer  porteuse 

acteur,  actor  actrice 

fondateur,  founder  fondatrice 

(/)  Some  nouns  denoting  occupations  usually  confined  to  men  do  not 
change  in  the  feminine. 

Masculine  and  Feminine  Masculine  and  Feminine 

auteur,  author  partisan,  partisan 

chef,  chief;  head  cook  peintre,  painter 

^crivain,  writer  professeur,  professor 

imposteur,  impostor  t^moin,  witness 

(g)  Occasionally  the  feminine  is  formed  by  adding  -ine. 

Masculine  Feminine 

heros,  hero  heroine 

(h)  Gens  (pL,  m.  or/.),  people,  persons,  is  treated  as  a  masculine  noun 
when  a  modifying  adjective  follows  it;  as  a  feminine  noun  when  a  modify- 
ing adjective  precedes  it.  However,  when  the  masculine  form  of  the 
preceding  adjective  has  a  mute  e  in  the  last  syllable,  gens  is  masculine. 

De  bonnes  gens,  but  Tous  les  jeunes  gens;  also,  Les  gens  heureux. 

231.  Compound  Nouns.  They  are  usually  masculine  if  composed  of 
a  noun  and  a  governing  verb: 

Un  porte-plume,  a  pen-holder;  un  porte-monnaie,  a  pocketbook;  un 
cure-dent,  a  toothpick;  un  casse-noix,  a  nutcracker;  un  coupe- 
file,  a  pass  (for  purchasing  tickets,  etc.). 
Note.  There  are  a  few  exceptions,  such  as  names  of  flowers  or  plants. 
Perce-feuille  (/.),  hare's  ear;  perce-muraille  (/.),  pellitory;  passe- 
rose,  (/.),  hollyhock;  perce-neige  (/.),  snowdrop;  sauve-vie, 
(/.),  wall-rue. 

(a)   Other  compounds  regularly  take  the  gender  of  the  principal  noun. 
Un  wagon-poste,  A  mail  coach. 


258  The  Elements  of  French 

232.  Plurals  of  Nouns  and  Adjectives. 

(o)  Nouns  and  adjectives  in  -s,  -x,  and  nouns  in  -z  are  invariable, 
les  bras,  the  arms;  les  prix,  the  prices;  les  nez,  the  noses. 

(b)  The  following  seven  nouns  in  -ou  take  -x  in  the  plural: 

hijouix) ^jewel{s)  genou (x), /cnee(s)  pou{x),  louse;  lice 

caillou(x),  pebble(s)  hibou(x),  owl(s) 

chou(x),  cabbage(s)  joujou(x),  plaything{s) 

(c)  Nouns  and  adjectives  in  -al,  and  a  few  nouns  in  -ail,  change  these 
endings  to  -aux  in  the  plural. 

1.  animal,  animaux,  animal. 

2.  special,  speciaux,  special. 

3.  travail,  travaux,  work. 
Exception,  bal(s),  ballis)  (meaning  dancels]). 

233.  Nouns  Having  Irregular  Plurals. 
Singular  Plural 

aieul,  m.,  grandsire  aieuls,  grandsires 

a'ieux,  ancestors 
ciel,  m..,'  sky  ciels,  skies  (in  painting; 

cieux,  heaven;  skies 
ceil,  m.,  eye  yeux,  eyes 

234.  In  the  case  of  compound  nouns  consisting  of  two  nouns  or  of  a 
noun  and  an  adjective,  both  elements  are  usually  pluralized. 

Singular  Plural 

chou-fleur,  cauliflower  choux-fleurs 

coff re-fort,  strongbox  coflf res-forts 

wagon-lit,  sleeping  car  wagons-lits 

(6)  In  the  case  of  compound  nouns  joined  by  a  preposition  the  object 
of  the  preposition  does  not  take  the  plural  form. 

Singular  Plural 

arc-en-ciel,  rainbow  arcs-en-ciel 

chef-d'oeuvre,  masterpiece  chefs-d'oeuvre 

(c)  The  verbal,   adverbial,  and  prepositional  elements  in  compound 
words  are  not  pluralized. 

Singular  Plural 

avant-garde,  vanguard  avant-gardes 

arriere-pensee,  m,ental  reservation  arriere-pensees 

passe-partout,  skeleton  key  passe-partout 

235.  Proper  names  usually  are  invariable. 

Les  deux  Corneille,  The  two  Corneilles. 
Exceptions.     A  few  historical  names,  like  les  Cesars,  les  Tudors,  etc. 


Grammatical  Appendix  259 

THE   ARTICLE 

236.  Omission  of  the  Article  in  the  Partitive  Construction.  When  a 
preceding  adjective  is  regarded  as  an  essential  part  of  the  noun,  the  article 
is  not  omitted  in  the  partitive  construction. 

des  petits  pois,  French  (small)  peas. 
Note.     In  conversation  it  is  not  unusual  to  hear  du  bon  pain,  etc. 

237.  After  a  verb  or  an  adjective  normally  followed  by  de,  the  article 
is  regularly  omitted. 

1.  II  remplit  la  bouteille  dTeau,  He  fills  the  bottle  with  water, 

2.  La  ville  est  pleine  de^monde,  The  city  is  full  qf^people. 

238.  In  the  Partitive  Construction,  the  article  is  omitted  after  ni .  . . 
ni,  sans  .  .  .  ni,  and  a  few  other  expressions. 

1.  II  n*a  ni  pain  ni  viande,  He  has  neither  bread  nor  meat.  (Partitive.) 

2.  Sans  crainte  ni  faiblesse,  Without  fear  qr_weakness. 

3.  On  ne  tient  compte  ni  de  Phistoire  ni  de^  faits,  They  take  ac- 

count neither  of  history  nor  of  the  facts  (not  partitive) . 

239.  Article  Used  Distributively.  The  article  is  used  distributively 
to  take  the  place  of  the  English  a,  of  weight,  number,  and  measure. 

1.  Dix  sous  la  piece.  Ten  cents  apiece. 

2.  Cinq  francs  la  douzaine,  Five  francs  a  dozen. 

(a)  In  other  cases,  par  is  ordinarily  used  to  express  price,  e.g.,  dix 
francs  par  jour,  ten  francs  a  day.  Note  also,  une  fois  par  mois,  once  a 
month. 

240.  The  article  is  omitted  in  many  set  expressions. 

k  cheval,  on  horseback;  en  automobile,  in  an  automobile;  i  pied, 
on  foot;  en  ete,  in  summer;  en  voiture,  in  a  carriage;  par  exemple, 
for  example;  sans  peur  et  sans  reproche,  without  fear  and  with- 
out reproach. 

241.  With  names  of  countries,  the  article  is  usually  omitted  after  de, 
from,  and  in  adjective  phrases  with  de. 

1.  un  chapeau  de  paille,  a  straw  hat. 

2.  une  piece  ^* or,  a  gold  piece. 

3.  les  vins  ji'Espagne,  the  wines  of  Spain. 

242.  The  article  is  not  usually  used  with  the  names  of  cities  or  towns, 
unless  the  noun  is  modified,  or  when  the  article  is  part  of  the  name. 

la  Nouvelle-Orleans,  New  Orleans;  la  Haie,  The  Hague;  le 
Havre,  Havre. 


260 


The  Elements  of  French 

ADJECTIVES 


243.  Orthographical  Changes  of  Adjectives.  In  the  feminine,  the 
following  changes  occur  frequently  in  the  endings  of  the  masculine  adjec- 
tive: -f  >  -v;  -c  >  -ch  or  -qu;  -g>  -gu;  -x>-s;  -an,  -en,  -on  double  the 
final  n;  -el,  -il,  -ol  double  the  final  1. 


Masculine 

Feminine 

Meaning 

dernier 

derniere* 

last 

cher 

chere* 

dear 

complet 

complete* 

complete 

muet 

muettef 

dumb 

cruel 

cruellef 

cruel 

gentil 

gentille  (3dti:j)t 

^niee 

bas 

basse 

low 

bon 

bonne 

good 

ancien 

ancienne 

ancient 

actif 

active 

active 

neuf 

neuve 

new  (newly  made) 

heureux 

heureuse 

happy 

flatteur 

flatteuse 

flattering 

blanc 

blanche 

white 

public 

publique 

public 

turc 

turque 

Turkish 

grec 

grecque 

Greek 

long 

longue 

long 

faux 

fausse 

false 

244.  The  following  five  adjectives  have  two  forms  in  the  masculine 
singular.  Note  that  feminine  forms  come  from  the  masculine  forms 
ending  in  -1. 


Singular 
Masculine  Feminine 


beau 

bel 

fou 

fol 

mou 

mol 

nouVeau 

nouvel 

vieux 

vieil 


belle 

foUe 

moUe 

nouvelle 

vieille 


Masculine 
beaux 

fous 


nouveaux 


Plural 

Feminine 

belles 

folles 

molles 

nouvelles 

vieilles 


Meaning 

beautiful 

crazy 

soft 

new 

old 


*  Takes  e  to  avoid  mute  e's  in  successive  syllables. 

t  Doubles  consonant  to  avoid  mute  e's  in  successive  syllables. 

t  111  is  regularly  pronounced  (i:j)  except  at  the  beginning  of  a  word. 

1.  famille  {i ami:']),  family:  fille  (fi:j),  daughter. 

2.  illustration  (ilystrajo). 

Exceptions,     mille  (mil),  a  thousand;  ville  (vil),  a  city;  tranquille  (trakil), 
quiet. 


Grammatical  Appendix  261 

245.  An  Adjective  Modifying  Nouns  of  Different  Genders  takes  the 
masculine  plural  form. 

De  Peau  et  du  pain  ezcellents,  Excellent  water  and  bread. 
Note.     Demi  is  invariable  before  a  noun,  variable  after. 

1.  Une  demi-heure,  Half  an  hour. 

2.  Une  heure  et  demie,  An  hour  and  a  half. 

246.  Irregular  Comparison  of  Adjectives. 

Positive  Comparative  Superlative 

bon,  good  meilleur  le  meilleur 

mauvals,6ad  (Pf^  .  (}« PJ'« 

l^plus  mauvais  [le  plus  mauvais 

/moindre,  less  /le  moindre,  least 

>lus  petit,  the  smallest 


...  jj  fmoindre,  less  fie  moir 

^       '  \plus  petit,  smaller  \le  plus 

(a)  After  a  superlative,  translate  in  by  de. 

New- York  est  la  plus  grande  ville  des  Etats-Unis,   New    York  is 
the  largest  city  in  the  United  States. 

247.  Position  of  Adjectives.  In  General.  When  used  in  a  literal 
sense,  to  distinguish  or  to  define,  adjectives  regularly  follow  the  noun. 
When  used  in  a  figurative  sense,  or  to  denote  quaUties  which  are  considered 
as  essential  to  the  noun,  adjectives  regularly  precede  the  noun. 

1.  TJne  vie  glorieuse,  non  pas  une  vie  honteuse,  A  glorious,  not  a 

shameful  life  (distinguishes)  - 

2.  Un  glorieuz  martyr^  A  glorious  martyr  {denotes  essential  quality). 

248.  Position  of  Adjectives.  The  following  very  common  adjectives 
regularly  precede  the  noun: 

beau  grand 

gros 
bon  jeune 

249.  Of  the  adjectives  used  to  distinguish  or  to  define,  the  following 
classes  are  especially  Ukely  to  follow  the  noun: 

1.  Those  denoting  physical  qualities,  such  as  shape  or  color. 

1.  La  table  ronde,  The  round  table. 

2.  Le  crayon  rouge,  The  red  pencil. 

2.  Those  denoting  nationaUty,  religion,  or  derived  from  proper  nouns. 

1.  L'usage  americain,  American  usage. 

2.  Un  orateur  protestant,  A  Protestant  orator. 

3.  Participles  employed  as  adjectives. 

Des  paroles  bien  pejsees.  Well  weighed  words. 


joli 

petit 

long 

vieux 

mauvais 

vUain 

262 


The  Elements  of  French 


4.     Adjectives  having  more  syllables  than  the  noun. 

Du  vin  excellent,  (Some)  excellent  wine. 

Note.     When  two  or  more  adjectives  are  used  to  modify  a  noun,  they 
usually  follow  the  rules  given  above. 

La  belle  maison  blanche,  The  beautiful  white  house. 
Belle  precedes  maison  because  it  belongs  to  the  list  of  common  adjectives 
which  regularly  precede  the  noun.     Blanche  follows  the  noun,  because  it  is 
an  adjective  of  color. 

However,  when  adjectives  are  connected   by   a   conjunction,    both   either 
precede  or  follow. 

Un  livre  bon  et  interessant,  A  good  and  interesting  book. 

250.   Adjectives  Having  Different  Meanings  According  to  Position. 


ancien 

brave 

cher 

dernier 

grand 

honnete 

malhonnete 

mechant 

nouveau 

pauvre 

premier 

propre 

seul 

triste 


Before  Noun 

former 

worthy   • 

dear  (beloved) 

last  (of  series) 

great 

honest 

dishonest 

disagreeable 

new  (additional) 

poor  (wretched) 

first  (of  a  series) 

own 

only 

a  poor  kind  of 


After  Noun 

ancient 

brave 

dear  (expensive) 

last  (most  recent) 

tall 

polite 

impolite 

wicked 

new  (newly  made) 

poor  (needy) 

raw  (of  materials) 

clean 

alone 

sad 


ADVERBS 
261.   Note  the  following  adverbs  in  -ement: 

Adjective  Adverb 

aveugle,  blind  aveuglement 

commode,  comfortable  commodement 

conforme,  in  conformity  (with)  conformement 

'                     confus,  confused  confusement 

enorme,  enormous  6normement 

immense,  immense  immensement 

obscur,  obscure  obscurement 

precis,  precise  precisement 

profond,  deep  profondement 

uniforme,  uniform  uniformement 

252.   Adverbs  from  adjectives  in  -ant  and  -ent  end  in  -amment,  -em- 
ment. 

Adjectives  Adverbs 

616gant,  elegant  ^legamment 

evident,  evident  ^videmment 


Grammatical  Appendix    '  263 

(a)  Note  the  following: 

Adjectives  Adverbs 

gentil,  nice  gentiment 

bref,  brief  brievement 

impuni,  unpunished  impunement,  with  impunity 

traltre,  treacherous  traltreusement,  treacherously 

253.  Certain  Adjectives  Used  as  Adverbs  in  Fixed  Expressions. 

Couter  cher,  to  cost  dear;  aller  droit,  to  go  straight;  sentir  bon,  to 
smell  good;  tenir  bon,  to  hold  firm. 

254.  Adverbial  Expressions.  The  following  are  a  few  adverbial 
expressions : 

a  bon  marche,  cheap  en  haut,  above;  upstairs 

k  droite,  to  the  right  la-bas,  yonder 

a  gauche,  to  the  left  la-dessus,  thereupon 

k  peine,  scarcely  .     sans  doute,  without  doubt 

k  peu  pres,  almost  tant  mieux,  so  much  the  better 

au  moins,  at  least  tant  pis,  so  much  the  worse 

ga  et  la,  here  and  there  tout  k  Pheure,  presently;  a  little  while 

d'ordinaire,  ordinarily  ago 

d*ou,  whence  de  bonne  heure,  early 

en  avant,  forward  tout  de  suite,  immediately 

en  bas,  below;  downstairs  tout  d'un  coup,  suddenly 

255.  Irregular  Comparison  of  Adverbs. 

Positive  Comparative  Superlative 

bien,  well  mieux  le  mieux 

mA,hadly  (Pj^         ,  (!« P'^ 

*         ^  \plus  mal  \le  plus  mal 

beaucoup,  much  plus  le  plus 

peu,  little  moins,  less  le  moins 

256.  Position  of  Adverbs.  As  a  rule,  adverbs  immediately  follow  the 
verb. 

n  venait  tou jours  a  midi.  He  always  came  at  noon. 

(a)  Short  Adverbs  —  Position.  They  come  between  the  auxihary 
and  the  past  participle,  in  compound  tenses. 

1.  II  a  mal  joue.  He  has  played  badly. 

2.  lis  ont  bien  fait,  They  have  done  well. 

(6)  The  following  adverbs  must  always  follow  the  past  participle  in 
compound  tenses:  autrefois,  hier,  aujourd*hui,  demain,  tdt,  tard,  ici,  li, 
ailleurs,  partout. 

EUe  est  arrivSe  aujourd'hui.  She  arrived  today. 

(c)  Negative  Adverbs  —  Position.  When  used  with  an  infinitive, 
they  precede. 

1.  II  ne  pent  pas  aller,  He  cannot^  go  (is  not  able  to  go) . 

2.  II  peut  ne  pas  aller.  He  is  capable  of  not  going;  or,  He  may  not  go. 

3.  II  voudrait  ne  rien  f aire.  He  would  like  to  do  nothing. 


264  *    The  Elements  of  French 

267.  Negatives,  (a)  Non  pas  and  point  are  frequently  used  in  dis- 
tinctions. 

II  a  dit  ceci  et  non  pas  cela,  He  said  this  and  not  that. 

(6)  Non  plus  is  used  in  negative  expressions  to  mean  (n)either. 

Vous  ne  le  croyez  pas,  ni  moi  non  plus,    You  do  not  believe  it, 
neither  do  I. 

(c)  Non  seulement .  .  .  mais   encore = not  only  .  ,  ,hut  also. 

258.  Negatives  with  Verbs,     {a)  Position.     See  §256,   (c). 

259.  The  Principal  Negatives  are: 

ne  .  .  .  aucun(e),  not  any  ne  •  .  .  pas,  not 

ne  ,  .  .  aucunement,  not  at  all  ne  .  . .  personne,  nobody 

ne  .  .  .  guere,  scarcely  ne  .  .  .  plus,  no  longer,  no  more 

ne  .  .  .  jamais,  never  ne  .  •  .  point,  nxyt  at  all 

ne  .  .  ,  ni  (  .  .  .  ni),  neither  .     .  nor  ne  .  .  .  que,  only 

ne  .  .  .  nul,  not  any  ne  .  .  .  rien,  nothing 

ne  .  .  .  nullement,  not  at  all 

260.  Neither  .  .  .  nor,  used  with  two  nouns  (or  pronouns),  or  with 
two  past  participles  =  ne*  .  .  .  ni .  .  .  ni. 

1.  Vous  n^avez  lu  argent  ni  amis.     You  have  neither  money  nor 

friends. 

2.  *Ni  vu  ni  connu.  Neither  seen  nor  known. 

3.  Je  ne^Pai  ni^prete  ni^vendu,  I  have  neither  lent  it  nor  sold  it. 

(a)  Neither  .  .  .  nor,  used  with  two  verbs  (simple  tenses)  is  ne  •  •  •  ni 
ne. 

EUe  ne^  joue  ni  ne  chante,  She  neither  plays  nor  sings. 

261.  Pas  Omitted.  Before  an  infinitive  following  savoir,  pouvoir, 
oser,  and  cesser,  pas  is  sometimes  omitted.  (Pas  is  sometimes  omitted 
after  savoir  when  no  infinitive  follows.) 

1.  n  n^ose  vous  repondre.   He  dares  not  reply  to  you. 

2.  Je  ne  sais  s'ils  reviendront,  /  do  not  know  whether  they  will 

return. 

262.  Pleonastic  Ne.  (a)  After  verbs  in  the  affirmative  which  express 
fearing,  ne  is  frequently  inserted  in  the  subordinate  clause. 

1.  Elle  craint  que  vous  n^arriviez  trop  tard.  She  fears  that  you 

will  arrive  too  late. 

2.  Elle  craint  que  vous  n*arriviez  pas  k  temps.  She  fears  that  you 

will  not  arrive  on  time. 

*  Ne  is  always  omitted  when  the  finite  verb  is  omitted. 


Grammatical  Appendix 


265 


(6)  After  comparatives,  ne  is  also  used  frequently. 

1.  Elle  est  plus  grande  qu*elle  ne^  Petait  autrefois,  She  is  taller 

than  she  was  formerly. 

2.  II  parle  mieuz  qu*il  n^ecrit.   He  speaks  better  than  he  writes. 

263.  "Yes"  Translated,     (a)    Yes  is  translated  oui  to  express  aflirma- 
tion  or  assent. 

1.  Y  songez-vous?  Are  you  thinking  of  itf 

2.  Oui,  monsieur,  Fes,  sir. 

(6)    YeSy  on  the  contrary^  is  translated  si. 

1.  Vous  ne  ferez  pas  cela?    You  wiU  not  do  thatf 

2.  Si,  Yes. 

264.  Que  frequently  precedes  non,  oui,  and  si,  thus; 

Je  pense  que  oui  (non),  /  think  so  (not). 


265. 


NUMERALS 
Cardinal  Numerals. —  Table. 


un,  une,  1 
deux,  2 
trois,  3 
quatre,  4 
cinq,  5 
six,  6 
sept,  7 
huit,  8 
neuf ,  9 
dix,  10 
onze,  11 
douze,  12 
treize,  13 
quatorze,  14 
quinze,  15 
seize,  16 
dix-sept,  17    • 
dix-huit,  18 
dix-neuf,  19 
vingt,  20 

vingt  et  un(e),  21 
vingt-deux,  22 
vingt-trois,  23 
trente,  30 


trente  et  un(e),  31 
quarante,  40 
quarante  et  un(e),  41 
cinquante,  50 
cinquante  et  un(e),  51 
soixante,  60 
soixante  et  un(e),  61 
soixante-dix,  70 
soixante  et  onze,  71    • 
quatre-vingts,  80 
quatre-vingt-un(e),  81 
quatre-vingt-dix,  90 
quatre-vingt-onze,  91 
cent,  100 
cent  un(e),  101 
deux  cents,  2(X) 
deux  cent  im(e),  201 
mille,  1000 
mille  un(e),  1001 
deux  mille,  2000 
un  million,  1,000,000* 
deux  millions,  2,000,000 
un  milliard,  1,000,000,000* 


*  De  is  used  after  the  nouns  million  and  milliard,  e.  g.,  deux  millions  de 
livres,  two  million  hooks. 


266  The  Elements  of  French 

Note  1.  Compound  numerals  under  100  have  either  the  hyphen  or  et. 
They  have  et  in  21,  31,  41,  51,  61,  and  optionally  in  71. 

Note  2.  The  final  consonants  of  5,  6,  7,  8,  9,  10,  are  silent  (except  in 
liaison,  linking)  when  a  noun  follows.     Otherwise  they  are  pronounced. 

Note  3.     Gender.     Cardinal  numerals  are  invariable,  except  un,  une. 

Trente  et  une  tables.  Thirty-one  tables. 

Note  4.  Mil  may  be  used  to  mean  1000  for  dates  between  1001  and 
1999  A.  D. 

1.  L'an  mil  neuf  cent  dix-neuf.  The  year  1919. 

2.  L»an  mille.    The  year  1000. 

3.  L'an  deux  mille,   The  year  2000. 

^       Note  5.     Cent  is  usually  invariable  in  dates. 
L*an  huit  cent.  The  year  800. 

266.  ORDINAL  NUMERALS 

premier,  1st  septieme,  7th 

premiere,  huitieme,  8th 

second,  2d  neuvieme,  9th 

deuxieme,  dixieme,  10th 

troisieme,  3d  onzieme,  11th 

.quatrieme,  4th  vingtieme,  20th 

cinquidme,  5th  vingt  et  unieme,  21st 

sixieme,  6th  vingt-detixieme,  22d 

(a)  Fractions.  Ordinarily  fractions  in  French  have  a  cardinal  as  the 
numerator  and  an  ordinal  as  the  denominator. 

cinq  neuviemes,  f . 

Note,  however,  the  following  special  forms: 
tiers,  third. 
quart,  fourth. 

demi,  half  (as  adjective  or  noun), 
moitie,  half  (as  noun). 

267.  Collective  Nouns.  The  ending  -aine  may  be  added  to  the  stem 
of  many  cardinal  numerals  to  mean  about  20,  about  40,  about  a  hundred, 
etc. 

1.  Une  douzaine  (de),  a  dozen. 

2.  Une  vingtaine  (de),  a  score. 

3.  Une  quarantaine  (de),  about  40. 

Note  also  Un  millier  (de),  about  1,000. 
Une  paire  (de),  a  pair. 

268.  Nimieral  Adverbs  may  be  formed  by  adding  -ment  to  ordinals. 

1.  premierement,  ytrs%,- 

2.  deuxiemement,  secondly,  etc. 


Grammatical  Appendix  267 

269.  Use  of  Ordinals  and  Cardinals  in  Dates.  Premier  is  used  to 
indicate  the  first  day  of  the  month,  or  the  first  of  a  line  of  rulers;  after 
that,  the  cardinal  is  used. 

1.  le  premier  juillet,  the  first  of  July. 

2.  le  deux  juillet,  the  second  of  July. 

3.  Napoleon  premier.  Napoleon  IL 

4.  Napoleon  III  (Trois),  Napoleon  III. 

270.  Position  of  Cardinals  and  Numerals.  They  precede  the  noun, 
and  the  cardinals  precede  the  ordinals. 

Les  cinq  premieres  pages,  The  first  five  pages. 

PREPOSITIONS 

271.  Prepositional  Phrases.     Note  the  following  prepositional  phrases: 

k  cause  de,  because  of  au  lieu  de,  instead  of 

k  c6te  de,  beside  autour  de,  around 

k  1* exception  de,  except  aupres  de,  near  by 

au  bout  de,  at  the  end  of,  after  en  face  de,  opposite 

aU'del^  de,  beyond  jusqu*a,  up  to,  until 

au-dessous  de,  beneath,  under  pres  de,  near 

au-dessus  de,  over,  above  quant  ^,  as  for 

272.  Distinctions  of  Meanings  of  Prepositions. 

(a)  k  pen  pres  =  about  (nearly). 
environ  =  about  (of  quantity). 
vers  =  about  (of  time). 

1.  Paris  a  environ  (or  k  peu  prds)  3,000,000  d*habitants,  Paris 

has  about  3,000,000  inhabitants. 

2.  Nous  arriverons  vers  (sur  les)  dix  heures  du  matin.  We  shall 

arrive  about  ten  o'clock  in  the  morning. 

(b)  Entre  =  between  (two  or  more  objects).  '  * 
Parmi  =  in  the  midst  of  (several  objects). 

1.  Tours  se  trouve   entre  Paris   et  Bordeaux,    Tours  is  situated 

between  Paris  and  Bordeaux. 

2.  Parmi  (or  entre)   toutes  les  republiques  dont  la   Grece  ^tait 

composee,  Athenes  et  Lacedemone  etaient  sans  comparaison 
les  principales.  Among  all  the  republics  of  which  Greece  was 
composed,  Athens  and  Sparta  were  incomparably  the  principal 
ones.     (Cited,  Littre.) 


268  The  Elements  of  French 

(c)  avant  =  before  (of  time,  or  order), 
devant  =  before  (in  front  of). 

1.  Vous  etes  venu  avant  moi,   You  came  before  me. 

2.  Vous  etes  devant  moi,   You  are  in  front  of  me. 

(d)  (1)  Par  =  by,  to  denote  agent  after  the  passive. 

La  maison  fut  construite  par  Lendtre,   The  house  was  constructed 
by  Lenotre. 

(2)  De  =  by,  when  a  habitual  act,  or  an  emotion,  is  expressed. 
II  est  admire  de  tout  le  monde,  He  is  admired  by  everybody. 

(e)  Pour  =  for,  (in  order  to,  for  the  sake,  of  in  exchange  for,  or  to  denote 
future  time). 

1.  II  dit  cela  pour  eviter  toute  discussion,  He  says  that  to^  avoid  all 

discussion. 

2.  Faites  ceci  pour  moi,  Do  this  for  me. 

3.  On  pent  acheter  cet  objet  pour  cinq  francs,  We  can  buy  this 

object  for  five  francs. 

(f)  (1)  De  before  a  noun  frequently  has  an  adjective  force. 
Une  chute  d^eau,  A  waterfall. 

A  before  nouns  denotes  purpose,  use,  or  characteristic. 

1.  Une  boite  aux  lettres,  A  letter  box  (box  for  letters). 

2.  Un  chapeau  a  grands  bords,  A  broad  brimmed  hat  (a  hat  with 

broad  brim). 

(2)  Distinction  between  de  and  en. 

De  has  usually  an  adjective  force,  when  used  with  a  noun. 

En,  when  used  with  a  noun,  denotes  the  material. 

1.  Une  montre  ^'or,  A  gold  watch  {gold  regarded  pimply  as  an 

adjective). 

2.  Une  montre  en  or,  A  gold  watch  (a  watch  made  of  gold,  material 

emphasized). 

*{g)  Dans  means  in,  in  the  sense  of  within,  in  the  interior  of.  A  means 
in  before  names  of  cities,  and  masculine  names  of  countries.  It  is  less 
restrictive  in  meaning  than  dans.  En  means  in  before  feminine  names 
of  countries.  It  is  seldom  used  before  an  article;  it  is  less  restrictive 
than  dans. 

1.  Je  tiens  un  sou  dans  la  main,  /  hold  a  cent  in  (inside  of)  my 

hand. 

2.  Je  tiens  une  canne  i^la  main,  /   hold  a  cane  in^  (not   inside) 

m,y  hand. 


Grammatical  Appendix  269 

3.  Livraison  dans  tout   Paris,  Delivery  in  all   Paris   (within   the 

city  limits) . 

4.  Cela  ne  se  fait  pas  k^  Paris,  That  is  not  done  in  (less  restrictive) 

Paris. 

5.  En  France  on  voit  beaucoup  de  jolies  choses.  Many  beautiful 

things  may  he  seen  in  France. 
Note.     Dans  and  en  may  also  be  used  to  mean  into. 

II  alia  dans  la  f oret,  He  went  into  the  forest. 
Note.     Observe  also: 

1.  II  voyage  de  Bordeaux  J.  Paris,    He  travels  from  Bordeaux  to 

Paris. 

2.  II  ne  va  pas  en_  France,  He  is  not  going  to  France, 

(1)  Distinction  between  dans  and  en  (of  time). 
Dans  =  at  the  end  of;  also,  during. 
En  =  within  (a  given  time). 

1.  Nous  travaillerons  dans  deux  heures.  We  shall  work  (  =  start 

to  work)  in^  two  hours  (from  now) . 

2.  Dans  Tapres-midi,  nous  irons  a  Versailles,   During   the  after- 

noon we  shall  go  to  Versailles. 

3.  Nous  ferons  ce  travail  en  deux  heures.  We  shall  do  this  work 

in  two  hours'  time. 

(h)  Sur  =  on,  upon. 

(1)  With  numerals,  sur  often  means  out  of. 

Neuf  f ois  sur  dix.  Nine  times  out  of  ten. 

(2)  Sur  les  (of  time)  is  synonomous  with  vers. 

Sur  les  (vers)  dix  heures,  About  ten  o'clock.     (Cf.  §272,  a.) 

(i)  Vers  =  toward  (in  a  physical  sense). 
envers  =  toward  (in  a  moral  sense). 

1.  II  se  dirige  vers  Pouest,    He  directs  himself  toward  the   west. 

2.  II  a  ete  cruel  envers  ses  ennemis.   He  has  been  cruel   toward 

his  enemies. 

(j)  Au-dessous  de  =  under  (in  a  more  specific  sense  than  sous). 
Au-dessus  de  =  over,  higher  than. 
par-dessus  =  over  (and  above). 

1.  Au-dessous  de  la  chaise.   Under  the  chair. 

2.  Les  nombres  au-dessous  de89.  The  numbers  under  89. 

3.  Au-dessus  du  rez-de-chaussee.  Above  the  first  floor. 


270  The  Elements  of  French 

4.    Les  nombres  au-dessus  de  89,  The  numbers  above  89. 

-5.    II  porte  le  veston  par-dessus  le  gilet,  He  wears  the  coat  over  the 

vest. 
6.   lis  nous  donne  100  francs  par-dessus  le  marche,   He  gives  us 

100  francs  over  and  above  the  bargain  (  =  to  boot). 

Sur  =  on,  upon  (after  verbs  of  motion  or  of  rest). 
(k)  Par  =  through  (after  verbs  of  motion). 

1.  L'eclat  est  tombe  sur  le  toit,  The  splinter  (of  a  shell)  has  fallen 

on  the  roof. 

2.  n  y  a  des  livres  sur  la  table.  There  are  books  on  the  table. 

3.  II  a  saute  par  la  f enetre,  He  has  jumped  out  of  ( =  through)  the 

window. 

(I)  Pres  de  =  near  (literally). 

Aupres  de  =  next  to,  also,  near,  in  moral  sense. 

1.  J*habite  pres  de  PHdtel  des  Invalides,  /  live  near  the  Hotel  des 

Invalides. 

2.  II  habite  aupres  de  I'ecole,  He  lives  next  to  the  school. 

3.  II  reste  aupres  de  sa  mere,    He  remains  near  (  =  beside)   his 

mother^ 

CONJUNCTIONS 

273.  Et  is  often  used  to  translate  the  English  word  both. 

Et  le  riche  et^le  pauvre,  Both  the  rich  man  and  the  poor  man. 
(a)  And  is  not  translated  after  aller,  to  go,  +  an  infinitive. 
Go  and  do  it,  Allez  le  faire. 

274.  Que  is  frequently  used  to  avoid  repetition  of  a  conjunction. 
When  it  replaces  si  it  is  regularly  followed  by  the  subjunctive. 

Si  vous  arrivez,  et  que  vous  le  trouviez,  Jf  you  arrive  and  if  you 
find  him. 

Note.     Que  must  not  be  omitted  in  French. 

275.  Distinctions  of  Meanings  of  Conjunctions. 
(a)  Quand  and  lorsque. 

Quand  and  lorsque  are  both  used  to  mean  when,  but  lorsque  is  not 
used  in  interrogative  sentences. 

1.  Je  lui  ai  demande  quand  il  allait  partir,  /  asked  him  when  he 

was  going  to  leave. 

2.  Quand  (or  lorsque)  nous  Tavons  rencontre,  When  we  met  him. 


Grammatical  Appendix 


271 


(6)  Depuis  que  and  puisque. 
Depuis  que,  since  (of  time). 
Puisque,  since  (because). 

1.  Depuis  que  je.suis  ici,  je  m'amuse  bien,  Since  I  have  been  here, 

I  have  amused  myself  well. 

2.  Puisqu*il  me  Pa   dit,  je  Pal  fait,  Since  (because)  he  told  me,  I 

did  it. 

(c)  Pendant  que,  while  (during  the  time  that) . 
Tandis  quey  while  (whereas). 

1.  II  joue  pendant  qu^elle  chante,  He  plays  while  she  sings. 

2.  II  I'a  essaye,  lui,  tandis  que  vous  ne  Pavez  pas  essaye,    He 

tried  it,  while  you  did  not  try  it. 


THE   PRONOUN 


THE    PERSONAL    PRONOUN 


276.    (a)  The  conjunctive  personal  pronouns  are: 


Subject 

je,  / 
tu,  you 
11,  he,  it 
elle,  she,  it 
nous,  we 
vous,  you 
Us,  they 
elles,  they 


Direct  Object 
me,  me 

te,  you 
le,  him,  it 
la,  her,  it 
nous,  us 
vous,  you 
les,  them 
les,  them 

Reflexive 

(himself 
herself  se,  themselves 

itself 


Indirect  Object 
me,  (to)  me 
te,  (to)  you 
lui,  (to)  him,  (to)  it 
lui,  (to)  her,  (to)  it 
nous,  (to)  us 
vous,  (to)  you 
leur,  (to)  them 
leur,  (to)  them 


se,  (to)  themselves 


(6)  The  disjunctive  personal  pronouns  are: 

Singular  Plural 

moi,  I,  me  nous,  we,  us 

toi,  you  vous,  you 

lui,  he,  him  eux,  they,  them 

elle,  she,  her  elles,  they,  them 
soi,  one's  self 

277.   Pronominal  Adverbs.     The  pronominal  adverbs  are: 

y  =  ^,  dans,  sur  +  a  pronoun  of  the  third  person,  to  (at,  on)  itj 
or  to  (at,  on)  them,  there. 

en  =  de  +  a  pronoun  of  the  third  person,  of  or  from  it,  of  or  from 
them;  some  of  it,  or  of  them. 


272  The  Elements  of  French 

278.  After  Verbs  of  Motion,  a  is  used  to  mean  to  (when  referring  to 
persons)  instead  of  the  indirect  object  form  of  the  personal  pronoun. 

Je  vais  J_lui,  /  am  going  to  him. 

279.  Le,  la,  les,  used  in  the  Predicate. 

(a)  The  forms  le,  la,  les,  may  be  used  in  the  predicate  to  refer  to  a 
specific  noun. 

1     Etes-vous  la  malade?  Are  you  the  sick  woman? 
2.    Je  la  suis,  /  am  (she). 

(6)  When  referring  to  an  adjective,  le  (invariable)  is  used  in  the  predi- 
cate, and  is  often  to  be  translated  by  the  English  word  so. 

1.  Etes-vous  malade?  Are  you  ill? 

2.  Je  le  suis,  /  am. 

280.  Soi  is  regularly  used  only  in  an  indefinite  or  general  sense. 

1.  Chacun  pour  soi,  Each  man  for  himself  (indefinite). 

2.  II  travaille  pour  lui-meme,  He  works  for  himself  (definite). 

281.  (a)  When  an  infinitive  depends  upon  a  verb  the  noun  object  of 
the  infinitive  follows  the  infinitive.  The  personal  pronoun  object  reg- 
ularly precedes  the  infinitive. 

Je  veux  hii  remettre  la  lettre,  /  wish  to  give  him  the  letter, 

(6)  When  faire  (or  laisser)  is  followed  by  another  infinitive,  and  when 
both  have  objects,  the  object  of  faire  (or  subject  of  the  following  infini- 
tive) is  put  in  the  indirect  object  case,  and  the  object  of  the  second 
infinitive  goes  into  the  direct  object  case,  though  both  usually  precede 
faire  or  laisser. 

Je  veux  le  lui  faire  comprendre,  /  wish  to  make  him  understand  it. 
Je  veux  faire  comprendre  cela  k  mon  frere,  /  wish  to  make  my 
brother  understand  that. 

Entendre,  voir,  and  ouir  frequently  have  the  same  construction,  e.  g., 
je  Pai  entendre  dire  au  professeur,  /  heard  the  teacher  say  so. 

(c)  When  a  verb  has  as  a  direct  object  any  of  the  forms  me,  nous, 
te,  vous,  or  se,  the  indirect  object  pronoun  takes  k  and  follows  the  verb. 

II  m*a  presente  i^vous,  He  introduced  me  to  you. 

{d)  In  the  case  of  envoyer  and  a  few  other  verbs  +  an  infinitive,  a 
personal  pronoun  object  may  precede  or  follow  the  finite  verb. 

EUe  les  envoie  chercher,) 

EUe  envoie  les  chercher.r'*'  '"^'  ^"^  '-^Sn- 


Grammatical  Appendix 


273 


POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS 
282.    (a)  The  following  are  used  a^  adjectives: 


Singular 

Plural 

Meaning 

Masculine 

Feminine 

Masculine  and  Feminine 

mon^ 

ma* 

mes 

my 

ton 

ta* 

tes 

your 

son 

sa* 

ses 

his,  her,  its 

notre 

notre 

nos 

oun 

votre 

votre 

vos 

your 

leur 

leur 

leurs 

their 

(b)  The  following  possessives  are  used  pronominally : 

Singular 

Plural 

Meaning 

Masculine 

Feminine 

Masculine 

Feminine 

le  mien 

la  mienne 

les  miens 

les  miennes 

mine 

le  tien 

la  tienne 

les  tiens 

les  tiennes 

yours 

le  sien 

la  sienne 

les  siens 

les  siennes 

his,  hers,  its 

le  ndtre 

la  ndtre 

les  ndtres 

les  ndtres 

ours 

le  v6tre 

la  votre 

les  votres 

les  votres 

yours 

le  leur 

la  leur 

les  leurs 

les  leurs 

theirs 

283.  Owr)y  is  translated  into  French  by  propre   (before  the  noun)t, 
or  by  ^  +  a  pronoun. 

1.  C^etaient  ses  propres  paroles,  These  were  his  own  words. 

2.  C*est  sa  maison  a  elle,  It  is  her  own  house. 

3.  C'est  sa  maison  ft  lui,  It  is  his  own  house. 

Note.     In  the  last  two  sentences,  i  + pronoun  serves  also  to  avoid  am- 
biguity, as  sa  might  mean  either  his  or  her. 

284.  In  formal  address  to  a  relative  or  to  a  superior  officer,  mon  is 
used. 

1.  Parfaitement,  mon  capitaine,  Exactly,  Captain. 

2.  Qui,  ma  mere,    Yes,  mother. 

Note.     (1)    Mon  is  not  used  before  the  familiar  forms  papa  and  maman. 
(2)    Mon  and  ma  in  monsieur,   monseigneur,  madame,  and  ma- 
demoiselle were  originally  "possessives  like  mon  capitaine,  etc. 

DEMONSTRATIVE   PRONOUNS 
286.    (a)  The  following  forms  are  used  as  adjectives: 

Singular  Plural 


Masculine 
ce  (cet) 


Feminine 
cette,  this,  that 


Masculine  and  Feminine 
ces 


*  Mon,  ton,  son  are  used  as  feminine  forms  before  a  word  beginning  with 
a  vowel  or  h  mute. 

t  Following  its  noun,  propre  means  clean.     (See  §250.) 


274  The  Elements  of  French 

(b)  The  following  forms  are  used  as  pronouns: 

Variable 
Singular  Plural 

Masculine  Feminine  Masculine  Feminine 

celui  celle  ceux        ^  celles 

Invariable 

ce,  this  (or  these) ,  that  (or  those) ,  he  (or  she,  it,  they) 
ceci,  this 
cela,  that 

Note,  -ci  and  Ak  may  be  added  to  the  forms  of  celui  ( =  celui-ci,  celles-li, 
etc.)  to  mean  this  one,  those  ones,  etc. 

When  used  with  ce,  cette,  etc.,  -ci  and  -la  follow  the  noun. 

Cet  homme-li.  That  man. 

286.  II  est  is  used  instead  of  c*est  to  mean  it  is,  (a)  before  an  adjective 
followed  by  de  +  an  infinitive;  (b)  before  a  clause  introduced  by  que 
when  the  infinitive  or  que  clause  are  the  logical  subjects  of  est. 

1.  C*est  possible,  It  is  possible. 

2.  11^  est  possible  de  faire  cela,  Jt^  is  possible  to  do  that, 

3.  jC*est  evident,  It^  is  evident. 

4.  II  est  evident  que  vous  vous  amusez  bien,  Jj_  is  evident  that 

you  are  enjoying  yourself. 

(a)  In  cases  where  the  infinitive  depends  upon  the  adjective  it  is 
preceded  by  ky  and  c*est  is  often  used. 

C'est  difficile  a_  faire.  It  is  difficult  to  do. 

287.  Ce  +  etre  is  often  used  to  sum  up  what  has  just  been  said. 

1.  Te  quitter,  c^est  mourir,   To  leave  thee   ('t)is   to  die   (between 

infinitives) . 

2.  C^est  vrai  ce  que  vous  dites  la,  What  you  say  is  true  (in  inver- 

sions) . 

3.  L*Etat^*est  moi,  /  am  the  state  (for  emphasis). 

288.  Ca  is  used  colloquially  as  a  contraction  of  cela. 

Qu*est-ce  que  c'est  que  cela  (ga)?  What  is  that? 
(a)  Ca  is  often  used  with  contemptuous  force  to  refer  to  persons. 
Ca  ne  comprend  rien.  That  (thing)  does  not  understand  anything. 


Grammatical  Appendix  275 

INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS 

289.  (a)  The  following  forms  are  used  as  adjectives: 

Singular  Plural  Meaning 

Masculine       Feminine  Masculine        Feminine 

quel?  quelle?  quels?  quelles?  which?  what?  what  a! 

(b)  The  following  forms  are  used  pronominally : 

Variable 
Singular  Plural  Meaning 

Masculine       Feminine  Singular  Plural 

lequel?  laquell^?  lesquels?        lesquelles?  which?  which  or 

what  one{s)f 
Invariable 

qui?  who?  whom?  que?  what  quoi?  what? 

Note.  The  prepositions  de  and  k  contract  with  the  forms  of  lequel,  ac- 
cording to  the  regular  rule  for  contractions  with  the  definite  article,  viz. :  duquel, 
desquels,  desquelles;  auquel,  auxquels,  auzquelles. 

290.  Quel?  is  often  used  in  the  sense  of  who?  to  take  the  place  of  qui? 

Quel  est  ce  monsieur?  Who  is  that  gentleman? 

291.  De  qui?  and  a  qui? 

De  qui?  =  whose?  (denoting  relationship). 
A  qui?  =  whose?  (denoting  possession). 

1.  De  qui  est-elle  la  femme?  Whose  wife  is  she? 

2.  A  qui  est  ce  chapeau?  Whose  hat  is  that? 

292.  (a)  What  as  the  subject  of  a  verb  is  regularly  translated  by 
qu*est-ce  qui? 

Qu*est-ce  qui  vous  gene?  What  bothers  you? 

(b)  What  as  the  object  of  a  verb  is  translated  que  or  qu*est-ce  que? 

Que  dites-vous,  or,  qu*est-ce  que  vous  dites?  What  do  you  say? 

(c)  What  used  apart  from  the  verb,  or  as  the  object  of  a  preposition, 
is  translated  by  quoi. 

1.  Quoi!  c'est  vous!  What!    It  is  you! 

2.  Avez-vous  de  quoi  vivre?  Have  you  enough  to  live  on?  (literally, 

with  what  to  live). 

(d)  Quoi  may  also  be  used  with  infinitives  instead  of  que  for  emphasis. 

Que  (quoi)  dire  maintenant?  What  is  to  be  said  now? 


276  The  Elements  of  French 

293.  Que?  is  sometimes  used  in  the  sense  of  why?  que  de  in  the  sense 
of  how  much? 

1.  Que  ne  I'avez  vous  pas  fait  tout  de  suite?  Why  did  you  not  do 

it  at  once? 

2.  Que  de  fer?  How  much  iron? 

294.  Interrogative  Phrases. 

qui  est-ce  qui?  =  qui?  who?  (subject  of  verb), 
qui  est-ce  o^ne?  whom?  (object  of  verb). 
qu*est-ce  qui?  =  what  (subject  of  verb). 
qu*est-ce  que?  =  que?  what?  (object  of  verb), 
qu'est-ce  que  c' est?  =  qu' est-ce?  what  is  it? 
qu*est-ce  que  c'est  que  cela?  what  is  that? 

1.  (Qui  est-ce)  qui  vient?  Who  comes? 

2.  Qui  est-ce  que  vous  avez  rencontre?  Whom  did  you  meet? 

3.  Qu*  est-ce  qui  vous  interesse?  What  interests  you? 

4.  Qu*  est-ce  que  vous  regardez?  What  are  you  looking  at? 

RELATIVE  PRONOUNS 

295.  qui,  who,  which,  that;  whom  (following  a  preposition). 

C'est  lui  qui  est  arrive,  It  is  he  who  has  come. 

que,  who7n,  which,  that. 

dent,  of  whom,  of  which,  whose. 

oft,  where,  in  which,  at  which,  etc. 

quoi,  what,  which  (after  preposition,  used  without  definite  antecedent). 

ce  qui,  what  (subject  of  verb). 

ce  que,  what,  (object  of  verb). 

ce  .  .  .  quoi,  what  (object  of  preposition). 

1.  Donnez-moi  les   crayons   que   vous   avez,  Give  me  the  pencils 

which  you  have. 

2.  Voici  les  livres  dont  je  vous  parlais,  Here  are  the  hooks  of  which 

I  was  speaking  to  you. 

3.  Voila  la  caserne  ou  il  vivait,  There  are  the  barracks  in  which  he 

lived. 

4.  Dites-moi  a  quoi  il  pense.  Tell  me  what  he  is  thinking  of. 

5.  II  le  dit,  ou  plutdt,  il  ne  le  nie  pas,  ce  qui  est  la  mime  chose. 

He  says  so,  or  rather,  he  does  not  deny  it,  which  is  the  same  thing. 

6.  Dites-nous  ce  que  vous  en  pensez,  Tell  us  what  you  think  about  it. 

7.  Voici  ce  a  quoi  il  reflechit,   This  is  what  he  is  reflecting  about. 


Grammatical  Appendix  277 

Variable 
Masc.  Sing.      Fern.  Sing.      Masc.  Plur.    Fern.  Plur. 

lequel  laquelle  lesquels      lesquelles,*     who,  which,  whom,  that 

296.   Agreement  of  Relative  Pronouns.     Relative  pronouns  agree  with 
their  antecedents  in  gender,  number,  and  person. 

C'etait  vous  qui  aviez  ecrit,  It  was  you  who  had  written. 

297..  Qui  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  celui  qui,  etc.,  to  mean  he  who. 
Tout  vient  k  point  k  qui  salt  attendre,  All  things  come  to  him  who 
waits. 

298.  Lequel  is  used  of  persons  after  entre,  and  parmi. 

Les  hommes  entre  (parmi)  lesquels,  The  men  among  whom. 

299.  Quoi  is  used  without  definite  antecedent  to  mean  what,  and 
usually  follows  a  preposition. 

Voila  de  quoi  il  s*agit,  That  is  the  question  (more  literally,  That  is 

what  it  is  a  question  of) . 

300.  Ce  qui,  ce  que,  ce  dont,  etc.,  are  often  used  to  sum  up  what  has 
just  been  said. 

Nous  partons  maintenant,  ce  qui  est  deja  quelque  chose,  We  are 

leaving  now,    (something)    which  helps  matters  a  little   (literally, 
is  already  something) . 

INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS  AND   ADJECTIVES 

301.  (a)  The  following  forms  are  used  as  adjectives: 
certain(e)(s),  (a)  certain  divers(es),  plur.,  various 
chaque,  each,  every                                         maint(e),  mxiny  a 
diff^rent(e)s,  plur.,  various,  different  quelque(s),  some,  some  (few) 

1.  lis  partent  k  certaines  heures,  They  start  at  certain  hours. 

2.  Chaque  fois  il  dit  la  meme  chose,  Each  time  he  says  the  same 

thing. 

(b)  The  following  forms  are  used  as  pronouns: 

autrui,  other  people,  etc  quelqu*un(e),  some  one,  etc. 

chacun(e),  each  (one),  every  (one)  quelques-un(es),  some  (people),  etc. 

on,t  one,  they,  we,  etc.  quelque  chose,  something 

personne  .  .  .  (ne),  nobody  rien  .  .  .  (ne),  nothing 

1.  Si  Ton  vous  ecoutait,  If  people  should  listen  to  you. 

2.  Ne  fais  pas  k  autrui  ce  que  tu  ne  voudrais  pas  qu'on  te  fit, 

Do  not  do  to  others  what  you  would  not  wish  others  to  do  to  you. 

3.  (A)  chacun  son  gout,  Every  man  to  his  taste. 

*  Used  as  object  of  a  preposition  to  refer  to  things;  sometimes  used  to  refer 
to  persons,  especially  when  invariable  pronoun  forms  would  be  ambiguous. 
t  On  becomes  Pon  frequently  to  avoid  hiatus  after  a  vowel. 


278  The  Elements  of  French 

(c)  The  following  forms  are  used  either  as  adjectives  or  as  pronouns: 

aucun(e)(s)  .  .  .  ne,  no,  nobody  tel(le),  such  (follows  article) 

autre,  other  tout,  m.,  plur.,  tous 

meme,  same  (before  noun)  toute,  f.,  plur.,  toutes,  all,  every 

even,  very  (after  noun)  un(e),  one,  a 

Sing,  f  nul(le)  .  .  .  ne,  no;  nobody 
Plur.\  nuls,  m.,  nuUes,  f. 
plusieurs,  several 

302.  Un(e)  may  be  used  before  certain  in  the  singular;  in  the  plural  de 
may  be  used. 

1.  (Un)  certain  6crivain,  A  certain  writer. 

2.  (De)  certains  ecrivains,  Certain  writers. 

303.  Quelque  =  some   in    the    sense    of    some    little;  some  few.     For 
some  in  the  sense  of  an  indefinite  quantity,  use  the  partitive  construction. 

1.  II  a  quelques  francs.  He  has  some  (a  few)  francs. 

2.  II  a  de  I'argent,  He  has  some  money. 

(a)  Quelque  .  .  .  que  =  however j    when    used    before    adjectives    or 
adverbs. 

Quelque  bons  qu*ils  soient,  However  good  they  may  be. 

304.  Chacun(e)  is  used  as  a  pronoun  to  mean  each  one;  chaque  is  used 
as  an  adjective  to  mean  each. 

1 .  Chaque  eleve,  Each  pupil. 

2.  Chacun(e)  des  eleves.  Each  (one)  of  the  pupils. 

305.  Quelqu*un(e),  plur.,  quelques-un(es),  is  used  as  a  pronoun  to 
mean  some  one,  some;  quelques (s)  is  used  as  an  adjective  to  mean  some. 

1.  Quelques  livres.  Some  books. 

2.  Quelques-uns  des  livres,  Some  of  the  books. 

306.  Quelque  chose  is  masculine,  although  the  noun  chose  is  feminine. 

Quelque  chose  est  arriv^,  Something  has  happened. 

307.  Aucun(e)(s)  and  nul(le)(s),  plural  nuls,  m.,  nuUes,  f.,  are  used  as 
adjectives,  followed  by  ne  +  verb,  to  mean  no,  not  any. 

1.  Aucunes  gens  (or  nuUes  gens),  No  people. 

2.  Aucune  faute  n^a  ete  commise,  No  mistake  has  been  committed. 

308.  Autre  is  used  to  mean  other  in  the  sense  of  another  kind  of.    To 
mean  another  of  the  same  kind,  use  encore  un(e). 

1.  Donnez-moi  une  autre  plume.  Give  me  another  (a  different)  pen. 

2.  Donnez-moi  encore  une  plume,  Give  me  another  (a  similar)  pen. 


Grammatical  Appendix  279 

(a)  Autres  is  frequently  used  idiomatically  after  nous  and  vous. 

Nous  (autres)  Americains,  We  Americans. 

(6)  L'un(e)  .  .  .  Pautre,  plur.,  les  un(e)s  .  .  .  les  autres,  are  used  to 
mean  each  other,  one  another. 

lis  se  detestent  Pun  Pautre,  They  detest  each  other. 

309.  Meme  =  same,  when  used  before  the  noun. 
Meme  —.very,  self,  when  following  the  noun. 

1.  Les  memes  amis,  The  same  friends. 

2.  Nos  amis  memes,  Our  very  (even  our)  friends. 

(a)  Meme,  when  modifying  an  adjective  or  a  verb,  or  when  placed 
after  several  nouns,  is  invariable. 

II  aimait  meme  ses  ennemis.  He  loved  even  his  enemies, 

310.  Tout,  (m.),  toute,  (f.);  tous,  (m.  pi.);  toutes,  (f.  pi.)  =  all,  every, 
whole,  etc.,  in  the  singular;  all,  every,  in  the  plural. 

1.  Toute  la  journee,  The  whole  day. 

2.  Tout  etudiant.  Every  student.     Or, 

3.  Tous  les  etudiants,  All  students;  every  student. 

(a)  Tout  is  often  used  adverbially,  in  the  sense  of  quite. 

1.  Son  livre  est  tout  fait,  His  book  is  quite  finished. 

2.  Je  Pai  achete  tout  fait,  I  bought  it  ready  made. 

(1)  Tout  as  an  adverb  is  given  the  adjective  form  before  a  feminine 
adjective  beginning  with  a  consonant  (not  h  mute). 

1.  EUe  etait  toute  petite,  She  was  very  small. 

2.  EUe  etait  tout  agitee.  She  was  much  agitated. 

311.  Un,  when  used  as  a  pronoun,  is  often  preceded  by  P. 

L^une  de  ces  jeunes  filles.  One  of  these  girls. 

INDEFINITE   RELATIVE   PRONOUNS 

312.  (a)  The  following  indefinite  relatives  are  used  as  adjectives: 

Variable 

quelconque(s),  any  at  all 
quel(le)(s)  .  .  .  que,  whatever 
quelque(s)  .  .  .  que,  whatever 


280  The  Elements  of  French 

(6)  The  following  indefinite  relatives  are  used  as  pronouns: 

quiconque,  whoever 
qui  que  ...  ,  whoever 
quoi  que  .  .  .  ,  whatever 

Note.     The  compound  forms  having  que  as  the  second  word  are  followed 
by  the  subjunctive. 

1.  Qui  que  ce  soit,  Whoever  it  may  he. 

2.  Quoi  quUl  en  dise,  Whatever  he  may  say  about  it. 

3.  Quelques  precautions  que  nous  prenions,   Whatever  precautions 

we  may  take. 

4.  Quelles  que  soient  les  precautions  que  nous   prenons.   What- 

ever be  the  precautions  that  we  take. 


VERBS 
THE   AUXILIARIES   AVOIR   AND    ETRE 

313.  Compound  tenses  are  formed  with  avoir  (1)  in  the  case  of  all 
transitive  verbs;  (2)  in  the  case  of  most  intransitive  verbs. 

314.  The  following  intransitive  verbs,  mostly  denoting  motion,  are 
compounded  with  etre: 

aller,  to  go  partir,  to  start 

arriver,  to  arrive  venir,  to  become 

entrer,  to  enter  rester,  to  remain 

mourir,  to  die  sortir,  to  go  out 

nattre,  to  be  born  tomber,  to  fall 

Also,  compounds  of  venir,  such  as  devenir,  to  become;  parvenir,  to  attain; 
provenir,  to  proceed;  revenir,  to  come  back. 

(a)  The  following  verbs  are  conjugated  with  avoir,  when  an  act  is 
expressed;  with  etre,  when  a  state  is  expressed: 

changer,  to  change  grandir,  to  grow  up 

croitre,  to  grow  monter,  to  go  up 

descendre,  to  descend  passer,  to  pass 

disparaitre,  to  disappear  retourner,  to  go  back 

6chapper,  to  escape  sonner,  to  ring;  strike 

emigrer,  to  emigrate  vieillir,  to  grow  old 

Note.     Entrer,  monter,  descendre,  and  sortir  may  be  used  transitively, 
and  then  will  take  avoir  as  the  auxiliary. 

1.  Ilji^monte  nos  bagages.  He  has  taken  our  baggage  up. 

2.  II  est  monte  a  sa  chambre,  He  has  gone  up  to  his  room. 


Grammatical  Appendix  281 

REFLEXIVE   VERBS 

315.  Reflexive  verbs  are  regularly  conjugated  with  etre. 

Perfect 

je  me  suis  trouve(e),  I  have  found  myself 

tu  t*es  trouve(e) 

il  (elle)  s*est  trouve(e) 

nous  nous  sommes  trouve(e)s 

vous  vous  etes  trouve(e)(s) 

ils  (elles)  se  sont  trouve(e)s,  etc. 

316.  Reciprocal  Use  of  Reflexive  Verbs.  Reflexive  verbs  are  often 
used  in  a  reciprocal  sense. 

lis  s^aiment  (Pun  I'autre),    They  love  each  other,  or,  one  another. 

(a)  When  the  reciprocal  pronoun  object  is  indirect,  the  past  participle 
remains  unchanged. 

Elles  se  sont  parle.  They  spoke  to  each  other,^ 

317.  Verb  Idioms. 

Note  the  following  verb  idioms: 

(a)  Venir  de  +  infinitive  =  to  have  just ,  .  . 

Je  viens  de  le  trouver,  7  have  just  found  him. 

(h)  Savoir  =  to  know,  but  also  to  know  how  to. 

Savez-vous  patiner?  Do  you  know  how  to  skate? 

1.  Savoir  corresponds  to  the  English  auxiliary  can  wherever  intelli- 
gence is  required. 

Savez-vous  lire?  Can  you  read? 

318.  Verbs  —  Agreement.  The  verb  usually  agrees  with  its  subject 
as  in  English.  Words  of  quantity,  which  are  singular  in  form,  but  plural 
in  sense,  have  a  plural  verb. 

La  plupart  des  gens  le  croient,  Most  people  believe  it 

TENSES    OF    VERBS 

319.  The  Second  Past  Perfect,  or  Past  Anterior  (=  past  absolute 
auxiliary  +  past  participle  of  verb)  is  used  after  quand,  aussit6t  que, 
a  peine  que,  des  que,  and  a  few  other  conjunctions  of  time,  to  denote 
what  had  happened  immediately  before  another  event. 

Quand  il  eut  dit  cela,  nous  sommes  partis,  When  he  said  that,  we 
left. 


282  The  Elements  of  French 

320.  The  future  is  generally  used  as  in  English,  except  that  after 
quand,  aussitdt  que,  and  des  que,  when  futurity  is  impHed,  the  future 
tense  must  be  used  in  French. 

Aussitdt  que  vous  reviendrez,  dites-le-moi,  As  soon  as  you  return, 
tell  me. 

321.  The  future,  future  perfect,  and  past  future  (or  conditional)  are 
all  used  to  denote  probabihty. 

1.  Quelqu*un  aura   ouvert  une   fenetre,   Some  one   has   probably 

opened  a  window. 

2.  Serait-ce  lui?  Could  it  be  he? 

(a)  Quand  (meme)  with  the  past  future  is  often  to  be  translated 
even  if. 

Quand  (meme)  11  le  dirait,  je  le  nierais,  Even  if  he  should  say  so, 
I  should  deny  it. 

THE   SUBJUNCTIVE 
(For  additional  uses  of  the  Subjunctive,  see  Lessons  110,  111,  125, 126.) 

322.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  in  clauses  following  (1)  a  superlative, 
or  (2)  seul,  unique,  premier,  dernier. 

1.  C*est  le  plus  grand  livre  qui  soit  dans  la  bibliotheque,  It  is  the 

largest  book  (which  is)  in  the  library. 

2.  Voici  le  premier  mendiant  que  j*aie  rencontrg,  This  is  the  first 

beggar  that  I  have  met. 

323.  The  Subjunctive  is  also  used  in  clauses  of  characteristic,  provided 
certainty  is  not  expressed. 

1.  Trouvez-moi  un  homme  qui  soit  capable  de  faire  cela,  Find  me 

a  man  who  is^capable  of  doing  that.     But 

2.  C*est  un  homme  qui  est  capable  de  tout,   He  is  a  man  who  is 

capable  of  everything  (certainty  expressed) . 

(a)   Similarly  after  a  general  negation: 

II  n'y  a  personne  qui  puisse  faire  cela,   There  is  nobody  who  can 
do  that. 

See  also  §  312,  (b),  note. 

324.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  in  adverbial  clauses  introduced  by  the 
following  conjunctions:  Time,  avant  que  (ne),  en  attendant  que,  jusqu'a 
ce  que;  Purpose,  afin  que,  pour  que;  Condition,  a  moins  que  .  .  . 
(ne)^  pourvu  que;  Concession,  bien  que,  quoique,  soit  que  .  . .  soit  que; 
Negation,  sans  que  (ne). 


Grammatical  Appendix  283 

1.  Attendez  jusqu'i  ce  que  je  choisisse  un  numero,   Wait    till  I 

choose  a  number. 

2.  Ne  faites  rien  sans  que  je  vous  le  dise,  Do  nothing  without  my 

telling  you. 

(a)  The  subjunctive  is  used  after  expressions  and  conjunctions  denot- 
ing fear,  such  as  de  crainte  que,  and  de  peur  que.  The  dependent  clause 
usually  takes  the  negative  ne. 

Je  porte  ma  lettre  k  la  main  de  peur  que  je  ne  la  perde,  I  carry 
my  letter  in  my  hand,  for  fear  that  I  may  lose  it. 

325.  The  Subjunctive  Used  in  Principal  Clauses.  Que  +  the  sub- 
junctive in  a  principal  clause  is  usually  translated  let  or  may. 

1.  QuHls  nous  laissent  tranquilles,  Let  them  leave  us  alone. 

2.  Qu'il  parte  tout  de  suite,  Let  him  start  at  once. 

(a)  In  certain  phrases,  the  subjunctive  is  used  in  principal  clauses 
without  que. 

A  Dieu  ne  plaise,  May  it  not  please  God. 

Note.  In  all  cases  where  the  subjunctive  is  used  in  what  is  apparently 
the  principal  clause,  an  expression  of  desire  is  understood.  Thus  (Je  desire) 
qu'ils  nous  laissent  tranquilles,  etc. 

326.  The  Past  Perfect  Subjunctive  Used  Instead  of  the  Past  Perfect. 

In  literary  style,  the  past  perfect  subjunctive  is  sometimes  used  instead 

of  the  past  perfect,  either  in  the  if  clause,  or  in  the  result  clause,  or  in  both. 

Si  elle  eut  (or  avait)  repondu  tout  de  suite,  on  eut  (or  aurait)  ete 

tres  content,  //  she  had  replied  at  once,  they  would  have  been  very 

glad. 

USE    OF   THE   INFINITIVE 

327.  The  following  verbs  take  no  preposition  before  a  following  infini- 
tive :  , 

accourir,  to  hasten  descendre,  to  come  (go)  down* 

aimer  autant,  to  like  as  well                        desirer,  to  desire-f 

aimer  mieux,  to  prefer  devoir,  ought,  to  be,  etc. 

aller,  to  go  dire,  to  sayf 

apercevoir,  to  perceive  ecouter,  to  listen  (to) 

avoir  beau,  to  be  (or  do)  in  vain  entendre,  to  hear,  intend 

compter,  to  count'\  envoy er,  to  send 

courir,  to  run  esp6rer,  to  hopef 

croire,  to  believe  etre,  to  be 

declarer,  to  declare  §tre  cense,  to  be  supposed 

*  Sometimes  followed  by  a. 
t  Sometimes  followed  by  de. 


284 


The  Elements  of  French 


faillir,  to  he  on  the  point  o/*t 
faire,  to  make,  cause 
il  fait,  (impers.),  it  is 
falloir,  to  he  necessary 
laisser,  to  let,  allow'^-^ 
monter,  to  go  up 
nier,  to  denyf 
oser,  to  dare 
paraitre,  to  appear 
penser,  to  think 
pouvoir,  can,  to  he  able 
preferer,  to  prefer 
pretendre,  to  assert* 


se  rappeler,  to  recollectf 
reconnaitre,  to  acknowledge 
regarder,  to  look  at 
rentrer,  to  go  in  again 
revenir,  to  come  back 
savoir,  to  know  how  to,  can 
sembler,  to  seem 
sentir,  to  feel 

valoir  autant,  to  be  as  good 
valoir  mieux,  to  he  better 
venir,  to  come*t 
voir,  to  see 
vouloir,  to  wish,  will 


328.   The  following  verbs  take  de  before  a  following  infinitive: 


achever,  to  finish 

admirer,  to  wonder  (at) 

affecter,  to  affect 

s*agir,  to  he  a  question  (of) 

s*apercevoir,  to  perceive 

arreter,  to  prevent  (from),  determine 

avertir,  to  notify,  warn 

s'aviser,  to  think  (of) 

blamer,  to  blame  (for) 

cesser,  to  cease 

charger,  to  charge 

se  charger,  to  undertake 

choisir,  to  choose 

commander,  to  command 

commencer,  to  begin* 

compter,  to  intendX 

conclure,  to  conclude* 

conseiller,  to  advise 

consentir,  to  consent* 

consoler,  to  console 

se  contenter,  to  be  satisfied 

continuer,  to  continue* 

convaincre,  to  convict  (of) 

convenir,  to  agree 

couter,  to  cost* 

craindre,  to  fear 

decider,  to  decide,  resolve  * 

decourager  (se),  discourage  (from) 

def endre,  to  forbid 

demander,  to  ask* 

se  depecher,  to  hasten 

desaccoutumer  (se),  to  disaccustom 

(from) 
desesperer,  to  despair  (of) 


desirer,  to  desire  J 

determiner,  to  resolve* 

detester,  to  detest 

dire,  to  bid* 

dissuader,  to  dissuade  (from) 

douter,  to  hesitate 

se  douter,  to  suspect 

eclater,  to  burst  (from  laughing,  etc.) 

ecrire,  to  write 

s'efforcer,  to  try* 

empecher,  to  prevent 

s*empecher,  to  abstain  (from) 

s*empresser,  to  hasten* 

s'ennuyer,  to  be  weary  (of)  * 

entreprendre,  to  undertake 

epargner,  to  spare 

esperer,  to  hopeX 

essayer,  to  try 

s'etonner,  to  be  astonished 

eviter,  to  avoid 

(s)'excuser,  to  excuse  (from) 

exempter,  to  exempt 

faire  bien,  to  do  well 

faire  mieux,  to  do  better 

se  fatiguer,  to  be  tired  (of) 

f eindre,  to  feign 

finir,  to  finish* 

forcer,  to  force* 

(se)  garder,  to  keep  one's  self  from 

gener,  to  incommode 

gronder,  to  scold 

hasarder,  to  venture 

se  hater,  to  hasten 

imaginer,  to  imagine 


*  Sometimes  followed  by  a. 

t  Sometimes  followed  by  de. 

}  Sometimes  followed  by  direct  infinitive. 


Grammatical  Appendix 


285 


imputer,  to  impute 

inspirer,  to  inspire 

interdire,  to  interdict  (from) 

jouir,  to  enjoy 

juger  bon,  to  think  fit 

juger  necessaire,  to  think  necessary 

jurer,  to  promise  (on  oath)  t 

ne  pas  laisser,  not  to  cease  *t 

se  lasser,  to  he  weary  (of)  * 

louer,  to  praise 

manquer,  to  be  on  the  point  of* 

se  meler,  to  m,eddle  (with) 

menacer,  to  threaten 

meriter,  to  deserve 

se  moquer,  to  make  sport  (of) 

mourir,  to  long 

negliger,  to  neglect 

obliger,  to  oblige* 

obtenir,  to  obtain 

s'occuper,  to  be  busy  (with)  * 

offrir,  to  offer 

omettre,  to  omit 

ordonner,  to  order 

oublier,  to  forget* 

pardonner,  <o  pardon 

parler,  to  speak 

se  passer,  to  do  without 

(se)  permettre,  to  permit 

persuader,  to  persuade 

prendre  garde,  to  take  care  not* 

prendre  soin,  to  take  care 


prier,  to  beg* 

(se)  priver,  to  deprive  (of) 

(se)  promettre,  to  promise 

proposer,  to  propose 

(se)  proposer,  to  propose 

protester,  to  protest 

punir,  to  punish 

(se)  rappeler,  to  remember 

recommander,  to  recommend 

refuser,  to  refuse* 

regretter,  to  regret 

se  re  jouir,  to  rejoice 

remercier,  to  thank 

se  repentir,  to  repent  (of) 

(se)  reprocher,  to  reproach  (with) 

resoudre,  to  resolve 

(se)  rire,  to  laugh 

risquer,  to  risk 

rougir,  to  blush 

se  soucier,  to  care 

souffrir,  to  suffer* 

soupgonner,  to  suspect 

sourire,  to  smile 

se  souvenir,  to  recollect 

suggerer,  to  suggest 

supplier,  to  beseech 

tacher,  to  try* 

tenter,  to  try* 

trembler,  to  tremble* 

se  vanter,  to  boast 

venir,  to  have  just*-f 


(se)  presser,  to  hasten 

Note.     A  number  of  verbs  take  the  direct  infinitive  when   certainty  is 
implied;  de  +  infinitive  when  uncertainty,  or  an  obstacle  is  implied. 
desirer,  esperer,  souhaiter,  etc^ 


The  foUowhig  verbs  take  a  before  a  following  infinitive: 


(s)  *abandonner,  to  give  up 
aboutir,  to  end  (in) 
s*accorder,  to  a^ree  (in)  t 
(s)*accoutumer,  to  accustom 
aider,  to  help 
aimer,t  to  like 

(s)  amuser,  to  amuse  (by,  in) 
(s)  *appliquer,  to  apply 
apprendre,  to  learn,  teach 
(s)'appreter,  to  get  ready 


s'arreter,  to  stop 

aspirer,  to  aspire 

astreindre,  to  compel 

(s)  *attendre,  to  expect 

autoriser,  to  authorize 

avoir,  to  have,  must 

avoir  (de  la)  peine,  to  have  difficulty 

(in) 
avoir  (du)  plaisir,  to  take  pleasure  (in) 
se  borner,  to  limit  one's  self 


*  Sometimes  followed  by  a. 

t  Sometimes  followed  by  direct  infinitive. 

Aimer,  in  the  conditional  tense,  is  followed  by  the  direct  infinitive. 
X  Sometimes  followed  by  de. 


286 


The  Elements  of  French 


chercher,  to  seek 

commencer,  to  begin* 

concourir,  to  co-operate  (in) 

(se)  condamner,  to  condemn 

conduire,  to  lead 

consentir,  to  consent* 

consister,  to  consist 

(se)  consumer,  to  wear  one's  self  out 

continuer,  to  continue* 

contraindre,  to  constrain 

contribuer,  to  contribute 

colter,  to  cost 

decider,  to  induce* 

se  decider,  to  resolve 

defier,  to  challenge* 

demander,  to  ask* 

destiner,  to  destine 

determiner,  to  induce* 

se  determiner,  to  resolve 

(se)  devouer,  to  devote 

(se)  disposer,  to  dispose 

(se)  divertir,  to  amuse 

donner,  to  give 

dresser,  Iq  train 

s'efforcer,  to  try* 

(s)  'employer,  to  employ  (in) 

s'empresser,  to  be  eager* 

encourager,  to  encourage 

s*enhardir,  to  venture* 

s*ennuyer,  to  be  bored  (at,  in)  * 

enseigner,  to  teach 

s'entendre,  to  know  how 

essay er,  to  try* 

etre,  to  be  busy  (in,  at) 

etre  a,  to  be  one's  turn 

exceller,  to  excel  (in) 

(s)'exercer,  to  exercise  (in) 

exhorter,  to  exhort 

(s)*exposer,  to  expose 

se  fatiguer,  to  tire  one's  self  (in,  at)  f 

forcer,  to  force* 

gagner,  to  gain  (by) 

habituer,  to  accustom* 

s'habituer,  to  accustom  one's  self 

ha'ir,  to  hateX 

se  hasarder,  to  venture* 


hesiter,  to  hesitate* 

inciter,  to  incite 

incliner,  to  incline 

induire,  to  induce 

instruire,  to  instruct 

(s)*interesser,  to  interest  (in) 

inviter,  to  invite 

laisser,  to  leave*^ 

manquer,  to  fail  (in)  * 

mettre,  to  put 

se  mettre,  to  begin 

obliger,  to  oblige,  compel* 

s'obliger,  to  bind  one's  self* 

s'obstiner,  to  persist  (in) 

(s)  *occuper,  to  employ  (in)  * 

parvenir,  to  succeed  (in) 

passer,  to  spend  (in) 

penser,  to  thinklf 

persister,  to  persist  (in) 

se  plaire,  to  delight  (in) 

porter,  to  lead 

pousser,  to  urge 

prendre   garde,   to  take  care  (in   the 

sense  of  avoid)i 
prendre  soin,  to  take  care* 
pretendre,  to  claimif 
recommencer,  to  begin  again* 
reduire,  to  reduce 
renoncer,  to  renounce 
se  resigner,  to  resign  one's  self 
resoudre,  to  induce* 
se  resoudre',  to  resolve 
Tester,  to  remain 
reussir,  to  succeed 
servir,  to  serve 
songer,  to  think  (of) 
souffrir,  to  suffer* 
suffire,  to  suffice' 
tarder,  to  delay  (in) 
tendre,  to  tend 
tenir,  to  insist 
travailler,  to  work 
trembler,  to  tremble  (at,  on) 
venir,  to  happen-f 
(se)  vouer,  to  devote 


*  Sometimes  followed  by  de. 

t  Sometimes  followed  by  direct  infinitive. 

X  Takes  k  when  afl&rmative  infinitive,  but  may  take  de  when  negative. 


Grammatical  Appendix  287 


(a)   Distinctions  of  Meanings  of  Verbs. 

decider  a,  to  induce  laisser,  to  permit 

decider  de,  to  decide  laisser  k,  to  leave  one  to 

determiner  a,  to  induce  laisser  de,  to  leave  off,  stop 

determiner  de,  to  determine  manquer  de,  to  come  near  (doing) 

dire,  to  say  manquer  a,  to  fail  in 

dire  de,  to  tell  (a  person)  to  (do  so  and  prendre  garde  k,  to  take  care  to 

so)  prendre  garde  de,  to  take  care  not  to 

s*empresser  a,  to  he  ea^er  to  resoudre  H,  to  induce 

s'empresser  de,  to  hasten  to  resoudre  de,  to  resolve 

jurer,    to   swear    (to    the   truth    of  a       venir,  to  come  to  (come  and) 

statement)  venir  k,  to  happen  to 

jurer  de,  to  swear  (to  do  so  and  so)  venir  de,  to  have  just 


TENSE   FORMATION 

330.  Principal  Parts.  The  tenses  of  all  regular  verbs,  and  of  most 
irregular  verbs  are  formed  in  the  following  manner: 

1.  From  the  Infinitive. 

(a)  The  Future,  by  adding  -ai,  -as,  -a,  -ons,  -ez,  -ont. 

(b)  The  Past  Future,  or  Conditional,  by  adding  -ais,  -ais,  -ait,  ions, 
-iez,  -aient. 

Note.  For  both  tenses  the  final  re  of  the  third  conjugation  is  changed 
to  r.     Thus,  perdre  gives  perdrai,  etc. 

2.  From  the  Present  Participle:  the  final  -ant  being  dropped: 

(a)  The  plural  of  the  Present  Indicative  by  adding  -ons,  -ez,  -ent. 

(5)  The  Past  Descriptive,  by  adding  -ais,  -ais,  -ait,  -ions,  -iez,  -aient. 

(c)  The  plural  of  the  Imperative,  by  adding  -ons,  -ez. 

(d)  The  Present  Subjunctive,  by  adding  -e,  -es,  -e,  -ions,  -iez,  -ent. 

3.  From  the  Past  Participle: 

(a)  The  Compound  Tenses,  with  avoir  as  the  auxiliary  for  all  transi- 
tive verbs  and  for  most  intransitive  verbs;  with  etre  as  the  auxiliary  for 
all  reflexive  verbs,  and  for  a  few  intransitive  verbs  (mostly  denoting 
motion). 

{h)  The  Passive,  with  etre  as  the  auxiliary. 

4.  From  the  Present  Indicative  stem: 

(a)  The  singular  of  the  Present  Indicative,  the  endings  being  -e,  -es, 
-e,  (first  conjugation);  -is,  -is,  -it  (second  conjugation);  -s,  -s,  -t  (third 
conjugation). 

(6)  The  singular  of  the  Imperative,  the  -s  of  the  First  Conjugation 
being  dropped  except  when  y  or  en  follows. 


288  The  Elements  of  French 

5.     From  the  Past  Absolute  stem: 

(a)  The  Past  Absolute,  the  endings  being  -ai,  -as,  -a,  -^mes,-  -^tes, 
-erent  (first  conjugation),  and  -is,  -is,  -it,  -imes,  ites,  -irent  (second  and 
third  conjugations). 

(6)  The  Past  Subjunctive,  the  final  letter  of  the  first  singular  (-i  or 
-s)  being  dropped,  and  the  following  endings  added:  -sse,  -sses,  -'^t, 
-ssions,  -ssiez,  -ssent. 

REGULAR  VERBS 

331.  First  Conjugation.     (Infinitive  ends  in  -er). 

Infinitive  —  donner,  to  give 
Present  Partioiple  —  donnant,  giving 
Past  Participle  —  donne,  given 
Present  Indicative  —  je  donne,  I  give 
Past  Absolute  —  je  donnai,  /  gave 

332.  Second  Conjugation  (Infinitive  ends  in  -ir). 

Infinitive  —  finir,  to  finish 
Present  Participle  —  finissant,  finishing 
Past  Participle  — ■  fini,  finished 
Present  Indicative  —  je  finis,  /  finish 
Past  Absolute  —  je  finis,  /  finished 

333.  Third  Conjugation  (Infinitive  ends  in  -re) 

Infinitive  —  perdre,  to  lose 
Present  Participle  —  perdant,  losing 
Past  Participle  —  perdu,  lost 
Present  Indicative  —  je  perds,  /  lose 
Past  Absolute  —  je  perdis,  /  lost 

Indicative  Mood 

Present 

I  give,  I  am  giving,  I  do       I  finish,  I  am  finishing,       I  lose,  I  am  losing,  I  do 

give,  etc.  /  do  finish,  etc.  lose,  etc. 

je        donn  e  je       fin  is  je       perd  s 

tu       donn  es  tu       fin  is  tu       perd  s 

H        donn  e  il        fin  it  il        perd* 

nous  donn  ons  nous  fin  iss  ons  nous  perd  ons 

vous  donn  ez  vous  fin  iss  ez  vous  perd  ez 

ils       donn  ent  ils       fin  iss  ent  ils      perd  ent 

*  The  t  of  this  ending  is  res;ularly  missing  after  a  stem  ending  in  c,  d,  or  t. 
In  the  verb  rompre,  to  break,  on  the  other  hand,  the  third  singular  of  the  present 
indicative  is  il  rompt. 


Grammatical  Appendix 


289 


Past  Descriptive 

I  was  giving,  I  used  to  I  was  finishing,  I  used  to 

give,  etc.  finish,  etc. 

je        donn  ais  je        fin  iss  ais 

tu       donn  ais  tu       fin  iss  ais 

II  donn  ait  il         fin  iss  ait 
nous  donn  ions  nous  fin  iss  ions 
vous  donn  iez  vous  fin  iss  iez 
ils       donn  aient  ils       fin  iss  aient 


/  was  losing,   I  used  to 

lose,  etc. 
je  perd  ais 
tu  perd  ais 
il  perd  ait 
nous  perd  ions 
vous  perd  iez 
ils       perd  aient 


/  gave,  etc. 
je        donn  ai 
tu       donn  as 
il         doDn  a 
nous  donn  imes 
vous  donn  ^tes 
ils       donn  erent 


/  shall  give,  etc. 
je  donner  ai 
tu  donner  as 
il  donner  a 
nous  donner  ons 
vous  donner  ez 
ils       donner  ont 


I  should  give,  etc. 

je  donner  ais 

tu  donner  ais 

il  donner  ait 

nous  donner  ions 

vous  donner  iez 

ils  donner  aient 


Give,  etc. 
donn  e* 
donn  ons 
donn  ez 


Past  Absolute 

I  finished,  etc. 
je        fin  is 
tu       fin  is 
il        fin  it 
nous  fin  imes 
vous  fin  ites 
ils       fin  irent 

Future 

I  shall  finish,  etc. 
je        finir  ai 
tu       finir  as 
il         finir  a 
nous  finir  ons 
vous  finir  ez 
ils       finir  ont 

Past  Future,  or  Conditional 

I  should  finish,  etc. 

je  finir  ais 

tu  finir  ais 

il  finir  ait 

nous  finir  ions 

vous  finir  iez 

ils  finir  aient 

Imperative  Mood 

Present 

Finish,  etc.  Lose, etc. 

fin  is  perd  s 

fin  iss  ons  perd  ons 

fin  iss  ez  perd  ez 


/  lost,  etc. 
je        perd  is 
tu       perd  is 
il         perd  it 
nous  perd  imes 
vous  perd  ites 
ils       perd  irent 


/  shall  lose,  etc. 
je        perdr  ai 
tu       perdr  as 
il        perdr  a 
nous  perdr  ons 
vous  perdr  ez 
ils       perdr  ont 


/  should  lose,  etc. 
je  perdr  ais 
tu  perdr  ais 
il  perdr  ait 
nous  perdr  ions 
vous  perdr  iez 
ils       perdr  aient 


*  Donne  is  the  only  imperative  form  of  the  regular  conjugations  which  is 
not  the  same  as  the  corresponding  form  of  the  present  indicative,  but  donne 
becomes  donnes  before  -y  or  -en. 


290 


The  Elements  of  French 


I  (may)  give,  etc. 
je        donn  e 
tu       donn  es 
il        donn  e 
nous  donn  ions 
vous  donn  iez 
ils       donn  ent 


/  (might)  give,  etc. 
je        donn  asse 


Subjunctive  Mood 

Present 

I  (may)  finish,  etc. 

je  fin  iss  e 

tu  fin  iss  es 

il  fin  iss  e 

nous  fin  iss  ions 

vous  fin  iss  iez 

ils  fin  iss  ent 

Past 

/  (might)  finish,  etc. 
je        fin  iss  e 


I  (may)  lose,  etc. 
je        perd  e 
tu       perd  es 
il        perd  e 
nous  perd  ions 
vous  perd  iez 
ils       perd  ent 


I  (might)  lose,  etc. 
je       perd  iss  e 


tu       donn  asses                    tu 

fin  iss 

es 

tu       perd  iss  es 

il         donn  at                          il 

fin  it 

il         perd  it 

nous  donn  assions                 nous 

fin  iss 

ions                    nous  perd  iss  ions 

vous  donn  assiez                  vous 

fin  iss  iez 

vous  perd  iss  iez 

ils       donn  assent                  ils 

fin  iss 

ent 

ils       perd  iss  ent 

AUXILIARY 

VERBS 

334.  Avoir. 

335.  fetre. 

Infinitive  —  avoir,  to  have 

Infinitive  —  etre,  to  he 

Pres.  Part. —  ayant,  having 

Pres.  Part. —  etant,  being 

Past  Part.—  eu,  had 

Past  Part. —  ete,  been 

Pres.  Ind. —  ai,  have 

Pres.  Ind. —  suis,  am 

Past  Absolute  —  eus,  had 

Past  Absolute  —  fus,  was 

Indicative 

Present 

I  have,  am  having,  etc. 

I  am,  am  being,  etc. 

j'    ai                      nous  avons 

je   suis                  nous  sommes 

tu  as                     vous  avez 

tu  es                      vous  ^tes 

il    a                       ils       ont 

"il    est                    ils       sont 

I  had,  was  having,  etc. 


Past  Descriptive 

I  was,  was  being,  etc. 


y    avais 
tu  avais 
il    avait 

nous  avions 
vous  aviez 
ils       avaient 

J     6tais 
tu  etais 
il    6tait 

Past  Absolute 

nous  §tions 
vous  6tiez 
ils       6taient 

/  hadt  etc. 
j'    eus 
tu  eus 
il    eut 

nous  edmes 
vous  etltes 
ils      eurent 

I  was,  etc. 
je   fus 
tu  fus 
il    fut 

nous  ftimes 
vous  fdltes 
ils       furent 

Grammatical  Appendix 


291 


Future 


/  8?iall  have,  etc. 


/  shall  he,  etc. 


J      aural 

nous  aurons 

je   serai 

nous  serons 

tu  auras 

vous  aurez 

tu  seras 

voiis  serez 

il     aura 

ils       auront 

il    sera 

ils       seront 

Past  Future,  or  Conditional 

/  should  have, 

etc. 

I  should  he. 

etc. 

j'    aurais 

nous  aurions 

je  serais 

nous  serious 

tu  aurais 

vous  auriez 

tu  serais 

vous  seriez 

il    aurait 

ils       auraient 

il    serait 
Imperative 

ils       seraient 

Have,  etc. 

ayons 

Be,  etc. 

soyons 

aie 

ayez 

sois 
Subjunctive 
Present 

soyez 

I  (may)  have. 

etc. 

/  (may)  he. 

etc. 

y    aie 

nous  ayons 

je   sois 

nous  soyons 

tu  aies 

vous  ayez 

tu  sois 

N 

vous  soyez 

il    ait 

ils       aient 

il    soit 

ils       soient 

Past 


I  (might)  have,  etc. 


I  (might)  he,  etc. 


j  eusse 
tu  eusses 
il    e<it 


nous  eussions 
vous  eussiez 
ils       eussent 


je  fusse 
tu  fusses 
il    fdt 


nous  fussions 
vous  fussiez 
ils       fussent 


COMPOUND   TENSES 

336.  Most  verbs  in  French  form  their  compound  tenses  from  the  past 
participle  and  the  auxiliary  verb  avoir.  A  few  verbs  use  the  auxiliary 
etre  instead. 


337.  Avoir  donne 


To  have  given 
avoir  donne 


Having  given 
ay  ant  donne 


338.  i^tre  venu 


Infinitive 
Perfect 

Participle 
Perfect 


To  have  come 
§tre  venu(e)  (s) 

Having  come 
6tant  venu(e)(s) 


292 


The  Elements  of  French 


Indicative 

Present  Perfect 

I  have  given,  I  gave,  etc. 

j'aidonne         nous  avons  donne 
tu  as  donne      vous  avez  donne,  etc. 
etc. 

Past  Perfect 
I  had  given,  etc. 

j 'avals  donne,  etc. 

Second  Past  Perfect,  or  Past  Anterior 


/  have  come,  I  came,  eta, 

je  suis  venu(e) 
tu  es  venu(e),  etc. 


/  had  come,  etc. 
j'etais  venu(e),  etc. 


/  had  given,  etc. 
j'eus  donn6,  etc. 

/  shall  have  giveut  etc. 
j*aurai  donn6,  etc. 


Future  Perfect 


I  had  come,  etc. 
je  fus  venu(e),  etc. 

/  shall  have  come,  etc. 
je  serai  venu(e),  etc. 


Past  Future  (Conditional)  Perfect 


I  should  have  given,  etc. 
j'aurais  donn6,  etc. 


/  (may)  Jiave  given,  etc. 
j'aie  donn6,  etc. 

I  (might)  have  given,  etc. 
j'eusse  donn6,  etc. 


Subjunctive 
Present  Perfect 

Past  Perfect 


I  should  have  come,  etc. 
je  serais  venu(e),  etc. 


/  (may)  have  come,  etc. 
je  soia  venu(e),  etc. 

/  (might)  have  come,  etc . 
je  fusse  venu(e),  etc. 


ORTHOGRAPHICAL   CHANGES 

339.   Verbs  in  -cer  change  c  to  5  before  a  or  o  in  an  ending,  so  that  the 
soft  (s)  sound  of  c  may  remain  throughout. 

Placer,  to  place. 

Pres.  Part, 

plaffant 


Pres.  Indie. 

Past  Desc. 

Past  Absolute 

Past  Subj. 

place 

placais 

placai 

plagasse 

places 

plaeais 

plagas 

plagasses 

place 

plagait 

plaja 

plagat 

plagons 

placions 

plagames 

placassions 

placez 

placiez 

plagates 

plagassiez 

placent 

plagaient 

placerent 

plagassent 

Grammatical  Appendix 


293 


340.   Verbs  in  -ger  change  g  to  ge  before  an  ending  with  a  or  o,  so 
that  the  soft  (3)  sound  of  g  may  remain  throughout. 


Manger, 

to  eat. 

Pres.  Part. 

Pres.  Indie. 

Past  Desc. 

Past  Absolute 

Past  Subj. 

mangeant 

mange 

mangeais 

mangeai 

mangeasse 

manges 

mangeais 

mangeas 

mangeasses 

mange 

mangeait 

mangea 

mangeat 

mangeons 

mangions 

mangeames 

mangeassions 

mangez 

mangiez 

mangeates 

mangeassiez 

mangent 

mangeaient 

mangerent 

mangeassent 

341.   Verbs  in  -yer  change  y  to  i  before  e  mute. 

Exception.     Verbs  in  -ayer  and  -eyer  may  retain  the  y. 

Employer,  to  use. 
Payer,  to  pay. 


Pres.  Indie. 

Future 

Past  Future 
or  Conditional 

Pres.  Subj. 

emploie,  etc. 
paye\ 
paie  /etc. 

emploierai,  etc. 
payerail 
paierai  /etc. 

emploierais,  etc. 
payeraisl 
paierais  /etc. 

emploie,  etc 

payel 
paie  / 

342.  Verbs  Having  e  or  e  as  the  Stem  Vowel. 

Verbs  having  e  or  e  as  the  stem  vowel  change  to  e  when  the  next  syl- 
lable contains  a  mute  e. 

Mener,  to  leadj  arid  ceder,  to  yield. 


Pres.  Indicc 

Pres.  Subj. 

Future 

Past  Future 
or  Cond. 

mene 

mene 

menerai 

menerais 

menes 

menes 

meneras 

menerais 

mene 

mene 

menera 

menerait 

menons 

menion^ 

menerons 

menerions 

menez 

meniez 

menerez 

meneriez 

menent 

menent 

meneront 

meneraieut 

Imperative 
m^ne  menons 

menez 
Observe,   however,   that  in  c6der  the  stem  vowel  €  remains  unchanged 
in  the  future  and  in  the  past  future: 
eede,  etc.  cede,  etc.  cederai,  etc.  cederais,  etc. 

Note  1.  In  mene-je,  since  the  e  of  the  ending  is  not  mute,  the  stem- 
vowel  is  not  changed. 

Note  2.     Verbs  like  creer,  to  create,  are  regular:   cr6e,  etc. 

Exception.  Most  verbs  in  -eler,  -eter  double  the  1  or  the  t  instead  of 
changing  e  mute  to  e. 


294 


The  Elements  of  French 


Pres.  Indie. 

appelle 

appelles 

appelle 

appelons 

appelez 

appellent 


jette,  etc. 


Appeler, 

to  call 

Future 

Past  Future 

Pres.  Subj. 

appellerai 

appellerais 

appelle 

appelleras 

appellerais 

appelles 

appellera 

appellerait 

appelle 

appellerons 

appellerions 

appelions 

appellerez 

appelleriez 

appeliez 

appelleront 

appelleraient 

appellent 

Jeter,  to  throw 
jetterai,  etc.  jetterais,  etc.  jette,  etc. 


343.  Observe.  A  few  verbs  in  -eler  and  in  -eter  are  conjugated  like 
mener. 


acheter,  to  buy. 
achete,  etc.  acheterai,  etc.  acheterais,  etc. 

Like  acheter  are  conjugated  the  following  verbs: 


achete,  etc. 


becqueter,  to  peck 
bourreler,  to  goad 
demanteler,  to  dismantle 
e  cartel  er,  to  quarter 
epousseter,  to  dust* 
etiqueter,  to  label 


geler,  to  freeze 
harceler,  to  harass 
marteler,  to  hammer 
modeler,  to  model 
peler,  to  peel 
rapiecer,  to  piece 


IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN   -ER 
344.  Aller,  to  go  (auxiliary  etre). 

1.  Infinitive,  aller.  Future,  irai,  iras,  ira,  etc.  Past  Future,  irais, 
etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  allant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  allons, 
allez,  vont.  Past  Descriptive,  allais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural,  allons,  allez. 
Present  Subjunctive,     aille,  allies,  aille,  allions,  alliez,  aillent. 

3.  Past  Participle,     alle.  '  Perfect,  je  suis  alle(e),  etc. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  vais,  vas,  va.  Imperative,  singular, 
va,  but  vas-y. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  allai,  alias,  alia,  allames,  allates,  allerent.  Past 
Subjunctive,  allasse,  allasses,  allat,  allassions,  allassiez,  allassent. 

Like  aller: 

s'en  aller,  to  go  away. 

346.  Envoyer,  to  send  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  envoyer.  Future,  enverrai,  etc.  Past  Future,  enverrais, 
etc. 


*  May  be  written  epousseterai,  also,  in  the  future. 


Grammatical  Appendix  295 

2.  Present  Participle,  envoyant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  envoyons, 
envoyez,  envoient.  Past  Descriptive,  envoyais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural, 
envoyons,  envoyez.  Present  Subjunctive,  en  vole,  en  voles,  envoie,  envoy- 
ions,  envoyiez,  envoient. 

3.  Past  Participle,  envoye.     Perfect,  j'ai  envoy^,  etc. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  envoie,  envoies,  envoie.  Imperative,  singular, 
envoie. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  envoyai,  envoyas,  envoya,  envoyames,  envoyates, 
envoyerent.  Past  Subjunctive,  envoyasse,  envoyasses,  envoyat,  envoyas- 
sions,  envoyassiez,  envoyassent. 

Like  envoyer: 

renvoyer,  to  send  away,  dismiss,  refer  to. 

IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN  -//? 

346.  Acquerir,  to  acquire  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  acquerir.  Future,  acquerrai,  acquerras,  acquerra,  etc. 
Past  Future,  acquerrais,  etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  acquerant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  acquer- 
ons,  acquerez,  acquierent.  Past  Descriptive,  acquerais,  etc.  Imperative, 
plural,  acquerons,  acquerez.  Present  Subjunctive,  acquiere,  acquieres, 
acquiere,  acquerions,  acqueriez,  acquierent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  acquis. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  acquiers,  acquiers,  acquiert.  Impera- 
tive, singular,  acquiers. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  acquis,  acquis,  acquit,  acqi:dmes,  acquttes,  acquirent. 
Past  Subjunctive,  acquisse,  acquisses,  acquit,  acquissions,  acquissiez, 
acquissent. 

Like  acquerir: 
conquerir,  to  conquer  reconquerir,  to  reconquer 

s'enquerir,  to  inquire  requerir,  to  require,  daim 

347.  Benir,  to  hless  (auxiliary  avoir).  Besides  the  regular  forms,  this 
verb  has  also  an  irregular  past  participle,  used  only  as  an  adjective: 

Pain  benit,  consecrated  bread;  eau  benite,  holy  water, 

348.  Cotirir,  to  run  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  courir.  Future,  courrai,  courras,  etc.  Past  Future, 
courrais,  etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  courant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  courons, 
courez,  courent.  Past  Descriptive,  courais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural,  cou- 
rons, courez.  Present  Subjimctive,  coure,  coures,  coure,  courions,  couriez, 
courent. 


296  The  Elements  of  French 

3.  Past  Participle,  couru. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  cours,  cours,  court.  Imperative, 
singular,  cours. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  courus,  courus,  courut,  courumes,  courutes, 
coururent.  Past  Subjunctive,  courusse,  courusses,  couriit,  courussions, 
courussiez,  courussent. 

Like  courir  are  its  compounds: 
accourir,  to  run  up,  to  hasten  discourir,  to  discourse 

concourir,  to  cooperate,  compete  encourir,  to  incur 

parcourir,  to  run  over  secourir,  to  succor,  help 

recourir,  to  apply,  run  again 

349.  Cueillir,  to  gather,  pick  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  cueillir.  Future,  cueillerai,  etc.  Past  Future,  cueillerais, 
etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  cueillant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  cueillons, 
cueillez,  cueillent.  Past  Descriptive,  cueillais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural, 
cueillons,  cueillez.  Present  Subjunctive,  cueille,  cueilles,  cueille,  cueillions, 
cueilliez,.  cueillent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  cueilli. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  cueille,  cueilles,  cueille.  Imperative 
singular,  cueille. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  cueillis,  cueillis,  cueillit,  cueillimes,  cueillites,  cueilli- 
rent.  Past  Subjunctive,  cueillisse,  cueillisses,  cueillit,  cueillissions, 
cueillissiez,  cueillissent. 

Observe.  This  verb  is  conjugated  like  donner  in  the  present  future,  and 
past  future,  as  well  as  in  the  present  and  imperfect. 

Like  cueillir: 
accueillir,  to  welcome  saillir,  to  jut  out'\' 

recueillir,  to  gather  tressaillir,  to  start 

assaillir,  to  assail* 

350.  Dormir,  to  sleep  (auxiliary  avoir). 

L  Infinitive,  dormir.  Future,  dormirai,  etc.  Past  Future,  dormirais, 
etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  dormant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  dormons, 
dormez,  dorment.  Past  Descriptive,  dormais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural, 
dormons,  dormez.  Present  Subjunctive,  dorme,  dormes,  dorme,  dormions, 
dormiez,  dorment. 

3.  Past  Participle,  dormi. 

*  Regular  in  the  future  and  in  the  past  future:   assaillirai,  etc. 
t  Saillir,  meaning  to  gush  out,  rush  forth,  is  conjugated  like  finir. 


Grammatical  Appendix  297 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  dors,  dors,  dort.  Imperative,  singular, 
dors. 

•  5.  Past  Absolute,  dormis,  dormis,  dormit,  dormimes,  dormttes,  dor- 
mirent.  Past  Subjunctive,  dormisse,  dormisses,  dormit,  dormissions,  dor- 
missiez,  dormissent. 

Like  dormir: 
endormir,  io  put  to  sleep  se  departir,  to  desist 

s*endormir,  to  fall  asleep  repartir,  to  set  out  again,  reply 

redormir,  to  sleep  again  se  repentir,  to  repent  (Present  Indica- 

rendormir,  to  put  to  sleep  again  live,  je  me  repens,  etc.) 

se  rendormir,  to  go  to  sleep  again  sentir,  to  feel  (Present  Indicative,  je 

bouillir,   to   boil   (Present   Indicative,  sens,  etc.) 

bous,  bous,  etc.)  consentir,  to  consent 

Ibouillir,  to  boil  away  ressentir,  to  feel 

rebouillir,  to  boil  again  servir,  to  serve  (Present  Indicative,  je 

mentir,  to  lie  (Present  Indicative,  je  sers,  etc.) 

mens,  etc.)  se  servir,  to  make  use 

dementir,  to  contradict,  belie  desservir,  to  clear  the  table 

partir,  to  set  out,  start  (Present  Indica-       sortir,  to  go  out  (Present  Indicative,  je 

tive,  je  pars,  etc.)  sors,  etc.) 

departir,  to  distribute  ressortir,  to  go  out  again 

Note.  The  following  verbs  are  conjugated  like  finir:  asservir,  to  enslave, 
assortir,  to  sort,  match,  ressortir,  to  depend  (on,  k) ,  repartir,  to  distribute. 

351.  Faillir,  to  fail j  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  faillir.  Future,  faudrai,  faudras,  etc.  Past  Future, 
faudrais,  etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  faillant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  faillons, 
faillez,  faillent.  Past  Descriptive,  faillais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural,  want- 
ing.    Present  Subjunctive,  faille,  failles,  faille,  faillions,  failliez,  faillent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  failli. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  faux,  faux,  faut.  Imperative,  singu- 
lar, wanting. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  faillis,  faillis,  faillit,  faillimes,  faillites,  faillirent. 
Past  Subjunctive,  faillisse,  faillisses,  failHt,  faillissions,  faillissiez,  faillissent. 

Like  faillir: 
defaillir,  to  faint,  fail 

Observe.     Faillir,  when  meaning  to  fail  in  business,  is  regular,  like  finir. 

352.  Fleurir,  to  flourish ^  etc.  (auxiliary  avoir). 

This  verb  is  conjugated  like  finir,  except  that  in  the  Present  Participle 
and  in  the  Past  Descriptive  there  are  two  sets  of  forms: 

(a)  Present  Participle,  fieurissant.  Past  Descriptive,  fleurissais, 
meaning  to  blossom  or  flourish,  literally,  as  of  flowers,  etc. 

if))  Present  Participle,  florissant.  Past  Descriptive,  florissais,  mean- 
ing to  flourish  in  the  figurative  sense,  as  of  persons. 


298  The  Elements  of  French 

353.  Fuir,  to  flee  J  fly  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,   fuir.     Future,   fuirai,    etc.     Past   Future,   fuirais,    etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  fuyant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  fuyons, 
fuyez,  fuient.  Past  Descriptive,  fuyais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural,  fuyons, 
fuyez.     Present   Subjunctive,   fuie,   fuies,   fuie,   fuyions,   fuyiez,   fuient. 

3.  Past  Participle,  fui. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  fuis,  fuis,  fuit.  Imperative,  singular, 
fuis. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  fuis,  fuis,  fuit,  fuimes,  fuites,  fuirent.  Past  Sub- 
junctive, fuisse,  fuisses,  fuit,  fuissions,  fuissiez,  fuissent. 

Like  fuir: 
s*enfuir,  to  flee,  escape 

354.  Gesir,  to  lie,  lie  buried. 

1.  Infinitive,  gesir.     Future,  wanting.    Past  Future,  wanting. 

2.  Present  Participle,  gisant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  gisons, 
gisez,  gisent.  Past  Descriptive,  gisais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural,  wanting. 
Present  Subjunctive,  wanting. 

3.  Past  Participle,  wanting. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular, , ,  gtt. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  wanting.     Past  Subjunctive,  wanting. 

355.  Hair,  to  hate  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  hair.     Future,  hairai,   etc.     Past  Future,  hairais,   etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  haissant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  haissons, 
haissez,  haissent.  Past  Descriptive,  haissais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural, 
haissons,  haissez. 

3.  Past  Participle,  hai. 

4.  Present  Indicative,*  singular,  hais,  hais,  halt.  Imperative,  singu- 
lar, hais. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  hais,  hais,  hait,  haimes,  t  haites,  t  hairent.  Past 
Subjunctive,  haisse,  haisses,  hait,  f  haissions,  haissiez,  haissent. 

356.  Mourir,  to  die  (auxiliary  etre). 

1.  Infinitive,  mourir.  Future,  mourrai,  etc.  Past  Future,  mourrais, 
etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  mourant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  mourons, 
mourez,  meurent.  Past  Descriptive,  mourais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural, 
mourons,  mourez,  etc.  Present  Subjunctive,  meure,  meures,  meure, 
mourions,  mouriez,  meurent. 

*  These  forms  lose  the  dieresis. 

t  These  forms  take  no  circumflex  accent. 


Grammatical  Appendix  299 

3.  Past  Participle,  mort. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  meurs,  meurs,  meurt.  Imperative, 
singular,  meurs. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  mourus,  mourus,  mourut,  mourumes,  mouriites, 
moururent.  Past  Subjunctive,  mourusse,  mourusses,  mouriit,  mounis- 
sions,  inourussiez,  mourussent. 

Note.     The  stem  vowel  ou  regularly  changes  to  eu  when  stressed. 

Like  mourir: 
se  mourir,  to  he  dying  (found  only  in  the  infinitive,  in  the  present  indicative, 
and  in  the  past  descriptive) . 

357.  Ouvrir,  to  open  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  ouvrir.  Future,  ouvrirai,  etc.  Past  Future,  ouvrirais, 
etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  ouvrant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  ouvrons, 
ouvrez,  ouvrent.  Past  Descriptive,  ouvrais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural, 
ouvrons,  ouvrez.  Present  Subjunctive,  ouvre,  ouvres,  ouvre,  ouvrions, 
ouvriez,  ouvrent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  ouvert. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  ouvre,  ouvres,  ouvre.  Imperative, 
singular,  ouvre. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  ouvris,  ouvris,  ouvrit,  ouvrimes,  ouviites,  ouvrirent. 
Past  Subjunctive,  ouvrisse,  ouvrisses,  ouvrit,  ouvrissions,  ouvrissiez, 
ouvrissent. 

Note.  Ouvrir  is  conjugated  like  donner  in  the  present  indicative, 
present  subjunctive,  and  in  the  imperative. 

Like  ouvrir: 
entr'ouvrir,  to  open  slightly  recouvrir,  to  cover  again 

rouvrir,  to  open  again  oflfrir,  to  offer 

couvrir,  to  cover  souflfrir,  to  suffer 

decouvrir,  to  discover 

358.  Tenir,  to  hold  (auxiliary  avoir). 

L  Infinitive,  tenir.  Future,  tiendrai,  etc.  Past  Future,  tiendrais, 
etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  tenant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  tenons, 
tenez,  tiennent.  Past  Descriptive,  tenais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural, 
tenons,  tenez.  Present  Subjunctive,  tienne,  tiennes,  tienne,  tenions, 
teniez,  tiennent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  tenu. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  tiens,  tiens,  tient.  Imperative,  sin- 
gular, tiens. 


300  The  Elements  of  French 

5.  Past  Absolute,  tins,  tins,  tint,  tinmes,  tintes,  tinrent.  Past  Sub- 
junctive, tinsse,  tinsses,  tint,  tinssions,  tinssiez,  tinssent. 

Note  1.  The  characteristic  vowel  of  the  past  absolute  and  of  the  past 
subjunctive  is  written  in. 

Note  2.     The  stem  vowel  e  becomes  ie  whenever  it  bears  the  stress. 

Like  tenir  are  its  compounds: 

s'abstenir,  to  abstain  maintenir,  to  maintain 

appartenir,  to  belong  obtenir,  to  obtain 

contenir,  to  contain  retenir,  to  retain 

detenir,  to  detain  soutenir,  to  sustain 
entretenir,  to  entertain 

359.  Venir,  to  come. 

Conjugated  exactly  like  tenir,  except  that  the  auxiHary  is  etre. 

1.  Infinitive,  venir.     Future,  viendrai,  etc.     Past  Future,  viendrais,  etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  venant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  venons, 
venez,  viennent.  Past  Descriptive,  venais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural,  venons, 
venez.  Present  Subjunctive,  vienne,  viennes,  vienne,  venions,  veniez 
viennent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  venu. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  viens,  viens,  vient.  Imperative, 
singular,  viens. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  vins,  vins,  vint,  vinmes,  vintes,  vinrent.  Past 
Subjunctive,  vinsse,  vinsses,  vint,  vinssions,  vinssiez,  vinssent. 

Note  1.  The  characteristic  vowel  of  the  past  absolute  and  of  the  past 
subjunctive  is  written  in. 

Note  2.     The  stem  vowel  e  becomes  ie  whenever  it  bears  the  stress. 

Like  venir  are  its  compounds: 
convenir,  to  agree,  suit  revenir,  to  come  back,  come  to  (of  bills, 

contrevenir,  to  violate  etc.) 

circonvenir,  to  circumvent  redevenir,  to  become  again 

devenir,  to  become  se  souvenir,  to  recollect 

intervenir,  to  intervene  subvenir,  to  aid 

parvenir,  to  attain  survenir,  to  occur 

prevenir,  to  prevent  se  ressouvenir,  to  recollect 

provenir,  to  proceed  (from,  de) 

360.  Vetir,  to  clothe  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  v^tir.    Future,  vetirai,  etc.     Past  Future,  v^tirais,  etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  vetant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  vetons, 
v^tez,  vetent.  Past  Descriptive,  vetais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural,  vetons, 
vetez.     Present  Subjunctive,  vete,  v^tes,  vete,  vetions,  vetiez,  vetent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  vetu. 


Grammatical  Appendix  301 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  v^ts,  v^ts,  vet.  Imperative,  singular, 
vets. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  vetis,  vetis,  vetit,  vettmes,  v^tttes,  v^tirent.  Past 
Subjunctive,  vetisse,  vetisses,  vettt,  vetissions,  vefcissiez,  vetissent. 

Like  vetir : 
devetir,  to  divest  revStir,  to  clothe  again 

se  dev6tir,  to  take  off  clothing  se  revetir,  to  put  on  clothing 

IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN  -RE 

361.  Battre,  to  heat  (auxiliary  avoir). 

Conjugated  like  perdre,  except  that  it  has  only  one  t  in  the  stem  of  the 
Present  Indicative,  singular,  bats,  bats,  bat.     Imperative,  singular,  bats. 

Like  battre: 
abattre,  to  fell  se  debattre,  to  struggle 

combattre,  to  fight  rabattre,  to  beat  down 

debattre,  to  debate 

362.  Boire,  to  drink  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  boire.     Future,  boirai,  etc.     Past  Future,  boirais,  etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  buvant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  buvons, 
buvez,  boivent.  Past  Descriptive,  buvais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural, 
buvons,  buvez.  Present  Subjunctive,  boive,  boives,  boive,  buvions, 
buviez,  boivent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  bu. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  bois,  bois,  boit.  Imperative,  singular, 
bois. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  bus,  bus,  but,  btimes,  bMes,  burent.  Past  Sub- 
junctive, busse,  busses,  biit,  bussions,  bussiez,  bussent. 

Note.  The  stem  vowel  u  of  the  present  participle  changes  to  oi  when- 
ever it  bears  tHe  stress. 

Like  boire: 
reboire,  to  drink  again 

363.  Conclure,  to  conclude  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  conclure.  Future,  conclurai,  etc.  Past  Future,  con- 
clurais,  etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  concluant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  conclu- 
ons,  concluez,  concluent.  Past  Descriptive,  concluais,  etc.  Imperative, 
plural,  concluons,  concluez.  Present  Subjunctive,  conclue,  conclues,  con- 
clue,  concluions,  concluiez,  concluent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  conclu. 


302  The  Elements  of  French     • 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  conclus,  conclus,  conclut.  Imperative 
singular,  conclus. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  conclus,  conclus,  conclut,  concWmes,  concltites,  con- 
clurent.  Past  Subjunctive,  conclusse,  conclusses,  concltit,  conclussions, 
conclussiez,  conclussent. 

Like  conclure: 
exclure,  to  exclude 

364.  Conduire,  to  conduct  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  conduire.  Future,  conduirai,  etc.  Past  Future,  con- 
duirais,  etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  conduisant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  con- 
duisons,  conduisez,  conduisent.  Past  Descriptive,  conduisais,  etc.  Imper- 
ative, plural,  conduisons,  conduisez.  Present  Subjimctive,  conduise,  con- 
duises,  conduise,  conduisions,  conduisiez,  conduisent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  conduit. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  conduis,  conduis,  conduit.  Impera- 
tive, singular,  conduis. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  conduisis,  conduisis,  conduisit,  conduistmes,  con- 
duisttes,  conduisirent.  Past  Subjunctive,  conduisisse,  conduisisses,  con- 
duisit, conduisissions,  conduisissiez,  conduisissent. 

Like  conduire: 

se  conduire,  to  conduct  one's  self  traduire,  to  translate 

econduire,  to  show  out,  dismiss  construire,  to  construct 

reconduire,  to  lead  back  instraire,  to  instruct 

deduire,  to  deduct  reconstruire,  to  reconstruct 

enduire,  to  coat  (with  plaster)  detruire,  to  destroy 

induire,  to  induce  cuire,  to  cook 

introduire,  to  introduce  recuire,  to  cook  again 

produire,  to  produce  luire,  to  shine* 

reduire,  to  reduce  reluire,  to  shine  again* 

reproduire,  to  reproduce  nuire,  to  injure^ 
seduire,  to  seduce 

365.  Confire,  to  preserve  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  confire.     Future,  confirai,  etc.     Past  Future,  confirais,  etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  confisant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  confisons, 
confisez,  confisent.  Past  Descriptive,  confisais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural, 
confisons,  confisez.  Present  Subjunctive,  confise,  confises,  confise,  con- 
fisions,  confisiez,  confisent. 

*  Past  participles  lui  and  relui,  respectively.     Wanting  in  the  past  abso- 
lute and  the  past  subjunctive, 
t  Past  participle,  nui. 


Grammatical  Appendix  303 

3.  Past  Participle,  confit. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  confis,  confis,  confit.  Imperative,  sin- 
gular, confis. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  confis,  confis,  confit,  confimes,  confttes,  confirent. 
Past  Subjunctive,  confisse,  confisses,  confit,  confissions,  confissiez,  con- 
fissent. 

Like  confire: 
suffire  (p.  p.  suffi),  to  suffice 

366.  Connaitre,  to  know  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  connaitre.  Future,  connattrai,  etc.  Past  Future,  con- 
naitrais,  etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  connaissant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  con- 
naissons,  connaissez,  connaissent.  Past  Descriptive,  connaissais,  etc. 
Imperative,  plural,  connaissons,  connaissez.  Present  Subjunctive,  con- 
naisse,  connaisses,  connaisse,  connaissions,  connaissiez,  connaissent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  connu. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  connais,  connais,  connait.  Impera- 
tive, singular,  connais. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  connus,  connus,  connut,  conniimes,  conntites,  con- 
nurent.  Past  Subjunctive,  connusse,  connusses,  conntat,  connussions, 
connussiez,  connussent. 

Note.     The  stem-vowel  i  takes  the  circumflex  (i)  everywhere  before  t. 

Like  connaitre: 
meconnaitre,  not  to  know  disparaitre,  to  disappear 

reconnaitre,  to  recognize  reparaitre,  to  reappear 

paraitre,  to  appear  (seem)  *paitre,  to  graze 
apparaitre,  to  appear  (become  visible)        repaitre,  to  feed,  feast 
comparaitre,  to  appear  (law  term)  se  repaitre,  to  feed,  feast 

367.  Coudre,  to  sew  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  coudre.  Future,  coudrai,  etc.  Past  Future,  coudrais, 
etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  cousant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  cousons, 
cousez,  consent.  Past  Descriptive,  cousais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural, 
cousons,  cousez.  Present  Subjunctive,  couse,  couses,  couse,  cousi- 
ons,  cousiez,  consent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  cousu. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  couds,  couds,  coud.  Imperative,  sin- 
gular, couds. 

*  Wanting  in  the  past  participle,  past  absolute,  imperative,  and  past  sub- 
junctive. 


304 


The  Elements  of  French 


5.  Past  Absolute,  cousis,  cousis,  cousit,  cousimes,  cousites,  cousirent. 
Past  Subjunctive,  cousisse,  cousisses,  cousit,  cousissions,  cousissiez,  cou- 
sissent. 


Like  coudre: 
decoudre,  to  rip,  unsew 


recoudre,  to  sew  again 


368.  Craindre,  to  fear  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  craindre.  Future,  craindrai,  etc.  Past  Future,  crain- 
drais,  etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  craignant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  craig- 
nons,  craignez,  craignent.  Past  Descriptive,  craignais,  etc.  Imperative, 
plural,  craignons,  craignez.  Present  Subjunctive,  craigne,  craignes, 
craigne,  craignions,  craigniez,  craignent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  craint. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  crains,  crains,  craint.  Imperative, 
singular,  crains. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  craignis,  craignis,  craignit,  craignimes,  craignites, 
craignirent.  Past  Subjunctive,  craignisse,  craignisses,  craignit,  craignis- 
sions,  cfaignissiez,  craignissent. 


Like  craindre: 

in  -aindre: 
contraindre,  to  constrain 
plaindre,  to  pity 
se  plaindre,  to  complain 

in  -eindre : 
astreindre,  to  compel 
atteindre,  to  attain 
ceindre,  to  enclose,   gird,   gird  on   (a 

sword,  etc.) 
depeindre,  to  depict 
empreindre,  to  imprint 
enceindre,  to  gird 
enfreindre,  to  infringe 
eteindre,  to  extinguish 
f eindre,  to  feign 
geindre,  to  groan 

369.  Croire,  to  believe  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  croire.     Future,  croirai,  etc.     Past  Future,  croirais,  etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  croyant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  croyons, 
croyez,  croient.  Past  Descriptive,  croyais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural, 
croyons,  croyez.  Present  Subjunctive,  croie,  croies,  croie,  croyions, 
croyiez,  croient. 

3.  Past  Participle,  cru. 


peindre,  to  paint 
repeindre,  to  paint  again 
restr eindre,  to  restrain 
teindre,  to  dye 
deteindre,  to  fade 
reteindre,  to  dye  again 

in  -eindre : 
joindre,  to  join 
adjoindre,  to  adjoin 
conjoindre,  to  conjoin 
disjoindre,  to  disjoin 
enjoindre,  to  enjoin 
rejoindre,  to  rejoin 
eindre,  to  anoint 


Grammatical  Appendix  305 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  crois,  crois,  croit.  Imperative,  singu- 
lar, crois. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  crus,  cms,  crut,  criimes,  crutes,  crurent.  Past 
Subjunctive,  crusse,  crusses,  crut,  crussions,  crussiez,  crussent. 

Like  croire : 
accroire,  to  believe  (an  untruth).     Found  only  in   faire   accroire,   to  cause  to 
believe  (an  untruth). 

370.  Croitre,  to  grow  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  croitre.    Future,  croitrai,  etc.    Past  Future,  croitrais,  etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  croissant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  croissons, 
croissez,  croissant.  Past  Descriptive,  croissais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural, 
croissons,  croissez.  Present  Subjunctive,  croisse,  croisses,  croisse,  crois- 
sions,  croissiez,  croissant. 

3.  Past  Participle,  crii  (feminine  crue). 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  crois,  crois,  crott.  Imperative,  singu- 
lar, crois. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  crtls,  crtis,  criit,  crtimes,  criites,  criirent.  Past 
Subjunctive,  criisse,  crtlsses,  crAt,  crussions,  crussiez,  crussent. 

Note.  Croitre  takes  the  circumflex  for  all  forms  otherwise  like  those  of 
croire,  but  may  omit  it  in  the  past  subjunctive  (except  in  the  third  singular). 

Like  croitre: 
accroitre,  to  increase*  recroitre,  to  grow  again* 

decroitre,  to  decrease  surcroitre,  to  overgrow 

371.  Dire,  to  say,  tell  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  dire.     Future,  dirai,  etc.     Past  Future,  dirais,  etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  disant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  disons,  dites, 
disent.  Past  Descriptive,  disais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural,  disons,  dites. 
Present  Subjunctive,  dise,  dises,  dise,  disions,  disiez,  disent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  dit. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  dis,  dis,  dit.     Imperative,  singular,  dis. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  dis,  dis,  dit,  dimes,  dites,  dirent.  Past  Subjunctive, 
disse,  disses,  dit,  dissions,  dissiez,  dissent. 

Like  dire : 
contredire,  to  contradict^  medire  (de),  to  slander] 

dedire,  to  retract,  deny]  predire,  to  predict] 

interdire,  to  interdict]  redire,  to  say  again 

Note.  Maudire,  to  curse,  has  maudissant,  in  the  present  participle.  The 
present  indicative  plural,  etc.,  are  derived  from  the  stem  maudiss+. 

*  No  circumflex  in  past  participle,  past  absolute,  third  singular,  and  third 
plural. 

t  The  second  plural  present  indicative  and  imperative  is:  Contredisez, 
d^disez,  interdisez,  medisez,  predisez. 


306  The  Elements  of  French 

372.  Ecrire,  to  write  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  ecrire.     Future,  ecrirai,  etc.     Past  Future,  ecrirais,  etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  ecrivant.  Present. Indicative,  plural,  ecrivons, 
ecrivez,  ecrivent.  Past  Descriptive,  ecrivais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural, 
ecrivons,  ecrivez. 

3.  Past  Participle,  ecrit. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  ecris,  ecris,  ecrit.  Imperative,  singular, 
^cris. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  ecrivis,  ecrivis,  ecrivit,  ecrivimes,  ecrivites,  ecrivi- 
rent.  Past  Subjunctive,  ecrivisse,  ecrivisses,  ecrivit,  ecrivissions,  ecri- 
vissiez,  ecrivissent. 

Like  ecrire  are  all  verbs  in  -(s)crire: 

circonscrire,  to  circumscribe  proscrire,  to  proscribe 

decrire,  to  describe  recrire,  to  rewrite 

inscrire,  to  inscribe  souscrire,  to  subscribe 

prescrire,  to  prescribe  transcrire,  to  transcribe 

373.  Etre,  to  be  (auxiliary  avoir).     See  §  335. 

374.  Faire,  to  do,  make  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  faire.     Future,  ferai,  etc.     Past  Future,  ferais,  etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  faisant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  faisons, 
faites,  font.  Past  Descriptive,  faisais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural,  ffiisons, 
faites.     Present  Subjunctive,  fasse,  fasses,  fasse,  fassions,  fassiez,  fassent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  fait. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  fais,  fais,  fait.  Imperative,  singular, 
fais. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  fis,  fis,  fit,  fimes,  fites,  firent.  Past  Subjunctive, 
fifise,  fisses,  fit,  fissions,  fissiez,  fissent. 

Like  faire : 

contrefaire,  to  imitate  redefaire,  to  undo  again 

defaire,  to  undo  refaire,  to  do  again 

forfaire,  to  forfeit  satisfaire,  to  satisfy 

mefaire,  to  harm  surfaire,  to  overcharge,  over-praise 
parfaire,  to  complete 

375.  Lire,  to  read  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  lire.     Future,  lirai,  etc.     Past  Future,  lirais,  etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  lisant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  lisons,  lisez, 
lisent.  Past  Descriptive,  lisais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural,  lisons,  lisez. 
Present  Subjunctive,  lise,  lises,  lise,  lisions,  lisiez,  lisent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  lu. 


Grammatical  Appendix  307 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  lis,  lis,  lit.     Imperative,  singular,  lis. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  lus,  lus,  lut,  Mmes,  liites,  lurent.  Past  Subjunctive, 
lusse,  lusses,  liit,  lussions,  lussiez,  lussent. 

•  Like  lire:  ^       .    ♦ 

#lire,  to  elect  relire,  to  read  again 

reelire,  to  re-elect 

376.  Mettre,  to  place,  put  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  mettre.     Future,  mettrai,  etc.     PastFuture,  mettrais,  etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  mettant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  mettons, 
mettez,  mettent.  Past  Descriptive,  mettais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural, 
mettons,  mettez.  Present  Subjunctive,  mette,  mettes,  mette,  mettions, 
mettiez,  mettent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  mis. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  mets,  mets,  met.  Imperative,  singu- 
lar, mets. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  mis,  mis,  mit,  mimes,  mites,  mirent.  Past  Sub- 
junctive, misse,  misses,  mit,  missions,  missiez,  missent. 

Like  mettre: 

se  mettre  (a),  to  begin  omettre,  to  omit 

admettre,  to  admit  permettre,  to  permit 

commettre,  to  commit  promettre,  to  promise 

compromettre,  to  compromise  remettre,  to  put  hack,  postpone 

demettre,  to  dismiss  repromettre,  to  .promise  again 

emettre,  to  emit  soumettre,  to  submit 

s*entremettre,  to  interpose  transmettre,  to^  transmit 

377.  Moudre,  to  grind  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  moudre.  Future,  moudrai,  etc.  Past  Future,  moudrais, 
etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  moulant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  moulons, 
moulez,  moulent.  Past  Descriptive,  moulais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural, 
moulons,  moulez.  Present  Subjunctive,  moule,  fnoules,  moule,  moulions, 
mouliez,  moulent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  moulu. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  mouds,  mouds,  moud.  Imperative, 
singular,  mouds. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  moulus,  moulus,  moulut,  moulAmes,  mouMtes, 
moulurent.  Past  Subjunctive,  moulusse,  moulusses,  mouliit,  moulussions, 
moulussiez,  moulussent. 

Like  moudre : 
emoudre,  to  whet  remoudre,  to  sharpen 

remoudre,  to  grind  a^ain 


308  The  Elements  of  French 

378.  Naitre,  to  be  born  (auxiliary  etre). 

1.  Infinitive,  nattre.     Future,  naitrai,  etc.     Past  Future,  naltrais,  etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  naissant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  naissons, 
naissez,  naissent.  Past  Descriptive,  naissais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural, 
naissons,  naissez. 

3.  Past  Participle,  ne. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  nais,  nais,  nait.  Imperative,  singular, 
nais. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  naquis,  naquis,  naquit,  naquimes,  naquttes,  naqui- 
rent.  Past  Subjunctive,  naquisse,  naquisses,  naquit,  naquissions,  naquis- 
siez,  naquissent. 

Note.     The  stem-vowel  i  takes  the  circumflex  (i)  everywhere  before  t. 

Like  naitre: 
re  naitre,  to  revive 

379.  Plaire,  to  please  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  infinitive,  plaire.     Future,  plairai,  etc.     Past  Future,  plairais,  etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  plaisant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  plaisons, 
plaisez,  plaisent.  Past  Descriptive,  plaisais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural, 
plaisons,  plaisez.  Present  Subjunctive,  plaise,  plaises,  plaise,  plaisions, 
plaisiez,  plaisent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  plu. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  plais,  plais,  platt.     Imperative,  singular,  plais. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  plus,  plus,  plut,  plilmes,  pliites,  plurent.  Past  Sub- 
junctive, plusse,  plusses,  pMt,  plussions,  plussiez,  plussent. 

Like  plaire: 
complaire,  to  humor  taire*,  to  say  nothing 

diplaire,  to  displease 

380.  Prendre,  to  take  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  prendre.  Future,  prendrai,  etc.  Past  Future,  prendrais, 
etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  prenant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  prenons, 
prenez,  prennent.  Past  Descriptive,  prenais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural, 
prenons,  prenez.  Present  Subjunctive,  prenne,  prennes,  prenne,  prenions, 
preniez,  prennent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  pris. 

*  II  tait  has  no  circumflex. 


Grammatical  Appendix  309 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  prends,  prends,  prend.  Imperative, 
singular,  prends. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  pris,  pris,  prit,  primes,  prites,  prirent.  Past  Sub- 
junctive, prisse,  prisses,  prit,  prissions,  prissiez,  prissent. 

Like  prendre  are  its  compounds: 

apprendre,  to  learn  s'eprendre(de) ,  to  he  taken  (with) ,  to  fall 
deprendre,  to  part  in  love 

desapprendre,  to  unlearn  se  meprendre,  to  he  mistaken 

comprendre,  to  understand  reprendre,  to  take  hack 

entreprendre,  to  undertake  surprendre,  to  surprise 

381.  Resoudre,  to  resolve  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  resoudre.  Future,  resoudrai,  etc.  Past  Future,  r^soud- 
rais,  etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  resolvant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  resol- 
vons,  resolvez,  resolvent.  Past  Descriptive,  r^solvais,  etc.  Imperative, 
plural,  resolvons,  resolvez.  Present  Subjunctive,  resolve,  resolves,  resolve, 
resolvions,  resolviez,  resolvent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  resolu,  and  r^sous. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  r6sous,  resous,  resout.  Imperative, 
singiilar,  resous. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  resolus,  resolus,  resolut,  resoMmes,  resoWtes,  r6- 
solurent.  Past  Subjunctive,  resolusse,  resolusses,  resolut,  resolussions, 
resolussiez,  r^solussent. 

Like  resoudre : 
absoudre*,  to  absolve  dissoudre 'i',  to  dissolve 

382.  Rire,  to  laugh  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  rire.     Future,  rirai,  etc.     Past  Future,  rirais,  etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  riant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  rions,  riez, 
rient.  Past  Descriptive,  rials,  etc.  Imperative,  plural,  rions,  riez.  Pres- 
ent Subjunctive,  rie,  ries,  rie,  riions,  riiez,  rient. 

3.  Past  Participle,  ri. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  ris,  ris,  rit.     Imperative,  singular,  ris. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  ris,  ris,  rit,  rimes,  rites,  rirent.  Past  Subjunctive, 
risse,  risses,  rtt,  rissions,  rissiez,  rissent. 

Like  rire : 
se  rire,  to  make  sport  (of,  de)  sourire,  to  smile 

♦Past  participle,  absous  (Fem.  absoute);  dissous  (Fem.  dissoute),  respect- 
ively. Absoudre  and  dissoudre  are  wanting  in  the  past  absolute  and  in  the 
past  subjunctive. 


310  The  Elements  of  French 

383.  Suivre,  to  follow  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  suivre.     Future,  suivrai,  etc.     Past  Future,  suivrais,  etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  suivant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  suivons, 
suivez,  suivent.  Past  Descriptive,  suivais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural, 
suivons,  suivez.  Present  Subjunctive,  suive,  suives,  suive,  suivions, 
suiviez,  suivent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  suivi. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  suis,  suis,  suit.  Imperative,  singular, 
suis. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  suivis,  suivis,  suivit,  suivimes,  suivites,  suivirent.' 
Past  Subjunctive,  suivisse,  suivisses,  suivit,  suivissions,  suivissiez,  sui- 
yissent. 

Like  suivre: 
s*ensuivre  (impersonal),  to  follow  poursuivre,  to  pursue 

384.  Traire,  to  milk  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  traire.     Future,  trairai,  etc.     Past  Future,  trairais,  etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  trayant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  trayons, 
trayez,  traient.  Past  Descriptive,  trayais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural, 
trayons,  trayez.  Present  Subjunctive,  traie,  traies,  traie,  tray  ions, 
trayiez,  traient. 

3.  Past  Participle,  trait. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  trais,  trais,  trait.  Imperative,  singu- 
lar, trais. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  wanting.    Past  Subjunctive,  wanting. 

Like  traire : 
abstraire,  to  abstract  retraire,  to  redeem  (legal) 

distraire,  to  distract  soustraire,  to  subtract 

extraire,  to  extract  *braire,  to  bray 

rentraire,  to  darn 

385.  Vaincre,  to  conquer  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  vaincre.  Future,  vaincrai,  etc.  Past  Future,  vaincrais 
etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  vainquant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  vain- 
quons,  vainquez,  vainquent.  Past  Descriptive,  vainquais,  etc.  Imper- 
ative, plural,  vainquons,  vainquez.  Present  Subjunctive,  yainque,  vain- 
ques,  vainque,  vainquions,  vainquiez,  vainquent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  vaincu. 

♦Usually  found  only  in  the  infinitive  and  in  the  third  person  present 
indicative,  future  and  past  future. 


Grammatical  Appendix  311 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  vaincs,  vaincs,  vainc.  Imperative, 
singular,  vaincs. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  vainquis,  vainquis,  vainquit,  vainquimes,  vainquites, 
vainquirent.  Past  Subjunctive,  vainquisse,  vainquisses,  vainquit,  vain- 
quissions,  vainquissiez,  vainqiiissent. 

Note.     The  c  of  the  stem  becomes  qu  before  any  vowel  except  u. 
Like  vaincre : 
convaincre,  to  convince 

386.  Vivre,  to  live  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  vivre.     Future,  vivrai,  etc.     Past  Future,  vivrais,  etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  vivant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  vivons, 
vivez,  vivent.  Past  Pescriptive,  vivais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural,  vivons, 
vivez.     Present  Subjunctive,  vive,  vives,  vive,  vivions,  viviez,  vivent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  vecu. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  vis,  vis,  vit.     Imperative,  singular,  vis. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  vecus,  vecus,  vecut,  vecumes,  vecutes,  v^curent. 
Past  Subjunctive,  vecusse,  vecusses,  vectit,  v6cussions,  vecussiez,  vecus- 
sent. 

Like  vivre : 
revivre,  to  revive  survivre,  to  survive 

IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN  -OIR 

See  §334. 

387.  Recevoir, io  receive  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  recevoir.  Future,  recevrai,  etc.  Past  Future,  recevrais, 
etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  recevant.  '  Present  Indicative,  plural,  recevons, 
recevez,  regoivent. .  Past  Descriptive,  recevais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural, 
recevons,  recevez.  Present  Subjunctive,  regoive,.  regoives,  regoive,  rece- 
vions,  receviez,  regoivent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  regu. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  regois,  regois,  regoit.  Imperative, 
singular,  regois. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  regus,  regus,  regut,  regiimes,  regtites,  regurent. 
Past  Subjunctive,  regusse,  regusses,  regtit,  regussions,  regussiez,  regassent. 

Note  1.     The  stem  vowel  becomes  oi  whenever  it  bears  the  stress. 

Note  2.     C  becomes  5  before  o  or  u,  to  keep  the  soft  (s)  sound  of  c. 

Like  recevoir : 
apercevoir,  to  perceive  decevoir,  to  deceive 

concevoir,  to  conceive  percevoir,  to  collect  taxes 


312  The  Elements  of  French 

388.  Devoir,  to  owe  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  devoir.     Future,  devrai,  etc.     Past  Future,  devrais,  etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  devant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  devons, 
devez,  doivent.  Past  Descriptive,  devais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural,  want- 
ing.   Present  Subjunctive,  doive,  doives,  doive,  devions,  deviez,  doivent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  d\X  (Fern.  due). 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  dois,  dois,  doit.  Imperative,  singular, 
wanting. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  dus,  dus,  dut,  dumes,  diites,  durent.  Past  Sub- 
junctive, dusse,  dusses,  dtlt,  dussions,  dussiez,  dussent. 

Note.  Devoir  is  conjugated  like  recevoir,  except  that  the  imperative  is 
wanting. 

Like  devoir: 
redevoir,  to  owe  still 

389.  Asseoir,  to  seat  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  asseoir.     Future,  assierai,  etc.     Past  Future,  assi^rais,  etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  asseyant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  asseyons, 
asseyez,  asseyent.  Past  Descriptive,  asseyais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural, 
asseyons,  asseyez.  Present  Subjunctive,  asseye,  asseyes,  asseye,  asseyions, 
asseyiez,  asseyent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  assis. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  assieds,  assieds,  assied.  Imperative, 
singular,  assieds. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  assis,  assis,  assit,  assimes,  assttes,  assirent.  Past 
Subjunctive,  assisse,  assisses,  assit,  assissions,  assissiez,  assissent. 

Like  asseoir: 

s'asseoir,  to  sit  down  se  rasseoir,  to  sit  down  again 

•  rasseoir,  to  reseat,  calm  seoir*,  to  he  becoming 

390.  Avoir,  to  have  (auxiliary  avoir). 

♦Used  only  in  the  third  person  of  the  following:  Present  Indicative, 
sied,  sieent.  Past  Descriptive,  seyait,  seyaient.  Present  Subjunctive,  si6e, 
si6ent.     Future,  siera,  sieront.     Past  Future,  si6rait,  sieraient. 

Note.  Besides  the  above  forms  of  asseoir,  the  following  are  also  found 
occasionally:  assoyant  (present  participle);  assois,  assois,  assoit,  assoyons, 
assoyez,  assoient  (present  indicative) ;  assoyais,  etc.  (past  descriptive) ;  assoirai, 
etc.,  and  asseyerai,  etc.  (future);  assoirais,  etc.,  and  asseyerais,  etc.  (past 
future);  assoie,  etc.  (present  subjunctive);  and  assois,  etc.  (imperative). 


Grammatical  Appendix  313 

391.  Falloir,  to  be  necessary,  must  (Impersonal.  Auxiliary 
avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,   falloir.    Future,   il  faudra.     Past  Future,   il  faudrait. 

2.  Present  Participle,  wanting.  Past  Descriptive,  il  fallait.  Present 
Subjunctive,  il  faille. 

3.  Past  Participle,  fallu. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  il  faut. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  il  fallut.     Past  Subjunctive,  il  fallAt. 

Note.     The  imperative  is  wanting. 

392.  Mouvoir,  to  move  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  mouvoir.  Future,  mouvrai,  etc.  Past  Future,  mouv- 
rais,  etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  mouvant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  mouvons, 
mouvez,  meuvent.  Past  Descriptive,  mouvais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural, 
mouvons,  mouvez.  Present  Subjunctive,  meuve,  meuves,  meuve,  mou- 
vions,  mouviez,  meuvent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  mA  (Fem.  mue). 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  mens,  meus,  meat.  Imperative, 
singular,  meus. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  mus,  mus,  mat,  mumes,  mtites,  murent.  Past 
Subjunctive,  musse,  musses,  miit,  mussions,  mussiez,  mussent. 

Like  mouvoir: 
gmouvoir,  to  arouse  (no  circumflex  on  the  past  participle) 

393.  Pleuvoir,  to  rain  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  pleuvoir.    Future,  il  pleuvra.    Past  Future,  il  pleuvrait. 

2.  Present  Participle,  pleuvant.  Past  Descriptive,  il  pleuvait.  Pres- 
ent Subjunctive,  il  pleuve. 

3.  Past  Participle,  plu. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  il  pleut. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  il  plut.     Past  Subjunctive,  il  pMt. 

Note.     The  imperative  is  wanting. 

•394.  Pouvoir,  can,  to  he  able  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  pouvoir.  Future,  pourrai,  etc.  Past  Future,  pourrais, 
etc. 


314  The  Elements  of  French 

2.  Present  Participle,  pouvant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  pouvons, 
pouvez,  peuvent.  Past  Descriptive,  pouvais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural, 
wanting.  Present  Subjunctive,  puisse,  puisses,  puisse,  puissions,  puissiez, 
puissent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  pu. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  peux  or  puis,  peux,  peut.  Imperative, 
singular,  wanting. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  pus,  pus,  put,  ptimes,  piites,  purent.  Past  Sub- 
junctive, pusse,  pusses,  ptit,  pussions,  pussiez,  pussent. 

395.  Savoir,  to  know,  etc.  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  savoir.     Future,  saurai,  etc.     Past  Future,  saurais,  etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  sachant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  savons, 
savez,  savent.  Past  Descriptive,  savais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural,  sachons, 
sachez.  Present  Subjunctive,  sache,  saches,  sache,  sachions,  sachiez, 
sachent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  su. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  sais,  sais,  salt.  Imperative,  singular, 
sache. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  sus,  sus,  sut,  siimes,  sutes,  surent.  Past  Subjunc- 
tive, susse,  susses,  stit,  sussions,  sussiez,  sussent. 

396.  Valoir^  io  he  worth  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  valoir.  Futiu"e,  vaudrai,  etc.  Past  Future,  vaudrais, 
etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  valant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  valons, 
valez,  valent.  Past  Descriptive,  valais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural,  valons, 
valez.     Present  Subjunctive,  vaille,  vailles,  vaille,  valions,  valiez,  vaillent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  valu. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  vaux,  vaux,  vaut.  Imperative,  singu- 
lar, vaux. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  valus,  valus,  valut,  valiimes,  valMes,  valurent. 
Past  Subjunctive,  valusse,  valusses,  valut,  valussions,  valussiez,  valussent. 

Like  valoir: 
equivaloir,  to  he  equivalent  prevaloir,    to    prevail    (present    sub- 

revaloir,  to  pay  back,  return  like  for  like  junctive  prevale,  etc.) 

397.  Voir,  to  see  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  voir.    Future,  verrai,  etc.    Past  Future,  verrais,   etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  voyant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  voyons, 
voyez,  voient.     Past  Descriptive,  voyais,  etc.     Imperative,  plural,  voyons, 


Grammatical  Appendix  315 

voyez.     Present  Subjunctive,  voie,  voies,  voie,  voyions,  voyiez,  voient. 

3.  Past  Participle,  vu. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  vols,  vois,  voit.  Imperative,  singular, 
vols. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  vis,  vis,  vit,  vtmes,  vites,  virent.  Past  Subjunc- 
tive, visse,  visses,  vit,  vissions,  vissiez,  vissent. 

Like  voir: 
entrevoir,  to  catch  sight  of  pourvoir*,  to  provide 

revoir,  to  see  again  pre  voir*,  to  foresee 

398.  Vouloir,  to  wish  J  will  (auxiliary  avoir). 

1.  Infinitive,  vouloir.  Future,  voudrai,  etc.  Past  Future  voudrais, 
etc. 

2.  Present  Participle,  voulant.  Present  Indicative,  plural,  voulons, 
voulez,  veulent.  Past  Descriptive,  voulais,  etc.  Imperative,  plural, 
voulons,  voulez.  t  Present  Subjtmctive,  veuille,  veuilles,  veuille,  voulions, 
vouliez,  veuillent. 

3.  Past  Participle,  voulu. 

4.  Present  Indicative,  singular,  veux,  veux,  veut.  Imperative,  singu- 
lar, veux. 

5.  Past  Absolute,  voulus,  voulus,  voulut,  voulilmes,  vouliites,  voulu- 
rent.  Past  Subjunctive,  voulusse,  voulusses,  voulut,  voulussions,  voulus- 
6iez,  voulussent. 

*  Past  absolute  -vus,  etc. ;  past  subjunctive,  -vusse,  etc. ;  future  and  past 
future,  -voirai(s),  etc. 

t  Veuillez  is  generally  used  as  the  second  plural  of  the  imperative. 


INDEX  OF  IRREGULAR  VERBS 


{The  numerals  refer  to  articles) 


abattre,  361 
absoudre,  381 
(s)'abstenir,  358 
abstraire,  384 
accourir,  348 
accroire,  369 
accroitre,  370 
accueillir,  349 
acquerir,  346 
adjoindre,  368 
admettre,  376 
aller,  344 
apercevoir,  387 
apparaitre,  366 
appartenir,  358 
apprendre,  380 
assaillir,  349 
(s)'asseoir,  389 
astreindre,  368 
atteindre,  368 
avoir,  390 

battre,  361 
b^nir,  347 
boire,  362 
bouillir,  350 
braire,  384 

ceindre,  368 
circonscrire,  372 
circonvenir,  359 
combattre,  361 
commettre,  376 
comparattre,  366 
complaire,  379 
comprendre,  380 
compromettre,  376 
concevoir,  387 


conclure,  363 
concourir,  348 
(se)  conduire,  364 
confire,  365 
conjoindre,  368 
connaltre,  366 
conquerir,  346 
consentir,  350 
construire,  364 
contenir,  358 
contraindre,  368 
contredire,  371 
contrefaire,  374 
contrevenir,  359 
convaincre,  385 
convenir,  359 
coudre,  367 
courir,  348 
couvrir,  357 
craindre,  368 
croire,  369 
crottre,  370 
cueillir,  349 
cuire,  364 

(se)  d^battre,  361 
d^cevoir,  387 
d^coudre,  367 
d^couvrir,  357 
d^crire,  372 
d^crottre,  370 
d^dire,  371 
d^duire,  364 
d^faillir,  351 
d^faire,  374 
dementir,  350 
demettre,  376 
(se)  departir,  350 

316 


depeindre,  368 
deplaire,  379 
d^prendre,  380 
desapprendre,  380 
desservir,  350 
deteindre,  368 
detenir,  358 
detruire,  364 
devenir,  359 
(se)  dev^tir,  360 
devoir,  388 
dire,  371 
discourir,  348 
disjoindre,  368 
disparaitre,  366 
dissoudre,  381 
dormir,  350 

^bouillir,  350 
^conduire,  364 
^crire,  372 
61ire,  375 
dmettre,  376 
^inoudre,  377 
^mouvoir,  392 
empreindre,  368 
enceindre,  368 
encourir,  348 
(s)'endormir,  350 
enduire,  364 
enfreindre,  368 
(s)'enfuir,  353 
enjoindre,  368 
(s)'enqu^rir,  346 
(s)'ensuivre,  383 
(s)'entremettre,  376 
entreprendre,  380 
entretenir,  358 


Index  of  Irregular  Verbs 


317 


entrevoir,  397 
entr'ouvrir,  357 
envoyer,  345 
(s)'eprendre,  380 
equivaloir,  396 
etre,  373 
exclure,  363 
extraire,  384 

faillir,  351 
faire,  374 
falloir,  391 
feindre,  368 
fleurir,  352 
forfaire,  374 
fuir,  353 

geindre,  368 
g^ir,  354 

hair,  355 

induire,  364 
inscrire,  372 
instruire,  364 
interdire,  371 
intervenir,  359 
introduire,  364 

joindre,  368 

lire,  375 
luire,  364 

maintenir,  358 
maudire,  371 
m^connaitre,  366 
m^dire,  371 
m^faire,  374 
mentir,  350 
(se)  meprendre,  380 
(se)  mettre,  376 
moudre,  377 


(se)  mourir,  356 
mouvoir,  392 

naltre,  378 
nuire,  364 

obtenir,  358 
offrir,  357 
oindre,  368 
omettre,  376 
ouvrir,  357 

pattre,  366 
parattre,  366 
parcourir,  348 
parfaire,  374 
parvenir,  359 
peindre,  368 
percevoir,  387 
permettre,  376 
(se)  plaindre,  368 
plaire,  379 
pleuvoir,  393 
poursuivre,  383 
pourvoir,  397 
pouvoir,  394 
pr^dire,  371 
prendre,  380 
prescrire,  372 
pr^valoir,  396 
pr^venir,  359 
pr^voir,  397 
produire,  364 
promettre,  376 
proscrire,  372 
provenir,  359 

qu6rir,  querir,  346 

rabattre,  361 
(se)  rasseoir,  389 
reboire,  362 
rebouillir,  350 


recevoir,  387 
reconduire,  364 
reconnattre,  366 
reconqu^rir,  346 
reconstniire,  364 
recoudre,  367 
recourir,  348 
recouvrir,  357 
r^crire,  372 
recrottre,  370 
recueillir,  349 
recuire,  364 
reddfaire,  374 
redevenir,  359 
redevoir,  388 
redire,  371 
redormir,  350 
r^duire,  364 
r^^lire,  375 
refaire,  374 
rejoindre,  368 
relire,  375 
reluire,  364 
remettre,  376 
remoudre,  r^moudre, 

377 
renattre,  378 
(se)  rendormir,  350 
rentraire,  384 
renvoyer,  345 
(se)  repattre,  366 
repartir,  350 
repeindre,  368 
(se)  repentir,  350 
reprendre,  380 
reproduire,  364 
repromettre,  376 
requ^rir,  346 
r^soudre,  381 
ressentir,  350 
ressortir,  350 
ressouvenir,  359 
restreindre,  368 


318 


The  Elements  of  French 


reteindre,  368 
retenir,  358 
retraire,  384 
revaloir,  396 
revenir,  359 
(se)  revetir,  360 
revivre,  385 
revoir,  397 
(se)  rire,  382 
rouvrir,  357 

saillir,  349 
satisfaire,  374 
savoir,  395 
secourir,  348 
sMuire,  364 
sentir,  350 


seoir,  389 
(se)  servir,  350 
sortir,  350 
souffrir,  357 
soumettre,  376 
sourire,  382 
souscrire,  372 
soustraire,  384 
soutenir,  358 
souvenir,  859 
subvenir,  359 
suffire,  365 
suivre,  383 
surcrottre,  370 
surfaire,  374 
surprendre,  380 
survenir,  359 


survivre,  385 
taire,  379 
teindre,  368 
tenir,  358 
traduire,  364 
traire,  384 
transcrire,  372 
transmettre,  376 
tressaillir,  349 

vaincre,  386 
valoir,  396 
venir,  359 
vetir,  360 
vivre,  386 
voir,  397 
vouloir,  398 


SELECTIONS  FOR  READING 

LETTERS 

Ch^re  Madame: 

J'ai  ete  tres  touche  de  I'honneur  que  vous  me  faites  en  m'ouvrant  votre 
maison. 

J'accepte  avec  joie  votre  cordiale  invitation,  esp^rant  qu'un  jour  je 
pourrais  compter  parmi  vos  amis. 

Recevez,  Madame,  avec  mes  remerciements,  Thommage  de  mon  profond 
respect. 

Ren6  Lebon. 

Cher  Monsieur: 

Je  viens  de  recevoir  a  I'instant  le  cadeau  que  vous  m'avez  fait  pour  mon 
anniversaire.  Je  ne  sais  comment  vous  remercier  de  cette  nouvelle  preuve 
de  bonte  a  mon  egard. 

Je  vous  en  suis  profondement  reconnaissant,  et  ce  cadeau  augmerite 
encore  toute  la  gratitude  que  j'ai  pour  vous. 

Recevez,  cher  Monsieur,  I'expression  de  ma  profonde  reconnaissance. 

Guillaume  Desbois. 

Ch^re  Madame: 

Je  vous  remercie  infiniment  de  votre  aimable  invitation,  et  je  suis  vrai- 
ment  desol6  de  ne  pouvoir  I'accepter. 

Un  engagement,  pris  il  y  a  quelques  jours,  m'empeche  de  me  rendre  k 
votre  demande. 

En  esp^rant,  Madame,  avoir  Fhonneur  de  vous  revoir,  recevez  I'expres- 
sion de  mon  profond  respect. 

Frangois  Lenoir. 

Cher  Monsieur:  .. 

Un  de  mes  jeunes  eleves,  Charles  Renaud,  vient  de  finir  ses  etudes  au 
lyc^e,  et  d^sirerait  entrer  k  TUniversite.  Je  prends  la  liberte  de  vous  le 
recommander  k  vous  qui  avez  toujours  fait  preuve  de  bont^,  et  qui  ne  cessez 
de  guider  les  jeunes  gens  de  vos  conseils  eclair^s.  Ce  jeune  Charles  Renaud 
e^t  un  gargon  d'une  haute  valeur  intellectuelle  et  morale,  esprit  remar- 
quablement  vivace  et  ^clair^  et  qui,  guide  par  un  conseiller  tel  que  vous  fera 
son  chemin  dans  la  vie. 

Avec  tons  mes  remerciements,  recevez,  monsieur,  Texpression  de  ma 
haute  consideration. 

Stanislas  Durand. 
319 


320  The  Elements  of  French 

Cher  Monsieur: 

Nous  aurions,  mon  mari  et  moi,  beaucoup  de  plaisir  a  vous  avoir  demain 
pour  diner.  Voulez-vous  nous  faire  cet  honneur  et  venir  sans  fagon  vous 
asseoir  a  notre  table.  Mon  mari  et  moi  avons  ete  tres  heureux  de  vous 
connattre  et  desirous  vous  revoir  en  ami. 

Meilleurs  sentiments. 

MmeX. 

Ch^re  amie: 

Me  voila  done  k  Chicago!  Cela  vous  etonnera  sans  doute  mais  m'y 
voila!  Le  temps  est  charmant  mais  on  me  dit  que  ceci  ne  dure  pas  et  que 
le  ciel  de  Chicago  pleure  plus  souvent  qu'il  ne  sourit.  Mais  que  voulez- 
vous?  Je  m'attends  k  tout.  Je  suis  stire  que  vous  voulez  apprendre  mes 
impressions  sur  les  Chicagoans.  Eh  bien!  lis  sont  charmants  et  s'ils 
n'avaient  pas  —  parait-il  —  Tincurable  manie  de  macher  continuellement 
une  sorte  de  gomme,  je  les  trouverais  bien  mieux  que  vos  Parisiens.  J'ad- 
mire  de  plus  en  plus  les  sentiments  patriotiques  du  peuple  americain;  ils 
sont  euperbes  eur  ce  point!  Et  j'avoue  que  je  m'^tonne  de  trouver  tant 
d'enthoUsiasme  chez  des  gens  du  nord.  J'aurais  bien  voulu  vous  raconter 
bien  des  choses  encore  mais,  h61as!  le  temps  passe  si  vite! 

Claire. 


ANECDOTES 
En  Famille 


Napoleon  P^,  empereur  des  Frangais,  se  disputait  un  jour  avec  sa 
femme,  I'imp^ratrice  Josephine.  Comme  elle  ne  I'ecoutait  pas,  il  finit  par 
demander:  *'Savez-vous,  Madame,  quelle  difference  il  y  a  entre  un  miroir 
et  vous? 

Non,  fit-elle. 

Eh  bien,  ma  chere,  voici  la  difference:    Un  miroir  reflechit  sans 

parler,  tandis  que  vous  parlez  sans  reflechir. 

Et  VOUS;  monsieur,  savez-vous  quelle  difference  il  y  a  entre  un 

miroir  et  vous? 

Non,  fit-il. 

Eh  bien,  mon  cher^  voici  la  difference:  C'est  qu'un  miroir  est  poli, 

et  que  vous  ne  Tetes  pas. 

Terre-neuve 

Deux  strangers  se  promenaient  sur  le  bord  de  I'eau;  Tun  d'eux  etait 
accompagne  d'un  magnifique  chien  de  Terre-Neuve.    La  conversation  des 


Selections  for  Reading  321 

deux  amis  roulait  sur  les  qualit^s  instinctives  qui  distinguent  ce  quadruple, 
et  le  proprietaire  du  chien  avait  assez  de  peine  a  persuader  k  son  compagnon 
que  la  race  de  Terre-Neuve  n'hesitait  pas  un  instant  a  se  precipiter  dans 
les  flots  pour  sauver  un  homme  en  danger. 

^'Savez-vous  nager?"  dit-il  k  Fincredule. 

*'Non,'*  repond  Fami. 

Le  proprietaire  du  chien  pousse  son  compagnon  et  le  jette  dans  le  canal : 
le  chien  de  se  lancer  a  la  suite  et  de  le  saisir  par  un  des  pans  de  son  paletot. 

Mais  en  face,  sur  I'autre  bord,  il  y  avait  aussi  un  chien  de  Terre-Neuve,  et 
le  noble  animal,  ay  ant  remarque  la  scene  qui  se  passait  pres  de  lui,  se  jeta 
k  la  nage,  arriva  en  un  instant  sur  le  lieu  du  sinistre,  et  se  saisit  ^galement 
du  patient  par  le  pan  oppose. 

Les  deux  chiens  tirant  egalement  dans  des  directions  contraires,  il  arriva 
que,  conform^ment  aux  lois  de  la  statique,  Fhomme  resta  en  equilibre  au 
milieu  de  ses  sauveurs. 

Toutefois  un  paletot,  quelque  bon  qu'il  soit,  ne  resist e  pas  longtemps 
k  des  attaques  aussi  rudes;  le  vetement  ceda,  et  les  deux  terre-neuve  s'en 
all^rent  chacun  vers  son  maitre  avec  un  morceau  de  la  depouille  du  patient. 
Mais  son  ami  veillait  sur  lui.  Des  qu'il  eut  vu  que  les  chiens  avaient  pris 
la  partie  pour  le  tout,  il  se  jeta  a  son  tour  a  la  nage,  et  reussit,  heureusement, 
k  ramener  la  victime  de  cet  essai  un  peu  hasarde. 

Complet 

A  Paris  on  n'admet  qu'un  nombre  fixe  de  voyageurs.  II  peut  y  avoir, 
par  exemple,  dix  places  a  Finterieur,  cinq  places  de  plate-forme,  et  douze 
places  a  Fimperiale.  Aussitot  que  toutes  les  places  sont  occupees,  le  con- 
ducteur  fait  apparaitre  un  ecfiteau  qui  porte  le  mot  Complet.  Complet 
signifie  que  Fon  n'admet  plus  personne.  Un  jeune  Americain,  qui  n'etait 
k  Paris  que  depuis  quelques  semaines,  demanda  un  jour  k  un  ami  parisien: 
"Que  signifie  ce  mot  Complet  que  je  vois  par  tout  sur  les  tramways  et  les 
omnibus?"  II  faut  savoir  que  les  Parisiens  sont  des  blagueurs  par  excel- 
lence.     Comment,  dit-il  k  FAmericain,  vous  voyagez  en  France,  et 

vous  n'avez  pas  encore  visite  Complet.  Mais  c'est  un  endroit  charmant  — 
superbe!  Pour  rien  au  monde,  il  ne  faut  manquer  ga,  mon  vieux!"  Le 
pauvre  Americain  avait  beau  suivre  tons  les  omnibus  et  tous  les  tramways 
qui  portaient  ce  mot.    II  ne  reussit  jamais  a  trouver  Complet. 

Principalement 

Et  vous,  madame,  qu'est-ce  que  vous  avez?  demande  le  m^decin 

k  une  femme  flanquee  d'un  enfant  d'une  douzaine  d'annees. 

Ce  n'est  pas  moi,  monsieur,  c'est  mon  gargon. 

Eh  bien!  qu'est-ce  qu'il  a,  votre  gargon?    AUons,  d^p^chons-nous. 


322  The  Elements  of  French 

II  est  sourd,  monsieur  .  .  .  Qa  lui  a  pris,  je  vais  vous  dire  .  .  . 

Ah!  il  est  sourd?  .  .  .  Et  de  quelle  oreille? 

Des  deux,  principalement,  monsieur. 

Comment  cela,  principalement? 

Oui,  monsieur  .  .  .  Voyons,  Edouard,  leve-toi  quand  on  te  parle 

.  .  .  De  quelle  oreille  es-tu  sourd?  dit-elle  au  gargon,  en  le  secouant  pour 
le  faire  se  lever. 

Mais  celui-ci  garde  un  mutisme  idiot. 

De  quelle  oreille  es-tu  sourd?  repete  la  m^re  en  criant  .  .  .  Vous 

voyez,  monsieur!  c'est  comme  je  vous  dis  .  .  .  des  deux  principalement. 
Adapted  from  Jack,  by  Alphonse  Daudet. 


LA  DERNIERE  CLASSE 

Alphonse  Daudet  (1840-1897) 

Recit  d*un  Petit  Alsacien 

Ce  matin-1^  j'^tais  tres  en  retard  pour  aller  a  Fecole,  et  j 'avals  grand'- 
peur  d'etre  gronde,  d'autant  plus  que  M.  Hamel  nous  avait  dit  qu'il  nous 
interrogerait  sur  les  participes,  et  je  n'en  savais  pas  le  premier  mot.  Un 
moment  I'idee  me  vint  de  manquer  la  classe  et  de  prendre  ma  course  k 
travers  champs. 

Le  temps  6tait  si  chaud,  si  clair! 

On  entendait  les  merles  siffier  a  la  lisiere  du  bois,  et  dans  le  pre  Rippeit, 
derriere  la  scierie,  les  Prussiens  qui  faisaient  I'exercice.  Tout  cela  me  ten- 
tait  bien  plus  que  la  regie  des  participes;  mais  j'eus  la  force  de  resister,  et  je 
courus  bien  vite  vers  I'^cole. 

En  passant  devant  la  mairie,  je  vis  qu'il  y  avait  du  monde  arrets  pres 
du  petit  grillage  aux  affiches.  Depuis  deux  ans,  c'est  de  1^  que  nous  sont 
venues  toutes  les  mauva-ises  nouvelles,  les  batailles  perdues,  les  requisi- 
tions, les  ordres  de  la  commandature ;  et  je  pensai  sans  m'arreter: 

Qu'est-ce  qu'il  y  a  encore? 

Alors,  comme  je  traversais  la  place  en  courant,  le  forgeron  Wachter, 
qui  ^tait  1^  avec  son  apprenti  en  train  de  lire  I'affiche,  me  cria: 

Ne  te  depeche  pas  tant,  petit;  tu  y  arriveras  toujours  assez  tot,  a 

ton  ecole! 

Je  crus  qu'il  se  moquait  de  moi,  et  j'entrai  tout  essouffle  dans  la  petite 
cour  de  M.  Hamel. 

D'ordinaire,  au  commencement  de  la  classe,  il  se  faisait  un  grand  tapage 
qu'on  entendait  jusque  dans  la  rue,  les  pupitres  ouverts,  fermes,  les  legons 


Selections  for  Reading  323 

qu'on  rep^tait  tr^s  haut  tous  ensemble  en  se  bouchant  les  oreilles  pour 
mieux  apprendre,  et  la  grosse  regie  du  mattre  qui  tapait  sur  les  tables : 

Un  peu  de  silence! 

Je  comptais  sur  tout  ce  train  pour  gagner  mon  banc  sans  etre  vu;  mais 
justement  ce  jour-la  tout  ^tait  tranquille,  comme  un  matin  de  dimanche. 
Par  la  fenetre  ouverte,  je  voyais  mes  camarades  deja  ranges  k  leurs  places, 
et  M.  Hamel,  qui  passait  et  repassait  avec  la  terrible  regie  en  fer  sous  le 
bras.  II  fallut  ouvrir  la  porte  et  entrer  au  milieu  de  ce  grand  calme.  Vous 
pensez  si  j'etais  rouge  et  si  j 'avals  peur! 

Eh  bien,  non.  M.  Hamel  me  regarda  sans  colere  et  me  dit  tres  douce- 
ment: 

Va  vite  a  ta  place,  mon  petit  Frantz ;  nous  allions  commencer  sans 

toi. 

J'enjambai  le  banc  et  je  m'assis  tout  de  suite  a  mon  pupitre.  Alors 
seulement,  un  peu  remis  de  ma  frayeur,  je  remarquai  que  notre  maitre 
avait  sa  belle  redingote  verte,  son  jabot  plisse  fin  et  la  calotte  de  sole  noire 
brodee  qu'il  ne  mettait  que  les  jours  d'inspection  ou  de  distribution  de  prix. 
Du  reste,  toute  la  classe  avait  quelque  chose  d' extraordinaire  et  de  solennel. 
Mais  ce  qui  me  surprit  le  plus,  ce  fut  de  voir  au  fond  de  la  salle,  sur  les 
bancs  qui  restaient  vides  d'habitude,  des  gens  du  village  assis  et  silencieux 
comme  nous,  le  vieux  Hauser  avec  son  tricorne,  I'ancien  maire,  Tancien 
facteur,  et  puis  d'autres  personnes  encore.  Tout  ce  monde-la  paraissait 
triste;  et  Hauser  avait  apporte  un  vieil  abecedaire  mang6  aux  bords,qu'il 
tenait  grand  ouvcrt  sur  ses  genoux,  avec  ses  grosses  lunettes  posees  en 
travers  des  pages. 

Pendant  que  je  m'etonnais  de  tout  cela,  M.  Hamel  etait  monte  dans  sa 
chaire,  et  de  la  meme  voix  douce  et  grave  dont  il  m'avait  regu,  il  nous  dit: 

Mes  enfants,   c'est  la  derniere  fois  que   je  vous  fais  la  classe. 

L^ordre  est  venu  de  Berlin  de  ne  plus  enseigner  que  Fallemand  dans  les 
ecoles  de  I'Alsace  et  de  la  Lorraine  ...  Le  nouveau  maitre  arrive  demain. 
Aujourd'hui  c'est  votre  derniere  legon  de  frangais.  Je  vous  prie  d'etre 
bien  attentifs. 

Ces  quelques  paroles  me  bouleverserent.  Ah!  les  mis^rables,  voil^  ce 
qu'ils  avaient  affiche  a  la  mairie. 

Ma  derniere  legon  de  frangais!  .  .  . 

Et  moi  qui  savais  a  peine  ecrire!  Je  n'apprendrais  done  jamais!  II 
faudrait  done  en  rester  1^!  Comme  je  m'en  voulais  maintenant  du  temps 
perdu,  des  classes  manquees  a  courir  les  nids  ou  a  faire  des  glissades  sur  la 
Saar!  Mes  livres  que  tout  a  Theure  encore  je  trouvais  si  ennuyeux,  si 
lourds  a  porter,  ma  grammaire,  mon  histoire  sainte,  me  semblaient  k  present 
de  vieux  amis  qui  me  feraient  beaucoup  de  peine  a  quitter.  C'est  comme 
M.  Hamel.  L'idee  qu'il  allait  partir,  que  je  ne  le  verrais  plus,  me  faisait 
oublier  les  punitions,  les  coups  de  regie. 


324  The  Elements  of  French 

Pauvre  homme!  C'est  en  I'honneur  de  cette  derniere  classe  qu'il  avait 
mis  ses  beaux  habits  du  dimanche,  et  maintenant  je  comprenais  pourquoi 
ces  vieux  du  village  etaient  venus  s'asseoir  au  bout  de  la  salle.  Cela  sem- 
blait  dire  qu'ils  regrettaient  de  ne  pas  y  etre  venus  plus  souvent,  k  cette 
ecole.  C'etait  aussi  comme  une  fagon  de  remercier  notre  maitre  de  ses 
quarante  ans  de  bons  services,  et  de  rendre  leurs  devoirs  h  la  patrie  qui 
s'en  allait.  .  . 

J'en  etais  1^  de  mes  reflexions,  quand  j'entendis  appeler  mon  nom. 
C'etait  mon  tour  de  reciter.  Que  n'aurais-je  pas  donne  pour  pouvoir 
dire  tout  au  long  cette  f ameuse  regie  des  participes,  bien  haut,  bien  clair, 
sans  une  faute;  mais  je  m'embrouillai  aux  premiers  mots,  et  je  restai 
debout  a  me  balancer  dans  mon  banc,  le  coeur  gros,  sans  oser  lever  la 
tete.    J'entendais  M.  Hamel  qui  me  parlait : 

Je  ne  te  gronderai  pas,  mon  petit  Frantz,  tu  dois  etre  assez  puni 

.  .  .  voila  ce  que  c'est.  Tous  les  jours  on  se  dit:  Bah!  j'ai  bien  le  temps. 
J'apprendrai  demain.  Et  puis  tu  vois  ce  qui  arrive.  Ah!  g'a  ete  le  grand 
malheur  de  notre  Alsace  de  tou jours  remettre  son  instruction  k  demain. 
Maintenant  ces  gens-la  sont  en  droit  de  nous  dire:  Comment!  Vous 
pretendiez  etre  Frangais,  et  vous  ne  savez  ni  parler  ni  ecrire  votre  langue! 
Dans  tout  ga,  mon  pauvre  Frantz,  ce  n'est  pas  encore  toi  le  plus  coupable. 
Nous  avons  tous  notre  bonne  part  de  reproches  a  nous  faire. 

Vos  parents  n'ont  pas  assez  tenu  k  vous  voir  instruits.  lis  aimaient 
mieux  vous  envoyer  travailler  a  la  terre  ou  aux  filatures  pour  avoir  quelques 
sous  de  plus.  Moi-meme  n'ai-je  rien  a  me  reprocher?  Est-ce  que  je  ne 
vous  ai  pas  souvent  fait  arroser  mon  jardin  au  lieu  de  travailler?  Et  quand 
je  voulais  aller  pecher  des  truites,  est-ce  que  je  me  genais  pour  vous  donner 
conge? 

Alors,  d'une  chose  a  I'autre,  M.  Hamel  se  mit  a  nous  parler  de  la  langue 
frangaise,  disant  que  c'etait  la  plus  belle  langue  du  monde,  la  plus  claire, 
la  plus  solide;  qu'il  f allait  la  garder  entre  nous  et  ne  jamais  I'oubUer,  parce 
que,  quand  un  peuple  tombe  esclave,  tant  qu'il  tient  bien  sa  langue,  c'est 
comme  s'il  tenait  la  clef  de  sa  prison.  Puis  11  prit  une  grammaire  et  nous 
lut  notre  legon.  J'etais  ^tonne  de  voir  comme  je  comprenais.  Tout  ce 
qu'il  disait  me  semblait  facile,  facile.  Je  crois  aussi  que  je  n'avais  jamais 
si  bien  ecoute  et  que  lui  non  plus  n'avait  jamais  mis  tant  de  patience  k 
ses  explications.  On  aurait  dit  qu'avant  de  s'en  aller,  le  pauvre  homme 
voulait  nous  donner  tout  son  savoir,  nous  le  faire  entrer  dans  la  tete  d'un 
seul  coup. 

La  legon  finie,  on  passa  k  I'ecriture.  Pour  ce  jour-1^,  M.  Hamel  nous 
avait  prepare  des  exemples  tout  neufs,  sur  lesquels  etait  ^crit  en  belle 
ronde:  France,  Alsace,  France,  Alsace.  Cela  faisait  comme  des  petits 
drapeaux  qui  flottaient  tout  autour  de  la  classe  pendus  a  la  tringle  de  nos 
pupitres.    II  f allait  voir  comme  chacun  s'appliquait,  et  quel  silence!    On 


Selections  for  Reading  325 

n'entendait  rien  que  le  grincement  des  plumes  sur  le  papier.  Un  moment 
des  hannetons  entrerent;  mais  personne  n'y  fit  attention,  pas  m^me  les 
tout  petits  qui  s'appliquaient  k  tracer  leurs  batons,  avec  un  coeur,  une 
conscience,  comme  si  cela  encore  ^tait  du  frangais  .  .  .  Sur  la  toiture  de 
r^cole,  des  pigeons  roucoulaient  tout  bas,  et  je  me  disais  en  les  ^coutant: 

Est-ce  qu'on  ne  va  pas  les  obliger  a  chanter  en  allemand,  eux 

aussi? 

De  temps  en  temps,  quand  je  levais  les  yeux  de  dessus  ma  page,  je 
voyais  M.  Hamel  immobile  dans  sa  chaire  et  fixant  les  objets  autour  de  lui, 
comme  s'il  avait  voulu  emporter  dans  son  regard  toute  sa  petite  maison 
d'ecole  .  .  .  Pensez!  depuis  quarante  ans,  il  etait  la  k  la  meme  place,  avec 
sa  cour  en  face  de  lui  et  sa  classe  toute  pareille.  Seulement  les  bancs,  les 
pupitres  s'etaient  polis,  frottes  par  Tusage;  les  noyers  de  la  cour  avaient 
grandi,  et  le  houblon  qu'il  avait  plante  lui-meme  enguirlandait  maintenant 
les  fenetres  jusqu'au  toit.  Quel  creve-cceur  ga.  devait  etre  pour  ce  pauvre 
homme  de  quitter  toutes  ces  choses  et  d' entendre  sa  soeur  qui  allait,  venait, 
dans  la  chambre  au-dessus,  en  train  de  fermer  les  malles!  car  ils  devaient 
partir  le  lendemain,  s'en  aller  du  pays  pour  tou jours. 

Tout  de  m^me  il  eut  le  courage  de  nous  faire  la  classe  jusqu'au  bout. 
Apres  Tecriture,  nous  eiimes  la  legon  d'histoire;  ensuite  les  petits  chanterent 
tous  ensemble  le  BA  BE  BI  BO  BU.  La-bas  au  fond  de  la  salle,  le  vieux 
Hauser  avait  mis  ses  lunettes,  et,  tenant  son  abecedaire  a  deux  mains,  il 
^pelait  les  lettres  avec  eux.  On  voyait  qu'il  s'appliquait  lui  aussi;  sa  voix 
tremblait  d'emotion,  et  c'etait  si  drole  de  Fentendre,  que  nous  avions  tous 
envie  de  rire  et  de  pleurer.    Ah!  je  m'en  souviendrai  de  cette  derniere  classe. 

Tout  k  coup  rhorloge  de  Teglise  sonna  midi,  puis  I'Angelus.  Au  meme 
moment,  les  trompettes  des  Prussiens  qui  revenaient  de  i^exercice  ecla- 
terent  sous  nos  fenetres.  M.  Hamel  se  leva,  tout  pale,  dans  sa  chaire. 
Jamais  il  ne  m'avait  paru  si  grand. 

Mes  amis,  dit-il,  mes  amis,  je  .  .  .  je  .  .  . 

Mais  quelque  chose  I'etouffait.     II  ne  pouvait  pas  achever  sa  phraee. 

Alors  il  se  tourna  vers  le  tableau,  prit  un  morceau  de  craie,  et,  en  ap- 
puyant  de  toutes  ses  forces,  il  ^crivit  aussi  gros  qu'il  put: 

VIVE  LA  FRANCE! 

Puis  il  resta  1^,  la  tete  appuyee  au  mur,  et,  sans  parler,  avec  sa  main  il 
nous  faisait  signe: 

C'est  fini  .  .  .  allez-vous-en! 


326  The  Elements  of  French 

SONGS 
Malbrough  S'en  Va-t-en  en  Guerre 

Malbrough  s'en  va-t-en  guerre, 
Mironton,  tonton,  mirontaine, 
Malbrough  s'en  va-t-en  guerre, 
Ne  sait  quand  reviendra, 
Ne  sait  quand  reviendra, 
Ne  sait  quand  reviendra. 

II  reviendra  z'a  Pdques, 
Mironton,  tonton,  mirontainel 
11  reviendra  z'a  Paques, 
Ou  a  la  Trinity,  etc. 

La  Trinite  se  passe,    • 
Mironton,  tonton,  mirontaine, 
La  Trinite  se  passe, 
Malbrough  ne  revient  pas,  etc. 

Madame  a  sa  tour  monte, 
Mironton,  tonton,  mirontaine, 
Madame  a  sa  tour  monte. 
Si  haut  qu'elle  pent  monter,  etc. 

Elle  apergoit  son  page, 
Mironton,  tonton,  mirontaine, 
Elle  apergoit  son  page. 
Tout  de  noir  habille,  etc. 

Aux  nouvelFs  que  j'apporte, 
Mironton,  tonton,  mirontaine, 
Aux  nouvelFs  que  j'apporte, 
Vos  beaux  yeux  vont  pleurer,  etc. 


Selections  for  Reading  327 

Le  Rat  de  Ville  et  la  Rat  des  Champs 

Jean  de  la  Fontaine  (1621-1695) 

Autrefois  le  rat  de  ville, 
Invita  le  rat  des  champs, 
D'une  fagon  fort  civile 
A  des  reliefs  d' ortolans. 
Sur  un  tapis  de  Turquie 
Le  convert  se  trouva  mis. 
Je  laisse  k  penser  la  vie 
Que  firent  les  deux  amis. 

Le  regal  fut  fort  honnete, 
Rien  ne  manquait  au  festin; 
Mais  quelqu'un  troubla  la  fete 
Pendant  qu'ils  etaient  en  train, 
A  la  porte  de  la  salle 
lis  entendirent  du  bruit;  4 
Le  rat  de  ville  detale, 
Son  camarade  le  suit. 


Le  bruit  cesse,  on  se  retire, 
Rats  en  campagne  aussit6t; 
Et  le  citadin  de  dire: 
Achevons  tout  notre  rot. 
C'est  assez,  dit  le  rustique, 
Demain  vous  viendrez  chez  moi; 
Ce  n'est  pas  que  je  me  pique 
De  tous  vos  festins  de  roi, 

Mais  rien  ne  vient  m^interrompre; 
Je  mange  tout  k  loisir. 
Adieu  done.    Fi  du  plaisir 
Que  la  crainte  pent  corrompre. 


328  The  Elements  of  French 

La  Marseillaise 
Rouget  de  I'Isle  (1760-1836) 

AUons,  enfants  de  la  patrie, 
Le  jour  de  gloire  est  arrive! 
Centre  nous  de  la  tyrannie 
L'etendard  sanglant  est  leve. 
Entendez-vous  dans  les  campagnes 
Mugir  ces  feroces  soldats? 
lis  vienuv^nt  j usque  dans  nos  bras, 
Egorger  nos  fils,  nos  compagnes! 

Aux  armes,  citoyens!  formez  vos  bataillonsi 

Marchons,  marchons! 
Qu'un  sang  impur  abreuve  nos  sillons! 


Amour  sacre  de  la  patrie, 

Conduit,  soutiens  nos  bras  vengeurs; 

Liberte,  Libert^  cherie, 

Combats  avec  tes  d^fenseurs! 

Sous  nos  drapeaux  que  la  Victoire 

Accoure  h  tes  males  accents! 

Que  tes  ennemis  expirants 

Voient  ton  triomphe  et  notre  gloire! 

Aux  armes,  citoyens!  formez  vos  bataillons,  etc. 


Selections  for  Singing 
La  Marseillaise 


329 


I 


mf  Allegro  marziale. 


RouGET  DE  Lisle 


■irr^- 


^i^ 


E 


^ 


^=H» 


^ 


-^ 


r 


-f^-t 


-V 


P    P     t* 

Al  -  Ions,  en  -  fants   de       la      pa 


m^ 


J^      JfL.     J^L 


*=t 


EfeE^ 


tri 


e,     Le  jour   de 


■p-   n  ri 


l±=f= 


ic=tt 


b    b     ^: 


=^^ 


r 


±z 


^ 


-^^ 


-p ^j^ _ 

Con  -  tre  nous    de       la     ty  -  ran- 


gloire  est      ar  -  ri  -  vel 


i=f=f=fet 


=8= 


;•«- 


t — I — I- 


=P=^ 


l=a= 


m 


^— h— ^- 


-C5. 


# 


M=.^-= 


1^— ^=a 


i=^=^=a^H 


ni    -  e      L'^-ten -dard  san-glant    est     le    -   \6\      L'€-ten-dard 

^•-       A        A     ■#-.     -ft      -p-       ^       -^-       -^         .|2-  #-  #.. 


^=b^=b=^B 


H- 


fe 


-t- 


^- 


-^— •— »• 


b    P    b- 


;^p=^= 


i 


^d— f^ 


m^ 


^ 


45=43= 


I)     ri  I 


■ta-^ — ta- 


S 


I        b    b    b 

san  -  giant  est      le    -    v^I       En- ten-dez-vous,  dans  les      cam- 


t: 


j-f—f-^ 


L-H — P- 


-(^ — ^— »- 


=M=* 


=tJ=* 


330  Elements  of  French 

La  Marseillaise — Concluded 


Selections  for  Singing 
La  Bonne   Aventure 


331 


Allegretto. 


± 


# 


S 


^2i 


45==f5=^=lfc 


=1= 


^^- 


Je  -  suis  un     pe  -  tit    pou  -  pon     de    bel  -  le      fi  -  gu    -    re 

^ s 


^rfc2z3 


l-4=g= 


-^7^ ^ 1 

k_          w.           fs          s 

, 

1 ^^ 

1 

y5_  1?        k.        s 

"h  ~h  ~p    '' 

A  • 

« 

•      •      «     J 

«   1 

fvi^        h        N 

I        -'       ij 

IJ      ■        to    j/ 

f   1 

^y        J       J^ 

to    *    to    to 

to 

ij 

p 

^^      IJ 

1 

Qui     ai  -  me  bien    les    bon  -  bons 

et 

les 

c 

3n  -  fi  -  tu    - 

1 

res. 

/^>.      L- 

1 

',           1 

K^j.,  1?  s* 

L           ^ 

§        >« 

^ 

' 

Ivrixk     Jn 

»^ 

1      ^ 

Li 1 

LJ 

-      _J 

ff-z^nr—i— 

^ to    # 

to       ^ 

1 h    h    h 

,     1 

/    b     i      1 

r 

f      m      J        P 

1 

IT  ^  '^     V     h 

i       h     'u^     i  J 

i            ;j       n 

i        •      •      J 

1 

[^     w     *^     ^ 

K 

^                    to  ■■ 

to     1 

Si  vous 

vou-lez  m'en  don  -  ner, 

Je  sau 

■  rai  bien  les  man  -  ger. 

^^^t-: 

Jl^__L_j__ 

#=i=i=i=J 

^^-r-r- 

-M 

^-^ 

1 

■'--^-^=;=^ 

:^ 

ftTP 1 

K K~ 

vi r^^ 

•  II 

h      h      P      P 

m  •     P 

•          •       m     J 

d     •II 

(m        h      R 

J       J       m       # 

A        r       Vi 

U      i             ^ 

-11 

\s\)                  ]'           J^ 

to        to        •        • 

to 

J          W 

^       l/* 

•  1 1 

z)        to  .  ■  ^ 

La   bon  -  ne     aventure,  oh,  gai  I 

m                m                m 

La   bon  - 

ne  aven  -  tu    - 

re! 

f- 

^\*   h 

1 

n 

•^ 

i       •  1 1 

fel^-^ 

-to li 

-to — 

— ^ 

-F 

J — Mi 

W^ ?^: 

■ r- — 

^F=^ 

-1 

— ^H 

332 


Elements  of  French 


Frere  Jacques 


^i3=rfj^^^^g±=^ 


rr§  -  re       Jac  -   ques,    Fr6  -    re        Jac  -  ques,   dor  -  mez- 


m 


i 


i= 


Fr^  -  re 


^^ 


=?= 


=& 


m 


iii=pi 


-b-t^= 


-^-=#^ 


^ee 


=F=t 


-^ — b^- 


vous?      Dor  -  mez-vous?       Son-nez   les  ma -ti  -  nes,  son-nez  les  ma- 


sfest 


Jac  -  ques,  Fr^  -  re   Jac-ques,  dor    -    mez    -    vous?       Dor    -    mez- 


i 


Fr^    -    re         Jac-ques,  FrS    -     re 


^■ 


-i9 #- 


Selections  for  Singing 


333 


Frere  Jacques— Concluded 


m 


a  -  nes,  Ding,    din,      don!       Ding,     din,      doni       Fr6    -   re 


i 


k 


-j=±=B^ 


p=t^=fn=^— «  .>  ^= 


V0U8?        Son-nez  les  ma  -  ti  -  nes,  son-nez  les  ma-  ti  -  nes.  Ding,  din, 


i 


-(S>- 


-#— ^— #- 


=t 


-b^— ^ 


Jac-ques,  dor  -  mez  -  vous?        Dor  -  mez  -  vous?    Son-nez  les  ma- 


i 


-f»- 


i 


=#==p= 


Jac-ques,  Fr5    -    re         Jac-ques,  dor  -  mez-vous,^      dor -mez -vous? 


1= 


^_ 


donI        Ding,      din,        don,         FrS  -  re  Jac-ques,  dor- mez-vous? 


h 


-0     0     0- 


^  '->  ^  j; 


ti  -  nes,  son-nez  les  ma  -  ti  -  nes.  Ding,  din,  don!       ding,  din   don! 


m:. 


r   if  r  J  -H  ij  ^  J  J  ij  -n 


r 


334 


Elements  of  French 
Fais  Dodo,  Colas 


Allegretto. 


i 


*eS 


:t 


^=^z 


^ 


zM=:z 


Fais      do  -  do,       Co  -  las,   mon  p'tit     hh    -  re,    Fais      do- 


ffls 


i    J  J 


^      1 


h 


j      i   i     i- 


& 


45;:=^-^ 


^# 


:^^ 


Se 


-i^  ^  i^- 


do,  t'au-ras   du     ga-teau;     pa  -  pa    en    au  -  ra  -  ma-man  en  aur- 


•j  Ji. 


J    4 


J. 


2=5= 


r-f>-i      H h        h 

_  ^ 

1 — 1 1 K — I 

TT*— ^ — ip-r—f — r- 

--1 d a i w f— 

d i^ — j"-" 

fn      *                    1        J 

*      •      '               1        b 

S»        ^       d 

vMy                                      J       k* 

ij      h      lj      k 

\ 

a,      Et    moi,  j-en  au  -  rai,         tout  un  plein   pa  -  nier.     Fais  do- 

^-r — F-r ^ 

r ^ — T '^- 

;*        •        ^          *1 

^" ,      •  |, 

^ — ^  - 

LI — -^ J 

±:pi 


*=:^=15 


zM=i±zz±=*=^Mi 


-^ — * — ^ 


-«a 


do,  Co -las,  mon  p'tit  fre-re,  fais  do  -  do,  tout  un  plein  pa -nier. 


aJa. 


U 


1 


^s 


^ 


VOCABULARY 


FRENCH-ENGLISH 

(Aspirated  h  is  indicated  thus :  *h) 


a  [a],  3d  sing.,  pres.  indie,  of  avoir, 
k  [a],  to,  at;  in; — la,  after  the  man- 
ner of; — Vendroit  de,  in  regard  to; 

—  V instant y  at  once;  —  temps,  — 
rheure,  on  time;  —  samedi, 
Good-bye  until  Saturday;  il  reste 

—  balancer,  he  remains  balancing. 

abandonner  [abadone],  to  abandon. 

abattre  [abatr],  to  throw  down,' 
knock  down. 

abbe  [abe],  m.,  abbot. 

abdiquer  [abdike],  to  abdicate. 

abecedaire  [abesedeir],  m.,  primer. 

abord  (d')  [d  aboir],  in  the  first 
place. 

aboutir  [abutiir],  to  end  in,  come  to. 

abreuver  [abroeve],  to  water. 

absoudre  [absuidr],  to/^solve. 

abstenir  [apst9ni:r],  to  abstain. 

Academic  [akademi],  f.,  Academy. 

accent  [aksa],  m.,  accent,  stress. 

accepter  [aksepte],  to  accept. 

accident  [aksida],  m.,  accident. 

accompagner  [akopajie],  to  accom- 
pany. 

accomplir  [akopliir];  to  accomplish. 

accord  [akoir],  m.,  agreement. 

accourir  [akuriir],  to  run  up  to, 
come  up. 

accueil  [akoeij],  m.,  welcome. 

accuser  [akyze],  to  accuse. 

acheter  [ajte],  to  buy. 

achever  [ajve],  to  finish,  complete. 

actif  [aktif],  active. 

activement  [aktivma],  actively. 

addition  [adisjS],  f.,  addition. 

adjectif  [adsektif],  m.,  adjective. 

admettre  [admetr],  to  admit. 


admirer  [admire],  to  admire, 
adresse  [adres],  f.,  address. 
adresser  [adrese],  to  address. 
adverbe  [adverb],  m.,  adverb, 
aeroplane  [aeroplan],  m.,  airplane, 
affaire  [afeir],  f.,  affair;  — s,  busi- 
ness; parler  — s,  to  talk  business; 

voild  votre  — ,  that  is  just  what 

you  want. 
afiichage  [afiXa:3],  m.,  placarding; 

colonne  d' — ,  f.,  column  on  which 

theatrical     announcements     are 

posted, 
affiche  [afij*],  f.,  placard,  poster, 
afficher  [afije],  to  post. 
afin  que  [afe  ka],  in  order  that, 
age  [0:3],  m.,  age. 
agent  [asa],  m.,  agent, 
agile  [asil],  agile, 
agreable  [agreabl],  agreeable, 
agrement  [agrema],  m.,  delight. 
ah  [a],  ah. 
Ai   or  Ay   [ai],   Ay,    a   town   near 

Rheims. 
aide  [eid],  f.,  help, 
aider  [ede],  to  help, 
aigu  [sgy],  acute,  sharp, 
aiguille  [egqiij],  f.,  needle,  hand  of 

a  watch  or  clock, 
aimable  [emabl],  amiable, 
aimer  [eme],  to  love,  like;  —  mieux, 

to  prefer, — mieux  que,  to  prefer  to. 
aine  [sne],  m.,  elder  brother, 
ainsi  [esi],  thus;  so;  —  que,  as  well  as. 
air  [e:r],  m.,  air,  look, 
ajouter  [a3Ute],  to  add. 
ajuster  [a3yste],  to  adjust. 
Albert    [albcir],   Albert,    a    proper 

name. 
Allemagne  [almaji],  f.,  Germany. 

335 


336 


Elements  of  French 


allemand     [alma],    adj.,     German, 

r — ,  German  (the  language). 
aller  [ale],  to  go;  —  hien,  to  be  well; 

—  chercher,  to  go  after,  go  for; 

—  voir,  to  go  and  see;  allonsl  let 
us  go!  come!  s'en  — ,  to  go  away. 

allumer  [alyme],  to  light. 

alors  [aloir],  then. 

Alpes  [alp],  f.,  pL,  Alps. 

Alphonse  [alfSis],  m.,  Alphonse. 

Alsace  [alzas],  f.,  Alsace,  a  French 
province. 

Alsacien  [alzasje],  m.,  Alsatian. 

americain  [amerike],  adj.,  American. 

Amerique  [amerik],  f.,  America. 

ami  [ami],  m.,  friend;  en  — ,  as  a 
friend;  un  de  mes  — s,  a  friend  of 
mine;  un  Frangais  de  mes  — s,  a 
French  friend  of  mine. 

amical[amikal],  friendly. 

amie  [ami],  f.,  friend. 

amiral  [amiral],  m.,  admiral. 

amour  [amuir],  m.  in  sing.,  and  f.  in 
plur.,  love;  affection. 

amputer  [apyte],  to  amputate. 

amusant  [amyza],  amusing. 

amuser  [amyze],  to  amuse. 

an  [a],  m.,  year  (as  a  date). 

ancien  [asje],  old;  former. 

Andre  [adre],  Andrew. 

Angelus  [aselys],  m.,   Angelus 
(prayer  in  honor  of  the  Incarna- 
tion, delivered  morning,  noon,  and 
evening);  also  a  bell  rung  for  the 
prayer. 

anglais  [agle],  adj.,  Enghsh. 

angle  [aigl],  m.,  angle. 

Angleterre  [agbteir],  f.,  England. 

animal  [animal],  m.,  animal. 

annee  [ane],  f.,  year  (a  yearns  time). 

Annette  [anet],  f.,  Annette. 

anniversaire  [aniversGir],  m.,  anni- 
versary, birthday. 

annoncer  [anose],  to  announce. 

aoiit  [u],  m.,  August. 

apercevoir  [apersavwair],  to  per- 
ceive. 


apparaitre  [apareitr],  to  appear, 
appartenir  [apartaniir],  to  belong, 
appeler  [aple],  to  call;  s' — ,  to  be 
named. 

appliquer  [aplike],  to  apply;  s' — ,  to 

apply  one's  self,  work, 
apporter  [aporte],  to  bring. 
apprendre  [apraidr],  to  learn,  teach, 
apprenez  [aprane],  see  apprendre. 
apprenti  [aprati],  m.,  apprentice, 
apres   [apre],   after,   afterward;   — 

-demain,  day  after  tomorrow, 
apres-midi   [apre   midi],   m.   or  f., 

afternoon. 
appuyer  [apqije],  to  prop,  lean, 
aqueduc  [akadyk],  m.,  aqueduct, 
arbre  [arbr],  m.,  tree. 
Arc    [ark],    m..    Arch,    Arc;  —  de 

Triomphe,  Arch  of  Triumph, 
arc-boutant  [arbuta],  m.,  buttress. 
argent  [arsa],  m.,  money,  silver, 
aristocratie    [aristokrasi],    f.,    aris- 
tocracy. 
Armand  [arma],  m.,  Armand. 
arme  [arm],  f.,  arm,  weapon, 
armee  [arme],  f.,  army, 
armistice  [armistis],  m.,  armistice, 
armure  [armyir],  f.,  armor, 
arracher  [araje],  to  tear,  tear  out. 
arranger  [ara3e],  to  arrange;  —  de 

nouveaUj  to  rearrange, 
arreter   [arete],    to   stop;   s' — ,    to 

stop  (one's  self). 
arriver  [arive],  to  arrive,  reach, 
arrondissement   [arodisma],   m., 

ward. 
arroser  [aroze],  to  sprinkle,  water 

(a  garden). 

D'Artagnan  [d  artajia],  m.,   D'Ar- 

tagnan,  a  proper  name. 
artere  [arteir],  f.,  artery, 
article  [artikl],  m.,  article,  object, 
artiste  [artist],  m.,  f.,  artist. 
ascenseur  [asasoeir],  m.,  elevator. 
asseoir(s'),  [s  aswair],  to  sit  down. 
asseyez  [aseje],  see  asseoir. 


French-English  Vocabulary 


337 


assez  [ase],  enough,  sufficiently. 
assieds  (m')  [m  asje],  see  s'asseoir. 
assiette  [asjet],  f.,  plate, 
assis  [asi],  seated  (From  s*asseoir). 
atlantique  [atlatik],  adj.,  Atlantic, 
attacher  [ata/e],  to  attach. 
attaque  [atak],  f.,  attack. 
attaquer  [atake],  to  attack. 
attendre  [ataidr],  to  wait,  wait  for; 

s'  — (a),  to  expect, 
attentif  [atatif],  attentive, 
attention     [atasjo],     f.,     attention; 

faites  — ,  look  out! 
attraper  [atrape],  to  catch. 
attribuer  [atribqe],  to  attribute. 
au  [o]  =  d  +  le. 
auberge  [obersj,  f.,  inn. 
aucun  [okoe],  adj.,  no. 
au-dela  [odla],  on  the  other  side. 
au-dessous  [odsy],  beneath;  below, 
au-dessus  [odsy],  above;  over, 
augmenter  [ogmate],  to  increase, 
aujourd^hui  [o3urdqi],  today, 
auquel  [okel]  =  d  +  lequel. 
aura  [ora],  3d  sing.,  fut.,  of  avoir. 
aussi  [osi],  also,  too,  so;  —  hienque, 

as  well  as. 
aussitot    [osito],    immediately;    — 

que,  as  soon  as. 
autant   [ota],   as  many,  so  many, 

so  much;  d' —  plus  que,  so  much 

the  more  because,  the  more  so. 
auteur  [otceir],  m.,  author, 
automne  [oton],  m.,  autumn, 
automobile  [otomobil],  m.,  automo- 
bile. 
autour  de  [otuir  da],  prep.,  around. 
autre    [oitr],    other;    Vun  .  .  .  V — , 

each  other, 
autrefois  [otrfwa],  in  former  times. 
Auvergne    [overji],    f.,    Auvergne, 

ancient  province  of  France. 
aux  =  d  +  les, 

avance  (d')  [d  avais],  in  advance. 
avancer    [avase],    to    advance,    go 

too  fast  (of  watches). 


avant  [ava],  before  (of  time) ;  —  de, 
before  (+  infinitive). 

avantage  [avatais],  m.,  advantage. 

avant-demier  [ava  dernje],  next  to 
last. 

avant-hier  [ava  jeir],  day  before 
yesterday. 

avec  [avek],  with. 

aventure  [avatyir],  f.,  adventure. 

avenue  [avny],  f.,  avenue. 

avertir  [avertiir],  to  warn. 

Avignon  [avijiS],  m.,  Avignon,  a  city 
in  the  south  of  France. 

avion  [avjo],  m.,  airship. 

avocat  [avoka],  m.,  lawyer. 

avoir  [avwair],  to  have;  —  heau  + 
verb,  to  ( +  verb)  in  vain ;  — besoin, 
to  need;  —  chaud,  to  be  warm; 
—  dix  arts,  to  be  ten  years  old ; 
il  y  a,  there  is,  there  are;  il  y 
aura,  there  will  be;  ily  aun mois, 
a  month  ago;  qu^avez-vous?  what 
is  the  matter  with  you? 

avouer  [avwe],  to  admit,  confess. 

avril  [avril],  m.,  April. 

B 

ba,  be,  bi,  bo,  bu  [ba,  be,  bi,  bo,  by], 
a  phonetic  exercise. 

bagage  [bagais],  m.,  baggage  (gen- 
erally used  in  plural) . 

bah  [ba],  pshaw! 

bai  [be],  bay  (color). 

bain  [be],  m.,  bath. 

baiser  [beze],  to  kiss. 

baisser  [bese],  to  lower. 

balancer  [baldse],  to  balance,  swing. 

balle  [bal],  f.,  ball,  bullet. 

banc  [ba],  m.,  bench,  seat. 

banque  [baik],  f.,  bank. 

Baptiste  [batist],  a  proper  name. 

barbe  [barb],  f.,  beard;  faire  la  — , 
to  shave. 

bas  [ba],  low;  en  — ,  below,  down- 
stairs. 

base  [ba:z],  f.,  bottom,  basis. 

Bastille  [bastiij],  f .,  Bastille. 


338 


Elements  of  French 


bataille  [bataij],  f.,  battle. 
batailler  [bataje],  to  fight. 
bataillon  [batajo],  m.,  battalion. 
baton  [bats],  m.,  stick,  stroke   (in 
penmanship) . 

battre  [batr],  to  beat,  defeat. 

beau  [bo],  bel  [bel],  beautiful,  hand- 
some; avoir  — ,  see  avoir. 

beaucoup  [boku],  much,  many. 

Belgique  [belsik],  f.,  Belgium. 

belle,  see  beau. 

bergere  [berseir],  f.,  shepherdess. 

besoin  [bozwe],  m.,  need;  avoir  — , 
to  need. 

beta  [beta],m.,coUoq.,  stupid  person. 

beurre  [bceir],  m.,  butter. 

bibliotheque  [bibhotek],  f.,  Hbrary. 

bicyclette  [bisiklet],  f.,  bicycle. 

bien  [bje],  well,  very;  —  de  -\-  arti- 
cle, many,  much;  —  sHrj  surely; 
avoir  —  le  temps,  to  have  plenty 
of  time. 

bientot  [bjeto],  soon. 

bienvenu  [bjevny],  welcome. 

billet  [bije],  m.,  ticket,  bill;  —  cir- 
culaire,  circular  ticket. 

bizarre  [bizair],  strange,  bizarre. 

blagueur  [blagoeir],  m.,  joker. 

blanc  [bla],  white. 

blesser  [blese],  to  wound. 

bleu  [bl0],  blue. 

boeuf  [beef],  m.,  ox,  beef.  Plural, 
bceufs,  [b0]. 

boire  [bwair],  to  drink. 

bois  [bwa],  m.,  wood;  —  de  Bou- 
logne, a  park  in  Paris. 

boite  [bwait],  f.,  box. 

bombe  [boib],  f.,  bomb. 

bon  [bo],  good;  a  — marche,  cheap. 

Bonacieux  [bonasj0],  m.,  Bonacieux, 
a  proper  name. 

bonbon  [bobo],  m.,  bonbon. 

bonjour  [bosuir],  good  morning, 
good  day. 

bonnet  [bone],  m.,  bonnet. 

bonsoir  [bSswair],  good  evening. 


bonte  [bote],  f .,  kindness. 

bord  [bo:r],  m.,  shore,  edge;  a  — ,  on 
board. 

Bordeaux  [bordo],  m.,  Bordeaux,  a 
city  in  the  south  of  France. 

bomer  [borne],  to  bound. 

bouche  [buj],  f.,  mouth. 

boucher  [buje],  to  stop,  stop  up. 

bouillon  [buj 5],  m.,  broth,  bouillon. 

boulevard  [bulvair],  m.,  boulevard. 

bouleverser  [bulverse],  to  over- 
throw, overturn. 

Boulogne  [buloji],  f.,  Boulogne. 

bourn  [booe],  bang!  an  exclamation 
used  by  Paris  waiters. 

Bourbon  [burbo],  m.,  a  French 
royal  house. 

bourdonnement  [burdonma],  m., 
buzzing. 

bourgmestre  [burgmestr],  m.,  burgo- 
master. 

Bourgogne  [burgoji],  f.,  Burgundy, 
ancient  province  of  France. 

bourse  [burs],  f.,  purse,  stock  ex- 
change. 

bout  [bu],  m.,  end. 

boutique  [butik],  f .,  shop. 

bras  [bra],  m.,  arm. 

brave  [braiv],  brave,  worthy. 

briquet  [brike],  m.,  flint. 

broder  [brode],  to  embroider. 

bronze  [broiz],  m.,  bronze. 

brosse  [bros],  f.,  brush;  —  a  cheveux, 
hair  brush;  —  d  dents,  toothbrush. 

brosser  [brose],  to  brush. 

bruit  [brqi],  m.,  noise,  rumor. 

brun  [brce],  brown. 

bu  [by],  see  boire. 

bureau  [byro],  m.,  desk,  office, 
bureau;  —  de  poste,  postoffice; 
—  de  tabac,  tobacco  shop. 

but  [by],  m.,  purpose,  end. 

buvez  [byve],  see  boire. 


QSi  [sa],  that  (indefinite);  —  y  est, 
that's  right!  there  you  have  it! 


French-English  Vocabulary 


339 


cacher  [kaj*e],  to  hide,  conceal. 

cadeau  [kado],  m.,  gift. 

cadence  [kaddis],  f.,  cadence. 

caetera,  et  —  [et  setera],  and  so 
forth  (Latin). 

cafe  [kafe],  m.,  coffee. 

cabne  [kahn],  m.,  stillness,  calm. 

calmer  [kalme],  to  calm. 

calotte  [kabt],  f.,  cap,  skull-cap. 

camarade  [kamarad],  m.,  comrade. 

Cambrai  [kabre],  f.,  Cambrai,  a 
city  in  France. 

campagne  [kapari],  f.,  country  (as 
distinguished  from  city) ;  a  la  — , 
in  the  country. 

Canada  [kanada],  m.,  Canada. 

canal  [kanal],  m.,  canal. 

canif  [kanif],  m.,  pen-knife. 

canon  [kano],  m.,  cannon. 

capitaine  [kapitsn],  m.,  captain. 

capitale  [kapital],  f.,  capital. 

Capucine  [kapysin],  f.,  Capuchine. 
(The  Capuchines  were  a  mendi- 
cant order  of  nuns.) 

car  [kair],  conj.,  for. 

cardinal  [kardinal],  m.,  cardinal. 

careme  [kareim],  m.,  Lent. 

carre  [kare],  adj.,  square. 

carriere  [karjsir],  f.,  career,  race 
course. 

carte  [kart],  f.,  card,  map;  —  de 
visite,  visiting  card;  —  postale, 
postal  card. 

cas  [ka],  m.,  case. 

cathedrale  [katedral],  f.,  cathedral. 

cause  [koiz],  f.,  cause. 

causer  [koze],  to  cause,  talk. 

cave  [kaiv],  f.,  cellar. 

ce  [so],  cet  [set],  this,  that;  ce  qui, 
ce  que,  what;  ce  ,  .  .  -ci,  this  (em- 
phatic) ;  ce  . . .  Zd,  that  (emphatic) . 

ceci  [s9si],  pron.,  this. 

ceder  [sede],  to  yield. 

cela  [sala],  pron.,  that. 

celebre  [selebr],  celebrated,  famous. 

celle,  see  celui. 


celui  [salqi],  this  or  that  one,  the 
one,  he,  him. 

celui-ci  [saliji  si],  this  one,  this  man, 
the  latter. 

celui-la  [salqi  la],  that  one,  that 
man,  the  former. 

cent  [sa],  (a)  hundred;  pour  — ,  per 
cent. 

centaine  [saten],  f .,  (about)  one  hun- 
dred. 

centieme  [satjem],  hundredth. 

centime  [satim],  m.,  centime,  about 
one-fifth  of  a  cent. 

centimetre  [satimetr],  m.,  centi- 
meter, about  two-fifths  of  an  inch. 

centre  [saitr],  m.,  center. 

cependant  [sapada],  m.,  however. 

cercueil  [serkoeij],  m.,  coffin. 

cerise  [sariiz],  f.,  cherry. 

certain  [serte],  certain. 

ces  [se],  see  ce. 

cesser  [sese],  to  cease,  stop. 

cette  [set],  see  ce. 

ceux  [s0],  see  celui. 

Cevennes  [seven],  f.pl.,  a  mountain 
range. 

chacun  [Jakoe],  each  one. 

chaire  [Je:r],  f.,  pulpit,  desk  (of  a 
teacher) . 

chaise  [Jeiz],  f.,  chair. 

chambre  [Jdibr],  f.,  room,  chamber; 
—  des  Deputes,  Chamber  of  Depu- 
ties, a  legislative  hall. 

champ  [Ja],  m.,  field. 

Champagne  [J*apaji],  f..  Champaign, 
ancient  province  of  France. 

Champs-Ely  sees  [J*az  ehze],  m.,  pL, 
Champs  Elysees,  an  avenue  in 
Paris  (literally  'Elysian  Fields'). 

chandelle  [/adel],  f.,  candle,  fight. 

changer  [/use],  to  change,  exchange. 

Chantal  [Jatal],  m.,  Chantal,  a 
proper  name. 

chanter  [/ate],  to  sing,  chant. 

chapeau  [Japo],  m.,  hat;  —  haut*de 
forme,  high  hat. 

chapelle  [/apel],  f .,  chapel. 


340 


Elements  of  French 


chaque  [Jak],  each. 

charbon  [/arbo],  m.,  coal. 

charger    (se)    [sq   Jarse],    to   take 

charge. 
Charles  [/arl],  Charles, 
charmant  [Jarma],  charming. 
Charte  [Jart],  f.,  Charter;  Grande  — , 

Magna  Charta. 
chasser  [Jase],  to  drive  out,  hunt, 
chat  [Ja],  m.,  cat. 
chateau  [Jato],  m.,  castle. 
Chateaubriand     [Jatobria],    m.,    a 

French  writer, 
chaud  [Jo],  warm;  avoir  — ,  to  be 

warm  (of  persons) ;  ilfait  — ,  it  is 

hot. 
chauffage  [Jofais],  m.,  heating, 
chauffeur  [Jofoeir],  m.,  chauffeur. 
chaumiere    [Jomjeir],    f.,    thatched 

house,  hut. 
chaussures  [/osqir],   f.,   pi.,  shoes. 
chef  de  gare  [/ef  do  gair],  m.,  sta- 
tion-master, 
chemin  [Jame],  m.,  road;  —  de  fer, 

railroad;  faire  son  — ,  make  his 

mark, 
chene  [Jem],  m.,  oak. 
cher  [Je:r],  dear,  expensive, 
chercher  [Jerje],  to  look  for;  aller  — , 

to  go  for;  envoy er  — ,  to  send  for. 
cherir  [Jeriir],  to  cherish, 
cheval  [Javal],  m.,  horse;  a  — ,  horse- 
back, 
cheveu  [J8V0],  m.,  hair. 

Plural,  cheveux  [J8v0]. 
chez  [Je],  at  the  house  of,  at  the 

place  of  business  of,  etc.;  -^  vouSy 

at  your  house. 
Chicago  [Jikago],  m.,  Chicago. 
Chicagoan  [Jikagoa],  m.,  Chicagoan. 
chien  [Jje],  m.,  dog. 
chocolat  [Jokola],  m.,  chocolate, 
choisir  [Jwaziir],  to  choose, 
chose  [Joiz],  f.,  thing. 
chou  [Ju],  m.,  cabbage. 
cidre  [sidr],  m.,  cider. 
Cie,  see  compagnie. 


ciel  [sjel],  m.,  heaven;  sky. 

cigare  [sigair],  m.,  cigar. 

cinq  [se:k],  five. 

cinquante  [sekait],  fifty. 

cinquieme  [sekjsm],  fifth. 

circulaire  [sirkyleir],  circular. 

citadin  [sitade],  m.,  citizen. 

cite  [site],  f.,  city,  town.  {La  Cite, 
in  Paris,  is  the  most  ancient  part 
of  the  ville) . 

citoyen  [sitwaje],  m.,  citizen. 

civil  [sivil],  adj.,  civil. 

clair  [klsir],  adj.,  clear. 

clair  [kleir],  m.,  light;  au  —  de  la 
lunCj  in  the  moonlight. 

Claire  [kleir],  Clara. 

classe  [klais],  f.,  class,  class-room; 
faire  la  — ,  conduct  the  class. 

clef  [kle],  f.,  key. 

client  [Idia],  m.,  customer,  doctor's 
patient. 

cligner  [khjie],  to  wink. 

clos  [klo],  adj.,  part.,  closed. 

clos  [klo],  m.,  enclosure,  field. 

Cluny  [klyni],  m.,  Cluny.  (The 
museum  con  tarns  old  suits  of 
armor,  halberds,  mysterious  medi- 
eval chests,  etc.). 

coeur  [koeir],  m.,  heart,  courage; 
le  —  groSf  with  a  heavy  heart. 

coiffer  [kwafe],  to  dress  the  hair. 

coiffeur  [kwafoeir],  m.,  hair-dresser, 
barber. 

coin  [kwe],  m.,  corner. 

Colas  [kola],  m.,  a  proper  name. 

colere  [koleir],  f.,  anger. 

college  [koleis],  m.,  grammar  school, 
college. 

collegue  [koleg],  m.,  colleague. 

colonne  [kolon],  f.,  column;  — s 
d'affichage,  columns  on  which  are 
posted  theatrical  announcements. 

combattre  [kobatr],  to  combat. 

combien  [kobje],  how  many,  how 
much;  —  y  a-t-il?  how  far  is  it? 

combler  [kSble],  to  heap  up,  com- 
plete. 


French-English  Vocabulary 


341 


comedie  [komecli],  f.,  comedy;  — 
Frangaise,  French  national  the- 
ater. 

commandant  [komada],  m.,  major. 

commandature  [komadatyir],  f., 
(mihtary)  headquarters. 

commander  [komade],  to  .order; 

comme  [kom],  as,  for,  Hke,  how,  as 
it  were;  faire  — ,  to  give  the  effect 
of. 

commencement  [komasma],  m.,  be- 
ginning. 

commencer  [komase],  to  begin. 

comment  [koma],  how. 

commerce  [komers],  m.,  commerce. 

commettre  [komr.tr],  to  commit. 

compagne  [kopaji],  f.,  companion, 
fellow. 

compagnie  [kopajii],  f.,  company; 
CiCy  abbreviation. 

compagnon  [kopajiS],  m.,  compan- 
ion. 

comparaison  [k5par8z5],  f.,  compari- 
son. 

compas  [kopa],  m.,  (mariner's)  com- 
pass. 

compensation  [kopasasjS],  f.,  com- 
pensation. 

complet  [kSple],  adj.,  complete,  full. 

complet  [kople],  m.,  suit  (of  clothes). 

composer  (se)  [sa  kopoze],  to  con- 
sist, be  composed. 

comprendre  [kopraidr],  to  under- 
stand, comprise;  tout  compris, 
everything  included. 

compris,  see  comprendre. 

compter  [kote],  to  count,  think,  in- 
tend, keep  the  score. 

comte  [koit],  m.,  count. 

concert  [kSseir],  m.,  concert. 

conciergerie  [kosjersari],  f.,  porter's 
lodge. 

conclure  [koklyxr],  to  conclude,  fin- 
ish. 

Concorde  Pcokord],  f..  Concord, 
name  of  a  famous  square  where 
Louis  XIV  and  Marie  Antoinette 
were  beheaded. 


condition  [kodisjo],  f.,  condition, 
conducteur    [kodyktoeir],   m.,    con- 
ductor. 

conduire  [kodqiir],  to  conduct,  lead. 

conduit,  see  conduire. 

confier  [kofje],  to  confide,  intrust. 

confiture  [kofityir],  f.,  jam. 

conformement  [koformema],  in  con- 
formity with. 

conge  [k53e],  m.,  hohday,  leave. 

conjuguer  [kosyge],  to  conjugate. 

connaissance  [konesais],  f.,  ac- 
quaintance. 

connaitre  [koneitr],  to  know,  be 
acquainted  with. 

connu  [kony],  see  connaitre. 

conscience  [kosjais],  f.,  conscience. 

conseil  [koseij],  m.,  counsel,  advice. 

conseiller  [koseje],  m.,  advisor. 

conseiller  [koseje],  to  advise. 

consequent  [koseka]:  par  — ,  conse- 
sequently. 

consideration  [kosiderasjo],  f.,  con- 
sideration. 

conspirer  pcospire],  to  conspire. 

constitutionnel  [kostitysjonel],  adj., 
constitutional. 

consul  [kosyl],  m.,  consul. 

conte  [koit],  m.,  tale. 

content  [kota],  glad,  pleased. 

conter  [kote],  to  relate. 

continuellement  [kotinqelma],  con- 
tinually. 

continuer  [kotinqe],  to  continue. 

contraire  [kotreir],  contrary;  au  — , 
on  the  contrary. 

contre  [koitr],  against. 

contree  [kotre],  f.,  region,  country. 

controle  P^otrod],  m.,  examination 
(or  checking)  of  tickets. 

controler  [kotrole],  to  inspect,  keep 
check  on. 

controleur  [kotrolceir],  m.,  ticket 
examiner,  inspector. 

conversation  [koversasjS],  f.,  con- 
versation. 


342 


Elements  of  French 


coq  [kok],  m.,  cock. 
cordial  [kordjal],  cordial. 
corps  [koir],  m.,  body. 
corridor  [koridoir],  m.,  corridor, 
corrompre  [koroipr],  to  corrupt. 
Cosette    [kozet],    Cosette,    a    girl's 

name. 
cote  [kote],  m.,  side;  direction;  a  — 

de,  beside. 
coucher  (se)  [sakuje],  to  go  to  bed, 

retire,  set  (of  the  sun). 
couchette    [kujet],    f.,    couch. 
couleur  [kuloeir],  f.,  color;  de  quelle 

— est?  what  is  the  color  of? 
couloir  [kulwair],  m.,  passageway. 
coup    [ku],    m.,    blow,    stroke;  — 
de  hrossey  brushing;  —  de  peigne, 
combing;  tout  a  — ,  all  at  once. 
coupable  [kupabl],  guilty. 
coupe    [kup],    f.,    cutting,    cut    (of 

clothes). 
couper  [kupe],  to  cut. 
cour  [kuir],  f.,  court,  yard. 
courage  [kura:3],  m.,  courage, 
courageusement  [kura30zma],  cour- 
ageously. 
courageux  [kura30],  brave, 
courber  [kurbe],  to  bend, 
courir  [kuriir],  to  run,  run  after. 
cours  [kuir],  m.,  course;  avoir  < — , 

to  be  current, 
course  [kurs],  f.,  course,  trip, 
court  [kuir],  short. 
cousin  [kuze],  m.,  cousin, 
cousine  [kuzin],  f.,  cousin.   . 
couteau  [kuto],  m.,  knife, 
couter  [kute],  to  cost;  —  cher,  to  be 

expensive, 
couvert  [kuveir],  m.,  cover;  le  —  est 

mis  J  the  table  is  set. 
couvert  [kuveir],  see  couvrir. 
couvrir  [kuvriir],  to  cover,  hide. 
craie  [kre],  f.,  chalk, 
craignons  [krejio],  see  craindre. 
craindre  [kreidr],  to  fear. 
crainte  [kreit],  f.,  fear. 


cravate  [kravat],  f.,  cravat,  neck- 
tie. 

crayon  [krejo],  m.,  pencil. 

creance  [kreais],  f.,  credence. 

creation  [kreasjo],  f.,  creation. 

creuser  [kr0ze],  to  dig. 

creve-coeur  [krevkoeir],  m.,  heart- 
break, grief. 

crier  [krie],  to  cry,  call  out. 

crime  [krim],  m.,  crime. 

croire  [krwair],  to  believe,  expect  to. 

crois  [krwa],  see  croire. 

croix  [krwa],  f.,  cross;  —  de  guerre, 
war-cross. 

err  [krr],  an  exclamation. 

crus  [kry],  see  croire. 

cueillir  [koejiir],  to  pick,  gather. 

cuiller  [kyjeir],  f.,  spoon. 

cuisine  [kqizin],  f.,  kitchen. 

cuit  [kqi],  cooked.    (From  cuire.) 

cultiver  [kyltive],  to  cultivate. 

curieux  [kyrj0],  curious;  il  est  — , 
it  is  strange. 


dame  [dam],  f.,  lady. 

danger  [dase],  m.,  danger. 

Daniel  [dan j  el],  Daniel. 

dans  [da],  in,  into,  within. 

Dantes  [dateis],  Dantes,  a  proper 
name. 

date  [dat],  f.,  date. 

Daudet  [dode],  Daudet,  a  French 
writer. 

Dauphin  [dofe],  m.,  Dauphin.  (Heir 
apparent  to  the  throne  of  France.) 

David  [david],  David. 

de  [da],  of,  from,  by,  with,  to  (with 
infinitive),  than  (before  numerals) ; 
le  chien — se  lancer,  the  dog  rushed. 

debout  [dabu],  standing,  upright. 

decembre  [desaibr],  m.,  December. 

dechirer  [dejire],  to  tear. 

decider  [deside],  to  decide. 

declaration  [deklarasjo],  f.,  decla- 
ration. 


French-English  Vocabulary 


343 


declarer  [deklare],  to  declare. 

dedans  [dada],  within;  en  — ,  on  the 
inside. 

dedommager  [dedomase],  to  in- 
demnify, compensate. 

defaut  [defo],  m.,  lack. 

defenseur  [defasoeir],  m.,  defender. 

defini  [defini],  definite. 

definitivement  [defini tivma],  defin- 
itely. 

degat  [dega],  m.,  damage. 

dehors  [daoir],  out  of  doors,  outside. 

dejk  [de3a],  already. 

dejeuner  [de3oene],  m.,  lunch;  pe- 
tit — ,  breakfast;  faire  son  second 
— ,  to  lunch, 

dejeuner  [desoene],  to  lunch. 

dela  [dala],  beyond,  on  the  other 
side;  au  —  de,  beyond. 

d^licatesse  [delikates],  f.,  dehcacy. 

delivrer  [deUvre],  to  dehver. 

demain  [dame],  tomorrow;  — matin, 
tomorrow  morning;  apres-demairif 
day  after  tomorrow. 

demande  [damaid],  f.,  request. 

demander  [damade],  to  ask. 

demarche  [demarj],  f.,  step. 

demeurer  [damcere],  to  dwell,  live. 

demi  [dami],  adj.,  half. 

democratic  [demokrasi],  f.,  democ- 
racy. 

demoiselle  [damwazel],  f.,  young 
lady. 

denonciation  [denSsjasjS],  f.,  denun- 
ciation. 

dent  [da],  f.,  tooth. 

depart  [depair],  m.,  departure. 

departement  [departma],  ,  m.,  de- 
partment. 

depecher  (se)  [sa  depe/e],  to  hurry; 
depechez-vousl  hurry  up! 

depouille  [depuij],  f .,  remains,  spoils. 

depuis  [dapqi],  prep.,  since,  for;  — 
quand,  conj.,  how  long;  — ■  que, 
since. 

depute  [depyte],  m.,  deputy. 

deranger  [derase],  to  disturb. 


dernier  [dernje],  last,  most  recent, 
dernierement     [dernjema],     lastly, 

recently. 
derriere  [derjeir],  behind, 
des  [de]  =  de  +  les. 
descendre   [desaidr],   to  go  down, 

descend, 
designer  [dezijie],  to  designate, 
desir  [deziir],  m.,  desire, 
desirer  [dezire],  to  desire, 
desole  [dezole],  very  sorry, 
desordre  [dezordr],  m.,  disorder, 
des  que  [de  ka],  as  soon  as,  since, 
desquels  =  de  +  lesquels. 
dessert  [deseir],  m.,  dessert, 
dessiner  [desine],  to  design, 
dessus    [dasy],  adv.,   above,   over; 

de  — ,  from  above,  off. 
destiner  (a)  [destine],  to  destine. 
detaler  [detale],  to  scamper, 
determination     [determinasjo],     f., 

determination, 
deux  [d0],  two;  a  — -,  deuce, 
deuxieme  [d0zjem],  second, 
devant    [dava],   before;   de   — ,    in 

front. 
devant  [dava],  part.,  see  devoir, 
devenir  [davniir],  to  become, 
deviner  [davine],  to  guess. 
devint  [dave],  see  devenir. 
devoir  [davwair],  m.,  duty,  school 

composition;  r^ndre  leurs  — s  a, 

to  pay  their  respects  to. 
devoir  [davwair],  to  owe,  must,  be 

to;    devant,    pres.    part.,    owing, 

intended  to. 
devoue  [devwe],  devoted, 
diametre  [djametr],  m.,  diameter. 
Dieu  [dj0],  m.,  God. 
difference  [diferais],  f.,  difference, 
different  [difera],  different, 
difficile  [difisil],  difficult, 
difficulte  [difikylte],  f.,  difficulty, 
digne  [diji],  worthy, 
diligence     [dihsais],    f.,    diligence; 

faire  — ,  to  hasten. 


344 


Elements  of  French 


dimanche  [dimaij],  m.,  Sunday. 

dimension  [dimasjo],  f.,  dimension. 

din  [de],  word  expressing  sound  of 
a  bell. 

diner  [dine],  m.,  dinner. 

diner  [dine],  to  dine. 

dire  [di:r],  to  say,  tell;  vouloir  — ,  to 
mean. 

direction  [direksjS],  f.,  direction. 

diriger  [dirise],  to  direct. 

disponible  [disponibl],  available. 

disposer  [dispoze],  to  dispose,  ar- 
range; se  —  ci,  to  prepare  to. 

disposition  [dispozisjS],  f.,  disposi- 
tion. 

disputer  [dispyte],  to  dispute;  se 
—  avec,  to  dispute  with. 

distinguer  [distege],  to  distinguish. 

distraction  [distraksjo],  f.,  distrac- 
tion. 

distribution  [distribysjo],  f.,  dis- 
tribution. 

dit,  see  dire. 

dix  [dis],  ten. 

dix-hiiit  [diz  qit],  eighteen. 

dix-huitieme  [diz  qitj  em],  eighteenth. 

dizaine  [dizen],  f.,  some  ten,  about 
ten. 

docteur  [doktoeir],  m.,  doctor. 

dodo  [dodo],  m.,  by-by;  faire  .  .  .  ., 
to  go  to  sleep. 

doigt  [dwa],  m.,  finger. 

doivent  [dwaiv],  see  devoir. 

dollar  [dolair],  m.,  dollar. 

domestique  [domestik],  m.,  servant. 

dommage  [domais],  damage.;  c^est 
— !  too  bad! 

Domremy  [doromi],  m.,  Domremy, 
a  village  in  the  region  of  the 
Vosges  Mts. 

don  [do],  word  expressing  sound  of 
a  bell. 

done  [do,  doik],  then,  so. 

donner  [done],  to  give;  — •  sur,  to 
open  on, 

dont  [do],  whose,  of  which,  of  whom, 
with  which. 


dormir  [dormiir],  to  sleep. 

dos  [do],  m.,  back. 

doucement  [dusma],  gently. 

douceur  [dusoeir],  f .,  pleasure,  com- 
fort. 

doute  [dut],  m.,  doubt. 

doux  [du],  sweet,  mild;  dans  les 
prix  — ,  at  a  moderate  price. 

douzaine  [duzen],  f.,  dozen. 

douze  [duiz],  twelve. 

drame  [dram],  m.,  play,  drama. 

drapeau  [drapo],  m.,  flag,  banner. 

droit  [drwa],  adj.,  right. 

droit  [drwa],  m.,  law,  right;  avoir  — 
a,  to  have  a  right  to ;  etre  en  —  de, 
to  be  right  in;  tout  — ,  straight 
ahead. 

drole  [droil],  comical. 

du  [dy]  =  de  +  le. 

dt  [dy],  see  devoir. 

Dublin  [dyble],  m.,  DubUn. 

due  [dyk],  m.,  duke. 

Dumas  [dyma],  Dumas,  a  French 
writer. 

Dupuis  [dypqi],  Dupuis,  a  proper 
name. 

duquel  =  de  +  lequel. 

dur  [dyir],  hard. 

durer  [dyre],  to  last,  endure. 

dusse-je  [dyseis],  if  I  should. 
(From  devoir.) 

E 

eau  [o],  f.,  water. 

ecarte  [ekarte],  far  away. 

echange  [eja:3],  m.,  exchange. 

echanger  [ejase],  to  exchange. 

echapper  [ejape],  to  escape;  —  a, 
escape  from. 

eclairage  [eklerais],  m.,  illumina- 
tion. 

eclaire  [eklere],  enlightened. 

eclat  [ekla],  m.,  splinter,  fragment, 
explosion. 

eclater  [eklate],  to  burst. 

ecole  [ekol],  f.,  school;  a  V — ,  at 
school. 


French-English  Vocabulary 


345 


£cosse  [ekos],  f.,  Scotland. 

ecouter  [ekute],  to  listen  (to). 

eerier  (s*)  [s  ekrie],  to  cry,  exclaim. 

ecrire  [ekriir],  to  write. 

ecrit  [ekri],  see  ecrire. 

ecriteau  [ekrito],  m.,  sign-board. 

ecriture  [ekrityir],  f.,  writing. 

ecrivez  [ekrive],  see  ecrire. 

edifice  [edifis],  m.,  edifice. 

editeur  [editneir],  m.,  publisher. 

Edmond  [edmo],  Edmund. 

Edouard  [edwair],  Edward. 

effleurer  [efloere],  to  skim  the  sur- 
face of. 

egalement  [egalma],  equally,  like- 
wise. 

egard  [egair],  m.,  regard;  a  cet  — , 
in  this  respect;  a  mon  — ,  toward 
me. 

eglise  [eghiz],  f.,  church. 

egorger  [egorse],  to  cut  the  throats 
of. 

eh  bien!  [e  bje],  well! 

Eiffel  [efel],  m.,  Eiffel.  (The  Eiffel 
Tower  is  about  1000  feet  high, 
and  is  used  as  wireless  station.) 

Elbe  [elb],  f .,  Elba,  an  island  east  of 
Corsica. 

elegant  [elega],  elegant. 

eleve  [eleiv],  m.,  f.,  pupil. 

elever  [elve],  to  raise. 

eUe  [el],  she.     (See  il.) 

elle-meme  [el  meim],  herself  (in- 
tensive). 

embrasser  [ubrase],  to  kiss. 

embrouiller  [abruje],  to  embroil, 
confuse. 

emettre  [emetr],  to  issue. 

emigre  [emigre],  m.,  refugee,  emi- 
grant. 

eminence  [eminais],  f.,  eminence. 

emmener  [amne],  to  lead  away, 
take  away. 

emotion  [emosjo],  f.,  emotion. 

empecher  [apeje],  to  prevent. 

emperetir  [aproeir],  m.,  emperor. 

empiler  [apile],  to  pile  up. 


emploi  [aplwa],  m.,  use. 
employer  [aplwaje],  to  use. 
emporter  [aporte],  to  carry  away, 

take  away. 
en  [a],  prep.,  in,  into,  as,  made  of; 

—  ami,  as  a  friend ;  —  has,  down- 
stairs; — familley  at  home;  — fer, 
(made)  of  iron;  —  passanl,  (while) 
passing;  —  train  de,  in  the  act  of; 

—  Ville  (E.V.),  City. 

en  [a],  pron.,  of  it,  of  them,  from  it, 
from  them,  some. 

enchanter  [a/ate],  to  enchant,  de— 
hght. 

encore  [akoir],  still,  yet,  again;  — 
une  fois,  once  more. 

encre  [aikr],  f.,  ink. 

endroit  [adrwa],  m.,  place;  a  V — 
de,  in  regard  to. 

enfant  [afa],  m.,  f.,  child. 

enfermer  [aferme],  to  enclose. 

enfin  [afe],  finally,  at  last. 

enflammer  [aflame],  to  inflame,  in- 
spire. 

engagement  [agasma],  m.,  engage- 
ment. 

enguirlander  [agirlade],  to  wreathe. 

enjamber  [asabe],  to  leap  over, 
bestride. 

ennemi  [enmi],  m.,  enemy. 

ennuie  [anqi],  wearies.  (See  en- 
nuyer). 

ennuyer  [anqie],  to  weary. 

ennuyeux  [anqii0],  tiresome. 

enseigner  [asejie],  to  teach. 

ensemble  [asdibl],  together. 

ensuite  [asqit],  then,  next. 

entendre  [ataidr],  to  hear. 

enthousiasme  [atuzjasm],  m.,  en- 
thusiasm. 

entier  [atje],  entire. 

entierement  [atjsrmd],  entirely 

entre  [a:tr],  between,  among. 

entrer  [atre],  to  enter;  — dans,  to 
enter;  nous  fait  — ,  shows  us  in. 

entretien  [atratje],  m.,  talk,  conver- 
sation. 


346 


Elements  of  French 


enveloppe  [avlop],  f.,  envelope. 

envie  [avi],  f.,  envy,  desire;  avoir 
- — ,  to  want  (to). 

environ  [aviro],  about. 

environs  [avirS],  m.,  pi.,  neigh- 
borhood. 

envoyer  [avwaje],  to  send;  —  cher- 
cher,  to  send  for. 

epeler  [eple],  to  spell. 

epouser  [epuze],  to  marry. 

equilibre  [ekilibr],  m.,  equilibrium. 

equivalent  [ekivala],  m.,  equivalent. 

esclave  [ssclaiv],  m.,  f.,  slave; 
tomher  — ,   to  fall  into  slavery. 

escorte  [eskort],  f.,  escort. 

Espagne  [espaji],  f.,  Spain. 

espece  [sspes],  f.,  kind. 

esperer  [sspere],  to  hope. 

esprit- [espri],  m.,  spirit,  intelligence. 

essai  [ese],  m.,  trial,  essay.. 

essayer  [eseje],  to  try. 

essouffler  [esufle],  to  put  out  of 
breath. 

est  [est],  m.,  east. 

est  [s],  see  etre;  est-ce  que?  (used  to 
introduce  question);  n^ est-ce  pas? 
is  it  not  so.?  doesn't  he?  etc. 

et  [e],  and;  —  caetera  (Latin),  and 
so  forth. 

etablissement  [etabhsma],  m.,  es- 
tablishment. 

etage  [etais],  m.,  story  (of  a  house) ; 
premier  — ,  second  floor. 

etait  [ete].   See  etre. 

etat  [eta],  m.,  state,  government; 
Etats-UniSj  United  States. 

ete  [ete],  m.,  summer. 

ete  [ete],  been     (See  etre). 

etendard  [etadair],  m.,  standard. 

etendre  [etaidr],  to  extend. 

etemellement  [eternelma],  etern- 
ally. 

etoile  [etwal],  f .,  star. 

etonner  [etone],  to  astonish;  s' — 
to  be  astonished. 

etouffer  [etufe],  to  suffocate. 


etranger  [etrase],  m.,  stranger,  for- 
eigner. 

etre  [eitr],  to  be;  —  d,  to  belong  to; 
est-ce?  is  it?  n' est-ce  pas?  is  it  not 
so?  are  they  not?  etc. ;  en  —  /d,  to 
be  at  that  point. 

etude  [etyd],  f.,  study. 

etudiant  [etydja],  m.,  student. 

etudier  [etydje],  to  study. 

eu  [y],  see  avoir. 

eus  [y],  see  avoir. 

eux  (0),  they; memes,  themselves. 

evaporer  [evapore],  evaporate. 

eventail  [evataij],  m.,  fan;  en  — , 
fan-shaped. 

evident  [evida],  evident. 

exact  [eg3akt],  exact,  right  (of  time- 
pieces). 

excellence  [skselais],  f.,  excellence; 
par  — ,  above  all. 

excellent  [eksela],  excellent. 

exception  [eksepsjS],  f.,  exception; 
aV  —  dcj  with  the  exception  of. 

excuse  [ekskyiz],  f.,  excuse. 

exemple  [egzaipl],  m.,  example;  par 
— ,  for  example. 

exercice  [egzersis],  m.,  exercise, 
drill  (of  soldiers) . 

expirer  [ekspire],  to  expire. 

explication  [eksplikasjo],  f.,  expla- 
nation. 

expliquer  [eksplike],  to  explain. 

expression  [Gkspr8sj5],  f.,  expres- 
sion. 

extraordinaire  [ekstrordineir],  ex- 
traordinary. 


fagade  [fasad],  f.,  fagade,  building 
front. 

face  [fas],  f .,  face;  en  —  de,  opposite. 

facile  [fasil],  easy. 

facilement  [fasilma],  easily. 

fafon  [faso],  f.,  fashion;  de  cette  — , 
in  this  manner;  sans  — ,  uncere- 
moniously. 

facteur  [faktoeir],  m.,  postman. 


French-English  Vocabulary 


347 


faim  [fe],  f.,  hunger;  avoir  — ,  to  be 

hungry. 
faire  [fe:r],  to  make,  do,  say;  have 

(of  dreams);  be  (in  arithmetic); 

—  atientioriy  to  pay  attention;  — 
commej  to  give  the  effect  of;  —  la 
classe,  to  conduct  the  class;  — 
plaisiry  to  give  pleasure;  —  son 
petit  dejeuner,  to  take  breakfast; 

—  venir,  to  send  for;  il  fait  beau 
{temps) y  it  is  fine  weather;  se  — , 
to  take  place,  to  cause  himself 
(themselves)  to  be. 

fait  [fe],  see  faire. 

falloir  [falwa:r],  to  be  necessary. 

fallu  [faly],  see  falloir. 

fameux  [fam0],  famous. 

famille  [famiij],  f.,  family. 

fantaisie  [fatezi],  f.,  fancy. 

Faria  [farja],  a  proper  name. 

fasse  [fas],  see  faire. 

faudra  [fodra],  see  falloir. 

faut  [fo],  see  falloir. 

faute  [foit],  f.,  fault,  mistake. 

fauteuil  [fotoeij],  m.,  arm  chair;  — 

d'orchestre,  orchestra  seat. 
faux  [fo],  false. 

femme  [fam],  f.,  woman,  wife. 
fenetre  [faneitr],  f.,  window. 
far  [feir],  m.,  iron;  chemin  de  — , 

railroad. 
feral  [fre],  see  faire. 
fermer  [ferme],  to  close, 
feroce  [feros],  ferocious, 
festin  [feste],  m.,  feast. 
fete  [fe:t],  f.,  hoUday,  feast. 
feu  [f0],  m.,  fire. 
feuiUe  [foeij],  f.,  leaf, 
feve  [fe:v],  f.,  bean, 
fevrier  [fevrie],  m.,. February, 
fi  [fi],  fie! 

fiacre  [fjakr],  m.,  cab. 
figure  [figyir],  f.,  face, 
filature  [filatyir],  f.,  spinning  mill. 
fiJier  [file],  to  spin. 
fille  [fiij],  f.,  daughter,  girl;  jeune — , 

(young)  girl. 


fiUeul  [fijoel],  m.,  godson. 

fils  [fis],  m.,  son.. 

fin  [fe],  fine,  deHcate. 

finir  [finiir],  to  finish;  il  finit  par 

demander,  he  finally  asked. 
fit  [fi],  see  faire. 
fixe  [fiks],  fixed. 

fixer  [fikse],  to  fix,  look  steadily  on. 
Flandre  [flaidr],  f.,  Flanders,  a  part 

of  Belgium  and  northern  France. 
flanquer  [flake],  to  flank,  border, 
flatter  [flate],  to  flatter. 
fleche  [fle/],  f.,  arrow. 
fleur  [floeir],  f.,  flower. 
fleuve  [floeiv],  m.,  river, 
flot  [flo],  m.,  wave. 
flotter  [flote],  to  float. 
foi  [fwa],  f.,  faith;  ma  — ,  upon  my 

word! 
foire  [fwair],  f.,  fair. 
fois  [fwa],  f.,  time. 
fond  [fo],  m.,  bottom;  au  —  de,  at 

the  back  of. 
font  [fo],  see  faire. 
Fontainebleau  [fotenblo],  m.,  Fon- 

tainebleau,  a  town  south  of  Paris, 
football  [futbail],  m.,  football, 
force  [fors],  f.,  strength. 
forcer  [f  orse],  to  force. 
forgeron  [forsaro],  m.,  blacksmith, 
forme  [form],  f.,  shape. 
former  [forme],  to  form. 
formula  [formyl],  f.,   formula;  — s 

de  politessey  forms  of  etiquette; 

— s  offidelleSy  formal  salutation. 
fort  [foir],  adj.,  strong;  adv.,  very; 

c^est  plus  —  que  moiy  that  beats 

me. 
fortement  [fortma],  vigorously. 
fou  [fu],  fol  [fol],  adj.,  mad. 
fou  [fu],  m.,  madman, 
fouet  [fwe],  m.,  whip, 
fourchette  [furjet],  f.,  fork, 
foyer  [fwaje],  m.,  hearth. 
fraction  [fraksjS],  f.,  fraction, 
fraiche  [frsij*],  see  frais.. 


348 


Elements  of  French 


frais  [fre],  fresh. 

franc  [fra],  adj.,  frank. 

franc  [fra],  m.,  franc,  about  twenty 

cents, 
frangais  [frase],  adj.,  French;  le  — , 

the  French  language;  parlez-vous 

— ?  do  you  speak  French? 
France  [frais],  f.,  France. 
Francfort  [frakfoir],  m.,  Frankfort. 
Franfois  [fraswa],  m.,  Francis. 
Frantz  [fruits],  Francis. 
frapper  [frape],  to  knock,  coin, 
frayeur  [frsjoeir],  f.,  fright. 
frere  [freir],  m.,  brother, 
f ripen  [fripo],  adj.,  roguish. 
frissonner  [frisone],  to  shiver. 
froid  [frwa],  adj.,  cold;  avoir  — ,  to 

be  cold. 
froid  [frwa],  m.,  cold, 
fromage  [fromais],  m.,  cheese, 
f rotter  [frote],  to  rub. 
fruit  [frqi],  m.,  fruit, 
fuir  [fqiir],  to  flee, 
fuite  [fqit],  f.,  flight, 
fumer  [fyme],  to  smoke, 
fut  [fy],  see  etre. 
futur  [fytyir],  future. 


gagner  [gajie],  to  win,  gain. 

gal  [ge],  adj.,  gay. 

gai  [ge],  inter j.,  let  us  be  merry! 

galop  [galo],  m.,  gallop;  au  — ,  at  a 
gallop. 

gant  [ga],  m.,  glove. 

garantir  [garatiir],  to  protect,  guar- 
antee. 

garfon  [garso],  m.,  boy,  waiter. 

garde  [gard],  f.,  watch,  guard; 
pendre  — ,  to  look  out. 

garder  [garde],  to  keep. 

gare  [gair],  f.,  railroad  station;  chef 
de  — ,  station  master. 

Garonne  [garon],  f.,  Garonne,  a 
river  in  France. 


Gascogne    [gaskoji],    f.,    Gascony, 

ancient  province  of  France;  Golfe 

de  —J  Bay  of  Biscay. 
Gaston  [gasto],  Gaston, 
gateau  [gato],  m.,  cake;  —  des  Rois, 

cake  for  Epiphany. 
gauche  [go:/],  left,  clumsy;   a—,  to 

the  left. 
geler  [sale],  to  freeze, 
gener  [sene],  to  bother,  hinder;  se 

— ,  to  inconvenience  one's  self. 
general  [seneral],  adj.,  general, 
general  [seneral],  m.,  general, 
genou  [3anu],  m.,  knee, 
gens  [3a],  m.,  f .,  pi.,  people,  persons, 
gentil  [3ati],  nice,  amiable. 

gentilhomme  [satijom],  m.,  gentle- 
man. 

gentiment  [3atima],  nicely. 

Georges  [3or3],  George. 

gibier  [sibje],  m.,  game. 

gilet  [sile],  m.,  vest;  —  defantaisie, 
fancy  vest. 

glace  [glas],  f .,  ice. 

glissade  [glisad],  f.,  slide. 

gloire  [glwair],  f.,  glory. 

glorieux  [glorj0],  glorious. 

golfe  [golf],  m.,  gulf,  bay. 

gomme  [gom],  f.,  gum. 

gorge  [gor3],  f.,  throat. 

grammaire  [grameir],  f.,  grammar. 

grand  [gra],  great,  tall;  —  ouvert, 
wide  open. 

grandir  [gradiir],  to  grow. 

gratitude  [gratityd],  f.,  gratitude. 

grave  [graiv],  grave,  serious. 

grec  [grek],  Greek. 

greler  [grele],  to  hail. 

grenier  [granje],  m.,  attic,  granary. 

grillage  [grijais],  m.,  grating;  —  aux 
afficheSj  bulletin  board. 

grincement  [gresma],  m.,  grating. 

gris  [gri],  gray. 

gronder  [grode],  to  scold. 

gros  [gro],  big,  great. 

gueule  [gcel],  f .,  jaws  (of  an  animal). 


French-English  •  Vocabulary 


349 


guere  [geir],  hardly;  ne  — ,  hardly. 
guerre  [ge:r],  f.,  war. 
guichet  [gije],  m.,  ticket  window, 
guider  [gide],  to  guide. 
Guillaume  [gijoim],  William. 

H 

*ha  [a],  ha! 

habiller  [abije],  to  dress;  s' — ,  to  be 

dressed,  dress  one's  self. 
habit   [abi],   m.,    (dress)   coat;  pi., 

clothes. 
habitant  [abita],  m.,  inhabitant, 
habiter  [abite],  to  inhabit,  dwell  in. 
habitude   [abityd],  f.,  habit;  d^ — , 

ordinarily. 
habituer  (s*)  [s  abitqe],  to  become 

accustomed. 
*halle  [al],  f.,  market. 
*hanneton  [anto],  m.,  June-bug. 
*hasarder  [azarde],  to  risk. 
*haut  [o],  high,  loud;  —  de  former 

tall  (hat) ;  en  — ,  upstairs. 
*hautement  [otma],  highly. 
*he  [e],  ho!  hey! 
Hector  [ektoir].  Hector, 
helas  [elais],  alas! 
Helene  [elen],  Helen. 
Henri  [ari],  Henry. 
hesiter  [ezite],  to  hesitate. 
*heu  [0],  an  exclamation. 
heure   [ce:r],  f.,  hour,  time;  &  la 

bonne  — ,  all  right;  a  V — ,  on  time; 

de  bonne  — ,  early;  il  est  deicx  — s, 

it   is   two   o'clock;   tout   a   V — , 

presently;  just  now. 
heureusement  [oer0zma],  fortunate- 

ly. 

heureux  [oer0],  happy. 
*hi  [i],  hee! 

hier  [je:r],  yesterday;  —  soir,  yester- 
day evening. 
hirondelle  [ir5d8l],  f.,  swallow, 
histoire  [istwair],  f.,  history,  story. 
hiver  [iveir],  m.,  winter, 
hommage  [omais],  m.,  homage. 


homme  [om],  m.,  man. 

honn^te  [oneit],  adj.,  honest,  decent. 

honneur  [onoeir],  m.,  honor. 

horloge  [orlois],  f.,  clock. 

*hors  de  [o:r  da],  out  of. 

Hortense  [ortais],  Hortense. 

hotel  [otel],  m.,  hotel,  mansion; 
Hotel- Dieu,  principal  hospital  of 
a  town;  Hotel  des  InvalideSj  old 
soldiers*  home;  —  de  ville,  town 
haU. 

*houblon  [ublo],  m.,  hop,  hop  vine. 

'houille  [u:j],  f.,  coal. 

*hu  [y],  an  exclamation. 

*huit  [i|it],  eight;  —  jours^  sl  week 
(usually) . 

*huitieme  [qitjem],  eighth. 


ici  [isi],  here. 

idee  [ide],  f.,  idea. 

idiot  [id jo],  adj.,  foolish. 

idiotisme  [idjotism],  m.,  idiom. 

if  [if],  m.,  yew,  yew-tree;  Chateau 
d'Ify  SL  prison  near  Marseilles. 

ignorant  [ijiora],  ignorant. 

il  [il],  he,  it;  s' —  vous  plait,  if  you 
please. 

lie  [il],  f.,  island. 

illusion  [ilyzjo],  f.,  illusion,  vision. 

illustre  [ilystr],  illustrious. 

image  [imais],  f.,  image,  picture. 

imagination  [ima3inasj5],  f.,  imagi- 
nation. 

immediatement  [imedjatmd],  im- 
mediately. 

immobile  [imobil],  motionless. 

imparfait  [sparfe],  imperfect,  past 
descriptive. 

imperatrice  [eperatris],  f.,  empress. 

imperiale  [eperjal],  f.,  roof  (of  a 
coach. 

important  [eporta],  important. 

impossible  [eposibl],  impossible. 

impdt  [epo],  m.,  tax,  impost. 

impression  [epresjo],  f.,  impression. 


350 


Elements  of  French 


impur  [epyir],  impure. 

inaction  [inaksj5],  f.,  inaction. 

inattention  [inatasjo],  f.,  inatten- 
tion. 

incredule  [ekredyl],  incredulous. 

incredulite  [ekredylite],  f.,  incre- 
dulity. 

incurable  [ekyrabl],  incurable. 

independance  [edepadais],  f.,  in- 
dependence. 

indiquer  [edike],  to  indicate. 

indubitablement  [edybitablma],  un- 
doubtedly. 

Industrie  [edystri],  f .,  industry. 

infiniment  [sfinima],  infinitely. 

informer  [eforme],  to  inform;  s' — , 
to  inquire. 

ingenieur  [esenjoeir],  m.,  engineer. 

innocent  [inosa],  innocent. 

insister  [esiste],  to  insist. 

inspection  [espeksjo],  f.,  inspection. 

instant  [esta],  m.,  instant;  a  V — , 
instantly,  just  now;  a  V —  meme, 
at  this  very  instant. 

instinctif  [estektif],  instinctive. 

institut  [estity],  m.,  institute. 

instruction  [gstryksjS],  f.,  instruc- 
tion. 

instruire  [estrijiir],  to  instruct. 

intellectuel  [etelektqsl],  intellectual. 

interessant  [eteresa],  interesting. 

interieur  [eterjoeir],  m.,  interior. 

interroger  [etero3e],  to  interrogate, 
question. 

interrompre  [eteroipr],  to  interrupt. 

intrepidite  [strepidite],  f .,  intrepid- 
ity. 

inutile  [inytil],  useless. 

invalide  [evalid],  m.,  invalid;  Hotel 
des  Invalides,  old  soldiers'  home. 

invitation  [svitasjo],  f.,   invitation. 

inviter  [evite],  to  invite. 

irai  [ire],  shall  go.     (See  aller). 

Irlande  [irlaid],  f.,  Ireland. 

Italie  [itali],  f.,  Italy. 

italien  [italje],  Italian, 


jabot  [sabo],  m.,  frill  (of  a  shirt). 

Jacques  [saik],  James. 

jaloux  [3alu],  jealous. 

jamais   [same],  ever;  never  (when 

separate  from  verb) ;  —  de  la  vie, 

never  never;  ne  — ,  never, 
jambe  [saib],  f.,  leg. 
Janvier  [savje],  m.,  January, 
jardin  [sards],  m.,  garden, 
jaser  [saze],  to  chatter, 
jaune  [30m],  yellow, 
je  [38],  I. 
Jean  [3a],  John. 
Jeanne  [3am],  Joan;  —  d' Arc,  Joan 

of  Arc. 
Jeannette  [sanet],  Janet,  Jenny. 
Jeter    [sate],   to   throw;   se  — ,   to 

empty   (of  rivers). 
jeu  [30],  m.,  game. 
jeudi  [30di],  m.,  Thursday, 
jeune  [seen],  young, 
jeunesse  [scenes],  f.,  youth, 
joie  [swa],  f.,  joy. 
joli  [soli],  pretty. 
joliment  [solima],  prettily. 
Josephine  [sozefin],  Josephine. 
Joubert  [subeir],  Joubert,  a  French 

philosopher, 
joue  [su],  f.,  cheek. 
jouer  [swe],  to  play, 
jour  [su:r],  m.,  day. 
journal  [surnal],  m.,  newspaper, 
joumee   [3urne],  f.,   day   (a  day's 

time). 
juif  [sqif],  m.,  Jew. 
juillet  [syje],  m.,  July, 
juin  [sqe],  m.,  June. 
Jules  [syl],  Julius. 
Julien  [sylje],  Julian. 
Julio  [syljo],  JuHo. 
jusqu*a  [sysk  a],  up  to,  until. 
jusque    [syska],   even    (+  dans  or 

en). 
juste  [syst],  just. 


French-English  Vocabulary 


3e51 


justement    [systma],    justly,    pre- 
cisely. 
justice  [systis],  f.,  justice. 

K 
kilo  [kilo],  or  kilogramme  [kilogram], 

m.,  kilogram,  about  2|  pounds. 
kilometre  Piilomstr],  m.,  kilometer. 


V  [1],  see  la  or  le. 

la  [la],  f.,  the,  her,  it. 

1^  [la],  there. 

la-bas  [la  ba],  down  there. 

lac  [lak],  m.,  lake. 

laisser   [lese],   to  leave,   let;  —  a 

penseVj  allow  one  to  imagine. 
lait  [le],  m.,  milk, 
laitue  [lety],  f.,  lettuce. 
Lamartine    [lamartin],    Lamartine, 

a  French  author. 
lancer   [lose],  to  throw;  se  — ,  to 

rush. 
langue  [laig],  f.,  tongue,  language. 
Laplace  [laplas],  Laplace,  a  proper 

name. 
laquelle  [lakel],  see  lequel. 
large  [lars],  wide. 
larme  [larm],  f.,  tear. 
latin  [late],  Latin;  quartier  — ,  Latin 

quarter. 
laver  [lave],  to  wash. 
le  [la],  m.,  him,  it,  the;  vous  ne  Veles 

pas  J  you  are  not  (so  and  so). 
Leblanc  [labia],  Leblanc,  a  proper 

name. 
Lecomte  [bkoit],  Lecomte,  a  proper 

name. 
legon  [las5],  f.,  lesson. 
lecture  [lektyir],  f.,  reading. 
Legrand  [bgra],  a  proper  name, 
legume  [legym],  m.,  vegetable. 
Lemaitre  [bmeitr],  a  proper  name, 
lendemain  [ladme],  m.,  next  day. 
lequel  [Iskel],  rel.  pron.,  which,  who, 

that. 
les  [le],  or  [le];  see  le  or  la. 


lettre  [letr],  f.,  letter. 

leur  [loeir],  to  them,  their ;Je  — , 

theirs;  du  — ,  some  of  theirs, 
lever  [lave],  to  raise;  se  — ,  to  get  up. 
liberatrice    [libera tris],    f.,    libera- 

tress. 
liberte  [liberte],  f.,  Hberty. 
libra  [libr],  free, 
lieu  [lj0],  m.,  place;  avoir  — ,  to  take 

place. 
ligne  [liji],  f.,  line. 
Lille  [hi],  f.,  Lille,  a  city  of  northern 

France, 
limitrophe  [Umitrof],  adj.,  frontier, 
lire  [U:r],  to  read, 
lisez  [hze],  see  lire, 
lisiere  [lizjeir],  f.,  edge,  border, 
lit  [H],  m.,  bed. 

litre  [litr],  m.,  liter,  about  one  quart, 
livre  [h:vr],  m.,  book, 
livre  [Hivr],  f.,  pound. 
location    [lokasjo],    f.,    reservation 

(of  tickets);  en  — ,  reserved, 
locomotive    [lokomotiiv],    f.,    loco- 
motive. 
loge  [10:3],  f.,  box  (at  a  theater). 
loger  [lo3e],  to  lodge,  billet. 
loi  [Iwa],  f.,  law. 
loin  [Iwe],  far,  distant. 
Loire  [Iwair],  f.,  Loire,  a  river  in 

France, 
loisir  [Iwaziir],  m.,  leisure. 
Pon  [1  5],  see  on. 
Londres  [loidr],  m.,  London, 
long  [13],  long;  tout  au  — •,  at  full 

length, 
longtemps  [lota],  a  long  time, 
longueur  [logceir],  f.,  length, 
lorgnette  [lorjiet],  f.,  opera-glass. 
Lorraine    [loren],    f.,    Lorraine,    a 

province  in  France. 

lorsque  [lorsko],  when.    (Never  used 
in  asking  questions). 

louis  [Iwi],  m.,  louis,  worth  twenty 

francs. 
lourd  [lu:r],  heavy. 


352 


Elements  of  French 


Louvre  [luivr],  m.,  Louvre,  a  former 
royal  palace,  now  converted  into 
the  ■  richest  art  museum  in  the 
world. 

loyal  [Iwajal],  loyal. 

lu  [ly],  see  lire. 

lui  [Iqi],  he,  him,  to  him,  to  her. 

lui-meme  [Iqi  meim],  himself  (in- 
tensive). 

lumiere  [lymjeir],  f.,  light. 

lundi  [[loedi],  m.,  Monday. 

lune  [lyn],  f.,  moon. 

lunettes  [lynet],  f.  pi.,  spectacles. 

lut  [ly],  see  lire. 

lutte  [lyt],  f.,  struggle. 

lycee  [lise],  m.,  high  school. 

Lyon  [lj5],  m.,  Lyons,  a  city  in 
France. 

M 

M.,  abbreviation  for  monsieur, 
ma  [ma],  see  men. 
m^cher  [maje],  to  chew, 
machine  [ma/in],  f.,  machine;  —  d, 

vapeuVf  steam  engine, 
madame  [madam],  f .,  Mrs.,  Madam. 
Madeleine  [madalen],  f.,  Madeleine 

(meaning  Magdalene)  y  a  temple 

in  Paris. 
mademoiselle     [madam  wazel),     f.. 

Miss. 
Madrid   [madrid],  f.,  Madrid, 
magnifique  [majiifik],  magnificent, 
mai  [me],  m.,  May. 
main  [me],  f.,  hand, 
maintenant  [metna],  now. 
maire  [meir],  m.,  mayor, 
mairie  [meri],  f.,  town-hall, 
mais  [me],  but;  —  oui,  why  yes. 
maison  [mezo],  f.,  house, 
maitre  [meitr],  m.,  teacher,  Mister 

(of  lawyers). 
mal  [mal],s  adv.,  badly, 
mal  [mal],  m.,  harm,  hurt;  —  aux 

dentSf  toothache. 
Malbrough  [malbru],  m.,  Marlbor- 
ough. 


m^e  [mail],  male,  strong, 
malgre  [malgre],  in  spite  of. 
malheur  [maloeir],  m.,  misfortune, 

unhappiness. 
malheureusement     [malcer0zma), 

unfortunately, 
malheureux  [malcer0],  unhappy, 
malhonnete  [maloneit],  dishonest, 
malle  [mal],  f.,  trunk, 
maman  [mama],  f.,  mamma. 
manche  [maij],  f .,  sleeve;  la  Manchey 

English  Channel. 
manger  [mase],  to  eat;  mange  aux 

bordSj  dog-eared. 
manie  [mani],  f.,  mania,  madness. 
manquer    [make],   to   miss;   — •  la 

classe,  to  absent  one's  self  from 

school, 
marchand   [mar/a],  m.,  merchant; 

—  de  chaussures,  shoe  dealer. 
marche  [marj'e],  m.,  market;  a  bon 

— ,  cheap. 
marcher  [marj'e],  to  march,  walk. 
mardi  [mardi],  m.,  Tuesday. 
marechal  [marejal],  m.,  marshal. 
Marguerite  [margerit],  Margaret, 
mari  [mari],  m.,  husband, 
mariage    [marjais],    m.,    marriage; 

demander  en  — ,  to  propose  mar- 
riage to. 
Marie  [mari],  f.,  Mary, 
marier  [marje],  to  marry,  give  in 

marriage;  se  — ,  to  get  married. 
marin  [mare],  m.,  sailor. 
Mame  [marn],  f.,  Marne. 
marquer  [marke],  to  mark,  indicate, 
marraine  [mar en],  f.,  godmother, 
mars  [mars],  m.,  March. 
Marseillaise     [marsejeiz],     f.,    the 

French  national  song. 
Marseille  [marseij],  f.,  Marseilles, 
matelot  [matlo],  m.,  sailor. 
matin  [mate],  m.,  morning;  demain 

— ,  tomorrow  morning, 
matinee  [matine],  f.,  morning  (with 

its  happenings), 
matines  [matin],  f .,  pi.,  matins. 


French-English  Vocabulary 


353 


mature  [mo:r],  m.,  Moor. 

mauvais  [move],  bad. 

maux  [mo],  see  mal. 

me  [ma],  me;  see  je. 

medecin  [metse],  m.,  doctor. 

medecine  [metsin],  f.,  medicine. 

Mediterranee  [mediterane],  f .,  Med- 
iterranean Sea. 

meilleur  [mejoeir],  better.  (See 
bon.) 

melancolie  [melakoli],  f.,  melan- 
choly. 

meler  [mele],  to  mingle;  se  — ,  to 
meddle. 

membre  [maibr],  m.,  member. 

meme  [me:m],  same,  even;  a  —  de, 
able  to;  la  —  chose,  the  same 
thing;  la  chose  — ,  the  thing  itself; 
tout  de  — ,  just  the  same;  vous- 
meme,    yourseK    (intensive). 

memoire  [memwair],  f.,  memory. 

menager  [menase],  to  spare;  se  — , 
to  spare  one's  self. 

mentionner  [masjone],  to  mention. 

menton  [mats],  m.,  chin. 

mer  [meir],  f.,  sea. 

Mercedes  [mersedeis],  Mercedes,  a 
girl's  name. 

merci  [mersi],  thank  you;  no,  thank 
you. 

Mercier  [msrsje],  Mercier,  a  proper 
name. 

mercredi  [merkradi],  m.,  Wednes- 
day. ' 

mercure  [merkyir],  m.,  mercury 

mere  [meir],  f.,  mother. 

merle  [merl],  m.,  blackbird. 

merveille  [mervsij],  f.,  marvel. 

mes  [me]  or  [me],  see  men. 

messieurs  [mesi0],  gentlemen.  (See 
monsieur.) 

mesure  [mazyir],  f .,  measure. 

metre  [metr],  m.,  meter,  a  Uttle 
more  than  a  yard. 

Metro  [metro],  Metropolitain 
[metropoUte],  m.,  the  Metro- 
politan (subway  and  elevated 
hne). 


metropolitain  [metropolite],  adj., 
metropolitan. 

mettre  [metr],  to  put,  put  on;  se  — , 
to  sit  down;  se  -^  d,  to  begin 
to;  Men  mis,  well  dressed;  le 
convert  est  mis,  the  table  is  set. 

meubler  [mceble],  to  furnish. 

mi-careme  [mi  kareim],  f.,  mid- 
Lent. 

midi  [midi],  m.,  noon,  south. 

mie  [mi],  f.,  darling. 

mien  [mje],  mine;  le  — ,  mine. 

mieux  [mj0],  see  bien. 

mil  [mil],  thousand. 

milady  [miledi],  f.,  my  lady. 

milieu  [milj0],  m.,  middle. 

militaire  [mihteir],  military. 

mille  [mil],  thousand;  —  anglaiSy 
English  mile. 

milKer  [milje],  m.,  thousand. 

million  [miljo],  m.,  million. 

mine  [min],  f.,  mine. 

minuit  [minyi],  m.,  midnight. 

minute  [minyt],  f.,  minute. 

miroir  [mirwair],  m.,  mirror. 

mirontaine  [miroten],  a  meaning- 
less word. 

mironton,  tonton  [miroto,  t5to], 
meaningless   singing    words. 

mis  [mi],  see  mettre. 

miserable  [mizerabl],  miserable. 

mission  [misjo],  f.,  mission. 

Mile,  abbreviation  for  mademoi- 
selle. 

MM.,  abbreviation  for  messieurs. 

Mme,  abbreviation  for  madame. 

mobile  [mobil],  mobile. 

mode  [mod],  f .,  style;  hla  —  de  chez 
nous,  as  we  do  at  home. 

moi  [mwa],  me,  to  me,  I. 

moi-meme  [mwa  me:m],  myself 
(intensive). 

moins  [mwej,  less;  n'en  pas  — ,  none 
the  less.     (See  peu.) 

mois  [mwa],  m.,  month. 

moitie  [mwatje],      half. 


354 


Elements  of  French 


Moliere  [moljeir],  Moliere,  a  French 

dramatist. 
moment  [moma],  m.,  moment. 
mon  [m5],  my. 

monarchie  [monarji],  f.,  monarchy, 
monde  [moid],  m.,  world,  people; 

tout  le  — ,  everybody, 
monetaire  [monetsir],  monetary, 
momiaie  [mone],  f.,  money,  change, 
monsieur    [m9sj0],    m.,    Mr.,    sir, 

gentleman, 
mont  [mo],  m.,  mountain, 
montagne  [mStaji],  f.,  mountain, 
monter  [mote],  to  go  up,  bring  up; 

—  a  chevalj  to  ride  horseback. 

faire  —  nos  hagages,  to  have  our 

baggage  brought  up. 
montre  [moitr],  f .,  watch;  a  voire  — , 

by  your  watch, 
moritrer  [motre],  to  show, 
monument    [monyma],   m.,   monu- 
ment, 
moquer  [moke],  to  mock;  se  —  de, 

to  make  fun  of. 
moral  [moral],  adj. y  moral, 
morceau  [morso],  m.,  bit,  morsel, 
mort  [moir],  f.,  death, 
mort  [moir],  see  mourir. 
mot  [mo],  m.,  word,  a  short  letter, 
motif  [motif],  m.,  motive, 
motte  [mot],  f.,  lump, 
mou  [mu],  mol  [mol],  soft, 
mourir  [muriir],  to  die. 
mouton  [muto],  m.,  sheep,  mutton, 
moyen     [mwaje],     adj.,     medium, 

average. 
moyen  [mwajs],  m.,  means, 
moyennant  [mwajsna],  by  means  of, 

in  consideration  of. 
muet  [mq8],  mute,  dumb, 
mugir  [mysiir],  to  roar,  bellow, 
multiplication     [myltiplikasjo],     f., 

multiplication, 
multiplier  [multiplie],  to  multiply, 
mur  [myir],  m.,  wall, 
musee  [myze],  museum. 
mutisme  [mytism],  m.,  dumbness. 


N 

nage  [na:3],  f.,  swimming;  se  jeter 
a  la  — ,  to  jump  into  the  water. 

nager  [na3e],  to  swim. 

naissance  [nesais],  f.,  birth. 

Naples  [napl],  f.,  Naples. 

Napoleon  [napoleo].  Napoleon. 

national  [nasjonal],  national. 

naturellement  [natyrelma],  natu- 
rally. 

navigation  [navigasj5],  f.,  naviga- 
tion. 

ne  [no],  no,  not;  ne  .  .  ^pas,  no; 
not;  ne  .  .  .  ni  .  .  .  ni,  neither  .  .  . 
nor;  ne  .  . .  quej  only. 

negliger   [neghse],  to  neglect. 

neige  [ne:3],  f.,  snow. 

neiger  [nese],  to  snow;  il  neige j  it 
is  snowing. 

n*est-ce  pas?  [n  e  s  pa],  see  itre. 

neuf  [noef],  new; 

neuf  [ncef],  nine. 

neveu  [nov0],  m.,  nephew. 

New- York  [ncB  jork],  f.,  New  York. 

nez  [ne],  m.,  nose. 

ni  [ni],  neither,  nor. 

nickel  [nikel],  m.,  nickel. 

nid  [ni],  m.,  nest. 

noble  [nobl],  noble. 

noir  [nwair],  black. 

nom  [no],  m.,  name. 

nombre  [noibr],  m.,  number. 

nombreux  [nobr0],  numerous. 

nommer  [nome],  to  name. 

non  [no],  no;  —  plus^  neither. 

nord  [noir],  m.,  north. 

nord-est  [nor  est],  m.,  northeast. 

normal  [normal],  normal. 

Normandie  [normadi],f., Normandy. 

nos  [no],  see  notre. 

noter  [note],  to  note,  observe. 

notre  [notr],  our;  Notre  Dame,  the 
Virgin.  (The  cathedral  of  Notre 
Dame  is  a  beautiful  example  of 
the  Gothic  style  of  architecture, 
with  a  famous  facade.  The 
edifice  is  the  theme  of  a  famous 
romance  by  Victor  Hugo.) 


French-English  Vocabulary 


355 


ndtre  [noitr],  ours;  le  — ,  ours. 
nourrir  [nuriir],  to  feed. 
nous  [nu],  we,  us,  to  us. 
nouveau    [nuvo],    nouvel     [nuvel], 

new, 
nouvelles  [nuvel],  f.,  news. 
novembre  [novaibr],  m.,  November. 
noyer  [nwaje],  m.,  walnut  tree. 
noyer  [nwaje],  to  drown. 
nu  [ny],  bare,  naked. 
nuit  [nqi],  f.,  night;  la  — ,  at  night. 
nul  [nyl],  adj.,  no. 
numero  [nymero],  m.,  number. 


objet  [ob3s],  m.,  object. 

obliger  [obli3e],  to  oblige. 

obtenir  [optaniir],  to  obtain. 

obus  [oby],  m.,  shell. 

occuper  [okype],  to  occupy;  s' —  rfe, 

to  be  busy. 
ocean  [osea],  m.,  ocean. 
octobre  [oktobr],  m.,  October. 
ceil  [oeij],  m.,  eye. 

Plural,  yeux  [j0]. 
ceuf  [cef],  m.,  egg. 

Plural,  ceufs  [0]. 
officiel  [ofisjel],  official. 
officier  [ofisje],  m.,  officer. 
oh  [o],  oh! 

oiseau  [wazo],  m.,  bird. 
oisif  [wazif  ],  idle, 
omelette  [omlst],  f.,  omelet. 
omnibus  [omnibyis],  m.,  omnibus. 
on     [5],    one;    somebody.     (Often 

translated  "we,"  ''they,"  etc.) 
oncle  [oikl],  m.,  uncle, 
ont  [5],  see  avoir, 
onze  [3:z],  eleven. 
Opera  [opera],  m.,  Opera,  or  Opera 

House.     (The  Paris  Opera  cost 

47,000,000  francs.) 
oppose  [opoze],  opposite. 
or  [o:r],  m.,  gold. 
oral  [oral],  oral. 


orchestre  [orkestr],  m.,  orchestra; 
fauteuil  d — ,  orchestra  seat. 

ordinaire  [ordineir],  ordinary;  d' — , 
usually. 

ordinairement  [ordinerma],  ordi- 
narily. 

ordre  [ordr],  m.,  order. 

oreille  [oreij],  f.,  ear. 

orgueil  [orgoeij],  m.,  pride. 

Orleans  [orled],  m.,  f.,  Orleans,  a 
city  in  France. 

ortolan  [ortola],  m.,  ortolan. 

oser  [oze],  to  dare. 

ou  [u],  or,  either. 

oft  [u],  where,  in  which. 

oublier  [ublie],  to  forget. 

ouest  [west],  m.,  west. 

oui  [wi],  yes. 

outre  [utr]:  en  — ,  moreover. 

ouvert  [uveir],  open.     (See  ouvrir.) 

ouvertement  [uvertma],  openly. 

ouvrage  [uvra:3],  m.,  work. 

ouvreuse  [uvr0:z],  f.,  woman  usher. 

ouvrir  [uvriir],  to  open. 


page  [pais],  ^v  P^-g^  (of  a  book). 

page  [pa:3],  m.,  page  (attendant). 

paille  [pa:j],  f.,  straw. 

pain  [pe],  m.,  bread. 

paire  [pe:r],  f .,  pair. 

paix  [pe],  f.,  peace. 

palais  [pale],  m.,  palace. 

pile  [pail],  pale. 

paletot  [palto],  m.,  paletot,  great- 
coat. 

pan  [pa],  m.,  flap. 

panier  [panje],  m.,  basket. 

pantalon  [pdtalo],  m.,  trousers. 

Pantheon  [pateo],  m..  Pantheon,  a 
temple  which  is  the  resting  place 
of  a  number  of  distinguished 
Frenchmen. 

papa  [papa],  m.,  papa. 

papier  [papje],  m.,  paper;  —  d  let- 
treSf  letter  paper. 


356 


Elements  of  French 


papier-monnaie   [papje  mone],  m., 

paper  money. 
Paques  [pa:k],  m.,  Easter. 
par  [pair],  by,  through;   —  conse- 
quent, consequently, 
paraitre  [pareitr],  to  appear,  seem. 
parapluie  [paraplqi],  m.,  umbrella. 
pare  [park],  m.,  park, 
parce  que  [pars  ka],  because, 
par-dessus  [par  dasy],  on,  over  and 

above, 
pardessus  [pardasy],  m.,  overcoat. 
pardon  [pardo],  m.,  pardon,  I  beg 

pardon. 
pareil  [pareij],  Uke,  similar. 
parent  [para],  m.,  parent,  relative, 
parfaitement  [parfetma],  perfectly. 
Paris  [pari],  m.,  Paris, 
parisien  [parizje],  adj.,  Parisian. 
parler  [parle],  to  speali. 
parmi  [parmi],  among. 
parole  [parol],  f.,  word;  en  prenant 

la  — ,  beginning  to  speak. 
part  [pair],  f.,  part,  share;  de  la  — 

dej  on  behaK  of. 
partager  [parta3e],  to  share. 
parterre     [parte  ir],     m.,     pit     (of 

theater) . 
participe  [partisip],  m.,  participle, 
particulier ement    [par  tiky  1  j  erm  a  ] , 

particularly. 
partie  [parti],  f.,  part,  match, 
partir  [partiir],  to  leave,  depart, 
partout  [partu],  everywhere. 
pas  [pa],  no,  not;  ne  — ,  no,  not; 

n'est-ce  — ?  are  we  not?  do  they 

not?  etc.;  non  — ,  not. 
pas  [pa],  m.,  step;  au  — ,  in  a  walk, 
passer   [pase],  to  pass;  spend   (of 

time) ;  se  — ,  to  take  place. 
patapon    [patap5],   a     meaningless 

word, 
patience  [pasjais],  f.,  patience, 
patient  [pasja],  m.,  patient,  culprit, 
patiner  [patine],  to  skate. 
patrie  [patri],  f .,  native  land. 
patriotique  [patriotik],  patriotic. 


patte  [pat],  f.,  paw,  foot. 

Paul  [pol],  Paul. 

pauvre     [poivr],    poor,     wretched; 

droit  des  — s,  tax  levied  for  the 

benefit  of  the  poor, 
payer  [peje],  to  pay,  pay  for. 
pays  [pei],  m.,  country. 
paysan  [peiza],  m.,  peasant, 
paysanne     [peizan],    f.,    peasant 

woman, 
peche  [psij],  f.,  peach. 
pecher  [ps/e],  to  fish. 
peigne  [peji],  m.,  comb, 
peigner  [pejie],  to  comb. 
peine  [pen],  f.,  anxiety,  pain;  d,  — , 

hardly;  valoir  la  — ,  to  be  worth 

while, 
pendant    [pada],    during;    —   que, 

while. 
pendre  [paidr],  to  hang, 
penetrer  [penetre],  to  penetrate. 
penser   [pase],  to  think;  —  d,  to 

think  of,  remember;    —    de,    to 

have  an  opinion  of ;  vous  pensez  si, 

you  may  well  imagine  whether. 
percer  [perse],  to  pierce. 
perdre  [perdr],  to  lose,  disturb, 
pere  [peir],  m.,  father, 
permettre  [permetr],  to  permit. 
Perrichon     [peri  Jo],    Perrichon,    a 

proper  name. 
personne    [person],    m.,    anybody, 

nobody;  ne  — ,  nobody, 
personnel  [personel],  private, 
perspective  [perspektiiv],  f.,  view, 

vista. 
persuader  [persqade],  to  persuade. 
petit  [poti],  adj.,  little. 
peu    [p0],   adv.,   little;   a  —   pres, 

nearly. 
peuple  [poepl],  m.,  people,  nation, 
peur  [poeir],  f.,  fear;  avoir  — ,  to  be 

afraid. 
peut  [p0],  see  pouvoir. 
peut-etre  [poet  eitr],  perhaps. 
Philippe  [filip],  Philip. 
phrase  [fraiz],  f.,  phrase,  sentence. 


French-English  Vocabulary 


357 


picota  [pikota],  pick,  pick! 
picoter  [pikote],  to  peck  at. 
picoti  [pikDti],  pick,  pick! 
piece  [pjes],  f.,  piece,  coin,  room, 

play. 
pied  [pje],  m.,  foot;  a  — ,  afoot;  d 

mon  — ,  fitting  my  foot. 
Pierre  [pjeir],  Peter. 
Pierrot  [pjero],  little  Peter, 
pigeon  [pi3o],  m.,  pigeon. 
piquer  [pike]:  se. — ,  to  pride  one's 

self. 
pire  [piir],  see  mauvais. 
place  [plas],  f.,  place,  square;  Place 

de  VEtoile,  name  of  a  square  in 

Paris. 
plaie  [pis],  f.,  wound, 
plaintif  [pletif],  m.,  plaintive. 
plaire   [pleir],   to  please;  sHl  vous 

plait,  if  you  please. 
plaisir  [pleziir],  m.,  pleasure. 
plan  [pla],  m.,  plan,  map. 
plante  [plait],  f.,  plant;  Jardin  des 

Plantes,  botanical  garden, 
planter  [plate],  to  plant. 
plate-forme  [platform],  f.,  platform. 
plein  [pie],  full. 
pleurer  [plcere],  to  weep, 
pleut  [pl0],  see  pleuvoir. 
pleuvoir  [ploevwair],  to  rain. 
plisser  [plise],  to  plait, 
plonger  [plose],  to  plunge, 
pluie  [plqi],  f.,  rain, 
plume  [plym],  f.,  pen. 
plupart  [plypair],  f ...  majority,  great- 
er part. 
plus    [ply],   more;  de  —  en  plus, 

more  and  more;  ne  — ,  no  longer. 

(See  beaucoup.) 
plusieurs  [plyzjoeir],  several. 
plutot  [plyto],  rather,  sooner. 
poche  [poj],  f.,  pocket;  —  revolver, 

hip  pocket. 
poids  [pwa],  m.,  weight, 
point  [pwe],  m.,  point. 
point  [pwe],  not;  not  at  all;  ne  — 

not  at  all. 


poire  [pwair],  f.,  pear. 

pois  [pwa],  m.,  pea;  petits  — ,  French 
peas. 

poisson  [pwaso],  m.,  fish. 

poitrine  [pwatrin],  f.,  chest. 

poli  [pali],  polished,  polite. 

police  [polis],  f.,  police. 

polir  [poliir],  to  polish. 

polonais  [polone],  Polish. 

polytechnique  [politeknik],  poly- 
technic. 

pomme  [pom],  f.,  apple;  —  de  terre, 
potato. 

Ponine  [ponin],  Ponine,  a  girl's 
name. 

pont  [po],  m.,  bridge. 

population  [popylasjo],  f.,  popula- 
tion. 

pore  [poir],  m.,  hog. 

port  [po:r],  m.,  harbor,  port. 

porte  [port],  f.,  'door. 

portefeuille  [portfoeij],  m.,  pocket- 
book. 

porte-monnaie  [port  mone],  m., 
purse. 

porte-plume  [port  plym],  m.,  pen- 
holder. 

porter  [porte],  to  carry,  wear;.se  — , 
to  be  (of  health);  comment  vous 
porteZ'Vous?  how  are  you? 

Porto-Ferrajo  [porto  ferajo],  Porto- 
ferrajo,  principal  city  of  the 
island  of  Elba. 

poser  [poze],  to  place,  write  down 
(in  arithmetic) . 

position  [pozisjo],  f.,  position. 

possible  [posibl],  possible. 

postal  [postal],  postal. 

poste  [post],  f.,  post,  post  office;  — 
restante,  general  delivery. 

pouce  [pus],  m.,  inch,  thumb. 

poule  [pul],  f.,  hen. 

poulet  [pule],  m.,  chicken. 

poupee  [pupe],  f.,  doll. 

pour  [puir],  prep.,  for,  in  order  to. 

pourboire  [purbwair],  m.,  tip. 

pour-cent  [puir  sa],  m.,  percent. 


358 


Elements  of  French 


pourquoi  [purkwa],  why. 

pousser  [puse],  to  push,  extend. 

poussiere  [pusjeir],  f.,  dust. 

pouvoir  [puvwair],  to  be  able,  can; 
il  se  pent,  it  is  possible. 

praticable    [pratikabl],   practicable. 

pre  [pre],  m.,  meadow. 

precaution  [prekosjS],  f.,  precaution. 

precipiter  [presipite],  to  precipitate; 
se  — ,  to  rush,  dash. 

precis  [presi],  precise. 

precisement  [presizema],  precisely. 

prefecture  [prefsktyir],  f.,  prefect's 
office. 

premier  [pramje],  first;  —  etagey 
second  floor. 

premierement  [pramjsrma],  firstly. 

prend  [pro],  takes.     (See  prendre). 

prendre  [proiidr],  to  take,  catch;  — 
garde  J  to  take  care. 

preparer  [prepare],  to  prepare. 

pres  de  [pre  do],  near. 

present  [preza],  present;  a  — ,  now. 

presque  [preska],  almost. 

presse  [prese],  urgent. 

pretendre  [pretaidr],  to  pretend, 
claim. 

preter  [prete],  to  lend. 

preuve  [proeiv],  f.,  proof. 

prier  [prie],  to  pray;  beg;^^  vous  en 
prie,  I  beg  you. 

priere  [prieir],  f.,  prayer;  —  defaire 
suivre,  please  forward. 

principal  [presipal],  principal. 

principalement  [presipalma],  prin- 
cipally. 

printemps  [preta],  m.,  spring. 

pris  [pri],  see  prendre. 

prise  [priiz],  f.,  capture. 

prison  [priz 5],  f.,  prison. 

prisonnier  [prizonje],  m.,  prisoner. 

prix  [pri],  m.,  price,  prize;  dans  les 
—  douXj  Sit  a  moderate  price. 

probable  [probabl],  probable. 

prochain  [proje],  next. 

professeur  [profesceir],  m.,  profes- 
sor, teacher. 


profession  [profesjo],  f.,  profession. 

profit er  [profite],  to  profit. 

profond  [prof 5],  deep. 

profondement  [profodema],  deeply. 

programme  [program],  m.,  program. 

promenade  [promnad],  f.,  walk. 

promener  [promne],  to  take  out, 
parade;  se  — ,  to  take  a  walk, 
take  an  outing. 

promettre  [prometr],  to  promise. 

promulgation  [promylgasjo],  f.,  pro- 
mulgation. 

prononcer  [pronose],  to  pronounce. 

propre  [propr],  own,  clean. 

proprietaire  [proprieteir],  m.,  pro- 
prietor. 

province  [prove :s],  f.,  province. 

provision  [provizj5],  f.,  provision. 

prussien  [prysje],  Prussian. 

public  [pyblik],  pubhc. 

puis  [pqi],  then. 

puis  [pqi],  see  pouvoir. 

puissant  [pqisa],  powerful. 

punir  [pyniir],  to  punish. 

punition  [pynisjo],  f.,  punishment. 

pupitre  [pypitr],  m.,  desk. 

Pyrenees  [pirene],  f.  pi.,  Pyrenees. 


quadrupede  [kadryped],  m.,  quad- 
ruped. 

qualite  [kahte],  f.,  quality. 

quand  [ka],  when;  depuis  — ,  how 
long. 

quant  k  [kat  a],  as  for. 

quarante  [karait],  forty. 

quart  [ka:r],  m.,  quarter. 

quartier  [kartje],  m.,  quarter,  ward; 
—  savanty  learned  quarter. 

quatorze  [katorz],  fourteen. 

quatre  [katr],  four. 

quatre  -  vingt  -  dix  [katr  ve  dis], 
ninety. 

quatre-vingts  [katr  ve],  eighty. 

que  [ka],  pron.,  that,  whom,  which, 
what;  qu' avez-vous?  what  is  the 
matter  with  you?  qu'est-ce  qui? 
what?  qu^est'Ce  que  c'est?  what  is  it? 


French-English  Vocabulary 


359 


que  [ka],  conj.,  that,  than,  l^t  (  + 

subjunctive). 
que  [ka],  adv.,  how,  how  many;  ne 

—  que  J  only, 
quel    [kel],    adj.,    what,    what    a, 

which. 

quelque  [kelk],  some,  some  few;  — 
hon  quHl  soil,  however  good  it 
may  be;  —  chose,  m.,  something. 

quelqu*un  [kelkoe],  some  one. 

qu*est-ce  que?  [k  s  s  ka],  qu*est-ce 
qui?  [k  e  s  ki],  what? 

question  [kestjo],  f.,  question. 

questionnaire  [kestjoneir],  m.,  ex- 
amination questions. 

queue  [k0],  f.,  tail;  faire  la  — ,  to 
stand  in  line. 

qui  [ki],  who,  which;  a  — ?  whose 
(possession) ;  de  — ?  whose  (rela- 
tionship) ;  —  que  ce  soit,  anybody, 
whoever. 

quiconque  [kikoik],  whoever. 

quinze  [keiz],  fifteen. 

quitter  [kite],  to  leave. 

quoi  [kwa],  what;  il  y  aura  de  — 
arriver  a  Paris,  there  will  be 
enough  to  take  one  to  Paris;  il 
n'y  a  pas  de  — ,  don't  mention  it. 

quoique  P^wako],  although. 


racconimoder  [rakomode],  to  repair. 
race  [ras],  f.,  race,  breed, 
raconter  [rakote],  to  narrate, 
raison  [rezo],  f.,  reason;  avoir  — ,  to 

be  right. 
ramasser  [ramase],  to  pick  up. 
ramener  [ranane],  to  bring  back, 
rang  [ra],  m.,  rank, 
ranger  [rase],  to  range,  put  in  place, 
ranimer  [ranime],  to  restore,  arouse. 
rapide  [rapid],  m.,  express. 
rappeler  (se)  [so  raple],  to  recollect. 
rapporter  [raporte],  to  bring  back, 
rare  [rair]^  rare, 
rarement  [rarma],  rarely, 
raser  [raze],  to  shave. 


rasoir    [razwair],  m.,  razor;  —  de 
sHrete,  safety  razor. 

rat  [ra],  m.,  rat. 

rayonner  [rejone],  to  radiate. 

rebondir  [rabodiir];  to  rebound. 

recevoir  [rasvwair],  to  receive. 

recit  [resi],  m.,  narrative. 

reciter  [resite],  to  recite,  repeat. 

reclamation    [reklamasjo],  f.,  com- 
plaint. 

recommandation  [rakomadasjo],  f., 
recommendation . 

recommander   [rakomade],   to  rec- 
ommend. 

reconnaissance    [rakonesais],    f., 
gratitude. 

reconnaissant  [rakonesa],  grateful. 

refu  [rasy],  see  recevoir. 

rediger  [redise],  to  draw  up. 

redingote  [radegot],  f.,  frock  coat. 

reduction  [redyksjo],  f.,  reduction. 

reellement  [reelma],  really. 

reflechir  [reflejiir],  to  reflect. 

reflexion    [refleksjo],   f.,   reflection. 

regal  [regal],  m.,  treat. 

regard  [ragair],  m.,  look. 

regarder  [ragarde],  to  look  at. 

regiment  [resima],  m.,  regiment. 

regie  [reigl],  f.,  ruler,  rule. 

regretter  [ragrete],  to  regret. 

Reims  [rsis],  f.,  Rheims,  a  city  in 
France. 

reine  [rem],  f.,  queen. 

rejouir  [reswiir],  to  rejoice,  delight. 

releguer  [ralege],  to  exile. 

reliefs  [raljef],  m.  pi.,  scraps. 

relier  [ralje],  to  bind. 

relire  [raUir],  to  read  over. 

remarquablement     [ramarkablma], 
remarkably. 

remarquer    [ramarke],    to    notice, 
remark. 

remerciements      [ramersima],      m. 
pL,  thanks. 

remercier  [ramersje],  to  thank. 


360 


Elements  of  French 


remettre  [rametr],  to  hand  back, 
put  off. 

remis  [rami],  see  remettre. 

remonter  [ramote],  to  wind  up  (of 
timepieces) . 

remplacer  [raplase],  to  replace. 

remuer  [ramqe],  to  stir,  wag. 

rencontre  [rakoitr],  f.,  meeting,  en- 
counter. 

rencontrer  [rakotre],  to  meet,  en- 
counter. 

rendez-vous  [rade  vu],  m.,  appoint- 
ment. 

rendre  [raidr],  to  give  back,  return; 
se  —  d,  to  betake  one's  self  to. 

Rene  [rane],  a  man's  name. 

renfermer  [rafsrme],  to  enclose, 
contain. 

renseigner  [rassjie],  to  inform. 

rentrer  [ratre],  to  enter  again,  re- 
turn. 

repartir  [rapartiir],  to  start  again. 

repas  [rapa],  m.,  meal. 

repasser  [rapase],  to  repass,  iron. 

repeter  [repete],  to  repeat. 

repondre  [rep5:dr],  to  reply. 

reponse  [rep 5 is],  f.,  answer. 

reporter  [raporte],  to  take  back. 

reposer  [rapoze],  to  rest. 

reprendre  [rapra:dr],  to  answer, 
take  back. 

representation  [raprezatasjo],  f., 
performance. 

reproche  [raproj],  m.,  reproach. 

reprocher  [raproje],  to  reproach. 

republique  [repyblik],  f.,  repubUc, 

requisition  [rekizisjo],  f.,  requisition. 

reseau  [rezo],  m.,  system,  network. 

reserver  [rezerve],  to  reserve;  faire 
— ,  to  have  reserved. 

resigner  (a)  [rezijie],  to  resign. 

resister  (a)  [reziste],  to  resist. 

respect  [respe],  m.,  respect. 

respirer  [respire],  to  breathe. 

reste  [rest],  m.,  rest,  remainder;  du 
— ,  besides. 


rester  [reste],  to  remain;  en  —  la^  to 
proceed  no  further. 

resultal  [rezylta],  m.,  result. 

retard  [ratair],  m.,  delay;  etre  en  — , 
to  be  late. 

retarder  [ratarde],  to  be  slow  (of 
timepieces) . 

retenir  [ratniir],  to  carry  (in  arith- 
metic) . 

retenu  [ratny]:  un  de  — ,  one  to 
carry  (in  arithmetic).  (See  re- 
tenir.) 

retirer  [ratire],  to  retire;  se  — ,  to 
retreat. 

retour  [ratuir],  m.,  return;  billet 
dialler  et  — ,  m.,  round  trip 
ticket. 

retranchement  [ratrajmd],  m.,  re- 
trenchment, intrenchment. 

retrouver  [ratruve],  to  find  again. 

reunion  [reynjo],  f.,  reunion. 

reunir  [reyniir],  to  collect. 

reussir  [reysiir],  to  succeed. 

reve  [re:v],  m.,  dream. 

revenir  [ravniir],  to  come  back. 

reverbere  [reverbeir],  m.,  street 
light. 

revetir  [ravetiir],  to  put  on. 

revision  [revizjo],  f.,  review. 

revoir  [ravwair],  to  see  again;  au  — , 
good-bye. 

revolution  [revolysjS],  f.,  revolution. 

revolver  [revolveir],  m.,  revolver; 
poche  — ,  hip  pocket. 

rez-de-chaussee  [re  da  Jose],  m., 
first  floor. 

Rhone  [rom],  m.,  Rhone,  a  river  in 
France.  * 

riche  [rij],  rich. 

Richelieu  [rijlj0],  Richelieu,  a  French 
cardinal  and  statesman. 

rideau  [rido],  m.,  curtain. 

rien  [rje],  nothing,  anything;  ne  — , 
nothing. 

rire  [riir],  to  laugh;  vous  voulez  — , 
you  are  joking. 

rit  [ri],  laughs.     (See  rire.) 

rive  [riiv],  f.,  bank. 


French-English  Vocabulary 


361 


robe  [rob],  f.,  dress. 

Robert  [robeir],  Robert. 

Rochefort  [rojfoir],  Rochefort,  a 
proper  name. 

roi  [rwa],  m.,  king. 

Rome  [rom],  f.,  Rome. 

ron  [ro],  a  meaningless  word. 

rond  [ro],  round;  en  — ,  around. 

ronde  [roid],  f .,  round  hand  (in  pen- 
manship) . 

rose  [ro:z],  f.,  rose. 

roseau  [rozo],  m.,  reed. 

rot  [ro],  m.,  roast,  roast  meat. 

roucouler  [rukule],  to  coo. 

Rouen  [rwa],  f.,  Rouen,  a  city  in 
France. 

rouge  [ru:3],  red. 

rouler  [rule],  to  roll. 

route  [rut],  f.,  road; /aire  —  ensem- 
ble, to  travel  together. 

royaume  [rwajoim],  rn.,  kingdom. 

rude  [ryd],  rough. 

rudesse  [rydes],  f.,  rudeness. 

rue  [ry],  f.,  street. 

rustique  ]rystik],  rustic 

S 

sa  [sa],  see  son. 

Saar  [sair],  f.,  Saar,  a  river  in 
Alsatia. 

sache  [saj],  see  savoir. 

sacre  [sakre],  sacred,  cursed. 

sacrer  [sakre],  to  crown. 

sage  [sa:3],  wise,  well-behaved. 

saint  [se],  holy. 

Saint-Germain-des-Pres  [se  serme 
de  pre],  m.,  St.  Germain-des- 
Pr^s.  (The  church  in  this  square 
was  founded  in  558.) 

Saint-Michel  [se  mi/el],  m.,  St. 
Michael. 

Sainte-Chapelle  [seit  /apel],  f., 
Sainte  Chapelle,  built  by  Saint 
Louis  as  a  repository  for  the 
rehcs  which  he  had  brought  back 
from  the  Seventh  Crusade. 

Sainte-Genevieve  [se:t  sonovjeiv], 
St.    Genevieve,    patron  saint   of 


Paris,  reputed  to  have  saved  the 

city  from  devastation  by  Attila 

the  Hun. 
Sainte-Helene    [seit   elen],   f.,    St. 

Helena,  an  island  off  the  coast  of 

Africa  to  which  Napoleon  I  was 

banished  in  1815. 
saisir  [seziir],  to  seize;  se  —  de,  to 

take  hold  of. 
saison  [sez5],  f.,  season, 
salt  [se],  see  savoir. 
salade  [salad],  f.,  salad, 
salle  [sal],  f .,  room,  large  room;  —  d 

manger,  dining  room, 
saluer  [salqe],  to  salute,  bow  to. 
samedi  [samdi],  m.,  Saturday. 
Sanchez  [saje],  Sanchez,  a  proper 

name, 
sang  [sd],  m.,  blood, 
sanglant  [sagla],  bleeding, 
sans  [sa],  without. 
sante  [sate],  f.,  health, 
saurai  [sore],  see  savoir. 
sauter  [sote],  to  leap;  faire  — ,  to 

blow  up. 
sauver  [sove],  to  save. 
sauveur  [sovoeir],  m.,  savior. 
savant  [sava],  learned;  quartier  — , 

Latin  Quarter, 
savoir    [savwair],    to   know,    know 

how. 
savoir  [savwair],  m.,  knowledge, 
savon  [savo],  m.,  soap, 
scene  [sem],  f.,  scene, 
scientifique  [sjdtifik],  scientific, 
scierie  [siri],  f.,  saw-mill. 
se  [so],  (to)  one's  self;  (to)  himself, 

herseK,  themselves. 
sec  [sek],  dry. 
secher  [seje],  to  dry. 
second  [sogo],  num.  adj.,  second, 
seconde  [sog5:d],  f.,  second. 
secouer  [sokwe],  to  shake, 
secret  [sokre],  m.,  secret. 
section  [seksj5],  f.,  section, 
secours  [sokuir],  m.,  help. 
Seguier     [segje],    m.,    Seguier,    a 

proper  name. 


362 


Elements  of  French 


seigneur  [sejioeir],  m.,  lord,  master. 

Seine  [sem],  f.,  Seine. 

seize  [seiz],  sixteen. 

selon  [sals],  according  to. 

semaine  [somen],  f .,  week. 

sembler  [sable],  to  seem. 

sens  [sa:s],  m.,  sense,  direction. 

sentiment  [satima],  m.,  sentiment. 

sentir  [satiir],  to  feel. 

s*en  va-t-en  [s  a  va  t  a],  goes  away 
to.     (See  s'en  aller.) 

separer  [separe],  to  separate. 

sept  [sst],  seven. 

septembre  [septaibr],  m.,  Septem- 
ber. 

sepulcre  [sepylkr],  m.,  tomb. 

serai  [sre],  see  etre. 

seront  [sro],  see  etre. 

serrer  [ssre],  to  press;  —  la  main,  to 
shake  hands. 

service  [servis],  m.,  service. 

serviette  [servjet],  f.,  napkin,  towel. 

servir  [serviir],  to  serve;  —  a,  to  be 
good  for;  —  de,  to  act  as ;  se  —  de, 
to  make  use  of;  servez-vouSj  help 
yourself. 

ses  [se],  see  son. 

seul  [soel],  only,  alone. 

seulement  [soelma],  only. 

si  [si],  if,  whether;  sHl  vous  plait,  if 
you  please. 

si  [si],  adv.,  so,  as,  thus. 

siege  [sje:3],  m.,  siege,  seat. 

sien  [sje],  his,  hers;  le  — ,  his,  hers. 

siffler  [sifle],  to  whistle,  sing  (of 
birds). 

signature  [sijiatyir],  f.,  signing. 

signe  [siji],  m.,  sign;  faire  — ,  to 
beckon. 

signifier  [sijiif je],  to  signify. 

silence  [silais],  m.,  silence. 

silencieux  [silasj0],  silent. 

sillon  [sijo],  m.,  furrow. 

sinistre  [sinistr],  m.,  disaster. 

sinon  [sin5],  if  not,  unless. 

situe  [sitqe],  situated. 


six  [sis],  six. 

soeur  [soeir],  f.,  sister. 

Sohier  [soje],  Sohier,  a  proper  name. 

soie  [swa],  f.,  silk. 

soif  [swaf],  f.,  thirst;  avoir  — ,  to  be 

thirsty. 
soin  [swe],  m.,  care;  aux  hons  — s  de, 

in  care  of. 
soir  [swair],  m.,  evening;  hier  — , 

yesterday  evening. 
soiree  [sware],  f.,  evening  (with  its 

happenings), 
sois  [swa],  see  etre. 
soixante  [swasait],  sixty, 
soixante-dix  [swasait  dis],  seventy. 
soldat  [solda],  m.,  soldier, 
soleil  [soleij],  m.,  sun. 
solennel  [solanel],  solemn, 
solide  [solid],  soHd. 

sommeil  [someij],  m.,  sleep;  avoir 
— ,  to  be  sleepy. 

sommes  [som],  see  etre. 

son  [so],  his,  her,  its. 

sonner  [sone],  to  ring. 

sont  [so],  see  etre. 

Sorbonne  [sorb on],  f.,  Sorbonne. 

sorte  [sort],  f.,  sort,  kind. 

sortir  [sortiir],  to  go  out. 

sou  [su],  m.,  sou,  cent;  gros  — ,  ten- 
centime  piece. 

Soulier  [sulje],  m.,  shoe. 

sourd  [suir],  deaf. 

sourire  [suriir],  m.,  smile. 

sous  [su],  under. 

soustraire  [sustreir],  to  remove;  se 
— ,  to  withdraw. 

soutenir  [sutniir],  to  sustain. 

souvenance  [suvnais],  f.,  memory. 

souvenir  [suvniir],  m.,  memory. 

souvenir  (se)  [so  suvniir],  to  re- 
member; s^en  —,  to  remember  it. 

souvent  [suva],  often. 

soyons  [swajo],  see  etre. 

Stanislas  [stanislas],  Stanislas,  a 
proper  name. 

station  [stasj5],  f.,  station. 


French-English  Vocabulary 


363 


statique  [statik]^  f .,  statics. 

subir  [sybiir],  to  undergo. 

sublime  [syblim],  sublime. 

succeder  [syksede],  to  follow. 

sud  [syd],  m.,  south. 

suis  [sqi],  see  etre. 

Suisse  [sqis],  f.,  Switzerland. 

suit  [siji],  see  suivre. 

suite  [sqit],  f.,  rest,  continuation;  ct 
la  — ,  afterwards;  faire  —  d,  to 
follow;   tout  de  — ,  immediately. 

suivre  [sqiivr],  to  follow;  d  — ,  to  be 
continued;  priere  de  faire  — , 
please  forward. 

Sully  [syli],  French  statesman  under 
Henri  IV. 

superbe  [syperb],  superb. 

superieur  [syperjoeir],  upper. 

supplement  [syplema],  m.,  supple- 
ment. 

sur  [sy:r],  on,  upon,  by  (of  dimen- 
sions). 

str  [syir],  sure;  hien  — ,  surely. 

surabondamment    [syrabodama], 
superabundantly. 

siirement  [syrma],  surely. 

siirete  [syrte],  f .,  safety;  rasoir  de  — , 
safety  razor. 

surprendre  [syrpraidr],  to  surprise. 

surpris  [syrpri],  see  surprendre. 

surtout  [syrtu],  especially. 

survivre  [syrviivr],  to  survive. 

sussent  [sys],  see  savoir. 


ta  [ta],  see  ton. 

table  [tabl],  f.,  table. 

tableau  [tablo],  m.,  picture;  —  noir, 

blackboard, 
tablier  [tablie],  m.,  apron, 
t^che  [ta:/],  f.,  task. 
tocher  [ta/e],  to  try. 
tailleur  [tajoeir],  m.,  tailor, 
tandis  que  [tadi  ka],  while. 
tant    [ta],   so  much,   as  much;  — 

mieuxy  so  much  the  better;  —  pis, 


so  much  the  worse;  —  que^  as 
long  as. 

tante  [ta:t],  f.,  aunt. 

tapage  [tapais],  m.,  noise. 

taper  [tape],  to  strike. 

tapis  [tapi],  m.,  rug,  carpet. 

tard  [ta:r],  late;  il  est  — -,  it  is  late; 
il  sefait  — ,  it  is  getting  late;  plus 
— ,  later. 

tarder  [tarde],  to  be  late;  il  me 
tarde  de,  I  long  to. 

tarif  [tarif],  m.,  scale  (of  prices). 

t*auras  [t  ora],  you  will  have. 
(Colloquial). 

tel  [tel],  such;  un  — ,  such  a;  —  que, 
such  as. 

telegraphe  [telegraf],  m.,  telegraph. 

temps  [td],  m.,  time,  weather;  d  — , 
on  time;  de  —  en  — ,  from  time 
to  time;  quel  — fau-it?  what  kind 
of  weather  is  it? 

tendre  [taidr],  to  stretch  out,  ex- 
tend. 

tenir  [taniir],  to  hold,  contain,  be 
contained;  —  d,  to  desire. 

tennis  [tenis],  m.,  tennis. 

tentateur  [tatatoeir],  m.,  tempter; 
adj.,  tempting. 

tenter  [tate],  to  attempt,  tempt. 

terme  [term],  m.,  term. 

terminus  [terminyis],  m.,  terminus. 

terrasse  [teras],  f.,  terrace. 

terre  [teir],  f.,  ground. 

terre-neuve  [te:r  noeiv],  m.,  New- 
foundland dog. 

terrible  [teribl],  terrible. 

tes  [te]  or  [te],  see  ton. 

tete  [tsit],  f.,  head. 

the  [te],  m.,  tea. 

theatre  [teaitr],  m.,  theater;  Theatre 
Frangais,  the  French  national 
theatre  (successor  to  Moli^re's 
theatre). 

Thenardier  [tenardje],  Th^nardier 
a  proper  name. 

tien  [tje],  yours;  le  — ,  yours. 

tiennent  [tjen],  see  tenir. 

tiens  [tje],  welh     (See  tenir.) 


364 


Elements  of  French 


tiers  [tjeir],  m.,  (one)  third. 

tigre  [tigr],  m.,  tiger. 

timbre  poste  [teibr  post],  m.,  post- 
age stamp. 

tirer  [tire],  to  pull,  slioot. 

tiret  [tirs],  m.,  dasli. 

toi  [twa],  you;  toi-meme,  yourself. 

toit  [twa],  m.,  roof. 

toiture  [twatyir],  f.,  roofing. 

tombeau  [t5bo],  m.,  tomb. 

tomber  [t5be],  to  fall. 

ton  [to],  your. 

tenner  [tone],  to  thunder. 

tonton  [tots],  a  meaningless  singing- 
word. 

torpiller  [torpije],  to  torpedo. 

tort  [to:r],  m.,  wrong;  avoir  — ,  to  be 
wrong. 

tot  [to],  soon. 

toucher  [tuje],  to  touch. 

tou jours  [tu5u:r],  always. 

Toulouse  [tuluiz],  f.,  Toulouse,  a 
city  in  France. 

tour  [tu:r],  f.,  tower. 

tour  [tu:r],  m.,  turn,  tour; /aire  le  — 
dcj  to  go  around. 

Touraine  [turen],  f.,  Touraine, 
ancient  province  of  France. 

tourner  [turne],  to  turn. 

tout  [tu],  adj.,  all,  every,  whole; 
adv.,  quite;  —  a  coup,  suddenly; 

—  d  Vheure,  presently;  —  ce  que, 
all  that;  —  de  meme,  all  the  same; 

—  de  suite,  immediately;  —  d^un 
coup,  suddenly;  —  le  monde, 
everybody;  tous  les  deux,  both; 
du  — ,  pas  du  — ,  not  at  all. 

toutefois  [tutfwa],  nevertheless. 

trace  [tras],  f  .^  trace. 

tracer  [trase],  to  trace. 

traduire  [tradqiir],  to  translate. 

tragedie  [trasedi],  f.,  tragedy. 

trahir  [traiir],  to  betray. 

train  [tre],  m.,  train,  confusion; 
en  — ,  in  full  swing;  en  —  de,  in 
the  act  of;  prendre  le  — ,  to  catch 
the  train. 

traite  [trete],  m.,  treaty. 


tramway  [tramwe],'m.,  street  car. 
tranquille    [trakil],    tranquil;   soyez 

— ,  rest  assured, 
transmettre  [trasmetr],  to  transmit, 
transporter  [trasporte],  to  transport, 
travail  [travaij],  m.,  work, 
travailler  [travaje],  to  work, 
travers    [traveir],    m.,   breadth;    d 

— ,  en  —  de,  across. 
traverser  [traverse],  to  cross. 
treize  [treiz],  thirteen. 
trembler  [trable],  to  tremble, 
trente  [tra:t],  thirty, 
tres  [tre],  very, 
tricorne  [trikorn],  m., three-cornered 

hat. 
tringle  [treigl],  f.,  rod. 
trinite  [trinite],  f.,  trinity. 
triomphe  [trioif],  m.,  triumph, 
triste  [trist],  sad. 
tristesse  [tristes],  f.,  sadness. 
trois  [trwa],  three;  —  de  cafe,  three 

cents'   worth  of  coffee   (waiter's 

dialect.) 
troisieme  [trwazjem],  third, 
trompette  [tropet],  f.,  trumpet, 
trone  [trom],  m.,  throne. 
trop  [tro],  too  much,  too. 
trot  [tro],  m.,  trot;  au  — ,  at  a  trot. 
trou  [tru],  m.,  hole. 
troubler  [truble],  to  disturb, 
troupeau  [trupo],  m.,  herd, 
trouver  [truve],  to  find;  se  — ,  to  be 

situated;  to  be. 
truite  [trqit],  f.,  trout, 
tu  [ty],  you. 
tuer  [tqe],  to  kill. 
Tuileries   [tqilri],   f.   pL,    Tuileries. 

(The  palace  of  the  Tuileries,  a 

symbol  of  despotism,  was  burned 

by    an    infuriated    populace    in 

1871.) 
tulipe  [tylip],  f.,  tulip. 
turc  [tyrk],  Turkish. 
Turquie  [tyrki],  f.,  Turkey. 
tyrannie  [tirani],  f.,  tyranny. 


French-English  Vocabulary 


365 


un  [6e],  one,  a,  an. 

uni  [yni],  united. 

uniforme  [yniform],  m.,  uniform. 

unique  [ynik],  only,  sole. 

unite  [ynite],  f.,  unit. 

universite  [yniversite],  f.,  univer- 
sity. 

urgent  [yrsa],  urgent. 

usage  [yza:3],  m.,  use. 

user  [yze],  to  wear  out,  wear  away; 
—  dcj  to  use. 

utile  [ytil],  useful. 


va  [va],  see  aller. 

vache  [vaj*],  f.,  cow. 

vain  [ve],  vain. 

vais  [ve],  see  aller. 

valable  [valabl],  valid. 

valeur  [valoeir],  f.,  value. 

Valjean  [valsa],  a  proper  name. 

vallee  [vale],  f.,  valley. 

valoir  [valwair],  to  be  worth;  —  la 
peine  J  to  be  worth  while;  il  vaut 
mieux,  it  is  better. 

veau  [vo],  m.,  calf. 

veiller  [veje],  to  watch,  be  on  guard. 

Vendome  [vadoim],  Vendome. 
(The  Place  Vendome  was  con- 
structed under  Louis  XIV.) 

vendre  [vaidr],  to  sell. 

vendredi  [vadrodi],  m.,  Friday. 

venger  [vase],  to  avenge. 

vengeur  [vasoeir],  m.,  avenger; 
adj.,  avenging. 

venir  [vaniir],  to  come;  —  de,  to 
have  just. 

vent  [va],  m.,  wind. 

Verdun  [verdoe],  m.,  Verdun,  a  city 
in  France. 

verre  [ve:r],  m.,  glass. 

vers  [veir],  toward. 

Versailles  [versaij],  m.,  Versailles,  a 
suburb  of  Paris. 

vert  [veir],  green. 


vertu  [verty],  f.,  virtue, 
vestibule  [vestibyl],  m.,  vestibule, 
veston  [vest 5],  m.,  sack  coat, 
vetement    [vetma],    m.,    garment; 

pi.,  clothing, 
veuillez     [voeje],     will    you.     (See 

vouloir.) 

viande  [vjaid],  f.,  meat. 

victime  [viktim],  f.,  victim. 

victoire  [viktwair],  f.,  victory. 

victorieux  [viktorj0],  victorious. 

vide  [vid],  empty. 

vie  [vi],  £.,  life,  living. 

vieil  [vJGij],  see  vieux. 

vieillard  [vjejair],  m.,  old  man. 

viendrai  [vjedre],  see  venir. 

vient  [vjs],  see  venir. 

vieux  [vj0],  vieil  [vjeij],  adj.,  old. 

vieux  [vj0],  m.,  old  fellow. 

vigne  [viji],  f.,  vine,  vineyard. 

vilain  [vile],  ugly. 

village  [vila:3],  m.,  village. 

ville  [vil],  f.,  city,  town;  E.V. 
{en  ville)  f  City. 

Villeneuve-sur-Yonne  (vilnceiv  sy:r 
jon],  Villeneuve-sur-Yonne,  a  vil- 
lage in  France. 

vin  [ve],  m.,  wine. 

vingt  [ve],  twenty. 

vingtaine  [veten],  f.,  about  twenty. 

vingtieme  [vetjem],  twentieth. 

vinmes  [veim],  see  venir. 

vint  [ve],  see  venir. 

vis  [vi],  saw.     (See  voir.) 

visage  [viza:3],  m.,  face. 

vis-^-vis  [viz  a  vi],  opposite,  face  to 
face. 

Visconti  [visk5ti],  Visconti,  a  French 
architect. 

vision  [vizj5],  f.,  vision. 

visite  [vizit],  f.,  visit. 

visiter  [vizite],  to  visit,  inspect. 

vit  [vi],  see  vivre,  and  voir. 

vite  [vit],  quickly. 

vivace  [vivas],  vivacious. 


366 


Elements  of  French 


vivre  [viivr],  to  live;  vive  la  France! 
long  live  France! 

vivre  [viivr],  m.,  living;  — s,  pro- 
visions. 

vocabulaire  [vokabyleir],  m.,  vo- 
cabulary. 

voeu  [v0],  m.,  vow,  desire. 

voici  [vwasi],  here  is,  here  are. 

voie  [vwa],  f.,  way. 

voila  [vwala],  there  is,  there  are; 
—  voire  affaire,  that  is  what  you 
are  looking  for;  comme  vous  — 
gentimenthahillef  how  nicely  dress- 
ed you  are! 

voir  [vwair],  to  see. 

voisin  [vwazg],  m.,  neighbor. 

voisine  [vwazin],  f.,  neighbor. 

voiture  [vwaty:r],  f.,  carriage. 

voix  [vwa],  f.,  voice. 

vol  [vol],  m.,  flight;  a  —  d'oiseau, 
from  a  bird's  eye  view. 

volaille  [volaij],  f.,  fowl,  poultry. 

volontiers  [volotje],  willingly. 

vos  [vo],  see  votre. 

Vosges  [vo:3],  f .  pL,  Vosges,  a  range 
of  mountains. 

votre  [votr],  your. 

votre  [voitr],  yours;  le  — ,  yours. 

voudrai  [vudre],  see  vouloir. 

vouloir  [vulwair],  to  wish;  —  dire, 
to  mean;  en  —  a,  to  have  a  grudge 
against;  comme  je  m'en  voulais, 
how  angry  I  was  with  myself; 
vous  voulez  rirCj  you  are  joking; 
que  voulez-vous?  what  could  you 
expect? 


vous  [vu],  you; meme,  yourself 

(intensive) . 
voyage  [vwajaisj,  m.,  trip  (land  or 

sea);  en  — ,  on  the  trip, 
voyager  [vwajase],  to  travel, 
voyageur  [vwaja3oe:r],  m.,  traveler, 
voyons  [vwajo],  come!     (See  voir.) 
vrai  [vre],  true, 
vraiment  [vrema],  truly, 
vu  [vy],  see  voir, 
vue  [vy],  f.,  view, 
vulgairement  [vylgerma];   vulgarly. 

W 

wagon-lit  [vag5  li],  m.,  sleeping  car. 

wagon-restaurant  [vag5  restora], 
m.,  dining  car. 

Washington  [wojinton],  Washing- 
ton. 

Waterloo  [vaterlo],  Waterloo,  a 
village  in  Belgium. 


y  [i],  in  it,  at  it,  to  it,  there,  m  them, 
at  them;  y  a-t-il?  is  there?  are 
there? 

yeux  [j0],  see  ceil. 

Yonne  [jon],  f.,  Yonne,  a  depart- 
ment of  France. 


z*  [z],  a  sound  inserted  to  keep 
vowels  apart  (popular  pronun- 
ciation) . 

Zelma  [zelma],  Zelma,  a  girl's 
name. 


ENGLISH-FRENCH 

(Aspirated  h  is  indicated  thus :  *h) 


a,  an,  un,  m.,  ime,  f . 

abandon,  abandonner. 

abbot,  abbe,  m. 

abdicate,  abdiquer. 

able,  be — ,  pouvoir;  —  to,  k  meme 
de. 

about,  de,  environ,  a  peu  pres, 
presque;  —  twelve,  une  douzaine; 
—  it,  en. 

above,  au-dessus  de,  plus  de  (of 
numbers) . 

academy,  academie,  f. 

accept,  accepter. 

accompagny,  accompagner;  accom- 
panied by,  accompagne  de. 

accomplish,  accomplir. 

accuse,  accuser. 

acquaintance,  connaissance,  f.;  to 
make  the  —  of,  faire  la  connais- 
sance de. 

active,  actif . 

add,  a j outer. 

address,  adresse,  f . 

adjective,  adjectif,  m. 

admire,  admirer. 

advantage,  avantage,  m. 

adverb,  adverbe,  m. 

afraid,  be  — ,  avoir  peur,  craindre. 

after,  apres. 

afternoon,  apres-midi,  m.  or  f. 

afterward,  apres. 

again,  encore. 

against,  contre. 

age,  dge,  m.;  /  am  ten  years  of  — , 
j'ai  dix  ans. 

ago,  11  y  a;  a  little  while  — ,  il  y  a 
peu  de  temps. 

agreement,  accord,  m. 

ahead,  en  avant;  —  of,  devant;  to 
he  — ,  avancer. 

aid,  aide,  f . 


airplane,  aeroplane,  m. 

Albert,  Albert. 

all,  tout;  —  right,  k  la  bonne  heure. 

almost,  environ,  k  peu  pres,  presque. 

alone,  seul. 

Alps,  Alpes,  f.  pi. 

already,  dej^. 

also,  aussi,  encore. 

although,  quoique,  bien  que. 

always,  tou jours. 

America,  Amerique,  f . 

American,  americain. 

amputate,  amputer. 

amputation,  amputation,  f . 

amuse,  amuser;  to  he  — d,  s'amuser. 

amusing,  amusant. 

ancient,  ancien. 

and,  et. 

Andrew,  Andr6. 

angle,  angle,  m. 

animal,  animal,  m. 

Annette,  Annette,  f . 

anniversary,  anniversaire,  m. 

announcement,  avis,  m. 

another,  un  autre  {different) ;  encore 

un  (similar) . 
answer,  repondre. 
any,    du,    etc.;    quelque,    en;  —  of 

them,  en. 
anything,  quelque  chose,   rien;  — 

whatsoever,  quoi  que  ce  soit. 
apostrophe,  apostrophe,  f . 
apple,  pomme,  f . 
April,  avril,  m. 
apron,  tablier,  m. 
aqueduct,  aqueduc,  m. 
Arch  of  Triumph,  Arc  de  Triomphe, 

m. 
are,  see  be. 

aristocracy,  aristocratic,  f . 
arm,  bras,  m. 


367 


368 


Elements  of  French 


Armand,  Armand. 

armistice,  armistice,  m. 

army,  armee,  f . 

arrange,  arranger. 

arrive,  arriver. 

article,  article,  m. 

as,  comme; — for,  quant  a;  —  much 
— ,  autant  que,  tant  que;  —  well 
— ,  aussi  bien  que. 

ask,  — for,  demander  (a). 

assail,  attaquer. 

associate  with,  se  meler  a. 

assured :  to  rest  — ,  etre  tranquille. 

astonish,  ^tenner. 

at,  a;  not  —  all,  (pas)  du  tout;  — 
the  house  of,  chez ;  —  night,  la  nuit. 

Atlantic,  atlantique. 

attack,  attaquer. 

attendant,  ouvreuse,  f . 

attribute,  attribuer. 

August,  aotlt,  m. 

aunt,  tante,  f . 

author,  auteur,  m. 

automobile,  automobile,  m;  go  — 
riding,  se  promener  en  automo- 
bile. 

autumn,  autonme,  m. 

avenue,  avenue,  f . 

away,  absent,  loin;  to  be  a  kilometer 
—  from,  etre  a  un  kilometre  de. 

Ay,  A'i  or  Ay. 

B 

back,  dos,  m. 

bad,  mauvais. 

badly,  mal. 

baggage,  bagages,  m.  pi. 

ball,  balle,  f . 

banana,  banane,  f . 

bank  (of  rivers),  rive,  f. 

barber,  coiffeur,  m. 

base,  base,  f . 

Bastille,  Bastille,  f . 

be,  etre;  —  able  to,  pouvoir,  ^tre  a 
mtoe  de;  —  bad  weather,  faire 
mauvais  (temps);  —  better ^  valoir 


mieux;  se  porter  mieux  (of  health) ; 
— right,  avoir  raison;  —  slow, 
retarder;  —  ten  years  old,  avoir 
dix  ans; —  to,  devoir;  —  well,  se 
porter  bien,  aller  bien;  is  he  not? 
are  they  not?  etc.,  n'est-ce  pas? 

bean,  feve,  f . 

beard,  barbe,  f . 

beat,  battre. 

beautiful,  beau. 

beautifully,  gentiment. 

because,  parce  que. 

become,  devenir. 

bed,  lit,  m;goto  — ,  aller  se  coucher. 

beef,  boeuf,  m. 

before,  avaht  (of  time) ;  devant  (of 
position);  avant  de  +  infinitive; 
avant  que. 

beg,  prier;  /  —  you,  je  vous  en  prie. 

begin,  commencer. 

behind,  derriere;  to  be  — ,  retarder. 

believe,  croire^ 

bell :  the  —  is  rung,  on  sonne. 

belong  to,  appartenir  k,  etre  k, 

below,  au-dessous  de,  sous. 

beneath,  au-dessous  de,  sous. 

beside,  a  cote  de. 

best, adj.,  lemeilleur;  adv.,  le  mieux. 

betray,  trahir. 

better,  adj.,  meilleur;  adv.,  mieux; 
it  is  — ,  il  vaut  mieux. 

between,  entre. 

beyond,  au-del^  de. 

bicycle,  bicyclette,  f . 

big,  gros. 

bill,  note,  f . 

billet,  loger. 

birthday,  fete,  f .,  anniversaire,  m. 

black,  noir. 

blackboard,  tableau  noir,  m. 

block,  rue,  f . 

blood,  sang,  m. 

blow  up,  faire  sauter. 

blue,  bleu. 

body,  corps,  m. 

bomb,  bombe,  f . 


English-French  Vocabulary 


369 


bonnet,  bonnet,  m. 

book,  livre,  m. 

Bordeaux,  Bordeaux,  m. 

both,  tous  les  deux. 

bother,  gener. 

boulevard,  boulevard,  m. 

box,  boite,  f . 

boy,  gargon,  m. 

brave,  coiu'ageux. 

bread,  pain,  m. 

breakfast,  petit  dejeuner,  m. 

breathe,  respirer. 

bridge,  pont,  m. 

bring,  apporter;  —  hack,  rapporter; 

—  upy  monter. 
Brittany,  Bretagne,  f . 
broth,  bouillon,  m. 
brother,  frere,  m. 
brown,  brun. 
brush,  brosse,   f.;  — ing,   coup  de 

brosse,  m. 
brush,  brosser. 

burgomaster,  bourgmestre,  m. 
Burgundy,  Bourgogne,  f . 
burst,  eclater. 
bursting,  ^clat,  m. 
business,  affaires,    f.,    pi.;   to   talk 

— ,  parler  affaires. 
busy,  occupe. 
busy  one's  self,  s'occuper. 
but,  mais. 
butter,  beurre,  m. 
buy,  acheter. 

buzzing,  bourdonnement,  m. 
by,  par,  de,  sur,  en;  —  your  watch, 

a  votre  montre. 


cabbage,  chou,  m. 

cake,  gateau,  m. 

call,  appeler;   be  called,   s'appeler; 

make  a  — ,  faire  (une)  visite. 
call  out,  annoncer,  crier, 
can,  pouvoir. 
canal,  canal,  m. 


cannon,  canon,  m. 

capital,  capitale,  f. 

card,  carte,  f . 

cardinal,  cardinal,  m. 

carry,  porter. 

cat,  chat,  m. 

catch,  attraper;  —  the  train,  prendre 

le  train, 
cause,  cause,  f.;  to  — ,  faire,  causer, 
cease,  cesser, 
celebrated,  celebre. 
cellar,  cave,  f . 
cent,  sou,  m. 
center,  centre,  m. 
centime,  centime,  m. 
centimeter,  centimetre,  m. 
century,  si^cle,  m. 
certainly,  certainement. 
Cevennes,  C^vennes,  f .  pi. 
chair,  chaise,  f . 
chalk,  craie,  f . 
Chamber  of  Deputies,  Chambre  des 

deputes,  f . 
Champagne,  Champagne,  f . 
Channel:  the  English — ,  la  Manche. 
charge :  take  —  of,  se  charger  de. 
Charles,  Charles. 
charming,  charmant. 
charter,  charte,  f . 
chauffeur,  chauffeur,  m. 
check:  keep  —  on,  contrdler. 
cheek,  joue,  f . 
cheese,  fromage,  m. 
cherry,  cerise,  f . 
chicken,  poulet,  m. 
child,  enfant,  m.  or  f . 
chin,  menton,  m. 
chocolate,  chocolat,  m. 
choose,  choisir. 
church,  ^glise,  f . 
cider,  cidre,  m. 
cigar,  cigare,  m. 
city,  ville,  f. 
class,  cleisse,  f . 
close,  fermer. 


370 


Elements  of  French 


clothes,  vetements,  m.  pi. 

coal,  ^houille,  f ,,  charbon  de  terre,m. 

coat:  dress  — ,  habit,  m.;  sack  — , 

veston,  m. 
coffee,  cafe,  m.;  —  with  cream,  cafe 

au  lait. 
coin,  frapper. 
cold,  froid,  m.;  to  he  — ,  avoir  froid; 

to  he  —  weather,  faire  froid. 
color,  couleur,  f. 
column,  colonne,  f . 
comb,  peigne,  m. 
comb,  peigner. 

come,  venir;  —  hack,  revenir. 
comfort,  douceur,  f. 
command,  commander, 
commerce,  commerce,  m. 
commit,  commettre. 
complete,  complet. 
comprehend,  comprendre. 
comrade,  camarade,  m. 
conceal,  cacher;  we  shall  —  nothing 

from  each    other,   nous  ne    nous 

cacherons  rien. 
concert,  concert,  m. 
conductor,  conducteur,  m. 
conquer,  vaincre. 

consideration:  in  — of,  moyennant. 
conspire,  conspirer. 
construct,  construire. 
contented,  content. 
continue,  continuer. 
contrary :  on  the  — ,  au  contrairc; 
convent,  couvent,  m. 
conversation,   conversation,  f.,  en- 

tretien,  m. 
cooked,  cuit.    (See  cuire.) 
cordial,  cordial. 
corridor,  corridor,  m. 
cost,  cotiter. 
couch,  couchette,  f . 
count,  compter. 

country,     campagne,     f.     (as    dis- 
tinguished from  city);    pays,  m. 

(political    division);    in    the   — 

k  la  campagne. 
courage,  courage,  m. 


courageously,  avec  courage. 

cousin,  cousin,  m.;  cousine,  f. 

cow,  vache,  f . 

credence,  creance,  f . 

crime,  crime,  m. 

cross,   croix,  f.;   war  — ,  croix  de 

guerre,  f. 
cross,  traverser. 
crown,  sacrer. 
cruel,  cruel, 
cruelly,  cruellement. 
cry,  crier  (call  out);  pleurer  (weep). 
cuff,  manchette,  f . 
cultivate,  cultiver. 
current:  to  he  — ,  avoir  cours. 
curtain,  rideau,  m. 
customer,  chent,  m. 
cut,  coupe,  f.  (of  clothes), 
cut,  couper. 

D 
damage,  degat,  m. 
Daniel,  Daniel. 

dark,  noir;  it  is  — ,  il  fait  noir. 
date,  date,  f . 
daughter,  fille,  f . 
Dauphin,  Dauphin,  m. 
day,  jour,  m.     (See  §94.) 
dead,  mort. 

deal :  a  great  — ,  beaucoup. 
dealer :  shoe  — ,  marchand  de  chaus- 

sures,  m. 
dear,  cher. 
death,  mort,  f . 
December,  decembre,  m. 
decide,  decider  (de). 
declaration,  declaration,  f. 
deep,  profond. 
defeat,  battre. 
definite,  defini. 
delight,  agrement,  m. 
deUghted,  enchante,  charm^. 
deliver,  delivrer. 
depart,  partir. 
depend,  dependre. 
deputy,  d6put^,  m. 


English-French  Vocabulary 


371 


desire,  desirer,  vouloir. 

despite,  malgr^. 

dessert,  dessert,  m. 

destine,  destiner  (k), 

deuce,  k  deux. 

die,  mourir. 

difficult,  difficile. 

difficulty,  difficulte,  f . 

dig,  creuser. 

dine,  diner. 

dining-room,  salle  a  manger,  f . 

dinner,  diner,  m. 

dishonest,  malhonnete. 

dismal,  triste. 

disorder,  desordre,  m. 

dispose,  disposer. 

distant,  lointain,  adj . ;  loin,  adv. 

disturb,  perdre. 

do,  faire;  —  you?  donH  you?  etc., 

n^est-ce  pas? 
doctor,  docteur,  medecin,  m. 
dog,  chien,  m. 
doll,  poup^e,  f . 
dollar,  dollar,  m. 
Domremy,  Domremy,  m. 
door,  porte,  f . 
doubt,  douter  (de) ;  —  whether y  dou- 

ter  si  (with  indicative). 
downstairs,  en  bas. 
down  there,  la-bas. 
dream,  reve,  m. 
dress,  robe,  f . 
dress,  s'habiller;  nicely  — eJ,  gen- 

timent  habille. 
drink,  boire. 
drive,  conduire,  mener. 
drown,  noyer. 
dry,  sec. 
dumb,  muet. 
during,  pendant. 
duty,  devoir,  m. 

E 
each,   chaque;   —  other ^   Tun   . . . 

Tautre;  they  shake  hands  with  — 

other y  ils  se  donnent  (serrent)  la 

main. 


ear,  oreille,  f . 

early,  de  bonne  heure;  very  — ,  de 

tres  bonne  heure. 
earn,  gagner. 
easily,  facilement. 
east,  est,  m.;  —  o/,  k  Test  de. 
easy,  facile, 
eat,  manger. 
Edmund,  Edmond. 
egg,  oeuf,  m. 

Eiffel  Tower,  tour  Eiffel,  f. 
eight,  huit. 
eighteen,  dix-huit. 
eighty,  quatre-vingts. 
either.  Tun  ou  Tautre;  neg.,  ni  Tun 

ni  Tautre;  conj.,  ou  . . .  ou. 
Elba,  Elbe,  f . 
elegant,  ^l^gant. 
elevator,  ascenseur,  m. 
eleven,  onze. 
embrace,  embrasser. 
emigrant,  ^migr^,  m.,  f. 
emperor,  empereur,  m. 
empty  into,  se  jeter  dans, 
encounter,  rencontre,  f . 
encounter,  rencontrer. 
enemy,  ennemi,  m. 
engineer,  ing^nieur,  m. 
England,  Angleterre,  f . 
English,  anglais;  —  Channel^  Man- 

che,  f . 
enough,  assez;  well  — ,  assez  bien; 

there  is  —  to,  il  y  a  de  quoi. 
enter,  entrer  (dans). 
entire,  entier. 
entirely,  entierement. 
envelope,  enveloppe,  f . 
equivalent,  Equivalent,  m. 
escape,  Echapper  {h). 
especially,  surtout. 
establishment,  Etablissement,  m. 
etc.,  et  caetera,  ainsi  de  suite, 
eternally,  Eternellement. 
even,  meme;  —  2/,  quand  (with  past 

future). 


372 


Elements  of  French 


evening,  soir,  m.;  soiree,  f.;  yester- 
day — ,  hier  soir. 
ever,  jamais, 
every,  tout,  tous  les. 
everybody,  tout  le  monde. 
everything,  tout;  —  that,  tout  ce 

que  (qui). 
ever3rwhere,  par  tout. 
example,  exemple,  m.;  for  — ,  par 

exemple. 
excellent,  excellent, 
except,  excepte. 
excuse,  excuse,  f . 
excuse,  excuser. 
exercise,  exercice,  m. 
exile,  releguer. 
expect,  s'attendre  k]  —  to,  compter, 

esperer. 
expensive,  cher. 
extend,  s'  etendre. 
eye,  ceil,  m. 

F 
fagade,  fagade,  f. 
face,  figure,  f . 
fair,  foire,  f . 
fall,  tomber. 
family,  famille,  f . 
famous,  c^lebre,  illustre. 
fan,   ^ventail,    m.;   —   shaped,    en 

eventail. 
fancy,   fantaisie,   f.;   adj.,    de   fan- 

taisie. 
far,  loin,  ^carte. 
fast,   vite;   to   be   — ,    avancer    (of 

timepieces) . 
father,  pere,  m. 

fear,  peur,  i.;for  —  that,  de  peur  que. 
fear,  avoir  peur,  craindre. 
feast,  festin,  m. 
February,  f^vrier,  m. 
feel,  sentir;  —  cold,  avoir  froid;  / 

—  better,  je  me  sens  mieux. 
fetch,  aller  chercher. 
few:  a — ,  quelques;  peu;  a  — ,  pron., 

quelques-uns. 
fifteen,  quinze. 


fifteenth,  quinzieme. 

fifty,  cinquante. 

fight,  bataille,  f . 

fight,  bataiJler. 

finally,  enfin;  finir  par+  infinitive. 

find,  trouver;  be  found,  se  trouver. 

fine,  beau. 

finger,  doigt,  m. 

finish,  finir. 

first,  premier,  adj.;  d'abord,  adv.; 
arrive  — ,  arriver  les  premiers;  — 
class,  de  premiere  classe;  in  the  — 
place,  d'abord. 

firstly,  premierement. 

fish,  poisson,  m. 

fit,  aller  h;  tenir;  they  do  not  —  my 
foot,  ils  ne  sont  pas  a  mon  pied. 

five,  cinq. 

fix  (the  eyes),  fixer 

flattering,  flatteur. 

flee,  fuir. 

floor,  6tage,  m.  (story) ;  first  — ,  rez- 
de-chauss^e,  m.;  second  — ,  pre- 
mier etage,  m. 

flower,  fleur,  f . 

follow,  suivre. 

fond,  to  be  —  of,  aimer  beaucoup. 

foot,  pied,  m. 

football,  football,  m. 

for,  car,  conj.;  pour,  pendant,  depuis 
(prep.);  il  y  a;  —  example,  par 
exemple;  —  the  purpose  of,  pour. 

forbid,  defendre. 

force, forcer. 

foreigner,  Stranger,  m. 

forget,  oublier. 

fork,  fourchette,  f . 

former,  celui-1^,  ancien. 

fortunate,  heureux. 

fortunately,  heureusement. 

fortune,  fortune,  f . 

forty,  quarante. 

forward!  en  avant! 

four,  quatre. 

fourteen,  quatorze. 

franc,  franc,  m. 


English-French  Vocabulary 


373 


France,  France,  f . 

free,  librc. 

French,  frangais. 

Frenchman,  Frangais,  m. 

fresh,  frais. 

Friday,  vendredi,  m. 

friend,  ami,  m.;  amie,  f. 

from,  de. 

front:  in  — ,  en  avant;  in  —  of, 

devant. 
fruit,  fruit,  m. 
full,  plein,  entier. 
furnish,  meubler. 
future,  futur. 

G 

gain,  gagner. 

game,  jeu,  m. 

garden,  jardin,  m. 

Garonne,  Garonne,  f. 

gather,  r^unir. 

general,  general. 

gentleman,  monsieur,  m. 

German,  allemand. 

Germany,  AUemagne,  f . 

get,  obtenir,  aller  chercher  {fetch)] 
send  to  — ,  envoyer  chercher;  — 
wp,  se  lever. 

girl,  jeune  fille,  f . 

give,  donner;  —  hack,  rendre;  — 
'pleasure,  faire  plaisir. 

glad,  content;  heureux. 

glass,  verre,  m. 

glorious,  glorieux. 

glory,  gloire,  f . 

glove,  gant,  m. 

go,  aller;  —  and  see,  aller  voir;  — 
away,  s'en  aller;  sortir;  —  hack, 
retourner;  rentrer;  —  down,  des- 
cendre;  —  for,  —  after,  aller 
chercher; — forth,  — out  of,  sortir; 
—  to  hed,  aller  se  coucher;  — 
up,  monter. 

God,  Dieu,  m. 
godmother,  marraine,  f. 
godson,  filleul,  m. 
gold,  or,  m. 


good,  bon,  valable(  valid)',  —  morn- 
ing, bonjour;  a  —  many,  beaucoup 
(de). 

good-bye,  au  revoir. 

grammar,  grammaire,  f . 

grateful,  reconnaissant. 

gratification,  agr^ment,  m. 

gray,  gris. 

great,  grand,  gros;  —  deal,  —  many, 
beaucoup. 

green,  vert. 

ground,  terre,  f.;  —  floor,  rez-de- 
chaussee,    m. 

guarantee,  garantir. 

H 

hail,  greler. 

hair,  cheveux,  m.,  pi. 

half,  moitie,  £.;  demi,  adj.;  —  past 

two,  deux  heures  et  demie;  a  — 

hour,  une    demi-heure;  an    hour 

and  a  — ,  une  heure  et  demie. 
hall,  salle,  f.,  city  — ,  Hotel  de  ville, 

m. 
hand,  main;  (of  a  watch)  aiguille,  f. 
handkerchief,  mouchoir,  m. 
happen,  arriver. 
happy,  heureux. 

hard,  dur,  adj.;  fortement,  adv. 
hardly,  k  peine, 
hat,  chapeau,  m. 
have,  avoir;  (in  eating),  prendre, 
he,  il,  lui;  —  is  a  young  man,  c'est 

un  jeune  homme. 
head,  tete,  f . ;  —  ache,  mal  d,  la  tete, 

m. 
health,  sant6,  f. 
hear,  entendre, 
heaven,  ciel,  m. 
heavy, lourd. 
Helen,  Helene. 
help,  aide,  f.;  secours,  m. 
help,  aider;  —  one's  self,  se  servir. 
Henry,  Henri, 
her,  son,  la,  lui,  elle;  hers,  k  elle;  le 

sien;  —  self,  elle-m^me  {intensive) ; 


374 


Elements  of  French 


se    (reflexive);   to    (at) 
chez  elle. 


here,  ici; 
tiens! 


■  IS, 


house, 
are,  voici;  here! 


hers,  see  her. 

herself,  elle-m^me;  se. 

hide,  cacher;  —  one's  self,  se  cacher. 

high,  'haut. 

high-school,  lycee,  m. 

him,  le;  —  self,  lui-meme  (intensive) ; 

se  (reflexive) ;  to  — ,  lui. 
hip-pocket,  poche  revolver,  f . 
his,  son,  le  sien;  a  lui;  at  —  house, 

chez  lui. 
hold,  tenir. 
holiday,  fete,  f . 
home :  at  — ,  k  la  maison;  en  famille; 

at  his  — ,  chez  lui. 
hope,  esperer. 

horse,  cheval,  m.;  —  back,  a  cheval. 
Hortense,  Hortense. 
hospital,  hopital,  m. ;  chief  —  in  city, 

Hotel-Dieu,  m. 
hot,  chaud,  m.;  he  — ,  avoir  chaud; 

be  —  weather,  faire  chaud. 
hotel,  hotel,  m. 
hour,  heure,  f . 
house,  maison;  habitation,  f.;  to,  or 

at  the  —  of,  chez. 
how,  comment;  — far  is  it,  combien 

y    a-t-il?    —    long?    de    quelle 

longueur?      (distance);      depuis 

quand?    (time);    —    much?    — 

many?  combien?  —  old  are  you? 

quel   age    avez-vous?    — !    excL, 

comme! 
however,  cependant. 
hundred,  cent; a6ow^  a — ,  centaine,  f. 
hungry:  to  be  — ,  avoir  faim. 
hurry,  se  dep^cher;  —  up!  d^pechez- 

vous! 
husband,  mari,  m. 

I 

I,  je,  moi. 

idiom,  idiotisme,  m. 

if,  si;  —  you  please,  s'il  vous  platt. 

illustrious,  illustre. 


immediately,  tout  de  suite. 

impolite,  impoli. 

important,  important. 

in,  dans,  en;  de  (after  superlative), 

a;  —  it,  y;  —  the  day  (daytime), 

le  jour, 
inaction,  inaction,  f . 
inattention,  inattention,  f. 
inch,  pouce,  m. 
incredulity,  incredulite,  f. 
incurable,  incurable. 
independence,  independance,  f. 
indicate,  indiquer. 
industry,  Industrie,  f . 
inform,  informer,  renseigner. 
inhabit,  habiter. 
inhabitant,  habitant,  m. 
ink,  encre,  f . 
inn,  auberge,  f . 
innocent,  innocent, 
inspect,  visiter,  inspecter. 
inspector,  controleur,  m. 
institute,  institut,  m. 
institution,  etablissement,  m. 
instruct,  instruire. 
intend,  compter,  esperer. 
intended  to,  part,  adj.,  devant. 
interest,  interet,  m. 
interest,  interesser. 
interesting,  interessant. 
interview,  entretien,  m. 
into,  dans,  en. 
Invalides,    Invalides,    m.    pi.,    or. 

Hotel  des  Invalides,  m.  sing, 
invite,  inviter. 
Ireland,  Irlande,  f . 
iron,  fer,  m. 
is,  see  be. 
island,  ile,  f . 
it,  le,  la,  il,  elle,  ce;  of  —  en;  to  — , 

into  — ,  y. 
Italy,  Italic,  f. 

J 
Jack,  Jacques. 

James,  Jacques. 


English-French  Vocabulary 


375 


Jane,  Jeanne. 

January,  Janvier,  m. 

jaws  (of  an  animal),  gueule,  f. 

Joan,  Jeanne. 

John,  Jean. 

joking:  you  are  — ,  vous  voulez  rire. 

Julia,  Julie. 

Julian,  Julien. 

Julio,  Julio. ' 

July,  juillet,  m. 

June,  juin,  m. 

just:  to  have  — ,  venir  de;  adj.,  juste. 


keep,  tenir,  garder;  —  busy,  s'oc- 

cuper. 
kill,  tuer. 

kilogram,  kilogramme,  m. 
kilometer,  kilometre,  m. 
kind:    what    —    of   weather?    quel 

temps? 
kindly,  bien;  will  you  — ,  voulez- 

vous  bien. 
king,  roi,  m. 
kingdom,  royaume,  m. 
kiss,  embrasser. 
knee,  genou,  m. 
knife,  couteau;  pen — ,  canif,  m. 
knock,  frapper. 
know,    savoir,    connaitre;    you   — , 

vous  savez. 


lack,  manquer;  avoir  besoin  de. 

lady,  dame,  f.;  lady,  f.  (title). 

lake,  lac,  m. 

large,  grand. 

last,  dernier;  —  night,  cette  nuit;  — 

winter,  Thiver  pass6;  at  — ,  enfin; 

next  to  — ,  avant-dernier;  the  — 

time,  la  derniere  fois. 
lastly,  enfin. 
late,  tard;  to  he  — ,  ^tre  en  retard; 

later,  plus  tard. 
Latin,  adj.,  latin. 
latter,  celui-ci. 


laugh,  rire. 

law,  droit,  m.  (as  a  study);  loi,  f. 

lawyer,  avocat,  m. 

lead,  mener,  conduire. 

learn,  apprendre;  learned,  savant. 

least,  le  moindre,  adj.;  le  moins, 
adv. 

leave,  quitter,  laisser,  partir. 

left,  adj.,  gauche. 

leg,  jambe,  f. 

lend,  preter. 

Lent,  careme,  m.;  mid — ,  mi- 
careme,  f. 

less,  moins. 

lesson,  legon,  f . 

lest,  de  peur  que. 

let,  laisser;  —  her  come,  qu'elle 
vienne;  —  us  go,  allons. 

letter,  lettre,  f . 

lettuce,  laitue,  f . 

liberate,  liberer. 

liberator,  liberateur,  m. 

liberatress,  lib^ratrice,  f. 

liberty,  liberte,  f. 

library,  bibliotheque,  f . 

lie,  etre  couche. 

lie  down,  se  coucher. 

life,  vie,  f. 

light,  lumi^re,  f.;  street  -^,  reverbdre, 
m. 

light,  ^clairer,  allumer. 

like,  aimer;  —  better,  aimer  mieux. 

like,  comme;  en;  —  a  fan,  en  6ven- 
tail. 

Lille,  Lille,  f . 

line,  mot,  m.  •  (word) ;  stand  in  -  — , 
faire  la  queue. 

listen  (to),  ^couter. 

little,  petit,  adj.;  peu,  adv.;  a  — ,  un 
peu. 

live,  vivre;  —  in,  demeurer,  habiter. 

living,  vie,  f . 

London,  Londres,  m. 

long,  long,  adj.;  —  enough,  assez 
longtemps;  (a)  —  time,  long- 
temps;  (a)  longer  time,  plus  long- 


376 


Elements  of  French 


temps;  how  — ,  de  quelle  lon- 
gueur (of  distance) ;  depuis  quand 
(of  time);  to  be  ten  meters  — , 
avoir  dix  metres  de  long(ueur). 

longer:  no  — ,  ne  .  .  .  plus. 

look  (at),  regarder;  — for,  chercher; 
—  out,  faire  attention;  —  out 
upony  donner  sur. 

lord,  seigneur,  m. 

Lorraine,  Lorraine,  f . 

lose,  perdre. 

love,  amour,  m. 

love,  aimer. 

low,  bas. 

lower,  baisser;  adj.,  plus  bas. 

lunch,  dejeuner,  m. 

lunch:  take  — ,  dejeuner. 

Lyons,  Lyon,  m. 

M 

madam,  madame,  f. 

Madeleine,  Madeleine,  f. 

madman,  fou,  m. 

magnificent,  magnifique. 

make,  faire. 

man,  homme,  m. 

many,   beaucoup    (de);    —   others, 

bien  d'autres;  how  — ,   combien 

(de). 
march,  marcher. 
March,  mars,  m. 
Margaret,  Marguerite, 
mark,  marquer  (of  time) . 
market,  *halle,  f.;  — place,  place  du 

marche,  f. 
marriage,  mariage,  m. 
marry,  epouser;  se  marier  avec;  ask 

to  — ,  demander  en  mariage;  be 

married,  se  marier. 
Marseilles,  Marseille,  f. 
Mary,  Marie, 
master,  seigneur,  m. 
May,  mai,  m. 
may,  pouvoir. 

me,  me;  to  — ,  me;  moi,  a  moi. 
meal,  repas,  m. 


meat,  viande,  f. 

Mediterranean,  Mediterranee,  f. 
meet,  rencontrer,  aboutir  a; — again, 

(se)  retrouver. 
melancholy,    melancolie,    f.;    adj., 

melancolique. 
member,  membre,  m. 
mention,  mentionner;  don't  —  it,  il 

n'y  a  pas  de  quoi. 
meter,  metre,  m. 
Metro,  or  Metropolitan,  Metro,  or 

Metropolitain,  m. 
Milady,  milady,  f . 
mild,  doux. 
mile,  mille  anglais,  m. 
milk,  lait,  m. 
million,  million,  m. 
mine,  mine,  f. 
mine,  le  mien;  a  moi. 
minute,  minute,  f . 
misfortune,  malheur,  m. 
miss,  mademoiselle,  f . 
miss,  manquer. 
mission,  mission,  f. 
mister,  monsieur,  m. 
Moliere,  Moliere. 
Monday,  lundi,  m. 

money,    argent,    m.;    paper-money, 

papier-monnaie,  m. 
month,  mois,  m. 
monument,  monument,  m. 
more,  plus. 
morning,  matin,  m.;  good  — ,  bon- 

jour;  in  the  — ,  dans  la  matinee; 

nine  o'clock  in  the  — ,  neuf  heures 

du  matin. 
most,  le  plus,  adv.;  la  plupart,  adj. 
mother,  mere,  f . 
mountain,  montagne,  f. 
mouth,  bouche,  f . 
Mr.,  see  mister. 

much,  beaucoup  (de);  —  more, 
bien  plus;  as  —  as,  autant  que; 
as  —  as  possible,  autant  que  pos- 
sible; how  — ,  combien  (de);  so 
— ,  tant  (de);  too  — ,  trop  (de). 


English-French  Vocabulary 


377 


museum,  musee,  m. 
must,  devoir,  falloir;  —  one?  faut-il? 
my,  mon;  —  self,  moi-meme   {in- 
tensive)) me  {reflexive). 

N 

name,  nom,   m.;  what  is  his  — ? 

comment  s'appelle-t-il? 
name,  nommer;  my  father  is  — d, 

mon  pere  s'appelle. 
Napoleon,  Napoleon. 
national,  national. 
near,  pr^s,  pres  de,  aupres  de;/rom 

50  — ,  de  si  pres. 
nearly,  presque,  a  peu  pres,  environ. 
necessary,  necessaire;  to  be  — ,  fal- 
loir. 
neck,  cou,  m. 
neck-tie,  cravate,  f. 
need,  avoir  besoin  de. 
needy,  pauvre. 
neglect,  negliger. 
neighbor,  voisin,  m. ;  voisine,  f . 
neighborhood,   environs,   m.   pi. 
neither  .  .  .  nor,  ni  .  .  .  ni. 
never,  jamais,  ne  .  .  .  jamais. 
new,  neuf,  nouveau;  newly  made, 

neuf,  nouveau. 
New  York,  New- York,  f . 
news,  nouvelles,  f.,  pi. 
newspaper,  journal,  m. 
next,  prochain,  suivant;  —  to  last, 

avant-dernier. 
nicely,  gentiment. 
nickel,  nickel,  m. 

night,  nuit,  f.;  at  — ,  nights,  la  nuit. 
nine,  neuf. 

ninety,  quatre-vingt-dix. 
no,  non;  he  has  — ,  il  n'a  pas  de;  — 

longer,  ne  .  .  .  plus. 
nobody,  personne,  ne  .  .  .  personne. 
normal,  normal. 
Normandy,  Normandie,  f. 
north,  nord,  m..  North  Sea,  Mer  du 

Nord,  f. 
northeast,  nord-est,  m. 


nose,  nez,  m. 

not,  pas,  ne  .  .  .  pas;  —  at  all,  (pas) 
du  tout; — until,  ne  .  .  .  que;  is  he 
— ?  do  they  — ?  etc.,  n'est-ce  pas? 

nothing,  rien,  ne  .  .  .  rien. 

Notre  Dame,  Notre  Dame,  f . 

November,  novembre,  m. 

now,  maintenant. 

number,  num^ro,  nombre,  m. 

numerous,  nombreux. 


object,  objet,  m. 

obtain,  obtenir. 

occupy  one*s  self,  s'occuper  (de). 

ocean,  ocean,  m, 

o'clock,  heure,  f.;  it  is  ten  — ,  il  est 

dix  heures. 
October,  octobre,  m. 
of,  de;  —  it,  —  them,  en. 
office,  bureau,  m. 
often,  sou  vent. 
old,  vieux ;  how  —  are  you?  quel  age 

avez-vous?   to   be   ten   years   — , 

avoir  dix  ans. 
older,  plus  age. 
omelet,  omelette,  f. 
omnibus,  omnibus,  m. 
on,  sur;  —  it,  y;  —  time,  k  I'heure. 
once,  une  fois;  at  — ,  tout  de  suite; 

—  more,  encore  une  fois. 
one,  un;  —  another,  Tun  .  .  .  I'autre; 

the  —  who,  celui  qui. 
only,  adj.,  seul;  unique;  adv.,  seule- 

ment;  ne  .  .  .  que. 
open,  adj.,  ouvert. 
open,  ouvrir;  —  on  the  street,  donner 

sur  la  rue. 
opera,  opera,  m.;  —  glass,  lorgnette, 

f . ;  —  house,  Op^ra,  m. 
or,  ou. 
orchestra  seat,  fauteuil  d'orchestre, 

m. 
order,  commander. 
order:  in  —  to,  pour;  in  —  thai, 

pour  que,  afin  que. 


378 


Elements  of  French 


ordinarily,  ordinairement. 

Orleans,  Orleans,  m.,  f. 

other,  autre. 

ought,  devoir. 

our,  notre;  — selves,  nous-memes 
(intensive);  nous  (reflexive). 

ours,  le  notre;  a  nous. 

out  of,  hors  de;  —  doors,  dehors;  — 
sight,  a  perte  de  vue. 

over,  au-dessus  de;  plus  de  (of  num- 
bers) . 

overcoat,  pardessus,  m. 

own,  propre. 

ox,  boeuf,  m. 


pair,  paire,  f . 

palace,  palais,  m. 

paper,  papier,  m.;  news — ,  journal, 

m.;  —  money,  papier-monnaie,  m. 
parent,  parent,  m. 
Paris,  Paris,  m. 
Parisian,  parisien. 
park,  pare,  m. 
part,  partie,  f.;  on  the  —  of,  de  la 

part  de. 
particularly,  particuUerement. 
pass,  passer, 
past,  passe,  m.;  half  —  two,  deux 

heures  et  demie. 
patient,  client,  m. 
Paul,  Paul, 
pay  (for),  payer. 
pea,  pois,  m. 

peace,  paix,  f.;in  —  time,  en  temps 

de  paix. 
peach,  peche,  f . 
pear,  poire,  f . 
peasant,  paysan,  m. 
pen,    plume,    f.;    — holder,    porte- 

plume,  m. 
pencil,  crayon,  m. 
penetrate,  penetrer  (dans). 
pen-holder,  porte-plume,  m. 
pen-knife,  canif,  m. 
people,  monde,  m.;  gens,  m.  or  f.  pi. 


perfectly,  parfaitement;  —  straight, 

tout  droit, 
performance,  representation,  f . 
perfume,  parfum,  m. 
perhaps,  peut-etre. 
permit,  permettre. 
Peter,  Pierre. 
Philip,  Philippe, 
picture,  tableau,  m. 
piece,  piece,  f.;  morceau,  m. 
pierce,  percer. 
pit,  parterre,  m. 
place,  place,  f.;  lieu,  endroit,  m.;  to 

take  — ,  avoir  lieu;  in  your  — ,  k 

votre    place;    in    the    first    — , 

d'abord. 
plan,  dessiner. 
plate,  assiette,  f . 
play,  spectacle,  m.;  piece,  f. 
play,  jouer  (k). 
please,  plaire  (a) ;  if  you  — ,  s'il  vous 

plait;  —  forward,  priere  de  faire 

suivre. 
pleased,  content, 
pleasure,  plaisir,  m. 
plenty,  assez  (de). 
plunge,  plonger,  se  jeter. 
pocket,  poche,  f. 
pocketbook,  portefeuille,  m. 
point,  point,  m. 
polytechnic,  poly  technique. 
poor,  pauvre;  —  kind  of,  triste. 
poorly,  mal. 

population,  population,  f. 
pork,  pore,  m. 
portfolio,  portefeuille,  m. 
position,  position,  f . 
possible,  possible;  it  is  — ,  il  se  pent. 
post-card,  carte  postale,  f . 
postman,  facteur,  m. 
potato,  pomme  de  terre,  f . 
poultry,  volaille,  f . 
pound,  livre,  f . 
pray,  prier. 
precise,  precis, 
precisely,  precisement. 


English-French  Vocabulary 


379 


prefer,  pr^f^rer,  aimer  mieux;  to  — 

tOf  aimer  mieux  que. 
prepare,  preparer, 
present,  present, 
presently,  tout  k  Theure. 
pretend,  pretendre. 
prettily,  joliment. 
pretty,  adj.,  joli;  adv.,  assez. 
price,  prix,  m. 
principal,  principal, 
principally,  principal ement. 
prison,  prison,  f . 
prisoner,  prisonnier,  m. 
probable,  probable, 
probably,  probablement. 
professor,  professeur,  m. 
profit,  profiter. 
program,  programme,  m. 
promenade,  promenade,  f . 
promise,  promettre. 
pronounce,  prononcer. 
proprietor,  propri^taire,  m. 
protect,  garantir. 
protest,  reclamation,  f . 

provisions,  provisions,  f.  pi.;  vivres, 
m.  pi. 

public,  public. 

punish,  punir. 

pupil,  ^l^ve,  m.  or  f. 

purple,  pourpre. 

purse,  porte-monnaie,  m. 

put,  mettre;  —  on,  mettre;  /  —  on, 

je  mets. 
P3rrenees,  Pyr^n^es,  f.  pi. 


quarter,  quart,  m.  (a  fourth  part) ; 
quartier,  m.  (a  ward,  or  district). 
queen,  reine,  f . 
quickly,  vite. 

R 

radiate,  rayonner. 
railroad,  chemin  de  fer,  m. 
rain,  pleuvoir;  it  — s,  il  pleut. 


raise,  lever;  Clever  (of  live  stock) 

rapidly,  vite. 

rare,  rare. 

rather,   plut6t,    assez;    I    had   — , 

j'aimerais  mieux. 
razor,  rasoir,  m. 
read,  lire;  —  the  lesson,   lisez   la 

legon. 
ready,  servi  (of  meals) ;  to  make  — , 

preparer, 
really,  vraiment. 
rebound,  rebondir. 
receive,  recevoir.     (P.  part.,  regu.) 
recent,  recent,  nouveau;  most  — , 

dernier, 
recently,  recemment. 
red,  rouge. 

reduction,  reduction,  f. 
refugee,  emigre,  m. 
refuse,  refuser, 
regiment,  regiment,  m. 
regret,  regretter. 
relate,  raconter. 
relative,  parent,  m. 
remain,  rester. 

remember,  se  souvenir  de;  it  is  nec- 
essary to  — ,  il  faut  savoir. 
remembrance,  souvenir,  m. 
remoxmt,  remonter. 
repair,  racommoder. 
reply,  repondre. 
reservation,  location,  f. 
reserve,  faire  reserver;  prendre  en 

location, 
resist,  resister. 
rest,  se  reposer;  —  assured,  soyez 

tranquille. 
return,  retour,  m. 
return,  revenir,  retourner,  rentrer, 

rendre  (give  back) . 
revive,  ranimer. 
revolution,  revolution,  f . 
Rheims,  Reims,  f. 
Rhone,  Rhone,   m. 
rich,  riche. 


380 


Elements  of  French 


ride:  go  for,  or  take,  a  — ,  aller  se 
promener;  go  automobile  riding, 
aller  se  promener  en  automobile; 
go  horseback  riding,  aller  a  cheval. 

right,  droit,  m.;  to  be  — ,  avoir 
raison;  adj.,  droit;  to  be  on  the  — , 
etre  k  droite;  your  watch  is  — , 
votre  montre  est  exacte. 

ring,  sonner. 

rise,  se  lever. 

river,  fleuve,  m. 

road,  chemin,  m. 

roof,  toit,  m. 

room,  salle;  chambre,  f.;  furnished 
— ,  chambre  meubJee. 

round,  rond;  —  trip  ticket,  billet 
d'aller  et  retour,  ni. 

rule,  regie,  f. 

ruler,,  regie,  f. 

run,  courir;  —  into,  aboutir  a. 

rush:  to  —  up,  accourir;  to  —  to  the 
head  (of  blood),  etre  k  la  tete. 


sack  coat,   veston,   m.;   sack  suit, 

complet  veston,  m. 
sad,  triste. 
safety,  s<iret6,  f . ;  —  razor,  rasoir  de 

s\iret6,  m. 
sailor,  marin;  matelot,  m. 
St.  Cloud,  Saint-Cloud,  m. 
St.  Helena,  Sainte-Hel^ne,  f. 
salad,  salade,  f . 
same,  meme. 
Saturday,  samedi,  m. 
save,  sauver. 
say,  dire, 
scarcely,    guere;    ne  .  .  .  gu^re;     a 

peine. 
school,  ^cole;  at  — ,  k  Fecole. 
scientific,  scientifique. 
score,  points,  m.  pi. 
sea,  mer,  f . 
season,  saison,  f . 
seat,  place,  f . 
seated,  assis;  be  — ,  asseyez-vous. 


second,  second;  deuxieme;  — floor, 

premier  etage,  m. 
section,  section,  f . 
see,  voir;  —  again,  revoir. 
seem,  sembler. 
seen,  vu.     (See  voir.) 
sees,  voit.     (See  voir.) 
Seine,  Seine,  f. 
seize,  saisir. 

self,  see  himself,  herself,  etc. 
sell,  vendre. 
send,    envoyer;    —   after,    —  for, 

envoyer  chercher. 
September,  septembre,  m. 
servant,  domestique,  m. 
service,  service,  m. 
set  out,  partir. 
seven,  sept. 
seventeen,  dix-sept. 
several,  plusieurs. 
severely:  —  wounded,  grand  blesse. 
shake :  —  hands,  serrer  la  main, 
shall  I  not?  etc.,  n'est-ce  pas? 
shape,  forme,  f . 
sharp,  precis  (of  time). 
she,  elle. 

sheep,  mouton,  m. 
shell,  obus,  m. 
shoe,  Soulier,  m.;  —  dealer,  mar- 

chand  de  chaussures,  m. 
shop,  boutique,  f . 
short,  court;  a  —  time  ago,  il  n'y  a 

pas  longtemps;  in  — ,  enfin. 
should,  sign  of  past  future. 
show,  montrer;  —  me,  montrez-moi; 

—  one  in,  faire  entrer. 
side,  cote,  m. ;  on  this  — ,  de  ce  cote, 
siege,  siege,  m. 
silver,  argent,  m. 
since,    depuis    (of   time);    puisque 

(because) . 
single,  seul. 
sir,  monsieur,  m. 
sister,  soeur,  f. 
sit  down,  s'asseoir;  sits  down  to  the 

table,  se  met  a  table. 


English-French  Vocabulary 


381 


situate,  situer;  to  he  — d,  se  trouver. 

six,  six. 

sixteen,  seize. 

sixty,  soixante. 

skate,  patiner. 

sleep,  dormir. 

sleeping-car,  wagon-lit,  m. 

sleepy :  he  — ,  avoir  sommeil. 

slow:  he  — ,  retarder  (of  timepieces). 

small,  petit. 

smoke,  fumer. 

snow,  neige,  f . 

snow,  neiger. 

so,  ainsi,  si;  —  much,  —  many,  tant; 

—  near,  si  pres. 
soap,  savon,  m. 
soldier,  soldat,  m. 
some,  adj.,  de   +  definite  article; 

quelque;  en. 
some  (one),  pron.,  quelqu'un. 
something,  quelque  chose,  m. 
son,  fils,  m. 

Sorbonne,  Sorbonne,  f. 
sore:  —  throat,  mal  a  la  gorge,  m. 
sort,  espece,  f . 
sou,  sou,  m. 

soup,  potage,  m.,  soupe,  f. 
south,  sud,  midi,  m. 
Spain,  Espagne,  f . 
speak,  parler;  —  a  few  words,  pro- 

noncer  quelques  paroles. 
spend,  passer  (of  time). 
spirit,  esprit,  m. 
spite:  in  —  of,  malgre. 
spoon,  cuiller,  f . 
spring,  printemps,  m.;  in  the  — ,  au 

printemps. 
square,  place,  f . 
squarely,  carrement. 
stairs,   escalier,    m.;    go   down   — , 

descendre  (I'escalier). 
stamp,  timbre,  m. 
stand,  rester  debout;   —  in  line, 

faire  la  queue, 
standing,  debout. 
stare  at,  fixer. 


start,  partir  (set  out);  commencer 

(begin). 
state,  ^tat,  m. 
station,  station,  f.;  —  master,  chef 

de  gare,  m. 
stay,  rester. 
steel,  acier,  m. 
still,    cependant    {however))   encore 

{yet)',  toujours  {always). 
stop,  s'arreter;  cesser, 
store,  magasin,  m.;  boutique,  f. 
storming,  prise,  f . 
story,  histoire,  f . 
straight,   droit;   perfectly  — ,    tout 

droit, 
stranger,  stranger,  m. 
street,  rue,  f . 

street  car: line,  tramway,  m. 

street  light,  see  light. 

struggle,  lutte,  f . 

struggle,  lutter. 

student,  etudiant,  m. 

study,  etudier. 

style,  mode,  f . 

stylish,  a  la  mode;  616gant. 

succeed,  r^ussir  {k). 

such  a,  un  tel. 

suit,  complet,  m.;  sack  — ,  complet 

veston,  m. 
summer,  6t6,  m.;  in  — ,  en  6t6. 
Sunday,  dimanche,  m. 
superior,  superieur. 
supplement,  supplement,  m. 
sure,  stir. 

surely,  bien  stir,  stirement. 
swim,  nager, 
Switzerland,  Suisse,  f. 
system,  r^seau,  m. 


table,  table,  f. 

tail,  queue,  f. 

tailor,  tailleur,  m. 

take,  prendre;  mener;  —  a  seat, 
s'asseoir;  —  away,  emmener;  — 
back,  reprendre;  —  care,  prendre 


382 


Elements  of  French 


garde;  —  charge  of,  se  charger  de; 

—  place,  avoir  lieu;  —  up,  monter 
(of  baggage). 

talk,  parler,  causer. 

tall,  grand. 

teacher,  professeur,  maitre,  m. 

telegraph,  telegraphe,  m. 

tell,  dire  (p.  part,  dit) ;  raconter. 

tempter,  tentateur,  m. 

tempting,  tentateur. 

ten,  dix. 

tennis,  tennis,  m.;  play  — ,  jouer  au 

tennis, 
terminal  point,  point  terminus,  m. 
than,  que,  de  (before  numerals) . 
thank,  remercier;  — for,  remercier 

de. 
thank  you,   merci;  —  very  much, 

merci  bien. 
that,  qui,  que,  ce,  cela,  celui  (-la); 

—  is  why,  voila  pourquoi;  -;-  one, 
celui-la. 

the,  le. 

theater,  theatre,  m. 

theatrical:  columns  for  —  announce- 
ments, colonnes  d'affichage,  f.  pi. 

their,  leur. 

theirs,  le  leur,  a  eux. 

them,  les,  eux;  of  — ,  en;  to  — ,  leur, 
a  eux. 

themselves,  eux-memes  (intensive); 
se  (reflexive). 

then,  puis,  alors. 

there,  la;  y;  —  is,  —  are,  il  y  a; 
voila;  down  — ,  la-bas. 

therefore,  par  consequent. 

they,  ils,  elles,  on;  there  —  are,  les 
voila. 

thine,  le  tien,  a  toi. 

thing,  chose,  f.;  — s,  effets,  m.  pi. 

think,  penser;  —  of,  penser  de  (of 
opinion);  penser  a  (of  recollec- 
tion) . 

third  floor,  deuxidme  6tage,  m. 

thirsty:  be  — ,  avoir  soif. 

thirteen,  treize. 

thirty,  trente. 


this,  ce,  ceci,  celui-ci,  ce  .  .  .  -ci. 

those  who,  ceux  qui. 

though,  bien  que,  quoique. 

thousand,  adj.,  mille. 

thousand,  mille,  millier,  m. 

three,  trois. 

through,  par. 

throw,  Jeter. 

thumb,  pouce,  m. 

Thursday,  jeudi,  m. 

thus,  ainsi. 

thy,  ton. 

ticket,  billet,  m.;  —  window,  guichet, 

m. 
time,  fois,  f.  (occasion);  temps,  m.; 

at  all  — s,  tou jours;  at  the  same  — , 

au  meme  temps  ;/rom  —  to  — ,  de 

temps  en  temps;  on  — ,  a  Theure; 

the  first  — ,  la  premiere  fois;  what 

—  (of  day)  is  it?  quelle  heure  est- 

il? 
tip,  pourboire,  m. 
to,  a,  en,  pour,  chez. 
tobacco,  tabac,  m.;  — shop,  bureau 

de  tabac,  m. 
today,  aujourd'hui. 
together,  ensemble. 
tomb,  tombeau,  m. 
tomorrow,  demain. 
too,  aussi;  —  much,  —  many,  trop 

(de). 
tooth,  dent,  f.;  —  ache,  mal  aux 

dents,  m. 
top  (of  bus  or  street  car),  imp^riale,  f . 
touch,  toucher. 
Touraine,  Touraine,  f . 
towel,  serviette,  f . 
tower,  tour,  f . 
town,  ville,  f.;  —  hall,  hotel  de  ville, 

m. 
tragedy,  tragedie,  f . 
train,  train,  m. ;  catch  the  — ,  prendre 

le  train, 
tramway,  tramway,  m. 
transport,  transporter, 
traverse,  traverser. 
trip,  voyage,  m. 


English-French  Vocabulary 


383 


triumph,  triomphe,  m. 

trousers,  pantalon,  m. 

true,  vrai. 

try,  essayer,  tdcher;  —  to,  essayer  de. 

Tuesday,  mardi,  m. 

twelve,  douze. 

twenty,  vingt. 

twice,  deux  fois. 

two,  deux. 

U 
ugly,  vilain. 
umbrella,  parapluie,  m. 
tmcle,  oncle,  m. 
under,  sous,  au-dessous  de. 
undergo,  subir. 
understand,  comprendre. 
undoubtedly,  indubitablement. 
unfortunate,  malheureux. 
unfortunately,  malheureusement. 
unhappy,  malheureux. 
imiform,  uniforme,  m. 
united,  uni;    United  States,  Etats- 

Unis,  m.  pi. 
until,  jusqu'^  ce  que;  not  — ,  ne  .  .  . 

que. 
upon,  sur. 
upper,  sup^rieur. 
us,  nous. 

use,  user  de,  se  servu*  (de). 
used  to,  accoutume  a;  he  used  to 

think,  11  pensait. 
useful,  utile, 
useless,  inutile, 
usher,  huissier,  m. 
usually,  ordinairement. 


valid,  valable. 

valley,  valine,  f . 

value,  valeur,  f . 

vegetable,  legume,  m. 

very,    tr^s,    fort,    bien;    —   much, 

beaucoup. 
vest,  gilet,  m. 


vicinity,  environs,  m.  pi. 
village,  village,  m. 
vineyard,  vigne,  f . 
vision,,  vision,  illusion,  f. 
visit,  visiter. 

visiting  card,  carte  de  visite,  f . 
voice,  voix,  f . 
Vosges,  Vosges,  f .  pi. 

W 
wag,  i'emuer. 
wait  (for),  attendre. 
waiter,  gargon,  m. 
want,  vouloir,  desirer. 
war,  guerre,  f.;  —  cross,  croix  de 

guerre,  f . 
ward,  arrondissement,  m. 
warm,  chaud;  to  he  — ,  avoir  chaud; 

to  be  —  weather,  faire  chaud. 
warn,  avertir. 
wash,  laver,  se  laver. 
watch,  montre,  f . 
water,  eau,  f . 
way,  chemin,  m.;  in  this  — ,  de  cette 

fagon. 
we,  nous. 

wear,  porter;  —  away,  user, 
weather,  temps,  m. ;  it  is  fine  — ,  11 

fait  beau. 
Wednesday,  mercredl,  m. 
week,  semalne,  f.;  a  — from  today, 

(d)^aujourd'hul  en  huit. 
welcome,  accuell,  m.;  he  — ,  etre  le 

blenvenu. 
well,  blen;  —  enough,  assez  bien;  as 

—  as,  aussl  blen  que;  to  he  — ,  se 

porter  blen;  to  feel  — ,  se  sentlr 

blen. 
west,  ouest,  m. 
what,  que,  quoi,  ce  qui,  ce  que,  quel, 

qu'est-ce  que?  of  —  shape?  de 

quelle  forme?  —  is  it?  qu'est-ce 

que  c'est? 
whatever,  quelque  .  .  .  que. 
whatsoever:  anything  — ,  quol  que 

ce  solt. 
when,  quand. 


384 


Elements  of  French 


where,  oi^;  jusqu'oil. 

whether,  si. 

which,   que,   qui,    ce   que,    ce   qui, 

lequel,  quel;  of  — ,  dont. 
while,  tandis  que,  pendant  que,  en; 

a  little  —  ago,  il  y  a  peu  de  temps; 

a  —  ago,  il  y  a  quelque  temps, 
whistle,  siffler. 
white,  blanc. 
who,  qui,  qui  est-ce  que,  qui  est-ce 

qui;  of — m,  dont. 
whoever  (he  may  be),  qui  que  ce 

soit. 
whole,  entier,  tout, 
whose,  de  qui,  a  qui,  dont. 
why,  pourquoi. 
wide,   large;  to  he  five  meters  — , 

avoir  cinq  metres  de  large, 
wife,  femme,  f . 
will,  sign  of  the  future;  vouloir;  — 

you  not?  etc.,  n'est-ce  pas? 
willingly,  volontiers. 
win,  gagner;  —  back,  reprendre. 
wind,  remonter. 
window,  fen^tre,  f.;  ticket  — ,  gui- 

chet,  m. 
wine,  vin,  m. 

winter,  hiver,  m.;  in  — ,  en  hiver. 
wish,  d^sirer,  vouloir. 
with,  avec;  coffee  —  milk,  cafe  au 

lait. 
within,  dans;  —  doors,  k  la  maison, 

chez  soi,  au-dedans  (inside) . 
without,  sans,  dehors  (outside), 
woman,  femme,  f.;  —  usher,  ouv- 

reuse,  f . 


wood,  woods,  hois,  m. 

wool,  laine,  f. 

word,  mot,  m.;  parole,  f. 

work,  travail,  m. 

work,  travailler. 

world,  monde,  m. 

worse,  pire,  pis. 

worst,  le  pire,  le  pis. 

worth :^o  he  ( — while),  valoir  lapeine; 

to  he  —  reading,  valoir  la  peine 

d'etre  lu. 
worthy,  digne. 
would,  sign  of  past  future. 
wounded,  bless^;  severely  — ,  grand 

blesse,  m. 
wretched,  pauvre. 
write,  ecrire.     (P.  part.,  ^crit.) 
wrong:  to  he  — ,  avoir  tort. 


year,  an,  m.;  ann^e,  f. 

yellow,  jaune. 

yes,  oui,  si. 

yesterday,    hier;    —   evening,    hier 

soir;  —  morning,  hier  matin. 
yet,  encore,  cependant;  not  — ,  pas 

encore. 
yonder,  Ih,  1^-bas. 
you,  vous,  tu. 
young,  jeune. 
your,  votre,  ton;  — self,  vous-meme 

(intensive) ;  vous  (reflexive) . 
yours,  le  votre,  le  tien,  k  vous,  a  toi; 

a  friend  of  — ,  un  de  vos  amis. 


INDEX 


(The  numbers  refer  to  articles,  unless  otherwise  indicated,) 


k,  with  lire  to  denote  possession,  79; 
176;  no  contractions  with  pronoun 
forms,  80;  used  with  place  names, 
105;  272;  denoting  limit  of  motion, 
160 ;  278 ;  before  dependent  infinitive, 
208;  329;  in  prepositional  phrases, 
271;  denoting  characteristic,  272, 
/,  1;  with  qui,  291;  idiomatic  with 
verbs,  329,  a. 

about,  272,  a. 

accents,  4,  c;  stress,  6. 

addition.  Lessons  22;  38. 

adjectives,  see  demonstratives,  inter- 
rogatives,  possessives,  etc.;  agree- 
ment, 67;  245;  position,  67,  c;  109; 
247-250;  irregular  feminine,  68;  in- 
terrogative, 89 ;  two  forms  in  mascu- 
line, 110;  244;  with  gens,  230,  h; 
comparison,  123-125;  article  used 
for,  136;  orthographical  changes, 
243;  244;  different  meanings  ac- 
cording to  position,  250 ;  as  adverbs, 
253;  plural,  ste  number. 

adverbs,  of  quantity,  118;  from  ad- 
jectives, 121;  122;  251-253;  regular 
comparison,  123;  124;  irregular 
comparison,  125;  255;  adjectives  as 
adverbs,  253;  position,  256;  nega- 
tive, 257-262;  adverbial  expres- 
sions, 254;  numeral  adverbs,  268; 
distinctions  in  use,  263. 

afin  que  +  subjunctive,  202,  f ;  324. 

after,  207,  a. 

age,  103. 

aller,  97;  +  infinitive,  273,  a;  s*en 
aller,  155. 

alphabet,  4;  names  of  letters,  4;  pro- 
nunciation, 4. 

k  moins  que  .  .  .  ne,  324. 

among,  272,  b. 

and,  not  translated,  273,  a. 

apostrophe,  5,  c. 

apposition,  nouns  in.  Lesson  51,  note; 
212. 

apres  +  infinitive,  207^  a. 


article,  see  definite  and  indefinite 
article;  repetition  of,  58;  used  dis- 
tributively,  100;  239;  in  general  or 
abstract  sense,  106;  omitted,  page 
114,  note  168;  after  certain  verbs 
and  adjectives  +  de.  Lesson  73, 
note;  237;  with  nouns  in  apposition, 
212;  omitted  in  certain  expressions, 
240. 

attendant,  en  .  .  .  que  -f-  subjunc- 
tive, 324. 

au  =  a  +  le,  80. 

aucun,  307. 

au-dessous  de,  272,  j. 

au-dessus  de,  272,  j. 

aupres  de,  272,  1. 

aussitdt  que  -\-  second  past  perfect, 
319;  +  future,  320. 

autre,  301,  c;  308;  autres,  idiomatic, 
308,  a;  distinguished  from  encore 
un,  308. 

autrui,  301,  b. 

aux  =  a .+  les,  80. 

auxiliaries,  avoir,  112;  113;  313;  etre, 
131;  135;  314;  315. 

avant,  distinguished  from  devant,  272, 
c;  avant  que  .  .  .  ne  +  subjunctive, 
324. 

avoir,  61;  64;  il  y  a  distinguished  from 
voili.  Lesson  15,  note;  denoting  age, 
103;  verbs  compounded  with,  113; 
314;  =  ago,  115;  +  besoin,  chaud, 
etc.,  120;  denoting  dimensions,  214. 


B 


back  vowels,  16-20. 

beaucoup,  use,  118;  comparison,  125; 
255. 

before,  272,  c. 

bel,  244. 

between,  272,  b. 

bien,  with  partitive,  118,  a;  compari- 
son, 125;  255;  bien  que  -|-  sub- 
junctive, 202,  f;  324. 


385 


386 


Index 


bon,  position,   109;  248;  comparison, 

125;  246. 
by,  of  dimensions,  214;  of  agent,  216, 

a;  272,  d. 


craindre,  with  ne  +  subjunctive, 
202,  c. 

craintre,  de  .  .  .  que  .  .  .  ne,  +  sub- 
junctive, 324,  a. 

croire,  140. 


?a,  288. 

capitals,  51. 

cardinals,  see  numerals;  265;  in  dates, 

269;  position,  270. 
ce  .  .  .  -ci    and    ce  .  .  .  -lil,    88;    285, 

note. 
ce  +  relative,  196;  300;  +  etre,  287. 
c*est  and  ce  sont,  168;  distinguished 

from  il  est,  168;  286;  c'est  a,  168,  a; 

in  summaries,  287. 
ceci,  187,  and  note. 
cedilla,  5,  a. 
cela,  187,  and  note. 
celui  +  relative,  184,  a;  +  de,  184,  b; 

+  -ci  or  -la,  185;  285,  note, 
cent,  in  dates,  265,  note  4. 
-cer,  verbs  in,  339. 
certain,  302. 
cesser  +  infinitive,  261. 
cet  for  ce,  81. 
chacun,  180;  304. 
chaque,  301. 
circumflex,  see  accent, 
collectives,  267. 

comparison,   see   adjectives   and    ad- 
verbs; followed  by  ne,  262,  b. 
compound  tenses,  see  auxiliaries;  for 

reflexive   verbs,    315;    sequence   in 

subjunctive,  223,  note. 
conditional,  see  past  futixre. 
conduire,  182. 
conjugations,  regular,  82,  83;   85-87; 

331-338;     orthographical     changes, 

339-343;  irregular,  344-398. 
conjunctions,  273-275;  use,  273;  274; 

que  used  to  avoid  repetition,  of,  274; 

distinctions,  275. 
conjunctive  pronouns,  usfe,  138;  posi- 
tion,  139;   146;  object  forms,   147; 

148-150;    table    showing    position, 

150;list,  276,  a. 
connaitre,  distinguished  from  savoir, 

186. 
consonants,   38-46;   Lessons  22-27. 
contractions,  see  article  and  relative 

pronouns, 
correspondence,  221. 


dates,  93;  94;  in  letters,  221,  b;  use  of 
mil,  265,  note  4 ;  of  cent,  265,  note 
5;  of  cardinals  and  ordinals,  269. 

days,  see  week;  99. 

de,  contracted  with  le,  65 ;  no  contrac- 
tion with  pronoun  forms,  80;  con- 
tracted with  relatives,  191,  a;  in 
partitive  construction,  217;  meaning 
by,  218,  b;  with  adjective  force, 
119;  272,  f,  1 ;  distinguished  from  en, 
272,  f,  2;  meaning  in  after  superla- 
tive, 246,  a;  in  prepositional 
phrases,  271;  de  qui  and  i  qui  dis- 
tinguished, 291;  venir  de,  317;  + 
infinitive,  328;  idiomatic  with  verbs, 
329,  a. 

decider  a  or  de,  329,  a. 

definite  article,  53;  use  with  de,  65; 
contractions  with  de,  66;  omitted 
in  partitive,  70;  236;  238;  contrac- 
tions with  ky  80;  with  general  noun, 
106;  with  names  of  countries,  106, 
b;  omitted  after  en,  106,  b,  caution; 
with  proper  names,  Lesson  56, 
note;  used  with  superlative,  123; 
124 ;  used  distributively ,  1 00 ;  239 ;  in 
place  names,  241;  242;  omitted 
after  de  =  from,  241;  in  set  expres- 
sions, 249. 

dejeuner,  69,  note. 

demi,  90,  note;  245,  note. 

demonstrative  adjectives,  81;  183- 
187;  285,  a. 

demonstrative  pronouns,  forms,  183; 
285 ;  use  of  celui,  184 ;  of  celui-ci, 
185;  ce  +  6tre,  287;  fa,  288. 

depuis,  116;  depuis  que,  distinguished 
from  puisque,  275,  b. 

des  =  de  +  les,  65. 

des  que  +  second  past  perfect,  319: 
+  future,  320. 

determiner  a,  or  de,  329,  a. 

devant,  distinguished  from  avant, 
272,  c. 

devoir,  161. 


Index 


387 


dieresis,  5,  b. 

different,  301,  a. 

dimensions,  214. 

dire.  111;  +  «l  or  de,  329,  a. 

disjunctive  pronouns,  157;  158;  276; 

use,    159-163;    165;    167;    with    a, 

160;  as  composite  subject  or  object 

of  verb,  162;  after  ce  +  etre,  167; 

.  forms,  276,  b. 

divers,  301,  a. 

dont,  189;  194;  ce  dont,  300. 

du  =  de  -f  le,  65. 


e  or  e,  as  stem  vowel,  342. 

either,  neither,  257,  b. 

-eler,  verbs  in,  342;  343. 

elision,  49. 

-eter,  verbs  in,  342;  343. 

s*empresser  a,  or  de,  329,  a. 

en,  preposition,  use,  105;  with  names 
of  countries,  106,  b;  followed  by 
gerund,  207,  b;  distinguished  from  a 
and  dans,  272,  g;  denoting  material, 
272,  f,  2. 

en,  pronoun,  84;  following  y,  145. 

encore  un,  308. 

entendre  +  infinitive,  281,  b. 

entre,  272,  b;  298. 

envelope,  221,  a. 

envers,  272,  i. 

est-ce  que,  use,  56. 

et,  meaning  both,  273. 

etre,  71 ;  75;  forming  compound  tenses, 
131;  314;  with  reflexives,  135;  etre 
a  denoting  possession,  176;  forming 
passive,  215;  avoir  or  etre  in  com- 
pound tenses,  314,  a. 


faire,  98 ;  of  weather,  96 ;  passive  force 
of  dependent  infinitive,  206,  a; 
+  infinitive,  construction  of  ob- 
ject, 281,  b. 

falloir  -|-  infinitive,  204;  +  subjunc- 
tive, 202,  d. 

feminine,  see  gender. 

fol,  244. 

for,  272,  e. 

fractions,  210;  266,  a. 

from,  241. 


front  vowels,  11-15;  Lessons  1,  2. 

future,  98;  replaced  by  present  after 
si,  172;  after  quand,  etc.,  320;  de- 
noting probability,  321. 

future  anterior,  see  future  perfect. 

future  perfect,  denoting  probability, 
321. 


gender,  of  nouns,  52;  226-231;  of 
adjectives,  67,  a,  b;  by  endings,  228; 
double,  229;  formation  of  feminine, 
230;  of  compounds,  231;  ortho- 
graphical changes  of  adjectives,  68; 
243;  244. 

general  noun,  106;  distinguished  from 
partitive,  107. 

-ger,  verbs  in,  340. 

gerund,  with  en,  207,  b. 

grave  accent,  see  accent. 

guere,  259. 


haut(eur),  see  dimensions, 
hyphen,  use  of,  5,  d. 


il,  use  of ,  76 ;  il  y  a  distinguished  from 
voilS,  Lesson,  15,  note;  for  time  of 
day,  90;  U  faut,  202,  d;  204;  with 
impersonal  verbs,  225;  il  semble, 
225,  a,  and  note. 

il  est,  168;  286;  instead  of  c»est,  with 
adjective  +  de,  286,  a;  with  que, 
286,  b. 

imperative,  152-154;  before  en  or  y, 
155;  retention  of  s  in  second 
singular  imperative,  344,  4. 

imperfect,  see  past  descriptive. 

impersonal  verbs,  for  weather,  96; 
with  de,  205,  a;  with  subjunctive, 
225;  with  de  +  infinitive,  286,  a; 
with  que,  286,  b. 

in,  after  superlative,  246,  a;  other 
cases,  272,  g. 

indefinite  adjectives,  301,  a;  use,  302- 
311. 

indefinite  article,  see  article ;  59 ;  omis- 
sion. Lesson  51,  note;  212;  omitted 
in  set  expressions,  240;  used  with 
certain,  302. 


388 


Index 


indefinite    pronoun,    301-311;    forms, 

301,  b;  use,  302-311. 
indefinite  relative,  312;  followed  by 

subjunctive,  312,  b,  note. 
indicative    mood,    see    the    different 

tenses;  319-321. 
indirect  object,  pronoun  forms,   147; 

position,  147-150;  with  faire,  etc., 

281,  b. 
infinitive    mood,    204-208;    327-329; 

without  preposition,  204;  327;  with 

de,   205;   328;    with   a,   206;   329; 

after  prepositions  except  en,  207; 

after  apres,  207,  a;  as  verbal  noun, 

208. 
intensive  pronouns,  163 ;  distinguished 

from  reflexive,  164. 
interrogation,    with    est-ce    que,    56; 

noun-verb-pronoun  order,  77. 
interrogative  adjectives,  89;  289. 
interrogative  pronouns,  197-199;  use, 

198;  289-293;  forms,  289;  phrases, 

294. 
intransitive  verbs,  with  §tre,  314;  con- 
jugation, 334;  335. 
irregular  verbs,  see  verbs  in  -cer,  -ger, 

-yer,    etc.;    344-398;    list,    399;    in 

-er,  344;  345;  in  -ir,  346-360;  in  -re, 

361-386;  in  -oir,  387-398. 


jamais,  position,  177;  with  ne,  178. 

jurer  de,  329,  a. 

jusqu'a  ce  que,  with  subjunctive,  324. 


laisser,  with  infinitive,  281,  b;  +  ^  or 
de,  329,  a. 

-la,  285,  b,  note. 

large  (ur),  see  dimensions. 

le,  la,  les,  see  definite  article,  and  per- 
sonal pronouns;  predicative,  279, 
a;  =  so,  279,  b. 

lequel,  relative  pronoun,  191;  192; 
interrogative,  197-199  with  entre, 
298. 

letter  forms,  221. 

liaison,  48. 

lip-rounding,  21-25. 

lire,  156. 


long(ueur),  see  dimensions. 

lorsque,    distinguished    from    quand, 

275,  a. 
run  .  . .  I'autre,  use,  308,  b. 

M 

maint,  301,  a. 

mal,  comparison,  255. 

manquer  a,  or  de,  329,  a. 

masculine,  see  gender. 

mauvais,  comparison,  246. 

measures,  French,  214. 

meilleur,  see  bon. 

meme,  309. 

mieux,  see  bien. 

mil(le),  in  dates,  265,  note  4. 

mine,  173;  181. 

moi,  for  me,  155. 

mon,  for  ma,  74;  in  formal  address, 

284. 
months,  93. 
multiplication.  Lessons  22;  38. 


nasal,  stressed,  7,  c;  nasal  vowels,  26- 
31;  59-63;  Lessons  10-15. 

ne(n*),  with  pas,  point,  etc.,  178;  259; 
ne  .  .  .  que,  178,  a;  omission,  179, 
a;  260;  pleonastic,  202;  262;  ne  .  .  . 
ni  .  .  .  ni,  with  nouns,  etc.,  260; 
ne  .  .  .  ni  ne,  with  verbs,  260,  a. 

near,  272,  k. 

neither  .  .  .  nor,  260. 

negation,  see  ne,  non  pas,  pas,  etc.; 
177-179;  257-262;  article  omitted 
after,  238;  with  substantives,  260; 
with  two  verbs,  260,  a. 

negative  adverb,  position,  256,  c. 

non:  que  non,  264. 

noun,  as  adjective.  Lesson,  31,  note; 
general  noun,  106;  distinguished 
from  partitive,  107;  apposition,  212; 
gender,  226-231;  plural,  232-235; 
collective,  267. 

number,  general  rule,  57;  regular 
plural  of  adjectives,  69;  irregular 
plural,  232;  number  of  nouns  and 
adjectives,  232-235;  irregular  plural 
of  compound  nouns,  234;  plural  of 
proper  names,  235. 


Index 


389 


numerals,  60;  62-63;  72;  78;  92;  211- 
213;  264-270;  cardinal,  60;  78;  92; 
265;  ordinal,  211;  266;  time  of  day, 
90;  dates,  93-94;  265;  269;  ages,  103; 
fractions,  210;  266,  a;  dimensions, 
214;  collective,  267;  adverbs,  268. 


on  (Pon),  108;  as  substitute  for  pas- 
sive, 217,  a. 

on,  272,  h  and  k. 

ordinals,  see  numerals. 

orthographic  signs,  5. 

orthographic  rules,  see  verbs  in  -cer, 
-ger,  etc.;  104;  339-342. 

oser  +  infinitive,  261. 

ou,  188. 

oui  and  si,  distinguished,  263;  que  oui, 
264. 

own,  283. 

over,  272,  j. 

ouir  +  infinitive,  281,  b,  1. 


par  =  by,  218,  a;  denoting  price,  239, 

a;  =  through,  272,  k. 
par-dessus,  272,  j. 
parmi,  272,  b;  298. 
participles,  85;  86;  112;  as  gerund,  207, 

b;  as  adjectives,  position,   249,  3; 

position  with  negatives,  256,   a,  b; 

260;  in    tense    formation,    330,    2 

and  3. 
partitive    construction,    16;    70;    117; 

partitive   noun   distinguished   from 

general    noun,    107;    exceptions   to 

rule,  236;  238;  distinguished  from 

quelque,  303. 
pas,  position  with  ne,  177;  non  pas, 

257,  a;  omitted,  261. 
passive    voice,    215-217;    formation, 

215;  use,  216;  substitutes,  217. 
past    absolute,    218;    219;    use,    219; 

distinguished  from  past  descriptive, 

219,  a. 
past  anterior,  see  second  past  perfect, 
past  definite,  see  past  absolute, 
past  descriptive,  127-129. 
past  future,  170;  use,  171;  following 

si,  172;  denoting  probability,  321. 
past  indefinite,  see  perfect. 


past  participle,   112;  agreement,   142. 
past  perfect,  past  perfect  subjunctive 

substituted,  326. 
past  subjunctive,  222;  sequence,  223, 
and  note;  used  for  past  perfect,  326. 
peine,  i  .  .  .  que,  +  second  past  per- 
fect, 319. 
pendant     que,     distinguished     from 

tandis  que,  275,  c. 
perfect,   see   compound   tenses;    113 
use,  114;  reflexive,  135;  subjunctive 
sequence,  139;  with  etre,  314;  315, 
personal  pronouns,  276-281;  reflexive, 
132-136;   280;   315;   316;   conjunc- 
tive,  54 ;  138 ;  139 ;  276,  a ;  position,  55 
139-146;  disjunctive,  157;  158;  159- 
163;  276;  use,  159-163;  after  verbs 
of  motion,  160;  278;  intensive,  163 
164;  order  with  faire,  laisser,  etc., 
+  infinitive,  281. 
personne,  position,  179. 
petit,  comparison,  246. 
peu,  118;  comparison,  125;  255. 
peur,  de  .  .  .  que  .  .  .  ne,  +  subjunc- 
tive, 324,  a. 
la   plupart,    118,   a;   agreement,    118, 

a,  1. 
plural,  see  number, 
plus,  used  in  comparisons,    123-125; 

non  plus,  257,  b. 
pluperfect,  see  past  perfect, 
plusieurs,  118,  b. 

point,  177;  259;  in  distinctions,  257,  a. 
possession,  79. 

possessive  adjective,  73;  74;  282,  a; 
article  substituted,  136;  137;  distin- 
guished from  possessive  pronoun, 
175. 
possessive  pronouns,  173;  282-284; 
agreement,  174;  distinguished  from 
possessive  adjectives,  175;  distin- 
guished from  etre  i  +  pronoun,  176; 
use,  282-284. 
pour,  272,  e. 

pour  que  +  subjunctive,  202,  f;  324. 
pouvoir,  141;  pas  omitted,  261. 
premier,  in  dates  and  titles,  269;  + 

subjunctive,  322. 
prendre,   166. 

prendre  garde  ^,  or  de,  329,  a. 
prepositions,  271;  272;  phrases,  271; 

idiomatic  expressions,  272. 
pres  de,  272,  1;  a  peu  pres,  272,  a. 


390 


Index 


present,  of  regular  verbs,  83;  86; 
330,  2,  a,  and  4,  a;  idiomatic  use 
of,   116. 

price,  239. 

principal  parts,  220. 

pronominal  adverbs,  145;  277;  posi- 
tion, 145. 

pronouns,  see  also  personal,  posses- 
sive, relative,  etc.;  276-312. 

pronoun  objects,  see  conjunctive  pro- 
nouns. 

proper  nouns,  use  of  article  with,  Les- 
son 56,  note;  plural,  235. 

propre,  283. 

puisque,  distinguished  from  depuis 
que,  275,  b. 

punctuation,  50. 


quand,  distinguished  from  lorsque, 
275,  a;  with  second  past  perfect, 
319;  with,  future,  320;  with  past 
future,  321,  a. 

quand  meme,  321,  a. 

quantity,  see  adverbs;  vowel  quantity. 

que!  293. 

que?  197;  =  why?  or  how  much?  293. 

que,  relative  pronoun,  190. 

que,  conjunction,  position,  178,  a; 
preceding  non,  oui,  or  si,  264;  used 
to  avoid  repetition  of  conjunction, 
274;  with  subjunctive,  325. 

quel?  89;  290;  used  with  etre,  198. 

quelque,  303. 

quelque  chose,  gender,  306. 

quelqu'un,  180;  305. 

qu*est-ce  que,  198,  b,  c;  qu'est-ce  que 
c'est,  56. 

questions,  56;  77. 

qui,  relative  pronoun,  190;  193;  re- 
placing celui  qui,  etc.,  297. 

qui?  197;  use,  198,  a,  b;  a  qui,  199,  a; 
de  qui,  199,  b. 

quoi?  197;  198,  c. 

quoi,  relative  pronoun,  195;  299. 

quoique  with  subjunctive,  202,  f ;  324. 


r,  38;  Lessons  22-23. 

reflexive  verbs,  132-135;  agreement, 
134;  219;  315;  316;  substitute  for 
passive,  217,  b;  compound  tenses, 
315;  reciprocal  use,  316. 


repetition  of  article,  58. 

relative  pronouns,  188-196;  295- 
300;  contractions,  191,  a;  agreement, 
296;  use,  297-300;  indefinite  rela- 
tive, 311;  312. 

resoudre  k,  or  de,  329,  a. 

restrictive  noun,  212. 

rien,  position,  177;  179;  ne  omitted, 
179,  a. 

rounded  front  vowels,  21-25;  Lessons 
7-9. 

S 

salutation  in  letters,  221,  c. 

sans  que  +  subjunctive,  324. 

savoir,  169;  distinguished  from  con- 
naitre,  186;  pas  omitted,  261;  = 
can,  317,  1. 

seasons,  95. 

second  past  perfect,  319. 

sembler:  il  semble,  225,  a,  and  note. 

semi-consonants,  32-37;  Lessons  17- 
20. 

s*en  aller,  155.  .^ 

sequence  of  tenses,  223,  and  note. 

seul  -}-  subjunctive,  322. 

non  seulement .  .  .  mais  encore,  257, 
c. 

si,  replacing  aussi,  123,  b;  +  future 
and  past  future,  172;  replacing  oui, 
263;  que  si,  264;  replaced  by  que, 
274;  with  past  subjunctive,  326. 

soi,  280. 

soit  que  .  .  .  soit  que,  with  subjunc- 
tive, 324. 

son,  for  sa,  74. 

spelling,  1;  104. 

stress,  6. 

subjunctive,  see  past  subjunctive;  200- 
203;  after  que,  202;  after  expres- 
sions of  doubt  or  emotion,  203 ;  after 
impersonal  verbs,  225;  after  who- 
ever, whatever,  etc.,  224;  312,  b; 
after  superlative,  322,  1;  after 
dernier,  premier,  etc.,  322,  2;  in 
clauses  of  characteristic,  323;  in 
adverbial  clauses  of  time,  purpose, 
condition,  etc.,  324;  in  principal 
clauses,  325. 

superlative,  see  comparison. 

sur,  see  dimiensions;  use,  272,  h  and  k. 

syllabication,  3;  47. 

symbols,  table  of,  2. 


Index 


391 


tandis  que,  distinguished  from  pendant 
que,  275,  c. 

tant,  118. 

tenir,  143. 

tense,  see  various  tenses;  formation 
from  principal  parts,  330;  forma- 
tion of  compound,  330,  3,  a. 

than  =  que,  213,  91,  and  note;  =  de, 
213,  b. 

time,  90;  idioms,  94. 

toi,  for  te,  155. 

ton,  for  ta,  74. 

tout,  310. 

toward,  272. 

transitive  verbs,  see  verbs. 

trop,  118. 

tu,  p.  22,  note  2. 

U 
un,  see  cardinal  numerals  and  indefi- 
nite article;  with  certain,  302. 
under,  272,  j. 

unique  with  subjunctive,  322. 
untU,  see  jusqu*a  ce  que. 


valoir  mieux,  225,  1. 
venir,  p.  119;  +  de,  317;   +  a  or  de, 
329,  a. 


verbs,  see  auxiliary,  impersonal,  re- 
flexive verbs;  intransitives,  314; 
idioms,  317;  agreement,  318;  tenses 
and  moods,  319-330;  second  past 
perfect,  319. 

verbs,  table  of  irregular,  399. 

vers,  272,  i. 

voili,  distinguished  from  il  y  a.  Les- 
son 15,  note. 

voir,  126,  +  infin.,  282,  b,  1. 

vouloir,  151. 

vous,  use,  61,  note. 

vowel  quantity,  7. 

vowels,  pronunciation,  8-31;  position 
of  vocal  organs,  8-9;  classification, 
10. 

W 

week,  days  of  the:  idioms,  101. 
weights  and  measures,  French,  210. 
what,  196. 
whose?  199. 


y,  position  of,  145;  y  +  avoir,  Lesson 

15,  note, 
-yer,  verbs  in,  341. 
yes,  263. 


"TOLERANCES"  IN  SYNTAX 

By  a  decree  adopted  by  the  French  Minister  of  PubHc  Instruction, 
February  26,  1901,  certain  deviations  from  the  usual  rules  for  French 
syntax  are  tolerated.  The  following  are  some  of  these  ^'tolerances," 
with  references  to  the  sections  of  this  grammar  which  are  affected  thereby. 

Proper  names  preceded  by  the  plural  article  may  in  all  cases  take  the 
sign  of  the  plural.     §  235. 

The  hyphen  may  be  omitted  in  compound  nouns.     §§231,  234. 

The  hyphen  may  be  omitted  between  the  verb  and  its  subject  pro- 
noun.    §§  56,  77. 

In  compound  forms  of  numerals,  the  hyphen  may  be  omitted  between 
the  word  designating  the  units  and  the  word  designating  the  tens. 
§§  72,  78,  92,  265. 

In  the  partitive  construction,  the  article  may  always  be  used  before 
an  adjective.     §§  117,  236. 

An  adjective,  following  nouns  of  different  genders,  may  agree  with 
the  nearest  noun,  or  take  the  masculine  plural  form.     §  245. 

Demi  may  agree  with  the  noun  which  it  precedes.  P.  71,  note;  §  245, 
note. 

Vingt  and  cent,  when  multiplied  by  another  number,  may  always  take 
the  plural  form.     P.  74,  note  3;    §  265,  and  note  5. 

Mille  may  be  used  for  mil  in  dates.     P.  77,  note;    §  265,  note  4. 

Tout  as  an  adverb  may  take  the  adjective  form  before  feminine 
adjectives  beginning  with  a  vowel  or  h  mute.     §  310,  1. 

C'est  may  always  be  used  for  ce  sent.     §  167. 

In  tenses  compounded  with  avoir,  the  past  participle  may  remain 
invariable  when  followed  by  an  infinitive  or  by  another  participle.     §  142. 

If  the  preceding  direct  object  of  the  verb  compounded  with  avoir  is 
a  collective  expression,  the  past  participle  may  agree  either  with  the 
collective  or  with  its  complement.     §  142. 

The  particle  ne  may  always  be  omitted: 

(1)  after  expressions  of  hindering,  fearing,  doubting,  or  denying. 
§§  202,  c,  262,  a,  324,  a; 

(2)  after  comparisons,  or  words  expressing  a  comparison.     §  262,  b; 

(3)  after  d  moins  que  and  avant  que.     §  324. 


392 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 


AN  INITIAL  FINE  OF  25  CENTS 

WILL  BE  ASSESSED  FOR  FAILURE  TO  RETURN 
THIS  BOOK  ON  THE  DATE  DUE.  THE  PENALTY 
WILL  INCREASE  TO  SO  CENTS  ON  THE  FOURTH 
DAY  AND  TO  $1.00  ON  THE  SEVENTH  DAY 
OVERDUE. 


This  book  may  be  kept 

7  Days 

only 

It  Cannot  Be  Renewed 
Because  of  special  demand 


i  il    16  1947 

^'  J  L-     X  V     1  J*t/ 

JUL  2  3  1947 

LD  21-100W-12, '43  (8796s) 

rB  36365 


889469 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  UBRARY 


